INVERTER

INVERTER
FR-E800

FR-E800
Instruction Manual (Function)
Compact, high functionality inverters

FR-E820-0008(0.1K) to 0330(7.5K)
FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to 0170(7.5K)
FR-E860-0017(0.75K) to 0120(7.5K)
FR-E820-0008(0.1K) to 0330(7.5K)-E
FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to 0170(7.5K)-E
FR-E860-0017(0.75K) to 0120(7.5K)-E

Instruction Manual (Function)

HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN

IB(NA)-0600868ENG-A(1912)MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.

A
Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

1.1 Inverter model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

1.2 Operation steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

1.3 About the related manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

CONTENTS
Chapter 2 Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

2.1 Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

2.1.1 Components of the operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

2.1.2 Basic operation of the operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.1.3 Digital characters and their corresponding printed equivalents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.1.4 Changing the parameter setting value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

2.2 Monitoring the inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

2.2.1 Monitoring of output current and output voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

2.2.2 First priority monitor screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.2.3 Displaying the set frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

2.3 Easy setting of the inverter operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

2.4 Frequently-used parameters (simple mode parameters). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

2.4.1 Simple mode parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

2.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

2.5.1 Setting the frequency on the operation panel (example: operating at 30 Hz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.5.2 Setting the frequency with switches (multi-speed setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.5.3 Setting the frequency using an analog signal (voltage input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.5.4 Setting the frequency using an analog signal (current input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

2.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

2.6.1 Setting the frequency on the operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

2.6.2 Setting the frequency and giving a start command with switches (multi-speed setting) (Pr.4 to Pr.6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.6.3 Setting the frequency using an analog signal (voltage input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.6.4 Changing the frequency (initial value: 60 Hz) at the maximum voltage input (initial value: 5 V). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.6.5 Setting the frequency using an analog signal (current input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.6.6 Changing the frequency (initial value: 60 Hz) at the maximum current input (initial value: 20 mA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

2.7 Basic operation procedure (JOG operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

2.7.1 Giving a start command by using external signals for JOG operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.7.2 Giving a start command from the operation panel for JOG operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

2.8 I/O terminal function assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Chapter 3 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

1
 3.2 Use of a function group number for the identification of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

3.3 Parameter list (by function group number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

3.4 Parameter initial value groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Chapter 4 Control Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

4.1 Changing the control method and mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

4.2 Selecting the Advanced magnetic flux vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

4.3 Selecting the PM sensorless vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Chapter 5 Speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

5.1 Setting procedure of Real sensorless vector control (speed control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

5.2 Setting procedure of PM sensorless vector control (speed control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

5.3 Setting the torque limit level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

5.4 Performing high-accuracy, fast-response control (gain adjustment for Real sensorless vector
control and PM sensorless vector control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

5.5 Avoiding motor overrunning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

5.6 Troubleshooting in the speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Chapter 6 Torque control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

6.1 Torque control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

6.2 Setting procedure of Real sensorless vector control (torque control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

6.3 Torque command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

6.4 Speed limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

6.5 Torque control gain adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

6.6 Troubleshooting in torque control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

2
Chapter 7 (E) Environment Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

7.1 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

7.2 Reset selection / disconnected PU detection / PU stop selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

7.3 Automatic frequency setting / key lock operation selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

CONTENTS
7.4 Frequency change increment amount setting (standard model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

7.5 RUN key rotation direction selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

7.6 Multiple rating setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

7.7 Parameter write selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

7.8 Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

7.9 Free parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

7.10 Setting multiple parameters by batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

7.11 Extended parameter display and user group function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

7.12 PWM carrier frequency and Soft-PWM control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

7.13 Inverter parts life display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

7.14 Maintenance timer alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

7.15 Current average value monitor signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Chapter 8 (F) Settings for Acceleration/Deceleration . . . . . . . 158

8.1 Setting the acceleration and deceleration time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

8.2 Acceleration/deceleration pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

8.3 Remote setting function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

8.4 Starting frequency and start-time hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

8.5 Minimum motor speed frequency at the motor start up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

3
 8.6 Shortest acceleration/deceleration (automatic acceleration/deceleration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Chapter 9 (D) Operation Command and Frequency Command . .

174

9.1 Operation mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

9.2 Startup of the inverter in Network operation mode at power-ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

9.3 Start command source and frequency command source during communication operation. . 185

9.4 Reverse rotation prevention selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

9.5 JOG operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

9.6 Operation by multi-speed setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

Chapter 10 (H) Protective Function Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

10.1 Motor overheat protection (electronic thermal O/L relay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

10.2 Cooling fan operation selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

10.3 Earth (ground) fault detection at start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

10.4 Inverter output fault detection enable/disable selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

10.5 Initiating a protective function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

10.6 I/O phase loss protection selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

10.7 Retry function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

10.8 Limiting the output frequency (maximum/minimum frequency) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

10.9 Avoiding machine resonance points (frequency jump). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

10.10 Stall prevention operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

10.11 Load characteristics fault detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

10.12 Motor overspeeding detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

4
Chapter 11 (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring . . . . . . . 226

11.1 Speed indication and its setting change to rotations per minute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

11.2 Monitor item selection on operation panel or via communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

11.3 Monitor display selection for terminals FM and AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

CONTENTS
11.4 Adjustment of terminal FM and terminal AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

11.5 Energy saving monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

11.6 Output terminal function selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

11.7 Output frequency detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

11.8 Output current detection function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

11.9 Output torque detection function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

11.10 Remote output function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Chapter 12 (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters . . . . 266

12.1 Analog input selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

12.2 Analog input terminal (terminal 4) function assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

12.3 Response level of analog input and noise elimination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

12.4 Frequency setting voltage (current) bias and gain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

12.5 Torque (magnetic flux) setting current (voltage) bias and gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

12.6 Input terminal function selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

12.7 Inverter output shutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

12.8 Selecting the condition to activate the Second function selection (RT) signal. . . . . . . . . . . . 289

12.9 Start signal operation selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

5
 Chapter 13 (C) Motor Constant Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

13.1 Applied motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

13.2 Offline auto tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

13.3 Offline auto tuning for a PM motor (motor constant tuning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

13.4 Online auto tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Chapter 14 (A) Application Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

14.1 Brake sequence function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

14.2 Stop-on-contact control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

14.3 Traverse function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

14.4 PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

14.5 Calibration of PID display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

14.6 Dancer control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

14.7 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start with an induction motor . . . 351

14.8 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start with a PM motor. . . . . . . . . 356

14.9 Offline auto tuning for a frequency search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

14.10 Power failure time deceleration-to-stop function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

14.11 PLC function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

14.12 Trace function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Chapter 15 (G) Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

15.1 Manual torque boost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

15.2 Base frequency voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

15.3 Load pattern selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

6
15.4 Energy saving control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

15.5 SF-PR slip amount adjustment mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

15.6 DC injection brake and zero speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

15.7 Stop selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

CONTENTS
15.8 Regenerative brake selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

15.9 Regeneration avoidance function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

15.10 Slip compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

15.11 Droop control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

15.12 Speed smoothing control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

Chapter 16 Checking and Clearing of Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

16.1 Parameter clear / All parameter clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

16.2 List of parameters changed from the initial values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

16.3 Fault history clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Chapter 17 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

17.1 For customers replacing the conventional model with this inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

17.1.1 Replacement of the FR-E700 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

17.1.2 Replacement of the FR-E500 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

17.2 Specification comparison between PM sensorless vector control and induction motor control. .
405

17.3 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods. . . . . . . . . . . 406

7
8
 CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER 1 Introduction
4

1.1 Inverter model.........................................................................................................................................................11

1.2 Operation steps ......................................................................................................................................................13
6
1.3 About the related manuals......................................................................................................................................15

10

9
 1 Introduction
The contents described in this chapter must be read before using this product.
Always read the instructions before use.

 Abbreviations
Item Description
PU Operation panel
Inverter Mitsubishi Electric inverter FR-E800 series
Pr. Parameter number (Number assigned to function)
PU operation Operation using the PU (operation panel)
External operation Operation using the control circuit signals
Combined operation Combined operation using the PU (operation panel) and External operation
Mitsubishi Electric standard
SF-JR
efficiency motor
Mitsubishi Electric constant-
SF-HRCA
torque motor
Mitsubishi Electric premium
SF-PR
efficiency motor

 Trademarks
• Ethernet is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Corporation in Japan.
• MODBUS is a registered trademark of SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC USA, INC.
• BACnet is a registered trademark of the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE).
• EtherNet/IP is a registered trademark of ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, INC).
• PROFINET is a trademark of PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V. (PNO).
• Other company and product names herein are the trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective owners.

 Notes on descriptions in this Instruction Manual

• Connection diagrams in this Instruction Manual appear with the control logic of the input terminals as sink logic, unless
otherwise specified. (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Connection) for the switching of the control logic of the
inverter.)

10 1. Introduction
1.1 Inverter model 1

Check the rating plate on the side of the product. Some characters in the model name indicate the specification as follows.
2

FR-E8 0- 3
A B C D E
4
Rating plate
Inverter model MODEL :FR-E820-0008-1 5
Input rating INPUT :XXXXX

Output rating OUTPUT:XXXXX

6
SERIAL SERIAL:XXXXXXXXXXX

Country of origin MADE IN XXXXX

7

8
• A: The voltage class is shown.
Symbol Voltage class 9
2 200 V class
4 400 V class
6 575 V class 10
• B: The inverter rated capacity or the inverter rated current is shown.
Symbol Voltage class
0.1K to 7.5K Inverter ND rated capacity (kW)
0008 to 0330 Inverter ND rated current (A)

• C: The communication type and the functional safety specification are shown.
Symbol Communication / functional safety
None Standard model (RS-485 + SIL2/PLd)
E Ethernet model (Ethernet + SIL2/PLd)

• D: The output specification for monitoring and the rated frequency are shown for the standard model, and the
communication protocol group is shown for the Ethernet model.
Symbol Monitor output / rated frequency / communication protocol
-1 Pulse (terminal FM), 60 Hz
-4 Voltage (terminal AM), 50 Hz
-5 Voltage (terminal AM), 60 Hz
PA Protocol group A (CC-Link IE TSN, CC-Link IE Field Network Basic, MODBUS/TCP, EtherNet/IP, and BACnet/IP)
PB Protocol group B (CC-Link IE TSN, CC-Link IE Field Network Basic, MODBUS/TCP, PROFINET)
• E: Availability of circuit board coating / plated conductors is shown.
Symbol Circuit board coating*1 Plated conductor
None Without coating Without plated conductors
-60 With coating Without plated conductors

*1 Conforming to IEC 60721-3-3 3C2/3S2

1. Introduction
1.1 Inverter model
11
  How to read the SERIAL number
The SERIAL consists of two symbols, three characters indicating the production year
Rating plate example
and month, and six characters indicating the control number.
Symbol Year Month Control number The last digit of the production year is indicated as the Year, and the Month is
SERIAL indicated by 1 to 9, X (October), Y (November), or Z (December).

12 1. Introduction
1.1 Inverter model
1.2 Operation steps 1

: Initial setting Step of operation 2

Frequency command
(a)
Frequency

Installation/mounting
Inverter
output 3
frequency Wiring of the power
supply and motor
(b)
(Hz) Time
Start command ON (S)
Control mode selection (c) 4
How Start command via the PU/Ethernet
How
o
connector of the inverter and plug-in
to
to give
e aa start
give
command?
command?
m
start
option (Communication)
Initial setting for the Ethernet model
(d) 5
Connect a switch, relay, etc.

6
Start command with to the control circuit
on the operation panel (PU) terminal block of the inverter
to give a start command. (External)
Initial setting for the standard model

give
How
How w to
to
give aa frequency
frequency
re How
How w to
to
7
command?
command?
m give
give aa frequency
frequency
re
command?
command?
m

Set from the operation Change frequency Perform frequency setting Perform frequency setting
8
panel with ON/OFF switches by a voltage output device by a current output device
connected to terminals (Connection across (Connection across
(multi-speed setting) terminals 2 and 5) terminals 4 and 5)
(PU) (External) (External) (External) 9
(e) (f) (g) (h)

Set from the operation Change of frequency Perform frequency setting Perform frequency setting 10
panel with ON/OFF switches by a voltage output device by a current output device
connected to terminals (Connection across (Connection across
(multi-speed setting) terminals 2 and 5) terminals 4 and 5)
(PU) (External) (External) (External)
(i) (j) (k) (l)

1. Introduction
1.2 Operation steps
13
 Symbol Overview Refer to page
Instruction Manual
(a) Install the inverter.
(Connection)
Instruction Manual
(b) Perform wiring for the power supply and the motor.
(Connection)
Select the control method (V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control,
(c) 84
and PM sensorless vector control).
Instruction Manual
(d) Give the start command via communication.
(Communication)
(e) Give both the start and frequency commands from the PU. (PU operation mode) 33
Give the start command from the PU and the frequency command via terminals RH, RM, and RL. (External/
(f) 34
PU combined operation mode 2)
Give the start command from the PU and the frequency command by voltage input via terminal 2. (External/
(g) 35
PU combined operation mode 2)
Give the start command from the PU and the frequency command by current input via terminal 4. (External/
(h) 36
PU combined operation mode 2)
Give the start command via terminal STF or STR and the frequency command from the PU. (External/PU
(i) 38
combined operation mode 1)
Give the start command via terminal STF or STR and the frequency command via terminals RH, RM, and RL.
(j) 39
(External operation mode)
Give the start command via terminal STF or STR and the frequency command by voltage input via terminal 2.
(k) 40
(External operation mode)
Give the start command via terminal STF or STR and the frequency command by current input via terminal 4.
(l) 42
(External operation mode)

14 1. Introduction
1.2 Operation steps
1.3 About the related manuals 1

The manuals related to the FR-E800 inverter are as follows.

Manual name Manual number
2
FR-E800 Inverter Safety Guideline IB-0600857ENG
FR-E860 Inverter Safety Guideline IB-0600910ENG
FR-E800-E Inverter Safety Guideline IB-0600860ENG 3
FR-E860-E Inverter Safety Guideline IB-0600911ENG
FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Connection) IB-0600865ENG
FR-E860 Instruction Manual (Connection)
FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Communication)
IB-0600906ENG
IB-0600871ENG
4
FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Maintenance) IB-0600874ENG
FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Functional safety) BCN-A23488-000
FR Configurator 2 Instruction Manual IB-0600516ENG 5
PLC Function Programming Manual IB-0600492ENG

10

1. Introduction
1.3 About the related manuals
15
 MEMO

16 1. Introduction
1.3 About the related manuals
 CHAPTER 2
CHAPTER 2 Basic Operation
4

2.1 Operation panel ......................................................................................................................................................19

2.2 Monitoring the inverter ............................................................................................................................................27
6
2.3 Easy setting of the inverter operation mode ...........................................................................................................28
2.4 Frequently-used parameters (simple mode parameters)........................................................................................29
2.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation) .............................................................................................................33
7
2.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation) .....................................................................................................38
2.7 Basic operation procedure (JOG operation) ...........................................................................................................45
2.8 I/O terminal function assignment ............................................................................................................................47
8

10

17
 2 Basic Operation
This chapter explains the basic operation of this product.
Always read the instructions before use.

18 2. Basic Operation
2.1 Operation panel
1

2.1.1 Components of the operation panel 2

 Standard model
(a) (b) (c) (d)

(e)
3
(f)
(g)
4
(i)
(j) (h)
(k)
5

(n) (l) (m)

6

10

2. Basic Operation
2.1 Operation panel
19
 No. Appearance Name Description
Shows a numeric value (readout) of a monitor item such as the frequency or a parameter
Monitor (4-digit
(a) number.
LED)
(The monitor item can be changed according to the settings of Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776.)
Hz: ON when the actual frequency is monitored. (Blinks when the set frequency is monitored.)
(b) Unit indication A: ON when the current is monitored.
(Both "Hz" and "A" are OFF to indicate a value other than the frequency or the current.
PU: ON when the inverter is in the PU operation mode.
Inverter operation EXT: ON when the inverter is in the External operation mode. (ON when the inverter in the initial
(c) mode LED setting is powered ON.)
indicator NET: ON when the inverter is in the Network operation mode.
PU and EXT: ON when the inverter is in the External/PU combined operation mode 1 or 2.
Operation panel MON: ON or blinks only when the first, second, or third monitor is displayed.
(d) mode LED PRM: ON when the operation panel is in the parameter setting mode. The indicator blinks when
indicator the inverter is in the easy setting mode.
ON or blinks during inverter running.
Operating status ON: During forward rotation operation.
(e) Blinks slowly (1.4-second cycle): During reverse rotation operation.
indicator
Blinks quickly (0.2-second cycle): Operation is disabled although the start command is given.*1
ON when the inverter is set to control the PM motor.
Controlled motor
(f) The indicator blinks during test operation. The indicator is OFF when the inverter controls the
type LED indicator
induction motor.
PLC function LED
(g) ON when the PLC function of the inverter is valid.
indicator
The setting dial of the Mitsubishi Electric inverters. Turn the setting dial to change the setting
of frequency or parameter, etc.
Press the setting dial to perform the following operations:
(h) Setting dial
• To display a set frequency on the LED display in the monitor mode. (The monitor item shown
on the display can be changed by using Pr.992.)
• To display the present setting during calibration.
Switches between the PU operation mode, the PUJOG operation mode, and the External
operation mode.
(i) PU/EXT key The easy setting of the inverter operation mode is enabled by pressing this key simultaneously
with the MODE key.
Also cancels the PU stop warning.
Switches the operation panel to a different mode.
The easy setting of the inverter operation mode is enabled by pressing this key simultaneously
(j) MODE key with the PU/EXT key.
Every key on the operation panel becomes inoperable by holding this key for 2 seconds. The
key inoperable function is invalid when Pr.161 = "0 (initial setting)". (Refer to page 130.)
Confirms each selection. Initial setting in the monitor mode
When this key is pressed during inverter operation, Output Output Output
(k) SET key the monitor item changes. frequency current voltage
(The monitor item on each screen can be changed
according to the settings of Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776.)
Start command
(l) RUN key
The direction of motor rotation depends on the Pr.40 setting.
Stops the operation commands.
(m) STOP/RESET key
Used to reset the inverter when the protective function is activated.

(n) USB connector FR Configurator2 is available by USB connection.

*1 Situations such as when the MRS/X10 signal is input, during the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, after auto tuning is complete,
when "SE" (incorrect parameter setting) alarm occurs.

20 2. Basic Operation
2.1 Operation panel
 Ethernet model
(a) (b) (c) (d)
1

(e)
(f) 2
(g)

(i)
(j) (h)
3
(k)

4
(o) (l) (m) (n)

10

2. Basic Operation
2.1 Operation panel
21
 No. Appearance Name Description
Shows a numeric value (readout) of a monitor item such as the frequency or a parameter
Monitor (4-digit
(a) number.
LED)
(The monitor item can be changed according to the settings of Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776.)
Hz: ON when the actual frequency is monitored. (Blinks when the set frequency is monitored.)
(b) Unit indication A: ON when the current is monitored.
(Both "Hz" and "A" are OFF to indicate a value other than the frequency or the current.
PU: ON when the inverter is in the PU operation mode.
Inverter operation EXT: ON when the inverter is in the External operation mode. (ON when the inverter in the initial
(c) mode LED setting is powered ON.)
indicator NET: ON when the inverter is in the Network operation mode.
PU and EXT: ON when the inverter is in the External/PU combined operation mode 1 or 2.
Operation panel MON: ON or blinks only when the first, second, or third monitor is displayed.
(d) mode LED PRM: ON when the operation panel is in the parameter setting mode. The indicator blinks when
indicator the inverter is in the easy setting mode.
ON or blinks during inverter running.
Operating status ON: During forward rotation operation.
(e) Blinks slowly (1.4-second cycle): During reverse rotation operation.
indicator
Blinks quickly (0.2-second cycle): Operation is disabled although the start command is given.*1
ON when the inverter is set to control the PM motor.
Controlled motor
(f) The indicator blinks during test operation. The indicator is OFF when the inverter controls the
type LED indicator
induction motor.
PLC function LED
(g) ON when the PLC function of the inverter is valid.
indicator

Ethernet
Indicates the Ethernet communication status. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual
(h) communication
(Communication).
status

Switches between the PU operation mode, the PUJOG operation mode, and the External
operation mode.
(i) PU/EXT key The easy setting of the inverter operation mode is enabled by pressing this key simultaneously
with the MODE key.
Also cancels the PU stop warning.
Switches the operation panel to a different mode.
The easy setting of the inverter operation mode is enabled by pressing this key simultaneously
(j) MODE key with the PU/EXT key.
Every key on the operation panel becomes inoperable by holding this key for 2 seconds. The
key inoperable function is invalid when Pr.161 = "0 (initial setting)". (Refer to page 130.)
Confirms each selection. Initial setting in the monitor mode
When this key is pressed during inverter operation, Output Output Output
(k) SET key the monitor item changes. frequency current voltage
(The monitor item on each screen can be changed
according to the settings of Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776.)
Start command
(l) RUN key
The direction of motor rotation depends on the Pr.40 setting.
Stops the operation commands.
(m) STOP/RESET key
Used to reset the inverter when the protective function is activated.

(n) UP/DOWN key Used to change the setting of frequency or parameter.

(o) USB connector FR Configurator2 is available by USB connection.

*1 Situations such as when the MRS/X10 signal is input, during the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, after auto tuning is complete,
when "SE" (incorrect parameter setting) alarm occurs.

22 2. Basic Operation
2.1 Operation panel
2.1.2 Basic operation of the operation panel
1
 Basic operation (standard model)
Operation mode switchover/Frequency setting
2
External operation mode*1(displayed at power-ON) PU operation mode*1 PU Jog operation mode*1
3

Blinking
4
Change the setting.
Frequency setting written and complete

5
Monitor

First screen (Output frequency*2 monitoring) Second screen

(Output current*2 monitoring)
Third screen
(Output voltage*2 monitoring)
6

7
Parameter setting

PU operation mode
8
Blinking

The present setting is Change the setting.

Parameter write complete
9
displayed.

Parameter clear All parameter clear Fault history clear Initial value change list
10

Group parameter setting Automatic parameter setting PM initialization*3

(Example) (Example) (Example)

Blinking Blinking Blinking
Fault history

Fault record 1 *4 Fault record 2 *4 Fault record 10 *4

The last ten fault records can be displayed.
When the fault history is empty, only the fault number is displayed.

*1 For the details of operation modes, refer to page 174.

*2 The monitor item can be changed. (Refer to page 228.)
*3 Not displayed for the 575 V class.
*4 For the details of the fault history, refer to the Instruction Manual (Maintenance).

2. Basic Operation
2.1 Operation panel
23
  Basic operation (Ethernet model)
Operation mode switchover/Frequency setting

Network operation mode*1 (at power-ON) PU operation mode*1 PU Jog operation mode*1

Blinking

Change the setting.

Frequency setting written and complete
Monitor

First screen (Output frequency*2 monitoring) Second screen Third screen

(Output current*2 monitoring) (Output voltage*2 monitoring)
Parameter setting

PU operation mode

Blinking

The present setting is Change the setting.

Parameter write complete
displayed.

Parameter clear All parameter clear Fault history clear Initial value change list

Group parameter setting Automatic parameter setting PM initialization*3

(Example) (Example) (Example)

Blinking Blinking Blinking
Fault history

Fault record 1 *4 Fault record 2 *4 Fault record 10 *4

The last ten fault records can be displayed.
When the fault history is empty, only the fault number is displayed.

*1 For the details of operation modes, refer to page 174.

*2 The monitor item can be changed. (Refer to page 226.)
*3 Not displayed for the 575 V class.
*4 For the details of the fault history, refer to the Instruction Manual (Maintenance).

 Parameter setting mode

In the parameter setting mode, inverter functions (parameters) are set.

24 2. Basic Operation
2.1 Operation panel
The following table explains the indications in the parameter setting mode.

Operation panel indication Function name Description

Refer
to
1
page
Under this mode, the set value of the displayed parameter number is read
Parameter setting mode 25
or changed. 2
Clears and resets parameter settings to the initial values. Calibration
Parameter clear parameters and offline auto tuning parameters are not cleared. For the 398
details of the uncleared parameters, refer to page 406.
Clears and resets parameter settings to the initial values. Calibration 3
All parameter clear parameters and the offline auto tuning parameters are also cleared. For 398
the details of the uncleared parameters, refer to page 406.
Fault history clear Deletes the fault history. 400
Identifies the parameters that have been changed from their initial
4
Initial value change list 399
settings.
PM parameter Changes the parameter settings required to drive a PM motor to the
92
initialization settings for V/F control as a batch. (Not displayed for the 575 V class.) 5
Changes parameter settings as a batch. The target parameters include
Automatic parameter communication parameters for the Mitsubishi Electric human machine
141
setting interface (GOT) connection and the parameters for the rated frequency
settings of 50/60 Hz.
6
Group parameter setting Displays parameter numbers by function groups. 73

2.1.3 Digital characters and their corresponding printed 7

equivalents
Digital characters displayed on the operation panel display are as follows. 8
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C
9
D E F G H I J K L M N O P

10
Q R S T U V W X Y Z - _

2.1.4 Changing the parameter setting value

• Select the parameter number in the parameter setting mode and press the SET key to change the parameter setting value.
• After changing the parameter setting value, press the SET key to write the setting value to the inverter.
• When the parameter number is 4-digit, "Pr." and the parameter number are displayed alternately.
• When the parameter number is 5-digit, the upper 1 digit and the lower 4 digits of the parameter number are displayed
alternately.

2. Basic Operation
2.1 Operation panel
25
  Parameter setting screen

First screen (Output frequency monitoring) Parameter setting mode PU operation

mode

Blinking

The present setting is Change the setting. Parameter write complete

displayed.

Hold down

For a 4-digit
parameter
number

The present setting is

displayed.
Hold down Change the setting.
For a 5-digit
parameter
number

Parameter write complete

The next parameter displayed

NOTE
• If a parameter write condition is not satisfied, a parameter write error appears on the LCD display. (For details of the errors,
refer to the Instruction Manual (Maintenance).)

Error indication Description

Parameter write error

Write error during operation

Calibration error

Mode designation error

• When Pr.77 Parameter write selection = "0 (initial setting)," the parameter setting change is only available while the inverter
is stopped and under the PU operation mode. To enable the parameter setting change while the inverter is running or under
the operation mode other than PU operation mode, change the Pr.77 setting. (Refer to page 135.)

26 2. Basic Operation
2.1 Operation panel
2.2 Monitoring the inverter 1

2.2.1 Monitoring of output current and output voltage 2

• Press the SET key on the operation panel in the monitor mode to switch the monitor item between output frequency, output 3
current, and output voltage.

4
Operating procedure
1. Press the MODE key during inverter operation to monitor the output frequency. The [Hz] LED turns ON. 5
2. Press the SET key to monitor the output current. This operation is valid during running or stopping under any
operation mode. The [A] LED turns ON.
6
3. Press the SET key to monitor the output voltage. Unit LEDs are both OFF.

NOTE
• Other monitor item, such as output power or set frequency, is also available. Use Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor 7
selection or Pr.774 Operation panel monitor selection 1 to Pr.776 Operation panel monitor selection 3 to change the
setting. (Refer to page 228.)

8
2.2.2 First priority monitor screen
The first priority monitor screen, which is displayed first when the operation panel becomes in the monitor mode, is selectable.
9
To set it, press the SET key for a while when the desired monitor item is displayed on a monitor screen.
The following show the procedure to set the monitor screen displaying the output current as the first priority monitor screen.

10
Operating procedure
1. Change the mode of the operation panel to the monitor mode, and switch the monitor screen to the one on which
the output current can be monitored.

2. Press the SET key for a while (1 second). The output current monitor screen is set as the first priority monitor screen.

3. When the operation panel is in the monitor mode next time, the output current monitored value is displayed first.

NOTE
• Use Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection or Pr.774 Operation panel monitor selection 1 to Pr.776 Operation
panel monitor selection 3 to change the monitor item. (Refer to page 228.)

2.2.3 Displaying the set frequency

To display the present set frequency in the standard model, change the mode of the operation panel to the monitor mode and

press the setting dial ( ) while the inverter runs in the PU operation mode or in the External/PU combined operation mode

1 (Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "3").

NOTE
• Use Pr.992 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection to change the item to be displayed. (Refer to page 228.)

2. Basic Operation
2.2 Monitoring the inverter
27
 2.3 Easy setting of the inverter operation mode
The operation mode suitable for start and speed command combinations can be set easily using Pr.79 Operation mode
selection.
The following shows the procedure to operate with the external start command (STF/STR) and the frequency command by
using the operation panel.

Operating procedure
1. Press the PU/EXT key and MODE key for 0.5 second at the same time.
Blinking

2. Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until "79-3" (External/PU combined operation mode 1) appears.
(For other settings, refer to the following table.)
Blinking

3. Press the SET key to confirm the setting. External/PU combined operation mode 1 (Pr.79 = "3") is set.
Operation method
Operation panel indication Frequency Operation mode
Start command
command

Setting dial or UP/

Blinking RUN key PU operation mode
DOWN key

External Analog voltage

Blinking External operation mode
(STF/STR signal) input

External Setting dial or UP/

Blinking External/PU combined operation mode 1
(STF/STR signal) DOWN key

Analog voltage
Blinking RUN key External/PU combined operation mode 2
input

NOTE
• When the user group function is used (Pr.160 = "1") or the password function is enabled (with Pr.296 and Pr.297), the easy
setting is disabled (Pr.79 is not displayed).
• "ER2" appears if a setting change is attempted during inverter operation. Turn OFF the start command (the RUN key or STF/
STR signal).
• If the MODE key is pressed before pressing the SET key, the easy setting mode is terminated and the operation panel returns
to the monitor mode. If the easy setting is terminated while Pr.79 = "0 (initial value)", check the inverter operation mode
because the inverter may switch its operation mode between the PU operation mode and the External operation mode.
• Reset by pressing the STOP/RESET key is enabled.
• The following is the frequency commands listed in descending order of priority when "3" is set in Pr.79: Multi-speed setting
function (RL/RM/RH/REX signal) > PID control (X14 signal) > terminal 4 analog input (AU signal) > digital input from the
operation panel.

28 2. Basic Operation
2.3 Easy setting of the inverter operation mode
2.4 Frequently-used parameters (simple mode 1
parameters)
2
Parameters that are frequently used for the FR-E800 series are grouped as simple mode parameters.
When Pr.160 User group read selection = "9999", only the simple mode parameters are displayed on the operation panel.
This section explains the simple mode parameters. 3
2.4.1 Simple mode parameter list
For simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the initial values of the parameters may be used as they are. Set the 4
necessary parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter's setting, change and check can be made
on the operation panel.
5
• Pr.160 User group read selection can narrow down the displayed parameters to only the simple mode parameters. (In the
initial setting, all parameters are displayed.) Set Pr.160 User group read selection as required. (To change the parameter
setting, refer to page 25.) 6

9999
Pr.160 setting Description
Only simple mode parameters are displayed.
7
All parameters (simple mode parameters and extended parameters)
0 (initial value)
are displayed.
1 Only parameters registered in user groups are displayed. 8

10

2. Basic Operation
2.4 Frequently-used parameters (simple mode parameters)
29
  Simple mode parameters (standard model)
Initial value*9 Refer
Pr.
Pr. Name Increment Range Application to
group Gr.1 Gr.2 page
6%*1
Set this parameter to obtain a higher starting
5%*2 torque under V/F control. Also set this when a
0 G000 Torque boost 0.1% 4%*3 0% to 30% loaded motor cannot be driven, the warning 374
"OL" occurs, and the inverter output is shut off
3%*4
with the fault indication "E.OC1".
2%*5
Maximum
1 H400 0.01 Hz 120 Hz 0 to 120 Hz Set the upper limit for the output frequency.
frequency
211
Minimum
2 H401 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 0 to 120 Hz Set the lower limit for the output frequency.
frequency
Set this parameter when the rated motor
3 G001 Base frequency 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz frequency is 50 Hz. Check the rating plate of 376
the motor.
Multi-speed
4 D301 setting (high 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
speed)
34,
Multi-speed Pre-set the speeds that will be switched
39,
5 D302 setting (middle 0.01 Hz 30 Hz 0 to 590 Hz among by terminals.
195
speed)
Multi-speed
6 D303 0.01 Hz 10 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
setting (low speed)
5 s*6
7 F010 Acceleration time 0.1 s 0 to 3600 s Set the acceleration time.
10 s*7
158
5 s*6
8 F011 Deceleration time 0.1 s 0 to 3600 s Set the deceleration time.
10 s*7
H000 Electronic thermal Inverter rated Protects the motor from heat. Set the rated
9 0.01 A 0 to 500 A 198
C103 O/L relay current*8 motor current.
Operation mode Select the start and frequency command
79 D000 1 0 0 to 4, 6, 7 174
selection sources.
Terminal 2 Change the frequency at the maximum
41,
125 T022 frequency setting 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz potentiometer setting (5 V in the initial
273
gain frequency setting).
Terminal 4
Change the frequency at the maximum 43,
126 T042 frequency setting 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
current input (20 mA in the initial setting). 273
gain frequency
This function restricts the parameters that are
User group read
160 E440 1 0 0, 1, 9999 read by the operation panel and parameter 143
selection
unit.
0, 8009, Select the PM sensorless vector control and
PM parameter
998 E430 1 0 8109, 9009, set the parameters that are required to drive a 90
initialization
9109 PM motor.
Changes parameter settings as a batch. The
target parameters include communication
Automatic 10, 12, 20, parameters for the Mitsubishi Electric human
999 E431 1 9999 141
parameter setting 21, 9999 machine interface (GOT) connection and the
parameters for the rated frequency settings of
50/60 Hz.
*1 Initial value for the FR-E820-0050(0.75K) or lower and FR-E840-0026(0.75K) or lower.
*2 Initial value for the FR-E860-0017(0.75K).
*3 Initial value for the FR-E820-0080(1.5K) to FR-E820-0175(3.7K) and FR-E840-0040(1.5K) to FR-E840-0095(3.7K).
*4 Initial value for the FR-E820-0240(5.5K), FR-E820-0330(7.5K), FR-E840-0120(5.5K), FR-E840-0170(7.5K), FR-E860-0027(1.5K), and FR-E860-
0040(2.2K).
*5 Initial value for the FR-E860-0061(3.7K) to FR-E860-0120(7.5K).
*6 Initial value for the FR-E820-0175(3.7K) or lower, FR-E840-0095(3.7K) or lower, and FR-E860-0061(3.7K) or lower.
*7 Initial value for the FR-E820-0240(5.5K) or higher, FR-E840-0120(5.5K) or higher, FR-E860-0090(5.5K) or higher.
*8 The initial value for the FR-E820-0050(0.75K) or lower, the FR-E840-0026(0.75K) or lower, and the FR-E860-0017(0.75K) is set to the 85% of
the inverter rated current.
*9 Gr.1 and Gr.2 are the parameter initial value groups. (Refer to page 82.)

30 2. Basic Operation
2.4 Frequently-used parameters (simple mode parameters)
 Simple mode parameters (Ethernet model)
Pr.
Initial value*9 Refer 1
Pr. Name Increment Range Application to
group Gr.1 Gr.2 page
6%*1
5%*2
Set this parameter to obtain a higher starting 2
torque under V/F control. Also set this when a
0 G000 Torque boost 0.1% 4%*3 0% to 30% loaded motor cannot be driven, the warning 374
"OL" occurs, and the inverter output is shut off
3%*4
2%*5
with the fault indication "E.OC1". 3
1 H400 Maximum frequency 0.01 Hz 120 Hz 0 to 120 Hz Set the upper limit for the output frequency.
211
2 H401 Minimum frequency 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 0 to 120 Hz Set the lower limit for the output frequency.
Set this parameter when the rated motor 4
3 G001 Base frequency 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz frequency is 50 Hz. Check the rating plate of 376
the motor.
Multi-speed setting
4 D301
(high speed)
0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
34,
5
Multi-speed setting Pre-set the speeds that will be switched
5 D302 0.01 Hz 30 Hz 0 to 590 Hz 39,
(middle speed) among by terminals.
195
Multi-speed setting
6 D303
(low speed)
0.01 Hz 10 Hz 0 to 590 Hz 6
5 s*6
7 F010 Acceleration time 0.1 s 0 to 3600 s Set the acceleration time.
10 s*7
5 s*6
158
7
8 F011 Deceleration time 0.1 s 0 to 3600 s Set the deceleration time.
*7
10 s
H000 Electronic thermal Inverter rated Protects the motor from heat. Set the rated
9 0.01 A 0 to 500 A 198
C103 O/L relay current*8 motor current. 8
Operation mode Select the start and frequency command
79 D000 1 0 0 to 4, 6, 7 174
selection sources.
Terminal 2 Change the frequency at the maximum
125 T022 frequency setting 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz potentiometer setting (5 V in the initial
41,
273
9
gain frequency setting).
Terminal 4
Change the frequency at the maximum 43,
126 T042 frequency setting 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
gain frequency
current input (20 mA in the initial setting). 273
10
This function restricts the parameters that are
User group read
160 E440 1 0 0, 1, 9999 read by the operation panel and parameter 90
selection
unit.
DO0 output
313 M410 1 9999
selection
Set this parameter to assign the functions to
DO1 output Refer to page *10
314 M411 1 9999 the devices RX9 to RXB for the CC-Link IE
selection 228.
TSN and CC-Link IE Field Network Basic.
DO2 output
315 M412 1 9999
selection
Disable an error reset command given via
Communication *10
349 N010 1 0 0, 1 communication in the External operation
reset selection
mode or the PU operation mode.
Set this parameter to make the start
command (forward/reverse rotation) inverted
Frequency
by adding a plus or minus sign to the value of *10
541 N100 command sign 1 0 0, 1
the frequency command sent through the CC-
selection
Link IE TSN or the CC-Link IE Field Network
Basic.
Set this parameter to extend the function of
CC-Link extended 0, 1, 12, 14, *10
544 N103 1 0 the remote registers for the CC-Link IE TSN or
setting 18, 24, 28
the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic.
0, 8009, Select the PM sensorless vector control and
PM parameter
998 E430 1 0 8109, 9009, set the parameters that are required to drive a 90
initialization
9109 PM motor.

2. Basic Operation
2.4 Frequently-used parameters (simple mode parameters)
31
 Initial value*9 Refer
Pr.
Pr. Name Increment Range Application to
group Gr.1 Gr.2
page
Changes parameter settings as a batch. The
target parameters include communication
Automatic 10, 12, 20, parameters for the Mitsubishi Electric human
999 E431 1 9999 141
parameter setting 21, 9999 machine interface (GOT) connection and the
parameters for the rated frequency settings of
50/60 Hz.
*1 Initial value for the FR-E820-0050(0.75K) or lower and FR-E840-0026(0.75K) or lower.
*2 Initial value for the FR-E860-0017(0.75K).
*3 Initial value for the FR-E820-0080(1.5K) to FR-E820-0175(3.7K) and FR-E840-0040(1.5K) to FR-E840-0095(3.7K).
*4 Initial value for the FR-E820-0240(5.5K), FR-E820-0330(7.5K), FR-E840-0120(5.5K), FR-E840-0170(7.5K), FR-E860-0027(1.5K), and FR-E860-
0040(2.2K).
*5 Initial value for the FR-E860-0061(3.7K) to FR-E860-0120(7.5K).
*6 Initial value for the FR-E820-0175(3.7K) or lower, FR-E840-0095(3.7K) or lower, and FR-E860-0061(3.7K) or lower.
*7 Initial value for the FR-E820-0240(5.5K) or higher, FR-E840-0120(5.5K) or higher, FR-E860-0090(5.5K) or higher.
*8 The initial value for the FR-E820-0050(0.75K) or lower, the FR-E840-0026(0.75K) or lower, and the FR-E860-0017(0.75K) is set to the 85% of
the inverter rated current.
*9 Gr.1 and Gr.2 are the parameter initial value groups. (Refer to page 82.)
*10 For details, refer to the Instruction Manual (Communication).

32 2. Basic Operation
2.4 Frequently-used parameters (simple mode parameters)
2.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation) 1

Select a method to give the frequency command from the list below, and refer to the specified page for its procedure.
Method to give the frequency command Refer to page
2
Setting the frequency on the operation panel in the frequency setting mode 33
Give commands by turning ON/OFF switches wired to inverter's terminals (multi-speed setting) 34
Setting the frequency by inputting voltage signals 35 3
Setting the frequency by inputting current signals 36

2.5.1 Setting the frequency on the operation panel 4

(example: operating at 30 Hz)
5
• Use the operation panel to give a start command and a frequency command. (PU operation)

6
Operation panel

The following shows the procedure to operate at 30 Hz. 8

Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter 9
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode

Press the PU/EXT key to choose the PU operation mode. The PU LED turns ON.
10
3. Setting the frequency
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until the target frequency "30.00" (30.00 Hz) appears. The indication
blinks for about 5 seconds.
While the value is blinking, press the SET key to enter the frequency. "F" and "30.00" are displayed alternately. After
about 3 seconds of alternate display, the indication returns to "0.00" (the indication of a monitored value).
(If the SET key is not pressed, the indication of the value returns to "0.00" (0.00 Hz) after about 5 seconds of blinking.
In that case, turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key and set the frequency again.)

4. Start → acceleration → constant speed

Press the RUN key to start running. The frequency value on the monitor increases according to the setting of Pr.7
Acceleration time, and "30.00" (30.00 Hz) appears on the monitor.
(To change the set frequency, return to step 3. The previously set frequency appears.)

5. Deceleration → stop
Press the STOP/RESET key to stop. The frequency value on the monitor decreases according to the setting of Pr.8
Deceleration time, "0.00" (0.00 Hz) appears on the monitor, and the motor stops rotating.

NOTE
• To display the set frequency in the standard model, press the setting dial while the inverter runs in the PU operation mode or
in the External/PU combined operation mode 1 (Pr.79 = "3"). (Refer to page 228.)
• The frequency can be set without pressing the SET key when Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection = "1
or 11". (Refer to page 130.)

2. Basic Operation
2.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation)
33
 Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 158
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 174

2.5.2 Setting the frequency with switches (multi-speed

setting)

• Use the RUN key on the operation panel to give a start command.
• Turn ON the RH, RM, or RL signal to give a frequency command (multi-speed setting).
• Set Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "4" (External/PU combination operation mode 2).

[Connection diagram]

Speed 1

Output frequency (Hz)

Inverter (High speed)

Speed 2
High speed RH Operation panel (Middle speed)
Middle speed RM Speed 3
(Low speed)
Low speed RL
SD Time

RH ON
ON
RM
Switch RL
ON

The following shows the procedure to operate at a low speed (10 Hz).

Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode

Set "4" in Pr.79. The PU LED and EXT LED turn ON. (To change the setting, refer to page 28.)

3. Setting the frequency

Turn ON the low-speed switch (RL signal).

4. Start → acceleration → constant speed

Press the RUN key to start running. The frequency value on the monitor increases according to the setting of Pr.7
Acceleration time, and "10.00" (10.00 Hz) appears on the monitor.

5. Deceleration → stop
Press the STOP/RESET key to stop. The frequency value on the monitor decreases according to the setting of Pr.8
Deceleration time, "0.00" (0.00 Hz) appears on the monitor, and the motor stops rotating. Turn OFF the low-speed
switch (RL signal).

NOTE
• The initial value is 60 Hz for terminal RH in Group 1 (50 Hz in Group 2), 30 Hz for terminal RM, and 10 Hz for terminal RL. (To
change the settings, use Pr.4, Pr.5, and Pr.6, respectively.)
• In the initial setting, if two or more speed switches (signals) are simultaneously turned ON, priority is given to the switch (signal)
for the lower speed. For example, when both RH and RM signals turn ON, the RM signal (Pr.5) has the higher priority.
• Up to 15-speed switching operation can be performed.
• Up to two external input terminals are available for the Ethernet model. Use Pr.178 STF/DI0 terminal function selection and
Pr.179 STR/DI1 terminal function selection to assign the functions to terminals DI0 and DI1.

Parameters referred to
Pr.4 to Pr.6 (multi-speed setting)page 195
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 158
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 174
Pr.178 STF/DI0 terminal function selectionpage 283

34 2. Basic Operation
2.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation)
2.5.3 Setting the frequency using an analog signal
(voltage input) 1

• Use the RUN key on the operation panel to give a start command. 2
• Use the frequency setting potentiometer to give a frequency command (by connecting it to terminals 2 and 5 (voltage input)).
• Set Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "4" (External/PU combination operation mode 2).

3
[Connection diagram] (The inverter supplies 5 V power to the frequency setting potentiometer via terminal 10.)

Inverter 4
Operation panel
10
Frequency setting
potentiometer
2
5
5
Potentiometer

6
The following shows the procedure to operate at 60 Hz.

Operating procedure 7
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode 8

Set "4" in Pr.79. The PU LED and EXT LED turn ON. (To change the setting, refer to page 28.)

3. Start
9
Press the RUN key. The RUN LED blinks as no frequency command is given.

4. Acceleration → constant speed

Turn the frequency setting potentiometer clockwise slowly to full. The frequency value on the monitor increases 10
according to the setting of Pr.7 Acceleration time, and "60.00" (60.00 Hz) appears on the monitor.

5. Deceleration
Turn the frequency setting potentiometer counterclockwise slowly to full. The frequency value on the monitor
decreases according to the setting of Pr.8 Deceleration time, "0.00" (0.00 Hz) appears on the monitor, and the
motor stops rotating. The RUN LED blinks.

6. Stop
Press the STOP/RESET key. The RUN LED turns OFF.

NOTE
• To change the frequency (60 Hz) at the maximum voltage input (initial value: 5 V), adjust Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting
gain frequency.
• To change the frequency (0 Hz) at the minimum voltage input (initial value: 0 V), adjust the calibration parameter C2
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency.
• When terminal 10 is used, the maximum output frequency may fluctuate in a range of ±6 Hz due to fluctuations in the output
voltage (5 ±0.5 VDC). Use Pr.125 or C4 to adjust the output frequency at the maximum analog input as required. (Refer to
page 273.)

Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 158
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 174
Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequencypage 273
C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequencypage 273

2. Basic Operation
2.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation)
35
 2.5.4 Setting the frequency using an analog signal
(current input)

• Use the RUN key on the operation panel to give a start command.
• Use the current regulator which outputs 4 to 20 mA to give a frequency command (by connecting it across terminals 4 and 5
(current input)).
• Turn ON the AU signal.
• Set Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "4" (External/PU combination operation mode 2).

[Connection diagram]
Inverter
Operation panel
AU signal RL(AU)

SD
Current signal 4(+)
source
5(ｰ)
(4 to 20mADC)

The following shows the procedure to operate at 60 Hz.

Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode

Set "4" in Pr.79. The PU LED and EXT LED turn ON. (To change the setting, refer to page 28.)

3. Assignment of AU signal
Set Pr.180 RL terminal function selection = "4" to assign the AU signal to terminal RL.

4. Selecting the input via terminal 4

Turn ON the Terminal 4 input selection (AU) signal. Input via terminal 4 to the inverter is enabled.

5. Start
Press the RUN key. The RUN LED blinks as no frequency command is given.

6. Acceleration → constant speed

Input a current of 20 mA to the inverter from the regulator. The frequency value on the monitor increases according
to the setting of Pr.7 Acceleration time, and "60.00" (60.00 Hz) appears on the monitor.

7. Deceleration
Input a current of 4 mA or less. The frequency value on the monitor decreases according to the setting of Pr.8
Deceleration time, "0.00" (0.00 Hz) appears on the monitor, and the motor stops rotating. The RUN LED blinks.

8. Stop
Press the STOP/RESET key. The RUN LED turns OFF.

NOTE
• The AU signal can be assigned to another terminal. Set "4" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.184 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the function to an input terminal. (For the Ethernet model, assign the signal to terminal DI0 or DI1 using
Pr.178 or Pr.179.)
• To change the frequency (60 Hz) at the maximum current input (initial value: 20 mA), adjust Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency
setting gain frequency.
• To change the frequency (0 Hz) at the minimum current input (initial value: 4 mA), adjust the calibration parameter C5
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency.

36 2. Basic Operation
2.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation)
 Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 158
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 174 1
Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequencypage 273
Pr.178 to Pr.184 (Input terminal function selection)page 283
C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequencypage 273

10

2. Basic Operation
2.5 Basic operation procedure (PU operation)
37
 2.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation)
Select a method to give the frequency command from the list below, and refer to the specified page for its procedure.
Method to give the frequency command Refer to page
Setting the frequency on the operation panel in the frequency setting mode 38
Turning ON/OFF switches wired to inverter's terminals (multi-speed setting) 39
Setting the frequency by inputting voltage signals 40
Setting the frequency by inputting current signals 42

2.6.1 Setting the frequency on the operation panel

• Turn ON the STF/STR signal to give a start command.

• Use operation panel (setting dial or UP/DOWN key) to give a frequency command.
• Set Pr.79 = "3" (External/PU combined operation mode 1).

[Connection diagram]

Inverter
Operation panel
Forward rotation STF
start
Reverse rotation STR
start
Switch SD

The following shows the procedure to operate at 30 Hz.

Operating procedure
1. Changing the operation mode
Set "3" in Pr.79. The PU LED and EXT LED turn ON. (To change the setting, refer to page 25.)

2. Setting the frequency

Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until the target frequency "30.00" (30.00 Hz) appears. The indication
blinks for about 5 seconds.
While the value is blinking, press the SET key to enter the frequency. "F" and "30.00" are displayed alternately. After
about 3 seconds of alternate display, the indication returns to "0.00" (the indication of a monitored value). (If the SET
key is not pressed, the indication of the value returns to "0.00" (0.00 Hz) after about 5 seconds of blinking. In that
case, turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key and set the frequency again.)

3. Start → acceleration → constant speed

Turn ON the start switch (STF/STR signal). The frequency value on the monitor increases according to the setting
of Pr.7 Acceleration time, and "30.00" (30.00 Hz) appears on the monitor. The RUN LED is ON during forward
rotation and blinks slowly during reverse rotation. (To change the set frequency, return to step 2. The previously set
frequency appears.)

4. Deceleration → stop
Turn OFF the start switch (STF/STR signal). The frequency value on the monitor decreases according to the setting
of Pr.8 Deceleration time, "0.00" (0.00 Hz) appears on the monitor, and the motor stops rotating.

38 2. Basic Operation
2.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation)
 NOTE
• When both the forward rotation start switch (STF signal) and the reverse rotation start switch (STR signal) are turned ON, the 1
motor cannot be started. If both are turned ON while the inverter is running, the inverter decelerates to a stop.
• Pr.178 STF/DI0 terminal function selection must be set to "60" (or Pr.179 STR/DI1 terminal function selection must be
set to "61") (initial value).
• Setting Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "3" enables multi-speed operation.
2
• If the STOP/RESET key on the operation panel is pressed during the External operation, the inverter stops and the PU stop
warning is activated ("PS" appears on the LCD display of the operation panel.) To reset the PU stop warning, turn OFF the
start switch (STF or STR signal), and then press the PU/EXT key. (Refer to page 129.) 3

Parameters referred to
Pr.4 to Pr.6 (multi-speed setting)page 195, Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 158
Pr.178 STF/DI0 terminal function selection, Pr.179 STR/DI1 terminal function selectionpage 283
4
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 174

2.6.2 Setting the frequency and giving a start command 5

with switches (multi-speed setting) (Pr.4 to Pr.6)
6
• Turn ON the STF/STR signal to give a start command.
• Turn ON the RH, RM, or RL signal to give a frequency command (multi-speed setting).
7
[Connection diagram]

Speed 1 8
Output frequency (Hz)

Inverter (High speed)

Forward rotation start Speed 2

STF (Middle speed)
Reverse rotation start STR Speed 3

High speed RH
(Low speed)
9
Middle speed RM Time
Low speed RL RH ON

10
SD RM
ON
Switch
ON
RL

The following shows the procedure to operate at a high speed (60 Hz).

Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Setting the frequency

Turn ON the high-speed switch (RH signal).

3. Start → acceleration → constant speed

Turn ON the start switch (STF/STR signal). The frequency value on the monitor increases according to the setting
of Pr.7 Acceleration time, and "60.00" (60.00 Hz) appears on the monitor. The RUN LED is ON during forward
rotation and blinks slowly during reverse rotation. When the RM signal is turned ON, 30 Hz is displayed. When the
RL signal is turned ON, 10 Hz is displayed.

4. Deceleration → stop
Turn OFF the start switch (STF/STR signal). The frequency value on the monitor decreases according to the setting
of Pr.8 Deceleration time, "0.00" (0.00 Hz) appears on the monitor, and the motor stops rotating. The RUN LED
turns OFF. Turn OFF the high-speed switch (RH signal).

2. Basic Operation
2.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation)
39
 NOTE
• When both the forward rotation start switch (STF signal) and the reverse rotation start switch (STR signal) are turned ON, the
motor cannot be started. If both are turned ON while the inverter is running, the inverter decelerates to a stop.
• The initial value is 60 Hz for terminal RH in Group 1 (50 Hz in Group 2), 30 Hz for terminal RM, and 10 Hz for terminal RL. (To
change the settings, use Pr.4, Pr.5, and Pr.6, respectively.)
• In the initial setting, if two or more speed switches (signals) are simultaneously turned ON, priority is given to the switch (signal)
for the lower speed. For example, when both RH and RM signals turn ON, the RM signal (Pr.5) has the higher priority.
• Up to 15-speed switching operation can be performed.
• Up to two external input terminals are available for the Ethernet model. Use Pr.178 STF/DI0 terminal function selection and
Pr.179 STR/DI1 terminal function selection to assign the functions to terminals DI0 and DI1.

Parameters referred to
Pr.4 to Pr.6 (multi-speed setting)page 195
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 158
Pr.178 STF/DI0 terminal function selection, Pr.179 STR/DI1 terminal function selectionpage 283

2.6.3 Setting the frequency using an analog signal

(voltage input)

• Turn ON the STF/STR signal to give a start command.

• Use the frequency setting potentiometer to give a frequency command (by connecting it across terminals 2 and 5 (voltage
input)).

[Connection diagram]
(The inverter supplies 5 V power to the frequency setting potentiometer via terminal 10.)

Inverter

Forward rotation start STF

Reverse rotation start STR
Switch SD

10
Frequency setting
2
potentiometer
5
Potentiometer

The following shows the procedure to operate at 60 Hz.

Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Start
Turn ON the start switch (STF/STR signal). The RUN LED on the operation panel blinks as no frequency command
is given.

3. Acceleration → constant speed

Turn the frequency setting potentiometer clockwise slowly to full. The frequency value on the monitor increases
according to the setting of Pr.7 Acceleration time, and "60.00" (60.00 Hz) appears on the monitor. The RUN LED
is ON during forward rotation and blinks slowly during reverse rotation.

4. Deceleration
Turn the frequency setting potentiometer counterclockwise slowly to full. The frequency value on the monitor
decreases according to the setting of Pr.8 Deceleration time, "0.00" (0.00 Hz) appears on the monitor, and the
motor stops rotating. The RUN LED blinks.

5. Stop
Turn OFF the start switch (STF/STR signal). The RUN LED turns OFF.

40 2. Basic Operation
2.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation)
 NOTE
• When both the forward rotation start switch (STF signal) and the reverse rotation start switch (STR signal) are turned ON, the 1
motor cannot be started. If both are turned ON while the inverter is running, the inverter decelerates to a stop.
• Pr.178 STF/DI0 terminal function selection must be set to "60" (or Pr.179 STR/DI1 terminal function selection must be
set to "61") (initial value).
• When terminal 10 is used, the maximum output frequency may fluctuate in a range of ±6 Hz due to fluctuations in the output
2
voltage (5 ±0.5 VDC). Use Pr.125 or C4 to adjust the output frequency at the maximum analog input as required. (Refer to
page 273.)
3
Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 158
Pr.178 STF/DI0 terminal function selection, Pr.179 STR/DI1 terminal function selectionpage 283
4
2.6.4 Changing the frequency (initial value: 60 Hz) at the
maximum voltage input (initial value: 5 V) 5

• Change the maximum frequency.

6
The following shows the procedure to change the frequency at 5 V from 60 Hz (initial value) to 50 Hz using a frequency setting
potentiometer for 0 to 5 VDC input. Set 50 Hz in Pr.125 so that the inverter outputs 50 Hz at 5 V input. 7
Operating procedure
1. Selecting the parameter
8
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until "P.125" (Pr.125) appears.
Press the SET key to show the present set value (60.00 Hz).

2. Changing the maximum frequency 9

Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key to change the value to "50.00" (50.00 Hz).
Press the SET key to confirm the setting. "50.00" blinks.

3. Selecting the mode and the monitor item 10

Press the MODE key twice to select the monitor mode and to monitor a frequency.

4. Start
Turn ON the start switch (STF/STR signal), and turn the frequency setting potentiometer clockwise slowly to full.
(Refer to steps 2 and 3 in 2.6.3.)
The motor is operated at 50 Hz.

NOTE
• To change the frequency at the input of 0 V (minimum voltage), use the calibration parameter C2.

Initial value
60Hz
(50Hz)

Output frequency
(Hz)

Gain Pr.125
Bias
C2

0 100%
0 5V
Frequency setting signal
0 10V
C3 C4

2. Basic Operation
2.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation)
41
 • Other adjustment methods for the frequency setting voltage gain are the following: adjustment by applying a voltage directly
across terminals 2 and 5, and adjustment using a specified point without applying a voltage across terminals 2 and 5. (Refer
to page 273.)

Parameters referred to
Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequencypage 273
C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequencypage 273
C4 Terminal 2 frequency setting gainpage 273

2.6.5 Setting the frequency using an analog signal

(current input)

• Turn ON the STF/STR signal to give a start command.

• Turn ON the AU signal.
• Set Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "2" (External operation mode).

[Connection diagram]

Inverter

Forward rotation start STF

Reverse rotation start STR
Switch RL(AU)
SD
Current signal 4(+)
source
 
(4 to 20mADC) 5(-)

The following shows the procedure to operate at 60 Hz.

Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Assignment of AU signal
Set Pr.180 RL terminal function selection = "4" to assign the AU signal to terminal RL.

3. Selecting the input via terminal 4

Turn ON the Terminal 4 input selection (AU) signal. Input via terminal 4 to the inverter is enabled.

4. Start
Turn ON the start switch (STF/STR signal). The RUN LED blinks as no frequency command is given.

5. Acceleration → constant speed

Input a current of 20 mA to the inverter from the regulator. The frequency value on the monitor increases according
to the setting of Pr.7 Acceleration time, and "60.00" (60.00 Hz) appears on the monitor. The RUN LED is ON during
forward rotation and blinks slowly during reverse rotation.

6. Deceleration
Input a current of 4 mA or less. The frequency value on the monitor decreases according to the setting of Pr.8
Deceleration time, "0.00" (0.00 Hz) appears on the monitor, and the motor stops rotating. The RUN LED blinks.

7. Stop
Turn OFF the start switch (STF/STR signal). The RUN LED turns OFF.

42 2. Basic Operation
2.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation)
 NOTE
• When both the forward rotation start switch (STF signal) and the reverse rotation start switch (STR signal) are turned ON, the 1
motor cannot be started. If both are turned ON while the inverter is running, the inverter decelerates to a stop.
• The AU signal can be assigned to another terminal. Set "4" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.184 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the function to an input terminal. (For the Ethernet model, assign the signal to terminal DI0 or DI1 using
Pr.178 or Pr.179.)
2

Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 158
3
Pr.178 to Pr.184 (Input terminal function selection)page 283

2.6.6 Changing the frequency (initial value: 60 Hz) at the 4

maximum current input (initial value: 20 mA)
5
• Change the maximum frequency.

The following shows the procedure to change the frequency at 20 mA from 60 Hz (initial value) to 50 Hz using a frequency 6
setting potentiometer for 4 to 20 mA input. Set 50 Hz in Pr.126 so that the inverter outputs 50 Hz at 20 mA input.

Operating procedure 7
1. Selecting the parameter
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until "P.126" (Pr.126) appears.
Press the SET key to show the present set value (60.00 Hz). 8
2. Changing the maximum frequency
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key to change the value to "50.00" (50.00 Hz).
Press the SET key to confirm the setting. "50.00" blinks. 9
3. Selecting the mode and the monitor item
Press the MODE key twice to select the monitor mode and to monitor a frequency.
10
4. Start
Turn ON the start switch (STF or STR) to apply a 20 mA current (refer to steps 3 and 4 in 2.6.5).
Operate at 50 Hz.

NOTE
• To change the frequency at the input of 4 mA (minimum current), use the calibration parameter C5.

Initial value
60Hz
Output frequency

(50Hz)
(Hz)

Gain Pr.126
Bias
C5

0 20 100%
0 4 Frequency setting signal 20mA
0 1 5V
0 2 10V
C6 C7
• Other adjustment methods for the frequency setting current gain are the following: adjustment by applying a current through
terminals 4 and 5, and adjustment using a specified point without applying a current through terminals 4 and 5. (Refer to page
273.)

2. Basic Operation
2.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation)
43
 Parameters referred to
Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequencypage 273
C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequencypage 273
C7 Terminal 4 frequency setting gainpage 273

44 2. Basic Operation
2.6 Basic operation procedure (External operation)
2.7 Basic operation procedure (JOG operation) 1

2.7.1 Giving a start command by using external signals 2

for JOG operation
3
• The JOG signal can be input only via a control terminal.
• JOG operation is performed while the JOG signal is ON.
• Use Pr.15 Jog frequency to set a frequency, and set Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time to set the acceleration/
4
deceleration time for JOG operation.
• Set Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "2" (External operation mode).
5
[Connection diagram]

Inverter 6
Forward rotation start STF
Reverse rotation start STR
JOG signal RL(JOG) 7
SD
Switch

The following shows the procedure to operate at 5 Hz. 8

Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
9
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Assignment of JOG signal

Set Pr.180 RL terminal function selection = "5" to assign the JOG signal to terminal RL. 10
3. Turning ON the JOG signal
Turn ON the JOG switch (JOG signal). The inverter is set ready for the JOG operation.

4. Start → acceleration → constant speed

Turn ON the start switch (STF/STR signal). The frequency value on the monitor increases according to the setting
of Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time, and "5.00" (5.00 Hz) appears on the monitor. The RUN LED is ON
during forward rotation and blinks slowly during reverse rotation.

5. Deceleration → stop
Turn OFF the start switch (STF/STR signal). The frequency value on the monitor decreases according to the setting
of Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time, "0.00" (0.00 Hz) appears on the monitor, and the motor stops
rotating. The RUN LED turns OFF. Turn OFF the JOG switch (JOG signal).

NOTE
• To change the frequency, change the setting of Pr.15 Jog frequency (initial value: 5 Hz).
• To change the acceleration/deceleration time, change the setting of Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time (initial value:
0.5 seconds).
• The JOG signal can be assigned to another terminal. Set "5" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.184 (Input terminal function
selection) to assign the function to an input terminal. (For the Ethernet model, assign the signal to terminal DI0 or DI1 using
Pr.178 or Pr.179.)
• The JOG2 signal enables the JOG operation via communication. (Refer to page 194.)

Parameters referred to
Pr.15 Jog frequency, Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration timepage 194
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 174

2. Basic Operation
2.7 Basic operation procedure (JOG operation)
45
 Pr.178 to Pr.184 (Input terminal function selection)page 283

2.7.2 Giving a start command from the operation panel

for JOG operation

• JOG operation is performed while the RUN key on the operation panel is pressed.

Operation panel

The following shows the procedure to operate at 5 Hz.

Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode

Press the PU/EXT key twice to choose the PUJOG operation mode. The display shows "JOG", and the PU LED is
ON.

3. Start → acceleration → constant speed

Hold down the RUN key. The frequency value on the monitor increases according to the setting of Pr.16 Jog
acceleration/deceleration time, and "5.00" (5.00 Hz) appears on the monitor.

4. Deceleration → stop
Release the RUN key. The frequency value on the monitor decreases according to the setting of Pr.16 Jog
acceleration/deceleration time, "0.00" (0.00 Hz) appears on the monitor, and the motor stops rotating.

NOTE
• To change the frequency, change the setting of Pr.15 Jog frequency (initial value: 5 Hz).
• To change the acceleration/deceleration time, change the setting of Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time (initial value:
0.5 seconds).

Parameters referred to
Pr.15 Jog frequency, Pr.16 Jog acceleration/deceleration timepage 194

46 2. Basic Operation
2.7 Basic operation procedure (JOG operation)
2.8 I/O terminal function assignment 1

• Functions can be assigned to the external I/O terminals (physical terminals) or communication (virtual terminals) by setting
parameters. 2
FR-E800 FR-E800-E

Output Output terminal Input Input terminal

3
(physical terminal) (physical terminal)

Input Input terminal

(physical terminal) 4
Plug-in option Output Plug-in option Output
FR-A8AY FR-A8AY
(physical terminal)
FR-A8AR
Output
(physical terminal)
FR-A8AR
Output 5
(physical terminal) (physical terminal)
Input Input
FR-A8NC FR-A8NC
(Communication) (Communication) 6
Output Output

PU connector Ethernet connector

(Communication) (Communication) 7
Output Output
Relay output terminal Relay output terminal
(physical terminal) (physical terminal)

8
Output Input Output Input

9
NOTE
• Two or more plug-in options cannot be installed at the same time.

10
 Input terminal function assignment
• Signals can be input to the inverter by using physical terminals or via communication.
• Use the following parameters to assign functions to input terminals. Check the terminal available for each parameter.
External input terminal
Terminal Input via
Pr. (physical terminal)
name communication*1
FR-E800 FR-E800-E
178 STF/DI0 ○ (STF) ○ (DI0) ○
179 STR/DI1 ○ (STR) ○ (DI1) ○
180 RL ○ — ○
181 RM ○ — ○
182 RH ○ — ○
183 MRS ○ — ○
184 RES ○ — ○
185 NET X1 — — ○
186 NET X2 — — ○
187 NET X3 — — ○
188 NET X4 — — ○
189 NET X5 — — ○

○: Assignment/input available, ─: Assignment/input unavailable (no function)

*1 The communication protocol affects which terminals can be used. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual (Communication) or the Instruction
Manual of each communication option.

NOTE
• For the available signals, refer to page 283.

2. Basic Operation
2.8 I/O terminal function assignment
47
  Output terminal function assignment
• Signals can be output to the inverter by using physical terminals or via communication or assigned to the extension
terminals of the plug-in option (FR-A8AY or FR-A8AR).
• Use the following parameters to assign functions to input terminals. Check the terminal available for each parameter.
External output terminal Option output terminal (physical
Terminal Output via
Pr. (physical terminal) terminal)*2
name communication*1
FR-E800 FR-E800-E FR-A8AY FR-A8AR
190 RUN ○ — ○ — —
191 FU ○ — ○ — —
192 A,B,C ○ ○ ○ — —
193 NET Y1 — — ○ — —
194 NET Y2 — — ○ — —
195 NET Y3 — — ○ — —
196 NET Y4 — — ○ — —
313 DO0 — — ○ ○ —
314 DO1 — — ○ ○ —
315 DO2 — — ○ ○ —
316 DO3 — — — ○ —
317 DO4 — — — ○ —
318 DO5 — — — ○ —
319 DO6 — — — ○ —
320 RA1 — — — — ○
321 RA2 — — — — ○
322 RA3 — — — — ○

○: Assignment/output available, ─: Assignment/output unavailable (no function)

*1 The communication protocol affects which terminals can be used. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual (Communication) or the Instruction
Manual of each communication option.
*2 Refer to the Instruction Manual of the option for details on the option output terminals.

NOTE
• For the available signals, refer to page 250.

48 2. Basic Operation
2.8 I/O terminal function assignment
 CHAPTER 3
CHAPTER 3 Parameters
4

3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)....................................................................................................................50

3.2 Use of a function group number for the identification of parameters ......................................................................73
6
3.3 Parameter list (by function group number) .............................................................................................................75
3.4 Parameter initial value groups ................................................................................................................................82
7

10

49
 3 Parameters
This chapter explains the function setting for use of this product.
Always read the instructions before use.
The following marks are used to indicate the controls. (Parameters without any mark are valid for all the controls.)
Mark Control method Applied motor
V/F V/F control
Magnetic flux Advanced magnetic flux vector control Three-phase induction motor
Sensorless Real sensorless vector control
PM PM sensorless vector control PM motor

3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)

For simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the initial values of the parameters may be used as they are. Set the
necessary parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter's setting, change and check can be made
on the operation panel.

NOTE
• Simple indicates simple mode parameters. Use Pr.160 User group read selection to indicate the simple mode parameters
only (initial setting is to indicate the extended mode parameters).
• The changing of the parameter settings may be restricted in some operating statuses. Use Pr.77 Parameter write selection
to change the setting of the restriction.
• Refer to page 406 for instruction codes for communication and availability of Parameter clear, all clear, and Parameter copy.

Notation
[E800]: Available for the standard model.
[E800-1]: Available for the FM type inverter (standard model).
[E800-4]: Available for the AM (50 Hz) type inverter (standard model).
[E800-5]: Available for the AM (60 Hz) type inverter (standard model).
[E800-E]: Available for the Ethernet model.
[E800-EPA]: Available for the Protocol group A (Ethernet model).
[E800-EPB]: Available for the Protocol group B (Ethernet model).
[200/400 V class]: Available for the 200/400 V class.
[575 V class]: Available for the 575 V class inverters.

50 3. Parameters
3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)
 Pr.0 to Pr.99
Minimum Initial 1
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting value*1
group to page setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
6%*2
2
5%*2
0 G000 Torque boost Simple 0% to 30% 0.1% 4%*2 374
3%*2
3
2%*2
1 H400 Maximum frequency Simple 0 to 120 Hz 0.01 Hz 120 Hz 211
2 H401 Minimum frequency Simple 0 to 120 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 211
4
3 G001 Base frequency Simple 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 376
Basic function

Multi-speed setting (high

4 D301 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 195
speed) Simple
Multi-speed setting (middle
5
5 D302 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 30 Hz 195
speed) Simple
Multi-speed setting (low
6 D303
speed) Simple
0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 10 Hz 195 6
*3
5s
7 F010 Acceleration time Simple 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s 158
10 s

8 F011 Deceleration time Simple 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s

5 s*3
158
7
10 s
Electronic thermal O/L 198,
H000 Inverter rated
9
C103
relay Simple
Rated motor current Simple
0 to 500 A 0.01 A
current
299,
308
8
DC injection brake operation
10 G100 0 to 120 Hz 0.01 Hz 3 Hz 382
DC injection brake

frequency

11 G101
DC injection brake operation
0 to 10 s, 9999 0.1 s 0.5 s 382
9
time
6%*4
DC injection brake operation
12 G110
voltage
0% to 30% 0.1% 4%*4 382
10
1%*4
169,
— 13 F102 Starting frequency 0 to 60 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.5 Hz
170
— 14 G003 Load pattern selection 0 to 3 1 0 378
15 D200 Jog frequency 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 5 Hz 194
JOG operation

Jog acceleration/
16 F002 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 194
deceleration time

MRS/X10 terminal input

— 17 T720 0 to 5 1 0 287
selection
High speed maximum
— 18 H402 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 120 Hz 211
frequency
0 to 1000 V, 8888,
— 19 G002 Base frequency voltage 0.1 V 9999 8888 376
9999
Acceleration/deceleration
Acceleration/deceleration time

20 F000 1 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 158

reference frequency

Acceleration/deceleration
21 F001 0, 1 1 0 158
time increments

3. Parameters
3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)
51
 Minimum Initial
Pr. value*1 Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group to page setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
Stall prevention operation 100,
Multi-speed setting Stall prevention

22 H500 0% to 400% 0.1% 150%

level (Torque limit level) 214

Stall prevention operation

23 H610 level compensation factor at 0% to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 214
double speed

D304 to Multi-speed setting (speed 4

24 to 27 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 195
D307 to speed 7)

Acceleration/deceleration
— 29 F100 0 to 2 1 0 163
pattern selection
Regenerative function
— 30 E300 0 to 2 1 0 386
selection
31 H420 Frequency jump 1A 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 212
Frequency jump

32 H421 Frequency jump 1B 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 212

33 H422 Frequency jump 2A 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 212
34 H423 Frequency jump 2B 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 212
35 H424 Frequency jump 3A 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 212
36 H425 Frequency jump 3B 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 212
— 37 M000 Speed display 0.01 to 9998 0.001 1800 226
RUN key rotation direction
— 40 E202 0, 1 1 0 133
selection
41 M441 Up-to-frequency sensitivity 0% to 100% 0.1% 10% 257
Frequency detection

42 M442 Output frequency detection 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 6 Hz 257

Output frequency detection

43 M443 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 257
for reverse rotation

Second acceleration/ 5 s*3 158,

44 F020 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s
deceleration time 10 s*3 344
158,
Second function

45 F021 Second deceleration time 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999

344
46 G010 Second torque boost 0% to 30%, 9999 0.1% 9999 374
47 G011 Second V/F (base frequency) 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 376
Second stall prevention
48 H600 0% to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 214
operation level
Second electronic thermal O/ 198,
H010
51 L relay 0 to 500 A, 9999 0.01 A 9999 299,
C203
Rated second motor current 308

52 3. Parameters
3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)
 Minimum Initial
Pr. value*1 Refer Customer
Function Pr.
group
Name Setting range setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
to page setting 1
[E800][E800-EPB]
0, 5 to 12, 14, 17, 18,
20, 23 to 25, 32, 33,
38, 40 to 42, 44, 45, 50 2
to 57, 61, 62, 67, 91,
Operation panel main 97, 100
52 M100 1 0 228
monitor selection [E800-EPA]
0, 5 to 12, 14, 17, 18, 3
20, 23 to 25, 32, 33,
38, 40 to 42, 44, 45, 50
Monitoring

to 57, 61, 62, 67, 83,

91, 97, 100 4
Frequency / rotation speed
53 M003 0, 1, 4 1 0 226
unit switchover
1 to 3, 5 to 12, 14, 17,
54 M300
FM terminal function 18, 21, 24, 32, 33, 50,
1 1 237
5
selection [E800-1] 52, 53, 61, 62, 67, 70,
97
Frequency monitoring
55*5 M040
reference
0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 237
6
Inverter rated
56*5 M041 Current monitoring reference 0 to 500 A 0.01 A
current
237

351,
7
Automatic restart

57 A702 Restart coasting time 0, 0.1 to 30 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999

356

58 A703 Restart cushion time 0 to 60 s 0.1 s 1s 351

8
— 59 F101 Remote function selection 0 to 3, 11 to 13 1 0 165
Energy saving control
— 60 G030
selection
0, 9 1 0 380
9
61 F510 Reference current 0 to 500 A, 9999 0.01 A 9999 171
Automatic acceleration/deceleration

Reference value at
62 F511 0% to 400%, 9999 1% 9999 171
acceleration
10

Reference value at
63 F512 0% to 400%, 9999 1% 9999 171
deceleration

— 65 H300 Retry selection 0 to 5 1 0 208

Stall prevention operation
— 66 H611 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 214
reduction starting frequency
Number of retries at fault
67 H301 0 to 10, 101 to 110 1 0 208
occurrence
Retry

68 H302 Retry waiting time 0.1 to 600 s 0.1 s 1s 208

69 H303 Retry count display erase 0 1 0 208
Special regenerative brake
— 70 G107 0% to 100% 0.1% 0% 386
duty
[200 V class / 400 V
class]
0, 3, 5, 6, 10, 13, 15,
16, 20, 23, 40, 43, 50,
294,
53, 70, 73, 8090, 8093,
— 71 C100 Applied motor 1 0 299,
9090, 9093
308
[575 V class]
0, 3, 5, 6, 10, 13, 15,
16, 8090, 8093, 9090,
9093

3. Parameters
3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)
53
 Minimum Initial
Pr. value*1 Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group to page setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
— 72 E600 PWM frequency selection 0 to 15 1 1 146
— 73 T000 Analog input selection 0, 1, 6, 10, 11, 16 1 1 266
— 74 T002 Input filter time constant 0 to 8 1 1 271
Reset selection/
— disconnected PU detection/ 0 to 3, 14 to 17 14
PU stop selection
— 75 1 128
E100 Reset selection
0
E101 Disconnected PU detection 0, 1
E102 PU stop selection 1
— 77 E400 Parameter write selection 0 to 2 1 0 135
Reverse rotation prevention
— 78 D020 0 to 2 1 0 193
selection
Operation mode 174,
— 79 D000 0 to 4, 6, 7 1 0
selection Simple 184
86,
80 C101 Motor capacity 0.1 to 30 kW, 9999 0.01 kW 9999 299,
308
86,
81 C102 Number of motor poles 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 9999 1 9999 299,
308
82 C125 Motor excitation current 0 to 500 A, 9999 0.01 A 9999 299
[200 V class]
200 V
86,
[400 V class]
83 C104 Rated motor voltage 0 to 1000 V 0.1 V 299,
400 V
308
[575 V class]
575 V
86,
Motor constant

84 C105 Rated motor frequency 10 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 299,
308
Speed control gain
89 G932 (Advanced magnetic flux 0% to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 90
vector)
299,
90 C120 Motor constant (R1) 0 to 50 Ω, 9999 0.001Ω 9999 308,
358
91 C121 Motor constant (R2) 0 to 50 Ω, 9999 0.001Ω 9999 299
Motor constant (L1)/d-axis 299,
92 C122 0 to 6000 mH, 9999 0.1 mH 9999
inductance (Ld) 308
Motor constant (L2)/q-axis 299,
93 C123 0 to 6000 mH, 9999 0.1 mH 9999
inductance (Lq) 308
94 C124 Motor constant (X) 0% to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 299
95 C111 Online auto tuning selection 0, 1 1 0 315
299,
96 C110 Auto tuning setting/status 0, 1, 11 1 0 308,
358

54 3. Parameters
3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)
 Pr.100 to Pr.199
Minimum Initial 1
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting value*1
group to page setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2

117 N020
PU communication station
number
0 to 31 1 0 *6
2
48, 96, 192, 384, 576, *6
118 N021 PU communication speed 1 192
768, 1152

—
PU communication stop bit
0, 1, 10, 11 1 3
PU connector communication

length / data length

PU communication data *6
119 N022 0, 1 1 0
length

N023
PU communication stop bit
length
0, 1 1 4
PU communication parity *6
120 N024 0 to 2 1 2
check

121 N025
PU communication retry
0 to 10, 9999 1 1 *6 5
count
PU communication check *6
122 N026 0, 0.1 to 999.8 s, 9999 0.1 s 0
time interval

123 N027
PU communication waiting
0 to 150 ms, 9999 1 ms 9999 *6 6
time setting
PU communication CR/LF *6
124 N028 0 to 2 1 1
selection

— 125 T022
Terminal 2 frequency setting
0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 273
7
gain frequency Simple
Terminal 4 frequency setting
— 126 T042 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 273
gain frequency Simple
8
PID control automatic
127 A612 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 329
switchover frequency
0, 20, 21, 40 to 43, 50,
128 A610 PID action selection
51, 60, 61, 1000, 1001,
1 0
329, 9
1010, 1011, 2000, 344
2001, 2010, 2011
329,
129 A613 PID proportional band 0.1% to 1000%, 9999 0.1% 100%
10
PID operation

344
329,
130 A614 PID integral time 0.1 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 1s
344
329,
131 A601 PID upper limit 0% to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999
344
329,
132 A602 PID lower limit 0% to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999
344
329,
133 A611 PID action set point 0% to 100%, 9999 0.01% 9999
344
329,
134 A615 PID differential time 0.01 to 10 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999
344
— 145 E103 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
Acceleration/deceleration
— 147 F022 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 158
time switching frequency
Output current detection
Current detection

150 M460 0% to 400% 0.1% 150% 260

level
Output current detection
151 M461 0 to 10 s 0.1 s 0s 260
signal delay time
152 M462 Zero current detection level 0% to 400% 0.1% 5% 260
153 M463 Zero current detection time 0 to 10 s 0.01 s 0.5 s 260
Voltage reduction selection
— 154 H631 during stall prevention 1, 11 1 1 214
operation
Stall prevention operation
— 156 H501 0 to 31, 100, 101 1 0 214
selection
100,
— 157 M430 OL signal output timer 0 to 25 s, 9999 0.1 s 0s
214

3. Parameters
3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)
55
 Minimum Initial
Pr. value*1 Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group to page setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
1 to 3, 5 to 12, 14, 17,
AM terminal function 18, 21, 24, 32, 33, 50,
— 158 M301 1 1 237
selection [E800-4][E800-5] 52 to 54, 61, 62, 67,
70, 91, 97
User group read
— 160 E440 0, 1, 9999 1 0 143
selection Simple
Frequency setting/key lock
— 161 E200 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 130
operation selection
Automatic restart after 351,
Current detection Automatic restart

162 A700 instantaneous power failure 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 356,

selection 358

Stall prevention operation

165 A710 0% to 400% 0.1% 150% 351
level for restart

Output current detection

166 M433 0 to 10 s, 9999 0.1 s 0.1 s 260
signal retention time

Output current detection

167 M464 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 260
operation selection

E000
— 168
E080
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
E001
— 169
E081
170 M020 Watt-hour meter clear 0, 10, 9999 1 9999 228
User group Cumulative monitor

171 M030 Operation hour meter clear 0, 9999 1 9999 228

User group registered

172 E441 9999, (0 to 16) 1 0 143
display/batch clear
173 E442 User group registration 0 to 1999, 9999 1 9999 143
174 E443 User group clear 0 to 1999, 9999 1 9999 143

56 3. Parameters
3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)
 Minimum Initial
Pr. value*1 Refer Customer
Function Pr.
group
Name Setting range setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
to page setting 1
0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14
to 16, 18, 24 to 27, 30,
STF/DI0 terminal function
178 T700
selection
37, 46, 47, 50, 51, 60, 1
62, 65 to 67, 72, 92,
60 283
2
9999
0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14

179 T701
STR/DI1 terminal function
to 16, 18, 24 to 27, 30,
37, 46, 47, 50, 51, 61, 1 61 283 3
selection
Input terminal function assignment

62, 65 to 67, 72, 92,

9999
RL terminal function
180 T702
selection
1 0 283 4
RM terminal function [E800]
181 T703 0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14 1 1 283
selection
to 16, 18, 24 to 27, 30,
182 T704
RH terminal function
selection
37, 46, 47, 50, 51, 62, 1 2 283 5
65 to 67, 72, 92, 9999
MRS terminal function [E800-E]
183 T709 1 24 283
selection 0 to 4, 8, 14, 15, 18, 24,

RES terminal function

26, 27, 30, 37, 46, 47,
50, 51, 72, 92, 9999
[E800]
62
6
184 T711 1 283
selection [E800-E]
9999
185
186
T751
T752
NET X1 input selection
NET X2 input selection
1 283
7
0 to 4, 8, 14, 15, 18, 24, 1 283
187 T753 NET X3 input selection 26, 27, 30, 37, 46, 47, 1 9999 283
188 T754 NET X4 input selection 50, 51, 72, 92, 9999 1 283
189 T755 NET X5 input selection 1 283 8

10

3. Parameters
3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)
57
 Minimum Initial
Pr. value*1 Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group to page setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2

0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16,
20, 25, 26, 34, 35, 39
RUN terminal function to 41, 44 to 48, 57, 64,
190 M400 70, 80, 81, 90 to 93, 1 0 250
selection
95, 96, 98, 99, 100,
101, 103, 104, 107,
108, 111 to 116, 120,
125, 126, 134, 135,
139 to 141, 144 to 148,
157, 164, 170, 180,
181, 190 to 193, 195,
FU terminal function 196, 198, 199, 206,
191 M404 1 4 250
selection 211 to 213, 242 [E800-
E], 306, 311 to 313,
342 [E800-E]

0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16,
20, 25, 26, 34, 35, 39,
Output terminal function assignment

40, 41, 44 to 48, 57,

64, 70, 80, 81, 82
[E800-EPA], 90, 91,
95, 96, 98, 99, 100,
101, 103, 104, 107,
108, 111 to 116, 120,
ABC terminal function
192 M405 125, 126, 134, 135, 1 99 250
selection
139, 140, 141, 144 to
148, 157, 164, 170,
180, 181, 182 [E800-
EPA], 190, 191, 195,
196, 198, 199, 206,
211 to 213, 242 [E800-
E], 306, 311 to 313,
342 [E800-E]
0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16,
20, 25, 26, 34, 35, 39
193 M451 NET Y1 output selection 1 9999 250
to 41, 44 to 48, 57, 64,
70, 80, 81, 90 to 93,
95, 98, 99, 100, 101,
103, 104, 107, 108,
194 M452 NET Y2 output selection 111 to 116, 120, 125, 1 9999 250
126, 134, 135, 139 to
141, 144 to 148, 157,
164, 170, 180, 181,
195 M453 NET Y3 output selection 190 to 193, 195, 198, 1 9999 250
199, 206, 211 to 213,
242 [E800-E], 306, 311
to 313, 342 [E800-E]
196 M454 NET Y4 output selection 1 9999 250

— 198 E709 Display corrosion level (1 to 3) 1 1 148

 Pr.200 to Pr.299
Minimum Initial
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting value*1
group to page setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
Multi-speed setting

232 to D308 to Multi-speed setting (speed 8

0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 195
239 D315 to speed 15)

Soft-PWM operation
— 240 E601 0, 1 1 1 146
selection

58 3. Parameters
3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)
 Minimum Initial
Pr. value*1 Refer Customer
Function Pr.
group
Name Setting range setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
to page setting 1
Analog input display unit
— 241 M043 0, 1 1 0 273
switchover

— 244 H100
Cooling fan operation
selection
0, 1 1 1 203 2
245 G203 Rated slip 0% to 50%, 9999 0.01% 9999 393
Slip compensation

Slip compensation time

246 G204 0.01 to 10 s 0.01 s 0.5 s 393
constant 3
Constant output range slip
247 G205 0, 9999 1 9999 393
compensation selection
4
Earth (ground) fault detection
— 249 H101 0, 1 1 0 1 204
at start
0 to 100 s, 1000 to
— 250 G106 Stop selection
1100 s, 8888, 9999
0.1 s 9999 384
5
Output phase loss protection
— 251 H200 0, 1 1 1 207
selection
255 E700 Life alarm status display (0 to 879) 1 0 148
Inrush current limit circuit life 6
256 E701 (0% to 100%) 1% 100% 148
display
Life check

Control circuit capacitor life

257 E702 (0% to 100%) 1% 100% 148
display
Main circuit capacitor life
7
258 E703 (0% to 100%) 1% 100% 148
display
Main circuit capacitor life
259 E704 0, 1 1 0 148
measuring
PWM frequency automatic
8
— 260 E602 0, 10 1 10 146
switchover
Power failure stop

9
261 A730 Power failure stop selection 0 to 2 1 0 146

10
— 267 T001 Terminal 4 input selection 0 to 2 1 0 266
Monitor decimal digits
— 268 M022 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 228
selection
— 269 E023 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
Stop-on-contact control
270 A200 0, 1, 11 1 0 324
selection
Stop-on-contact

Stop-on contact excitation

275 A205 current low-speed scaling 0% to 300%, 9999 0.1% 9999 324
control

factor
PWM carrier frequency at
276 A206 0 to 9, 9999 1 9999 324
stop-on contact
Stall prevention operation
277 H630 0, 1 1 0 324
current switchover
278 A100 Brake opening frequency 0 to 30 Hz 0.01 Hz 3 Hz 320
Brake sequence

279 A101 Brake opening current 0% to 400% 0.1% 130% 320

Brake opening current
280 A102 0 to 2 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 320
detection time
281 A103 Brake operation time at start 0 to 5 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 320
282 A104 Brake operation frequency 0 to 30 Hz 0.01 Hz 6 Hz 320
283 A105 Brake operation time at stop 0 to 5 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 320
Speed deviation excess
— 285 H416 0 to 30 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 109
detection frequency
286 G400 Droop gain 0% to 100% 0.1% 0% 394
Droop control

287 G401 Droop filter time constant 0 to 1 s 0.01 s 0.3 s 394

3. Parameters
3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)
59
 Minimum Initial
Pr. value*1 Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group to page setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
— 289 M431 Inverter output terminal filter 5 to 50 ms, 9999 1 ms 9999 250
Monitor negative output 228,
— 290 M044 0, 1, 4, 5, 8, 9, 12, 13 1 0
selection 237
A110 Automatic acceleration/ 171,
— 292 0, 1, 7, 8, 11 1 0
F500 deceleration 320
Acceleration/deceleration
— 293 F513 0 to 2 1 0 171
separate selection
Frequency change increment
— 295 E201 0, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 0.01 0 132
amount setting
0 to 6, 99, 100 to 106,
Password

296 E410 Password lock level 1 9999 137

199, 9999
(0 to 5), 1000 to 9998,
297 E411 Password lock/unlock 1 9999 137
9999
299,
— 298 A711 Frequency search gain 0 to 32767, 9999 1 9999
358
Rotation direction detection
— 299 A701 0, 1, 9999 1 0 351
selection at restarting

 Pr.300 to Pr.399
Minimum Initial
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting value*1
group to page setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2

313*7 M410 DO0 output selection 1 9999 250

0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16,
20, 25, 26, 34, 35, 39
314*7 M411 DO1 output selection to 41, 44 to 48, 57, 64, 1 9999 250
70, 80, 81, 90 to 93,
95, 96, 98, 99, 100,
315*7 M412 DO2 output selection 1 9999 250
101, 103, 104, 107,
108, 111 to 116, 120,
316*7 M413 DO3 output selection 125, 126, 134, 135, 1 9999 250
139 to 141, 144 to 148,
157, 164, 170, 180,
CC-Link IE

317*7 M414 DO4 output selection

181, 190 to 193, 195,
1 9999 250
196, 198, 199, 206,
318*7 M415 DO5 output selection 211 to 213, 242 [E800- 1 9999 250
E], 306, 311 to 313,
342 [E800-E], 9999
319*7 M416 DO6 output selection 1 9999 250

0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16,
320*7 M420 RA1 output selection 1 0 250
20, 25, 26, 34, 35, 39
to 41, 44 to 48, 57, 64,
321*7 M421 RA2 output selection 70, 80, 81, 90, 91, 95, 1 1 250
96, 98, 99, 206, 211 to
213, 242 [E800-E],
322*7 M422 RA3 output selection
9999
1 4 250

Communication operation
338 D010 0, 1 1 0 185
command source
RS-485 communication

Communication speed
339 D011 0 to 2 1 0 185
command source
[E800]
Communication startup 0
340 D001 0, 1, 10 1 184
mode selection [E800-E]
10
Communication EEPROM *6
342 N001 0, 1 1 0
write selection
343 N080 Communication error count (0 to 999) 1 0 *6

Communication reset
— 349*8 N010
selection
0, 1 1 0 *6

— 374 H800 Overspeed detection level 0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 224
% setting reference *6
— 390 N054 1 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz
frequency

60 3. Parameters
3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)
 Pr.400 to Pr.499
Minimum Initial 1
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting value*1
group to page setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2

414 A800
PLC function operation
selection
0 to 2, 11, 12 1 0 364 2
PLC

Inverter operation lock mode

415 A801 0, 1 1 0 364
setting

442 N620
Default gateway address 1
[E800-E]
*6
3
Default gateway address 2 *6
Ethernet

443 N621
[E800-E]
0 to 255 1 0
444 N622
Default gateway address 3
[E800-E]
*6
4
Default gateway address 4 *6
445 N623
[E800-E]
[200 V class / 400 V 5
class]
0, 3, 5, 6, 10, 13, 15,
16, 20, 23, 40, 43, 50,
450 C200 Second applied motor
53, 70, 73, 8090, 8093,
9090, 9093
1 9999 294 6
[575 V class]
0, 3, 5, 6, 10, 13, 15,
16, 8090, 8093, 9090,
9093 7
Second motor control
451 G300 10 to 12, 20, 40, 9999 1 9999 86
method selection

453 C201 Second motor capacity 0.1 to 30 kW, 9999 0.01 kW 9999
299,
308
8
Number of second motor 299,
454 C202 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 9999 1 9999
poles 308
Second motor constant

455 C225
Second motor excitation
current
0 to 500 A, 9999 0.01 A 9999 299 9
[200 V class]
200 V
456 C204 Rated second motor voltage 0 to 1000 V 0.1 V
[400 V class]
400 V
299,
308
10
[575 V class]
575 V
Rated second motor 299,
457 C205 10 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999
frequency 308
299,
458 C220 Second motor constant (R1) 0 to 50 Ω, 9999 0.001 Ω 9999 308,
358
459 C221 Second motor constant (R2) 0 to 50 Ω, 9999 0.001 Ω 9999 299
Second motor constant (L1) / 299,
460 C222 0 to 6000 mH, 9999 0.1 mH 9999
d-axis inductance (Ld) 308
Second motor constant (L2) / 299,
461 C223 0 to 6000 mH, 9999 0.1 mH 9999
q-axis inductance (Lq) 308
462 C224 Second motor constant (X) 0% to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 299
299,
Second motor auto tuning
463 C210 0, 1, 11 1 0 308,
setting/status
358
495 M500 Remote output selection 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 263
Remote
output

496 M501 Remote output data 1 0 to 4095 1 0 263

497 M502 Remote output data 2 0 to 4095 1 0 263
PLC function flash memory
— 498 A804 0, 9696 (0 to 9999) 1 0 364
clear

3. Parameters
3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)
61
  Pr.500 to Pr.599
Minimum Initial
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting value*1
group to page setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
Stop mode selection at *6
— 502 N013 0 to 2, 6 1 0
communication error
503 E710 Maintenance timer 0 (0 to 9998) 1 0 152
Maintenance

Maintenance timer warning

504 E711 0 to 9998, 9999 1 9999 152
output set time

— 505 M001 Speed setting reference 1 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 226

Display estimated main
506 E705 (0% to 100%) 1% 100% 226
Life check

circuit capacitor residual life

507 E706 Display ABC relay contact 0% to 100% 1% 100%
226
life
509 E708 Display power cycle life (0% to 100%) 0.01% 100% 226
Frequency command sign
Communication

541 N100 0, 1 1 0 *6
selection [E800-E]

CC-Link extended setting 0, 1, 12, 14, 18, 100, *6

544 N103 1 0
[E800-E] 112, 114, 118

USB communication station *6

547 N040 0 to 31 1 0
number
USB

USB communication check *6

548 N041 0 to 999.8 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999
time interval
549 N000 Protocol selection 0, 1 1 0 *6

[E800]
Communication

NET mode operation 0, 2, 9999

550 D012 1 9999 185
command source selection [E800-E]
0, 5, 9999
[E800]
PU mode operation 2 to 4, 9999
551 D013 1 9999 185
command source selection [E800-E]
3, 4, 9999
553 A603 PID deviation limit 0% to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 329
Average current monitoring PID control

PID signal operation

554 A604 0 to 3, 10 to 13 1 0 329
selection

555 E720 Current average time 0.1 to 1 s 0.1 s 1s 153

556 E721 Data output mask time 0 to 20 s 0.1 s 0s 153

Current average value

Inverter rated
557 E722 monitor signal output 0 to 500 A 0.01 A 153
current
reference current

Second frequency search 299,

— 560 A712 0 to 32767, 9999 1 9999
gain 358
Energization time carrying-
— 563 M021 (0 to 65535) 1 0 228
over times
Operating time carrying-over
— 564 M031 (0 to 65535) 1 0 228
times

62 3. Parameters
3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)
 Minimum Initial
Pr. value*1 Refer Customer
Function
Multiple rating Second motor constant
Pr.
group
Name Setting range setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
to page setting 1

2
Second motor speed control
569 G942 0% to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 90
gain

4
570 E301 Multiple rating setting 1, 2 1 2 134

— 571 F103 Holding time at a start 0 to 10 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 169 5

Second motor online auto
— 574 C211 0, 1 1 0 315
tuning

575 A621
Output interruption detection
time
0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 1s 329 6
PID control

Output interruption detection

576 A622 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 329
level

577 A623
Output interruption cancel
level
900% to 1100% 0.1% 1000% 329 7
592 A300 Traverse function selection 0 to 2 1 0 327
593 A301 Maximum amplitude amount 0% to 25% 0.1% 10% 327
Amplitude compensation 8
Traverse

594 A302 0% to 50% 0.1% 10% 327

amount during deceleration
Amplitude compensation
595 A303 0% to 50% 0.1% 10% 327
amount during acceleration
596 A304 Amplitude acceleration time 0.1 to 3600 s 0.1 s 5s 327 9
597 A305 Amplitude deceleration time 0.1 to 3600 s 0.1 s 5s 327

 Pr.600 to Pr.699
10
Minimum Initial
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting value*1
group to page setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
PID set point/deviation input 329,
PID control

609 A624 2 to 5 1 2
selection 344
PID measured value input 329,
610 A625 2 to 5 1 3
selection 344
351,
— 611 F003 Acceleration time at a restart 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999
356
Inverter output fault
— 631 H182 detection enable/disable 0, 1 1 0 205
selection
Brake opening current
Speed smoothing control Brake sequence

639 A108 0, 1 1 0 320

selection

Brake operation frequency

640 A109 0, 1 1 0 320
selection

653 G410 Speed smoothing control 0% to 200% 0.1% 0% 395

Speed smoothing cutoff

654 G411 0 to 120 Hz 0.01 Hz 20 Hz 395
frequency

3. Parameters
3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)
63
 Minimum Initial
Pr. value*1 Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group to page setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
Regeneration avoidance
— 665 G125 0% to 200% 0.1% 100% 390
frequency gain
SF-PR slip amount
adjustment operation
— 673 G060 2, 4, 6, 9999 1 9999 381
selection [200 V class / 400 V
class]
SF-PR slip amount
— 674 G061 adjustment gain [200 V class / 0% to 500% 0.1% 100% 381
400 V class]
User parameter auto storage
— 675 A805 1, 9999 1 9999 364
function selection
— 699 T740 Input terminal filter 5 to 50 ms, 9999 1 ms 9999 283

 Pr.700 to Pr.799
Minimum Initial
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting value*1
group to page setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
702 C106 Maximum motor frequency 0 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 308
Induced voltage constant 0 to 5000 mV (rad/s), 0.1 mV
706 C130 9999 308
(phi f) 9999 (rad/s)
707 C107 Motor inertia (integer) 10 to 999, 9999 1 9999 308
711 C131 Motor Ld decay ratio 0% to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 308
712 C132 Motor Lq decay ratio 0% to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 308
Motor constant

Starting resistance tuning

717 C182 0% to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 308
compensation coefficient 1
Starting resistance tuning
720 C188 0% to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 308
compensation coefficient
Starting magnetic pole
721 C185 position detection pulse 0 to 6000 μs, 9999 1 μs 9999 308
width
724 C108 Motor inertia (exponent) 0 to 7, 9999 1 9999 308
Motor protection current
725 C133 100% to 500%, 9999 0.1% 9999 308
level
Device instance number *6
728 N052 0 to 419 1 0
Ethernet

(Upper 3 digits) [E800-EPA]

Device instance number *6
729 N053 0 to 9999 1 0
(Lower 4 digits) [E800-EPA]
Starting resistance tuning
737 C288 0% to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 308
compensation coefficient 2
Second motor induced 0 to 5000 mV (rad/s), 0.1 mV
738 C230 9999 308
voltage constant (phi f) 9999 (rad/s)
739 C231 Second motor Ld decay ratio 0% to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 308
740 C232 Second motor Lq decay ratio 0% to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 308
Second motor starting
Motor constant

741 C282 resistance tuning 0% to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 308

compensation coefficient 1
Second motor magnetic pole
742 C285 0 to 6000 μs, 9999 1 μs 9999 308
detection pulse width
Second motor maximum
743 C206 0 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 308
frequency
Second motor inertia
744 C207 10 to 999, 9999 1 9999 308
(integer)
Second motor inertia
745 C208 0 to 7, 9999 1 9999 308
(exponent)
Second motor protection
746 C233 100% to 500%, 9999 0.1% 9999 308
current level
— 759 A600 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

64 3. Parameters
3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)
 Minimum Initial
Pr. value*1 Refer Customer
Function Pr.
group
Name Setting range setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
to page setting 1
[E800][E800-EPB]
Operation panel monitor 1 to 3, 5 to 12, 14, 17,
774 M101 1 9999 228
selection 1 18, 20, 23 to 25, 32, 2
33, 38, 40 to 42, 44,
45, 50 to 57, 61, 62,
Monitoring

67, 91, 97, 100, 9999

Operation panel monitor
775 M102
selection 2
[E800-EPA]
1 to 3, 5 to 12, 14, 17,
1 9999 228 3
18, 20, 23 to 25, 32,
33, 38, 40 to 42, 44,

776 M103
Operation panel monitor 45, 50 to 57, 61, 62,
67, 83, 91, 97, 100, 1 9999 228 4
selection 3
9999

Operation frequency during

— 779 N014
communication error
0 to 590 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 *6
5
Acceleration time in low-
— 791 F070 0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 158
speed range
Deceleration time in low-
— 792 F071
speed range
0 to 3600 s, 9999 0.1 s 9999 158 6
 Pr.800 to Pr.999
Pr.
Minimum Initial
Refer Customer
7
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting value*1
group to page setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
— 800 G200 Control method selection 10 to 12, 19, 20, 40 1 40 86

— 801 H704 Output limit level 0% to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999

100, 8
117
Constant output range 100,
803 G210 torque characteristic 0 to 2, 10 1 0 117
9
Torque command

selection
Torque command source
804 D400 0, 1, 3 to 6 1 0 117
selection

805 D401
Torque command value
(RAM)
600% to 1400% 1% 1000% 117 10
Torque command value
806 D402 600% to 1400% 1% 1000% 117
(RAM, EEPROM)
807 H410 Speed limit selection 0, 1 1 0 120
Speed limit

808 H411 Speed limit 0 to 400 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 120

809 H412 Reverse-side speed limit 0 to 400 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 9999 120

Torque limit input method

810 H700 0 to 2 1 0 100
selection
100,
811 D030 Set resolution switchover 0, 10 1 0
226
Torque limit level
812 H701 0% to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 100
(regeneration)
Torque limit

Torque limit level (3rd

813 H702 0% to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 100
quadrant)
Torque limit level (4th
814 H703 0% to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 100
quadrant)
815 H710 Torque limit level 2 0% to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 100
Torque limit level during
816 H720 0% to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 100
acceleration
Torque limit level during
817 H721 0% to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 100
deceleration

3. Parameters
3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)
65
 Minimum Initial
Pr. value*1 Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group to page setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
820 G211 Speed control P gain 1 0% to 1000% 1% 60% 107
821 G212 Speed control integral time 1 0 to 20 s 0.001 s 0.333 s 107
822 T003 Speed setting filter 1 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 271
Torque control P gain 1
824 G213 (current loop proportional 0% to 500% 1% 100% 122
gain)
Torque control integral time 1
825 G214 0 to 500 ms 0.1 ms 5 ms 122
(current loop integral time)
Adjustment

826 T004 Torque setting filter 1 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 271

830 G311 Speed control P gain 2 0% to 1000%, 9999 1% 9999 107
831 G312 Speed control integral time 2 0 to 20 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 107
832 T005 Speed setting filter 2 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 271
Torque control P gain 2
834 G313 (current loop proportional 0% to 500%, 9999 1% 9999 122
gain)
Torque control integral time 2
835 G314 0 to 500 ms, 9999 0.1 ms 9999 122
(current loop integral time)
836 T006 Torque setting filter 2 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.001 s 9999 271
Analog input offset
849 T007 0% to 200% 0.1% 100% 271
adjustment
850 G103 Brake operation selection 0, 1 1 0 382
853 H417 Speed deviation time 0 to 100 s 0.1 s 1s 109
Additional function

100,
Terminal 4 function
858 T040 0, 4, 9999 1 0 214,
assignment
270
Torque current/Rated PM 299,
859 C126 0 to 500 A, 9999 0.01 A 9999
motor current 308
Second motor torque
299,
860 C226 current/Rated PM motor 0 to 500 A, 9999 0.01 A 9999
308
current
864 M470 Torque detection 0% to 400% 0.1% 150% 262
865 M446 Low speed detection 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 1.5 Hz 257
Indication

866 M042 Torque monitoring reference 0% to 400% 0.1% 150% 228

AM output filter [E800-

— 867 M321 0 to 5 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 241
4][E800-5]
— 870 M440 Speed detection hysteresis 0 to 15 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 257
Input phase loss protection
Protective

872 H201 0, 1 1 1 207

function

selection

874 H730 OLT level setting 0% to 400% 0.1% 150% 100

Regeneration avoidance
882 G120 0 to 2 1 0 390
operation selection
Regeneration avoidance

[200 V class]
400 V
Regeneration avoidance [400 V class]
883 G121 300 to 1200 V 0.1 V 390
operation level 780 V
[575 V class]
944 V
Regeneration avoidance
885 G123 compensation frequency 0 to 45 Hz, 9999 0.01 Hz 6 Hz 390
limit value
Regeneration avoidance
886 G124 0% to 200% 0.1% 100% 390
voltage gain
888 E420 Free parameter 1 0 to 9999 1 9999 140
Free parameter

889 E421 Free parameter 2 0 to 9999 1 9999 140

66 3. Parameters
3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)
 Minimum Initial
Pr. value*1 Refer Customer
Function Pr.
group
Name Setting range setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
to page setting 1
Cumulative power monitor 228,
891 M023 0 to 4, 9999 1 9999
digit shifted times 244
892 M200 Load factor
Energy saving monitor
30% to 150% 0.1% 100%
Inverter rated
244
2
893 M201 0.1 to 30 kW 0.01 kW 244
Energy saving monitoring

reference (motor capacity) capacity

Control selection during
894 M202 commercial power-supply
operation
0 to 3 1 0 244 3
Power saving rate reference
895 M203 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 244
value
896 M204 Power unit cost 0 to 500, 9999 0.01 9999 244 4
Power saving monitor
897 M205 0 to 1000 h, 9999 1h 9999 244
average time
Power saving cumulative
898 M206
monitor clear
0, 1, 10, 9999 1 9999 244
5
Operation time rate
899 M207 0% to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 244
(estimated value)
990 E104
—
991 E105
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set. 6
0 to 3, 5 to 12, 14, 17,
Monitoring

18, 20, 23 to 25, 32,

Operation panel setting dial
992 M104
push monitor selection
33, 38, 40 to 42, 44,
45, 50 to 57, 61, 62,
1 0 228
7
67, 91, 97, 100
— 997 H103 Fault initiation 0 to 255, 9999 1 9999 206

— 998 E430
PM parameter
initialization Simple
0, 8009, 8109, 9009,
9109,
1 0 92 8
Automatic parameter
— 999 E431 10, 12, 20, 21, 9999 1 9999 141
setting Simple
9
 Pr.1000 to Pr.1099
Minimum Initial
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr.
group
Name Setting range setting
increments
value*1
to page setting 10
Gr.1 Gr.2
— 1000 E108 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
Lq tuning target current
— 1002 C150 50% to 150%, 9999 0.1% 9999 308
adjustment coefficient
1006 E020 Clock (year) 2000 to 2099 1 2000 127
Clock

1007 E021 Clock (month, day) Jan. 1 to Dec. 31 1 101 127

1008 E022 Clock (hour, minute) 0:00 to 23:59 1 0 127
Integral stop selection at
— 1015 A607 0 to 2 1 0 329
limited frequency

3. Parameters
3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)
67
 Minimum Initial
Pr. value*1 Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group to page setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
1020 A900 Trace operation selection 0 to 3 1 0 366
1, 2, 5, 10, 50, 100,
1022 A902 Sampling cycle 1 1 366
500, 1000
1023 A903 Number of analog channels 1 to 8 1 4 366
1024 A904 Sampling auto start 0, 1 1 0 366
1025 A905 Trigger mode selection 0 to 4 1 0 366
Number of sampling before
1026 A906 0% to 100% 1% 90% 366
trigger
Analog source selection
1027 A910 201 366
(1ch)
Analog source selection
1028 A911 202 366
(2ch)
Analog source selection
1029 A912 1 to 3, 5 to 12, 14, 17, 203 366
(3ch)
18, 20, 23, 24, 32, 33,
Analog source selection
1030 A913 40 to 42, 52 to 54, 61, 204 366
(4ch)
62, 67, 83 [E800-EPA], 1
Analog source selection 91, 97, 201 to 210,
1031 A914 205 366
(5ch)
212, 213, 230 to 232,
Analog source selection 235 to 238
1032 A915 206 366
Trace

(6ch)
Analog source selection
1033 A916 207 366
(7ch)
Analog source selection
1034 A917 208 366
(8ch)
1035 A918 Analog trigger channel 1 to 8 1 1 366
Analog trigger operation
1036 A919 0, 1 1 0 366
selection
1037 A920 Analog trigger level 600 to 1400 1 1000 366
1038 A930 Digital source selection (1ch) 0 366
1039 A931 Digital source selection (2ch) 0 366
1040 A932 Digital source selection (3ch) 0 366
1041 A933 Digital source selection (4ch) 0 366
0 to 255 1
1042 A934 Digital source selection (5ch) 0 366
1043 A935 Digital source selection (6ch) 0 366
1044 A936 Digital source selection (7ch) 0 366
1045 A937 Digital source selection (8ch) 0 366
1046 A938 Digital trigger channel 1 to 8 1 1 366
Digital trigger operation
1047 A939 0, 1 1 0 366
selection

 Pr.1100 to Pr.1399
Minimum Initial
Pr. value*1 Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group to page setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
Deceleration time at
— 1103 F040 0 to 3600 s 0.1 s 5s 158
emergency stop
1106 M050 Torque monitor filter 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 228
Monitoring

1107 M051 Running speed monitor filter 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 228
Excitation current monitor
1108 M052 0 to 5 s, 9999 0.01 s 9999 228
filter
Station number in inverter-to- *6
— 1124 N681 0 to 5, 9999 1 9999
inverter link [E800-E]
Number of inverters in
— 1125 N682 inverter-to-inverter link 2 to 6 1 2 *6
system [E800-E]
PLC function

1150 to A810 to PLC function user

0 to 65535 1 0 364
1199 A859 parameters 1 to 50

68 3. Parameters
3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)
 Minimum Initial
Pr. value*1 Refer Customer
Function Pr.
group
Name Setting range setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
to page setting 1
AM output offset calibration
— 1200 M390 2700 to 3300 1 3000 241
[E800-4][E800-5]

— 1399 N649
Inverter identification enable/
disable selection [E800-E]
0, 1 1 1
*6
2
 Pr.1400 to Pr.1499
Minimum Initial 3
Pr. Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting value*1
group to page setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2

— 1412 C135
Motor induced voltage
constant (phi f) exponent
0 to 2, 9999 1 9999 308 4
Second motor induced
— 1413 C235 voltage constant (phi f) 0 to 2, 9999 1 9999 308
exponent
Ethernet communication *6
5
1424 N650 1 to 239 1 1
network number
Ethernet communication *6
1425 N651 1 to 120 1 1
station number
Link speed and duplex mode
6
1426 N641 0 to 4 1 0 *6
selection
Ethernet function selection

[E800-EPA]
1427 N630 Ethernet function selection 1 502, 5000 to 5002,
5006 to 5008, 5010 to
1 5001 *6
7
5013, 44818, 45237, *6
1428 N631 Ethernet function selection 2 1 45237
45238, 47808, 61450,
9999
[E800-EPB] *6
8
1429 N632 Ethernet function selection 3 1 45238
502, 5000 to 5002,
5006 to 5008, 5010 to
Ethernet function selection 4 5013, 34962, 45237,
1430 N633
45238, 61450, 9999
1 9999 *6
9
Ethernet signal loss *6
1431 N643 0 to 3 1 3
detection function selection

1432 N644
Ethernet communication
check time interval
0 to 999.8 s, 9999 0.1 s 1.5 *6
10

3. Parameters
3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)
69
 Minimum Initial
Pr. value*1 Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group to page setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
1434 N600 Ethernet IP address 1 0 to 255 1 192 *6

1435 N601 Ethernet IP address 2 0 to 255 1 168 *6

1436 N602 Ethernet IP address 3 0 to 255 1 50 *6

1437 N603 Ethernet IP address 4 0 to 255 1 1 *6

1438 N610 Subnet mask 1 0 to 255 1 255 *6

1439 N611 Subnet mask 2 0 to 255 1 255 *6

1440 N612 Subnet mask 3 0 to 255 1 255 *6

1441 N613 Subnet mask 4 0 to 255 1 0 *6

1442 N660 Ethernet IP filter address 1 0 to 255 1 0 *6

1443 N661 Ethernet IP filter address 2 0 to 255 1 0 *6

1444 N662 Ethernet IP filter address 3 0 to 255 1 0 *6

1445 N663 Ethernet IP filter address 4 0 to 255 1 0 *6

Ethernet IP filter address 2 *6

1446 N664 0 to 255, 9999 1 9999
range specification
Ethernet IP filter address 3 *6
1447 N665 0 to 255, 9999 1 9999
range specification
Ethernet

Ethernet IP filter address 4 *6

1448 N666 0 to 255, 9999 1 9999
range specification
Ethernet command source *6
1449 N670 0 to 255 1 0
selection IP address 1
Ethernet command source *6
1450 N671 0 to 255 1 0
selection IP address 2
Ethernet command source *6
1451 N672 0 to 255 1 0
selection IP address 3
Ethernet command source *6
1452 N673 0 to 255 1 0
selection IP address 4
Ethernet command source
1453 N674 selection IP address 3 range 0 to 255, 9999 1 9999 *6
specification
Ethernet command source
1454 N675 selection IP address 4 range 0 to 255, 9999 1 9999 *6
specification
1455 N642 Keepalive time 1 to 7200 s 1 60 s *6

1456 N647 Network diagnosis selection 0 to 2, 9999 1 9999 *6

Extended setting for Ethernet

1457 N648 signal loss detection 0 to 3, 8888, 9999 1 9999 *6
function selection

70 3. Parameters
3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)
 Minimum Initial
Pr. value*1 Refer Customer
Function Pr.
group
Name Setting range setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
to page setting 1
Load characteristics
1480 H520 0, 1 (2 to 5, 81 to 85) 1 0 219
measurement mode

1481 H521
Load characteristics load
reference 1
0% to 400%, 8888,
9999
0.1% 9999 219 2
Load characteristics load 0% to 400%, 8888,
1482 H522 0.1% 9999 219
reference 2 9999

1483 H523
Load characteristics load
reference 3
0% to 400%, 8888,
9999
0.1% 9999 219 3
Load characteristics fault detection

Load characteristics load 0% to 400%, 8888,

1484 H524 0.1% 9999 219
reference 4 9999

1485 H525
Load characteristics load 0% to 400%, 8888,
0.1% 9999 219 4
reference 5 9999
Load characteristics
1486 H526 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 219
maximum frequency

1487 H527
Load characteristics
0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 6 Hz 219
5
minimum frequency
Upper limit warning detection
1488 H531 0% to 400%, 9999 0.1% 20% 219
width

1489 H532
Lower limit warning
0% to 400%, 9999 0.1% 20% 219
6
detection width
Upper limit fault detection
1490 H533 0% to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 219
width
Lower limit fault detection 7
1491 H534 0% to 400%, 9999 0.1% 9999 219
width
Load status detection signal
1492 H535 delay time / load reference 0 to 60 s 0.1 s 1s 219
measurement waiting time 8
 Alphabet (calibration parameters, etc.)
Pr.
Minimum Initial
Refer Customer
9
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting value*1
group to page setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
FM terminal calibration
C0 M310
[E800-1]
— — — 241
10
AM terminal calibration
C1 M320 — — — 241
[E800-4][E800-5]
Terminal 2 frequency setting
C2 T200 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 273
bias frequency
Terminal 2 frequency setting
C3 T201 0% to 300% 0.1% 0% 273
bias
Terminal 2 frequency setting
125 T202 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 273
gain frequency
Terminal 2 frequency setting
Calibration parameter

C4 T203 0% to 300% 0.1% 100% 273

gain
Terminal 4 frequency setting
C5 T400 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 Hz 273
bias frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting
C6 T401 0% to 300% 0.1% 20% 273
bias
Terminal 4 frequency setting
126 T402 0 to 590 Hz 0.01 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 273
gain frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting
C7 T403 0% to 300% 0.1% 100% 273
gain
Terminal 4 bias command
C38 T410 0% to 400% 0.1% 0% 273
(torque/magnetic flux)
Terminal 4 bias (torque/
C39 T411 0% to 300% 0.1% 20% 273
magnetic flux)
Terminal 4 gain command
C40 T412 0% to 400% 0.1% 150% 273
(torque/magnetic flux)
Terminal 4 gain (torque/
C41 T413 0% to 300% 0.1% 100% 278
magnetic flux)

3. Parameters
3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)
71
 Minimum Initial
Pr. value*1 Refer Customer
Function Pr. Name Setting range setting
group to page setting
increments Gr.1 Gr.2
C42 A630 PID display bias coefficient 0 to 500, 9999 0.01 9999 342
Clear parameters PID display

C43 A631 PID display bias analog value 0% to 300% 0.1% 20% 342
C44 A632 PID display gain coefficient 0 to 500, 9999 0.01 9999 342
C45 A633 PID display gain analog value 0% to 300% 0.1% 100% 342
PR.CL Parameter clear (0), 1 1 0 398
ALLC All parameter clear (0), 1 1 0 398

ER.CL Fault history clear (0), 1 1 0 400

— PR.CH Initial value change list — 1 0 82

— PM PM initialization 0 1 0 92
— AUTO Automatic parameter setting — — — 141
— PR.MD Group parameter setting (0), 1, 2 1 0 73
*1 Gr.1 and Gr.2 are the parameter initial value groups. (Refer to page 82).
*2 Differs depending on the capacity.
6%: FR-E820-0050(0.75K) or lower, FR-E840-0026(0.75K) or lower
5%: FR-E860-0017(0.75K)
4%: FR-E820-0080(1.5K) to FR-E820-0175(3.7K), FR-E840-0040(1.5K) to FR-E840-0095(3.7K)
3%: FR-E820-0240(5.5K) or higher, FR-E840-0120(5.5K) or higher, FR-E860-0027(1.5K) to 0040(2.2K)
2%: FR-E860-0061(3.7K) or higher
*3 Differs depending on the capacity.
5 s: FR-E820-0175(3.7K) or lower, FR-E840-0095(3.7K) or lower, FR-E860-0061(3.7K) or lower
10 s: FR-E820-0240(5.5K) or higher, FR-E840-0120(5.5K) or higher, FR-E860-0090(5.5K) or higher
*4 Differs depending on the capacity.
6%: FR-E820-0015(0.2K) or lower
4%: FR-E820-0030(0.4K) to FR-E820-0330(7.5K), FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to FR-E840-0170(7.5K)
1%: FR-E860-0017(0.75K) to FR-E860-0120(7.5K)
*5 For the Ethernet model, the setting is available only when the FR-A8AY is installed.
*6 For details, refer to the Instruction Manual (Communication).
*7 Available when the PLC function is enabled. (Pr.313 to Pr.315 are always available for settings in the Ethernet model.)
*8 For the standard model, the setting is available only when a communication option is installed.

72 3. Parameters
3.1 Parameter list (by parameter number)
3.2 Use of a function group number for the 1
identification of parameters
2
A parameter identification number shown on the PU can be switched from a parameter number to a function group number.
As parameters are grouped by function and displayed by the group, the related parameters can be set continually at a time.

 Changing a parameter identification number to a function group number 3

Pr.MD setting Description

0
The setting of parameter identification number remains the same as
the last setting. 4
The parameter number is used for the identification of parameters,
1
and displayed in numerical order.

2
The function group number is used for the identification of
parameters, and displayed in alphanumeric order.
5
Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
6
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Selecting the parameter setting mode 7

Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears on
the 12-segment LCD display.)

3. Selecting a parameter 8
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until "Pr.MD" (Group parameter setting) appears.
Press the SET key to confirm the selection. "0" (initial value) will appear.
9
4. Selecting the use of the function group number
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key to change the value to "2" (function group number). Press the SET
key to confirm the Group parameter setting. "2" blinks after the setting is completed.
10
 Selecting a parameter by function group number to change its setting
The following shows the procedure to change the setting of P.H400 (Pr.1) Maximum frequency.

Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode

Press the PU/EXT key to choose the PU operation mode. [PU] indicator turns ON.

3. Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter group number read previously
appears.)

4. Enabling the function group selection

Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until "H4.." (Protective function parameter 4) appears. Press the
SET key to confirm the selection. "H4--" will appear, which shows that the operation panel is ready for selection of
a number in the group of monitor parameter 4.

5. Selecting a parameter
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until "H400" (P.H400 Maximum frequency) appears. Press the
SET key to display the present set value. "120.0" (initial value) appears.

3. Parameters
3.2 Use of a function group number for the identification of parameters
73
 6. Changing the setting value
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key to change the value to "60.00". Press the SET key to confirm the
setting. "60.00" blinks after the setting is completed.

74 3. Parameters
3.2 Use of a function group number for the identification of parameters
3.3 Parameter list (by function group number)
1
 E: Environment setting Pr. group Pr. Name
Refer

parameters Inrush current limit circuit life

to page
2
E701 256 148
Parameters for the inverter operating environment. display
Control circuit capacitor life
Refer E702 257 148
Pr. group Pr. Name
to page
display
Main circuit capacitor life
3
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not E703 258 148
E000 168 display
set.
Main circuit capacitor life
E704 259 148
E001 169
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not
set.
measuring
Display estimated main circuit
4
E020 1006 Clock (year) 127 E705 506 148
capacitor residual life
E021 1007 Clock (month, day) 127 E706 507 Display ABC relay contact life 148
E022 1008 Clock (hour, minute) 127 E708 509 Display power cycle life 148 5
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not
E023 269 E709 198 Display corrosion level 148
set.
E710 503 Maintenance timer 152
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not
E080 168
set. E711 504
Maintenance timer warning
output set time
152 6
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not
E081 169 E720 555 Current average time 153
set.
E100 Reset selection E721 556 Data output mask time 153
E101 75 Disconnected PU detection 128 E722 557
Current average value monitor
153 7
signal output reference current
E102 PU stop selection
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not
E103 145
 F: Settings for acceleration/
set.
8
E104 990
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not
set.
deceleration
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not Parameters for the motor acceleration/deceleration
E105 991
set.
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not
characteristics. 9
E108 1000 Refer
set. Pr. group Pr. Name
to page
Frequency setting/key lock
E200 161 130
operation selection
Frequency change increment
F000 20
Acceleration/deceleration
reference frequency
158 10
E201 295 132 Acceleration/deceleration time
amount setting F001 21 158
increments
RUN key rotation direction
E202 40 133 Jog acceleration/deceleration
selection F002 16 194
time
Regenerative function
E300 30 386 351,
selection F003 611 Acceleration time at a restart
356
E301 570 Multiple rating setting 134
E400 77 Parameter write selection 135 F010 7 Acceleration time Simple 158
E410 296 Password lock level 137 F011 8 Deceleration time Simple 158
E411 297 Password lock/unlock 137 Second acceleration/ 158,
F020 44
E420 888 Free parameter 1 140 deceleration time 344
E421 889 Free parameter 2 140 158,
F021 45 Second deceleration time
PM parameter 344
E430 998 92 Acceleration/deceleration time
initialization Simple F022 147 158
switching frequency
Automatic parameter
E431 999 141 Deceleration time at
setting Simple F040 1103 158
emergency stop
User group read Acceleration time in low-speed
E440 160 143 F070 791 158
selection Simple range
User group registered display/ Deceleration time in low-speed
E441 172 143 F071 792 158
batch clear range
E442 173 User group registration 143 Acceleration/deceleration
F100 29 163
E443 174 User group clear 143 pattern selection
E600 72 PWM frequency selection 146 F101 59 Remote function selection 165
E601 240 Soft-PWM operation selection 146 169,
F102 13 Starting frequency
PWM frequency automatic 170
E602 260 146 F103 571 Holding time at a start 169
switchover
E700 255 Life alarm status display 148

3. Parameters
3.3 Parameter list (by function group number)
75
 Refer Refer
Pr. group Pr. Name Pr. group Pr. Name
to page to page
Automatic acceleration/ 171, 198,
F500 292 Second electronic thermal O/L
deceleration 320 H010 51 299,
relay
F510 61 Reference current 171 308
Reference value at Cooling fan operation
F511 62 171 H100 244 203
acceleration selection
Reference value at Earth (ground) fault detection
F512 63 171 H101 249 204
deceleration at start
Acceleration/deceleration Inverter output fault detection
F513 293 171 H182 631 205
separate selection enable/disable selection
Output phase loss protection
H200 251 207
selection
 D: Parameters for the setting of H300 65 Retry selection 208
operation command and H301 67
Number of retries at fault
208
occurrence
frequency command H302 68 Retry waiting time 208
Parameters for setting the command source to the inverter, H303 69 Retry count display erase 208
and the motor driving frequency and torque. H400 1 Maximum frequency Simple 211
Refer H401 2 Minimum frequency Simple 211
Pr. group Pr. Name
to page High speed maximum
Operation mode H402 18 211
174, frequency
D000 79
selection Simple 184 Speed deviation excess 109,
H416 285
Communication startup mode detection frequency 320
D001 340 184
selection H420 31 Frequency jump 1A 212
Communication operation H421 32 Frequency jump 1B 212
D010 338 185
command source H422 33 Frequency jump 2A 212
Communication speed H423 34 Frequency jump 2B 212
D011 339 185
command source
H424 35 Frequency jump 3A 212
NET mode operation command
D012 550 185 H425 36 Frequency jump 3B 212
source selection
Stall prevention operation 100,
PU mode operation command H500 22
D013 551 185 level (Torque limit level) 214
source selection
Stall prevention operation
Reverse rotation prevention H501 156 214
D020 78 193 selection
selection
Second stall prevention
100, H600 48 214
D030 811 Set resolution switchover operation level
226
Stall prevention operation
D200 15 Jog frequency 194
H610 23 level compensation factor at 214
Multi-speed setting (high double speed
D301 4 195
speed) Simple Stall prevention operation
H611 66 214
Multi-speed setting (middle reduction starting frequency
D302 5 195
speed) Simple Stall prevention operation
H630 277 324
current switchover
Multi-speed setting (low
D303 6 195 Voltage reduction selection
speed) Simple
H631 154 during stall prevention 214
D304 to Multi-speed setting (speed 4 to operation
24 to 27 195
D307 speed 7)
H103 997 Fault initiation 206
D308 to 232 to Multi-speed setting (speed 8 to
195 H800 374 Overspeed detection level 224
D315 239 speed 15)
Load characteristics
Torque command source H520 1480 219
D400 804 117 measurement mode
selection
Load characteristics load
D401 805 Torque command value (RAM) 117 H521 1481 219
reference 1
Torque command value (RAM,
D402 806 117 Load characteristics load
EEPROM) H522 1482 219
reference 2
Load characteristics load
H523 1483 219
 H: Protective function parameter reference 3
Load characteristics load
Parameters to protect the motor and the inverter. H524 1484 219
reference 4
Refer Load characteristics load
Pr. group Pr. Name H525 1485 219
to page reference 5
198, Load characteristics maximum
Electronic thermal O/L H526 1486 219
H000 9 299, frequency
relay Simple Load characteristics minimum
308 H527 1487 219
frequency

76 3. Parameters
3.3 Parameter list (by function group number)
 Refer Refer
Pr. group Pr. Name Pr. group Pr. Name
to page to page
Upper limit warning detection Power saving rate reference
1
H531 1488 219 M203 895 244
width value
Lower limit warning detection M204 896 Power unit cost 244
H532 1489 219
width
Upper limit fault detection
M205 897
Power saving monitor average
time
244 2
H533 1490 219
width Power saving cumulative
M206 898 244
Lower limit fault detection monitor clear
H534 1491 219
width
Load status detection signal
M207 899
Operation time rate (estimated
value)
244 3
H535 1492 delay time / load reference 219 FM terminal function selection
measurement waiting time M300 54 237
[E800-1]

M301 158
AM terminal function selection
237 4
 M: Item and output signal for [E800-4][E800-5]
FM terminal calibration [E800-
monitoring M310 C0
1]
241

Parameters for the settings regarding the monitoring to check M320 C1

AM terminal calibration [E800-
241
5
4][E800-5]
the inverter's operating status and the output signals for the
AM output filter [E800-4][E800-
monitoring. M321 867 241
5]
Refer M390 1200
AM output offset calibration
241
6
Pr. group Pr. Name [E800-4][E800-5]
to page
M000 37 Speed display 226 RUN terminal function
M400 190 250
selection
M001 505 Speed setting reference
Frequency / rotation speed
226
M404 191 FU terminal function selection 250 7
M003 53 226 ABC terminal function
unit switchover M405 192 250
M020 170 Watt-hour meter clear 228 selection

M021 563
Energization time carrying-
228
M410 313*3 DO0 output selection 250
8
over times M411 314 *3 DO1 output selection 250
Monitor decimal digits
M022 268 228 M412 315*3 DO2 output selection 250
selection

M023 891
Cumulative power monitor 228,
M413 316*3 DO3 output selection 250
9
digit shifted times 244 M414 317*3 DO4 output selection 250
M030 171 Operation hour meter clear 228 M415 318*3 DO5 output selection 250
Operating time carrying-over
M031 564
times
228 M416 319 *3 DO6 output selection 250
10
Frequency monitoring
M420 320*3 RA1 output selection 250
M040 55*1 237
reference M421 321*3 RA2 output selection 250
M041 56*1 Current monitoring reference 237 M422 322*3 RA3 output selection 250
M042 866 Torque monitoring reference 228 100,
M430 157 OL signal output timer
Analog input display unit 214
M043 241 273
switchover M431 289 Inverter output terminal filter 250
Monitor negative output 228, Output current detection
M044 290 M433 166 260
selection 237 signal retention time
M050 1106 Torque monitor filter 228 M440 870 Speed detection hysteresis 257
M051 1107 Running speed monitor filter 228 M441 41 Up-to-frequency sensitivity 257
Excitation current monitor M442 42 Output frequency detection 257
M052 1108 228
filter Output frequency detection for
Operation panel main monitor M443 43 257
M100 52 228 reverse rotation
selection M446 865 Low speed detection 257
Operation panel monitor M451 193 NET Y1 output selection 250
M101 774 228
selection 1
M452 194 NET Y2 output selection 250
Operation panel monitor
M102 775 228 M453 195 NET Y3 output selection 250
selection 2
M454 196 NET Y4 output selection 250
Operation panel monitor
M103 776 228 M460 150 Output current detection level 260
selection 3
Operation panel setting dial Output current detection
M104 992 228 M461 151 260
push monitor selection signal delay time
M200 892 Load factor 244 M462 152 Zero current detection level 260
Energy saving monitor M463 153 Zero current detection time 260
M201 893 244
reference (motor capacity) Output current detection
M464 167 260
Control selection during operation selection
M202 894 commercial power-supply 244 M470 864 Torque detection 262
operation

3. Parameters
3.3 Parameter list (by function group number)
77
  T: Multi-function input terminal Pr. group Pr. Name
Refer
to page
parameters T753 187 NET X3 input selection 283
Parameters for the setting of the input terminals via which T754 188 NET X4 input selection 283
commands are given to the inverter. T755 189 NET X5 input selection 283

Refer
Pr. group Pr. Name
to page  C: Motor constant parameters
T000 73 Analog input selection 266 Parameters for the applied motor setting.
T001 267 Terminal 4 input selection 266
Refer
T002 74 Input filter time constant 271 Pr. group Pr. Name
to page
T003 822 Speed setting filter 1 271
294,
T004 826 Torque setting filter 1 271 C100 71 Applied motor 299,
T005 832 Speed setting filter 2 271 308
T006 836 Torque setting filter 2 271 86, 299,
C101 80 Motor capacity
T007 849 Analog input offset adjustment 271 308
Terminal 2 frequency setting 86, 299,
T022 125 273 C102 81 Number of motor poles
gain frequency Simple 308
198,
100,
Terminal 4 function C103 9 Rated motor current Simple 299,
T040 858 214,
assignment 308
270
86, 299,
Terminal 4 frequency setting C104 83 Rated motor voltage
T042 126 273 308
gain frequency Simple
86, 299,
Terminal 2 frequency setting C105 84 Rated motor frequency
T200 C2 273 308
bias frequency C106 702 Maximum motor frequency 308
Terminal 2 frequency setting C107 707 Motor inertia (integer) 308
T201 C3 273
bias
C108 724 Motor inertia (exponent) 308
Terminal 2 frequency setting
T202 125 273 299,
gain frequency
C110 96 Auto tuning setting/status 308,
Terminal 2 frequency setting 358
T203 C4 273
gain
C111 95 Online auto tuning selection 315
Terminal 4 frequency setting
T400 C5 273 299,
bias frequency
C120 90 Motor constant (R1) 308,
Terminal 4 frequency setting 358
T401 C6 273
bias
C121 91 Motor constant (R2) 299
Terminal 4 frequency setting
T402 126 273 Motor constant (L1)/d-axis 299,
gain frequency C122 92
inductance (Ld) 308
Terminal 4 frequency setting
T403 C7 273 Motor constant (L2)/q-axis 299,
gain C123 93
inductance (Lq) 308
Terminal 4 bias command
T410 C38 273 C124 94 Motor constant (X) 299
(torque/magnetic flux)
C125 82 Motor excitation current 299
Terminal 4 bias (torque/
T411 C39 273 Torque current/Rated PM 299,
magnetic flux) C126 859
motor current 308
Terminal 4 gain command
T412 C40 273 Induced voltage constant (phi
(torque/magnetic flux) C130 706 308
f)
Terminal 4 gain (torque/
T413 C41 278 C131 711 Motor Ld decay ratio 308
magnetic flux)
STF/DI0 terminal function C132 712 Motor Lq decay ratio 308
T700 178 283
selection C133 725 Motor protection current level 308
STR/DI1 terminal function Motor induced voltage
T701 179 283 C135 1412 308
selection constant (phi f) exponent
T702 180 RL terminal function selection 283 Lq tuning target current
C150 1002 308
adjustment coefficient
T703 181 RM terminal function selection 283 Starting resistance tuning
C182 717 308
compensation coefficient 1
T704 182 RH terminal function selection 283
Starting magnetic pole
MRS terminal function C185 721 308
T709 183 283 position detection pulse width
selection
Starting resistance tuning
RES terminal function C188 720 308
T711 184 283 compensation coefficient
selection
C200 450 Second applied motor 294
MRS/X10 terminal input
T720 17 287 299,
selection C201 453 Second motor capacity
308
T740 699 Input terminal filter 283
299,
T751 185 NET X1 input selection 283 C202 454 Number of second motor poles
308
T752 186 NET X2 input selection 283

78 3. Parameters
3.3 Parameter list (by function group number)
 Refer Refer
Pr. group Pr. Name Pr. group Pr. Name
to page to page
198, Automatic acceleration/ 171,
1
A110 292
C203 51 Rated second motor current 299, deceleration 320
308 Stop-on-contact control
A200 270 324
C204 456 Rated second motor voltage
299,
308
selection
Stop-on contact excitation
2
299, A205 275 current low-speed scaling 324
C205 457 Rated second motor frequency
308 factor

C206 743
Second motor maximum
frequency
308 A206 276
PWM carrier frequency at stop-
on contact
324 3
C207 744 Second motor inertia (integer) 308 A300 592 Traverse function selection 327
Second motor inertia A301 593 Maximum amplitude amount 327
C208 745 308
(exponent)
A302 594
Amplitude compensation
327 4
299, amount during deceleration
Second motor auto tuning
C210 463 308, Amplitude compensation
setting/status A303 595 327
358 amount during acceleration
C211 574
Second motor online auto
315 A304 596 Amplitude acceleration time 327 5
tuning A305 597 Amplitude deceleration time 327
299, Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not
C220 458 Second motor constant (R1) 308, A600 759
set.
358
329, 6
C221 459 Second motor constant (R2) 299 A601 131 PID upper limit
344
Second motor constant (L1) / 299,
C222 460 329,
d-axis inductance (Ld) 308 A602 132 PID lower limit

C223 461
Second motor constant (L2) / 299, A603 553 PID deviation limit
344
329
7
q-axis inductance (Lq) 308
A604 554 PID signal operation selection 329
C224 462 Second motor constant (X) 299
Integral stop selection at
Second motor excitation A607 1015 329
C225 455
current
299 limited frequency 8
329,
Second motor torque current/ 299, A610 128 PID action selection
C226 860 344
Rated PM motor current 308
329,
C230 738
Second motor induced voltage
constant (phi f)
308
A611 133 PID action set point
344 9
PID control automatic
C231 739 Second motor Ld decay ratio 308 A612 127 329
switchover frequency
C232 740 Second motor Lq decay ratio 308
329,
C233 746
Second motor protection
current level
308
A613 129 PID proportional band
344 10
329,
Second motor induced voltage A614 130 PID integral time
C235 1413 308 344
constant (phi f) exponent 329,
Second motor starting A615 134 PID differential time
344
C282 741 resistance tuning 308
Output interruption detection
compensation coefficient 1 A621 575 329
time
Second motor magnetic pole
C285 742 308 Output interruption detection
detection pulse width A622 576 329
level
Starting resistance tuning Output interruption cancel
C288 737 308
compensation coefficient 2 A623 577 329
level
PID set point/deviation input 329,
 A: Application parameters A624 609
selection 344
Parameters for the setting of a specific application. PID measured value input 329,
A625 610
selection 344
Refer A630 C42 PID display bias coefficient 342
Pr. group Pr. Name
to page A631 C43 PID display bias analog value 342
A100 278 Brake opening frequency 320 A632 C44 PID display gain coefficient 342
A101 279 Brake opening current 320 A633 C45 PID display gain analog value 342
Brake opening current Automatic restart after 351,
A102 280 320
detection time A700 162 instantaneous power failure 356,
A103 281 Brake operation time at start 320 selection 358
A104 282 Brake operation frequency 320 Rotation direction detection
A701 299 351
A105 283 Brake operation time at stop 320 selection at restarting
Brake opening current 351,
A108 639 320 A702 57 Restart coasting time
selection 356
Brake operation frequency A703 58 Restart cushion time 351
A109 640 320
selection Stall prevention operation
A710 165 351
level for restart

3. Parameters
3.3 Parameter list (by function group number)
79
 Refer Refer
Pr. group Pr. Name Pr. group Pr. Name
to page to page
299, Stop mode selection at *2
A711 298 Frequency search gain N013 502
358 communication error
299, Operation frequency during *2
A712 560 Second frequency search gain N014 779
358 communication error
A730 261 Power failure stop selection 146 PU communication station *2
N020 117
PLC function operation number
A800 414 364
selection N021 118 PU communication speed *2

Inverter operation lock mode N022 119 PU communication data length *2

A801 415 364
setting
PU communication stop bit *2
PLC function flash memory N023 119
A804 498 364 length
clear
PU communication parity *2
User parameter auto storage N024 120
A805 675 364 check
function selection
N025 121 PU communication retry count *2
A810 to 1150 to PLC function user parameters
364 PU communication check time
A859 1199 1 to 50 N026 122 *2
A900 1020 Trace operation selection 366 interval
A902 1022 Sampling cycle 366 PU communication waiting *2
N027 123
time setting
A903 1023 Number of analog channels 366
PU communication CR/LF *2
A904 1024 Sampling auto start 366 N028 124
selection
A905 1025 Trigger mode selection 366
USB communication station *2
Number of sampling before N040 547
A906 1026 366 number
trigger
USB communication check *2
A910 1027 Analog source selection (1ch) 366 N041 548
time interval
A911 1028 Analog source selection (2ch) 366 Device instance number
N052 728 *2
A912 1029 Analog source selection (3ch) 366 (Upper 3 digits) [E800-EPA]
A913 1030 Analog source selection (4ch) 366 Device instance number *2
N053 729
A914 1031 Analog source selection (5ch) 366 (Lower 4 digits) [E800-EPA]
A915 1032 Analog source selection (6ch) 366 N054 390 % setting reference frequency *2

A916 1033 Analog source selection (7ch) 366 N080 343 Communication error count *2
A917 1034 Analog source selection (8ch) 366 Frequency command sign
N100 541 *2
A918 1035 Analog trigger channel 366 selection [E800-E]
Analog trigger operation CC-Link extended setting
A919 1036 366 N103 544 *2
selection [E800-E]
A920 1037 Analog trigger level 366 N600 1434 Ethernet IP address 1 *2
A930 1038 Digital source selection (1ch) 366 N601 1435 Ethernet IP address 2 *2
A931 1039 Digital source selection (2ch) 366 *2
N602 1436 Ethernet IP address 3
A932 1040 Digital source selection (3ch) 366
N603 1437 Ethernet IP address 4 *2
A933 1041 Digital source selection (4ch) 366
N610 1438 Subnet mask 1 *2
A934 1042 Digital source selection (5ch) 366
A935 1043 Digital source selection (6ch) 366 N611 1439 Subnet mask 2 *2

A936 1044 Digital source selection (7ch) 366 N612 1440 Subnet mask 3 *2
A937 1045 Digital source selection (8ch) 366 *2
N613 1441 Subnet mask 4
A938 1046 Digital trigger channel 366
N620 442 Default gateway address 1 *2
Digital trigger operation
A939 1047 366 N621 443 Default gateway address 2 *2
selection
N622 444 Default gateway address 3 *2

 N: Communication operation N623 445 Default gateway address 4 *2

parameters N630 1427 Ethernet function selection 1 *2

N631 1428 Ethernet function selection 2 *2

Parameters for the setting of communication operation such
N632 1429 Ethernet function selection 3 *2
as the communication specifications or operating
N633 1430 Ethernet function selection 4 *2
characteristics.
Link speed and duplex mode *2
Refer N641 1426
Pr. group Pr. Name selection
to page *2
N642 1455 Keepalive time
N000 549 Protocol selection *2
Ethernet signal loss detection *2
Communication EEPROM N643 1431
N001 342 *2 function selection
write selection
Ethernet communication *2
Communication reset N644 1432
N010 349*4 *2 check time interval
selection *2
N647 1456 Network diagnosis selection

80 3. Parameters
3.3 Parameter list (by function group number)
 Refer Refer
Pr. group Pr. Name Pr. group Pr. Name
to page to page
Extended setting for Ethernet SF-PR slip amount adjustment
1
*2 G061 674 381
N648 1457 signal loss detection function gain [200 V class / 400 V class]
selection DC injection brake operation
G100 10 382
N649 1399
Inverter identification enable/
disable selection [E800-E]
*2 frequency
DC injection brake operation
2
G101 11 382
Ethernet communication *2 time
N650 1424
network number G103 850 Brake operation selection 382
N651 1425
Ethernet communication
station number
*2 G106 250 Stop selection 384 3
Special regenerative brake
*2 G107 70 386
N660 1442 Ethernet IP filter address 1 duty
N661 1443 Ethernet IP filter address 2 *2 DC injection brake operation
N662 1444 Ethernet IP filter address 3 *2
G110 12
voltage
382
4
Regeneration avoidance
N663 1445 Ethernet IP filter address 4 *2 G120 882 390
operation selection
Ethernet IP filter address 2 Regeneration avoidance
5
N664 1446 *2
range specification G121 883 390
operation level
Ethernet IP filter address 3 *2 Regeneration avoidance
N665 1447
range specification G123 885 compensation frequency limit 390
Ethernet IP filter address 4 value
N666 1448
range specification
*2

G124 886
Regeneration avoidance
390
6
Ethernet command source *2
voltage gain
N670 1449
selection IP address 1 Regeneration avoidance
G125 665 390
Ethernet command source frequency gain
N671 1450
selection IP address 2
*2
G200 800 Control method selection 86 7
Ethernet command source *2 G203 245 Rated slip 393
N672 1451
selection IP address 3 Slip compensation time
G204 246 393
N673 1452
Ethernet command source
selection IP address 4
*2 constant
Constant output range slip
8
Ethernet command source G205 247 393
compensation selection
N674 1453 selection IP address 3 range *2
Constant output range torque 100,
specification G210 803
Ethernet command source
characteristic selection 117
9
G211 820 Speed control P gain 1 107
N675 1454 selection IP address 4 range *2
G212 821 Speed control integral time 1 107
specification
Torque control P gain 1
N681 1124
Station number in inverter-to-
inverter link [E800-E]
*2 G213 824 (current loop proportional 122 10
gain)
Number of inverters in
*2 Torque control integral time 1
N682 1125 inverter-to-inverter link system G214 825 122
(current loop integral time)
[E800-E]
Second motor control method
G300 451 86
selection
 (G) Control parameters G311 830 Speed control P gain 2 107
Parameters for motor control. G312 831 Speed control integral time 2 107
Torque control P gain 2
Refer
Pr. group Pr. Name G313 834 (current loop proportional 122
to page
gain)
G000 0 Torque boost Simple 374 Torque control integral time 2
G314 835 122
G001 3 Base frequency Simple 376 (current loop integral time)
G002 19 Base frequency voltage 376 G400 286 Droop gain 394
G003 14 Load pattern selection 378 G401 287 Droop filter time constant 394
G010 46 Second torque boost 374 G410 653 Speed smoothing control 395
G011 47 Second V/F (base frequency) 376 Speed smoothing cutoff
G411 654 395
frequency
Energy saving control
G030 60 380 Speed control gain (Advanced
selection G932 89 90
magnetic flux vector)
SF-PR slip amount adjustment
G060 673 operation selection [200 V 381 Second motor speed control
G942 569 90
class / 400 V class] gain

*1 For the Ethernet model, the setting is available only when the *3 Available when the PLC function is enabled. (Pr.313 to
FR-A8AY is installed. Pr.315 are always available for settings in the Ethernet
*2 For details, refer to the Instruction Manual (Communication). model.)
*4 For the standard model, the setting is available only when a
communication option is installed.

3. Parameters
3.3 Parameter list (by function group number)
81
 3.4 Parameter initial value groups
• Initial values of parameters of the FR-E800 differ depending on the parameter initial value group. In this Instruction Manual,
Gr.1 indicates the parameter initial value group 1, and Gr.2 indicates the parameter initial value group 2.
• FR-E800 inverters are divided into two groups as shown in the following table.
Parameter initial value groups Model Specification
FR-E800-1 RS-485 communication, terminal FM
Group 1 (Gr.1) FR-E800-5 RS-485 communication, terminal AM
FR-E800-EPA Ethernet communication (Protocol group A)
FR-E800-4 RS-485 communication, terminal AM
Group 2 (Gr.2)
FR-E800-EPB Ethernet communication (Protocol group B)

• The initial values of the following parameters differ depending on the parameter initial value group.
Initial value Refer to
Pr. Name
Gr.1 Gr.2 page
3 Base frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 376
4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 60 Hz 50 Hz 195
19 Base frequency voltage 9999 8888 376
20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 158
55 Frequency monitoring reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 228
66 Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 214
125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 273
126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 273
249 Earth (ground) fault detection at start 0 1 204
301 BCD input gain 60 Hz 50 Hz *1

303 BIN input gain 60 Hz 50 Hz *1

390 % setting reference frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz *2

505 Speed setting reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 226

808 Speed limit 60 Hz 50 Hz 120
1486 Load characteristics maximum frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 219

*1 The parameter is available when the plug-in option (FR-A8AX) is installed. For details, refer to the FR-A8AX Instruction Manual.
*2 For details, refer to the Instruction Manual (Communication).

82 3. Parameters
3.4 Parameter initial value groups
 CHAPTER 4
CHAPTER 4 Control Method
4

4.1 Changing the control method and mode.................................................................................................................86

4.2 Selecting the Advanced magnetic flux vector control .............................................................................................90
6
4.3 Selecting the PM sensorless vector control............................................................................................................92

10

83
 4 Control Method
V/F control (initial setting), Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, and PM sensorless vector
control are available with this inverter.

 V/F control
The inverter controls the output frequency (F) and the output voltage (V) so that the ratio of frequency to voltage (V/F) is kept
constant when the frequency is changed.

 Advanced magnetic flux vector control

The inverter performs vector calculation and divide its output current into the excitation current and the torque current. The
inverter compensates the frequency and the voltage to output a current that meets the load torque to the motor, which improves
the motor torque at low speed. The output frequency is further compensated (slip compensation) to bring the actual motor
speed closer to the commanded speed. This control method is useful when the load fluctuates are severe.

NOTE
• Advanced magnetic flux vector control requires the following conditions.
If these conditions are not satisfied, select V/F control. Otherwise, malfunctions such as insufficient torque, uneven rotation
may occur.
• For the motor capacity, the rated motor current should be equal to or less than the rated inverter current. (Note that the motor
rated current should be 0.4 kW or higher (0.1 kW or higher for the 200 V class).)
If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current is used, speed and torque accuracies
may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.
• The motor described in the following table is used.

Motor Condition
Mitsubishi Electric standard efficiency motor (SF-JR)
Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor (SF-HR)
Offline auto tuning is not required.
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA 4P / SF-HRCA)
Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-saving motor (SF-PR)
Other motors (other manufactures' motors) Offline auto tuning is required.
• Single-motor operation (one motor to one inverter) is performed.
• The wiring length from inverter to motor is 30 m or less. (When the wiring length exceeds 30 m, perform offline auto tuning with
the wiring in place.)

 Real sensorless vector control

• As the inverter estimates the motor speed and controls the output current more accurately, a high-level control of the speed
and the torque is enabled. Select Real sensorless vector control for a high-accuracy, fast-response control. The offline auto
tuning is required initially.
• This control method is useful for the following purposes:
- To minimize the speed fluctuation even at a severe load fluctuation
- To generate a low speed torque
- To prevent machine from damage due to a too large torque (To set the torque limit)
- To control the torque

84 4. Control Method
 NOTE
• Real sensorless vector control requires the following conditions. 1
If these conditions are not satisfied, select V/F control. Otherwise, malfunctions such as insufficient torque, uneven rotation
may occur.
• For the motor capacity, the rated motor current should be equal to or less than the rated inverter current. (Note that the motor
rated current should be 0.4 kW or higher (0.1 kW or higher for the 200 V class).)
2
If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current is used, speed and torque accuracies
may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.
• Offline auto tuning is performed. 3
Offline auto tuning is required under Real sensorless vector control even when the Mitsubishi Electric motor is used since the
wiring length affects the operation.
• Single-motor operation (one motor to one inverter) is performed.
• A surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF/FR-BMF) is not used. 4

 PM sensorless vector control 5

• The inverter enables highly efficient motor control and highly accurate motor speed control of a PM (permanent magnet
embedded) motor, which is more efficient than an induction motor.
• A speed detector such as an encoder is not required as the inverter estimates the motor speed by the calculation from the 6
inverter output voltage and current. The inverter drives the PM motor with the least required current for a load in order to
achieve the highest motor efficiency.
PM sensorless vector control image
Output
7
Inverter
Speed voltage
command Inverter
Controller
circuit
8
Magnetic field observer
*1
Output *1 A magnetic field observer is a control
method that calculates the motor
9
current
speed/magnetic pole position based
Speed/magnetic on the motor voltage and current of a
pole position Virtual motor virtual motor which is set up in the
drive unit.

NOTE
10
• The PM sensorless vector control requires the following conditions.
• For the motor capacity, the rated motor current should be equal to or less than the rated inverter current. (Note that the motor
rated current should be 0.4 kW or higher (0.1 kW or higher for the 200 V class).)
If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current is used, speed and torque accuracies
may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.
• Offline auto tuning is performed.
• Single-motor operation (one motor to one inverter) is performed.
• The overall wiring length with the motor must be 100 m or less. (For the wiring length, refer to the Instruction Manual
(Connection).)
• A surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF/FR-BMF) is not used.

4. Control Method
85
 4.1 Changing the control method and mode
Set the control method and the control mode.
V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, and PM sensorless vector control are the
control methods available for selection.
The available control modes are speed control and torque control modes.
• Select a control method and a control mode by setting Pr.800 (Pr.451) Control method selection.
• The control mode can be switched using a mode switching signal (MC).

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

0, 3, 5, 6, 10, 13, 15,
71 16, 20, 23, 40, 43, 50, By selecting a standard motor or constant-torque motor,
Applied motor 0 53, 70, 73, 8090, the thermal characteristic and motor constant of each
C100
motor are set.
8093, 9090, 9093*1
80 0.1 to 30 kW Set the applied motor capacity.
Motor capacity 9999
C101 9999 No motor capacity setting
81 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Set the number of motor poles.
Number of motor poles 9999
C102 9999 No number of motor poles setting
83 200/400/575
Rated motor voltage 0 to 1000 V Set the rated motor voltage (V).
C104 V*2
84 10 to 400 Hz Set the rated motor frequency (Hz).
Rated motor frequency 9999
C105 9999 The setting value of Pr.3 Base frequency is used.*3
Real sensorless vector control / PM sensorless vector
10
control
800 11, 12 Real sensorless vector control
Control method selection 40
G200 19 PM sensorless vector control test operation
20 Advanced magnetic flux vector control
40 V/F control
Real sensorless vector control / PM sensorless vector
10
control
451 Second motor control 11, 12 Real sensorless vector control
9999
G300 method selection 20 Advanced magnetic flux vector control
40 V/F control
9999 Control selected in Pr.800
*1 The setting range for the 575 V class is "0, 3, 5, 6, 10, 13, 15, 16, 8090, 8093, 9090, and 9093".
*2 The initial value differs according to the inverter's voltage class (200/400/575 V).
*3 The inverter internal data is used under PM sensorless vector control.

 Setting the motor capacity and the number of motor poles (Pr.80, Pr.81)
• Motor specifications (the motor capacity and the number of motor poles) must be set to select Advanced magnetic flux
vector control, Real sensorless vector control, or PM sensorless vector control.
• Set the motor capacity (kW) in Pr.80 Motor capacity and set the number of motor poles in Pr.81 Number of motor poles.

 Selection of the control method and the control mode

• Select a control method (and a control mode) from V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control (speed control), Real
sensorless vector control (speed control, torque control), and PM sensorless vector control (speed control).

86 4. Control Method
4.1 Changing the control method and mode
 • To enable the control method and the control mode selected in Pr.800 (Pr.451), the condition to start operation must be
satisfied as shown in the following table. Otherwise the operation does not start due to the setting error (SE) alarm when
the start signal is input.
1
Condition to start operation
Pr.800
setting
Pr.451
setting
Control method Control mode
Pr.80 (Pr.453),
Pr.81 (Pr.454)
Pr.71 MC signal 2
(Pr.450)
setting
Real sensorless vector control /
10 Speed control —*1 —

11
PM sensorless vector control
Torque control —
3
Induction ON: Torque
Real sensorless vector control Speed control / torque
12 Other than 9999 motor control OFF:
control switchover

19 — PM sensorless vector control test operation PM motor

Speed control
—
4
Advanced magnetic flux vector
20 Speed control —
control Induction
40 (initial
40 V/F control — —*2
motor
—
5
value)
9999
— (initial Control method and control mode selected in Pr.800 (provided that they are selectable with Pr.451)
value) 6
*1 The control method depends on the motor selected in Pr.71 (Pr.450): Real sensorless vector control for the induction motor, and PM sensorless
vector control for the PM motor.
*2 Operation can start regardless of the setting.
7
 Automatic parameter setting by changing the Pr.800 setting
• The Pr.22 setting is automatically changed when the control method is changed.
• When the control method is changed from V/F control or Advanced magnetic flux vector control to Real sensorless vector 8
control or PM sensorless vector control, the Pr.22 setting is automatically changed as follows.
Pr. Setting value before change Setting value after change
22 150% (initial setting) 200% 9
• When the control method is changed from Real sensorless vector control or PM sensorless vector control to V/F control
or Advanced magnetic flux vector control, the Pr.22 setting is automatically changed as follows (only for the ND rating in
the FR-E820-0175(3.7K) or lower, FR-E840-0095(3.7K) or lower, FR-E860-0061(3.7K) or lower) 10
Pr. Setting value before change Setting value after change
22 200% 150% (initial setting)

 PM sensorless vector control test operation (Pr.800 = "19")

• A test operation for speed control is available without connecting a motor to the inverter.
The speed calculation changes to track the speed command, and such speed changes can be checked on the operation
panel or by outputting it as analog signals to terminal FM or AM.

NOTE
• Since current is not detected and voltage is not output, monitors related to current and voltage such as output current and
output voltage, etc. and output signals do not function.

 I/O signal status during the test operation

• During the test operation, the following signals are disabled.
Input terminal function selection (Pr.178 to Pr.189) Output terminal function selection (Pr.190 to Pr.196)
• Brake opening completion (BRI) • Electronic thermal O/L relay pre-alarm (THP)
• V/F switchover (X18) • Brake opening request (BOF)
• Control mode switchover (MC) • Start time tuning completion (Y39)

Parameters referred to
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 250

 Status of the monitoring during the test operation

○: Enabled

4. Control Method
4.1 Changing the control method and mode
87
 ×: Disabled (0 is displayed at any time.)
Δ: A cumulative total before the test operation is displayed.
—: Not available
Monitoring on the Output via Monitoring on the Output via
Monitor item Monitor item
operation panel FM/AM operation panel FM/AM
Output frequency ○ ○ User monitor 1 ○ —
Output current × × User monitor 2 ○ —
Output voltage × × User monitor 3 ○ —
Communication station
Fault indication ○ — ○ —
number (PU port)
Frequency setting value ○ ○ Station number (CC-Link) ○ —
Motor speed ○ ○ Energy saving effect ○ ○
Motor torque × × Cumulative energy saving Δ —
Converter output voltage ○ ○ PID set point ○ ○
Brake duty × × PID measured value ○ ○
Electronic thermal O/L relay
load factor ×*1 ×*1 PID deviation ○ —

Inverter I/O terminal

Output current peak value ×*1 ×*1 monitor
○ —

Converter output voltage peak Option input terminal

○ ○ ○ —
value monitor
Option output terminal
Output power × × ○ —
monitor
Option input terminal
Load meter ○ ○ monitor 1 (for ○ —
communication)
Option input terminal
Motor excitation current × × monitor 2 (for ○ —
communication)
Option output terminal
Cumulative energization time ○ — monitor (for ○ —
communication)
Reference voltage output — ○ Motor thermal load factor ○*2 ○*2
*2
Actual operation time ○ — Inverter thermal load factor ○ ○*2
Motor load factor × × PID measured value 2 ○ ○
Cumulative energy Δ — PID manipulated variable ○ —
Commanded torque × × Dancer main speed setting ○ ○
Torque current command × ×
Trace status ○ —

*1 When the inverter operation is switched to the test operation, the indication is changed to 0. When PM sensorless vector control is selected again
after the test operation, the output current peak value and the electronic thermal relay load factor from the last operation are displayed.
*2 When the inverter operation is switched to the test operation, the accumulated thermal value is reduced because the output current is considered
as 0.

Parameters referred to
Operation panel main monitor selectionpage 228
Pr.158 AM terminal function selectionpage 250

 Changing the control method with external terminals (RT signal, X18
signal)
• Control method (V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control) can be switched using
external terminals.
The control method can be switched using either the Second function selection (RT) signal or the V/F switchover (X18)
signal.
• Set the second motor in Pr.450 Second applied motor and set the second motor's control method in Pr.451 Second
motor control method selection. Turning ON the RT signal or X18 signal enables the second function, enabling the
switchover of the control method.

88 4. Control Method
4.1 Changing the control method and mode
 • To input the RT signal, set "3" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the
function.
To input the X18 signal, set "18" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign
1
the function.

First motor control method

Second motor control method
(RT/X18 signal-ON)
Pr.450 setting
Pr.453 to Pr.454
settings
Pr.451 setting 2
9999 — —
V/F control — — 9999
Induction motor — 40 3
V/F control Advanced magnetic flux vector
20
control Induction motor
Other than 9999
Real sensorless vector control 10 to 12
PM sensorless vector control IPM/SPM motor 10 4
9999 — —
Same control as the first motor*1 Same as Pr.71 Same as
Other than 9999
Advanced magnetic flux vector control*1
V/F control
setting
Induction motor —
Pr.800 setting
40
5
Real sensorless vector control*1 Advanced magnetic flux vector
PM sensorless vector control 20
control Induction motor
Real sensorless vector control
Other than 9999
10 to 12 6
PM sensorless vector control IPM/SPM motor 10

*1 V/F control is set by turning ON the X18 signal.

NOTE
7
• The RT signal is a second function selection signal. The RT signal also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 289.)
• When V/F control is set using the V/F switchover (X18) signal, the second functions are selected at the same time.
• The control method could be changed by external terminals (RT signal, X18 signal) while the inverter is stopped. If a signal is 8
switched during the operation, the control method changes after the inverter stops.

 Changing the control mode with external terminals (MC signal) 9

• The setting of Pr.800 or Pr.451 can be used to switch the control mode by turning ON/OFF the MC signal. Refer to page
86 to set Pr.800 or Pr.451.
To input the MC signal, set "26" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign 10
the function.
• When using an analog input terminal (terminal 4) for torque limit and torque command, switching of the control mode
changes the terminal function as follows:
• Terminal 4 functions by control
Speed control/torque control switchover (Pr.800 = "12")
Pr.858 setting
Speed control (MC signal-OFF) Torque control (MC signal-ON)
0 (initial value) Speed command (AU signal-ON) Speed limit (AU signal-ON)
4 Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1") Torque command (Pr.804 = "0")
9999 — —

—: No function

NOTE
• Switching between the speed control and the torque control is always enabled regardless of the motor status: in a stop, in
running, or in DC injection brake.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283
Pr.450 Second applied motorpage 294
Pr.804 Torque command source selectionpage 117
Pr.807 Speed limit selectionpage 120
Pr.810 Torque limit input method selectionpage 100
Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignmentpage 270

4. Control Method
4.1 Changing the control method and mode
89
 4.2 Selecting the Advanced magnetic flux vector
control
Magnetic flux

• To use the Advanced magnetic flux vector control, select the control method using Pr.800, and the motor type and specification
using Pr.71, Pr.80, and Pr.81.

 Advanced magnetic flux vector control

Operating procedure
1. Perform wiring properly. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Connection).)

2. Change the control method to Advanced magnetic flux vector control (Pr.800 = "20").

3. Make the motor setting (Pr.71).

• 200/400 V class
Motor Pr.71 setting*1 Remarks
SF-JR 0 (initial value) (3)
Mitsubishi Electric standard efficiency motor SF-JR 4P 1.5 kW or lower 20
Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor SF-HR 40
Others 0 (3) Offline auto tuning is required.*2
SF-JRCA 4P 10
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor SF-HRCA 50
Other (SF-JRC, etc.) 10 (13) Offline auto tuning is required.*2
Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-
SF-PR 70 (73)
saving motor
Other manufacturer's standard motor — 0 (3) Offline auto tuning is required.*2
Other manufacturer's constant-torque motor — 10 (13) Offline auto tuning is required.*2
• 575 V class
Motor Pr.71 setting*1 Remarks
Standard motor 0 (initial value) (3)
Constant-torque motor 10 Offline auto tuning is required.*2
Other manufacturer's standard
motor
0 (3) Offline auto tuning is required.*2

Other manufacturer's
constant-torque motor
10 (13) Offline auto tuning is required.*2

*1 For the other setting values of Pr.71, refer to page 294.

*2 For offline auto tuning, refer to page 299.

4. Set the motor overheat protection (Pr.9). (Refer to page 198.)

5. Set the motor capacity and number of motor poles (Pr.80, Pr.81). (Refer to page 86.)
Operation does not start when the setting value is "9999" (initial value).

6. Set the rated motor voltage and frequency (Pr.83, Pr.84). (Refer to page 299.)

7. Set the operation command. (Refer to page 174.)

Select the start command and speed command.

8. Perform the test operation.

As required
• Perform the offline auto tuning (Pr.96). (Refer to page 299.)

90 4. Control Method
4.2 Selecting the Advanced magnetic flux vector control
 • Select the online auto tuning (Pr.95). (Refer to page 315.)

NOTE 1
• To perform driving in a better accuracy, perform offline auto tuning, then set the online auto tuning, and select Real sensorless
vector control.
• Under this control, rotations are more likely to be uneven than under V/F control. (This control method is not suitable for
grinder, wrapping machine, etc., which require even rotation at a low speed.)
2
• When the inverter is operated with a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) installed between the inverter
and the motor, the output torque may decrease.
3
 Keeping the motor speed constant when the load fluctuates (speed
control gain) 4
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range

89
Speed control gain 0% to 200%
Makes adjustments to keep the motor speed constant during variable load
operation under Advanced magnetic flux vector control. The reference
5
(Advanced magnetic flux 9999
G932 value is 100%.
vector)
9999 The gain set by Pr.71. (The gain set in accordance with the motor.)

569 Second motor speed 0% to 200%

Makes adjustments to keep the second motor speed constant during
variable load operation under Advanced magnetic flux vector control. The
6
9999 reference value is 100%.
G942 control gain
9999 The gain set by Pr.450. (The gain set in accordance with the motor.)
• Use Pr.89 to keep the motor speed constant during variable load operation. 7
(This parameter is useful to make adjustments on the motor speed after replacing a conventional model with an FR-E800
series model.)
8
Load torque

Speed 10
 Driving two motors under Advanced magnetic flux vector control
• Turning ON the Second function selection (RT) signal enables the second motor operation.
• Set a second motor in Pr.450 Second applied motor. (In the initial setting, "9999" (no second applied motor) is selected.
Refer to page 294.)
Function RT signal-ON (second motor) RT signal-OFF (first motor)
Applied motor Pr.450 Pr.71
Motor capacity Pr.453 Pr.80
Number of motor poles Pr.454 Pr.81
Speed control gain (Advanced magnetic flux
Pr.569 Pr.89
vector)
Control method selection Pr.451 Pr.800

NOTE
• The RT signal is a Second function selection signal. The RT signal also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 289.)
To input the RT signal, set "3" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the
function.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.71, Pr.450 Applied motorpage 294
Pr.800, Pr.451 Control method selectionpage 86

4. Control Method
4.2 Selecting the Advanced magnetic flux vector control
91
 4.3 Selecting the PM sensorless vector control
PM

 Initializing the parameters required for the PM sensorless vector control

(Pr.998)
• Use PM parameter initialization to set the parameters required for driving a PM motor.
• Perform offline auto tuning before setting Pr.998. (Refer to page 299.)
• All the parameters required for PM motor control are automatically set by setting Pr.998 ≠ "0".
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
The setting of the motor parameters is
Parameter setting (in frequencies) for an
0 changed to the setting required to drive an
induction motor
induction motor.
Parameter setting (in rotations per minute) The setting of the motor parameters is
8009
for an IPM motor (after tuning) changed to the setting required to drive an
IPM motor. (Set Pr.71 Applied motor
998 PM parameter Parameter setting (in frequencies) for an
0 8109 and perform offline auto tuning in
E430 initialization IPM motor (after tuning) advance. (Refer to page 308.))
Parameter setting (in rotations per minute) The setting of the motor parameters is
9009
for an SPM motor (after tuning) changed to the setting required to drive an
SPM motor. (Set Pr.71 Applied motor
Parameter setting (in frequencies) for an and perform offline auto tuning in
9109
SPM motor (after tuning)
advance. (Refer to page 308.))
• To use a motor capacity that is one rank lower than the inverter capacity, set Pr.80 Motor capacity before performing PM
parameter initialization.
• When "8009 or 9009" is set in Pr.998, the motor speed which was set/monitored in frequencies is set/monitored in motor
rotations per minute. To use frequency to display or set, set Pr.998 = "8109 or 9109".
• Set Pr.998 = "0" to change the PM sensorless vector control parameter settings to the parameter settings required to drive
an induction motor.

NOTE
• Make sure to set Pr.998 before setting other parameters. If the Pr.998 setting is changed after setting other parameters, some
of those parameters are initialized too. (Refer to the "List of the target parameters for the motor parameter initialization".)
• To change back to the parameter settings required to drive an induction motor, perform Parameter clear or All parameter clear.
• If the setting of Pr.998 PM parameter initialization is changed from "8009 or 9009 (rotations per minute)" to "8109 or 9109
(frequency)", all the relevant parameters are initialized.
The purpose of Pr.998 is not to change the display units. Use Pr.53 Frequency / rotation speed unit switchover to change
the display units between rotations per minute and frequency. Using Pr.53 enables switching the unit between rotations per
minute and frequencies without initializing the setting of the motor parameters.
• The PM parameter initialization (Pr.998) changes parameter settings for the first motor. When a PM motor is used as the
second motor, parameters for the second motor must be set individually.

 List of the target parameters for the motor parameter initialization

• The settings of the parameters in the following table are changed to the settings for PM sensorless vector control by
performing the motor parameter initialization using Pr.998 PM parameter initialization. The changed settings differ
according to the specification (capacity) of the PM motor used.

92 4. Control Method
4.3 Selecting the PM sensorless vector control
 • Performing Parameter clear or All parameter clear resets these parameter settings to the settings required to drive an
induction motor.
1
Setting
PM motor
PM motor Setting increments
Induction motor (rotations per
Pr. Name minute)
(frequency)
2
*1
0 (initial value) 8009, 0, 8109,
8009, 9009 8109, 9109
Gr.1 Gr.2 9009 9109

1 Maximum frequency 120 Hz

Maximum motor
rotations per
Maximum motor
1 r/min 0.01 Hz
3
frequency*3
minute*3
4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 60 Hz 50 Hz Pr.84 Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
9 Electronic thermal O/L relay Inverter rated current — — 0.01 A 0.01 A 4
13 Starting frequency 0.5 Hz Pr.84 × 10% Pr.84 × 10% 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
15 Jog frequency 5 Hz Pr.84 × 10% Pr.84 × 10% 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
Acceleration/deceleration reference
20
frequency
60 Hz 50 Hz Pr.84 Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz 5
22 Stall prevention operation level *2 *2 *2 0.1% 0.1%
150% 150% 150%
Frequency / rotation speed unit
53 0 1 0 1 1

55
switchover
Frequency monitoring reference 60 Hz 50 Hz Pr.84 Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
6
56 Current monitoring reference Inverter rated current Pr.859 Pr.859 0.01 A 0.01 A
71 Applied motor 0 — — 1 1
72 PWM frequency selection — 2 2 1 1 7
80 Motor capacity 9999 — — 0.01 kW 0.01 kW
81 Number of motor poles 9999 — — 1 1
84
125
Rated motor frequency
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
9999 — — 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
8
60 Hz 50 Hz Pr.84 Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
(903) frequency
126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
60 Hz 50 Hz Pr.84 Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
(905)
240
frequency
Soft-PWM operation selection 1 0 0 1 1
9
Maximum motor
Maximum motor
374 Overspeed detection level 9999 rotations per minute 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
frequency + 10 Hz*3
+ 10 Hz *3*4
10
390 % setting reference frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz Pr.84 Pr.84 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
505 Speed setting reference 60 Hz 50 Hz — — 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
Current average value monitor
557 Inverter rated current Pr.859 Pr.859 0.01 A 0.01 A
signal output reference current
800 Control method selection 40 10 10 1 1
820 Speed control P gain 1 60% 30% 30% 1% 1%
821 Speed control integral time 1 0.333 s 0.333 s 0.333 s 0.001 s 0.001 s
Torque control P gain 1 (current loop
824 100% 100% 100% 1% 1%
proportional gain)
Torque control integral time 1
825 5 ms 20 ms 20 ms 0.1 ms 0.1 ms
(current loop integral time)
870 Speed detection hysteresis 0 Hz 0.5 Hz*4 0.5 Hz 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
Regeneration avoidance
885 6 Hz Pr.84 × 10% Pr.84 × 10% 1 r/min 0.01 Hz
compensation frequency limit value
Energy saving monitor reference Motor capacity Motor capacity
893 Inverter rated current 0.01 kW 0.01 kW
(motor capacity) (Pr.80) (Pr.80)
—: Not changed
*1 Gr.1 and Gr.2 are the parameter initial value groups. (Refer to page 82.)
*2 120% for LD rating and 150% for ND rating (Refer to Pr.570 Multiple rating setting on page 134.)
*3 The Pr.702 Maximum motor frequency is used as the maximum motor frequency (rotations per minute). When Pr.702 = "9999" (initial value),
the Pr.84 Rated motor frequency is used as the maximum motor frequency (rotations per minute).
*4 The setting value is converted from frequency to rotations per minute. (It differs according to the number of motor poles.)

NOTE
• When the motor parameter initialization is performed with the setting in units of rotations per minute (Pr.998 = "8009 or 9009"),
the parameters not listed in the table and the monitor items are also set and displayed in rotations per minute.

4. Control Method
4.3 Selecting the PM sensorless vector control
93
  Setting for the V/F control by selecting PM parameter initialization on the
operation panel ("PM")

• When the control method is changed from PM sensorless vector control to V/F control, all the parameter settings required to
drive an induction motor are automatically set. (Refer to page 92.)

The following shows the procedure to change the control method from PM sensorless vector control to V/F control by selecting
PM parameter initialization on the operation panel.

Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode

Press the PU/EXT key to choose the PU operation mode.
The PU LED turns ON.

3. Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode.
The PRM LED is ON.

4. PM parameter initialization
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until "PM" (PM parameter initialization) appears.

5. Displaying the set value

Press the SET key to read the present set value.
The value set in Pr.998 is displayed.

6. Changing the setting value

Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key to change the value to "0", and the SET key to confirm it.
"0" blinks. The setting is completed.

NOTE
• If PM parameter initialization is selected on the operation panel to set V/F control, the setting of Pr.998 PM parameter
initialization is also changed automatically.
• The changed parameter settings are the same as those when Pr.998 = "0".

94 4. Control Method
4.3 Selecting the PM sensorless vector control
 CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER 5 Speed control
4

5.1 Setting procedure of Real sensorless vector control (speed control) .....................................................................98
5.2 Setting procedure of PM sensorless vector control (speed control) .......................................................................99
6
5.3 Setting the torque limit level..................................................................................................................................100
5.4 Performing high-accuracy, fast-response control (gain adjustment for Real sensorless vector control and PM sen-
sorless vector control)107
7
5.5 Avoiding motor overrunning..................................................................................................................................109
5.6 Troubleshooting in the speed control....................................................................................................................110
8

10

95
 5 Speed control

Refer
Purpose Parameter to set
to page
P.H500, P.H700
to P.H704, Pr.22, Pr.801,
To limit the torque during speed P.H710, P.H720, Pr.803, Pr.810
Torque limit 100
control P.H721, P.H730, to Pr.817,
P.D030, P.T040, Pr.858, Pr.874
P.G210
P.G211, P.G212, Pr.820, Pr.821,
To adjust the speed control gain Speed control P gain, speed control integral time 107
P.G311, P.G312 Pr.830, Pr.831
To avoid motor overrunning Speed deviation excess P.H416, P.H417 Pr.285, Pr.853 109
This chapter explains the speed control under Real sensorless vector control and PM sensorless vector control. Speed control
performs control so that the speed command and the actual motor rotation speed match.

 Control block diagram

Analog input offset
Terminal 2 bias [C2, C3] adjustment [Pr. 849] Operation Mode
AU Terminal 2 gain [Pr. 125, C4] [Pr. 79]
Terminal 2
Terminal 4 bias [C5, C6] Analog
AU Terminal 4 gain [Pr. 126, C7] input
Terminal 4 selection
[Pr. 858 = 0] [Pr. 73]
RT [Pr.822≠9999]
[Pr. 822]
Speed setting [Pr. 74]
filter [Pr. 822 = 9999]
RT [Pr. 832≠9999] [Pr. 832]
[Pr. 74]
[Pr. 832 = 9999]

RL Multi-speed
RM selection
[Pr. 4 to 6,
RH 24 to 27,
REX 232 to 239]
Option
Operation panel

Acceleration/deceleration processing
Maximum/minimum setting

[Pr. 1] Running
[Pr. 13] [Pr. 10]
[Pr. 2] A
[Pr. 7] [Pr. 8] During stop

PM sensorless vector control

DC injection brake operation

Real sensorless
[Pr. 850 = 1] Vector control
Zero speed control
DC injection brake operation
[Pr. 850 = 0]

96 5. Speed control
 Speed
A
＋ RT control
P gain 1
＋
1
- [Pr. 820] ＋
Speed control
integral
time 1
[Pr. 821]
2
Speed
estimation
Speed
RT control ＋
P gain 2
[Pr. 830] Speed control
＋ 3
integral
time 2
[Pr. 831]

4
Torque
Torque limit Motor

5
control

Torque limit
[Pr. 810 = 0]
[Pr. 22, 812 to 817]

Terminal 4 bias [C38, C39]

[Pr. 810 = 1]
[Pr. 810 = 2] Constant power
6
Terminal 4 gain [C40, C41]
Terminal 4 range torque
Torque limit
[Pr. 858 = 4] RT [Pr. 826 ≠ 9999] characteristic
input method
[Pr. 826] selection
selection

7
Torque [Pr. 74] [Pr. 803]
setting [Pr. 826 = 9999]
filter RT [Pr. 836 ≠ 9999]
[Pr. 836]
[Pr. 74]
[Pr. 836 = 9999]

Communication option 8

10

5. Speed control
97
 5.1 Setting procedure of Real sensorless vector
control (speed control)
Sensorless

Operating procedure
1. Perform wiring properly. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Connection).)

2. Set the applied motor (Pr.71). (Refer to page 294.)

Set Pr.71 Applied motor to "0" (standard motor) or "10" (constant-torque motor).

3. Set the overheat protection of the motor (Pr.9). (Refer to page 198.)

4. Set the motor capacity and number of motor poles (Pr.80, Pr.81). (Refer to page 86.)
Operation does not start when the setting value is "9999" (initial value).

5. Set the rated motor voltage and the rated motor frequency (Pr.83, Pr.84). (Refer to page 299.)

6. Select the control method (Pr.800). (Refer to page 86.)

Select Pr.800 = "10" (speed control) or "12" (speed/torque switchover) to enable speed control.

7. Set the operation command. (Refer to page 174.)

Select the start command and speed command.

8. Set the torque limit (Pr.810). (Refer to page 100.)

9. Perform the offline auto tuning (Pr.96). (Refer to page 299.)
10. Perform the test operation.
As required
• Select online auto tuning (Pr.95). (Refer to page 315.)
• Adjust the speed control gain manually. (Refer to page 107.)

NOTE
• During Real sensorless vector control, offline auto tuning must be performed properly before starting operations.
• The speed command setting range under Real sensorless vector control is 0 to 400 Hz.
• The carrier frequency is limited during Real sensorless vector control. (Refer to page 146.)
• Torque control is not available in a low-speed (about 10 Hz or lower) regenerative range, or with a low speed and light load
(about 5 Hz or lower and rated torque about 20% or lower).
• This product with the start command ON may also rotate the motor at a low speed when the speed limit value is set to zero.
Confirm that the motor running does not cause any safety problems.
• Switching between the forward rotation command (STF) and reverse rotation command (STR) must not be performed during
operations under torque control. An overcurrent trip (E.OC[]) or opposite rotation deceleration fault (E.11) will occur.
• In case of starting the motor while the motor is coasting under Real sensorless vector control, the frequency search must be
set for the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function (Pr.57 ≠ "9999", Pr.162 = "10"). (Refer to page 351.)
• When Real sensorless vector control is applied, there may not be enough torque provided in the ultra low-speed range of about
2 Hz or lower.
Generally, the speed control range is as follows.
For power driving, 1:200 (2, 4 or 6 poles) (available at 0.3 Hz or higher when the rating is 60 Hz), 1:30 (8 or 10 poles) (available
at 2 Hz or higher when the rating is 60 Hz).
For regenerative driving, 1:12 (2 to 10 poles) (available at 5 Hz or higher when the rating is 60 Hz).

98 5. Speed control
5.1 Setting procedure of Real sensorless vector control (speed control)
5.2 Setting procedure of PM sensorless vector control 1
(speed control)
2
PM

This inverter is set for an induction motor in the initial setting. Follow the following procedure to change the setting for the PM
sensorless vector control. 3
Operating procedure
1. Set the applied motor (Pr.9, Pr.71, Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.83, and Pr.84). (Refer to page 294, page 308.)
4
Set "8093" (IPM motor) or "9093" (SPM motor) in Pr.71 Applied motor. Set Pr.9 Rated motor current, Pr.80 Motor
capacity, Pr.81 Number of motor poles, Pr.83 Rated motor voltage, and Pr.84 Rated motor frequency
according to the motor specifications. (Operation does not start when the setting values of Pr.80 and Pr.81 are
5
"9999" (initial value).)

2. Select the PM sensorless vector control (Pr.800). (Refer to page 86.)

The PM LED on the operation panel turns ON when the PM sensorless vector control is set by setting Pr.800 = "10". 6
3. Perform the offline auto tuning for a PM motor (Pr.96). (Refer to page 308.)
Set "1" (offline auto tuning without rotating motor) in Pr.96, and perform tuning.
7
4. Configure the initial setting for the PM sensorless vector control using Pr.998. (Refer to page 92.)
When the setting for the PM motor is selected in Pr.998 PM parameter initialization, all the parameters required
for PM sensorless vector control are automatically set. 8
Setting Description
8009 Parameter settings (in rotations per minute) for an IPM motor
8109 Parameter settings (in frequencies) for an IPM motor 9
9009 Parameter settings (in rotations per minute) for an SPM motor
9109 Parameter settings (in frequencies) for an SPM motor

5. Set parameters such as the acceleration/deceleration time and multi-speed setting. 10

Set parameters such as the acceleration/deceleration time and multi-speed setting as required.

6. Set the operation command. (Refer to page 174.)

Select the start command and speed command.

7. Perform the test operation.

NOTE
• To change to the PM sensorless vector control, perform PM parameter initialization after offline auto tuning. If parameter
initialization is performed after setting other parameters, some of those parameters are initialized too. (Refer to page 92 for
the parameters that are initialized.)
• To use a motor capacity that is one rank lower than the inverter capacity, set Pr.80 Motor capacity before performing PM
parameter initialization.
• The carrier frequency is limited during PM sensorless vector control. (Refer to page 146.)
• The protective function may be activated due to insufficient torque in the low-speed range of 10% of the rated motor frequency
or lower. The toque limit is not activated.
• During PM sensorless vector control, the RUN signal is output about 100 ms after turning ON the start command (STF, STR).
The delay is due to the magnetic pole detection.

5. Speed control
5.2 Setting procedure of PM sensorless vector control (speed control)
99
 5.3 Setting the torque limit level
Sensorless PM

Limit the output torque not to exceed the specified value.

The torque limit level can be set in a range of 0% to 400%. The TL signal can be used to switch between two types of torque
limit.
The torque limit level can be selected by setting it with a parameter, or by using the analog input terminal (terminal 4). Also, the
torque limit levels of forward rotation (power driving/regenerative driving) and reverse rotation (power driving/regenerative
driving) can be set individually.
Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
22 Stall prevention operation Set the torque limit level as a percentage with regards to the rated
H500 level (Torque limit level) 150% / 200%*1 0% to 400%
torque as 100%.
Set the OL signal output start time at the activation of torque limit
157 0 to 25 s
OL signal output timer 0s operation.
M430
9999 No OL signal output.
0% to 400% Set the torque current limit level.
801
Output limit level 9999 The torque limit setting value is used for limiting the torque current
H704 9999
level.
The motor power output is
The torque rises in the low-
0 limited to be constant in the
speed range.
constant power range.
The torque is limited to be
The torque is kept constant in
1 constant in the constant power
the low-speed range.
range.
Constant output range
803 The torque is limited to be
torque characteristic 0
G210 The torque is kept constant in constant in the constant power
selection
2 the low-speed range. (The range unless the output limit of
torque current is limited.) the torque current is reached.
(The torque current is limited.)
The motor power output is
The torque is kept constant in
10 limited to be constant in the
the low-speed range.
constant power range.
0 Torque command given by analog input via terminal 4
Torque limit by the parameter setting (Pr.805 or Pr.806)
1
(-400% to 400%)
804 Torque command source
0 3 Torque limit via communication*2
D400 selection
4 The internal torque limit 2 cannot be used
5
Torque limit via communication*2
6
805 Torque command value 600% to Writes the torque limit value in RAM. Regards 1000% as 0%, and
1000%
D401 (RAM) 1400% set torque command by an offset of 1000%.
Writes the torque limit value in RAM and EEPROM.
806 Torque command value 600% to
1000% Regards 1000% as 0%, and set torque command by an offset of
D402 (RAM, EEPROM) 1400%
1000%.
0 Internal torque limit 1 (torque limited by parameter settings)
810 Torque limit input method 1 External torque limit (torque limited by terminal 4)
0
H700 selection
2 Internal torque limit 2 (torque limited via communication)*2
811 0 Torque limit setting increments 0.1%
Set resolution switchover 0
D030 10 Torque limit setting increments 0.01%
812 Torque limit level 0% to 400% Set the torque limit level for forward rotation regenerative driving.
9999
H701 (regeneration) 9999 Limit using Pr.22 or the analog terminal values.
813 Torque limit level (3rd 0% to 400% Set the torque limit level for reverse rotation power driving.
9999
H702 quadrant) 9999 Limit using Pr.22 or the analog terminal values.
814 Torque limit level (4th 0% to 400% Set the torque limit level for reverse rotation regenerative driving.
9999
H703 quadrant) 9999 Limit using Pr.22 or the analog terminal values.
When the torque limit selection (TL) signal is ON, Pr.815 is the
815 0% to 400%
Torque limit level 2 9999 torque limit value regardless of Pr.810.
H710
9999 The torque limit set to Pr.810 is valid.

100 5. Speed control

5.3 Setting the torque limit level
 Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
816 Torque limit level during 0% to 400% Set the torque limit value during acceleration.
1
9999
H720 acceleration 9999 The same torque limit as constant speed.
817 Torque limit level during 0% to 400% Set the torque limit value during deceleration.
9999
H721 deceleration 9999 The same torque limit as constant speed. 2
858 Terminal 4 function The torque limit level can be changed with setting value "4" and the
0 0, 4, 9999
T040 assignment signal to terminal 4.
874 The inverter can be set to be shut off at activation of torque limit
H730
OLT level setting 150% 0% to 400%
and stalling of the motor. Set the output to be shut off. 3
*1 The initial value changes from 150% to 200% when the control method is changed from V/F control or Advanced magnetic flux vector control to
Real sensorless vector control in the FR-E820-0175(3.7K) or lower or the FR-E840-0095(3.7K) or lower.
*2 Torque can be limited via CC-Link, CC-Link IE TSN, and CC-Link IE Field Network Basic.
4
NOTE
• The lower limit for the torque limit level under Real sensorless vector control is set to 30% even if a value lower than 30% is set.
• Under PM sensorless vector control, the torque limit is not activated in a low-speed range with a rated frequency of less than
10%. 5
• Under PM sensorless vector control, the torque limit level is reduced inversely proportional to the output frequency in the
constant output range of the rated motor frequency or higher.
6
 Block diagram of torque limit
<Real sensorless vector control>
Torque limit
7
Speed control Iq current control
Speed command
IM
8
 Selecting the torque limit input method (Pr.810)
• Use Pr.810 Torque limit input method selection to select the method to limit the output torque for speed control.
9
The method in the initial setting is use of the parameter settings.

Pr.810 setting
Torque limit input
method
Operation 10
Perform the torque limit operation using the parameter (Pr.22, Pr.812 to Pr.814) settings.
0 (initial value) Internal torque limit 1 If changing the torque limit parameters via communication is enabled, the torque limit input
can be performed via communication.
1 External torque limit Torque limit using analog voltage (current) to terminal 4 is valid.
• The setting value of Pr.805 or Pr.806 is used as the torque limit value.
2 (Internal torque limit 2) • The torque limit via communication is enabled. (Under PM sensorless vector control, the
operation is the same as the one when Pr.810 = "0".)

 Internal torque limit 1 (Pr.810 = "0", Pr.812 to Pr.814)

• The torque is limited by parameter setting
• In the initial value, a limit is applied to all quadrants by Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level (Torque limit level).

5. Speed control
5.3 Setting the torque limit level
101
 • To set individually for each quadrant, use Pr.812 Torque limit level (regeneration), Pr.813 Torque limit level (3rd
quadrant), Pr.814 Torque limit level (4th quadrant). When "9999" is set, Pr.22 setting is regarded as torque limit level
in all the quadrants.
Torque limit
+

Reverse Forward
regeneration driving
Reverse quad4 quad1 Forward
rotation (Pr.814) (Pr.22) rotation
Speed
quad3 quad2
(Pr.813) (Pr.812)
Reverse Forward
driving regeneration

-
Rated speed

 Torque limit level using analog input (terminal 4) (Pr.810 = "1", Pr.858)
• The torque is limited with the analog input of terminal 4. (External torque limit)
• Torque limit using analog input is valid with a limit value lower than the internal torque limit (Pr.22, Pr.812 to Pr.814). (If
the torque limit using analog input exceeds the internal torque limit, the internal torque limit is valid.)
• For inputting from terminal 4, set Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment = "4".
• Torque limit using analog input can be calibrated by the calibration parameters C38 to C41. (Refer to page 278.)

400
Torque(%)

150
Gain
C40
Bias
C38 Initial value

0 20 100%
0 4 20mA
C39 Torque setting signal C41

Calibration example of terminal 4

 Internal torque limit 2 (Pr.810 = "2", Pr.805, Pr.806)

• The setting value of Pr.805 or Pr.806 is used as the torque limit value.
• When the CC-Link, CC-Link IE TSN, or CC-Link IE Field Network is used, the torque limit value can be input using a remote
register (RWwC).
Pr.804
Torque limit input Setting range*1 Setting increments Required condition
setting
1 Torque limit by Pr.805, Pr.806*2 600 to 1400 —
1%
3 Torque limit by remote register (RWwC)*3 (-400% to 400%)
FR-A8NC is installed, or CC-Link
5 Torque limit by remote register (RWwC)*3 -32768 to 32767 (two's IE TSN or CC-Link IE Field
complement) 0.01%*4 Network Basic is used.
6 Torque limit by Pr.805, Pr.806*2 (-327.68% to 327.67%)*4
*1 The torque limit setting is defined as an absolute value.
*2 The torque limit value can also be set using the operation panel.
*3 The torque can also be limited by setting a value in Pr.805 or Pr.806.
*4 The setting range if set by the operation panel is "673 to 1327 (-327% to 327%)"; and the setting increment is 1%.

102 5. Speed control

5.3 Setting the torque limit level
 Torque limit
1

＋
Reverse regeneration Forward driving
Pr.805(Pr.806)
RWwC quad4 quad1
Pr.805(Pr.806)
RWwC 2
Speed
Pr.805(Pr.806) quad3 quad2 Pr.805(Pr.806)
RWwC RWwC 3
Reverse driving Forward regeneration

Reverse rotation Forward rotation

−
Rated speed
4
NOTE
• For the details of the CC-Link communication, refer to the FR-A8NC Instruction Manual. For the details of the CC-Link IE TSN
or CC-Link IE Field Network, refer to the Instruction Manual (Communication).
5

 Second torque limit level (TL signal, Pr.815) 6

• For Pr.815 Torque limit level 2, when the Torque limit selection (TL) signal is ON, the setting value of Pr.815 is the limit
value regardless of the setting of Pr.810 Torque limit input method selection.
• To assign the TL signal, set "27" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection). 7
Torque limit

Reverse
regeneration
Forward
driving
8
Pr.815 Pr.815
- quad4 quad1 +
Speed
9
Pr.815 quad3 quad2 Pr.815
Reverse Forward
driving regeneration
Reverse
rotation
Forward
rotation
10
Rated speed

NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 Setting the torque limit values during acceleration/deceleration

individually (Pr.816, Pr.817)
• The torque limit during acceleration and deceleration can be set individually. Torque limit using the setting values of Pr.816
Torque limit level during acceleration and Pr.817 Torque limit level during deceleration is as follows.
• If 1 second elapses while the difference between the set speed and rotation speed is within ±2 Hz, the torque limit level
during acceleration/deceleration (Pr.816 or Pr.817) changes to the torque control level during constant speed (Pr.22).

5. Speed control
5.3 Setting the torque limit level
103
 • When the difference between the set speed and rotation speed is -2 Hz or less, the torque limit level during deceleration
Torque limit level during deceleration (Pr.817) activates.
Output
frequency
(Hz) -2 Hz < set speed - rotation speed < 2 Hz

Set
frequency

-2 Hz set speed - rotation speed

Torque limit Time

level Acceleration Constant speed Deceleration

Pr.816
Pr.817
1s

Torque limit set to Pr.810

Torque limit level Torque limit level
during acceleration during deceleration

 Changing the setting increments of the torque limit level (Pr.811)

• The setting increments of Pr.22 Torque limit level, Pr.801 Output limit level, and Pr.812 to Pr.817 Torque limit level
can be changed to 0.01% by setting Pr.811 Set resolution switchover = "10".
Pr.811 setting Torque limit setting increments
0 (initial value) 0.1%
10 0.01%

NOTE
• The internal resolution of the torque limit is 0.024% (100/212), and fractions below this resolution are rounded off.
• When Real sensorless vector control is selected, fractions below a resolution equivalent to 0.1% are rounded off even if Pr.811
= "10" is set.

 Changing the torque characteristic of the constant-power range (Pr.801,

Pr.803)
• For the torque limit operation, the torque characteristic can be changed between in the low-speed range and in the constant
power range.
Torque characteristic in constant-power range
Pr.803 setting Torque characteristic in low-speed range
Torque characteristic Output limit
0 (initial value) Torque rise Constant motor output —
1 Constant torque Constant torque Disabled
2 Constant torque Constant torque Enabled
10 Constant torque Constant motor output —

104 5. Speed control

5.3 Setting the torque limit level
 • To avoid overload or overcurrent of the inverter or motor, use Pr.801 Output limit level to limit the torque current.
Pr.801 setting Description 1
0% to 400% Set the torque current limit level.
9999 The torque limit setting value (Pr.22, Pr.812 to Pr.817, etc.) is used for limiting the torque current.

Pr.803=0
Torque
Pr.803=1
Torque
2
Low-speed Constant torque Low-speed Constant torque
range range Constant power range range range Constant power range

3
Constant power limit

Torque rise limit Constant torque limit Constant torque limit

4
Rated speed Speed Rated speed Speed

Pr.803=2
Torque
5
Low-speed Constant torque
range range Constant power range

Pr.801 Torque reduction when the

6
output is limited

When the output limit 7

Constant torque Constant torque is not exceeded
limit limit
Rated speed Speed

Pr.803=10
8
Torque
Low-speed Constant torque
range range Constant power range
9
Constant power limit

Constant torque limit

10
Rated speed Speed

NOTE
• When the Pr.801 setting value is less than the torque limit setting value (Pr.22, Pr.812 to Pr.817, etc.), the Pr.801 setting is
used for limiting the torque current.

 Trip during torque limit operation (Pr.874)

• The inverter can be set to be shut off at activation of torque limit and stalling of the motor.

5. Speed control
5.3 Setting the torque limit level
105
 • When a high load is applied and the torque limit is activated under speed control, the motor stalls. At this time, if the rotation
speed is lower than the value set in Pr.865 Low speed detection and the output torque exceeds the level set in Pr.874
OLT level setting, and this state continues for 3 seconds, Stall prevention stop (E.OLT) is activated and the inverter output
is shut off.
Torque

Pr.874 Torque limit

Output torque
Time
Output
frequency

Pr.865
Time
Start signal
(STF)
3s
Fault signal
(ALM) E.OLT occurrence

NOTE
• Under V/F control or Advanced magnetic flux vector control, if the output frequency drops to 0.5 Hz due to the stall prevention
operation and this state continues for 3 seconds, a fault indication (E.OLT) appears, and the inverter output is shut off. This
operation is activated regardless of the Pr.874 setting.
• This fault does not occur under torque control.

 Adjusting the signal output under torque limit operation and output
timing (OL signal, Pr.157)
• If the output torque exceeds the torque limit level and the torque limit is activated, the overload warning (OL signal) is turned
ON for 100 ms or longer. When the output torque drops to the torque limit level or lower, the output signal also turns OFF.
• Pr.157 OL signal output timer can be used to set whether to output the OL signal immediately, or whether to output it
after a certain time period has elapsed.
• For the OL signal, set "3" (positive logic) or "103" (negative logic) in one of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
Pr.157 setting value Description
0 (initial value) Output immediately.
0.1 to 25 Output after the set time (s).
9999 Not output.

• The OL signal is also output during the regeneration avoidance operation ("OLV" display (overvoltage stall)).
Overload state
(OL operation)

OL output signal

Pr.157 Set time(s)

NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.22 Stall prevention operation levelpage 214
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 250
Pr.865 Low speed detectionpage 257

106 5. Speed control

5.3 Setting the torque limit level
5.4 Performing high-accuracy, fast-response control 1
(gain adjustment for Real sensorless vector
control and PM sensorless vector control) 2

3
Sensorless PM

Gain adjustment is useful for achieving optimum machine performance or improving unfavorable conditions, such as vibration
and acoustic noise during operation with high load inertia or gear backlash.

Pr. Name
Initial
value
Setting
range
Description 4
The proportional gain during speed control is set. (Setting this
820 parameter higher improves the trackability for speed command
Speed control P gain 1 60% 0% to 1000%
G211 changes. It also reduces the speed fluctuation caused by external
disturbance.)
5
The integral time during speed control is set. (Setting this
821
Speed control integral time 1 0.333 s 0 to 20 s parameter lower shortens the return time to the original speed
G212

830
when the speed fluctuates due to external disturbance.)
0% to 1000% Second function of Pr.820 (valid when RT signal is ON)
6
Speed control P gain 2 9999
G311 9999 The Pr.820 setting is applied to the operation.
831 0 to 20 s Second function of Pr.821 (enabled when the RT signal is ON)
G312
Speed control integral time 2 9999
9999 The Pr.821 setting is applied to the operation. 7
 Speed control gain adjustment
• The speed control gain can be adjusted for the conditions such as abnormal machine vibration, acoustic noise, slow 8
response, and overshoot.
• Setting 60% (initial value) in Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 is equivalent to 120 rad/s (speed response of a single motor).
(Equivalent to the half the rad/s value during Real sensorless vector control.) Setting this parameter higher speeds up the 9
response, but setting this too high causes vibration and acoustic noise.
• Setting Pr.821 Speed control integral time 1 lower shortens the return time to the original speed during speed fluctuation,
but setting it too low causes overshoot. 10
Proportional gain

200 (100)rad/s*1

120 (60)rad/s*1

Pr.820
60% 100% Setting
(initial value *2)

*1 The value in the parentheses is applicable under Real sensorless vector control.
*2 Performing PM parameter initialization changes the settings. (Refer to page 92.)

• Actual speed gain is calculated as follows when load inertia is applied.

Load
fluctuation

Speed
Since increasing the proportional gain enhances the
response level and decreases the speed fluctuation.

Decreasing the integral time shortens the return time taken.

JM JM: Motor inertia

Actual speed gain = Speed gain of a single motor
JM+JL JL: Load inertia converted as the motor axis inertia

5. Speed control
5.4 Performing high-accuracy, fast-response control (gain adjustment for Real sensorless vector control and PM sensorless vector control)
107
  Adjustment procedure
1. Change the Pr.820 setting while checking the conditions.

2. If it cannot be adjusted well, change Pr.821 setting, and perform step 1 again.

No. Movement / condition Adjustment method

Set Pr.820 and Pr.821 higher.
If acceleration is slow, raise the setting by 10% and then set the value to 80% to 90% of the
Pr.820
1 Load inertia is too high. setting immediately before vibration/noise starts occurring.
If overshoots occur, set about 80% to 90% of the maximum value without overshooting while
Pr.821
increasing the setting value by twice.
Set Pr.820 lower and Pr.821 higher.
Vibration or acoustic Set about 80% to 90% of the maximum value without any vibration/noise while decreasing the
Pr.820
2 noise are generated from setting value by 10%.
machines. If overshoots occur, set about 80% to 90% of the maximum value without overshooting while
Pr.821
increasing the setting value by twice.
Set Pr.820 higher.
3 Response is slow. If acceleration is slow, set about 80% to 90% of the maximum value without any vibration/
Pr.820
acoustic noise while increasing the setting value by 5%.
Set Pr.821 lower.
Return time (response
4 Set about 80% to 90% of the maximum value without overshooting or unstable movements while
time) is long.
decreasing the setting value of Pr.821 by half.
Set Pr.821 higher.
Overshoots or unstable
5 Set about 80% to 90% of the maximum value without overshooting or unstable movements while
movements occur.
increasing the setting value of Pr.821 by double.

NOTE
• Pr.830 Speed control P gain 2 and Pr.831 Speed control integral time 2 are valid when terminal RT is ON. In this case,
replace them for Pr.820 and Pr.821 in the description above.

 When using a multi-pole motor (8 poles or more)

• If the motor inertia is known, set Pr.707 Motor inertia (integer) and Pr.724 Motor inertia (exponent). (Refer to page 299.)
• Under Real sensorless vector control, adjust Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 and Pr.824 Torque control P gain 1
(current loop proportional gain) according to the motor as shown in the following table.
• Setting the parameter of Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 higher speeds up the response, but setting this too high causes
vibration and acoustic noise.
• Setting the parameter of Pr.824 Torque control P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain) too low causes current ripple,
and a noise synchronous with this will be emitted from the motor.
• Adjustment method:
No. Movement / condition Adjustment method
Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 must be set higher according to the motor inertia.
Motor rotation speed in the low- For multi-pole motors, because the inertia of the motor itself tends to be large, first
1
speed range is unstable. perform broad adjustment to improve the unstable movements, and then perform
fine adjustment by referring to the response level based on this setting.
2 Rotation speed trackability is poor. Set Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 higher. Raise the setting by 10%s and set a
value that approximately 80% to 90% of the setting right before vibration/noise
Large fluctuation of the rotation
3 starts occurring. If it cannot be adjusted well, double Pr.821 Speed control integral
speed relative to load fluctuation. time 1 and perform the adjustment of Pr.820 again.

Torque shortage or motor Set the speed control gain higher. (The same as No.1.) If this cannot be prevented
backlash occurs when starting or through gain adjustment, raise Pr.13 Starting frequency for a fault that occurs
4
passing a low-speed range under when starting, or shorten the acceleration time and avoid continuous operation in a
Real sensorless vector control. low-speed range.
Unusual vibration, noise and
5 overcurrent of the motor or
Set Pr.824 Torque control P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain) lower.
machine occurs.
Lower the setting by 10% and set a value that is approximately 80% to 90% of the
Overcurrent or overspeed (E.OS) setting immediately before the condition improves.
6 occurs when starting under Real
sensorless vector control.

108 5. Speed control

5.4 Performing high-accuracy, fast-response control (gain adjustment for Real sensorless vector control and PM sensorless vector control)
5.5 Avoiding motor overrunning 1

PM

Motor overrunning due to excessive load torque can be avoided.

2
Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
Set the speed deviation excess detection frequency 3
(difference between the rotation speed (estimated value)
285 Speed deviation excess detection 0 to 30 Hz
9999 and the speed command value) at which the protective
H416 frequency
function (E.OSD) activates.
9999 No speed deviation excess 4
Set the time from when the speed deviation excess state
853
Speed deviation time 1.0 s 0 to 100 s is entered to when the protective function (E.OSD)
H417
activates.
5
 Speed deviation excess detection (Pr.285, Pr.853)
• A shutoff can be set for when the deviation between the set frequency and the rotation speed (estimated value) is large,
such as when the load torque is excessive. 6
• When the difference (absolute value) between the speed command value and the rotation speed (estimated value) is equal
to or higher than the setting value in Pr.285 Speed deviation excess detection frequency for a continuous time equal
to or longer than the setting value in Pr.853 Speed deviation time, the speed deviation excess detection (E.OSD) is 7
activated to shut off the inverter output.

Set frequency
Frequency

Pr.285
8
(Hz)

Rotation speed (estimated value)

Time

Fault output
Pr.853
9
OFF ON
(ALM)
Speed deviation
excessive fault activated
(E. OSD)
10
NOTE
• This function is enable at a frequency equal to or higher than 10% of the rated motor frequency.

5. Speed control
5.5 Avoiding motor overrunning
109
 5.6 Troubleshooting in the speed control
Sensorless PM

No. Condition Possible cause Countermeasure

Speed command from
the controller is different • Check that the speed command sent from the controller is correct. (Take EMC
from the actual speed. measures.)
The speed command is • Lower the setting of Pr.72 PWM frequency selection.
Motor does not run at affected by noise.
the correct speed. The command speed
1 (Command speed and the speed
• Adjust bias and gain (Pr.125, Pr.126, C2 to C7) of the speed command again.
and actual speed recognized by the
differ.) inverter are different.
Enable the online auto tuning at startup (set Pr.95 (Pr.574) = "1") (under Real
The motor constant
sensorless vector control). (Refer to page 315.)
varies due to increase in
To perform the online auto tuning at startup for a lift, use a brake sequence function
the motor temperature.
for the brake opening timing at a start.
Torque shortage. • Raise the torque limit.
The speed does not The torque limit is (Refer to the torque limit for speed control on page 100.)
2 accelerate to the operating. • Increase the capacity.
command speed. Only P (proportional) • Speed deviation occurs under P (proportional) control when the load is heavy.
control is performed. Select PI control.
• Check that the speed command sent from the controller is correct. (Take EMC
measures.)
Speed command varies.
• Set Pr.72 lower.
• Set Pr.822 Speed setting filter 1 higher. (Refer to page 271.)
Motor speed
3 • Raise the torque limit.
fluctuates. Torque shortage.
(Refer to the torque limit for speed control on page 100.)
Speed control gain is not
• Adjust Pr.820 Speed control P gain 1 and Pr.821 Speed control integral time
suitable for the machine.
1.
(Resonance occurs.)
Speed control gain is too
Hunting (vibration or • Set Pr.820 lower and Pr.821 higher.
high.
acoustic noise)
4 Torque control gain is
occurs in the motor • Set Pr.824 Torque control P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain) lower.
too high.
or the machine.
Motor wiring is incorrect. • Check the wiring.
Acceleration/ • Raise the torque limit.
Torque shortage.
deceleration time is (Refer to the torque limit for speed control on page 100.)
5
different from the
setting. Load inertia is too high. • Set acceleration/deceleration time suitable for the load.
Speed control gain is not
• Adjust Pr.820 and Pr.821.
suitable for the machine.
Response is slow
Machine movement
6 because of the inverter's
is unstable.
acceleration/ • Set the optimum acceleration/deceleration time.
deceleration time
setting.
High carrier frequency is
Rotation ripple affecting the motor • Set Pr.72 lower.
7 occurs during the rotation.
low-speed operation. Speed control gain is too
• Set Pr.820 higher.
low.

Parameters referred to
Pr.72 PWM frequency selectionpage 146
Pr.80 Motor capacity, Pr.81 Number of motor polespage 86
Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency, Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequencypage 273
Pr.822 Speed setting filter 1page 271
Pr.824 Torque control P gain 1 (current loop proportional gain)page 122

110 5. Speed control

5.6 Troubleshooting in the speed control
 CHAPTER 6
CHAPTER 6 Torque control
4

6.1 Torque control.......................................................................................................................................................112

6.2 Setting procedure of Real sensorless vector control (torque control)...................................................................116
6
6.3 Torque command..................................................................................................................................................117
6.4 Speed limit ............................................................................................................................................................120
6.5 Torque control gain adjustment ............................................................................................................................122
7
6.6 Troubleshooting in torque control .........................................................................................................................124

10

111
 6 Torque control

Refer
Purpose Parameter to set
to page
Torque command source selection or P.D400 to P.D402, P.G210,
Torque command Pr.801, Pr.803 to Pr.806 117
torque command value setting P.H704
To prevent the motor from
Speed limit P.H410 to P.H412 Pr.807 to Pr.809 120
overspeeding
Torque control gain P.G213, P.G214, P.G313, Pr.824, Pr.825, Pr.834,
To raise precision of torque control 122
adjustment P.G314 Pr.835

6.1 Torque control

This chapter explains the torque control under Real sensorless vector control.
• Under torque control, output torque is controlled to output the torque as commanded.
• Motor rotation speed is steady when the motor output torque and load torque are balanced.
Thus, motor speed during torque control is determined by the load.
• Under torque control, motor speed accelerates so motor output torque does not exceed motor load.
In order to prevent the motor from overspeeding, set a speed limit.
(Speed control is performed instead of torque control during speed limit.)
• If speed limit is not set, speed limit value setting is regarded as 0 Hz and torque control is not enabled.

 Block diagram
Constant power range
Torque command torque characteristic selection
Terminal 4 bias [C38,C39] source selection [Pr.803]
Terminal 4 gain [C40,C41] [Pr.804]
Terminal 4
[Pr. 858 = 4]

Torque RT [Pr.826≠9999]
setting [Pr.826]
filter [Pr.74]
[Pr.826 = 9999]
RT [Pr.836≠9999]
[Pr.836]
[Pr.74]
[Pr.836 = 9999]
Parameter
[Pr.805,806]

CC-Link (FR-A8NC)
CC-Link IE TSN
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic

16bit digital input

(FR-A8AX)

Estimated speed
RT Torque control
< Speed limit value +
P gain 1 Motor
[Pr.824] +
Torque control
integral time 1
[Pr.825]

RT Torque control
+
P gain 2
[Pr.834] +
Torque control
estimated speed integral time 2
Speed limit value Speed control [Pr.835]
+
A (proportional
Speed ‒ control)
limit value

Speed
estimation

112 6. Torque control

6.1 Torque control
 Speed limit Analog input offset

AU
Terminal 2 bias [C2,C3]
Terminal 2 gain [Pr.125, C4]
adjustment
[Pr.849] 1
Terminal 2
Terminal 4 bias [C5,C6] Analog
AU Terminal 4 gain [Pr.126, C7] input

2
Terminal 4 selection
[Pr. 858 = 0] [Pr. 73]

RT [Pr.822 ≠ 9999]
Speed
setting [Pr.822]

3
filter [Pr.74]
[Pr.822 = 9999]

RT [Pr.832 ≠ 9999] [Pr.832]

[Pr.74]
[Pr.832 = 9999]

RL Multi-speed
Operation Mode
[Pr.79] Speed limit selection
4
RM selection [Pr.807=0]
[Pr.4 to 6,
RH 24 to 27, [Pr.807=1]
232 to 239]

5
REX

Option
Operation
panel
Parameter
[Pr.808, Pr.809]
6

7
Acceleration/deceleration
Maximum/minimum processing
setting

[Pr.1]
A
[Pr.2]
[Pr.7] [Pr.8]
8

10

6. Torque control
6.1 Torque control
113
  Operation transition
Speed limit value is
increased up to preset value
according to the Pr.7
Acceleration time setting. Speed limit value Speed limit value is decreased
down to zero according to the Pr.8
Deceleration time setting.

Speed (estimated value) Torque control

Speed limit Speed limit

Start signal
The output torque is
determined by the torque
Speed control is performed during speed command.
Output torque
limit. (Thus, torque according to the
commanded is not developed.)

• If the setting value of Pr.7 and Pr.8 is "0", turning OFF the start signal enables speed control, and the output torque is
controlled by the torque limit value.
Speed limit value

Speed (estimated value) Torque control

Speed control
(speed limit)
Start signal

The output torque is determined

by the torque command.
Output torque
Limit at the torque limit value

Item Description
External operation STF, STR signal
Start signal
PU operation RUN key of the operation panel
Torque command Select the method to give the torque command, and give the torque command.
Speed limit Select the method to give the speed limit command, and input the speed limit value.

 Operation example
Torque control is enabled when the rotation speed (estimated value) does not exceed the speed limit value.
When the speed (estimated value) reaches or exceeds the speed limit value, speed limit is activated, torque control is stopped,
and speed control (proportional control) is performed.
The operation is as follows.
Speed
Pr.7 Speed limit value Pr.8
*

* *
Speed (estimated value)

Time
STF
(Forward
rotation
command)
Speed limit operation Torque control operation Speed limit operation Torque Speed limit operation
(Speed control) (Speed control) control
(Speed control)
operation
OL ON ON ON
(Speed limit) * When the speed limit activates, torque according to the commanded is not developed.

• At the STF signal ON, the speed limit value is raised in accordance with the setting of Pr.7.

114 6. Torque control

6.1 Torque control
 • Speed control is performed when the speed (estimated value) exceeds the speed limit value.
• At the STF signal OFF, the speed limit value is lowered in accordance with the setting of Pr.8.
• Under torque control, the speed (estimated value) is a constant speed when the torque command and load torque are
1
balanced.
• The direction of motor torque generation is determined by a combination of the input torque command polarity and the start
signal, as given in the following table.
2
Polarity of torque Torque generation direction
command STF signal ON
Forward direction (forward power driving / reverse
STR signal ON
Reverse direction (forward regenerative driving /
3
+ torque command
regenerative driving) reverse power driving)
Reverse direction (forward regenerative driving / reverse Forward direction (forward power driving / reverse
- torque command
power driving) regenerative driving)
4
NOTE
• Once the speed limit is activated, speed control is performed and internal torque limit (Pr.22 Torque limit level) is enabled.
(Initial value) In this case, it may not be possible to return to torque control. 5
Torque limit should be external torque limit (terminal 4). (Refer to page 100.)
• Under torque control, perform linear acceleration/deceleration (Pr.29 = "0" (initial value)). When acceleration/deceleration
patterns other than the linear acceleration/deceleration are selected, the protective function of the inverter may be activated.
(Refer to page 163.)
6
• This product with the start command ON may also rotate the motor at a low speed when the speed limit value is set to zero.
Confirm that the motor running does not cause any safety problems.
• Torque control is not available for regenerative driving in a low-speed range (about 10 Hz or lower) or light-load operation in 7
a low-speed range (about 5 Hz or lower and about 20% or lower of the rated torque).

10

6. Torque control
6.1 Torque control
115
 6.2 Setting procedure of Real sensorless vector
control (torque control)
Sensorless

Operating procedure
1. Perform wiring properly. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Connection).)

2. Make the motor setting (Pr.71). (Refer to page 294.)

Set Pr.71 Applied motor to "0" (standard motor) or "10" (constant-torque motor).

3. Set the motor overheat protection (Pr.9). (Refer to page 198.)

4. Set the motor capacity and the number of motor poles (Pr.80, Pr.81). (Refer to page 86.)
Operation does not start when the setting value is "9999" (initial value).

5. Set the rated motor voltage and frequency (Pr.83, Pr.84). (Refer to page 299.)

6. Select the control method (Pr.800). (Refer to page 86.)

Select Pr.800 Control method selection = "11" (torque control) or "12" (speed/torque switchover) to enable torque
control.

7. Set the torque command (Pr.804). (Refer to page 117.)

8. Set the speed limit (Pr.807). (Refer to page 120.)
9. Perform the offline auto tuning (Pr.96). (Refer to page 299.)
10. Perform the test operation.
As required
• Select online auto tuning (Pr.95). (Refer to page 315.)
• Adjust the torque control gain manually. (Refer to page 122.)

NOTE
• During Real sensorless vector control, offline auto tuning must be performed properly before starting operations.
• The carrier frequency is limited during Real sensorless vector control. (Refer to page 146.)
• Torque control is not available in a low-speed (about 10 Hz or lower) regenerative range, or with a low speed and light load
(about 5 Hz or lower and rated torque about 20% or lower).
• This product with the start command ON may also rotate the motor at a low speed when the speed limit value is set to zero.
Confirm that the motor running does not cause any safety problems.
• Switching between the forward rotation command (STF) and reverse rotation command (STR) must not be performed during
operations under torque control. An overcurrent trip (E.OC[]) or opposite rotation deceleration fault (E.11) will occur.
• If starting may occur while the motor is coasting under Real sensorless vector control, the frequency search must be set for
the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function (Pr.57 ≠ "9999", Pr.162 = "10").
• When Real sensorless vector control is applied, there may not be enough torque provided in the ultra low-speed range of about
2 Hz or lower.
Generally, the speed control range is as follows.
For power driving, 1:200 (2, 4 or 6 poles) (available at 0.3 Hz or higher when the rating is 60 Hz), 1:30 (8 or 10 poles) (available
at 2 Hz or higher when the rating is 60 Hz).
For regenerative driving, 1:12 (2 to 10 poles) (available at 5 Hz or higher when the rating is 60 Hz).

116 6. Torque control

6.2 Setting procedure of Real sensorless vector control (torque control)
6.3 Torque command 1

Sensorless

For torque control selection, the torque command source can be selected.
2
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
801 0% to 400% Set the torque current limit level. 3
Output limit level 9999
H704 9999 The torque limit setting value is used for limiting the torque current level.
0, 10 Constant motor output command

803
Constant output range
1 Constant torque command
The torque is constant unless the
In the torque command setting, 4
torque characteristic 0 select torque command for the
G210 output limit of the torque current is
selection 2 constant output area.
reached. (The torque current is

0
limited.)
Torque command given by analog input via terminal 4
5
Torque command (-400% to 400%) given by the parameter setting
1
(Pr.805 or Pr.806)
804
D400
Torque command
source selection
0 3 Torque command via communication*1 6
4 12/16-bit digital input (FR-A8AX)
5
Torque command via communication*1

805 Torque command value

6
600% to Writes the torque command value in RAM. Regards 1000% as 0%, and
7
1000%
D401 (RAM) 1400% set torque command by an offset of 1000%.
806 Torque command value 600% to Writes the torque command value in RAM and EEPROM Regards
1000%
D402 (RAM, EEPROM) 1400% 1000% as 0%, and set torque command by an offset of 1000%.
8
*1 Torque command can be input via CC-Link, CC-Link IE TSN, and CC-Link IE Field Network Basic.

 Control block diagram

[Pr. 804] Torque command Speed
9
source selection estimated <Speed limit value
Analog input 0 value +
Torque control Motor
10
1,3,5,6
Parameter [Pr. 805, Pr. 806]
16-bit digital input 4 -
(FR-A8AX)

+ Speed control
Speed limit input
Speed (proportional control)
estimated Speed limit value
- value
Speed estimator
Real sensorless vector control

NOTE
• When the torque command exceeding the torque limit value (Pr.22, Pr.810, Pr.812 to Pr.817) is given, the output torque is
within the torque limit value. (Refer to page 112.)

 Torque command given by analog input (terminal 4) (Pr.804 = "0" (initial

value))
• Torque commands are given by voltage (current) input via terminal 4.
• Set Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment = "4" to give the torque command via terminal 4.

6. Torque control
6.3 Torque command
117
 • Torque commands given by analog inputs can be calibrated by the calibration parameters C38 to C41. (Refer to page
278.)
Torque command
150%

0 100% Terminal 4
analog input

 Torque command given by parameter (Pr.804 = "1")

• Set Pr.805 Torque command value (RAM) or Pr.806 Torque command value (RAM, EEPROM) to set the torque
command value.
For Pr.805 or Pr.806, regard 1000% as 0%, and set torque command by offset from 1000%.
The following diagram shows relation between the Pr.805 or Pr.806 setting and the actual torque command value.
• To change the torque command value frequently, write it in Pr.805. Writing values in Pr.806 frequently will shorten the life
of the EEPROM.
Torque command value

400%

Pr.805, Pr.806
600% settings
1000% 1400%

Torque command value

-400% =Pr.805(or Pr.806)-1000%

NOTE
• When the torque command is set by Pr.805 (RAM), powering OFF the inverter erases the changed parameter value.
Therefore, the parameter set value is the one saved by Pr.806 (EEPROM) when the power is turned back on.
• If giving torque command by parameter setting, set the speed limit value properly to prevent overspeeding. (Refer to page
120.)

 Torque command via CC-Link communication (Pr.804 = "3 or 5")

• Set the torque command value via the CC-Link (FR-A8NC / PLC function), CC-Link IE TSN, and CC-Link IE Field Network
Basic.
• For speed limit when "3 or 5" is set in Pr.804, Pr.807 Speed limit selection becomes invalid and Pr.808 Speed limit and
Pr.809 Reverse-side speed limit become valid for speed limit. (When Pr.544 CC-Link extended setting = "0, 1, 12, 100,
or 112")
• Pr.807 is valid when the extended cyclic setting of CC-Link communication is quadruple or octuple.
Pr.804 Setting
Torque command input Setting range Required condition
setting increments
1 Torque command by Pr.805, Pr.806*1 —
600 to 1400
Torque command by remote register 1%
3 (-400% to 400%)
(RWw1 or RWwC)*2 FR-A8NC is installed, or CC-
Torque command by remote register Link IE TSN or CC-Link IE Field
5 -32768 to 32767 (complement of 2)
(RWw1 or RWwC)*2 0.01%*3 Network Basic is used.
*1
(-327.68% to 327.67%)*3
6 Torque command by Pr.805, Pr.806

*1 The torque command value can also be set using the operation panel.
*2 The torque command can also be given by setting a value in Pr.805 or Pr.806.
*3 The setting range if set by the operation panel is "673 to 1327 (-327% to 327%)"; and the setting increment is 1%.

NOTE
• For the details of the CC-Link communication, refer to the FR-A8NC Instruction Manual. For the details of the CC-Link IE TSN
or CC-Link IE Field Network, refer to the Instruction Manual (Communication).
• For details of the setting using the PLC function, refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual.

118 6. Torque control

6.3 Torque command
 Torque command given by 16-bit digital input (Pr.804 = "4")
• Give the torque command by 12-bit or 16-bit digital input using the FR-A8AX (plug-in option). 1
NOTE
• For details of the setting using the FR-A8AX, refer to the FR-A8AX Instruction Manual.
2
 Changing the torque characteristic of the constant-power range (Pr.801,
Pr.803) 3
• According to the motor's characteristics, the torque decreases at the frequency equal to or higher than the base frequency.
To give the constant torque command at the speed equal to or higher than the base frequency, set "1" in Pr.803 Constant
output range torque characteristic selection. 4
• Torque in a low-speed range is constant during torque control regardless of the setting of Pr.803. However, when "2" is
set in Pr.803 under Real sensorless vector control, the torque may not be kept constant in the low-speed range due to a
condition such as the Pr.801 setting. 5
Torque characteristic in constant-power range
Pr.803 setting
Torque characteristic Output limit
0 (initial value), 10 Constant motor output — 6
1 Constant torque Unlimited
2 Constant torque Limited

• To avoid overload or overcurrent of the inverter or motor, use Pr.801 Output limit level to limit the torque current in the 7
constant power range.
Pr.801 setting Description
0% to 400% Set the torque current limit level. 8
9999 The torque limit setting value (Pr.22, Pr.812 to Pr.817, etc.) is used for limiting the torque current.

Pr.803=0, 1, 10 9
Torque
Constant torque range Constant power range
Pr.803=1:
constant torque command 10
Pr.803=0, 10:
constant power command

Rated speed Speed

Pr.803 = 2
Torque
Constant torque range Constant power range

Pr.801 Torque reduction

when the output is
limited

When the output limit

Constant torque is not exceeded
command
Rated speed Speed

Parameters referred to
Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignmentpage 270
Calibration parameters C38 to C41 (terminal 4 bias, gain torque)page 278

6. Torque control
6.3 Torque command
119
 6.4 Speed limit
Sensorless

When operating under torque control, motor overspeeding may occur if the load torque drops to a value less than the torque
command value, etc. Set the speed limit value to prevent overspeeding.
If the actual speed reaches or exceeds the speed limit value, the control method switches from torque control to speed control,
preventing overspeeding.
Initial value*1 Setting
Pr. Name Description
Gr.1 Gr.2 range
0 Uses the speed command during speed control as the speed limit.
807
Speed limit selection 0 Sets the speed limits for forward and reverse directions individually by
H410 1
using Pr.808 and Pr.809.
808
Speed limit 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 400 Hz Sets speed limit.
H411
Sets the speed limit when the load has reversed the motor rotation
809 0 to 400 Hz
Reverse-side speed limit 9999 opposite to the torque polarity.
H412
9999 Pr.808 setting value is effective.
*1 Gr.1 and Gr.2 are the parameter initial value groups. (Refer to page 82).

 Control block diagram

Speed estimated value < speed limit value
Torque command +
Torque control Motor
Pr. 807 Speed limit selection
Same method 0 -
as speed command input
1 + Speed control
Parameter(Pr. 808, Pr. 809)
(proportional control)
- Speed estimated value speed limit value
Speed estimator
Real sensorless vector control

 Using the speed command during speed control (Pr.807 = "0" (initial
value))
• Speed limit is set by the same method as speed setting during speed control (speed setting by the operation panel, multi-
speed setting, plug-in option, etc.).
• When the start signal turns ON, the limit level increases from 0 Hz to the set speed by taking the time set in Pr.7
Acceleration time. When the start signal turns OFF, the limit level at the time decreases to the operation start level of
Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency, by taking the time set in Pr.8 Deceleration time.
The speed setting
Speed
value is the speed
Forward rotation limit value.
Pr.7 Pr.8
Speed setting
value during
speed control
Time

Torque controllable
range
Reverse rotation
STF(STR) ON OFF

NOTE
• The second acceleration/deceleration time can be set.
• When speed limit command exceeds Pr.1 Maximum frequency setting, the speed limit value becomes Pr.1 setting. When
speed limit command falls below Pr.2 Minimum frequency setting, the speed limit value becomes Pr.2 setting. Also, the
speed limit command is smaller than Pr. 13 Starting frequency, the speed limit value becomes 0 Hz.
• To use analog inputs to perform speed limit, calibrate analog input terminals 2 and 4. (Refer to page 273.)
• To use analog inputs to perform speed limit, turn OFF the external signals (RH, RM, RL). If any of the external signals (RH,
RM, RL) is ON, speed limit by multi-speed are enabled.

120 6. Torque control

6.4 Speed limit
 Speed limit by parameters (Pr.807 = "1")
• Following the polarity change in the torque command, the polarity of the speed limit value changes. This prevents the 1
speed from increasing in the torque polarity direction. (When the torque command value is 0, the polarity of the speed limit
value is positive.)
• When Pr.807 Speed limit selection = "0", the setting during speed control is applied for the speed limit. When Pr.807 2
Speed limit selection = "1", Pr.808 Speed limit is applied for the speed limit.
• When the load has reversed the rotation opposite to the torque polarity, the setting of Pr.809 Reverse-side speed limit
is applied for the speed limit. (The speed limit value and reverse-side speed limit value are limited at Pr.1 Maximum 3
frequency.)
Reverse-side Torque
speed limit value command
-Pr.809 value Speed limit value 4
Range where torque
control is available
5
Rotation speed

6
-Speed limit value Reverse-side

7
speed limit value
Pr.809
Range where torque
Rotation speed control is available
Rotation speed Range where torque

Pr.7
control is available
Pr.8
Pr.809 8
Reverse-side
Speed limit value speed limit value

Time Time
9
Speed limit value
Pr.7 Pr.8
10
-Pr.809
Reverse-side
speed limit value

Start signal OFF ON Start signal OFF ON

When the torque command value is positive When the torque command value is negative

NOTE
• During the speed limit operation, "SL" is displayed on the operation panel and the OL signal is output.
• For the OL signal, set "3" (positive logic) or "103" (negative logic) in one of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection) to assign the function to the output terminal. Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 may affect
the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequency, Pr.2 Minimum frequencypage 211
Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27, Pr.232 to Pr.239 (multi-speed operation)page 195
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 158
Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 169
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 250

6. Torque control
6.4 Speed limit
121
 6.5 Torque control gain adjustment
Sensorless PM
Operation is normally stable enough in the initial setting, but some adjustments can be made if abnormal vibration, noise or
overcurrent occur for the motor or machinery.
Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
824 Torque control P gain 1 (current loop
100% 0% to 500% Set the current loop proportional gain.
G213 proportional gain)
825 Torque control integral time 1 (current
5 ms 0 to 500 ms Set current loop integral compensation time.
G214 loop integral time)
Set the current loop proportional gain when RT signal is
834 Torque control P gain 2 (current loop 0% to 500%
9999 ON.
G313 proportional gain)
9999 The Pr.824 setting is applied to the operation.
Set the current loop integral compensation time when
835 Torque control integral time 2 (current 0 to 500 ms
9999 RT signal is ON.
G314 loop integral time)
9999 The Pr.825 setting is applied to the operation.

 Current loop proportional (P) gain adjustment (Pr.824)

• The 100% current loop proportional gain is equivalent to 1000 rad/s.
• For ordinary adjustment, try to set within the range of 50% to 500%.
• Set the proportional gain for during torque control.
• If setting value is large, changes in current command can be followed well and current fluctuation relative to external
disturbance is smaller. If the setting value is however too large, it becomes unstable and high frequency torque pulse is
produced.

 Current control integral time adjustment (Pr.825)

• Set the integral time of current control during torque control.
• Torque response increases if set small; current however becomes unstable if set too small.
• If the setting value is small, it produces current fluctuation toward disturbance, decreasing time until it returns to original
current value.

 Using two types of gain (Pr.834, Pr.835)

• Use Pr.834 Torque control P gain 2 (current loop proportional gain) and Pr.835 Torque control integral time 2
(current loop integral time) if the gain setting needs to be switched according to application or if multiple motors are
switched by a single inverter.
• Pr.834 and Pr.835 is enabled when the second function selection (RT) signal is turned ON.

NOTE
• The RT signal is a second function selection signal which also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 289.)
• To assign the RT signal, set "3" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).

 Adjustment procedure
Adjust if any of phenomena such as unusual vibration, noise, current or overcurrent is produced by the motor or machinery.

1. Change the Pr.824 setting while checking the conditions.

122 6. Torque control

6.5 Torque control gain adjustment
 2. If it cannot be adjusted well, change the Pr.825 setting, and perform step 1 again.
Adjustment method 1
Set Pr.824 lower and Pr.825 longer. First, lower Pr.824 and then check of there is still any abnormal vibration, noise or
current from the motor. If it still requires improvement, make Pr.825 longer.
Lower the setting by 10% each time and set a value that is approximately 80% to 90% of the setting
Pr.824 immediately before the abnormal noise or current improves. 2
If set too low, current ripple is produced and produces a sound from the motor that synchronizes with it.
Lengthen the current setting by doubling it each time and set a value that is approximately 80% to 90% of
Pr.825 the setting value, immediately before abnormal noise or current is improved.
If set too long, current ripple is produced and produces a sound from the motor that synchronizes with it. 3

10

6. Torque control
6.5 Torque control gain adjustment
123
 6.6 Troubleshooting in torque control
Sensorless

Condition Possible cause Countermeasure

• Check the wiring. (Refer to the Instruction Manual
• Motor wiring is incorrect.
(Connection).)
• Pr.800 Control method selection
• Check the Pr.800 setting. (Refer to page 86.)
is not appropriate.
• The speed limit value has not been • Set the speed limit value. (If speed limit value is not input, it
input. becomes 0 Hz by default and the motor does not run.)
Torque control does not • Check that the torque command sent from the controller is
1 correct.
operate properly. • Torque command varies.
• Set Pr.72 PWM frequency selection lower.
• Set Pr.826 Torque setting filter 1 higher.
• Re-calibrate C38 Terminal 4 bias command (torque/
• The torque command and the torque magnetic flux), C39 Terminal 4 bias (torque/magnetic
recognized by the inverter are flux), C40 Terminal 4 gain command (torque/magnetic
different. flux), C41 Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic flux). (Refer to
page 278.)
When a small torque
command is given, the
• Torque offset calibration is
2 motor rotates in a • Re-calibrate C38 and C39. (Refer to page 278.)
inaccurate.
direction opposite to the
start signal.
• Speed limit is operating.
Torque control cannot
(Speed limit may operate because • Set the acceleration/deceleration time shorter.
operate normally during
the speed limit value will increase or Alternatively, set "0" for the acceleration/deceleration time.
3 acceleration/
decrease according to acceleration/ (Forward/reverse rotation speed limit at this time is the value
deceleration.
deceleration time setting of Pr.7 and at a constant speed.)
The motor vibrates.
Pr.8 when Pr.807 = "0".)

Parameters referred to
Pr.72 PWM frequency selectionpage 146
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283
Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 86
Pr.807 Speed limit selectionpage 120
C38 to C41 (torque setting voltage (current) bias/gain)page 278

124 6. Torque control

6.6 Troubleshooting in torque control
 CHAPTER 7
CHAPTER 7 (E) Environment Setting
Parameters 4

7.1 Clock.....................................................................................................................................................................127
7.2 Reset selection / disconnected PU detection / PU stop selection ........................................................................128
6
7.3 Automatic frequency setting / key lock operation selection ..................................................................................130
7.4 Frequency change increment amount setting (standard model) ..........................................................................132
7.5 RUN key rotation direction selection.....................................................................................................................133
7
7.6 Multiple rating setting............................................................................................................................................134
7.7 Parameter write selection .....................................................................................................................................135
7.8 Password ..............................................................................................................................................................137
8
7.9 Free parameter .....................................................................................................................................................140
7.10 Setting multiple parameters by batch ...................................................................................................................141
7.11 Extended parameter display and user group function ..........................................................................................143
9
7.12 PWM carrier frequency and Soft-PWM control.....................................................................................................146
7.13 Inverter parts life display.......................................................................................................................................148
7.14 Maintenance timer alarm ......................................................................................................................................152
10
7.15 Current average value monitor signal...................................................................................................................153

125
 7 (E) Environment Setting Parameters

Refer to
Purpose Parameter to set
page
To set the time Simple clock function P.E020 to P.E022 Pr.1006 to Pr.1008 127
To set a limit for the reset function.
Reset selection /
To shut off output if the operation panel
Disconnected PU detection
disconnects. P.E100 to P.E102 Pr.75 128
/ PU stop selection / Reset
To force deceleration to stop on the operation
limit
panel.
To set the frequency automatically. Operation panel operation
P.E200 Pr.161 130
To disable the operation panel. selection
To change the frequency change increments
Frequency change
which changes when using the setting dial of P.E201 Pr.295 132
increment amount setting
the operation panel
To determine which direction the motor 133
RUN key rotation direction
rotates when the RUN key on the operation P.E202 Pr.40
selection
panel is pressed.
To use the regeneration unit to increase the Regenerative brake
P.E300, P.G107 Pr.30, Pr.70 386
motor braking torque selection
To change the overload current rating
Multiple rating setting P.E301 Pr.570 134
specification
Parameter write disable
To prevent parameter rewriting P.E400 Pr.77 135
selection
To restrict parameters with a password Password P.E410, P.E411 Pr.296, Pr.297 137
To use parameters freely Free parameter P.E420, P.E421 Pr.888, Pr.889 140
To change parameter settings for a PM motor
PM parameter initialization P.E430 Pr.998 92
by batch
Automatic parameter
To set multiple parameters by batch P.E431 Pr.999 141
setting
Applicable parameter
Pr.160, Pr.172 to
To display the required parameters display and user group P.E440 to P.E443 143
Pr.174
function
PWM carrier frequency Pr.72, Pr.240,
To reduce the motor noise and EMI P.E600 to P.E602 146
changing Pr.260
Pr.255 to Pr.259,
P.E700 to P.E706,
Inverter parts life display Pr.506, Pr.507, 148
P.E708
Pr.509
To understand the maintenance time of Environmental impact
P.E709 Pr.198 148
inverter parts and peripheral devices diagnosis function
Maintenance output
P.E710, P.E711 Pr.503, Pr.504 152
function
Current average monitor P.E720 to P.E722 Pr.555 to Pr.557 153

126 7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.1 Clock
1
The time can be set. The time can only be updated while the inverter power is ON.
Pr.
1006
Name Initial value Setting range Description
2
E020
Clock (year) 2000 (year) 2000 to 2099*1 Set the year.

Set the month and day.

1007 Clock (month,

101 to 131, 201 to 228, (229), 301 to 331,
401 to 430, 501 to 531, 601 to 630, 701 to
1000's and 100's digits: Month (1 (January) to
12 (December)).
3
101 (January 1)
E021 day) 731, 801 to 831, 901 to 930, 1001 to 10's and 1's digits: Day (1 to the last day of the
1031, 1101 to 1130, 1201 to 1231 month (28, 29, 30, or 31)).

0 to 59, 100 to 159, 200 to 259, 300 to

For December 31, set "1231".
4
359, 400 to 459, 500 to 559, 600 to 659,
Set the hour and minute using the 24-hour
700 to 759, 800 to 859, 900 to 959, 1000
clock.
1008 Clock (hour, to 1059, 1100 to 1159, 1200 to 1259,
E022 minute)
0 (00:00)
1300 to 1359, 1400 to 1459, 1500 to
1000's and 100's digits: 0 to 23 hours,
10's and 1's digits: 0 to 59 minutes.
5
1559, 1600 to 1659, 1700 to 1759, 1800
For 23:59, set "2359".
to 1859, 1900 to 1959, 2000 to 2059,
2100 to 2159, 2200 to 2259, 2300 to 2359
*1 The setting range is "2010 to 2099" when the CC-Link IE TSN communication is used for time synchronization.
6
 Simple clock function
• When the current year, month, day, hour and minute are set in the parameters above, the inverter internal clock starts 7
ticking. The set date and time can be checked by reading the parameters.

NOTE
• The time data of the internal clock is saved in the inverter's EEPROM every 10 minutes. 8
• The clock does not run while the control circuit power is OFF. The clock needs to be set every time after turning ON the inverter
power.

9
 Time synchronization via CC-Link IE TSN communication (Ethernet
model)
• The internal clocks of connected devices on the CC-Link IE TSN Network can be synchronized.
10
NOTE
• The clock of the inverter is adjusted every minute according to the received clock data. (The clock of the inverter is not
synchronized when the received clock data is out of range.)
• For information about sending clock data, refer to the Instruction Manual of the CC-Link IE TSN master module.

7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.1 Clock
127
 7.2 Reset selection / disconnected PU detection / PU
stop selection
The reset input acceptance, disconnected PU connector detection function, and PU stop function can be selected.
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
Reset selection/
In the initial setting, the reset command input is always enabled,
disconnected PU
75 14 0 to 3, 14 to 17 the inverter operation continues even when PU is disconnected,
detection/PU stop
and the operation can be stopped on the PU.
selection
0 Reset input is always enabled.
E100 Reset selection 0 Reset input is enabled only when the protective function is
1
activated.
Disconnected PU 0 Operation continues even when the PU is disconnected.
E101 0
detection 1 The inverter output is shut off when the PU is disconnected.
The inverter decelerates to stop when the STOP key on the PU is
0
pressed in PU operation mode. (The PU stop function is disabled.)
E102 PU stop selection 1 The inverter decelerates to stop when the STOP key on the PU is
1 pressed in any operation mode of the PU, external, or Network.
(The PU stop function is enabled.)
The parameters above do not return to their initial values even if Parameter clear/All parameter clear is executed.

Operation after PU
Pr.75 setting Reset input PU stop function
disconnection is detected
0 Always enabled. Operation continues. Disabled
1 When the protective function is activated. Operation continues. Disabled
2 Always enabled. Inverter output shutoff Disabled
3 When the protective function is activated. Inverter output shutoff Disabled
14 (initial value) Always enabled. Operation continues. Enabled
15 When the protective function is activated. Operation continues. Enabled
16 Always enabled. Inverter output shutoff Enabled
17 When the protective function is activated. Inverter output shutoff Enabled

 Reset selection (P.E100)

• When P.E100 = "1" or Pr.75 = "1, 3, 15, or 17" is set, the reset command input is enabled (using the RES signal or through
communication) only when the protective function is activated.

NOTE
• When the RES signal is input during operation, the motor coasts since the inverter being reset shuts off the output. Also, the
cumulative values of electronic thermal O/L relay and regenerative brake duty are cleared.
• When "reset input always enabled" is selected, the reset key on the PU is enabled only when the protective function is
activated.

 Disconnected PU detection (P.E101) (standard model only)

• When the inverter detects that the PU connector is disconnected from the inverter for 1 second or more while P.E101 =
"1" or Pr.75 = "2, 3, 16, or 17", the PU disconnection ("E.PUE") indication is displayed and the inverter output is shut off.

NOTE
• When the PU has been disconnected before power-ON, the output is not shut off.
• To restart the inverter operation, confirm that the PU is connected before reset.
• When the inverter detects that the PU is disconnected during PU JOG operation while P.E101 or Pr.75 is set to continue the
inverter operation even when the PU is disconnected, the inverter decelerates the motor to stop.
• During RS-485 communication operation via the PU connector, the Reset selection function and the PU stop selection function
are enabled but the Disconnected PU detection function is disabled. (The communication is checked according to Pr.122 PU
communication check time interval.)
• PU disconnection detection function is unavailable for Ethernet models.

128 7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.2 Reset selection / disconnected PU detection / PU stop selection
 PU stop selection (P.E102)
• The inverter operation can be stopped in any operation mode (PU, External, or Network) by pressing the STOP/RESET 1
key on the operation panel.
• When the inverter is stopped by the PU stop function, "PS" is displayed on the operation panel. However, the Fault signal
is not output. 2
• When P.E102 = "0", or Pr.75 = "0 to 3", only the inverter in the PU operation mode decelerates to stop by pressing the
STOP/RESET key.

NOTE
3
• The inverter decelerates to stop (PU stop function) also when the start command is input using a device which has the
command source (set in Pr.551) and then the STOP/RESET key is pressed on a PU which does not have the command
source. 4
(Example) When the operation panel has the command source and the stop command is input using a USB (FR
Configurator2), the PU stop function is activated.

5
 How to restart the inverter which has been stopped in the External
operation mode by using the STOP/RESET key on the PU ("PS" (PU stop)
warning reset method) 6
• PU stop release method for operation panel

1. After completion of deceleration stop, turn OFF the STF and STR signals. 7
2. Press the PU/EXT key three times (the PS warning is reset)
when Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "0" (initial value) or "6".
When Pr.79 = "2, 3, or 7", the PU stop warning can be cleared with one keystroke. 8
Speed
9
Time
Key
Operation
panel
Key
10
STF ON
(STR) OFF

Stop/restart example for External operation

• The inverter can be restarted by performing the reset operation (by turning OFF and ON the power or inputting the RES
signal).

NOTE
• Even when Pr.250 Stop selection ≠ "9999" is set and coasting stop is selected, using the PU stop function in the External
operation mode does not provide coasting stop but deceleration stop.

CAUTION
• Do not perform a reset while a start signal is being input. Doing so will cause a sudden start of the motor, which
is dangerous.

Parameters referred to
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 174
Pr.250 Stop selectionpage 384
Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selectionpage 185

7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.2 Reset selection / disconnected PU detection / PU stop selection
129
 7.3 Automatic frequency setting / key lock operation
selection
Turing the setting dial or pressing the UP/DOWN key on the operation panel enables frequency setting without pressing the
SET key.
The key operation of the operation panel can be disabled.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
0 Automatic frequency setting disabled Key lock function
161 Frequency setting/key lock 1 Automatic frequency setting enabled disabled.
0
E200 operation selection 10 Automatic frequency setting disabled Key lock function
11 Automatic frequency setting enabled enabled.

 Automatic frequency setting (Pr.161 = "1 or 11")

• To set the frequency using the operation panel when Pr.161 = "0" (initial value) or "10", change the frequency value using
the setting dial or the UP/DOWN key, and press the SET key to confirm the setting (the value is stored in the RAM and
EEPROM).
• When Pr.161 = "1 or 11", the automatic frequency setting is enabled. After the frequency value is changed using the setting
dial or the UP/DOWN key, the value indicated is stored in the RAM. If the frequency value has not been changed for 10
seconds, the value is stored in the EEPROM.

When the automatic frequency setting is disabled (Pr.161 = "0 (initial value) or 10")
Blinking

Alternating

Set frequency written and complete

When the MODE key is pressed or after 5 seconds

When the automatic frequency setting is enabled (Pr.161 = "1 or 11")

Within Alternating
Blinking 5 seconds

Set frequency written and complete

Set frequency stored to RAM (set frequency stored to RAM and EEPROM)
After 10
seconds

Set frequency stored to EEPROM

NOTE
• If the operation panel does not have the operation command source (Pr.551 = "2, 3, or 9999" (with USB and/or PU
connection)), the frequency cannot be set using the operation panel.
• If the operation mode is changed to one in which the inverter does not operate according to the frequency set on the operation
panel after the frequency value is stored in the RAM but before it is stored in the EEPROM, the value is not stored in the
EEPROM.
• If the power is OFF or the inverter is reset after the frequency value is stored in the RAM but before it is stored in the EEPROM,
the value is not stored in the EEPROM.
• When setting the frequency by turning the setting dial, the frequency goes up to the set value of Pr.1 Maximum frequency.
Be aware of what frequency Pr.1 is set to, and adjust the setting of Pr.1 according to the application.

130 7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.3 Automatic frequency setting / key lock operation selection
 Disabling the setting dial and keys on the operation panel (by holding
down the MODE key for 2 seconds) 1
• Operation using the setting dial and keys of the operation panel can be disabled to prevent parameter changes,
unexpected starts or frequency changes.
• Set Pr.161 to "10 or 11" and then press the MODE key for 2 seconds to disable setting dial or key operations. 2
• When the setting dial and key operation are disabled, "HOLD" appears on the operation panel. If setting dial or key
operation is attempted while dial and key operations are disabled, "HOLD" appears. (After no setting dial or key operation
for 2 seconds, the display returns to the monitoring screen.) 3
• To enable the setting dial and key operation again, press the MODE key for 2 seconds.

NOTE
• Even if setting dial and key operations are disabled, the monitor indicator and STOP/RESET key are enabled.
4
• The PU stop warning cannot be reset by using keys while the key lock function is enabled.

5
Parameters referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequencypage 211

10

7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.3 Automatic frequency setting / key lock operation selection
131
 7.4 Frequency change increment amount setting
(standard model)
When setting the set frequency with the setting dial of the operation panel, the frequency changes in 0.01 Hz increments in the
initial status. Setting this parameter to increase the frequency increment amount that changes when the setting dial is rotated
can improve usability.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
0 Function disabled
0.01
295 Frequency change
0 0.10 The minimum change width when the set frequency is
E201 increment amount setting
1.00 changed with the setting dial can be set.
10.00

 Basic operation
• When Pr.295 ≠ "0", the minimum increment when the set frequency is changed with the setting dial can be set.
For example, when Pr.295 = 1.00 Hz, one click (one dial gauge) of the setting dial changes the frequency in increments
of 1.00 Hz, such as 1.00 Hz → 2.00 Hz → 3.00 Hz.

When Pr.295="1.00"

1 click 1 click

NOTE
• When machine speed display is selected in Pr.53 Frequency / rotation speed unit switchover, the minimum increments of
change are determined by Pr.295 as well. Note that the setting value may differ as speed setting changes the set machine
speed and converts it to the speed display again.
• For Pr.295, the increments are not displayed.
• The Pr.295 setting is enabled only for the changes to the set frequency. It does not apply to the settings of other parameters
related to frequency.
• When 10 is set, the frequency setting changes in 10 Hz increments. Be cautious of excessive speed (when Automatic
frequency setting enabled).

Parameters referred to
Pr.53 Frequency / rotation speed unit switchoverpage 226

132 7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.4 Frequency change increment amount setting (standard model)
7.5 RUN key rotation direction selection 1

The rotation direction of the motor when the RUN key on the operation panel is pressed can be selected.
Setting
2
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
40 0 Forward rotation
RUN key rotation direction selection 0
E202 1 Reverse rotation 3

10

7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.5 RUN key rotation direction selection
133
 7.6 Multiple rating setting
Two rating types of different rated current and permissible load can be selected. The optimal inverter rating can be selected
according to the application, enabling equipment to be downsized.
Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description (overload current rating, surrounding air temperature)
range
LD rating.
1 120% for 60 seconds, 150% for 3 seconds (inverse-time characteristics)
570 at surrounding air temperature of 50°C.
Multiple rating setting 2
E301 ND rating.
2 150% for 60 seconds, 200% for 3 seconds (inverse-time characteristics)
at surrounding air temperature of 50°C.

 Changing the parameter initial values and setting ranges

• When inverter reset and all parameter clear are performed after setting Pr.570, the parameter initial values are changed
according to each rating, as shown below.
Pr.570 setting Refer to
Pr. Name
1 2 (initial value) page
0 Torque boost *1 *1 374
7 Acceleration time *1 *1 158
8 Deceleration time *1 *1 158
9 Electronic thermal O/L relay LD rated current*2 ND rated current*2*3 198
12 DC injection brake operation voltage *1 *1 382
22 Stall prevention operation level 120% 150% 100, 214
44 Second acceleration/deceleration time *1 *1 158
48 Second stall prevention operation level 120% 150% 214
56 Current monitoring reference LD rated current*2 ND rated current*2 237
150 Output current detection level 120% 150% 260
165 Stall prevention operation level for restart 120% 150% 351
Current average value monitor signal output
557
reference current LD rated current*2 ND rated current*2 153

874 OLT level setting 120% 150% 100

893 Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity) LD rated motor capacity*2 ND rated motor capacity*2 244
*1 Initial values differ depending on the rating as follows.

Pr.0 (%) Pr.7, Pr.8, Pr.44 (s) Pr.12 (%)

FR-E820-[] FR-E840-[]
ND LD ND LD ND LD
0008 (0.1) — 6 6 5 5 6 6
0015 (0.2) — 6 6 5 5 6 4
0030 (0.4) 0016 (0.4) 6 6 5 5 4 4
0050 (0.75) 0026 (0.75) 6 4 5 5 4 4
0080 (1.5) 0040 (1.5) 4 4 5 5 4 4
0110 (2.2) 0060 (2.2) 4 4 5 5 4 4
0175 (3.7) 0095 (3.7) 4 3 5 10 4 4
0240 (5.5) 0120 (5.5) 3 3 10 10 4 4
0330 (7.5) 0170 (7.5) 3 2 10 15 4 2

Pr.0 (%) Pr.7, Pr.8, Pr.44 (s) Pr.12 (%)

FR-E860-[]
ND LD ND LD ND LD
0017 (0.75) 5 3 5 5 1 1
0027 (1.5) 3 3 5 5 1 1
0040 (2.2) 3 2 5 5 1 1
0061 (3.7) 2 2 5 10 1 1
0090 (5.5) 2 2 10 10 1 1
0120 (7.5) 2 1 10 15 1 1

*2 The rated current and motor capacity values differ depending on the inverter capacity. Refer to the inverter rated specifications in the Instruction
Manual (Connection).
*3 The initial value for the FR-E820-0050(0.75K) or lower, the FR-E840-0026(0.75K) or lower, and the FR-E860-0017(0.75K) is set to the 85% of
the inverter rated current.

134 7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.6 Multiple rating setting
7.7 Parameter write selection 1

Whether to enable the parameter write or not can be selected. Use this function to prevent parameter values from being
rewritten by misoperation. 2
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
0 Parameter write is enabled only during stop.
77
Parameter write selection 0
1 Parameter writing is disabled. 3
E400 Parameter writing is enabled in any operation mode
2
regardless of the operation status.
• Pr.77 can be set at any time regardless of the operation mode or operation status. (Setting through communication is 4
unavailable.)

 Parameter write enabled only during stop (Pr.77 = "0" (initial value))
• Parameters can be written only during a stop in the PU operation mode.
5
• The following parameters can always be written regardless of the operation mode or operation status.

Pr. Name Pr. Name 6

(Multi-speed setting high-speed, middle-speed,
4 to 6
low-speed) 550*2 NET mode operation command source selection

22
24 to 27
Stall prevention operation level
(Multi-speed setting speed 4 to speed 7)
551*2
555 to 557
PU mode operation command source selection
(Current average value monitoring)
7
52 Operation panel main monitor selection 675 User parameter auto storage function selection
54 FM terminal function selection 774 to 776 (Operation panel monitor item selection)
55 Frequency monitoring reference 805 Torque command value (RAM) 8
56 Current monitoring reference 806 Torque command value (RAM, EEPROM)
72*1 PWM frequency selection 866 Torque monitoring reference

75
Reset selection/Disconnected PU detection/PU
stop selection
888, 889 (Free parameter) 9
77 Parameter write selection 891 to 899 (Energy saving monitoring)
79*2 Operation mode selection C0 (900) FM terminal calibration
129 PID proportional band C1 (901) AM terminal calibration 10
Operation panel setting dial push monitor
130 PID integral time 992
selection
133 PID action set point 997 Fault initiation
134 PID differential time 998*2 PM parameter initialization
158 AM terminal function selection 999*2 Automatic parameter setting
160 User group read selection 1006 Clock (year)
232 to 239 (Multi-speed setting speed 8 to speed 15) 1007 Clock (month, day)
240*1 Soft-PWM operation selection 1008 Clock (hour, minute)
241 Analog input display unit switchover 1020 Trace operation selection
268 Monitor decimal digits selection 1124 Station number in inverter-to-inverter link
Stop-on contact excitation current low-speed 1125 Number of inverters in inverter-to-inverter link
275*1 scaling factor system
290 Monitor negative output selection 1150 to 1199 (PLC function user parameters)
1399, 1424 to
295 Frequency change increment amount setting 1432, 1434 to (Ethernet communication)
1457
296, 297 (Password setting) 1480 to 1485 (Load characteristics fault)
306 Analog output signal selection
310 Analog meter voltage output selection
340*2 Communication startup mode selection
416, 417 (PLC)
442 to 445 (Ethernet communication)
496, 497 (Remote output)
498 PLC function flash memory clear
*1 Writing during operation is enabled in PU operation mode, but disabled in External operation mode.
*2 Writing during operation is disabled. To change the parameter setting value, stop the operation.

7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.7 Parameter write selection
135
  Parameter write disabled (Pr.77 = "1")
• Parameter write, Parameter clear, and All parameter clear are disabled. (Parameter read is enabled.)
• The following parameters can be written even if Pr.77 = "1".

Pr. Name Pr. Name

22 Stall prevention operation level 297 Password lock/unlock
Reset selection/Disconnected PU detection/PU stop
75 496, 497 (Remote output)
selection
77 Parameter write selection 805 Torque command value (RAM)
79*1 Operation mode selection 806 Torque command value (RAM, EEPROM)
160 User group read selection 997 Fault initiation
296 Password lock level 1020 Trace operation selection
*1 Writing during operation is disabled. To change the parameter setting value, stop the operation.

 Parameter write enabled during operation (Pr.77 = "2")

• These parameters can always be written.
• The following parameters cannot be written during operation even if Pr.77 = "2". To change the parameter setting value,
stop the operation.

Pr. Name Pr. Name

Stall prevention operation level compensation
23 455 Second motor excitation current
factor at double speed
40 RUN key rotation direction selection 456 Rated second motor voltage
48 Second stall prevention operation level 457 Rated second motor frequency
60 Energy saving control selection 458 to 462 (Second motor constant)
61 Reference current 463 Second motor auto tuning setting/status
Stall prevention operation reduction starting
66 507 Display ABC relay contact life
frequency
71 Applied motor 541 Frequency command sign selection
79 Operation mode selection 560 Second frequency search gain
80 Motor capacity 570 Multiple rating setting
81 Number of motor poles 574 Second motor online auto tuning
Inverter output fault detection enable/disable
82 Motor excitation current 631
selection
83 Rated motor voltage 639, 640 (Brake sequence)
SF-PR slip amount adjustment operation
84 Rated motor frequency 673
selection
90 to 94 (Motor constant) 699 Input terminal filter
95 Online auto tuning selection 702 Maximum motor frequency
706, 707, 711,
96 Auto tuning setting/status 712, 717, 721, (PM motor tuning)
724, 725, 1412
(Motor starting resistance tuning
178 to 196 (Input and output terminal function selection) 720, 737
compensation coefficient 2)
261 Power failure stop selection 738 to 746, 1413 (Second PM motor tuning)
277 Stall prevention operation current switchover 800 Control method selection
289 Inverter output terminal filter 858 Terminal 4 function assignment
292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration 859 Torque current/Rated PM motor current
Second motor torque current/Rated PM motor
293 Acceleration/deceleration separate selection 860
current
298 Frequency search gain 998 PM parameter initialization
313 to 322 (Extended output terminal function selection) 999 Automatic parameter setting
329 Digital input unit selection 1002 Lq tuning target current adjustment coefficient
415 Inverter operation lock mode setting
418 Extension output terminal filter
450 Second applied motor
451 Second motor control method selection
453 Second motor capacity
454 Number of second motor poles

136 7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.7 Parameter write selection
7.8 Password 1

Registering a 4-digit password can restrict access to parameters (reading/writing).

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
2
Password protection enabled. Setting the access
0 to 6, 99, 100 to
296 (reading/writing) restriction level to parameters locked
Password lock level 9999 106, 199
E410 with a password enables writing to Pr.297. 3
9999 No password protection
Input a 4-digit password to lock parameters, or input the
1000 to 9998
valid password to unlock the locked parameters.
297
Password lock/unlock 9999
Number of failed password attempts (read only, 4
E411 (0 to 5)*1 displayed after any of "100 to 106, or 199" is set in
Pr.296 and a password to lock parameters is input).
9999*1 No password protection

These parameters can be set when Pr.160 User group read selection = "0". However, when Pr.296 ≠ 9999 (password lock
5
is set), Pr.297 can always be set, regardless of the setting in Pr.160.
*1 Although "0 or 9999" can be input in Pr.297, the value is invalid. (The display cannot be changed.)
6
 Parameter reading/writing restriction level (Pr.296)
• The access (reading/writing) restriction level to parameters in the PU operation mode or NET operation mode can be
selected with Pr.296. 7
NET operation mode operation command*4
PU operation mode operation
RS-485 communication / PLC
Pr.296 setting command*3 via communication option
function*7
Read*1 Write*2 Read Write*2 Read Write*2
8
9999 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
0, 100*6 × × × × × ×
1, 101 ○ × ○ × ○ × 9
2, 102 ○ × ○ ○ ○ ○
3, 103 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ×
4, 104
5, 105
×
×
×
×
×
○
×
○
○
○
×
○
10
6, 106 ○ ○ × × ○ ×
Only the parameters registered in the user group can be read/written. (For the parameters not registered in the user
99, 199
group, the restriction level when "4 or 104" is set applies.)*5
○: Enabled, ×: Disabled
*1 If the parameter reading is restricted by the setting of Pr.160 User group read selection, those parameters cannot be read even when "○" is
indicated.
*2 If the parameter writing is restricted by the setting of Pr.77 Parameter write selection, those parameters cannot be written even when "○" is
indicated.
*3 Access from the command source in the PU operation mode (the operation panel in the initial setting) is restricted. (For the PU operation mode
command source selection, refer to page 185.)
*4 Access from the command source in the Network operation mode (the RS-485 communication or a communication option in the initial setting) is
restricted. (For the NET operation mode command source selection, refer to page 185.)
*5 Read/write is enabled only for the simple mode parameters registered in the user group when Pr.160 = "9999". Pr.296 and Pr.297 are always
read/write enabled whether registered to a user group or not.
*6 If a communication option is installed, the Option fault (E.OPT) occurs, and the inverter output shuts off.
*7 The PLC function user parameters (Pr.1150 to Pr.1199) can be written and read by the PLC function regardless of the Pr.296 setting.

 Locking parameters with a password (Pr.296, Pr.297)

• The procedure of locking parameters with a password is as follows.

1. Set the parameter reading/writing restriction level to enable the password protection. (Set a value other than "9999"
in Pr.296.)
Allowable number of failed password
Pr.296 setting Pr.297 readout
attempts
0 to 6, or 99 Unlimited Always 0
100 to 106, 199*1 Limited to 5 times Number of failed password attempts (0 to 5)

7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.8 Password
137
 *1 If an invalid password is input 5 times while any of "100 to 106, or 199" is set in Pr.296, the password is locked up afterward (the locked parameters
cannot be unlocked even with the valid password). All parameter clear is required to reset the password. (After All parameter clear is performed,
the parameters are returned to their initial values.)

2. Write a 4-digit number (1000 to 9998) to Pr.297 as a password (writing is disabled when Pr.296 = "9999"). After a
password is set, parameters are locked and access (reading/writing) to the parameters is limited at the level set in
Pr.296 until the valid password is input to unlock the locked parameters.

NOTE
• After a password is set, the Pr.297 readout is always any of "0 to 5".
• "LOCD" appears when a password-protected parameter is attempted to be read/written.
• Even if a password is set, the parameters which are written by the inverter, such as parameters related to the life check of
inverter parts, are overwritten as needed.

 Unlocking the locked parameters (Pr.296, Pr.297)

• There are two ways to unlock the locked parameters.
• Enter the password in Pr.297. When a valid password is input, the locked parameters can be unlocked. When an invalid
password is input, an error indication appears and the parameters cannot be unlocked. If an invalid password is input 5
times while any of "100 to 106, or 199" is set in Pr.296, the locked parameters cannot be unlocked afterward even with the
valid password (the password is locked up).
• Perform All parameter clear.

NOTE
• If the password is forgotten, it can be reset by performing All parameter clear, but the other parameters are also reset.
• All parameter clear cannot be performed during the inverter operation.
• When using FR Configurator2 in the PU operation mode, do not set "0, 4, 5, 99, 100, 104, 105, or 199" (parameter read is
disabled) in Pr.296. Doing so may cause abnormal operation.
• The means to reset the password varies according to how the reset command is sent (from the operation panel, through RS-
485 communication, or via a communication option).

Operation panel RS-485 communication Communication option

All parameter clear ○ ○ ○
Parameter clear × × ○

○: Password reset enabled, ×: Password reset disabled

• To perform Parameter clear or All parameter clear via a communication option, refer to the Instruction Manual of each option.
(For details of the operation panel, refer to page 19. For details of RS-485 communication, refer to the Instruction Manual
(Communication).)

 Access to parameters according to the password status

Password protection disabled / Parameters
Parameters locked Password locked up
unlocked
Parameter
Pr.296 = "9999", Pr.296 ≠ "9999", Pr.296 ≠ "9999", Pr.296 = "100 to 106, 199"
Pr.297 = "9999" Pr.297 = "9999" Pr.297 = "0 to 4" (read value) Pr.297 = "5" (read value)
Read ○*1 ○ ○ ○
Pr.296
Write ○*1 ○*1 × ×
Read *1 ○ ○ ○
○
Pr.297
Write × ○ ○ ○*3
Pr.CLR write
(Parameter clear)
○ ○ ×*4 ×*4

ALL.C write (All

parameter clear)
○ ○ ○*2 ○*2

○: Enabled, ×: Disabled
*1 Reading/writing is disabled if reading is restricted by the Pr.160 setting. (Reading is available in the Network operation mode regardless of the
Pr.160 setting.)
*2 All parameter clear cannot be performed during the operation.
*3 Inputting a password is possible but the locked-up password cannot be unlocked or reset even with the valid password.
*4 Parameter clear can be performed only via a communication option.

Parameters referred to
Pr.77 Parameter write selectionpage 135

138 7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.8 Password
Pr.160 User group read selectionpage 143
Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selectionpage 185
Pr.551 PU mode operation command source selectionpage 185
1

10

7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.8 Password
139
 7.9 Free parameter
Any number within the setting range of 0 to 9999 can be input.
For example, these numbers can be used:
• As a unit number when multiple units are used.
• As a pattern number for each operation application when multiple units are used.
• As the year and month of introduction or inspection.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
888
Free parameter 1 9999 0 to 9999 Any value can be input.
E420
The settings are retained even if the inverter power is turned
889
Free parameter 2 9999 0 to 9999 OFF.
E421

NOTE
• Pr.888 and Pr.889 do not influence the operation of the inverter.

140 7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.9 Free parameter
7.10 Setting multiple parameters by batch 1

The setting of particular parameters is changed by batch, such as communication parameters for connection with the Mitsubishi
Electric human machine interface (GOT), the parameters for the rated frequency (50/60 Hz) setting, or the parameters for 2
acceleration/deceleration time increment.
Multiple parameters are changed automatically. Users do not have to consider each parameter number (automatic parameter
setting). 3
Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range

10 GOT initial setting (PU connector)

"Controller Type" in GOT: FREQROL 4
500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO
"Controller Type" in GOT: FREQROL
999 Automatic parameter 12 GOT initial setting (PU connector)
9999*1 800 (Automatic Negotiation)
E431 setting
20 50 Hz rated frequency 5
21 60 Hz rated frequency
9999 No action

*1 The read value is always "9999". 6

 Automatic parameter setting (Pr.999)
• Select which parameters to automatically set from the following table, and set them in Pr.999. Multiple parameter settings
7
are changed automatically. Refer to page 141 for the list of parameters that are changed automatically.
Pr.999
Description Operation in the automatic parameter setting mode
setting
Automatically sets the communication parameters for the GOT
8
10 connection with a PU connector ("Controller Type" in GOT: "AUTO"→"GOT"→Write "1".
FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO)

12
Automatically sets the communication parameters for the GOT
connection with a PU connector ("Controller Type" in GOT: "AUTO"→"GOT"→Write "2".
9
FREQROL 800 (Automatic Negotiation))
50 Hz rated
20 Sets the related parameters of the rated "AUTO"→"F50"→Write "1".
frequency
60 Hz rated
frequency according to the power supply 10
21 frequency —
frequency

NOTE
• If the automatic setting is performed with Pr.999 or the automatic parameter setting mode, the settings including the changed
parameter settings (changed from the initial setting) will be automatically changed. Before performing the automatic setting,
confirm that changing the parameters will not cause any problem.
• "AUTO" is displayed on the operation panel also when the user group function is used (Pr.160 = "1"). However, if Pr.999 is
not registered in the group, the automatic setting cannot be performed (write error (Er1) occurs).

 GOT initial setting (PU connector) (Pr.999 = "10, 12")

Pr. Name Initial value Pr.999 = "10" Pr.999 = "12" Refer to page
79 Operation mode selection 0 1 1 174
118 PU communication speed 192 192 1152
119 PU communication stop bit length / data length 1 10 0
120 PU communication parity check 2 1 1
Instruction Manual
121 PU communication retry count 1 9999 9999
(Communication)
122 PU communication check time interval 9999 9999 9999
123 PU communication waiting time setting 9999 0 ms 0 ms
124 PU communication CR/LF selection 1 1 1
340 Communication startup mode selection 0 0 0 184
414 PLC function operation selection 0 — *1 364
2
Instruction Manual
549 Protocol selection 0 0 0
(Communication)

*1 When Pr.414 ≠ "0", the setting value is not changed.

7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.10 Setting multiple parameters by batch
141
  Initial setting with the GOT2000 series
• When "FREQROL 500/700/800, SENSORLESS SERVO" is selected for "Controller Type" in the GOT setting, set Pr.999
= "10" to configure the GOT initial setting.
• When "FREQROL 800 (Automatic Negotiation)" is selected for "Controller Type" in the GOT setting, the GOT automatic
connection can be used. When "FREQROL 800 (Automatic Negotiation)" is selected for "Controller Type" in the GOT
setting and the GOT automatic connection is not used, set Pr.999 = "12" to configure the GOT initial setting. (Refer to the
Instruction Manual (Communication).)

 Initial setting with the GOT1000 series

• Set Pr.999 = "10" to configure the GOT initial setting.

NOTE
• Always perform an inverter reset after the initial setting.
• For the details of connection with GOT, refer to the Instruction Manual of GOT.

 Rated frequency (Pr.999 = "20" (50 Hz) or "21" (60 Hz))

Initial value*1 Refer to
Pr. Name Pr.999 = "21" Pr.999 = "20"
Gr.1 Gr.2 page
3 Base frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 376
4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 195
Acceleration/deceleration reference
20 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 158
frequency
Frequency / rotation speed unit
53 0 0 226
switchover
55 Frequency monitoring reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 237
Stall prevention operation reduction
66 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 214
starting frequency
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
125 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz
frequency
273
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
126 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz
frequency
390 % setting reference frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz *2

505 Speed setting reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 226

808 Speed limit 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 120

*1 Gr.1 and Gr.2 are the parameter initial value groups. (Refer to page 82).
*2 Refer to the Instruction Manual (Communication).

NOTE
• When the plug-in option FR-A8AX is used, Pr.301 BCD input gain and Pr.303 BIN input gain are not set automatically.

142 7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.10 Setting multiple parameters by batch
7.11 Extended parameter display and user group 1
function
2
Use this parameter to select a group of parameters to be displayed on the operation panel.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

160 User group read

9999 Only simple mode parameters are displayed. 3
0 0 Displays simple mode and extended parameters.
E440 selection
1 Only parameters registered in user groups are displayed.
Displays the number of parameters that are registered in the
172
E441
User group registered
display/batch clear
0
(0 to 16)
user groups. (Read-only) 4
9999 Batch clear of user group registrations
173
User group registration 9999*1 0 to 1999, 9999 Sets the parameter number to register for the user group.
E442
174
5
E443
User group clear 9999*1 0 to 1999, 9999 Sets the parameter number to clear from the user group.

*1 The read value is always "9999".

6
 Display of simple mode parameters and extended parameters (Pr.160)
• When Pr.160 = "9999", only the simple mode parameters can be displayed on the operation panel. (For the simple mode
parameters, refer to the parameter list on page 50.) 7
• With the initial value (Pr.160 = "0", simple mode parameters and extended parameters can be displayed.

NOTE
• When a plug-in option in installed on the inverter, the option parameters can also be read. 8
• Every parameter can be read regardless of the Pr.160 setting when reading parameters via communication.

 User group function (Pr.160, Pr.172 to Pr.174)

9
• The user group function is a function for displaying only the parameters required for a setting.
• A maximum of 16 parameters from any of the parameters can be registered in a user group. When Pr.160 = "1", reading/
10
writing is enabled only for the parameters registered in user groups. (Parameters not registered in user groups can no
longer be read.)
• To register a parameter in a user group, set the parameter number in Pr.173.
• To clear a parameter from a user group, set the parameter number in Pr.174. To batch clear all the registered parameters,
set Pr.172 = "9999".

7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.11 Extended parameter display and user group function
143
  Registering a parameter in a user group (Pr.173)
• To register Pr.3 in a user group

Operating procedure
1. Power ON
Make sure the motor is stopped.

2. Changing the operation mode

Press the PU/EXT key to choose the PU operation mode. The PU LED turns ON.

3. Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)

4. Selecting a parameter
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until "P.173" (Pr.173) appears.

5. Parameter read
Press the SET key. "9999" appears.

6. Parameter registration
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until "3" (Pr.3) appears. Press the SET key to register the
parameter.
"3" blinks.
To continue adding parameters, repeat steps 5 and 6.

144 7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.11 Extended parameter display and user group function
 Clearing a parameter from a user group (Pr.174)
• To delete Pr.3 from a user group.
1
Operating procedure
1. Power ON 2
Make sure the motor is stopped.

2. Changing the operation mode

3
Press the PU/EXT key to choose the PU operation mode. The PU LED turns ON.

3. Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.) 4
4. Selecting a parameter
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until "P.174" (Pr.174) appears.
5
5. Parameter read
Press the SET key. "9999" appears.

6. Clearing the parameter 6

Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until "3" (Pr.3) appears. Press the SET key to delete the parameter.
"3" blinks.
To continue deleting parameters, repeat steps 5 and 6. 7
NOTE
• Pr.77 Parameter write selection, Pr.160, Pr.296 Password lock level, Pr.297 Password lock/unlock can always be read
regardless of the user group setting.
8
• Pr.77, Pr.160, Pr.172 to Pr.174, Pr.296, and Pr.297 cannot be registered in a user group.
• When Pr.174 is read, "9999" is always displayed. "9999" can be written, but it does not function.
• Pr.172 is disabled if set to a value other than "9999". 9

Parameters referred to
Pr.77 Parameter write selectionpage 135
Pr.296 Password lock level, Pr.297 Password lock/unlockpage 137
10

7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.11 Extended parameter display and user group function
145
 7.12 PWM carrier frequency and Soft-PWM control
The motor sound can be changed.
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
The PWM carrier frequency can be changed. The setting value
72
PWM frequency selection 1 0 to 15 represents the frequency in kHz. Note that "0" indicates 0.7 kHz,
E600
"15" indicates 14.5 kHz.
240 Soft-PWM operation 0 Soft-PWM control disabled.
1
E601 selection 1 Soft-PWM control enabled.
260 PWM frequency automatic 0 PWM carrier frequency automatic reduction function disabled
10
E602 switchover 10 PWM carrier frequency automatic reduction function enabled

 Changing the PWM carrier frequency (Pr.72)

• The PWM carrier frequency of the inverter can be changed.
• Changing the PWM carrier frequency can be effective for avoiding the resonance frequency of the mechanical system or
motor, as a countermeasure against EMI generated from the inverter, or for reducing leakage current caused by PWM
switching.
• Under Real sensorless vector control and PM sensorless vector control, the following carrier frequencies are used.
Pr.72 setting Carrier frequency (kHz)
0 to 5 2
6 to 9 6*1
10 to 13 10*1
14, 15 14*1

*1 The carrier frequency is automatically changed to 2 kHz in the low-speed range (lower than 3 Hz) under Real sensorless vector control, or in the
low-speed range (lower than 10% of the rated motor frequency) under PM sensorless vector control.

NOTE
• The carrier frequency may be automatically lowered in the low-speed range (lower than about 10 Hz) for the ND rating, and
over the entire speed range for the LD rating.
Motor noise increases, but not to the point of failure.

 Soft-PWM control (Pr.240)

• Soft-PWM control is a function that changes the motor noise from a metallic sound into an inoffensive, complex tone.
• Setting Pr.240 = "1" will enable the Soft-PWM control.
• To enable the Soft-PWM control, set Pr.72 to 5 kHz or less.

 PWM carrier frequency automatic reduction function (Pr.260)

• Setting Pr.260 = "10" (initial value) will enable the PWM carrier frequency auto-reduction function. If a heavy load is
continuously applied while the inverter carrier frequency is set to 3 kHz or higher (Pr.72 ≥ "3"), the carrier frequency is
automatically reduced to prevent occurrence of the inverter overload trip (electronic thermal O/L relay function) (E.THT).
Motor noise increases, but not to the point of failure.
• When the carrier frequency automatic reduction function is used, operation with the carrier frequency set to 3 kHz or higher
(Pr.72 ≥ 3) automatically reduces the carrier frequency for heavy-load operation as shown below.
Pr.260 setting Pr.570 setting Carrier frequency automatic reduction operation
The carrier frequency will reduce automatically with continuous operation of 85% of the
1 (LD)
inverter rated current or higher.
10
The carrier frequency will reduce automatically with operation of 170% of the inverter ND
2 (ND)
rated current or higher (only in a low-speed range).
Without carrier frequency automatic reduction (Perform continuous operation with the
1 (LD) carrier frequency set to 2 kHz or lower or with less than 85% of the inverter rated current
0
for the ND rating.)
2 (ND) Without carrier frequency automatic reduction

146 7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.12 PWM carrier frequency and Soft-PWM control
 NOTE
• Reducing the PWM carrier frequency is effective as a countermeasure against EMI from the inverter or for reducing leakage 1
current, but doing so increases the motor noise.
• When the PWM carrier frequency is set to 1 kHz or lower (Pr.72 ≤ 1), the increase in the harmonic current causes the fast-
response current limit to activate before the stall prevention operation, which may result in torque shortage. In this case,
disable the fast-response current limit in Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection.
2

Parameters referred to
Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selectionpage 214
3
Pr.570 Multiple rating settingpage 134
Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 86

10

7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.12 PWM carrier frequency and Soft-PWM control
147
 7.13 Inverter parts life display
The degree of deterioration of the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling fan, and inrush current limit circuit can
be diagnosed on the monitor. When a part approaches the end of its life, an alarm can be output by self diagnosis to prevent
a fault. (Note that the life diagnosis of this function should be used as a guideline only, the life values are theoretical
calculations.)
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
Displays the corrosion level of the control circuit board.
198
Display corrosion level 1 1 to 3 Read-only. (Available only for the FR-E8[][]-[]-60 (with
E709
coating).)
Displays whether or not the life alarm output level is
reached for the following parts: the control circuit
255 capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling fan, inrush
Life alarm status display 0 (0 to 879)
E700 current limit circuit, relay contacts of terminals A, B, and
C, inverter module, and control circuit board. Read-
only.
256 Inrush current limit circuit life Displays the deterioration degree of the inrush current
100% (0% to 100%)
E701 display limit circuit. Read-only.
257 Control circuit capacitor life Displays the deterioration degree of the control circuit
100% (0% to 100%)
E702 display capacitor. Read-only.
Displays the deterioration degree of the main circuit
258
Main circuit capacitor life display 100% (0% to 100%) capacitor. Read-only.
E703
The value measured by Pr.259 is displayed.
Setting "1" and turning the power supply OFF starts the
measurement of the main circuit capacitor life.
259 Main circuit capacitor life If the setting value of Pr.259 becomes "3" after turning
0 0, 1, (2, 3, 8, 9)
E704 measuring the power supply ON again, it means that the
measurement is completed. The deterioration degree is
read to Pr.258.
506 Display estimated main circuit Displays the estimated residual life of the main circuit
100% (0% to 100%)
E705 capacitor residual life capacitor. Read-only.
507 Displays the degree of deterioration of the relay
Display ABC relay contact life 100% 0% to 100%
E706 contacts of terminals A, B, and C.
509 Displays the degree of deterioration of the inverter
Display power cycle life 100% (0% to 100%)
E708 module. Read-only.

 Life alarm display and signal output (Y90 signal, Pr.255)

• In the life diagnosis of the main circuit capacitor, the Life alarm (Y90) signal is not output unless measurement by turning OFF
the power supply is performed.

• Pr.255 Life alarm status display and the Life alarm (Y90) signal can be used to check whether or not the life alarm output
level is reached for the following parts: the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling fan, inrush current limit
circuit, relay contacts of terminals A, B, and C, inverter module, or control circuit board.

bit 15 7 0 • Pr.255 read • Pr.255 setting read

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

bit0 Control circuit capacitor life Bit image is displayed

bit1 Main circuit capacitor life in decimal
bit2 Cooling fan life
bit3 Inrush current limit circuit life

bit5 Estimated residual-life of main circuit capacitor

bit6 Life of relay contacts of terminals A, B, and C
bit8 Life of the inverter module
bit9 Corrosion level

148 7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.13 Inverter parts life display
 • When the parts have reached the life alarm output level, the corresponding bits of Pr.255 turns ON. The ON/OFF state of
the bits can be checked with Pr.255. The following table shows examples.
1
Pr.255
bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Remarks
Decimal Binary
All parts have reached
879 1101101111 ○ ○ × ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○ ○
alarm output level. 2
Control circuit capacitor
and cooling fan have
5 101 × × × × × × × ○ × ○
reached alarm output
level. 3
No parts have reached
0 0 × × × × × × × × × ×
alarm output level.
○: Parts reaching alarm output level ×: Parts not reaching alarm output level 4
• The Life alarm (Y90) signal turns ON when the warning level is reached for either of the following: the control circuit
capacitor life, main circuit capacitor life, cooling fan life, inrush current limit circuit life, the estimated residual-life of the main 5
circuit capacitor, relay contacts of terminals A, B, and C, inverter module, or control circuit board.
• For the terminal used for the Y90 signal, set "90" (positive logic) or "190" (negative logic) in any parameter from Pr.190 to
Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection). 6
NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. 7
• For replacement of each part, contact the nearest Mitsubishi FA center.

 Life display of the inrush current limit circuit (Pr.256) 8

• The life of the inrush current limit circuit (relay, contactor and inrush resistor) is displayed in Pr.256.
• The number of contact (relay, contactor, thyristor) ON times is counted, and it is counted down from 100% (0 time) every
1%/10,000 times. When the counter reaches 10% (900,000 times), bit 3 of Pr.255 is turned ON (set to 1) and the Y90 9
signal is also output as an alert.

 Life display of the control circuit capacitor (Pr.257) 10

• The deterioration degree of the control circuit capacitor is displayed in Pr.257.
• In the operating status, the control circuit capacitor life is calculated from the energization time and temperature, and is
counted down from 100%. When the counter goes down from 10%, bit 0 of Pr.255 is turned ON (set to 1) and the Y90
signal is also output as an alert.

 Life display of the main circuit capacitor (Pr.258, Pr.259)

• For accurate life measurement of the main circuit capacitor, wait three hours or longer after turning OFF. The temperature left
in the main circuit capacitor affects measurement.

• The deterioration degree of the main circuit capacitor is displayed in Pr.258.

• With the main circuit capacitor capacity at factory shipment as 100%, the capacitor life is displayed in Pr.258 every time
measurement is made. When the measured value falls to 85% or lower, bit 1 of Pr.255 turns ON and the Y90 signal is also
output as an alert.
• Measure the capacitor capacity according to the following procedure and check the deterioration degree of the capacitor
capacity.

1. Check that the motor is connected and at a stop.

2. Set "1" (measuring start) in Pr.259.

3. Switch the power OFF. The inverter applies DC voltage to the motor to measure the capacitor capacity while the
inverter is OFF.

4. After confirming that the LED of the operation panel is OFF, power ON again.

7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.13 Inverter parts life display
149
 5. Check that "3" (measurement complete) is set in Pr.259, read Pr.258, and check the deterioration degree of the
main circuit capacitor.
Pr.259 Description Remarks
0 No measurement Initial value
1 Start measurement Measurement starts when the power supply is switched OFF.
2 During measurement
3 Measurement complete
Only displayed and cannot be set.
8 Forced end
9 Measurement error

NOTE
• When the main circuit capacitor life is measured under the following conditions, "forced end" (Pr.259 = "8"), or "measurement
error" (Pr.259 = "9") may occur, or the status may remain in "measurement start" (Pr.259 = "1"). To perform measurement,
first eliminate the following conditions. Under the following conditions, even if "measurement complete" (Pr.259 = "3") is
reached, measurement cannot be performed correctly.
- FR-HC2 or FR-XC is connected.
- DC power supply is connected to the terminals P/+ and N/-.
- The power supply is switched ON during measurement.
- The motor is not connected to the inverter.
- The motor is running (coasting).
- The motor capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity by two ranks or more.
- The inverter output is shut off or a fault occurred while the power was OFF.
- The inverter output is shut off with the MRS signal.
- The start command is given while measuring.
- The applied motor setting is incorrect.

• Operation environment: Surrounding air temperature (annual average of 40°C (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil
mist, dust and dirt)).
Output current: 80% of the inverter rating
• Since repeated inrush currents at power ON will shorten the life of the converter circuit, frequent starts and stops of the
magnetic contactor must be avoided.

WARNING
• When measuring the main circuit capacitor capacity (Pr.259 = "1"), the DC voltage is applied to the motor for about 1
second at power OFF. Never touch the motor terminal, etc. right after powering OFF to prevent an electric shock.

 Life display of the cooling fan

• If a cooling fan speed of less than the specified speed is detected, Fan alarm "FN" is displayed on the operation panel or
the parameter unit. As an alert output, bit 2 of Pr.255 turns ON (set to 1), and the Y90 signal and Alarm (LF) signal are
also output.
• For the terminal used for the LF signal, set "98" (positive logic) or "198" (negative logic) in any parameter from Pr.190 to
Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).

NOTE
• When the inverter is mounted with two or more cooling fans, "FN" is displayed even only one of the fans is detected.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 Display estimated main circuit capacitor residual life (Pr.506)

• Even when the power supply cannot be turned OFF, the remaining life of the main circuit capacitor can be estimated
without stopping the operation. Note that the remaining life of the main circuit capacitor estimated by this function is
theoretical, and should be used as a guideline only.
• The estimated residual life of the main circuit capacitor is displayed in Pr.506.

150 7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.13 Inverter parts life display
 • The remaining life of the main circuit capacitor is calculated from the energization time and the inverter output power (100%
= Start of service life). When the remaining life of the main circuit capacitor falls below 10%, bit 5 of Pr.255 Life alarm
status display turns ON and a warning is output by the Y90 signal.
1
 Life display of the relay contacts of terminals A, B, and C (Pr.507)
• The degree of deterioration of the relay contacts of terminals A, B, and C is displayed in Pr.507. 2
• The number of times the contacts of relay turn ON is counted down from 100% (0 time) by 1% (500 times). When the
counter reaches 10% (45,000 times), bit 6 of Pr.255 turns ON and a warning is output by the Y90 signal.
• Any value can be set in Pr.507. 3
 Life display of the inverter module (Pr.509)
• The degree of deterioration of the inverter module is displayed in Pr.509. 4
• The degree of deterioration of the inverter module is determined by the change in the surrounding air temperature of the
module. (The degree is counted down from 100% (no deterioration).) When the remaining life of the inverter module falls
below 15%, bit 8 of Pr.255 turns ON and a warning is output by the Y90 signal. 5
 Environmental impact diagnosis function (corrosion level display)
(Pr.198)
• The risk of the inverter's corrosive damage (degree of corrosion) can be checked by using a metal corrosion sensor.
6
• The degree of corrosion is monitored using the metal corrosion sensor (the degree is counted up from level 1). Use Pr.198
to check the corrosion level. When level 3 is reached, bit 9 of Pr.255 turns ON and a warning is output by the Y90 signal.
• The following table shows the details of the corrosion level.
7
Possibility of Warning
Level Definition Remaining design life (estimation)*1
danger output
Corrosion that may affect the inverter is very 8
1 0% to 5% — Not output
unlikely to occur.
Corrosion that may affect the inverter is likely to Corrosive damage may cause faults of the
2 6% to 24% occur. Users should improve the environment inverter in a period 16 times as long as the Not output
(by a filter or ventilation). service life so far. 9
Corrosion that may affect the inverter is very
Corrosive damage may cause faults of the
likely to occur. Users should improve the
3 25% to 100% inverter in a period 4 times as long as the Output
environment (by a filter or ventilation). Consider
replacing the inverter early as required.
service life so far. 10
*1 Means the remaining service life from when the level is reached. For example, a fault may occur after 4 months if level 3 is reached in a month,
and after 12 years if level 3 is reached in 3 years.

7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.13 Inverter parts life display
151
 7.14 Maintenance timer alarm
The Maintenance timer (Y95) signal is output when the inverter's cumulative energization time reaches the time period set with
the parameter. "MT" is displayed on the operation panel. This can be used as a guideline for the maintenance time of peripheral
devices.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
Displays the inverter's cumulative energization time in
503 increments of 100 hours (read-only). Writing the setting of "0"
Maintenance timer 0 0 (1 to 9998)
E710 clears the cumulative energization time while Pr.503 = "1 to
9998". (Writing is disabled when Pr.503 = "0".)
Set the cumulative energization time in 100 hours which
504 Maintenance timer warning 0 to 9998
9999 triggers the Maintenance timer (Y95) signal output.
E711 output set time
9999 Without the function

First power ON
9998
(999800h) Set "0" in Pr.503

Maintenance
timer Pr.504
(Pr. 503)

Time

Y95 signal OFF ON ON

MT display
Operation example of the maintenance timer

• The cumulative energization time of the inverter is stored in the EEPROM every hour and displayed in Pr.503 in 100 h
increments. The number indication on Pr.503 stopped at 9998 (999,800 hours).
• When the value in Pr.503 reaches the time (100 h increments) set in Pr.504, the Maintenance timer (Y95) signal is output,
and also "MT" is displayed on the operation panel.
• For the terminal used for the Y95 signal output, assign the function by setting "95" (positive logic) or "195" (negative logic)
in any parameter from Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).

NOTE
• The cumulative energization time is counted every hour. Energization time of less than 1 h is not counted.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 250

152 7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.14 Maintenance timer alarm
7.15 Current average value monitor signal 1

The output current average value during constant-speed operation and the maintenance timer value are output to the Current
average monitor (Y93) signal as a pulse. The output pulse width can be used in a device such as the I/O unit of a programmable 2
controller as a guideline for the maintenance time for mechanical wear, belt stretching, or deterioration of devices with age.
The pulse is repeatedly output during constant-speed operation in cycles of 20 seconds to the Current average monitor (Y93)
signal. 3
Programmable controller
Output Input

4
unit unit
Inverter
maintenance
time

5
parts have
reached their life 6

555
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
Set the time for calculating the average current during start
7
Current average time 1s 0.1 to 1 s
E720 pulse output (1 second).
556 Set the time for not obtaining (masking) transitional state
Data output mask time 0s 0 to 20 s
E721 data. 8
Current average value
557 Inverter rated Set the reference (100%) for outputting the output current
monitor signal output 0 to 500 A
E722 current average value signal.
reference current

 Operation example 9
• The pulse output of the Current average monitor (Y93) signal is indicated below.
• For the terminal used for the Y93 signal output, assign the function by setting "93" (positive logic) or "193" (negative logic)
in any parameter of Pr.190, Pr.191, Pr.193 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection). (This cannot be assigned by
10
setting in Pr.192 ABC terminal function selection.)

From acceleration to constant speed operation

Output
frequency

Time
1 cycle (20 s) Next cycle

Y93 signal
Data output mask time End pulse
When the speed has changed to constant output as low pulse
from acceleration/deceleration, Y93 signal is shape for 1 to 16.5 s
not output for Pr. 556 time.
Maintenance timer pulse
Start pulse The maintenance timer value (Pr. 503) is output
Output as Hi pulse shape for 1 s (fixed) as Hi output pulse shape for 2 to 9 s (16000h to
The output currents are averaged during the time 72000h).
period set in Pr.555. Pr. 503 100h
Signal output time= 5s
40000h
Output current average value pulse
The averaged current value is output as low pulse shape for
0.5 to 9 s (10 to 180%) during start pulse output.
output current average value (A)
Signal output time= 5s
Pr. 557 (A)

 Pr.556 Data output mask time setting

• Immediately after acceleration/deceleration is shifted to constant-speed operation, the output current is unstable
(transitional state). Set the time for not obtaining (masking) transitional state data in Pr.556.

7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.15 Current average value monitor signal
153
  Pr.555 Current average time setting
• The output current average is calculated during start pulse (1 second) HIGH output. Set the time for calculating the average
current during start pulse output in Pr.555.

 Pr.557 Current average value monitor signal output reference current

setting
Set the reference (100%) for outputting the output current average value signal. The signal output time is calculated with the
following formula.

Output current average value

×5s (Output current average value 100%/5 s)
Pr.557 setting value

The output time range is 0.5 to 9 seconds. When the output current average value is less than 10% of the setting value in
Pr.557, the output time is 0.5 second, and when it is more than 180%, the output time is 9 seconds.
For example, when Pr.557 = 10 A and the output current average value is 15 A:
15 A/10 A × 5 s = 7.5 s, thus the Current average monitor signal maintains LOW output for 7.5 seconds.
Signal output time

(s)
9

0.5
10 180 (%)
Output current average value

 Pr.503 Maintenance timer output

After LOW output of the output current value is performed, HIGH output of the maintenance timer value is performed. The
maintenance timer value output time is calculated with the following formula.

Pr.503 × 100
×5s (Maintenance timer value 100%/5 s)
40000h

The output time range is 2 to 9 seconds. When Pr.503 is less than 16000 hours, the output time is 2 seconds. When it is more
than 72000 hours, the output time is 9 seconds.
Signal output time

(s)
9

2
16000 72000 (h)
Maintenance timer value

154 7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.15 Current average value monitor signal
 NOTE
• Masking of the data output and sampling of the output current are not performed during acceleration/deceleration. 1
• If constant speed changes to acceleration or deceleration during start pulse output, it is judged as invalid data, and HIGH
output in 3.5 seconds intervals is performed for the start pulse and LOW output in 16.5 seconds intervals is performed for the
end signal. After the start pulse output is completed, minimum 1-cycle signal output is performed even if acceleration/
deceleration is performed.
2
The speed is changed to deceleration from
Output frequency the constant speed during start pulse output
3
Time
Previous cycle
Y93
Invalid cycle (20 s) Next cycle
4
signal
Start pulse End signal
Output as high pulse shape for 3.5 s Output as low pulse shape for 16.5 s
5
• If the output current value (inverter output current monitor) is 0 A at the completion of the 1-cycle signal output, no signal is
output until the next constant-speed state.
• Under the following conditions, the Y93 signal is output with LOW output in 20 seconds intervals (no data output).
6
- When acceleration or deceleration is operating at the completion of the 1-cycle signal output
- When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr.57 Restart coasting time ≠ "9999") is set, and the 1-
cycle signal output is completed during the restart operation.
- When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr.57 ≠ "9999") is set, and the restart operation was being 7
performed at the completion of data output masking.

• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
8
Parameters referred to
Pr.57 Restart coasting timepage 351, page 356
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 250
9
Pr.503 Maintenance timerpage 152

10

7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.15 Current average value monitor signal
155
 MEMO

156 7. (E) Environment Setting Parameters

7.15 Current average value monitor signal
 CHAPTER 8
CHAPTER 8 (F) Settings for Acceleration/
Deceleration 4

8.1 Setting the acceleration and deceleration time.....................................................................................................158

8.2 Acceleration/deceleration pattern .........................................................................................................................163
6
8.3 Remote setting function ........................................................................................................................................165
8.4 Starting frequency and start-time hold function ....................................................................................................169
8.5 Minimum motor speed frequency at the motor start up ........................................................................................170
7
8.6 Shortest acceleration/deceleration (automatic acceleration/deceleration) ...........................................................171

10

157
 8 (F) Settings for Acceleration/Deceleration

Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page

P.F000 to P.F003, Pr.7, Pr.8, Pr.16,
P.F010, P.F011, Pr.20, Pr.21, Pr.44,
To set the motor acceleration/ Acceleration/deceleration
P.F020 to P.F022, Pr.45, Pr.147, 158
deceleration time time
P.F040, P.F070, Pr.611, Pr.791,
P.F071, P.G264 Pr.792, Pr.1103
To set the acceleration/deceleration Acceleration/deceleration
P.F100 Pr.29 163
pattern suitable for an application pattern
To command smooth speed transition
Remote setting function P.F101 Pr.59 165
with terminals
Starting frequency and start-
To set the starting frequency P.F102, P.F103 Pr.13, Pr.571 169, 170
time hold
To set optimum acceleration/ Automatic acceleration/ P.F500, P.F510 to Pr.61 to Pr.63,
171
deceleration time automatically deceleration P.F513, P.A110 Pr.292, Pr.293

8.1 Setting the acceleration and deceleration time

The following parameters are used to set motor acceleration/deceleration time.
Set a larger value for a slower acceleration/deceleration, or a smaller value for a faster acceleration/deceleration.

158 8. (F) Settings for Acceleration/Deceleration

8.1 Setting the acceleration and deceleration time
For the acceleration time at automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, refer to Pr.611 Acceleration time at a restart
(page 351, page 356).
1
Initial value*1
Pr. Name Setting range Description
Gr.1 Gr.2
Set the frequency that is the basis of acceleration/
20 Acceleration/deceleration
60 Hz 50 Hz 1 to 590 Hz
deceleration time. As acceleration/deceleration time, set the 2
F000 reference frequency time required to change the frequency from stop status (0
Hz) to the frequency set in Pr.20 and vice versa.
0 Increment: 0.1 s Select the increment for the
21
F001
Acceleration/deceleration time
increments
0 acceleration/deceleration time 3
1 Increment: 0.01 s
setting.
Set the acceleration/deceleration time (time required to
16 Jog acceleration/deceleration change the frequency from stop status (0 Hz) to the
F002 time
0.5 s 0 to 3600 s
frequency set in Pr.20 and vice versa) for JOG operation. 4
Refer to page 194.
Set the acceleration time (time required to change the
0 to 3600 s frequency from stop status (0 Hz) to the frequency set in
611
F003
Acceleration time at a restart 9999 Pr.20) for restart. 5
Standard acceleration time (for example, Pr.7) is applied as
9999
the acceleration time at restart. Refer to page 351, page 356.
Set the motor acceleration time (time required to change the
7
F010
Acceleration time
5 s*2
0 to 3600 s frequency from stop status (0 Hz) to the frequency set in 6
10 s*3 Pr.20).
5 s*2 Set the motor deceleration time (time required to change the
8
Deceleration time 0 to 3600 s frequency from the frequency set in Pr.20 to stop status (0
F011 10 s*2 Hz)). 7
*2
44 Second acceleration/ 5s Set the acceleration/deceleration time used while the RT
0 to 3600 s
F020 deceleration time 10 s*3 signal is ON.

45
Second deceleration time 9999
0 to 3600 s Set the deceleration time used while the RT signal is ON. 8
F021 9999 The acceleration time applies to the deceleration time.
Set the frequency where the acceleration/deceleration time
147 Acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 590 Hz
9999 switches to the time set in Pr.44 and/or Pr.45.
F022 switching frequency
9999 Function disabled. 9
Set the acceleration time in a low-speed range (less than 1/
0 to 3600 s
791 Acceleration time in low-speed 10 of the rated motor frequency).
9999
F070 range
9999
The acceleration time set in Pr.7 is applied. (While the RT
signal is ON, the second function is enabled.)
10
Set the deceleration time in a low-speed range (less than 1/
0 to 3600 s
792 Deceleration time in low-speed 10 of the rated motor frequency).
9999
F071 range The deceleration time set in Pr.8 is applied. (While the RT
9999
signal is ON, the second function is enabled.)
1103 Deceleration time at Set the motor deceleration time at a deceleration by turning
5s 0 to 3600 s
F040 emergency stop ON the X92 signal.

*1 Gr.1 and Gr.2 are the parameter initial value groups. (Refer to page 82.)
*2 Initial value for the FR-E820-0175(3.7K) or lower, FR-E840-0095(3.7K) or lower, and FR-E860-0061(3.7K) or lower.
*3 Initial value for the FR-E820-0240(5.5K), FR-E820-0330(7.5K), FR-E840-0120(5.5K), FR-E840-0170(7.5K), FR-E860-0090(5.5K), and FR-E860-
0120(7.5K).

8. (F) Settings for Acceleration/Deceleration

8.1 Setting the acceleration and deceleration time
159
  Control block diagram
Output frequency 10% of the rated motor frequency
JOG-ON
JOG
Acceleration time
(Pr.16)
Output frequency Pr.147 or
(or Pr.147= “9999” ) RT-OFF deceleration time
Acceleration and
deceleration time
(Pr.7, Pr.8) JOG-OFF

Output frequency Pr.147

Second acceleration and
deceleration time
(Pr.44, Pr.45)

RT-ON
Acceleration and
deceleration time
in low-speed range
(Pr.791, Pr.792) Output frequency 10% of the rated motor frequency

 Acceleration time setting (Pr.7, Pr.20)

• Use Pr.7 Acceleration time to set the acceleration time required to change the frequency to the frequency set in Pr.20
Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency from stop status.
• Set the acceleration time according to the following formula.

Acceleration time setting = Pr.20 setting × (Acceleration time to change the frequency from stop status to maximum
frequency) / (Maximum frequency - Pr.13 setting)
• For example, the following calculation is performed to find the setting value for Pr.7 when increasing the output frequency
to the maximum frequency of 50 Hz in 10 seconds with Pr.20 = 60 Hz (initial value) and Pr.13 = 0.5 Hz.

Pr.7 setting = 60 Hz × 10 s / (50 Hz - 0.5 Hz) ≈ 12.1 s

Pr.20
(60Hz/50Hz) Set
frequency
frequency (Hz)
Output

Time

Acceleration Pr.7 Deceleration Pr.8

time Pr.44 time Pr.45

 Deceleration time setting (Pr.8, Pr.20)

• Use Pr.8 Deceleration time to set the deceleration time required to change the frequency from the frequency set in Pr.20
Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency to stop status.
• Set the deceleration time according to the following formula.

Deceleration time setting = Pr.20 setting × (Deceleration time to change the frequency from maximum frequency to stop
status) / (Maximum frequency - Pr.10 setting)
• For example, the following calculation is used to find the setting value for Pr.8 when decreasing the output frequency from
the maximum frequency of 50 Hz in 10 seconds with Pr.20 = 120 Hz and Pr.10 = 3 Hz.

Pr.8 setting = 120 Hz × 10 s / (50 Hz - 3 Hz) ≈ 25.5 s

NOTE
• If the acceleration/deceleration time is set, the actual motor acceleration/deceleration time cannot be made shorter than the
shortest acceleration/deceleration time determined by the mechanical system J (moment of inertia) and motor torque.
• If the Pr.20 setting is changed, the Pr.125 and Pr.126 (frequency setting signal gain frequency) settings do not change.
Set Pr.125 and Pr.126 to adjust the gains.
• Under PM sensorless vector control, if the protective function (E.OLT) is activated due to insufficient torque in the low-speed
range, set longer acceleration/deceleration times only in the low-speed range in Pr.791 Acceleration time in low-speed range
and Pr.792 Deceleration time in low-speed range.

160 8. (F) Settings for Acceleration/Deceleration

8.1 Setting the acceleration and deceleration time
 Changing the minimum increment of the acceleration/deceleration time
(Pr.21) 1
• Use Pr.21 to set the minimum increment of the acceleration/deceleration time.
Setting value "0" (initial value): minimum increment 0.1 s
Setting value "1": minimum increment 0.01 s 2
• Pr.21 setting allows the minimum increment of the following parameters to be changed.
Pr.7, Pr.8, Pr.16, Pr.44, Pr.45, Pr.791, Pr.792, Pr.1103
3
NOTE
• Pr.21 setting does not affect the minimum increment setting of Pr.611 Acceleration time at a restart.
• The operation panel provides a 4-digit readout (including the number of decimal places) on a value of parameters. Therefore,
a value of "100" or larger is set/displayed only in increments of 0.1 second even if Pr.21 = "1". 4
• When Pr.21 is set to "0" after the time is set in 0.01 s increments while Pr.21 is set to "1", the value is displayed in increments
of 0.1 second (rounded down to one decimal place). However, the value for the acceleration/deceleration time setting can be
set in increments of 0.01 second.
5
 Setting multiple acceleration/deceleration times (RT signal, Pr.44, Pr.45,
and Pr.147) 6
• Pr.44 and Pr.45 are applied when the RT signal is ON or when the output frequency is equal to or higher than the
frequency set in Pr.147 Acceleration/deceleration time switching frequency.
• Even at the frequency lower than the Pr.147 setting, turning ON the RT signal switches the acceleration/deceleration time 7
to the second acceleration/deceleration time. The priority of the signals and settings is as follows: RT signal > Pr.147
setting.
• When "9999" is set in Pr.45, the deceleration time becomes equal to the acceleration time (Pr.44). 8
• While the Pr.147 setting is equal to or less than the setting of Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequency or the Pr.13
Starting frequency, the time used as the acceleration/deceleration time switches to the time set in Pr.44 (Pr.45) when the
output frequency reaches or exceeds the Pr.10 or Pr.13 setting. 9
Pr.147 setting Acceleration/deceleration time Description
Acceleration/deceleration time is not
9999 (initial value) Pr.7, Pr.8
automatically changed. 10
Second acceleration/deceleration time is
0.00 Hz Pr.44, Pr.45
applied from the start.
Output frequency < Pr.147: Pr.7, Pr.8 Acceleration/deceleration time is
0.01 Hz ≤ Pr.147 ≤ Set frequency
Pr.147 ≤ Output frequency: Pr.44, Pr.45 automatically changed.
Not changed as the frequency has not
Set frequency < Pr.147 Pr.7, Pr.8
reached the switchover frequency.

Output frequency
(Hz)
Set
frequency

Pr. 147
setting
Time
Pr.7 Pr.44 Pr.44 Pr.8 Pr.7 Pr.44 Pr.44 Pr.8
(Pr.45) (Pr.45)

RT signal ON

NOTE
• The reference frequency during acceleration/deceleration depends on the Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern
selection setting. (Refer to page 163.)
• The RT signal can be assigned to an input terminal by setting Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection). Changing
the terminal assignment may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• The RT signal is the Second function selection signal which also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 289.)

8. (F) Settings for Acceleration/Deceleration

8.1 Setting the acceleration and deceleration time
161
  Setting the acceleration/deceleration time in the low-speed range (Pr.791,
Pr.792)
• If torque is required in the low-speed range (less than 10% of the rated motor frequency) under PM sensorless vector
control, set the Pr.791 Acceleration time in the low-speed range and Pr.792 Deceleration time in low-speed range
settings higher than the Pr.7 Acceleration time and Pr.8 Deceleration time settings so that the mild acceleration/
deceleration is performed in the low-speed range. (When the RT signal is turned ON, the second acceleration/deceleration
time is prioritized.)
frequency (Hz)
Output

Low-speed range
(rated motor frequency/10)
Time
Acceleration time Deceleration time
in low-speed range in low-speed range
Slope set by Pr. 791 Slope set by Pr.792
Acceleration time Deceleration time
Slope set by Pr.7 Slope set by Pr.8

NOTE
• Set Pr.791 (Pr.792) to a value larger than the Pr.7 (Pr.8) setting. If set as Pr.791 < Pr.7, the operation is performed as Pr.791
= Pr.7. If set as Pr.792 < Pr.8, the operation is performed as Pr.792 = Pr.8.

 Emergency stop function (Pr.1103)

• When the Emergency stop (X92) signal is ON, the deceleration stop is performed according to the settings in the Pr.1103
Deceleration time at emergency stop and Pr.815 Torque limit level 2.
• To input the X92 signal, set "92" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign
the function to a terminal.
• The X92 signal is a normally closed input (NC contact input) when it is input via an external input terminal, and a normally
open input (NO contact input) when it is input via communication.
• "PS" is displayed on the operation panel during activation of the emergency stop function.
Deceleration
Output frequency by an emergency stop
Normal
acceleration

Time
Start signal ON OFF ON
X92 OFF ON OFF

NOTE
• The X92 signals can be assigned to an input terminal by setting Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.3 Base frequencypage 376
Pr.10 DC injection brake operation frequencypage 382
Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selectionpage 163
Pr.125, Pr.126 (frequency setting gain frequency)page 273
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283

162 8. (F) Settings for Acceleration/Deceleration

8.1 Setting the acceleration and deceleration time
8.2 Acceleration/deceleration pattern 1

The acceleration/deceleration pattern can be set according to the application.

2
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value

29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern
0 Linear acceleration/deceleration 3
0 1 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A
F100 selection
2 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B

 Linear acceleration/deceleration (Pr.29 = "0" (initial value)) 4

• When the frequency is changed for acceleration, deceleration, etc. during inverter operation, the output frequency is
changed linearly (linear acceleration/deceleration) to reach the set frequency without straining the motor and inverter.
Linear acceleration/deceleration has a uniform frequency/time slope.
5
Setting value "0"
Output frequency

[Linear acceleration
/ deceleration]
6
(Hz)

Time
7
 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A (Pr.29 = "1")
• Use this when acceleration/deceleration is required for a short time until a high-speed area equal to or higher than the base 8
frequency, such as for the main shaft of the machine.
• The acceleration/deceleration pattern has the Pr.3 Base frequency (Pr.84 Rated motor frequency under PM motor
control) (fb) as the point of inflection in an S-pattern curve, and the acceleration/deceleration time can be set to be suitable 9
for the motor torque reduction in the constant-power operation range at the base frequency (fb) or more.
Setting value "1"
[S-pattern acceleration 10
Output frequency

/deceleration A]

fb
(Hz)

Time

• Acceleration/deceleration time calculation method when the set frequency is equal to or higher than the base frequency

Acceleration time t = (4/9) × (T/fb2) × f2 + (5/9) × T

Where T is the acceleration/deceleration time (s), f is the set frequency (Hz), and fb is the base frequency (rated motor
frequency)

• Reference (0 Hz to set frequency) of acceleration/deceleration time when Pr.3 = 60 Hz

Set frequency (Hz)
Acceleration/deceleration time (s)
60 120 200 400
5 5 12 27 102
15 15 35 82 305

NOTE
• For the acceleration/deceleration time setting of the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A, set the time to Pr.3 (Pr.84 under
PM sensorless vector control) instead of Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency.

8. (F) Settings for Acceleration/Deceleration

8.2 Acceleration/deceleration pattern
163
  S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B (Pr.29 = "2")
• This is useful for preventing collapsing stacks such as on a conveyor. S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B can reduce
the impact during acceleration/deceleration by accelerating/decelerating while maintaining an S-pattern from the present
frequency (f2) to the target frequency (f1).
[S-pattern acceleration
/deceleration B]
Set frequency
(Hz)

f1
Output frequency

f2
(Hz)

Time

NOTE
• When the RT signal turns ON during acceleration or deceleration with the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B enabled, a
pattern of acceleration or deceleration changes to linear at the moment.
• When acceleration/deceleration time (such as Pr.7 and Pr.8) is set to "0 s" under Real sensorless vector control, linear
acceleration and deceleration are performed for the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration (Pr.29 ="1 or 2").
• Set linear acceleration/deceleration (Pr.29 = "0" (initial setting)) when torque control is performed under Real sensorless vector
control. When acceleration/deceleration patterns other than the linear acceleration/deceleration are selected, the protective
function of the inverter may be activated.

Parameters referred to
Pr.3 Base frequencypage 376
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration time, Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequencypage 158

164 8. (F) Settings for Acceleration/Deceleration

8.2 Acceleration/deceleration pattern
8.3 Remote setting function 1

Even if the operation panel is located away from the enclosure, contact signals can be used to perform continuous variable-
speed operation, without using analog signals. 2
Description
Initial Setting
Pr. Name RH, RM, RL signal Frequency setting Deceleration to the
value range
function storage main speed or lower 3
0 Multi-speed setting —
1 Remote setting Enabled
2 Remote setting Disabled
Disabled Not available 4
(Turning OFF the STF/STR
3 Remote setting
signal clears the remotely-
59 Remote function
F101 selection
0
11 Remote setting
set frequency.)
Enabled
5
12 Remote setting Disabled
Disabled Available
13 Remote setting
(Turning OFF the STF/STR
signal clears the remotely-
6
set frequency.)

 Remote setting function 7

• When Pr.59 ≠ "0" (remote setting enabled), the functions of the signals are as shown in the following table.
Signal name Function Description

STF/STR Forward/Reverse
The inverter accelerates the motor in the forward or reverse direction up to
the main speed or to the frequency stored by the remote setting function.
8
RH Acceleration The set frequency increases according to the Pr.44 setting.
RM Deceleration The set frequency decreases according to the Pr.45 setting.
RL Clear The set frequency is cleared and the main speed is applied. 9
The setting of the main speed is used as a base. The main speed is
Terminal 2 (analog signal) Main speed
increased by the RH signal and decreased by the RM signal.

Inverter Set frequency

10
Forward Increased Decreased according to
rotation (Hz) the Pr.45 setting
STF according to the
Acceleration
Pr.44 setting
RH
Deceleration
RM 10
Clear
RL 2 Cleared by RL
Terminal 2
SD 5
(main speed)

Connection
diagram for remote setting Time
RH (Acceleration) ON
RM (Deceleration) ON
RL (Clear) ON
STF (Forward) ON

 Main speed
• The main speed used in the remote setting corresponds with each of the following operation modes.
Operation mode Main speed
PU operation mode / NET operation mode Digital setting
External operation mode / PU/External combined operation mode 2 (Pr.79 = "4") Analog input
PU/External combined operation mode 1 (Pr.79 = "3") Analog input via terminal 4 (AU signal ON)

8. (F) Settings for Acceleration/Deceleration

8.3 Remote setting function
165
  Acceleration/deceleration operation
• The output frequency changes as follows when the set frequency is changed by the remote setting function.
Frequency Time setting Description
Set frequency Pr.44/Pr.45 The set frequency increases/decreases by remote setting according to the Pr.44/Pr.45 setting.
Output frequency Pr.7/Pr.8 The output frequency increases/decreases by the set frequency according to the Pr.7/Pr.8 setting.

Acceleration (RH) ON

Deceleration (RM) ON

Set frequency

Time
Pr.44 Pr.45
Output frequency

Time
Pr.7 Pr.8

NOTE
• If the time setting of the output frequency is longer than the time setting of the set frequency, the motor accelerates/decelerates
according to the time setting of the output frequency.

• Deceleration to the main speed or lower

By setting Pr.59 = "11 to 13", the speed can be decelerated to the frequency lower than the main speed (set by the External
operation frequency (except multi-speed setting) or PU operation frequency).
Pr.59 = “ 1, 2, 3”
Output frequency

Decelerates to the main speed

(Hz)

Main speed Pr.59 = “ 11, 12, 13”

Decelerates to the minimum frequency
Minimum
frequency
0 Time

Forward rotation(STF) ON
ON
Acceleration(RH)
ON
Deceleration(RM)

• Regardless of whether the remote setting is enabled or disabled, the acceleration/deceleration time set for the output
frequency can be changed to the second acceleration/deceleration time by turning ON the RT signal.
• The acceleration/deceleration time setting of the set frequency is fixed at the Pr.44/Pr.45 setting.

 Frequency setting storage

• The remotely set frequency is stored, held, or cleared according to the Pr.59 setting. When the inverter is turned ON again
and the operation is resumed, the setting shown in the parentheses will be applied.
Pr.59 setting Power OFF STF/STR signal OFF
1, 11 Stored (stored frequency) Held (stored frequency)
2, 12 Cleared (main speed) Held (stored frequency)
3, 13 Clear (main speed) Cleared (main speed)

• Storage conditions
The remotely-set frequency is stored at the point when the start signal (STF or STR) turns OFF. The remotely-set
frequency is stored every minute after turning OFF (ON) the RH and RM signals together. Every minute, the frequency is
overwritten in the EEPROM if the latest frequency is different from the previous one when comparing the two. This cannot
be written using the RL signal.

166 8. (F) Settings for Acceleration/Deceleration

8.3 Remote setting function
NOTE
• When switching the start signal from ON to OFF, or changing frequency by the RH or RM signal frequently, set the frequency 1
setting value storage function (write to EEPROM) invalid (Pr.59 = "2, 3, 12, 13"). If the frequency setting value storage function
is valid (Pr.59 = "1, 11"), the frequency is written to EEPROM frequently, and this will shorten the life of the EEPROM.
• The range of frequency changeable using the acceleration (RH) signal and the deceleration (RM) signal is 0 to the maximum
frequency (set in Pr.1 or Pr.18). Note that the maximum value of set frequency is equal to the total of the main speed and the
2
maximum frequency.
(Hz) The set frequency is clamped at (main speed + Pr.1)
3
Output frequency is Set frequency
clamped at Pr.1
Output frequency
Pr.1

Main speed setting

Pr.59="1, 2, 3"
4
Pr.59="11, 12, 13"
0Hz Time

5
Acceleration(RH) ON
Deceleration(RM) ON
Forward rotation(STF) ON

• Even if the start signal (STF or STR) is OFF, turning ON the RH or RM signal varies the preset frequency.
• The RH, RM, or RL signal can be assigned to an input terminal by setting Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function 6
selection). Changing the terminal assignment may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each
terminal.
• The inverter can be used in the Network operation mode.
• The remote setting function is invalid during JOG operation and PID control operation.
7
• The multi-speed operation function is invalid when remote setting function is selected.

When the setting frequency is "0"

8
• Even when the remotely-set frequency is cleared by turning ON the clear (RL) signal after turning OFF (ON) both the RH and
RM signals, the inverter operates at the remotely-set frequency stored in the last operation if power is reapplied before one
minute has elapsed since turning OFF (ON) both the RH and RM signals.
9
Remotely-set frequency stored last time
Output frequency
(Hz)

Within 1 minute

Remotely-set frequency stored last time

10
Time

Acceleration (RH) ON
Deceleration (RM) OFF
ON
Clear (RL)
Forward rotation ON ON
(STF)
Power supply ON ON

8. (F) Settings for Acceleration/Deceleration

8.3 Remote setting function
167
 • When the remotely-set frequency is cleared by turning ON the clear (RL) signal after turning OFF (ON) both the RH and RM
signals, the inverter operates at the frequency in the remotely-set frequency cleared state if power is reapplied before one
minute has elapsed since turning OFF (ON) both the RH and RM signals.

Remotely-set frequency stored last time

One minute
More than

Output frequency
(Hz)
one minute
Operation is performed at the set
frequency 0Hz.

Time

Acceleration (RH) ON
Deceleration (RM) OFF
ON
Clear (RL)

Forward rotation (STF) ON ON

Power supply ON ON

CAUTION
• When using the remote setting function, set the maximum frequency again according to the machine.

Parameters referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequency, Pr.18 High speed maximum frequencypage 211
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration time, Pr.44 Second acceleration/deceleration time, Pr.45 Second deceleration timepage 158
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283

168 8. (F) Settings for Acceleration/Deceleration

8.3 Remote setting function
8.4 Starting frequency and start-time hold function 1

V/F Magnetic flux Sensorless

It is possible to set the starting frequency and hold the set starting frequency for a certain period of time.
2
Set these functions when a starting torque is needed or the motor drive at start needs smoothing.

13
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
Set the starting frequency at which the start signal is turned
3
Starting frequency 0.5 Hz 0 to 60 Hz
F102 ON.
571 0 to 10 s Set the holding time of the frequency set in Pr.13.
Holding time at a start 9999
F103 9999 The holding function at start is disabled. 4
 Starting frequency setting (Pr.13)
• The frequency at start can be set in the range of 0 to 60 Hz.
• Set the starting frequency at which the start signal is turned ON.
5
Output
frequency
(Hz)
60
6
Setting range

Pr.13 7
0
Time

STF ON
8
NOTE
• The inverter does not start if the frequency setting signal has a value lower than that of Pr.13.
For example, while Pr.13 = 5 Hz, the inverter output starts when the frequency setting signal reaches 5 Hz. 9

 Start-time hold function (Pr.571)

• This function holds during the period set in Pr.571 and the output frequency set in Pr.13 Starting frequency.
10
• This function performs initial excitation to smooth the motor drive at a start.
Output
frequency
(Hz)
60
Setting range

Pr.13
0
Time
Pr. 571 setting time
STF ON

NOTE
• When Pr.13 = 0 Hz, the starting frequency is held at 0.01 Hz.
• When the start signal was turned OFF during start-time hold, deceleration is started at that point.
• At switching between forward rotation and reverse rotation, the starting frequency is valid but the start-time hold function is
disabled.

CAUTION
• Note that when Pr.13 is set to a value equal to or lower than the setting of Pr.2 Minimum frequency, simply turning ON
the start signal runs the motor at the frequency set in Pr.2 even if the command frequency is not given.

Parameters referred to
Pr.2 Minimum frequencypage 211

8. (F) Settings for Acceleration/Deceleration

8.4 Starting frequency and start-time hold function
169
 8.5 Minimum motor speed frequency at the motor start
up
PM

Set the frequency where the PM motor starts running.

Set the deadband in the low-speed range to eliminate noise and offset deviation when setting a frequency with analog input.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

13 Minimum frequency / Set the frequency where the motor starts
Starting frequency 0 to 60 Hz
F102 minimum rotations per minute running.

 Starting frequency setting (Pr.13)

• The frequency where the PM motor starts running can be set in the range of 0 to 60 Hz.
• When the frequency command specifies the frequency less than the one set in Pr.13 Starting frequency, the PM motor
is stopped.
When the frequency command specifies the frequency equal to the set frequency or higher, the PM motor accelerates
according to the setting of Pr.7 Acceleration time.
Output
frequency
(Hz)
60
Setting range

Set frequency
Output
frequency
Pr.13
0
Time
Output from 0.01Hz
STF ON

NOTE
• Under induction motor control (under V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, and Real sensorless vector control),
the output starts at the frequency set in Pr.13. Under PM sensorless vector control, the output always starts at 0.01 Hz.
• The inverter does not start if the frequency setting signal has a value lower than that of Pr.13. For example, while Pr.13 = 20
Hz, the inverter output starts when the frequency setting signal reaches 20 Hz.

CAUTION
• Note that when Pr.13 is set to a value equal to or lower than Pr.2 Minimum frequency, simply turning ON the start signal
runs the motor at the frequency set in Pr.2 even if the command frequency is not given.

Parameters referred to
Pr.2 Minimum frequencypage 211
Pr.7 Acceleration timepage 158

170 8. (F) Settings for Acceleration/Deceleration

8.5 Minimum motor speed frequency at the motor start up
8.6 Shortest acceleration/deceleration (automatic 1
acceleration/deceleration)
2
V/F Magnetic flux Sensorless
The inverter can be operated with the same conditions as when the appropriate value is set to each parameter even when
acceleration/deceleration time and V/F pattern are not set. This function is useful for operating the inverter without setting 3
detailed parameters.
Initial
Pr. Name
value
Setting range Description
4
0 Normal operation
292
Automatic acceleration/ 1 Shortest acceleration/deceleration (without brakes)
F500 0
deceleration 11 Shortest acceleration/deceleration (with brakes)
A110
7, 8 Brake sequence 1, 2 (Refer to page 320.) 5
Set the reference current during shortest acceleration/
61 0 to 500 A
Reference current 9999 deceleration.
F510
9999
0% to 400%
Rated output current value reference of the inverter
Set the speed limit value during shortest acceleration.
6
62 Reference value at
9999
F511 acceleration 9999 The limit value is 150% (120% for the LD rating).
63 Reference value at 0% to 400% Set the speed limit value during shortest deceleration.
F512 deceleration
9999
9999 The limit value is 150% (120% for the LD rating). 7
Shortest acceleration/deceleration for both acceleration
0
293 Acceleration/deceleration and deceleration
0
F513 separate selection 1 Shortest acceleration/deceleration for acceleration only
2 Shortest acceleration/deceleration for deceleration only
8
 Shortest acceleration/deceleration (Pr.292 = "1, 11", Pr.293)
• Set this parameter to accelerate/decelerate the motor at the shortest time. This function is useful when the motor needs 9
to be accelerated/decelerated at a shorter time, such as for a machine, but the designed value of the machine constant is
not known.
• At acceleration/deceleration, this function adjusts the motor to accelerate/decelerate with the maximum inverter output 10
torque using the Pr.7 Acceleration time and Pr.8 Deceleration time setting as reference. (Pr.7 and Pr.8 settings are not
changed.)
• Use Pr.293 Acceleration/deceleration separate selection to apply the shortest acceleration/deceleration to one of
acceleration and deceleration only.
When "0" (initial value) is set, the shortest acceleration/deceleration is performed for both acceleration and deceleration.
• Set "11" in Pr.292 when a brake resistor or brake unit is connected. The deceleration time can further be shortened.
• When the shortest acceleration/deceleration is selected under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control, the
stall prevention operation level during acceleration/deceleration becomes 150% (adjustable using Pr.61 to Pr.63). The
setting of Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level and stall level by analog input are used only during a constant speed
operation.
Under Real sensorless vector control, the torque limit level (Pr.22, etc.) is applied during acceleration/deceleration. The
adjustments by Pr.61 to Pr.63 are disabled.
• It is inappropriate to use for the following applications.
- Machines with large inertia (10 times or more), such as a fan. Since stall prevention operation is activated for a long
time, this type of machine may be shut off due to motor overloading, etc.
- When the inverter is always operated at a specified acceleration/deceleration time.

8. (F) Settings for Acceleration/Deceleration

8.6 Shortest acceleration/deceleration (automatic acceleration/deceleration)
171
 NOTE
• Even if automatic acceleration/deceleration has been selected, inputting the JOG signal (JOG operation) or RT signal (Second
function selection) during an inverter stop switches to the normal operation and give priority to JOG operation or second
function selection. Note that during operation, an input of JOG and RT signal does not have any influence even when the
automatic acceleration/deceleration is enabled.
• Since acceleration/deceleration is made with the stall prevention operation being activated, the acceleration/deceleration
speed always varies according to the load conditions.
• By setting Pr.7 and Pr.8 appropriately, it is possible to accelerate/decelerate with a shorter time than when selecting the
shortest acceleration/deceleration.
• The shortest acceleration/deceleration is enabled when the operation starts with the RT signal OFF while this function and the
stop-on-contact control are both enabled. (Stop-on-contact control is not enabled when the RT and RL signals are turned ON
during operation.)
• The shortest acceleration/deceleration is disabled when the operation starts after the RT signal is turned ON during a stop
while this function and the stop-on-contact control are both enabled. (Stop-on-contact control is enabled by turning ON the RL
signal.)

 Shortest and optimum acceleration/deceleration mode adjustment (Pr.61

to Pr.63)
• The application range can be expanded by setting the parameters for adjustment of Pr.61 to Pr.63.
Pr. Name Setting range Description
Set the rated motor current value such as when the motor capacity and inverter capacity
differ.
0 to 500 A
Set the reference current (A) of the stall prevention operation level during acceleration/
61 Reference current deceleration.
9999 (initial
The rated inverter current value is the reference.
value)
Used to change the reference level of acceleration and deceleration.
Reference value
0% to 400% Set the stall prevention operation level (percentage of current value of Pr.61) during
62 at acceleration acceleration/deceleration.
63 Reference value
9999 (initial
at deceleration Stall prevention operation level is 150% for the shortest acceleration/deceleration.
value)

NOTE
• When Real sensorless vector control is selected with the shortest acceleration/deceleration, Pr.61 to Pr.63 are invalid.
• Even if Pr.61 to Pr.63 are set once, changing the setting to other than the shortest acceleration/deceleration (Pr.292 ≠ "1 or
11") automatically resets to the initial setting (9999). Set Pr.61 to Pr.63 after setting Pr.292.

Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 158
Pr.22 Stall prevention operation levelpage 214
Pr.22 Torque limit levelpage 100

172 8. (F) Settings for Acceleration/Deceleration

8.6 Shortest acceleration/deceleration (automatic acceleration/deceleration)
 CHAPTER 9
CHAPTER 9 (D) Operation Command and
Frequency Command 4

9.1 Operation mode selection.....................................................................................................................................174

9.2 Startup of the inverter in Network operation mode at power-ON..........................................................................184
6
9.3 Start command source and frequency command source during communication operation .................................185
9.4 Reverse rotation prevention selection ..................................................................................................................193
9.5 JOG operation ......................................................................................................................................................194
7
9.6 Operation by multi-speed setting ..........................................................................................................................195

10

173
 9 (D) Operation Command and Frequency
Command

Refer to
Purpose Parameter to set
page
To select the operation mode Operation mode selection P.D000 Pr.79 174
To start up the inverter in Network operation Communication startup
P.D000, P.D001 Pr.79, Pr.340 184
mode at power-ON mode selection
Operation and speed
command sources during
To select the command source during Pr.338, Pr.339, Pr.550,
communication operation, P.D010 to P.D013 185
communication operation Pr.551
command source
selection
To prevent the motor from rotating Reverse rotation
P.D020 Pr.78 193
reversely prevention selection
To change the setting resolution of the
Set resolution switchover P.D030 Pr.811 226
torque limit
To perform JOG (inching) operation JOG operation P.D200, P.F002 Pr.15, Pr.16 194
Pr.28, Pr.4 to Pr.6,
To control the frequency with combinations
Multi-speed operation P.D300 to P.D315 Pr.24 to Pr.27, Pr.232 195
of terminals
to Pr.239
To select the torque command method Torque command source P.D120, P.D121, Pr.432, Pr.433, Pr.804
117
during torque control selection P.D400 to P.D402 to Pr.806

9.1 Operation mode selection

Select the operation mode of the inverter.
The mode can be changed among operation using external signals (External operation), operation by the operation panel (PU
operation), combined operation of PU operation and External operation (External/PU combined operation), and Network
operation (via RS-485 communication or Ethernet communication, or when a communication option is used).
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
79
Operation mode selection 0 0 to 4, 6, 7 Selects the operation mode.
D000

The following table lists valid and invalid commands in each operation mode.

174 9. (D) Operation Command and Frequency Command

9.1 Operation mode selection
 LED indicator
Pr.79
setting
Description : OFF
Refer to
page
1
: ON
PU operation
mode
2
External operation
0 (initial
PU/EXT key selection of the operation mode. The inverter operation mode can be selected by
pressing the PU/EXT key.
mode
178
3
value)
At power ON, the inverter is in the External operation mode.

NET operation
mode 4

Operation mode Frequency command Start command PU operation

mode
5
1 Fixed at PU operation Input using the RUN key on the 179
Sent from the operation panel
mode. operation panel

External operation 6
mode
Fixed at External operation
Sent using external signals
mode.
(input via terminal 2 or 4, using
2
However, the inverter
operation mode can also be
the JOG signal, using the
Sent using external signals (via
terminal STF or STR). NET operation
178 7
multi-speed setting function,
changed to the Network mode
etc.).
operation mode.

8
Sent from the operation panel
or sent using external signals
External/PU combined (input using the multi-speed Sent using external signals (via
3 179
operation mode 1 setting function or via terminal terminal STF or STR).
External/PU
combined 9
4).*1 operation mode
Sent using external signals
(input via terminal 2 or 4, using
4
External/PU combined
operation mode 2
the JOG signal, using the
Input using the RUN key on the
operation panel
179 10
multi-speed setting function,
etc.).
PU operation
Operation mode switchover during operation. mode
6 Switching from among the PU, External, and NET operation modes can be performed during 180
operation.
External operation
mode

External operation mode (PU operation interlock).

X12 signal ON: Switchover to PU operation mode enabled (signal is OFF during External
7 NET operation 180
operation).
mode
X12 signal OFF: Switchover to PU operation mode disabled.

*1 The following is the frequency commands listed in descending order of priority when "3" is set in Pr.79: Multi-speed setting function (RL/RM/RH/
REX signal) > PID control (X14 signal) > terminal 4 analog input (AU signal) > digital input from the operation panel.

 Operation mode basics

• The operation mode specifies the source of the start command and the frequency command for the inverter.
• Basic operation modes are as follows.
External operation For giving a start command and a frequency command with an external potentiometer or switches which are
mode: connected to the control circuit terminal.
PU operation mode: For giving a start command and a frequency command with the operation panel.
Network operation mode For giving a start command and a frequency command via RS-485 communication or Ethernet
(NET operation mode): communication, or using a communication option.

9. (D) Operation Command and Frequency Command

9.1 Operation mode selection
175
 • The operation mode can be selected from the operation panel or with the communication instruction code.

PU operation mode PU operation mode

Personal computer Personal computer

Operation panel Operation panel

PU operation mode PU operation mode
5 6 5 6
4 4
USB 1
2
3 7
8
USB 1
2
3 7
8

connector 9
connector 9

External 10
External 10

operation Potentiometer Switch operation Potentiometer Switch

mode mode

Network Network
External Communication operation External Communication operation
terminal option mode terminal option mode

Programmable Programmable
Network controller Network controller
operation operation
PU connector mode Personal computer Ethernet mode Personal computer
connector
PU operation RUN MON
Hz

mode A
PU EXT

Inverter (FR-E800) Inverter (FR-E800-E)

Enclosure surface
operation panel

Personal computer

NOTE
• There is a choice of two settings, "3" and "4", for the External/PU combined operation mode. The startup method differs
according to the setting value.
• In the initial setting, the PU stop selection (function to stop the inverter operation by pressing the STOP/RESET key on the
operation panel) is enabled even in the operation mode other than the PU operation mode. (Refer to Pr.75 on page 128.)

176 9. (D) Operation Command and Frequency Command

9.1 Operation mode selection
 Operation mode switching method
When "0, 1, or 2" is set in Pr. 340
External operation 1

Switching through the network Switching with the PU

Switch to External Press on

2
operation mode through the PU to light
Press on
the network. Switch to the Network operation
mode through the network. the PU to light
3
Network operation PU operation

4
When "10 or 12" is set in Pr. 340
Network operation
Press on the PU to light
PU operation 5

Press on the PU to light

6
NOTE
• For details on switching by external terminals, refer to the following pages.
PU operation external interlock (X12 signal)page 180 7
PU/External operation switchover (X16 signal)page 181
PU/NET operation switchover (X65 signal), External/NET operation switchover (X66 signal)page 182
Pr.340 Communication startup mode selectionpage 184
8

10

9. (D) Operation Command and Frequency Command

9.1 Operation mode selection
177
  Operation mode selection flow
Referring to the following table, select the basic parameter settings or terminal wiring related to the operation mode.
Method to give Operation method
Method to give
frequency setting Parameter setting
start command Start command Frequency setting
command
External signals (input via
terminal 2 or 4, using the Pr.79 = "2"
Turn ON terminal Turn ON a terminal used for
JOG signal, using the (Fixed at External operation
STF/STR. frequency setting.
multi-speed setting mode)
function, etc.)
Pr.79 = "3"
Turn ON terminal
Operation panel (External/PU combined Digital setting
External signals STF/STR.
operation mode 1)
(via terminal STF/
Pr.79 = "3"
STR) Turn ON terminal
USB connector (External/PU combined Digital setting
STF/STR.
operation mode 1)
Communication (PU
Pr.338 = "1" Turn ON terminal Transmit a frequency command via
connector / Ethernet
Pr.340 = "1" STF/STR. communication.
connector)
Communication (via Pr.338 = "1" Turn ON terminal Transmit a frequency command via
communication option) Pr.340 = "1" STF/STR. communication.
External signals (input via
terminal 2 or 4, using the Pr.79 = "4"
Turn ON a terminal used for
JOG signal, using the (External/PU combined Press the RUN key.
frequency setting.
multi-speed setting operation mode 2)
function, etc.)
Operation panel Pr.79 = "1"
Operation panel Press the RUN key. Digital setting
(RUN key) (Fixed at PU operation mode)
• USB connector
• Communication (PU
connector / Ethernet Not available
connector /
communication option)
External signals (input via
terminal 2 or 4, using the Transmit a start
Pr.339 = "1" Turn ON a terminal used for
JOG signal, using the command via
Pr.340 = "1" frequency setting.
multi-speed setting communication
Communication function, etc.)
(PU connector / • USB connector
Ethernet connector) • Communication (via Not available
communication option)
Communication (PU Transmit a start
Transmit a frequency command via
connector / Ethernet Pr.340 = "1" command via
communication.
connector) communication
External signals (input via
terminal 2 or 4, using the Transmit a start
Pr.339 = "1" Turn ON a terminal used for
JOG signal, using the command via
Pr.340 = "1" frequency setting.
multi-speed setting communication
function, etc.)
Communication
• USB connector
(via communication
• Communication (PU
option) Not available
connector / Ethernet
connector)
Through communication Transmit a start
Transmit a frequency command via
(via communication Pr.340 = "1" command via
communication.
option) communication

 External operation mode (Pr.79 = "0 (initial value) or 2")

• Select the External operation mode when the start command and the frequency command are applied from a frequency
setting potentiometer, start switch, etc. which are provided externally and connected to the control circuit terminals of the
inverter.
• Generally, parameter change cannot be performed in the External operation mode. (Some parameters can be changed.
Refer to page 135,)
• When Pr.79 = "0 or 2", the inverter starts up in the External operation mode at power-ON. (When using the Network
operation mode, refer to page 184.)

178 9. (D) Operation Command and Frequency Command

9.1 Operation mode selection
 • When parameter changing is seldom necessary, setting "2" fixes the operation mode to the External operation mode.
When frequent parameter changing is necessary, setting "0" (initial value) allows the operation mode to be changed easily 1
to the PU operation mode by pressing the PU/EXT key on the operation panel. After switching to the PU operation mode,
always return to the External operation mode.
• The STF or STR signal is used as a start command. The input voltage or current via terminal 2 or 4, multi-speed setting
2
signal, or JOG signal is used as a frequency command.
Inverter

Forward rotation start STF

STR
3
Reverse rotation start
Switch SD

Frequency setting
10
2
4
potentiometer
5
Potentiometer

 PU operation mode (Pr.79 = "1") 5

• Select the PU operation mode when giving start and frequency commands by only the key operation of the operation panel.
• When Pr.79 ="1", the inverter starts up in the PU operation mode at power-ON. The mode cannot be changed to other
operation modes.
6
• When the PU operation mode is selected, the PU operation mode (PU) signal can be output.
For the terminal used for the PU signal, set "10" (positive logic) or "110" (negative logic) in any parameter from Pr.190 to
7
Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
Operation panel
8

9
 PU/External combined operation mode 1 (Pr.79 = "3")
• Select the PU/External combined operation mode 1 when giving a frequency command from the operation panel and giving 10
a start command with the external start switches.
• Set "3" in Pr.79. The mode cannot be changed to other operation modes.
• When the frequency commands are given using the multi-speed setting signals (external signals), they have a higher
priority than the frequency commands given from the PU. When the AU signal is ON, inputting the command signals via
terminal 4 is enabled.

Inverter
Operation panel
Forward rotation STF
start
Reverse rotation STR
start
Switch SD

 PU/External combined operation mode 2 (Pr.79 = "4")

• Select the PU/External combined operation mode 2 when giving a frequency command from the external potentiometer,
or multi-speed and JOG signals, and giving a start command by key operation of the operation panel.

9. (D) Operation Command and Frequency Command

9.1 Operation mode selection
179
 • Set "4" in Pr.79. The mode cannot be changed to other operation modes.
Inverter
Operation panel
10
Frequency setting
2
potentiometer
5
Potentiometer

 Operation mode switchover during operation (Pr.79 = "6")

• During operation, the inverter operation mode can be switched from among the PU, External, and Network (Network
operation mode is selectable via RS-485 communication or Ethernet communication, or when a communication option is
used).
Operation mode
Operation/operating status
switchover
Use the operation panel to change the operation mode to the PU operation mode.
• The direction of motor rotation does not change due to the operation mode change from the External
External operation→PU
operation mode.
operation
• The previous setting of frequency which has been set using a potentiometer (frequency command) is taken
over. (However, note that the setting disappears when the power is turned OFF or when the inverter is reset.)
Give the command through communication to change the operation mode to the Network operation mode.
• The direction of motor rotation does not change due to the operation mode change from the External
External operation→NET
operation mode.
operation
• The previous setting of frequency which has been set using a potentiometer (frequency command) is taken
over. (However, note that the setting disappears when the power is turned OFF or when the inverter is reset.)
Press the key on the operation panel to change the operation mode to the External operation mode.
PU operation→External
• The direction of operation is determined by external input signals used in the External operation mode.
operation
• The setting frequency is determined by the external frequency command signal.
Give the command through communication to change the operation mode to the Network operation mode.
PU operation→NET
• The direction of motor rotation and the frequency setting does not change due to the operation mode change
operation
from the PU operation mode.
Give the command through communication to change the operation mode to the External operation mode.
NET operation→External
• The direction of operation is determined by external input signals used in the External operation mode.
operation
• The setting frequency is determined by the external frequency command signal.
Use the operation panel to change the operation mode to the PU operation mode.
NET operation→PU
• The direction of motor rotation and the frequency setting does not change due to the operation mode change
operation
from the Network operation mode.

 PU operation interlock (Pr.79 = "7")

• The operation mode can be forcibly switched to the External operation mode by turning OFF the PU operation external
interlock (X12) signal. This function will be usable in a case where the inverter does not reply to external command signals
during operation due to the operation mode accidentally unswitched from the PU operation mode to the External operation
mode.
• To input the X12 signal, set "12" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.184 (Input terminal function selection) to assign
the function. (For details on Pr.178 to Pr.184, refer to page 283.)
• Set Pr.79 = "7" (PU operation interlock).
• If the X12 signal is not assigned, the function of the MRS signal is switched to the PU operation interlock signal from MRS
(output stop).
Function/Operation
X12 (MRS) signal
Operation mode Parameter writing*1
Switching of the operation mode (External, PU, and NET) is
ON Enabled.
enabled. The signal is OFF during External operation.
Operation mode is forcefully changed to the External operation
mode.
OFF External operation is enabled. Disabled except for Pr.79.
Switching to the PU or NET operation mode from the External
operation mode is disabled.

*1 Depends on the Pr.77 Parameter write selection setting and other parameter write conditions. (Refer to page 135.)

180 9. (D) Operation Command and Frequency Command

9.1 Operation mode selection
 • Functions/operations by X12 (MRS) signal ON/OFF
Operating status
Operation Switching to PU or 1
Operation X12 (MRS) signal Operating status
Status mode NET operation mode
mode
During stop ON→OFF*1 If frequency and start commands are given Disabled
PU/NET During External*2 from external source, the inverter runs by 2
running ON→OFF*1 those commands. Disabled

OFF→ON Enabled
During stop During stop
External
During
ON→OFF
OFF→ON
External*2
Running→Output stop
Disabled
Disabled
3
running ON→OFF Output stop→Running Disabled
*1 The mode is switched to the External operation mode regardless of the ON/OFF state of the start signal (STF/STR). Thus, the motor runs under
the External operation mode when the X12 (MRS) signal turns OFF while the STF or STR signal is ON. 4
*2 When a fault occurs, the inverter can be reset by pressing the STOP/RESET key on the operation panel.

NOTE
• The operation mode cannot be switched to the PU operation mode with the start signal (STF/STR) ON state even if the X12 5
(MRS) signal turns ON.
• If the MRS signal is ON and Pr.79 is written to a value other than "7" when the MRS signal is used as the PU interlock signal,
the MRS signal will act as a regular MRS function (output stop). Also, when Pr.79 = "7", the MRS signal becomes the PU
interlock signal. 6
• The logic of the signal follows the Pr.17 MRS/X10 terminal input selection setting also when the MRS signal is used as the
PU operation interlock signal. When Pr.17 = "2 to 5", ON and OFF in the table above are reversed.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.184 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. 7
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 Switching operation mode by external signal (X16 signal) 8

• When External operation and the operation from the operation panel are used together, the PU operation mode and
External operation mode can be switched during a stop (during motor stop, start command OFF) by using the PU/External
operation switchover (X16) signal. 9
• When Pr.79 = "0, 6, or 7", switching between the PU operation mode and External operation mode is possible. (When
Pr.79 ="6", switchover is enabled during operation.)
• To input the X16 signal, set "16" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.184 (Input terminal function selection) to assign 10
the function to a terminal.
X16 signal status and operation mode
Pr.79 setting Remarks
ON (External) OFF (PU)
External operation Switching among the External, PU, and NET operation modes is
0 (initial value) PU operation mode
mode enabled.
1 PU operation mode Fixed at PU operation mode.
Fixed at External operation mode (Switching to NET operation mode
2 External operation mode
enabled).
3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode Fixed at External/PU combined operation mode.
External operation Switching among the External, PU, and NET operation mode is
6 PU operation mode
mode enabled during operation.
X12 (MRS) External operation Switching among the External, PU, and NET operation mode is
PU operation mode
ON mode enabled (signal is OFF in the External operation mode).
7
X12 (MRS) Fixed at External operation mode (forcibly switched to External
External operation mode
OFF operation mode).

NOTE
• The operation mode is determined by the setting of Pr.340 Communication startup mode selection and the ON/OFF state
of the X65 and X66 signals. (For the details, refer to page 182.)
• The priority of Pr.79 and Pr.340 and signals is Pr.79 > X12 > X66 > X65 > X16 > Pr.340.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

9. (D) Operation Command and Frequency Command

9.1 Operation mode selection
181
  Switching the operation mode by external signals (X65, X66 signals)
• When Pr.79 = "0, 2 or 6", the PU operation mode and External operation modes can be changed to the Network operation
mode during a stop (during motor stop, start command OFF) by the PU/NET operation switchover (X65) signal, or the
External/NET operation switchover (X66) signal. (When Pr.79 = "6", switchover is enabled during operation.)
• To switch between the Network operation mode and the PU operation mode

1. Set Pr.79 = "0 (initial value) or 6".

2. Set Pr.340 Communication startup mode selection = "10".

3. Set "65" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.184 to assign the PU/NET operation switchover (X65) signal to a
terminal.

4. When the X65 signal is ON, the PU operation mode is selected. When the X65 signal is OFF, the NET operation
mode is selected.

Pr.340 X65 signal state

Pr.79 setting Remarks
setting ON (PU) OFF (NET)
0 (initial value) PU operation mode*1 NET operation mode*2 —
1 PU operation mode Fixed at PU operation mode.
2 NET operation mode Fixed at NET operation mode.
3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode Fixed at External/PU combined operation mode.
10 The operation mode can be changed during
6 PU operation mode*1 NET operation mode*2 operation.

X12 (MRS) Switching between the External operation mode The signal is OFF during operation in the External
ON and PU operation mode is enabled.*2 operation mode.
7
X12 (MRS) The operation mode is forcibly switched to the
External operation mode
OFF External operation mode.
*1 When the X66 signal is ON, the NET operation mode is selected.
*2 When the X16 signal is OFF, the PU operation mode is selected. Also, when "0" is set for Pr.550 NET mode operation command source
selection and the communication option is not connected (communication option is the command source), the PU operation mode is selected.
When the X16 signal is ON, the External operation mode is selected.

• To switch between the Network operation mode and the External operation mode

1. Set Pr.79 = "0 (initial value), 2, 6, or 7". (When Pr.79 = "7" and the X12 (MRS) signal is ON, the operation mode can
be switched.)

2. Set Pr.340 Communication startup mode selection = "0" (initial value) or "1".

3. Set "66" in one of Pr.178 to Pr.184 to assign the NET-External operation switching signal (X66) to a terminal.

4. When the X66 signal is ON, the NET operation mode is selected. When the X66 signal is OFF, the External
operation mode is selected.

Pr.340 X66 signal state

Pr.79 setting Remarks
setting ON (NET) OFF (External)
External operation
0 (initial value) NET operation mode*1 —
mode*2
1 PU operation mode Fixed at PU operation mode.
External operation
2 NET operation mode*1 mode
Switching to PU operation mode is disabled.

0 (initial 3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode Fixed at External/PU combined operation mode.
value), 1 External operation The operation mode can be changed during
6 NET operation mode*1
mode*2 operation.
X12 (MRS) External operation The signal is OFF during operation in the External
NET operation mode*1
ON mode*2 operation mode.
7
X12 (MRS) The operation mode is forcibly switched to the
External operation mode
OFF External operation mode.
*1 When Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selection = "0" (communication option control source) and no communication option is
connected, the External operation mode is selected.
*2 When the X16 signal is OFF, the PU operation mode is selected. Also, when the X65 signal is assigned, the operation mode follows the ON/OFF
state of the X65 signal.

182 9. (D) Operation Command and Frequency Command

9.1 Operation mode selection
 NOTE
• The priority of Pr.79 and Pr.340 and signals is as follows: Pr.79 > X12 > X66 > X65 > X16 > Pr.340. 1
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.184 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

2
Parameters referred to
Pr.15 Jog frequencypage 194
Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27, Pr.232 to Pr.239 multi-speed operationpage 195
Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selectionpage 128
Pr.161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selectionpage 130
3
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 250
Pr.340 Communication startup mode selectionpage 184
Pr.550 NET mode operation command source selectionpage 185
4

10

9. (D) Operation Command and Frequency Command

9.1 Operation mode selection
183
 9.2 Startup of the inverter in Network operation mode
at power-ON
When power is switched ON or when power comes back ON after an instantaneous power failure, the inverter can be started
up in the Network operation mode.
After the inverter starts up in the Network operation mode, parameter writing and operation can be commanded from programs.
Set this mode when performing communication operation using the RS-485 terminals or a communication option.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
79 Selects the operation mode.
Operation mode selection 0 0 to 4, 6, 7
D000 (Refer to page 174.)
The inverter starts up in an operation mode selected in
0
Pr.79.
1 The inverter starts up in the Network operation mode.
340 Communication startup mode
0 The inverter starts up in the Network operation mode.
D001 selection
The operation mode can be changed between the PU
10
operation mode and Network operation mode from the
operation panel.

 Selecting the operation mode for power-ON (Pr.340)

• Depending on the Pr.79 and Pr.340 settings, the operation mode at power-ON (reset) changes as described below.
Pr.340 Pr.79 Operation mode at power-ON, at
Operation mode switching
setting setting power restoration, or after a reset
0 (initial Switching among the External, PU, and NET operation modes is
External operation mode
value) enabled*1
1 PU operation mode Fixed at PU operation mode.
Switching between the External and NET operation modes is enabled.
2 External operation mode
Switching to PU operation mode is disabled.
0 (initial 3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode Operation mode switching is disabled.
value) Switching among the External, PU, and NET operation mode is
6 External operation mode
enabled during operation.
X12 (MRS) signal ON: External Switching among the External, PU, and NET operation modes is
operation mode enabled*1
7
X12 (MRS) signal OFF: External Fixed at External operation mode (forcibly switched to External
operation mode operation mode).
0 NET operation mode
1 PU operation mode
2 NET operation mode
3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode
1 6 NET operation mode Same as Pr.340 = "0".
X12 (MRS) signal ON: NET operation
mode
7
X12 (MRS) signal OFF: External
operation mode
0 NET operation mode Switching between the PU and NET operation mode is enabled.*2
1 PU operation mode Same as Pr.340 = "0".
2 NET operation mode Fixed at NET operation mode.
10 3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode Same as Pr.340 = "0".
Switching between the PU and NET operation mode is enabled during
6 NET operation mode
operation.*2
7 External operation mode Same as Pr.340 = "0".
*1 The operation mode cannot be directly changed between the PU operation mode and Network operation mode.
*2 Switching between the PU and NET operation modes is available with the PU/EXT key on the operation panel and the X65 signal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.57 Restart coasting timepage 351, page 356
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 174

184 9. (D) Operation Command and Frequency Command

9.2 Startup of the inverter in Network operation mode at power-ON
9.3 Start command source and frequency command 1
source during communication operation
2
The start and frequency commands can be given via communication using the external signals. The command source in the
PU operation mode can also be selected.

Pr. Name
Initial Setting
Description
3
value range
Communication 0 Start command source is communication.
338
operation command 0
D010
source 1 Start command source is external.
4
0 Frequency command source is communication.
1 Frequency command source is external.
339 Communication speed
0
D011 command source
2
Frequency command source is external. (When there is no external
input, the frequency command given via communication is valid, and 5
the frequency command given via terminal 2 is invalid.)
The communication option is the command source in the NET
0

2*1
operation mode.
The PU connector is the command source in the NET operation mode.
6
NET mode operation The Ethernet connector is the command source in the NET operation
550 5*2
command source 9999 mode.
D012
selection
The communication option is recognized automatically. 7
Normally, the PU connector or Ethernet connector is the command
9999
source. When the communication option is installed, the
communication option is the command source.
2*1 The PU connector is the command source in the PU operation mode. 8
3 The USB connector is the command source in the PU operation mode.
PU mode operation
551 4 The operation panel is the command source in the PU operation mode.
command source 9999
D013
selection
9999
The USB is recognized automatically.
Normally, the operation panel is the command source. When the USB 9
is connected, the USB connector is the command source.

*1 Available for the standard model only.

*2 Available for the Ethernet model only. 10
 Selection of command source in the network (NET) operation mode
(Pr.550)
• Any of the PU connector, the Ethernet connector, or the communication option can be specified for the command source
in the NET operation mode.
• For example, whether or not the communication option is installed, set Pr.550 = "2" to write parameters or give the start
and frequency commands using the PU connector through communication in the NET operation mode.

NOTE
• In the initial setting, "9999" (communication option automatic recognition) is set for Pr.550. Thus, if the communication option
is installed, parameters cannot be written or the start and frequency commands cannot be sent by communications through
the PU connector or the Ethernet connector. (Monitoring or parameter reading can be performed.)

 Selection of the command source of the PU operation mode (Pr.551)

• Any of the PU connector, operation panel, or USB connector can be specified for the command source in the PU operation
mode.
• Set Pr.551 to write parameters or execute the start and frequency commands through communication in the PU operation
mode: Pr.551 = "2" when using the PU connector, and Pr.551 = "3" or "9999" when using the USB connector.

9. (D) Operation Command and Frequency Command

9.3 Start command source and frequency command source during communication operation
185
 NOTE
• The PU operation mode has a higher priority when Pr.550 = "2" (NET mode using the PU connector) and Pr.551 = "2" (PU
mode using the PU connector). For this reason, if the communication option is not mounted, switching to the Network operation
mode is no longer possible.
• Changed setting values are enabled at power-ON or inverter reset.

• Standard model
Command source
Pr.550 Pr.551 PU connector
Operation USB Communication Remarks
setting setting Operation RS-485
panel connector option
option*1 communication
2 × × PU PU*2 NET*3
3 × PU × × NET*3
0 4 PU × × × NET*3
9999 (initial
value) PU*4 PU*4 PU*4 × NET*3
PU Switching to NET
2 × × PU*2 ×
operation mode disabled
3 × PU × NET ×
2
4 PU × × NET ×
9999 (initial
value) PU*4 PU*4 PU*4 NET ×

2 × × PU PU*2 NET*3
× With communication
NET*3 option
3 × PU ×
NET Without communication
×
option
9999 × With communication
(initial NET*3 option
value) 4 PU × ×
NET Without communication
×
option
With communication
× NET*3 option
9999 (initial
value) PU*4 PU*4 PU*4
Without communication
NET ×
option
• Ethernet model
Command source
Pr.550 Pr.551
Ethernet Communication Remarks
setting setting Operation panel USB connector
connector option
3 × PU × NET*3

0 4 PU × × NET*3
9999 (initial
value) PU*4 PU*4 × NET*3

3 × PU NET ×
4 PU × NET ×
5
9999 (initial
value) PU*4 PU*4 NET ×

× NET*3 With communication option

3 × PU Without communication
NET ×
option
9999 × NET*3 With communication option
(initial 4 PU × Without communication
value) NET ×
option
× NET*3 With communication option
9999 (initial *4 *4
value) PU PU Without communication
NET ×
option

PU: Enabled in PU operation mode, NET: Enabled in Network operation mode, ×: Not available
*1 When the enclosure surface operation panel (FR-PA07) is used.
*2 The MODBUS RTU protocol cannot be used in the PU operation mode.

186 9. (D) Operation Command and Frequency Command

9.3 Start command source and frequency command source during communication operation
*3 If the communication option is not installed, switching to the NET operation mode is not possible.
*4 When Pr.551 = "9999", the priority of the PU control source is defined as follows: USB connector > PU connector / Ethernet connector > operation
panel. 1

10

9. (D) Operation Command and Frequency Command

9.3 Start command source and frequency command source during communication operation
187
  Controllability through communication
Controllability in each operation mode
NET
Command Combined Combined operation
NET
Condition Item PU External operation operation (when the
interface operation
operation operation mode 1 mode 2 PU/Ethernet
(via option)
(Pr.79 = "3") (Pr.79 = "4") connector
is used)
Operation command
(start, stop)
○ Δ*3 Δ*3 ○ Δ*3 Δ*3
Pr.551 = "4" or
Frequency setting ○ × ○ × × ×
Pr.551 = "9999"
(USB / PU Monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
connector is not Parameter write ○ × ○ ○ × ×
connected) Parameter read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
*8 *8 *8 *8 *8
Operation Inverter reset × × × × × ×*8
panel Operation command
(start, stop) Δ*3 Δ*3 Δ*3 Δ*3 Δ*3 Δ*3
Frequency setting × × × × × ×
Other than the Monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
above
Parameter write × × × × × ×
Parameter read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
*8 *8 *8 *8 *8
Inverter reset × × × × × ×*8
Operation command
(start, stop)
○ Δ*3 Δ*3 ○ — Δ*3
Pr.551 = "2" or Frequency setting ○ × ○ ○ — ×
Pr.551 = "9999"
Monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(USB is not
connected) Parameter write ○ × ○ ○ — ×
PU Parameter read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
connector Inverter reset ○ ○ ○ ○ — ○
(operation Operation command
Δ*3 Δ*3 Δ*3 Δ*3 Δ*3 Δ*3
option)*1 (start, stop)
Frequency setting × × × × × ×
Other than the Monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
above
Parameter write × × × × × ×
Parameter read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Inverter reset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Operation command
(start, stop)
○ Δ*3 Δ*3 ○ — Δ*3
Frequency setting ○ × ○ ○ — ×
Pr.551 = "2" (PU) Monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Parameter write *5 *6 *5 *5 — ×
○ × ○ ○
Parameter read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Inverter reset ○ ○ ○ ○ — ○
Pr.551 ≠ "2" and Operation command
(start, stop)
× × × × ○*4 —
either of the
following: Frequency setting × × × × ○ —
PU • Pr.550 = "2" Monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
connector • Pr.550 = "9999"
(communication
Parameter write ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 ○ —
(RS-485)*2 Parameter read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
option is not
installed) Inverter reset × × × × ○ —
Operation (start)
× × × × — ×
command
Operation (stop)
× × × × — ×
command
Other than the Frequency setting × × × × — ×
above
Monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Parameter write × × × × — ×
Parameter read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Inverter reset × × × × — ×

188 9. (D) Operation Command and Frequency Command

9.3 Start command source and frequency command source during communication operation
 Controllability in each operation mode

Combined Combined
NET
operation
1
Command NET
Condition Item PU External operation operation (when the
interface operation
operation operation mode 1 mode 2 PU/Ethernet
(via option)
(Pr.79 = "3") (Pr.79 = "4") connector
is used) 2
Operation command
○ × × ○ × ×
(start, stop)
Frequency setting
Pr.551 = "3, 9999" Monitor
○
○
×
○
○
○
×
○
×
○
×
○
3
Parameter write ○*5 ×*6 ○ ○ ×*6 ×*6
Parameter read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
USB Inverter reset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 4
connector Operation command
× × × × × ×
(start, stop)
Frequency setting × × × × × ×
Other than the Monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5
above
Parameter write ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 ×*6
Parameter read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Inverter reset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 6
Operation command
(start, stop)
× × × × — ○*4

Frequency setting × × × × — ○*4

Pr.550 = "0, 9999" Monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7
Parameter write ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 — ○*5
Parameter read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Inverter reset × × × × ×*6 ○ 8
Option
Operation command
(start, stop) ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 —

Other than the

Frequency setting ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 —
9
Monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
above
Parameter write ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 — ○
Parameter read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Inverter reset ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 ×*6 —
10
Operation command
× × × × ○ —
(start, stop)
Pr.550 = "5" or
Frequency setting × × × × ○ —
Pr.550 = "9999"
(communication Monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
option is not Parameter write ×*6 × ×*6 ×*6 ○*5 —
installed) Parameter read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Ethernet Inverter reset × × × × ○*7 —
connector Operation command
× × × × — ×
(start, stop)
Frequency setting × × × × — ×
Other than the Monitor ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
above
Parameter write × × × × — ×*6
Parameter read ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Inverter reset × × × × — ×
External Operation command *4
(start, stop)
× ○ ○ × × ×*4
control
—
circuit Frequency setting × ○ Δ*8 ○ ×*4 ×*4
terminal Inverter reset ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○: Controllable, ×: Uncontrollable, Δ: Partially controllable, —: No function
*1 Operation when the enclosure surface operation panel (FR-PA07) is used.
*2 RS-485 communication via PU connector
*3 Only PU stop is enabled. "PS" is displayed on the operation panel during PU stop. The operation follows the Pr.75 Reset selection/
disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection setting. (Refer to page 128.)
*4 The operation follows the Pr.338 Communication operation command source and Pr.339 Communication speed command source
settings. (Refer to page 185.)
*5 Writing of some parameters may be disabled by the Pr.77 Parameter write selection setting and the operating condition. (Refer to page 135.)

9. (D) Operation Command and Frequency Command

9.3 Start command source and frequency command source during communication operation
189
 *6 Some parameters are write-enabled independently of the operation mode and command source presence/absence. Writing is also enabled when
Pr.77 = "2". (Refer to page 135.) Parameter clear is disabled.
*7 At occurrence of communication error, the inverter cannot be reset.
*8 The inverter can be reset by using the multi-speed operation function and analog input (terminal 4).

 Operation when a communication error occurs

• Standard model
Operation in each operation mode at error occurrences
Combined Combined NET
NET
Fault type Condition External operation operation operation
PU operation operation
operation mode 1 mode 2 (via PU
(via option)*4
(Pr.79 = "3") (Pr.79 = "4") connector)*4
Inverter fault — Stop
Stop/ Stop/
Pr.551 = "2" Continued — Continued
continued*2 continued*2
Pr.551 ≠ "2" and
either of the
Communication following:
error at PU • Pr.550 = "2" Stop/
connector Continued —
• Pr.550 = "9999" continued*2
(communication
option is not
installed)
Other than the above Continued — Continued
Communication Stop/ Stop/
Pr.551 = "3, 9999" Continued Continued
error at USB continued*2 continued*2
connector Other than the above Continued
Communication Stop/
error at Pr.550 = "0, 9999" Continued —
continued*4
communication
Other than the above Continued
option
• Ethernet model
Operation in each operation mode at error occurrences
Combined Combined NET
NET
Fault type Condition External operation operation operation
PU operation operation
operation mode 1 mode 2 (via Ethernet
(via option)*4
(Pr.79 = "3") (Pr.79 = "4") connector)*4
Inverter fault — Stop
Communication Stop/ Stop/
Pr.551 = "3, 9999" Continued Continued
error at USB continued*2 continued*2
connector Other than the above Continued
Pr.550 = "5" or
Communication Pr.550 = "9999" Stop/
Continued —
error at Ethernet (communication continued*2
connector option is not installed)
Other than the above Continued — Continued
Communication Stop/
error at Pr.550 = "0, 9999" Continued —
continued*4
communication
option Other than the above Continued

*1 Selectable with Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection.

*2 Selectable with Pr.122 PU communication check time interval, Pr.548 USB communication check time interval, Pr.1431 Ethernet signal
loss detection function selection, Pr.1432 Ethernet communication check time interval, and Pr.1457 Extended setting for Ethernet
signal loss detection function selection.
*3 In the PU JOG operation mode, operation always stops when the PU is disconnected. The operation of PU disconnection (E.PUE) follows the
Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection setting.
*4 The operation depends on the communication option setting.

 Selecting the command interface in the Network operation mode (Pr.338,

Pr.339)
• Selecting a command interface is required for the following two types of commands: the operation command using the start
signals and the signals related to the inverter function selection, and the speed command using signals related to the
frequency setting.

190 9. (D) Operation Command and Frequency Command

9.3 Start command source and frequency command source during communication operation
 • The following table shows the command interface for each function in the Network operation mode, determined by the
parameter settings: an external terminal or a communication interface (PU connector, Ethernet connector, or
communication option).
1

Pr.338 Communication operation command source 0: NET 1: EXT

Pr.339 Communication speed command source

0: 1: 2: 0: 1: 2: Remarks 2
NET EXT EXT NET EXT EXT
Frequency setting through communication NET — NET NET — NET
Terminal 2
Terminal 4
—
—
EXT
EXT
— —
—
EXT
EXT
—
3
Low-speed operation command/Remote setting
RL*1 (setting clear)/Stop-on-contact selection 0
NET EXT NET EXT
Pr.59 = "0" (multi-speed), Pr.59
RM*1
Middle-speed operation command/Remote
setting (deceleration)
NET EXT NET EXT ≠ "0" (remote), Pr.270 ="1" (stop- 4
on-contact)
High-speed operation command/ Remote setting
RH*1 (acceleration)
NET EXT NET EXT

RT*1
Second function selection/ Stop-on-contact
NET EXT
Pr.270 = "1" (stop-on-contact) 5
selection 1
AU*1 Terminal 4 input selection — Combined — Combined
JOG*1 Jog operation selection — EXT
OH*1 External thermal relay input EXT
6
REX*1 15-speed selection NET EXT NET EXT Pr.59 ="0" (multi-speed)
*1 Inverter run enable EXT
X10
X12 *1 PU operation external interlock EXT
7
X14*1 PID control valid NET EXT NET EXT
*1 Brake opening completion NET EXT
BRI
X16*1 PU/External operation switchover EXT
8
X18*1 V/F switchover NET EXT
Output stop Combined EXT Pr.79 ≠ "7"
MRS*1 Pr.79 = "7". 9
PU operation interlock EXT
When X12 signal is not assigned.
STP
Start self-holding selection — EXT
(STOP)*1
10
MC*1 Control mode switchover NET EXT
TL*1 Torque limit selection NET EXT
*1 NET EXT
JOG2
X37*1 Traverse function selection NET EXT
TRG*1 Trace trigger input Combined EXT
TRC*1 Trace sampling start/end Combined EXT
Pr.414 = "1": Valid when there is
SQ*1 Sequence start EXT or NET EXT external or network input.
Pr.414 = "2": External.
X51*1 Fault clear Combined EXT
STF*1 Forward rotation command NET EXT
*1 Reverse rotation command NET EXT
STR
*1 Inverter reset EXT
RES
X65*1 PU/NET operation switchover EXT
*1 External/NET operation switchover EXT
X66
*1 Command source switchover EXT
X67
*1 PID P control switchover NET EXT NET EXT
X72
*1 Emergency stop Combined EXT
X92
*1 Use Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to an input terminal. (Refer to page 283.)

[Explanation of Terms in Table]

EXT: External terminal only
NET: Communication interface only
Combined: Either external terminal or communication interface
—: Neither external terminal nor communication interface

9. (D) Operation Command and Frequency Command

9.3 Start command source and frequency command source during communication operation
191
 NOTE
• The communication interface selection is determined by the setting of Pr.550 and Pr.551.
• The settings of Pr.338 and Pr.339 can be changed during operation when Pr.77 = "2". Note that the changed setting is applied
after the inverter has stopped. Until the inverter has stopped, the previous setting of the interface for the operation command
and the speed command in the Network operation mode is valid.

 Changing the command interface using a signal input via external

terminal (X67 signal)
• In the Network operation mode, the command interface for the operation command and the speed command can be
changed using the Command source switchover (X67) signal. This method may be useful to use both external terminal
and communication interface by using a different interface according to the command type.
• For the X67 signal, set "67" to any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.184 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the
function to a control terminal.
• When the X67 signal is OFF, the command interface for the operation command and the speed command is the control
terminal.
X67 signal state Interface for the operation command Interface for the speed command
Signal not assigned
Determined by Pr.338 setting Determined by Pr.339 setting
ON
OFF Control terminal only

NOTE
• The ON/OFF state of the X67 signal is applied only during a stop. When the terminals are switched during operation, the ON/
OFF state is reflected after a stop.
• When the X67 is OFF, a reset via communication is disabled.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.184 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.59 Remote function selectionpage 165
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 174

192 9. (D) Operation Command and Frequency Command

9.3 Start command source and frequency command source during communication operation
9.4 Reverse rotation prevention selection 1

This function can prevent reverse rotation fault resulting from the incorrect input of the start signal.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
2
0 Both forward and reverse rotations allowed
78 Reverse rotation
0 1 Reverse rotation disabled
D020 prevention selection
2 Forward rotation disabled 3
• Set this parameter to limit the motor rotation to only one direction.
• This parameter is valid for all of the RUN key of the operation panel, the start signals (STF, STR signals) via external
terminals, and the forward and reverse rotation commands through communication. 4

10

9. (D) Operation Command and Frequency Command

9.4 Reverse rotation prevention selection
193
 9.5 JOG operation
The frequency and acceleration/deceleration time for JOG operation can be set.
JOG operation can be used for conveyor positioning, test operation, etc.
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
15
Jog frequency 5 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency for JOG operation.
D200
Set the motor acceleration/deceleration time during JOG operation.
The acceleration/deceleration time is a period of time that the
16 Jog acceleration/ inverter takes to increase/decrease the output frequency to the
0.5 s 0 to 3600 s frequency set in Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference
F002 deceleration time
frequency*1.
The acceleration/deceleration times cannot be set separately.
*1 60 Hz is initially set in Pr.20 in Group 1, and 50 Hz in Group 2. (Refer to page 82).

 JOG operation by inputting signals (JOG signal and JOG2 signal)

• Operation can be started and stopped by the start signals (STF and STR signals) when the Jog operation selection (JOG)
signal or Jog operation selection 2 (JOG2) signal is ON. (For the operation method, refer to page 45.)
• The JOG signal can be input only via a control terminal. For the JOG signal, set "5" to any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.184
(Input terminal function selection)to assign the function to a control terminal.
• The JOG2 signal can be input via a control terminal or via communication. For the JOG2 signal, set "30" to any parameter
from Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to a control terminal.
• Use the JOG acceleration/deceleration time function (Pr.16) to set the acceleration/deceleration time for JOG operation.
Output frequency(Hz)
Pr.20
Pr.15 Forward
setting range rotation
Reverse Time
rotation
Pr.16

JOG/JOG2 signal ON

Forward rotation STF ON

Reverse rotation STR ON

 JOG operation using the operation panel

• When the operation panel is in the JOG operation mode, the motor jogs only while a key for start command is pressed.
(For the operation method, refer to page 46.)

NOTE
• The reference frequency during acceleration/deceleration depends on the Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern
selection setting. (Refer to page 163.)
• The Pr.15 setting should be equal to or higher than the Pr.13 Starting frequency setting.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• During JOG operation, the second acceleration/deceleration function using the RT signal is disabled. (Other second functions
are enabled (refer to page 289).)
• When Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "4", JOG operation is started by one push of the RUN key on the operation panel
and stopped by the STOP/RESET key.
• This function is invalid when Pr.79 = "3".

Parameters referred to
Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 169
Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time incrementspage 158
Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selectionpage 163
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 174
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283

194 9. (D) Operation Command and Frequency Command

9.5 JOG operation
9.6 Operation by multi-speed setting 1

Use these parameters to change among pre-set operation speeds with the terminals. The speeds are pre-set with parameters.
Any speed can be selected by simply turning ON/OFF the contact signals (RH, RM, RL, and REX signals). 2
Initial value*1
Pr. Name Setting range Description
Gr.1 Gr.2
4
Multi-speed setting (high speed) 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Sets the frequency when RH is ON.
3
D301
5 Multi-speed setting (middle
30 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Sets the frequency when RM is ON.
D302 speed)
6 4
Multi-speed setting (low speed) 10 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Sets the frequency when RL is ON.
D303
24
Multi-speed setting (speed 4)
D304
25
5
Multi-speed setting (speed 5)
D305
26
Multi-speed setting (speed 6)
D306
27
6
Multi-speed setting (speed 7)
D307
232
Multi-speed setting (speed 8)
D308 7
233 Frequency from 4th speed to 15th speed can
Multi-speed setting (speed 9)
D309 be set according to the combination of the RH,
9999 0 to 590 Hz, 9999
234 RM, RL and REX signals.
D310
Multi-speed setting (speed 10)
9999: Not selected 8
235
Multi-speed setting (speed 11)
D311
236
D312
Multi-speed setting (speed 12)
9
237
Multi-speed setting (speed 13)
D313
238
D314
Multi-speed setting (speed 14)
10
239
Multi-speed setting (speed 15)
D315
*1 Gr.1 and Gr.2 are the parameter initial value groups. (Refer to page 82).

 Multi-speed setting (Pr.4 to Pr.6)

• The inverter operates at frequencies set in Pr.4 when the RH signal is ON, Pr.5 when the RM signal is ON, or Pr.6 when
the RL signal is ON.

Inverter Speed 1
Output frequency (Hz)

(High speed)

Forward rotation start STF Speed 2

(Middle speed)
Reverse rotation start STR Speed 3
(Low speed)
High speed RH
Middle speed RM Time
Low speed RL ON
RH
SD ON
Switch RM
RL ON

NOTE
• In the initial setting, if two or more speed switches (signals) are simultaneously turned ON, priority is given to the switch (signal)
for the lower speed. For example, when both RH and RM signals turn ON, the RM signal (Pr.5) has the higher priority.
• The RH, RM and RL signals are assigned to the terminals RH, RM and RL, respectively, in the initial status. To assign each
signal to a different terminal, set "0" (RL signal), "1" (RM signal), or "2" (RH signal) in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal
function selection).

9. (D) Operation Command and Frequency Command

9.6 Operation by multi-speed setting
195
  Multi-speed setting for 4th speed or more (Pr.24 to Pr.27, Pr.232 to Pr.239)
• The frequency from 4th speed to 15th speed can be set according to the combination of the RH, RM, RL, and REX signals.
Set the frequencies in Pr.24 to Pr.27, Pr.232 to Pr.239. (In the initial status, 4th to 15th speeds are invalid.)
• To input the REX signal, set "8" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the
function.

Output frequency
Speed 10
Speed 5 Speed 11
Speed 6 Speed 12
Forward Speed 9
Speed 13
rotation Inverter Speed 4 Speed 8
STF Speed 14

(Hz)
Multi-speed selection

Speed 7 Speed 15
REX
RH Time
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
RM RH
RL ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
RM
SD ON ON ON ON ON ON
RL
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
REX
∗1

*1 When the RH, RM and RL signals are OFF and the REX signal is ON while "9999" is set to Pr.232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8), the inverter
operates at the frequency set in Pr.6.

NOTE
• The priority of the frequency commands given by the external signals are as follows: JOG operation > multi-speed operation
> terminal 4 analog input > terminal 2 analog input. (For details on frequency commands given by analog input, refer to page
273.)
• The input compensation of multi-speed setting is enabled when the inverter is in the External operation mode or PU/External
combined operation mode (Pr.79 = "3 or 4").
• Multi-speed parameters can also be set during PU operation or External operation.
• The Pr.24 to Pr.27 and Pr.232 to Pr.239 settings have no priority among them.
• When Pr.59 Remote function selection ≠ "0", the multi-speed setting is invalid since the RH, RM, and RL signals are for
remote setting.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.15 Jog frequencypage 194
Pr.59 Remote function selectionpage 165
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 174
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283

196 9. (D) Operation Command and Frequency Command

9.6 Operation by multi-speed setting
 CHAPTER 10
CHAPTER 10 (H) Protective Function
Parameters 4

10.1 Motor overheat protection (electronic thermal O/L relay) .....................................................................................198

10.2 Cooling fan operation selection ............................................................................................................................203
6
10.3 Earth (ground) fault detection at start ...................................................................................................................204
10.4 Inverter output fault detection enable/disable selection........................................................................................205
10.5 Initiating a protective function ...............................................................................................................................206
7
10.6 I/O phase loss protection selection.......................................................................................................................207
10.7 Retry function........................................................................................................................................................208
10.8 Limiting the output frequency (maximum/minimum frequency) ............................................................................211
8
10.9 Avoiding machine resonance points (frequency jump) .........................................................................................212
10.10 Stall prevention operation .....................................................................................................................................214
10.11 Load characteristics fault detection ......................................................................................................................219
9
10.12 Motor overspeeding detection ..............................................................................................................................224

10

197
 10 (H) Protective Function Parameters
Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page
To protect the motor from overheating Electronic thermal O/L relay P.H000, P.H010 Pr.9, Pr.51 198
Cooling fan operation
To extend the life of the cooling fan P.H100 Pr.244 203
selection
Earth (ground) fault detection
To detect an earth (ground) fault at start P.H101 Pr.249 204
at start
Inverter output fault
To detect a fault on the output side of
detection enable/disable P.H182 Pr.631 205
the inverter
selection
To initiate an inverter protective
Fault initiation P.H103 Pr.997 206
function
To disable the I/O phase loss protective
I/O phase loss P.H200, P.H201 Pr.251, Pr.872 207
function
To restart using the retry function when
Retry operation P.H300 to P.H303 Pr.65, Pr.67 to Pr.69 208
the protective function is activated
To set the upper and lower limits of the Maximum/minimum
P.H400 to P.H402 Pr.1, Pr.2, Pr.18 211
output frequency frequency
To prevent the motor from
Speed limit P.H410 to P.H412 Pr.807 to Pr.809 120
overspeeding under torque control
To avoid overdriving the motor during
Overdriving prevention P.H416, P.H417 Pr.285, Pr.853 109
speed control
To operate avoiding resonance points Frequency jump P.H420 to P.H425 Pr.31 to Pr.36 212
P.H500, P.H501,
Pr.22, Pr.23, Pr.48,
To limit the output current so that the P.H600, P.H610,
Pr.66, Pr.154,
inverter protective function does not Stall prevention P.H611, P.H630, 214
Pr.156, Pr.157,
activate P.H631, P.M430,
Pr.277, Pr.858
P.T040
P.H500, P.H700 to
Pr.22, Pr.801,
P.H704, P.H710,
Pr.803, Pr.810,
To limit the torque during speed control Torque limit P.H720, P.H721, 100
Pr.812 to Pr.817,
P.H730, P.T040,
Pr.858, Pr.874
P.G210
Load characteristics fault P.H520 to P.H527,
To monitor for load faults Pr.1480 to Pr.1492 219
detection P.H531 to P.H535
To shut off output if the operation panel
Overspeed detection level P.H800 Pr.374 224
disconnects

10.1 Motor overheat protection (electronic thermal O/L

relay)
Set the current of the electronic thermal relay function to protect the motor from overheating. Such settings provide the optimum
protective characteristic considering the low cooling capability of the motor during low-speed operation.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

9 Inverter rated
Electronic thermal O/L relay 0 to 500 A Set the rated motor current.
H000 current*1
Enabled when the RT signal is ON.
51 Second electronic thermal O/L 0 to 500 A
9999 Set the rated motor current.
H010 relay
9999 Second electronic thermal O/L relay invalid
*1 The initial value for the FR-E820-0050(0.75K) or lower, the FR-E840-0026(0.75K) or lower, and the FR-E860-0017(0.75K) is set to the 85% of
the inverter rated current.

 Electronic thermal O/L relay operation characteristic for induction motor

(Pr.9)
• This function detects the overload (overheat) of the motor and shut off the inverter output by stopping the operation of the
transistor at the inverter output side.

198 10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.1 Motor overheat protection (electronic thermal O/L relay)
 • Set the rated current (A) of the motor in Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. (If the motor has both 50 Hz and 60 Hz ratings
and the Pr.3 Base frequency is set to 60 Hz, set to 1.1 times the 60 Hz rated motor current.)
• Set "0" in Pr.9 to avoid activating the electronic thermal relay function; for example, when using an external thermal relay
1
for the motor.
(Note that the output transistor protection of the inverter is activated. (E.THT))
• When using the Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor, set the constant-torque motor in Pr.71 Applied motor referring
2
to page 294. (This setting enables the 100% constant-torque characteristic in the low-speed range.)
Pr. 9 = 50% setting
of inverter rating*1.2
Pr. 9 = 100% setting
of inverter rating*1.2
3
Operation time (min)
Minute display in

70 30Hz or more*3
30Hz
this region

or more*3 20Hz
4
Operation region
20Hz 10Hz Region on the right of
60 characteristic curve
10Hz
6Hz Non-operation region
6Hz
0.5Hz Region on the left of
50 0.5Hz characteristic curve
Characteristic when
electronic thermal relay 5
Second display in this region

240 function for motor

protection is turned off
Operation time (s)

(When Pr. 9 setting is 0(A))

180
6
120 Range for
the transistor
protection*4
60
7
52.5% 105%
50 100 150 230
Inverter output power (%)
(% to the inverter rated current) 8
*1 When setting Pr.9 to a value (current value) of 50% of the inverter rated current
*2 The % value denotes the percentage to the rated inverter current. It is not the percentage to the rated motor current.
*3 When the electronic thermal relay function dedicated to the Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor is set, this characteristic curve applies to
operation at 6 Hz or higher. (For selection of the operation characteristic, refer to page 294.) 9
*4 Transistor protection is activated depending on the temperature of the heat sink. The protection may be activated even with less than 150%
depending on the operating conditions.

NOTE
• The internal accumulated heat value of the electronic thermal relay function is reset to the initial value by the inverter's power
10
reset or reset signal input. Avoid unnecessary reset and power-OFF.
• Install an external thermal relay (OCR) between the inverter and motors to operate several motors, a multi-pole motor or a
dedicated motor with one inverter. When setting an external thermal relay, note that the current indicated on the motor rating
plate is affected by the line-to-line leakage current. The cooling effect of the motor drops during low-speed operation. Use a
motor with built-in thermal protector. (For details of the line-to-line leakage current, refer to the Instruction Manual
(Connection).)
• When the difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and the set value is small, the protective characteristics
of the electronic thermal relay function will be deteriorated. Use an external thermal relay in such cases.
• A dedicated motor cannot be protected by an electronic thermal O/L relay. Use an external thermal relay.
• The transistor protection thermal O/L relay is activated early when the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting is increased.

 Electronic thermal O/L relay when using PM motor (Pr.9)

• This function detects the overload (overheat) of the motor and shut off the inverter output by stopping the operation of the
transistor at the inverter output side.
• Set the rated current (A) of the motor in Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay.
• Set "0" in Pr.9 to avoid activating the electronic thermal relay function; for example, when using an external thermal relay
for the motor.
(Note that the output transistor protection of the inverter is activated. (E.THT))

10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.1 Motor overheat protection (electronic thermal O/L relay)
199
 • Operational characteristic of the electronic thermal relay function
70
operation time [min]
Minute display in

2000r/min
Thermal relay

(133.33Hz) or lower
this region

60

3000r/min
50 (200Hz)

240

2000r/min
Thermal relay operation time [s]
Second display in this region

(133.33Hz) or lower
180
3000r/min
(200Hz)
120
Range for the
transistor
protection
60

0
80 100 120 140 160 200 220 240 260 280 300
Current [%] ∗∗
Protective function activated area: the area right of the characteristic curve
Normal operation area: the area left of the characteristic curve

*1 The % value denotes the percentage to the rated motor current.

NOTE
• The internal accumulated heat value of the electronic thermal relay function is reset to the initial value by the inverter's power
reset or reset signal input. Avoid unnecessary reset and power-OFF.
• The transistor protection thermal O/L relay is activated early when the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting is increased.

 Set two types of electronic thermal O/L relays (Pr.51)

MC
M

MC
U
V M
W

RT
SD

• These settings are used when rotating two motors with different rated current separately by a single inverter. (When
rotating two motors together, use an external thermal relay.)
• Set the rated motor current for the second motor in Pr.51 Second electronic thermal O/L relay.

200 10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.1 Motor overheat protection (electronic thermal O/L relay)
 • While the RT signal is ON, the setting values of Pr.51 is referred to provide thermal protection. (While the RT signal is ON,
the setting values of Pr.9 is referred to provide thermal protection under PM sensorless vector control.)
1
Pr.450 Pr.9 Pr.51 RT signal OFF RT signal ON
Second applied Electronic thermal Second electronic thermal Second Second
First motor First motor
motor O/L relay O/L relay monitor monitor
9999 × × × × 2
9999 0 0 × × × ×
0.01 to 500 (0.1 to 3600) × Δ × ○
9999 ○ × ○ × 3
9999 Other than 0 0 ○ × Δ ×
0.01 to 500 (0.1 to 3600) ○ Δ Δ ○
9999 × × × ×
Other than 9999 0 0 × × × × 4
0.01 to 500 (0.1 to 3600) × Δ × ○
9999 ○ Δ Δ ○
Other than 9999 Other than 0 0
0.01 to 500 (0.1 to 3600)
○
○
×
Δ
Δ
Δ
×
○
5
○: Values are accumulated by using the output current.
Δ: Values are accumulated by assuming the output
current is 0 A (cooling processing). 6
×: Electronic thermal O/L relay does not operate.

NOTE
• The RT signal is the Second function selection signal. The RT signal also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 289.) 7
• For the RT signal, set "3" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function.

 Electronic thermal O/L relay pre-alarm (TH) and warning signal (THP 8
signal)
• If the accumulated electronic thermal value reaches 85% of the Pr.9 or Pr.51 setting, electronic thermal O/L relay function 9
pre-alarm (TH) is displayed and the electronic thermal O/L relay pre-alarm (THP) signal is output. If the value reaches
100% of the Pr.9 setting, the motor thermal protection (E.THM/E.THT) is activated to shut off the inverter output. The
inverter output is not shut off with the TH display. 10
• For the terminal used for the THP signal output, set "8" (positive logic) or "108" (negative logic) in any parameter from
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
Electronic thermal 100%
relay function 85%
operation level

Electronic thermal O/L

relay alarm (THP) OFF ON ON
Time

NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 External thermal relay input (OH signal, E.OHT)

Thermal relay protector
Inverter
Motor
U
V M
W
OH
SD

External thermal relay input connection diagram

• The External thermal relay input (OH) signal is used when using the external thermal relay or the thermal protector built
into the motor to protect the motor from overheating.
• When the thermal relay is activated, the inverter output is shut off by the external thermal relay (E.OHT).

10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.1 Motor overheat protection (electronic thermal O/L relay)
201
 • To input the OH signal, set "7" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the
function.

NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.71 Applied motorpage 294
Pr.72 PWM frequency selectionpage 146
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 250

202 10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.1 Motor overheat protection (electronic thermal O/L relay)
10.2 Cooling fan operation selection 1

A cooling fan is built into the inverter can be controlled.

2
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
Cooling fan ON/OFF control disabled. (The cooling fan is always ON at
0 power ON.)
A cooling fan operates at power ON. 3
244 Cooling fan
1 Cooling fan ON/OFF control enabled.
H100 operation selection
The fan is always ON while the inverter is running. During a stop, the
1
inverter status is monitored and the fan switches ON/OFF according to
the temperature. 4
 Cooling fan always ON (Pr.244 = "0")
• When Pr.244 = "0", the cooling fan operates at power ON. If the fan stops at this time, the inverter finds that the fan 5
operation is faulty and the indication of the "FN" (Fan alarm) is displayed on the operation panel. The Fan fault output (FAN)
signal and the Alarm (LF) signal are output.
• For the terminal used for the FAN signal output, set "25" (positive logic) or "125" (negative logic) in any parameter from 6
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection), and for LF signal, set "98" (positive logic) or "198" (negative
logic)".

 Cooling fan operation control (Pr.244 = "1" (initial value)) 7

• The cooling fan operation is controlled when Pr.244 = "1". When the inverter is running, the cooling fan operates constantly.
When the inverter is stopped, the cooling fan operates depending on the temperature of the inverter heat sink. If the fan
stops although it meets the conditions for running, fan operation is regarded as faulty, "FN" is displayed on the operation 8
panel, and the FAN signal and LF signals are output.

 Cooling fan operation command (Y206) signal 9

• The Cooling fan operation command (Y206) signal can be output when the inverter cooling fan meets the conditions for
running. The function can be used when the fan installed on the enclosure is synchronized with the inverter cooling fan.
• The Y206 signal indicates the operating command condition of the inverter cooling fan depending on the power supply ON/ 10
OFF or the Pr.244 settings. The signal does not indicate the actual operation of the cooling fan. (The signal is output even
if the cooling fan is stopped due to a fault.)
• To use the Y206 signal, set "206" (positive logic) or "306" (negative logic) in one of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal
function selection) to assign function to an output terminal.

NOTE
• The cooling fan is installed on the FR-E820-0080(1.5K) or higher, the FR-E840-0040(1.5K) or higher, and FR-E860-
0027(1.5K) of higher.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 250

10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.2 Cooling fan operation selection
203
 10.3 Earth (ground) fault detection at start
Select whether to make earth (ground) fault detection at start. When enabled, earth (ground) fault detection is performed
immediately after a start signal input to the inverter.
Initial value*1
Pr. Name Setting range Description
Gr.1 Gr.2
Earth (ground) fault detection at start
0
249 Earth (ground) fault detection at disabled
0 1
H101 start Earth (ground) fault detection at start
1
enabled
*1 Gr.1 and Gr.2 are the parameter initial value groups. (Refer to page 82).
• If a ground fault is detected at start while Pr.249 = "1", the output-side earth (ground) fault overcurrent (E.GF) is displayed
and the outputs are shut off.
• When the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting is high, enable the ground fault detection at start.

NOTE
• Because the detection is performed at start, output is delayed for approx. 20 ms every start.
• Use Pr.249 to enable/disable ground fault detection at operation start.

204 10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.3 Earth (ground) fault detection at start
10.4 Inverter output fault detection enable/disable 1
selection
2
Faults occurred on the output side (load side) of the inverter (inverter output fault (E.10)) can be detected during operation.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
631 Inverter output fault detection
0
0 Output fault detection disabled 3
H182 enable/disable selection 1 Output fault detection enabled

10

10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.4 Inverter output fault detection enable/disable selection
205
 10.5 Initiating a protective function
A fault (protective function) is initiated by setting the parameter.
This function can be used to check how the system operates at activation of a protective function.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

The setting range is the same with the one for fault data codes of the
16 to 253 inverter (which can be read through communication). Written data is not
997 stored in EEPROM.
Fault initiation 9999
H103
The read value is always "9999". The protective function is not
9999
activated with this setting.
• To initiate a fault (protective function), set the assigned number of the protective function to be initiated in Pr.997.
• The value set in Pr.997 is not stored in EEPROM.
• When the protective function is activated, the inverter output is shut off and the inverter displays the fault indication and
outputs a Fault (ALM) signal.
• The latest fault in the fault history is displayed while the fault initiation function is in operation. After a reset, the fault history
goes back to the previous status. (The protective function generated by the fault is not saved in the fault history.)
• Perform inverter reset to cancel the protective function.
• For the selectable parameter by Pr.997 and the corresponding protective functions, refer to the Instruction Manual
(Maintenance).

NOTE
• If a protective function is already operating, no fault can be activated by Pr.997.
• The retry function is disabled when a protective function has been initiated by the fault initiation function.
• If a fault occurs after a protective function has been activated, the protective function indication does not change. The fault is
not saved in the fault history either.

206 10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.5 Initiating a protective function
10.6 I/O phase loss protection selection 1

The output phase loss protection function, which stops the inverter output if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's
output side (load side) is lost, can be disabled. 2
The input phase loss protective function on the inverter input side (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) can be disabled.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 3

251 Output phase loss 0 Output phase loss protection disabled
1
H200 protection selection 1 Output phase loss protection enabled
872
H201
Input phase loss
protection selection
1
0
1
Input phase loss protection disabled
Input phase loss protection enabled
4
 Output phase loss protection selection (Pr.251)
• When Pr.251 is set to "0", output phase loss protection (E.LF) becomes invalid. 5
 Input phase loss protection selection (Pr.872)
• When Pr.872 is set to "1", Input phase loss (E.ILF) protection is activated if one of three phases is detected to be lost for 6
1 second continuously.

NOTE
• When several motors are connected, output phase loss cannot be detected even if the wiring to one motor loses phase. 7
• In the case of R/L1, S/L2 phase loss, the input phase loss protection does not operate, and the inverter output is shut off.
• If an input phase loss continues for a long time, the lives of converter section and capacitor of the inverter become shorter.
• If the load is light or during a stop, lost phase cannot be detected because detection is performed based on the fluctuation of
bus voltage. Large unbalanced phase-to-phase voltage of the three-phase power supply may also cause input phase loss
8
protection (E.ILF).
• Phase loss cannot be detected during regeneration load operation.
9
Parameters referred to
Pr.261 Power failure stop selectionpage 362
10

10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.6 I/O phase loss protection selection
207
 10.7 Retry function
This function allows the inverter to reset itself and restart at activation of the protective function (fault indication). The retry
generating protective functions can also be selected.
When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected (Pr.57 Restart coasting time ≠ "9999"), the
restart operation is also performed after a retry operation as well as after an instantaneous power failure. (For restart operation,
refer to page 351 and page 356 for selection.)

Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
65
Retry selection 0 0 to 5 Faults which trigger the retry operation can be selected.
H300
0 The retry function disabled.
Set the number of retries at a fault occurrence.
1 to 10
67 Number of retries at fault A fault output is not provided during the retry operation.
0
H301 occurrence Set the number of retries at a fault occurrence. (The setting value minus
101 to 110 100 is the number of retries.)
A fault output is provided during the retry operation.
68 Set the time delay from when an inverter fault occurs until the retry
Retry waiting time 1s 0.1 to 600 s
H302 operation starts.
69 Retry count display Setting "0" clears the retry success counter ("retry success" means that
0 0
H303 erase the inverter successfully restarts).

 Setting the retry function (Pr.67, Pr.68)

• When the inverter protective function is operating (fault indication), the retry function automatically cancels (resets) the
protective function after the time set in Pr.68. The retry function then restarts the operation from the starting frequency.
• The retry function is enabled when the Pr.67 setting is other than "0". Set the number of retries at activation of the protective
function in Pr.67.
Pr.67 setting Fault output during retry operation Retry count
0 — No retry function
1 to 10 Not available 1 to 10 times
101 to 110 Available 1 to 10 times

• When retries fail consecutively more than the number of times set in Pr.67, a retry count excess (E.RET) occurs, resulting
in an inverter retries. (Refer to the Retry failure example.)
• Use Pr.68 to set the waiting time from a protective function activation to a retry in the range of 0.1 to 600 s.
• During retry operation, the During retry (Y64) signal is ON. For the Y64 signal, set "64" (positive logic) or "164" (negative
logic) in any parameter from Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function.

 Retry count check (Pr.69)

• Reading the Pr.69 value provides the cumulative number of successful restart times made by retries. The cumulative count
in Pr.69 increases by 1 when a retry is successful. Retry is regarded as successful when normal operation continues
without a fault for the Pr.68 setting multiplied by four or longer (3.1 seconds at the shortest). (When retry is successful, the
cumulative number of retry failures is cleared.)

208 10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.7 Retry function
 • Writing "0" in Pr.69 clears the cumulative count.
Retry success 1
Pr. 68 × 4
Pr.68 (If it is below 3.1s, 3.1s is set.) Pr.68 Pr.68 Pr.68
Inverter
output
Inverter
output 2
frequency frequency
0 0 Time
Time
Retry start
Fault occurrence
Success count + 1 First
retry
Second
retry
Third
retry Retry failure
3
Fault Fault Fault (E.RET)
Retry success count occurrence occurrence occurrence
Fault signal ON

Y64 ON
(ALM)
Y64 ON ON ON
4
Retry success example Retry failure example

 Selecting retry generating faults (Pr.65) 5

• Using Pr.65, the fault that causes a retry is selectable. The faults not described in the following table do not enable the
retry function. (For the details of faults, refer to the Instruction Manual (Maintenance).) ● indicates the faults selected for
retry.
6
Retry- Pr.65 setting Retry- Pr.65 setting
triggering
fault
0 1 2 3 4 5
triggering
fault
0 1 2 3 4 5 7
E.OC1 ● ● ● ● ● E.MB6 ● ●
E.OC2 ● ● ● ● E.MB7 ● ●
E.OC3 ● ● ● ● ● E.OS ● ● 8
E.OV1 ● ● ● ● E.OSD ● ●
E.OV2 ● ● ● ● E.CDO ● ●
E.OV3
E.THM
●
●
● ● ● E.USB
E.ILF
●
●
●
●
9
E.THT ● E.PID ● ●
E.UVT ● ● E.SOT ● ● ● ● ●
E.BE ● ● E.LUP ● ● 10
E.GF ● ● E.LDN ● ●
E.OHT ● E.EHR ● ●
E.OLT ● ● E.10 ● ●
E.OPT ● ●
E.OP1 ● ●
E.PE ● ●
E.MB4 ● ●
E.MB5 ● ●

NOTE
• Use the retry function only when the operation can be resumed after resetting a protective function activation. Making a retry
against the protective function, which is activated by an unknown condition, will lead the inverter and motor to be faulty. Identify
and remove the cause of the protective function activation before restarting the operation.
• If the retry function operates during PU operations, the operating conditions (forward/reverse rotation) are stored; and
operations resume after retry reset.
• Only the fault details for the first fault that occurred during retry are stored in the fault history.
• The reset by the retry function does not clear the accumulated data of the electronic thermal O/L relay, regenerative brake
duty, etc. (This is different from power supply reset or reset by RES signal.)
• When the parameter storage device fault (E.PE) is occurring and reading of the retry-function-related parameters is not
possible, retry cannot operated.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.7 Retry function
209
 CAUTION
• When the retry function is set enabled, stay away from the motor and machine in the case of an output shutoff. The motor
and machine will start suddenly (after the reset time has elapsed) after the shutoff. When the retry function has been
selected, apply the CAUTION sticker(s), which are found in the Inverter Safety Guideline enclosed with the inverter, to
easily visible places.

Parameters referred to
Pr.57 Restart coasting timepage 351, page 356

210 10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.7 Retry function
10.8 Limiting the output frequency (maximum/minimum 1
frequency)
2
Motor speed can be limited. Clamp the upper and lower limits of the output frequency.

1
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
3
Maximum frequency 120 Hz 0 to 120 Hz Set the upper limit of the output frequency.
H400
2
Minimum frequency 0 Hz 0 to 120 Hz Set the lower limit of the output frequency.
H401
18 High speed maximum
4
120 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set when operating at 120 Hz or higher.
H402 frequency

 Setting the maximum frequency (Pr.1, Pr.18) 5

• Set Pr.1 Maximum frequency to the upper limit of the output frequency. If the value of the frequency command given is
higher than the setting, the output frequency is clamped at the maximum frequency.
• To operate at a frequency higher than the 120 Hz, adjust the upper output frequency limit with Pr.18 High speed 6
maximum frequency. (When setting a frequency in Pr.18, the Pr.1 setting automatically changes to the frequency set in
Pr.18. Also, when a frequency is set in Pr.1, the Pr.18 setting automatically changes to the frequency set in Pr.1.)

Output frequency
Clamped at the
maximum frequency 7
(Hz)

Pr.1
Pr.18
8
Pr.2 Frequency setting

9
0 5, 10V
Clamped at the (4mA) (20mA)
minimum frequency

 Setting the minimum frequency (Pr.2)

• Set Pr.2 Minimum frequency to the lower limit of the output frequency. 10
• If the set frequency is Pr.2 or less, the output frequency is clamped at Pr.2 (does not fall below Pr.2).

NOTE
• To operate with a frequency higher than 60 Hz using frequency-setting analog signals, change the Pr.125 (Pr.126) (frequency
setting gain) setting. Simply changing the Pr.1 and Pr.18 settings does not enable the operation at a frequency higher than
60 Hz.
• Under Real sensorless vector control and PM sensorless vector control, the upper and lower limits are for the commanded
frequency. The final output frequency that is decided by each control may exceed the lower or upper limits.
• When Pr.15 Jog frequency is equal to or less than Pr.2, the Pr.15 setting takes precedence.
• If a jump frequency that exceeds the setting of Pr.1 (Pr.18) is set, the maximum frequency setting is the set frequency. If the
jump frequency is less than the setting of Pr.2, the jump frequency is the set frequency. (The set frequency can be equal to or
less than the frequency lower limit.) When stall prevention is activated to decrease the output frequency, the output frequency
may drop to Pr.2 or below.

CAUTION
• Note that when Pr.2 is set to any value equal to or higher than Pr.13 Starting frequency, simply turning ON the start
signal runs the motor at the frequency set in Pr.2 even if the command frequency is not given.

Parameters referred to
Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 169, page 170
Pr.15 Jog frequencypage 194
Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency, Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequencypage 273

10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.8 Limiting the output frequency (maximum/minimum frequency)
211
 10.9 Avoiding machine resonance points (frequency
jump)
When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the natural frequency of a mechanical system, these parameters allow
resonant frequencies to be jumped.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

31
Frequency jump 1A
H420
32
Frequency jump 1B
H421
33
Frequency jump 2A
H422 0 to 590 Hz, 1A to 1B, 2A to 2B, 3A to 3B are frequency jumps
9999
34 9999 9999: Function disabled
Frequency jump 2B
H423
35
Frequency jump 3A
H424
36
Frequency jump 3B
H425

 3-point frequency jump (Pr.31 to Pr.36)

• Up to three areas may be set, with the jump frequencies set to either the top or bottom point of each area.
• The settings of frequency jumps 1A, 2A, 3A are jump points, and operation is performed at these frequencies in the jump
areas.

Frequency jump
Pr.36
frequency jump (Hz)
Set frequency after

Pr.35

Pr.33
Pr.34

Pr.32
Pr.31

Input set frequency (Hz)

Example 1) To fix the frequency to 30 Hz in the range of 30 Hz to 35 Hz, set 35 Hz in Pr.34 and 30 Hz in Pr.33.
Pr.34: 35 Hz
Pr.33: 30 Hz

Example 2) To jump the frequency to 35 Hz in the range of 30 Hz to 35 Hz, set 35 Hz in Pr.33 and 30 Hz in Pr.34.

Pr.33: 35 Hz
Pr.34: 30 Hz

212 10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.9 Avoiding machine resonance points (frequency jump)
 NOTE
• During acceleration/deceleration, the frequency within the set area is valid. 1
• If the setting ranges of individual groups (1A and 1B, 2A and 2B, 3A and 3B) overlap, Parameter write error (Er1) occurs.
• If a jump frequency that exceeds the setting of Pr.1 (Pr.18) Maximum frequency is set for the 3-point frequency jump, the
maximum frequency setting is the set frequency. If the jump frequency is less than the setting of Pr.2 Minimum frequency,
the jump frequency is the set frequency. (The set frequency can be equal to or less than the frequency lower limit.)
2
Example when the frequency upper/lower limit the jump areas.

Output frequency Output frequency

Pr.32 Pr.32
3
Maximum frequency (Pr.1) Minimum frequency (Pr.2)

Pr.31 Pr.31
4
Set frequency Set frequency
Maximum frequency and frequency jump Minimum frequency and frequency jump

5
Parameters referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequency, Pr.2 Minimum frequency, Pr.18 High speed maximum frequencypage 211

10

10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.9 Avoiding machine resonance points (frequency jump)
213
 10.10 Stall prevention operation
V/F Magnetic flux

This function monitors the output current and automatically changes the output frequency to prevent the inverter from shutting
off due to overcurrent, overvoltage, etc. It can also limit the stall prevention and fast-response current limit operation during
acceleration/deceleration and power/regenerative driving.
This function is disabled under Real sensorless vector control and PM sensorless vector control.
• Stall prevention:
If the output current exceeds the stall prevention operation level, the output frequency of the inverter is automatically
changed to reduce the output current. Also, the second stall prevention function can limit the output frequency range in
which the stall prevention function is enabled.
• Fast-response current limit:
If the current exceeds the limit value, the output of the inverter is shut off to prevent an overcurrent.

Initial value*1
Pr. Name Setting range Description
Gr.1 Gr.2
0 Stall prevention operation disabled.
22 Stall prevention
150% Set the current limit at which the stall prevention operation
H500 operation level 0.1% to 400%*2 starts.
156 Stall prevention Enable/disable the stall prevention operation and the fast-
0 0 to 31, 100, 101
H501 operation selection response current limit operation.
0 Second stall prevention operation disabled.
48 Second stall prevention The stall prevention operation level can be changed using
H600 operation level
9999 0.1% to 400%*2 the RT signal.
9999 Same as Pr.22.
Stall prevention The stall operation level when running at high speeds above
0% to 200%
23 operation level the rated frequency can be reduced.
9999
H610 compensation factor at
9999 Stall prevention operation disabled at double speed.
double speed
Stall prevention
66 Set the frequency at which the stall operation level reduction
operation reduction 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
H611 starts.
starting frequency
Voltage reduction 1 Does not suppress the overvoltage protective function
154
selection during stall 1
H631 11 Suppresses the overvoltage protective function
prevention operation
Set the OL signal output start time when stall prevention is
157 0 to 25 s
OL signal output timer 0s activated.
M430
9999 No OL signal output.
277 0 Stall prevention is activated when the output current
H630 Stall prevention exceeds the stall prevention operation level.
operation current 0 1 Stall prevention is activated when the output torque (current
switchover equivalent to the torque) exceeds the stall prevention
operation level.
*1 Gr.1 and Gr.2 are the parameter initial value groups. (Refer to page 82).
*2 The upper limit of stall prevention operation is limited internally to the following.
150% (LD rating), 200% (ND rating)

214 10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.10 Stall prevention operation
 Setting of stall prevention operation level (Pr.22)
• For Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level, set the ratio 1
Output current of the output current to the inverter's rated current at which
Pr.22
the stall prevention operation is activated. Normally, use

Output frequency
this parameter in the initial setting. 2
• Stall prevention operation stops acceleration (makes
n De
io deceleration) during acceleration, makes deceleration
at ce
er
3
l le
ce Constant ra during constant speed, and stops deceleration during
Ac speed tio
n
deceleration.
Time
OL • When the stall prevention operation is performed, the
Stall prevention operation example Overload warning (OL) signal is output. 4
NOTE
• A continuous overloaded condition may activate a protective function such as motor overload trip (electronic thermal O/L relay
function) (E.THM).
5
• When Pr.156 has been set to activate the fast response current limit (initial value), the Pr.22 setting should not be higher than
170%. Such setting prevents torque generation.
• When Real sensorless vector control is selected using Pr.800 Control method selection, Pr.22 serves as the torque limit 6
level.

10

10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.10 Stall prevention operation
215
  Disabling the stall prevention operation and fast-response current limit
according to operating conditions (Pr.156)
• Referring to the following table, enable/disable the stall prevention operation and the fast-response current limit operation,
and also set the operation at OL signal output.

Fast-response Stall prevention operation selection Operation during

current limit ○: enabled stall prevention
Pr.156 setting
○: enabled ●: disabled ○: continued
●: disabled Acceleration Constant speed Deceleration ●: stopped*1
0 (initial value) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1 ● ○ ○ ○ ○
2 ○ ● ○ ○ ○
3 ● ● ○ ○ ○
4 ○ ○ ● ○ ○
5 ● ○ ● ○ ○
6 ○ ● ● ○ ○
7 ● ● ● ○ ○
8 ○ ○ ○ ● ○
9 ● ○ ○ ● ○
10 ○ ● ○ ● ○
11 ● ● ○ ● ○
12 ○ ○ ● ● ○
13 ● ○ ● ● ○
14 ○ ● ● ● ○
15 ● ● ● ● —*2
16 ○ ○ ○ ○ ●
17 ● ○ ○ ○ ●
18 ○ ● ○ ○ ●
19 ● ● ○ ○ ●
20 ○ ○ ● ○ ●
21 ● ○ ● ○ ●
22 ○ ● ● ○ ●
23 ● ● ● ○ ●
24 ○ ○ ○ ● ●
25 ● ○ ○ ● ●
26 ○ ● ○ ● ●
27 ● ● ○ ● ●
28 ○ ○ ● ● ●
29 ● ○ ● ● ●
30 ○ ● ● ● ●
31 ● ● ● ● —*2
Power driving ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
100*3 Regenerative driving
● ● ● ● —*2
Power driving ● ○ ○ ○ ○
101*3 Regenerative driving
● ● ● ● —*2
*1 When "operation stop at OL signal output" is selected, the fault output "E.OLT" (stop due to stall prevention) is displayed, and operation stops.
*2 The OL signal and E.OLT are not output because fast-response current limit and stall prevention are not operating.
*3 Setting values "100, 101" can be individually set for power driving and regenerative driving. The setting value "101" disables the fast-response
current limit during power driving.

NOTE
• When the load is heavy or the acceleration/deceleration time is short, stall prevention operates and acceleration/deceleration
may not be performed according to the time set. Set the Pr.156 and stall prevention operation level to the optimum values.
• For lift applications, make settings to disable the fast-response current limit. Otherwise, the torque may be insufficient, causing
the load to drop.

216 10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.10 Stall prevention operation
 Adjusting the stall prevention operation signal and output timing (OL
signal, Pr.157) 1
• If the output current exceeds the stall prevention operation level and stall prevention is activated, or the fast-response
current limit is enabled, Overload warning (OL) signal turns ON for 100 ms or more. The output signal turns OFF when the
output current falls to the stall prevention operation level or less. 2
• Pr.157 OL signal output timer can be used to set whether to output the OL signal immediately, or whether to output it
after a certain time period has elapsed.
• This function also operates during regeneration avoidance operation ("OLV" (overvoltage stall)). 3
• For the OL signal, set "3" (positive logic) or "103" (negative logic) in any parameter from Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal
function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
Pr.157 setting Description 4
0 (initial value) Output immediately.
0.1 to 25 Output after the set time (s).
9999 Not output. 5
Overload state
(OL operation)
6
OL output signal

Pr.157 Set time(s)

NOTE 7
• If the stall prevention operation has lowered the output frequency to 1 Hz and kept the level for 3 seconds, the stall prevention
stop (E.OLT) is activated to shut off the inverter output.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
8

 Setting for stall prevention operation in the high-frequency range (Pr.22, 9

Pr.23, Pr.66)
10
Always at the Pr.22 level Setting example (Pr.22 = 150%, Pr.23 = 100%, Pr.66 = 60Hz)
when Pr.23 = "9999"
Pr.22
Stall prevention operation

120
Stall prevention operation

72
level (%)

36
level (%)

Stall prevention operation level 24

as set in Pr.23 18

Pr.66 400Hz 0 60 100 200 300 400

Output frequency (Hz)
Output frequency (Hz)

• When operating at the rated motor frequency or higher, acceleration may not be made because the motor current does
not increase. Also, when operating in the high-frequency range, the current flowing to the locked motor becomes less than
the rated output current of the inverter. Even if the motor is stopped, the protective function does not operate (OL). In a
case like this, the stall prevention level can be reduced in the high-frequency range to improve the motor's operating
characteristics. This is useful when operating up to the high speed range, such as when using a centrifuge. Normally, set
Pr.66 Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency to 60 Hz, and Pr.23 Stall prevention operation level
compensation factor at double speed to 100%.
• Calculation formula for stall prevention operation level
Stall prevention operation level (%) Pr.22 - A Pr.23 - 100
in the high-frequency range = A + B × [ Pr.22 - B ] × [ 100
]

Pr.66 (Hz) × Pr.22 (%) Pr.66 (Hz) × Pr.22 (%)

Where, A= ,B=
Output frequency (Hz) 400 Hz

• When Pr.23 = "9999" (initial value), the stall prevention operation level is constant at the Pr.22 level up to 590 Hz.

10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.10 Stall prevention operation
217
  Protecting equipment and limiting the load by the torque limit (Pr.277)
• Set Pr.277 Stall prevention operation current switchover = "1" to enable the torque limit.
• If the output torque (current equivalent to the torque) exceeds the stall prevention operation level, the output torque is
limited by adjusting the output frequency. The stall prevention operation level in such a case is based on the rating torque
of the motor.

NOTE
• The torque limit cannot work properly when two or more motors are driven by one inverter.
• In the constant power range (Pr.3 Base frequency), the torque limit is activated at the torque less than the stall prevention
operation level, since the magnetic flux decreases.
• When the torque limit is activated during regenerative driving, the output frequency is increased up to the maximum frequency.
• The toque limit is not activated at the frequency of 5 Hz or less during deceleration.
• When using the torque limit under V/F control, note the following points:
- Use the inverter whose capacity is the same as that of the motor.
- The stall prevention operation level (torque limit level) is based on the rating torque of the motor whose capacity is the same
as that of the inverter.
- When a large value is set in Pr.0 Torque boost, the torque limit may be activated in the low-speed range.
- If more accurate torque limit is required, select Advanced magnetic flux vector control.

 Setting two stall prevention operation levels (Pr.48)

• Turning ON the RT signal enables Pr.48 Second stall prevention operation level.
• To input the RT signal, set "3" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the
function.

NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• The RT signal is the Second function selection signal which also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 289).

 Further prevention of a trip (Pr.154)

• Set Pr.154 = "11" when the overvoltage protective function (E.OV[]) is activated during stall prevention operation in an
application with large load inertia. Note that turning OFF the start signal (STF/STR) or varying the frequency command
during stall prevention operation may delay the acceleration/deceleration start.

CAUTION
• Do not set the stall prevention operation current too low.
Doing so will reduce the generated torque.
• Be sure to perform the test operation.
Stall prevention operation during acceleration may extend the acceleration time.
Stall prevention operation during constant-speed operation may cause sudden speed changes.
Stall prevention operation during deceleration may extend the deceleration time.

Parameters referred to
Pr.22 Torque limit levelpage 100
Pr.178 to Pr.184 (Input terminal function selection)page 283
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 250

218 10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.10 Stall prevention operation
10.11 Load characteristics fault detection 1

This function is used to monitor whether the load is operating in normal condition by storing the speed/torque relationship in
the inverter to detect mechanical faults or for maintenance. When the load operating condition deviates from the normal range, 2
the protective function is activated or the warning is output to protect the inverter or the motor.
Initial value*1
Pr. Name
Gr.1 Gr.2
Setting
range
Description 3
Load characteristics measurement mode does not start.
0
(Measurement of load characteristics complete without fault.)
1480
H520
Load characteristics
measurement mode
0
1
2, 3, 4, 5,
Load characteristics measurement mode is started.
4
The load characteristics measurement status is displayed.
81, 82, 83,
(Read-only)
84, 85
1481
H521
Load characteristics load
reference 1
9999 5
1482 Load characteristics load
9999
H522 reference 2
1483 Load characteristics load
9999
Used to set the reference value of normal load characteristics.
0% to 400% 8888: The present load status is written as reference status. 6
H523 reference 3
9999: The load reference is invalid.
1484 Load characteristics load
9999
H524 reference 4
1485 Load characteristics load
9999
7
H525 reference 5
1486 Load characteristics Used to set the upper frequency limit of the load characteristics
60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
H526 maximum frequency fault detection range.
1487 Load characteristics
6 Hz 0 to 590 Hz
Used to set the lower frequency limit of the load characteristics 8
H527 minimum frequency fault detection range.
Used to set the detection range of when the upper limit load fault
1488 Upper limit warning detection 0% to 400%
20% warning is output.
H531 width
9999 Function disabled 9
Used to set the detection range of when the lower limit load fault
1489 Lower limit warning detection 0% to 400%
20% warning is output.
H532 width
9999 Function disabled
Used to set the detection range of when output is shut-off when
10
1490 Upper limit fault detection 0% to 400%
9999 the upper limit load fault occurs.
H533 width
9999 Function disabled
Used to set the detection range of when output is shut-off when
1491 Lower limit fault detection 0% to 400%
9999 the lower limit load fault occurs.
H534 width
9999 Function disabled
Used to set the waiting time after the load fault is detected until
Load status detection signal warning output or output shutoff.
1492
delay time / load reference 1s 0 to 60 s In the load characteristics measurement mode, set the waiting
H535
measurement waiting time time after the load measurement frequency is reached until the
load reference is set.

*1 Gr.1 and Gr.2 are the parameter initial value groups. (Refer to page 82).

 Load characteristics reference setting (Pr.1481 to Pr.1487)

• Use Pr.1481 to Pr.1485 to set the reference value of load characteristics.

10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.11 Load characteristics fault detection
219
 • Use Pr.1486 Load characteristics maximum frequency and Pr.1487 Load characteristics minimum frequency to set
the output frequency range for load fault detection.

Upper limit warning detection width

Load status (Pr.1488)
Upper limit fault detection width
(Pr.1490)
Load reference 5 (Pr.1485)
Lower limit fault detection width
(Pr.1491)

Lower limit warning detection width

Load reference 4 (Pr.1484) (Pr.1489)

Load reference 3 (Pr.1483) Normal load range

Load reference 2 (Pr.1482)

Load reference 1 (Pr.1481)

f1 f2 f3 f4 f5 Output frequency
(Pr.1487) (Pr.1486)

 Automatic measurement of the load characteristics reference (Load

characteristics measurement mode) (Pr.1480)

• Perform measurement under actual environment with the motor connected.

• Set Pr.1487 Load characteristics minimum frequency to a value higher than the Pr.13 Starting frequency setting.

• Setting Pr.1480 Load characteristics measurement mode = "1" enables automatic measurement of the load
characteristics reference. (Load characteristics measurement mode)
• Use Pr.1486 and Pr.1487 to set the frequency band for the measurement, and set Pr.1480 = "1". After setting, when the
inverter is started, the measurement starts. (When the value set in Pr.1486 is equal to or smaller than the value set in
Pr.1487, the measurement does not start.)
• The automatically measured load characteristics reference is written in Pr.1481 to Pr.1485.
• After the measurement is started, read Pr.1480 to display the status of the measurement. If "8" appears in the tens place,
the measurement has not properly completed.
Read value of Pr.1480
Status
Tens place Ones place
— 1 During measurement from the starting point to Point 1
— 2 During measurement from Point 1 to Point 2
— 3 During measurement from Point 2 to Point 3
— 4 During measurement from Point 3 to Point 4
— 5 During measurement from Point 4 to Point 5
— 0 Normal completion
Termination of measurement by an activation of a protective function, Inverter reset, turning ON of MRS
8 1 to 5 signal, turning OFF of the start command, or timeout. (The value in the ones place represents the above-
mentioned measurement point.)

• While measuring automatically, the During load characteristics measurement (Y213) signal is output. For the Y213 signal,
assign the function by setting "213" (positive logic) or "313" (negative logic) in any of in any parameter from Pr.190 to
Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).

220 10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.11 Load characteristics fault detection
 • Setting "8888" in Pr.1481 to Pr.1485 enables fine adjustment of load characteristics. When setting Pr.1481 to Pr.1485 =
"8888" during operation, the load status at that point is set in the parameter (only when the set frequency is within ±2 Hz
of the frequency of the measurement point, and the SU signal is ON).
1
Example of starting measurement from the stop state

Frequency(Hz)
Load reference 5 recorded 2
f5(Pr.1486) Pr.41
Load reference 4 recorded
f4
Load reference 3 recorded
Pr.41 3
f3 Pr.41
Load reference 2 recorded
f2
Load reference
Pr.41 Operation at the
set frequency 4
1 recorded
f1(Pr.1487) Pr.41

STF＝ON
Pr.1480=1 Time
5
Measurement start
Pr.1492 Pr.1492 Pr.1492 Pr.1492 Pr.1492

Read value of Pr.1480 1 2 3 4 5 0 6

STF ON
Y213 ON
SU signal ON ON ON ON ON ON 7
NOTE
• Even if the load measurement is not properly completed, the load characteristics fault is detected based on the load
characteristics found by the already-completed portion of the measurement.
8
• During the load characteristics measurement, the load characteristics fault detection is not performed.
• During the load characteristics measurement, linear acceleration/deceleration is performed even if the S-pattern acceleration/
deceleration is set. 9
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

10
 Setting the load characteristics reference manually (Pr.1481 to Pr.1485)
• Set Pr.1480 Load characteristics measurement mode = "0" (initial value).
• Set Pr.1486 and Pr.1487 to specify the frequency band for the measurement, and calculate the frequency as the load
characteristics reference (f2 to f4) using the following table.
• Start the inverter operation, and set Pr.1481 = "8888" during operation at the frequency of the load characteristics
reference 1 (f1). The load status at that point is set in Pr.1481 (only when the set frequency is within ±2 Hz of the frequency
of the measurement point, and the SU signal is ON).
• Set load references in Pr.1482 to Pr.1485 in the same way as Pr.1481.
Reference Frequency Load reference
Load characteristics reference 1 f1: load characteristics minimum frequency (Pr.1487) Pr.1481
Load characteristics reference 2 f2 = (f5 - f1)/4 + f1 Pr.1482
Load characteristics reference 3 f3 = (f5 - f1)/2 + f1 Pr.1483
Load characteristics reference 4 f4 = (f5 - f1) × 3/4 + f1 Pr.1484
Load characteristics reference 5 f5: load characteristics maximum frequency (Pr.1486) Pr.1485

NOTE
• When inputting values directly in Pr.1481 to Pr.1485 under V/F control, input the load meter monitored values at the frequency
of each load characteristics reference.
• When inputting values directly in Pr.1481 to Pr.1485 under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector
control, or PM sensorless vector control, input the load meter monitored values at the frequency of each load characteristics
reference.

10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.11 Load characteristics fault detection
221
  Setting example
• The load characteristics are calculated from the parameter setting and the output frequency.
• A setting example is as follows. The reference value is linearly interpolated from the parameter settings. For example, the
reference when the output frequency is 30 Hz is 26%, which is linearly interpolated from values of the reference 2 and the
reference 3.
Reference Frequency Load reference
Load characteristics reference 1 f1: Load characteristics minimum frequency (Pr.1487) = 10 Hz Pr.1481 = 15%
Load characteristics reference 2 f2 = (f5 - f1)/4 + f1 = 22.5 Hz Pr.1482 = 20%
Load characteristics reference 3 f3 = (f5 - f1)/2 + f1 = 35 Hz Pr.1483 = 30%
Load characteristics reference 4 f4 = (f5 - f1) × 3/4 + f1 = 47.5 Hz Pr.1484 = 60%
Load characteristics reference 5 f5: Load characteristics maximum frequency (Pr.1486) = 60 Hz Pr.1485 = 100%

Load(%)
120

100

80

60

40
26
20

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Frequency(Hz)

NOTE
• When the load reference is not set for five points, the load characteristics value is determined by linear interpolation of the set
load reference values only. If there is only one load reference setting, the set load reference is used as the load reference all
through the range.

 Load fault detection setting (Pr.1488 to Pr.1491)

• When the load is deviated from the detection width set in Pr.1488 Upper limit warning detection width, the Upper limit
warning detection (LUP) signal is output. When the load is deviated from the detection width set in Pr.1489 Lower limit
warning detection width, the Lower limit warning detection (LDN) signal is output. At the same time, the Load fault
warning (LDF) appears on the operation panel.
• For the LUP signal, assign the function by setting "211" (positive logic) or "311" (negative logic) in any parameter from
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection). For the LDN signal, assign the function by setting "212" (positive
logic) or "312" (negative logic) in any parameter from Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
• When the load is deviated from the detection width set in Pr.1490 Upper limit fault detection width, the protective
function (E.LUP) is activated and the inverter output is shut off. When the load is deviated from the detection width set in
Pr.1491 Lower limit fault detection width, the protective function (E.LDN) is activated and the inverter output is shut off.

222 10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.11 Load characteristics fault detection
 • To prevent the repetitive on/off operation of the signal due to load fluctuation near the detection range, Pr.1492 Load
status detection signal delay time / load reference measurement waiting time can be used to set the delay time. Even
when a fault is detected out of the detection range once, the warning is not output if the characteristics value returns to the
1
normal range from a fault state within the output delay time.

Load status Upper limit fault detection width (Pr.1490) 2

Pr.1492 Upper limit warning detection width (Pr.1488)
Load reference
Pr.1492 Lower limit warning detection width (Pr.1489)

Pr.1492
Lower limit warning detection width (Pr.1491) 3

Pr.1492
LUP ON 4
LDN ON ON
E.LDN Output shutoff
LDF warning indication ON ON ON 5
NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
6

Parameters referred to
Pr.41 Up-to-frequency sensitivitypage 257
7
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 250

10

10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.11 Load characteristics fault detection
223
 10.12 Motor overspeeding detection
Sensorless PM
The Overspeed occurrence (E.OS) is activated when the motor speed exceeds the overspeed detection level. This function
prevents the motor from accidentally speeding over the specified value, due to an error in parameter setting, etc.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

If the motor rotation speed exceeds the speed set in Pr.374,
0 to 590 Hz
overspeed (E.OS) occurs, and the inverter output is shut off.
If the speed exceeds the speed calculated by adding 20 Hz to the
374 Overspeed detection maximum frequency (Pr.1, Pr.18) during Real sensorless vector
9999
H800 level control, E.OS occurs.
9999 During PM sensorless vector control, E.OS occurs when the speed
exceeds the speed calculated by adding 10 Hz to the maximum
motor frequency*1.
*1 The motor maximum frequency is set in Pr.702 Maximum motor frequency. When Pr.702 = "9999" (initial value), the value set in Pr.84 Rated
motor frequency is used as the maximum motor frequency.

Motor speed

Pr.374
Coast to stop

Time

ON
ALM

E.OS

224 10. (H) Protective Function Parameters

10.12 Motor overspeeding detection
 CHAPTER 11
CHAPTER 11 (M) Item and Output Signal
for Monitoring 4

11.1 Speed indication and its setting change to rotations per minute ..........................................................................226
11.2 Monitor item selection on operation panel or via communication .........................................................................228
6
11.3 Monitor display selection for terminals FM and AM ..............................................................................................237
11.4 Adjustment of terminal FM and terminal AM.........................................................................................................241
11.5 Energy saving monitoring .....................................................................................................................................244
7
11.6 Output terminal function selection ........................................................................................................................250
11.7 Output frequency detection...................................................................................................................................257
11.8 Output current detection function..........................................................................................................................260
8
11.9 Output torque detection function...........................................................................................................................262
11.10 Remote output function.........................................................................................................................................263
9

10

225
 11 (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring
Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page
To display the motor speed (the
number of rotations per minute). Speed indication and its
P.M000, P.M001,
To switch the unit of measure to set setting change to rotations Pr.37, Pr.53, Pr.505 226
P.M003
the operation speed from frequency per minute
to motor speed.
Pr.52, Pr.170,
P.M020 to P.M023, Pr.171, Pr.268,
Operation panel monitor item
P.M030, P.M031, Pr.290, Pr.563,
To change the item monitored on the selection
P.M044, P.M050 to Pr.564, Pr.774 to 228
operation panel clearing the cumulative value
P.M052, P.M100 to Pr.776, Pr.891,
during monitoring
P.M104 Pr.992, Pr.1106 to
Pr.1108
P.M040 to P.M042, Pr.54, Pr.55, Pr.56,
To change the monitor item whose Terminal FM/AM function
P.M044, P.M300, Pr.158, Pr.290, 237
data is output via terminal FM or AM selection
P.M301 Pr.866
To adjust the output via terminal FM P.M310, P.M320, Pr.867, C0, C1,
Terminal FM/AM calibration 241
or AM P.M321, P.M390 Pr.1200
P.M023, P.M100,
Pr.52, Pr.54, Pr.158,
To check the effects of energy saving Energy saving monitoring P.M200 to P.M207, 244
Pr.891 to Pr.899
P.M300, P.M301
P.M400, P.M404,
P.M405, P.M410 to Pr.190 to Pr.196,
To assign functions to the output Output terminal function
P.M416, P.M420 to Pr.289, Pr.313 to 250
terminals assignment
P.M422, P.M431, Pr.322
P.M451 to P.M454
Up-to-frequency sensitivity
P.M440 to P.M443, Pr.41 to Pr.43,
To detect the output frequency Output frequency detection 257
P.M446 Pr.865 to Pr.870
Low speed detection
Output current detection P.M433, P.M460 to Pr.150 to Pr.153,
To detect the output current 260
Zero current detection P.M464 Pr.166, Pr.167
To detect the output torque Output torque detection P.M470 Pr.864 262
To use the remote output function Remote output P.M500 to P.M502 Pr.495 to Pr.497 263

11.1 Speed indication and its setting change to

rotations per minute
The frequency monitored or set on the operation panel can be changed to the motor speed or the machine speed.

Initial value*1
Pr. Name Setting range Description
Gr.1 Gr.2
0 Monitoring and setting of frequency
37
Speed display 1800 Set a number for the speed of machine operated at
M000 0.01 to 9998*2 the speed (frequency) set in Pr.505.
Frequency / rotation 0 Frequency displayed
53
speed unit 0 1 Rotation speed displayed
M003
switchover 4 Machine speed displayed
505 Speed setting
M001 reference
60 Hz 50 Hz 1 to 590 Hz*2 Set the reference speed (frequency) for Pr.37.

*1 Gr.1 and Gr.2 are the parameter initial value groups. (Refer to page 82).
*2 The setting ranges of Pr.1 (Pr.18), Pr.37, and Pr.505 are limited so that the following formula is satisfied.
Pr.1 (Pr.18) × Pr.37 / Pr.505< 8388.607
The setting range of Pr.1 (Pr.18) is not limited when the machine speed display is not selected. To display the machine speed, set values which
satisfy the formula.

226 11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.1 Speed indication and its setting change to rotations per minute
 Displayed unit switchover (Pr.37, Pr.53, and Pr.505)
• The rotation speed or machine speed can be displayed for monitoring or used for parameter setting instead of the 11
frequency by using Pr.53.
• To display the machine speed, set Pr.37 to the value which corresponds to the speed of machine operated at the frequency
set in Pr.505. 12
For example, when Pr.505 is set to 60 Hz and Pr.37 is set to "1000", the operation panel indicates "1000" as the monitor
value of machine speed while the output frequency is 60 Hz. "500" is displayed while the output frequency is 30 Hz.
• The operation panel indicates the upper 4 digits when the rotation speed or machine speed is displayed. For example, 13
when the internal value "1770.950" is monitored, the operation panel indicates "1770".
Output frequency Set frequency Running speed
Pr.53 setting Frequency setting Parameter setting
indication indication indication 14
0 (initial value) 0.01 Hz 0.01 Hz 1 r/min*1 0.01 Hz 0.01 Hz
1 1 r/min*1 1 r/min*1 1 r/min*1 1 r/min*1 1 r/min*1

4
0.001 (machine
speed*1)
0.001 (machine
speed*1)
1 (machine speed*1)
0.001 (machine
speed*1)
0.01 Hz 15
*1 Motor speed r/min conversion formula: frequency × 120 / number of motor poles (Pr.81 or Pr.454)
Machine speed conversion formula: Pr.37 × frequency / Pr.505
The item set in Pr.505 is consistently a frequency (Hz). 16
When Pr.81 (Pr.454) = "9999", the number of motor poles is regarded as 4.

NOTE
• The inverter's output frequency is displayed as synchronous speed under V/F control. The displayed value is "actual motor 17
speed" + "motor slip". When Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, or PM sensorless vector
control is selected, the actual motor speed (estimated value by motor slip calculation) is used.
• To change the main monitor of the operation panel (operation panel main display), refer to Pr.52.
• Since the panel display of the operation panel is in 4 digits, the monitor value of more than "9999" is displayed as "----". Display 18
the frequency on the operation panel when a value equal to or more than 10000 r/min needs to be monitored or set.
• The displayed machine speed is the value converted from the frequency. Therefore, the setting value and read value may
fluctuate due to rounding during the conversion.
19

CAUTION 20
• Make sure to set the running speed and the number of motor poles.
Otherwise, the motor might run at extremely high speed, damaging the machine.

Parameters referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequencypage 211
Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selectionpage 228
Pr.81 Number of motor polespage 86
Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 86

11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.1 Speed indication and its setting change to rotations per minute
227
 11.2 Monitor item selection on operation panel or via
communication
The monitor item to be displayed on the operation panel can be selected.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

0, 5 to 12, 14,
17, 18, 20, 23 to
25, 32, 33, 38, Select the monitor item to be displayed on the operation
52 Operation panel main 0 (output 40 to 42, 44, 45, panel.
M100 monitor selection frequency) 50 to 57, 61, 62, Refer to page 229 for the monitor item selection.
67, 83, 91, 97,
100*1
774 Operation panel monitor 1 to 3, 5 to 12,
M101 selection 1 14, 17, 18, 20, Each of the initial monitor items displayed on the operation
775 Operation panel monitor 23 to 25, 32, 33, panel in the monitor mode (output frequency, output current,
M102 selection 2 9999 38, 40 to 42, 44, and output voltage) can be switched to a user-designated
45, 50 to 57, 61, item.
776 Operation panel monitor 62, 67, 83, 91, 9999: Follows the Pr.52 setting.
M103 selection 3
97, 100, 9999*1
0 to 3, 5 to 12,
14, 17, 18, 20,
23 to 25, 32, 33, Select the monitor item displayed on the operation panel at
992 Operation panel setting dial
0 (set frequency) 38, 40 to 42, 44, the time when the setting dial is pressed. (Available for the
M104 push monitor selection
45, 50 to 57, 61, standard model only.)
62, 67, 91, 97,
100
0 Set "0" to clear the watt-hour meter.
Set "10" to monitor the cumulative power in the range of 0 to
170 10
Watt-hour meter clear 9999 9999 kWh via communication.
M020
Set "9999" to monitor the cumulative power in the range of
9999
0 to 65535 kWh via communication.
563 Energization time carrying- (0 to 65535) The number of times that the cumulative energization time
0
M021 over times (Read-only) exceeded 65535 hours is displayed (read-only).
0 Value is displayed in 1 increments (an integer).
268 Monitor decimal digits
9999 1 Value is displayed in 0.1 increments.
M022 selection
9999 No function
Set the number of digits to move the decimal point of the
0 to 4 cumulative energy monitored value to the left. The readout
891 Cumulative power monitor
9999 peaks out at the upper limit of readout.
M023 digit shifted times
The function of moving the decimal point is not available.
9999
The readout is reset to 0 when it exceeds the upper limit.
0 Set "0" to clear the operation hour meter.
171
Operation hour meter clear 9999 The readout is always 9999. Nothing changes when "9999"
M030 9999
is set.
564 Operating time carrying- (0 to 65535) The number of times that the operating time reaches 65535
0
M031 over times (Read-only) hours is displayed. Read-only.
Set the availability of negative signals output via terminal
290 Monitor negative output 0, 1, 4, 5, 8, 9,
0 AM, to the operation panel, through communication, and to
M044 selection 12, 13
the FR-A8AY. (Refer to page 235.)
The filter time constant is selectable for monitoring of the
1106 0 to 5 s
Torque monitor filter 9999 torque. A larger setting results in slower response.
M050
9999 0.3 s filter
The filter time constant is selectable for monitoring of the
1107 Running speed monitor 0 to 5 s
9999 running speed. A larger setting results in slower response.
M051 filter
9999 0.08 s filter
The filter time constant is selectable for monitoring of the
1108 Excitation current monitor 0 to 5 s motor excitation current. A larger setting results in slower
9999 response.
M052 filter
9999 0.3 s filter
*1 The setting range differs depending on the model. For more information, refer to Monitor item list.

228 11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.2 Monitor item selection on operation panel or via communication
 Monitor item list (Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992)
• Use Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, or Pr.992 to select the monitor item to be displayed on the operation panel. 11
• Refer to the following table to find the setting value for each monitoring. The value in the Pr. setting column is set in each
of the parameters for monitoring (Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, and Pr.992) to determine the monitor item. The value in the
Communication column is the monitor code for communication. (The items marked with “—" cannot be selected. The circle 12
(○) in the Negative indication (-) column denotes that the monitored item can be indicated with minus sign during monitoring
via the communication option.
13
Communication Negative
Increment Pr.
Monitor item Monitor Monitor indication Description
and unit setting
code 1*1 code 2*2 (-)*3
Output frequency
0.01 Hz*14 1/0/100 H01 40201 ○ The inverter output frequency is displayed.
14
(speed)*15
Output current*6*7*15 0.01 A 2/0/100 H02 40202 The inverter output current effective value is displayed.
Output voltage *6*15 0.1 V 3/0/100 H03 40203 The inverter output voltage is displayed. 15
Fault indication — 0/100 — — Each of the last 10 faults is displayed individually.
Set frequency / motor
speed setting 0.01 Hz*14 5 H05 40205 The set frequency is displayed.

Operation speed 1 (r/min) 6 H06 40206 ○

The motor speed is displayed (depending on the Pr.53 16
setting). (Refer to page 226.)
The motor torque is displayed as a percentage (0%
Motor torque 0.1% 7 H07 40207 ○ under V/F control), considering the rated torque as
100%. 17
Converter output
0.1 V 8 H08 40208 The DC bus voltage value is displayed.
voltage*6
Regenerative brake
duty
0.1% 9 H09 40209
Brake duty set in Pr.70 for the regeneration unit set in
Pr.30 is displayed.
18
Electronic thermal O/L The motor thermal cumulative value is displayed,
0.1% 10 H0A 40210
relay load factor considering the thermal operation level as 100%.
Output current peak
0.01 A 11 H0B 40211
The peak value of output current, which is constantly
stored, is displayed. (It is reset with every startup of the
19
value*6 inverter.)
Converter output The DC bus voltage peak value, which is constantly

voltage peak value*6

0.1 V 12 H0C 40212 stored, is displayed. (It is reset with every startup of the
inverter.)
20
Output power*7 0.01 kW 14 H0E 40214 The power at the inverter output side is displayed.
Torque current is displayed as a percentage,
considering Pr.56 setting value as 100%. (0% is
Load meter 0.1% 17 H11 40217
displayed under the control mode other than V/F
control.)
Motor excitation
0.01 A 18 H12 40218 The motor excitation current is displayed.
current*6
The cumulative energization time since the inverter
Cumulative shipment is displayed. The number of times an
1h 20 H14 40220
energization time*4 integrated value has reached the maximum value of
65535 hours can be checked in Pr.563.
The cumulative operation time is displayed. The
Actual operation number of times an integrated value has reached the
1h 23 H17 40223 maximum value of 65535 hours can be checked in
time*4*5 Pr.564. Use Pr.171 to reset the cumulative operation
time. (Refer to page 234.)
The output current value is displayed as a percentage,
considering the inverter rated current value as 100%.
Motor load factor 0.1% 24 H18 40224
Readout (%) = present output current value / inverter
rated current value × 100
The cumulative energy based on the monitored output
Cumulative energy*6 0.01 kWh 25 H19 40225 power is displayed. Use Pr.170 to reset it. (Refer to
page 234.)
The torque command value adjusted with Vector control
Torque command 0.1% 32 H20 40232 ○
is displayed.
Torque current The command value of the current for torque is
0.1% 33 H21 40233 ○
command displayed.
Trace status 1 38 H26 40238 The trace status is displayed. (Refer to page 366.)

11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.2 Monitor item selection on operation panel or via communication
229
 Communication Negative
Increment Pr.
Monitor item Monitor Monitor indication Description
and unit setting
code 1*1 code 2*2 (-)*3
PLC function user The user-designated monitor item is displayed using
40 H28 40240
monitor 1 the PLC function.
PLC function user Increment Each value of the following special registers is
set in the 41 H29 40241 displayed.
monitor 2
register SD1216: displayed with the setting value "40",
PLC function user SD1215 SD1217: displayed with the setting value "41",
42 H2A 40242 SD1218: displayed with the setting value "42"
monitor 3
(Refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual.)
The station number of the inverter enabling
Station number (PU) 1 44 H2C 40244 communication via the PU connector is displayed.
(Available only for the standard model.)
The station number of the inverter enabling CC-Link
Station number (CC-
1 45 H2D 40245 communication is displayed. ("0" is displayed when the
Link)
FR-A8NC is not installed.)
Power saving effect Increment 50 H32 40250 The energy saving effect monitoring is enabled. The
and unit vary item to monitor is selectable from among the saved
depending power, the average energy saving, and the energy cost
Cumulative energy
on the 51 H33 40251 savings. Some of them can be displayed as a
saving
parameter percentage according to the parameter settings. (Refer
settings. to page 244.)
PID set point 0.1% 52 H34 40252
The set point, measured value, and deviation during
PID measured value 0.1% 53 H35 40253
PID control operation is displayed. (Refer to page 338.)
PID deviation 0.1% 54 H36 40254 ○
The ON/OFF state of the input terminals on the inverter
Input terminal status — H0F*9 40215*9 is displayed. (Refer to page 233 for details of indication
on the operation panel.)
55
The ON/OFF state of the output terminals on the
Output terminal status — H10*10 40216*10 inverter is displayed. (Refer to page 233 for details of
indication on the operation panel.)
Option input terminal The ON/OFF state of the input terminals on the digital
*8 — 56 — — input option (FR-A8AX) is displayed on the operation
status panel. (Refer to page 233 for details.)
The ON/OFF state of the output terminals on the digital
Option output terminal output option (FR-A8AY) or the relay output option (FR-
— 57 — —
status*8 A8AR) is displayed on the operation panel. (Refer to
page 233 for details.)
Option input terminal The ON/OFF state of the input terminals X0 to X15 on
status 1 (for — — H3A*11 40258*11 the digital input option (FR-A8AX) is monitored via
communication)*8 communication.
Option input terminal The ON/OFF state of the input terminal DY on the digital
status 2 (for — — H3B*12 40259*12 input option (FR-A8AX) is monitored via
communication)*8 communication.
Option output terminal The ON/OFF state of the output terminals on the digital
status (for — — H3C*13 40260*13 output option (FR-A8AY) or the relay output option (FR-
communication)*8 A8AR) is monitored via communication.
The accumulated heat value of the motor thermal O/L
Motor thermal load relay is displayed.
0.1% 61 H3D 40261
factor The Motor overload trip (electronic thermal relay
function) (E.THM) occurs at 100%.
The accumulated heat value of the inverter thermal O/L
Inverter thermal load relay is displayed.
0.1% 62 H3E 40262
factor The Inverter overload trip (electronic thermal relay
function) (E.THT) occurs at 100%.
The PID measured value is displayed while the PID
control is enabled (Pr.128 ≠ "0"), even if PID control
PID measured value 2 0.1% 67 H43 40267
operating conditions are not satisfied. (Refer to page
338.)

230 11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.2 Monitor item selection on operation panel or via communication
 Communication Negative
Increment Pr.
Monitor item
and unit setting Monitor Monitor
code 1*1 code 2*2
indication
(-)*3
Description
11
32-bit cumulative
1 kWh — H4D 40277
energy (lower 16 bits)
32-bit cumulative
energy (upper 16 bits)
1 kWh — H4E 40278 The upper or lower 16 bits of the 32-bit cumulative 12
energy is displayed on each indication.
32-bit cumulative
0.01 kWh — H4F 40279 Monitoring via communication is available.
energy (lower 16 bits)
32-bit cumulative
energy (upper 16 bits)
0.01 kWh — H50 40280 13
BACnet valid APDU The count of valid APDU detection is displayed.
1 83 H53 40283
counter (Available only for the FR-E800-EPA.)
PID manipulated
0.1% 91 H5B 40291 ○
The PID control manipulated amount is displayed. 14
amount (Refer to page 338.)
Dancer main set The set speed for main speed during the dancer control
speed 0.01 Hz*14 97 H61 40297
operation is displayed.
*1 The monitor code is used for the Mitsubishi inverter protocol, CC-Link, CC-Link IE TSN, and CC-Link IE Field Network Basic. 15
*2 The monitor code is used for the MODBUS RTU, MODBUS/TCP, and BACnet/IP.
*3 Indication with a minus sign is not possible via RS-485 communication (Mitsubishi inverter protocol or MODBUS RTU).
*4 The cumulative energization time and actual operation time are accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated again from 0.
*5 The actual operation time does not increase if the cumulative running time before power OFF is less than an hour. 16
*6 Since each readout of the output voltage and output current displayed on the operation panel is a 4-digit number, a value of more than "9999" is
displayed as "----".
*7 The inverter regards the output current which is less than the specified current level (5% of the rated inverter current) as 0 A. Therefore, each
readout of an output current and output power may show "0" if a too small-capacity motor is used as contrasted with the inverter capacity and the
output current falls below the specified value.
17
*8 Available when the plug-in option is connected.
*9 The details of bits for the input terminal status are as follows. (1: ON state, 0: OFF state of a terminal on the inverter. "—" denotes an indefinite
(null) value.)
18
b15 Standard model b0
- - - - - RES - MRS - RH RM RL - - STR STF

b15 Ethernet model b0 19

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - DI1 DI0
*10 The details of bits for the output terminal status are as follows. (1: ON state, 0: OFF state of a terminal on the inverter. "—" denotes an indefinite
(null) value.)
20
b15 Standard model b0
- - - - - - - - SO - ABC FU - - - RUN

b15 Ethernet model b0

- - - - - - - - SO - ABC - - - - -
*11 The details of bits for the option input terminal status 1 are as follows. (1: ON state, 0: OFF state of a terminal on the FR-A8AX.) Every bit is 0
(OFF) when the option is not installed.

b15 b0
X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9 X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
*12 The details of bits for the option input terminal status 2 are as follows. (1: ON state, 0: OFF state of a terminal on the FR-A8AX. "—" denotes an
indefinite (null) value.) Every bit is 0 (OFF) when the option is not installed.

b15 b0
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DY
*13 The details of bits for the option output terminal status are as follows. (1: ON state, 0: OFF state of a terminal on the FR-A8AY/A8AR. "—" denotes
an indefinite (null) value.) Every bit is 0 (OFF) when the option is not installed.

b15 b0
- - - - - - RA3 RA2 RA1 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0
*14 The increment varies depending on the Pr.53 setting. (Refer to page 226).
*15 The monitored values are retained even if an inverter fault occurs. Resetting clears the retained values.

 Monitor display for operation panel (Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776)

• When Pr.52 = "0" (initial value), the monitoring of output frequency, output current, output voltage and fault display can be
selected in sequence by pressing the SET key.
• The Load meter, motor excitation current and motor load factor are displayed on the second monitor (output current)
position, among the monitors set in Pr.52. Other monitors are displayed in the third monitor (output voltage) position.

11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.2 Monitor item selection on operation panel or via communication
231
 • The monitor displayed at power ON is the first monitor (the output frequency monitor, according to the initial value). Display
the monitor you want to display on the first monitor and hold down the SET key for 1 second. To return to the output
frequency monitor, display the output frequency monitor and hold down the SET key for 1 second.
Power-on monitor (first monitor) Second monitor Third monitor Fault monitor
With fault

Output frequency monitor Output current monitor Output voltage monitor

For example, when Pr.52 = "20" (cumulative energization time), the monitor is displayed on the operation panel as shown
below.
• Power-on monitor (first monitor) • Second monitor • Third monitor • Fault monitor
With fault

Output frequency monitor Output current monitor Cumulative energization time monitor

• Pr.774 sets the output frequency monitor, Pr.775 sets the output current monitor, and Pr.776 sets the monitor description
to be displayed at the output voltage monitor position. When Pr.774 to Pr.776 = "9999" (initial value), the Pr.52 setting
value is used.

NOTE
• On the operation panel, the Hz LED is lit while displaying the output frequency, the Hz LED blinks when displaying the set
frequency.
• When the operation panel is used, the displayed units are Hz and A only, and the others are not displayed.

 Displaying the set frequency during stop (Pr.52)

• When Pr.52 = "100", the set frequency is displayed during stop, and output frequency is displayed during running. (The Hz
LED blinks during stop and is lit during operation.)
Pr.52 setting Status Output frequency Output current Output voltage Fault monitor
0 During running/stop Output frequency
During stop Set frequency*1 Output current Output voltage Fault monitor
100
During running Output frequency
*1 Displays the frequency that is output when the start command is ON. The value considers the maximum/minimum frequency and frequency
jumps. It is different from the frequency setting displayed when Pr.52 = "5".

NOTE
• During an error, the output frequency at error occurrence appears.
• During output shutoff by the MRS signal, the values displayed are the same as during a stop.
• During offline auto tuning, the tuning state monitor takes priority.

 Operation panel setting dial push display (Pr.992) (only for the standard
model)
• Use Pr.992 to select the monitor that appears when the setting dial on the operation panel is pushed.
• When Pr.992 = "0 (initial value)", keep pressing the setting dial when in PU operation mode or External/PU combined
operation mode 1 (Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "3") to show the presently set frequency.
• When Pr.992 = "100", the set frequency is displayed during stop, and output frequency is displayed during running.
Pr.992 setting Status Monitor displayed by the setting dial push
0 During running/stop Set frequency
During stop Set frequency*1
100
During running Output frequency

*1 Displays the frequency that is output when the start command is ON. The value considers the maximum/minimum frequency and frequency
jumps. It is different from the frequency setting displayed when Pr.992 = "5".

232 11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.2 Monitor item selection on operation panel or via communication
 Monitoring I/O terminals on the operation panel (Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776,
Pr.992) 11
• When Pr.52 (Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992) = "55 to 57", the I/O terminal state can be monitored on the operation panel.
• When a terminal is ON, the corresponding LED segment is ON. The center LED segments are always ON.
Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776,
12
Monitor item Monitor description
Pr.992 setting
55 I/O terminal status Displays the I/O terminal ON/OFF state of the inverter.
56*1 Option input terminal status Displays input terminal ON/OFF state of the digital input option (FR-A8AX) 13
*1 Displays output terminal ON/OFF state of the digital output option (FR-A8AY) or
57 Option output terminal status
the relay output option (FR-A8AR).
*1 The setting value "56 or 57" can be set even if the option is not installed. All are OFF when the option is not connected.
14
• On the I/O terminal monitor, the upper LEDs indicate the input terminal status, and the lower LEDs indicate the output
terminal status.
Segments corresponding 15
I-2 I-3 I-5 I-6 I-8 I-9 I-11 I-12 to input terminals
I-1 I-4 I-7 I-10 - Display example -
When signals STF,
The center LED segments are
always ON.
RH and RUN are on
16
O-1 O-4 O-7 O-10

17
O-2 O-5 O-8 O-11
O-3 O-6 O-9 O-12 Segments corresponding
to output terminals

Input terminal Output terminal

Symbol
I-1 RL
FR-E800
—
FR-E800-E Symbol
O-1 A,B,C
FR-E800 FR-E800-E
A,B,C
18
I-2 RM — O-2 — —
I-3 RH — O-3 RUN —
I-4 — — O-4 — — 19
I-5 — — O-5 — —
I-6 — — O-6 — —
I-7
I-8
MRS
RES
—
—
O-7
O-8
FU
SO
—
SO
20
I-9 STF DI0 O-9 — —
I-10 STR DI1 O-10 — —
I-11 — — O-11 — —
I-12 — — O-12 — —

• The decimal point of the last digit on the LED is lit for the input option terminal monitor.
X1 X2 X4 X5 X7 X8
X0 X3 X6 X9

The center LED segments are always ON.

X10 X13 DY
X11 X14
X12 X15
Decimal point LED of the last digit LED is always ON

• The decimal point of the second last digit on the LED is lit for the output option terminal monitor.
FR-A8AY
Y1 Y2 Y4 Y5
Y0 Y3 Y6

The center LED segments are always ON.

RA1
RA2
RA3 FR-A8AR
Decimal point LED of the second last digit LED is always ON

11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.2 Monitor item selection on operation panel or via communication
233
  Monitoring and resetting cumulative power (Pr.170, Pr.891)
• When the cumulative power is monitored (Pr.52 = "25"), the output power monitor value is added up and is updated in 100
ms increments.
• The values are stored in EEPROM every 10 minutes. The values are also stored in EEPROM at power OFF or inverter
reset.
• Increments and ranges of monitoring on the operation panel or via communication are as follows.
Operation panel*1 Via communication
Range
Range Increment Increment
Pr.170 = "10" Pr.170 = "9999"
0 to 99.99 kWh 0.01 kWh
0 to 65535 kWh
100.0 to 999.9 kWh 0.1 kWh 0 to 9999 kWh 1 kWh
(initial value)
1000 to 9999 kWh 1 kWh

*1 Power is measured in the range of 0 to 99999.99 kWh, and displayed in 4 digits. After the watt-hour meter (cumulative power counter) reaches
"99.99" (999.99 kWh), the meter displays values in 0.1 increments such as "100.0" (1000.0 kWh). Use Pr.891 to shift the decimal point position
when the monitored value becomes equal to or higher than 10000 kWh.
• The decimal point position on the watt-hour meter can be shifted to left. The number of digits to be shifted is equal to the
setting of Pr.891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times. For example, when Pr.891 = "2", the cumulative power
value 1278.56 kWh is displayed as 12.78 (in 100 kWh increments) on the operation panel, or displayed as 12 on a display
used for monitoring via communication.
• When Pr.891 = "0 to 4", the meter stops at the maximum number. When Pr.891 = "9999", the meter returns to 0 and the
counting starts again.
• The cumulative power can be monitored as 32-bit data via communication by setting Pr.52 = "77 to 80". The maximum
monitored value is 42949672 kWh in 1 kWh increments or 42949672.94 kWh in 0.01 kWh increments. Pr.891 setting is
invalid while 32-bit cumulative power is monitored. (For details on communication for 32-bit cumulative power monitor, refer
to the Instruction Manual (Communication) or the Instruction Manual of the communication option.)
• Writing "0" in Pr.170 clears the cumulative power monitor.

NOTE
• When Pr.170 is read just after "0" has been written in Pr.170, the setting "9999" or "10" is displayed.

 Monitoring cumulative energization time (Pr.563)

• When the cumulative energization time is selected as a monitor item (Pr.52 = "20"), the counter of cumulative energization
time since the inverter shipment accumulated every hour is displayed.
• One hour is displayed as "0.001", and the value is counted up to "65.53".
• The EEPROM is updated every minute until the cumulative energization time reaches one hour, and then the EEPROM is
updated every 10 minutes. The EEPROM is also updated at power OFF.
• When the cumulative energization time counter reaches 65535, it starts from 0 again. The number of times the cumulative
energization time counter reaches 65535 can be checked with Pr.563.

NOTE
• The cumulative energization time does not increase if the power is turned OFF after less than an hour.

 Actual operation time monitoring (Pr.171, Pr.564)

• On the actual operation time monitoring (Pr.52 = "23"), the inverter running time is added up every hour. (Time is not added
up during a stop.)
• One hour is displayed as "0.001", and the value is counted up to "65.53".
• The values are stored in EEPROM every 10 minutes. The EEPROM is also updated at power OFF.
• When the cumulative energization time counter reaches 65535, it starts from 0 again. The number of times the actual
operation time counter reaches 65535 can be checked with Pr.564.
• Setting "0" in Pr.171 clears the actual operation time meter.

234 11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.2 Monitor item selection on operation panel or via communication
 NOTE
• The actual operation time does not increase if the cumulative running time before power OFF is less than an hour. 11
• Once "0" is set in Pr.171, the setting of Pr.171 is always turned to "9999" afterwards. Setting "9999" does not clear the actual
operation time meter.

12
 Hiding the decimal places for the monitors (Pr.268)
• The numerical figures after a decimal point displayed on the operation panel may fluctuate during analog input, etc. The
decimal places can be hidden by selecting the decimal digits with Pr.268. 13
Pr.268 setting Description
9999 (initial value) No function
For the first or second decimal places (0.1 increments or 0.01 increments) of the monitor, numbers 14
0 in the first decimal place and smaller are rounded to display an integral value (1 increments). The
monitor value equal to or smaller than 0.99 is displayed as 0.
When monitoring with the second decimal place (0.01 increments), the 0.01 decimal place is
1 dropped and the monitor displays the first decimal place (0.1 increments). When monitoring with the 15
first decimal place, the display will not change.

NOTE
• The number of readout digits of the cumulative energization time (Pr.52 = "20"), actual operation time (Pr.52 = "23"),
16
cumulative energy (Pr.52 = "25"), and cumulative energy saving (Pr.52 = "51") does not change.

17
 Enabling display of negative numbers during monitoring (Pr.290)
• Negative values can be used for indication via terminal AM (analog voltage output), on communication options, and via
terminal AM0 (of the FR-A8AY). To check which items can be monitored with indication of negative numbers, refer to 18
Monitor description list (on page 229).
Negative numbers
Negative numbers Negative numbers indication (via
Pr.290 setting
indication (via terminal AM)
indication (via
communication option)*1
terminal AM0) (with the FR-A8AY) 19
0 (initial value) — — —
1 Enabled — —
4 — Enabled — 20
5 Enabled Enabled —
8 — — Enabled
9 Enabled — Enabled
12 — Enabled Enabled
13 Enabled Enabled Enabled

—: Negative numbers indication disabled (positive only)

*1 Negative numbers indication is disabled via RS-485 communication (Mitsubishi inverter protocol or MODBUS RTU).

NOTE
• When indication with negative numbers is enabled for the output via terminal AM/AM0 (analog voltage output), the output is
within the range of -10 to +10 VDC. Connect the meter with which output level is matched.
• The operation panel displays only unsigned numbers.

 Monitor filter (Pr.1106 to Pr.1108)

• The response level (filter time constant) of the following monitor indicators can be adjusted. Increase the setting when a
monitor indicator is unstable, for example.
Pr. Monitor number Monitor indicator name
7 Motor torque
17 Load meter
1106
32 Torque command
33 Torque current command
1107 6 Motor speed
1108 18 Motor excitation current

11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.2 Monitor item selection on operation panel or via communication
235
 Parameters referred to
Pr.53 Frequency / rotation speed unit switchoverpage 226
Pr.55 Frequency monitoring reference, Pr.56 Current monitoring reference, Pr.866 Torque monitoring referencepage 237

236 11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.2 Monitor item selection on operation panel or via communication
11.3 Monitor display selection for terminals FM and AM 11
For the standard model, monitored values are output in either of the following: analog voltage (terminal AM) in the AM type
inverters (FR-E800-4 and FR-E800-5) or pulse train (terminal FM) in the FM type inverter (FR-E800-1). 12
The signal (monitor item) to be output to terminal FM and terminal AM can be selected.

Pr. Name
Initial value*1
Setting range Description
13
Gr.1 Gr.2
1 to 3, 5 to 12, 14, 17,
54 18, 21, 24, 32, 33, 50,
M300*2
FM terminal function selection
52, 53, 61, 62, 67, 70,
Select the item monitored via terminal FM.
14
1 (output 97
frequency) 1 to 3, 5 to 12, 14, 17,
158 18, 21, 24, 32, 33, 50,
M301*3
AM terminal function selection
52 to 54, 61, 62, 67, 70,
Select the item monitored via terminal AM.
15
91, 97
55 Set the full-scale value when the output
Frequency monitoring reference 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz frequency monitor value is output via terminal
M040*4 FM or AM. 16
56 Set the full-scale value when the output
Inverter rated
Current monitoring reference 0 to 500 A current monitor value is output via terminal FM
M041*4 current
or AM.
866
Torque monitoring reference 150% 0% to 400%
Set the full-scale value when the torque 17
M042 monitor value is output via terminal FM or AM.
Set the availability of negative values for
290 Monitor negative output indication via terminal AM, via communication,
M044 selection
0 0, 1, 4, 5, 8, 9, 12, 13
and via terminal AM0 (of the FR-A8AY). (Refer 18
to page 235.)
*1 Gr.1 and Gr.2 are the parameter initial value groups. (Refer to page 82).
*2
*3
The setting is available only for the FR-E800-1.
The setting is available only for the FR-E800-4 and FR-E800-5. 19
*4 For the Ethernet model, the setting is available only when the plug-in option (FR-A8AY) is installed.

 Monitor description list (Pr.54, Pr.158)

• Set the type of monitor to be output through terminal FM (pulse train output) in Pr.54 FM terminal function selection. 20
Terminal FM is provided in the FM type inverter.
• Set Pr.158 AM terminal function selection for monitoring via terminal AM (analog voltage output). Negative signals can
be output via terminal AM (in the range of -10 to +10 VDC). The circle in the Negative output column indicates that the
output of negative signals is available via terminal AM. (To enable or disable the negative output, refer to page 228.)
Terminal AM is provided in the AM type inverter.
• Refer to the following table and select the item to be monitored. (Refer to page 229 for the list of monitor items.)

Pr.54 (FM),
Increment and Terminal FM/AM Negative
Monitor item Pr.158 (AM) Remarks
unit full-scale value output
setting
Output frequency 0.01 Hz 1 Pr.55 ○
Output current*1 0.01 A 2 Pr.56
200 V class: 400 V,
Output voltage 0.1 V 3 400 V class: 800 V,
575 V class: 1000 V
Frequency setting value 0.01 Hz 5 Pr.55
Pr.55 or the value
converted with the
Refer to page 226 for the
Motor speed 1 (r/min) 6 Pr.37 or Pr.81 ○
monitoring of the operation speed.
(Pr.454) value from
Pr.55.
Motor torque 0.1% 7 Pr.866 ○
Converter output 200 V class: 400 V,
0.1 V 8 400 V class: 800 V,
voltage*1 575 V class: 1000 V

11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.3 Monitor display selection for terminals FM and AM
237
 Pr.54 (FM),
Increment and Terminal FM/AM Negative
Monitor item Pr.158 (AM) Remarks
unit full-scale value output
setting
Brake duty decided
Regenerative brake duty 0.1% 9
by Pr.30, Pr.70.
Electronic thermal O/L Electronic thermal O/
0.1% 10
relay load factor L relay (100%)
Output current peak
0.01 A 11 Pr.56
value
200 V class: 400 V,
Converter output voltage
0.1 V 12 400 V class: 800 V,
peak value
575 V class: 1000 V
Inverter rated power ×
Output power*1 0.01 kW 14
2
Load meter 0.1% 17 Pr.866
Motor excitation current 0.01 A 18 Pr.56
Terminal FM: 1440 pulse/s is
Reference voltage output — 21 — output.
Terminal AM: Output is 10 V.
Motor load factor 0.1% 24 200%
Torque command 0.1% 32 Pr.866 ○
Torque current command 0.1% 33 Pr.866 ○
Motor output 0.01 kW 34 Rated motor capacity
Increment and unit
For the information of the power
vary depending on
Energy saving effect 50 Inverter capacity saving effect monitoring, refer to
the parameter
page 244.
settings.
PID set point 0.1% 52 100%
PID measured value 0.1% 53 100% Refer to page 338 for the PID
control.
PID deviation 0.1% 54*2 100% ○
Motor thermal
Motor thermal load factor 0.1% 61 activation level
(100%)
Inverter thermal
Inverter thermal load
0.1% 62 activation level
factor
(100%)
Refer to page 338 for the PID
PID measured value 2 0.1% 67 100%
control.
Enabled when Pr.414 ≠ "0".
PLC function analog
0.1% 70 100% ○ Refer to page 364 for the PLC
output
function.
Refer to page 338 for the PID
PID manipulated amount 0.1% 91*2 100% ○
control.
Dancer main speed For details on dancer control, refer
0.01 Hz. 97 Pr.55
setting to page 344.
*1 The inverter regards the output current which is less than the specified current level (5% of the rated inverter current) as 0 A. Therefore, each
readout of an output current and output power may show "0" if a too small-capacity motor is used as contrasted with the inverter capacity and the
output current falls below the specified value.
*2 The setting is available only in Pr.158 (terminal AM).

 Frequency monitor reference (Pr.55)

• Enter the full scale value of a meter used to monitor the output frequency, frequency setting value, or dancer main speed
setting via terminal FM or terminal AM.
• For the FM type inverter, enter the full-scale value of the meter corresponding to a pulse train of 1440 pulses/s output via
terminal FM. Enter the frequency value (for example, 60 Hz or 120 Hz) at full scale of the meter (1 mA analog meter)
installed between terminal FM and terminal SD. Pulse speed is proportional to the output frequency of the inverter. (The
maximum pulse train output is 2400 pulses/s.)

238 11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.3 Monitor display selection for terminals FM and AM
 Pulse speed (pulses/s)
2400 11
1440

12
1Hz 60Hz Output frequency 590Hz
(initial value)
13
Setting range of Pr.55
• Enter the full-scale value of the meter corresponding to a voltage of 10 VDC output via terminal AM. Enter the current value
(for example, 60 Hz or 120 Hz) at full scale of the meter (10 VDC voltmeter) installed between terminal AM and terminal 14
5. Output voltage is proportional to the frequency. (The maximum output voltage is 10 VDC.)

Output voltage
15
10VDC

16
60Hz
60Hz *1 590Hz

17
(initial value)
*2
Setting range of Pr.55
-10VDC

*1 Differs depending on the parameter initial value group. (60/50 Hz) 18

*2 Output of negative signals enabled when Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection = "1, 5, 9, or 13".

 Current monitor reference (Pr.56)

• Enter the full scale value of a meter used to monitor the output current, the output current peak value, or the motor
19
excitation current via terminal FM or terminal AM.
• For the FM type inverter, enter the full-scale value of the meter corresponding to a pulse train of 1440 pulses/s output via
terminal FM. Enter the current value at full scale of the meter (1 mA analog meter) installed between terminal FM and
20
terminal SD. Pulse speed is proportional to the output current monitored. (The maximum pulse train output is 2400 pulses/
s.)
• Enter the full-scale value of the current meter corresponding to a voltage of 10 VDC output via terminal AM. Enter the
current value at full scale of the meter (10 VDC voltmeter) installed between terminal AM and terminal 5. Output voltage is
proportional to the output current monitored. (The maximum output voltage is 10 VDC.)

 Torque monitor reference (Pr.866)

• Enter the full-scale value of the meter used to monitor the output torque via terminal FM or terminal AM.
• For the FM type inverter, enter the full-scale value of the torque meter corresponding to a pulse train of 1440 pulses/s
output via terminal FM. Enter the torque value at full scale of the meter (1 mA analog meter) installed between terminal FM
and terminal SD. Pulse speed is proportional to the torque monitored. (The maximum pulse train output is 2400 pulses/s.)
• Enter the full-scale value of the torque meter corresponding to a voltage of 10 VDC output via terminal AM. Enter the torque
value at full scale of the meter (10 VDC voltmeter) installed between terminal AM and terminal 5. Output voltage is
proportional to the torque monitored. (The maximum output voltage is 10 VDC.)

 Terminal FM pulse train output

• The maximum pulse train output of terminal FM is 8 VDC 2400 pulses/s.
The pulse width can be adjusted on the operation panel by using the calibration parameter C0 FM terminal calibration.
• A 1 mA full-scale DC ammeter or a digital meter can be used to give commands (such as inverter output frequency
command).

11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.3 Monitor display selection for terminals FM and AM
239
 FM output circuit

Inverter
24V

2.2K 3.3K FM

20K SD

Indicator
1mA full-scale (Digital indicator)
analog meter
1mA 1440 pulses/s(+) (-)
FM FM
(+) (-) T1

Calibration
resistor *1 8VDC
SD SD
T2
Pulse width T1: Adjust using calibration parameter C0
Pulse cycle T2: Set with Pr.55 (frequency monitor)
Set with Pr.56 (current monitor)
*1 Not required when calibrating with operation panel.
Use a calibration resistor when the indicator (frequency meter) needs to be calibrated by a neighboring device because the indicator is located
far from the inverter.
However, the frequency meter needle may not deflect to full-scale if the calibration resistor is connected. In this case, use the resistor and
operation panel together.
*2 In the initial setting, 1 mA full-scale and 1440 pulses/s terminal FM are used at 60 Hz.

240 11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.3 Monitor display selection for terminals FM and AM
11.4 Adjustment of terminal FM and terminal AM 11

By using the operation panel, you can adjust (calibrate) terminal FM and terminal AM to full-scale deflection.
12
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
C0
FM terminal calibration — — Calibrates the scale of the meter connected to terminal FM.
M310*1
C1
13
Calibrates the scale of the analog meter connected to terminal
AM terminal calibration — —
M320*2 AM.
867
M321*2
AM output filter 0.01 s 0 to 5 s Set a filter for output via terminal AM.
14
1200
AM output offset calibration 3000 2700 to 3300 Calibrates the scale of the meter when the analog output is 0.
M390*2
*1
*2
The setting is available only for the FR-E800-1.
The setting is available only for the FR-E800-4 and FR-E800-5.
15
 Terminal FM calibration (C0) (FM type only)
• The output via terminal FM is set to the pulse output. By setting C0, the meter connected to the inverter can be calibrated 16
by parameter setting without use of a calibration resistor.
• The pulse train output via terminal FM can be used for digital display on a digital counter. The output is 1440 pulses/s at
full scale. (Refer to page 237 for the full-scale value of each monitor item.) 17
Indicator
1mA full-scale (Digital indicator)
1mA
analog meter
1440 pulses/s(+) (-) 18
FM FM
(+) (-) T1

Calibration

SD
resistor *1 8VDC
SD
19
T2
Pulse width T1: Adjust using calibration parameter C0
Pulse cycle T2: Set with Pr.55 (frequency monitor)
Set with Pr.56 (current monitor)
20
*1 Not required when calibrating with operation panel.
Use a calibration resistor when the indicator (frequency meter) needs to be calibrated by a neighboring device because the indicator is located
far from the inverter.
However, the frequency meter needle may not deflect to full-scale if the calibration resistor is connected. In this case, perform calibration using
the operation panel.
*2 In the initial setting, 1 mA full-scale and 1440 pulses/s terminal FM are used at 60 Hz.

• Calibrate the output via terminal FM in the following procedure.

1. Connect an indicator (frequency meter) across terminals FM and SD on the inverter. (Note the polarity. Terminal FM
is positive.)

2. When a calibration resistor has already been connected, adjust the resistance to "0" or remove the resistor.

3. Set a monitor item in Pr.54 FM terminal function selection. (Refer to page 237.)
When the output frequency or inverter output current is selected on the monitor, set the output frequency or current
value at which the output signal will be 1440 pulses/s, using Pr.55 Frequency monitoring reference or Pr.56
Current monitoring reference beforehand. Normally, at 1440 pulses/s the meter deflects to full-scale.

4. If the meter needle does not point to maximum even at maximum output, calibrate it with C0.

11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.4 Adjustment of terminal FM and terminal AM
241
 NOTE
• When outputting an item such as the output current, which cannot reach a 100% value easily by operation, set Pr.54 to "21"
(reference voltage output) and calibrate. A pulse train of 1440 pulses/s are output via terminal FM.
• When Pr.310 Analog meter voltage output selection = "21", the output via terminal AM cannot be calibrated. For the details
of Pr.310, refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-A8AY.
• The wiring length to terminal FM should be 200 m at maximum.
• The initial value of the calibration parameter C0 is set to 1 mA full-scale and 1440 pulses/s terminal FM pulse train output at
60 Hz. The maximum pulse train output of terminal FM is 2400 pulses/s.
• When connecting a frequency meter between terminals FM and SD and monitoring the output frequency, it is necessary to
change Pr.55 to the maximum frequency, since the FM terminal output will be saturated at the initial value when the maximum
frequency reaches 100 Hz or greater.

 Calibration procedure for terminal FM when using the operation panel

Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode

Press the PU/EXT key to choose the PU operation mode. The PU LED turns ON.
Calibration is also possible in the External operation mode.

3. Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)

4. Calibration parameter selection

Turn the setting dial until "C..." appears. Press the SET key to display "C---".

5. Selecting a parameter
Turn the setting dial until "C0" (C0 FM terminal calibration) appears. Press the SET key to enable the parameter
setting.
The monitored value of the item (initially the output frequency) selected by Pr.54 FM terminal function selection
will appear.

6. Pulse output via terminal FM

If stopped, press the RUN key to start the inverter operation. (To monitor the output frequency, motor connection is
not required.)
When a monitor that does not require inverter operation is set in Pr.54, calibration is also possible during a stop
status.

7. Scale adjustment
Turn the setting dial to move the meter needle to a desired position.

8. Setting completed
Press the SET key to confirm the setting. The monitor indicator blinks.
• Turn the setting dial to read another parameter.
• Press the SET key to return to the "C---" display.
• Press the SET key twice to show the next parameter.

NOTE
• Calibration can also be made for External operation. Set the frequency in the External operation mode, and make calibration
in the above procedure.
• Calibration can be performed during operation.

242 11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.4 Adjustment of terminal FM and terminal AM
 Terminal AM calibration (C1) (AM type only)
• Terminal AM is initially set to provide a 10 VDC output in the full-scale state of the corresponding monitor item. The 11
calibration parameter C1 AM terminal calibration allows the output voltage ratio (gains) to be adjusted according to the
meter scale. Note that the maximum output voltage is 10 VDC.

Inverter 12
AM

10VDC
13
5

• Calibrate the output via terminal AM in the following procedure. 14

1. Connect a 0-10 VDC indicator (frequency meter) across terminal AM and terminal 5 on the inverter. (Note the
polarity. Terminal AM is positive.)
15
2. Set a monitor item in Pr.158 AM terminal function selection. (Refer to page 237.)
When the output frequency or inverter output current is selected on the monitor, set the output frequency or current
value at which the output signal is 10 V, using Pr.55 or Pr.56 beforehand. 16
3. If the meter needle does not point to maximum even at maximum output, calibrate it with C1.

NOTE 17
• When outputting an item such as the output current, which cannot reach a 100% value easily by operation, set Pr.158 to "21"
(reference voltage output) and calibrate. A voltage of 10 VDC is output via terminal AM.
• When Pr.306 Analog output signal selection = "21", the output via terminal AM cannot be calibrated. For the details of
Pr.306, refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-A8AY.
18
• Use Pr.290 Monitor negative output selection to enable negative signals output via terminal AM. The output voltage range
is -10 to +10 VDC. Calibrate the maximum positive value output via terminal AM.
19
 Calibration when 0 V is output via terminal AM (Pr.1200)
• When 0 is output via terminal AM, use Pr.1200 AM output offset calibration to calibrate the meter. If the meter needle
does not point to 0 while 0 is output via terminal AM, set a value in Pr.1200 so that the needle points to 0.
20
• Set a larger value in Pr.1200 when the needle points a minus output voltage while the 0 is output via terminal AM. Set a
smaller value in Pr.1200 when the needle points a plus output voltage while the 0 is output via terminal AM.

 Adjusting the response of terminal AM (Pr.867)

• Use Pr.867 to adjust the output voltage response of the terminal AM in the range of 0 to 5 seconds.
• Increasing the setting stabilizes the output via terminal AM more but reduces the response level. (Setting "0" sets the
response level to 6 ms.)

Parameters referred to
Pr.54 FM terminal function selectionpage 228
Pr.55 Frequency monitoring referencepage 228
Pr.56 Current monitoring referencepage 228
Pr.158 AM terminal function selectionpage 228
Pr.290 Monitor negative output selectionpage 228

11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.4 Adjustment of terminal FM and terminal AM
243
 11.5 Energy saving monitoring
From the power consumption estimated value during commercial power supply operation, the energy saving effect by use of
the inverter can be monitored and output.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

52 Operation panel main 0 (output
M100 monitor selection frequency)
774 Operation panel monitor
M101 selection 1
775 Operation panel monitor
9999 Refer to page 50: Energy saving effect monitoring,
M102 selection 2
228. 51: Cumulative energy saving monitoring
776 Operation panel monitor
M103 selection 3
Operation panel setting
992
dial push monitor 0 (set frequency)
M104
selection
54 FM terminal function
M300*1 selection 1 (output Refer to page
50: Energy saving effect monitoring
158 AM terminal function frequency) 237.
M301*2 selection
Set the number of times to move the digit of cumulative power
Cumulative power 0 to 4 monitored value. The readout peaks out at the upper limit of
891
monitor digit shifted 9999 readout.
M023
times The function of moving the decimal point is not available. The
9999
readout is reset to 0 when it exceeds the upper limit.
Set the load factor for the commercial power supply operation.
892 The setting is used for calculation of the estimated power
Load factor 100% 30% to 150%
M200 consumption during commercial power supply operation by
being multiplied by the power consumption rate (page 248).
Energy saving monitor Set the motor capacity (pump capacity). Setting this parameter
893 Inverter rated
reference (motor 0.1 to 30 kW is required for calculating the rate of saved power, the rate of
M201 capacity
capacity) average energy saving, and the commercial power.
0 Discharge damper control (fan)
Control selection during
894 1 Inlet damper control (fan)
commercial power- 0
M202 2 Valve control (pump)
supply operation
3 Commercial power supply drive (fixed value)
0 Consider the commercial power as 100%.
895 Power saving rate
9999 1 Consider the power set in Pr.893 as 100%
M203 reference value
9999 No function
Set the power unit cost. Setting this parameter is required for
896 0 to 500 displaying the energy cost savings in the energy saving
Power unit cost 9999 monitoring.
M204
9999 No function
0 The time period for averaging is 30 minutes.
897 Power saving monitor
9999 1 to 1000 h Set the number of hours for averaging.
M205 average time
9999 No function
0 Clear the cumulative monitor value
1 Hold the cumulative monitor value
898 Power saving cumulative
9999 10 Continue accumulation (upper limit communication data is 9999)
M206 monitor clear
Continue accumulation (upper limit communication data is
9999
65535)
Setting this parameter is required for calculating the annual
899 Operation time rate 0% to 100% energy saving. Set an annual operating rate (considering a 24-
9999
M207 (estimated value) hours-a-day and 365-days-a-year operation as 100%).
9999 No function
*1 The setting is available only for the FR-E800-1.
*2 The setting is available only for the FR-E800-4 and FR-E800-5.

244 11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.5 Energy saving monitoring
 Energy saving monitoring list
• The items in the energy saving effect monitoring (items which can be monitored when "50" is set in Pr.52, Pr.54, Pr.158, 11
Pr.774 to Pr.776, and Pr.992) are listed below.
(The items which can be monitored via terminal FM (Pr.54 setting) and via terminal AM (Pr.158 setting) are limited to [1
Power saving] and [3 Average power saving].) 12
Energy saving Unit and Parameter setting
Description and formula
monitor item increment Pr.895 Pr.896 Pr.897 Pr.899
It is defined as the difference between the
estimated value of the required power during
13
commercial power supply operation and the
1 Power saving 0.01 kW 9999
input power calculated with the inverter.
[Power required for commercial power supply
operation] - [Input power]
14
It is defined as the power saving expressed as a
percentage. The rate of the power saving with
respect to the estimated input power for the
commercial power supply operation is — 9999
15
0
determined using the following formula.
[1 Power saving]
×100
2 Power saving rate Power during commercial power supply operation 0.1%
16
The rate of the power saving with respect to the
Pr.893 setting is determined using the following
formula.
[1 Power saving]
1
17
× 100
Pr.893
It is defined as the average hourly energy saving

3 Average power saving

during a monitoring time (set in Pr.897).
0.01 kWh 9999
— 18
∑ ([1 Power saving] × ∆t)
Pr.897
It is defined as the average hourly energy saving
expressed as a percentage. The rate of the 19
average hourly energy saving with respect to the
estimated input power for the commercial power
supply operation is determined using the 0
following formula.
9999
20
Average power saving ∑ ([2 Power saving rate] × ∆t) 0 to 1000 h
4 × 100 0.1%
rate Pr.897
The rate of the average hourly energy saving
with respect to the Pr.893 setting is determined
using the following formula. 1
[3 Average power saving]
× 100
Pr.893
It is defined as a monetary value of the average
Average power cost hourly energy saving, determined using the
5 0.01/0.1 — 0 to 500
savings following formula.
[3 Average power saving] × Pr.896 setting

11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.5 Energy saving monitoring
245
 • The items in the cumulative energy saving monitoring (items which can be monitored when "51" is set in Pr.52, Pr.774 to
Pr.776, and Pr.992) are listed below.
(The digit of the cumulative energy saving monitored value can be moved to the right according to the setting of Pr.891
Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times.)

Energy saving Unit and Parameter setting

Description and formula
monitor item increment Pr.895 Pr.896 Pr.897 Pr.899
It is defined as a cumulative energy saving during
Power saving monitoring, determined by multiplying the saved 0.01
6 — 9999
amount power by the number of inverter operating hours. kWh*1
Σ ([1 Power saving] × Δt) 9999
It is defined as a monetary value of the cumulative
7 Power cost savings energy saving. 0.01*1 — 0 to 500
[6 Power saving amount] × Pr.896 setting
—
It is defined as an estimated annual energy saving.
Annual power saving [6 Power saving amount] Pr.899 0.01
8 × 24 × 365 × — 9999
amount Operation time during power 100 kWh*1
0% to
saving accumulation
100%
It is defined as a monetary value of annual energy
Annual power cost
9
savings
saving. 0.01*1 — 0 to 500
[8 Annual power saving amount] × Pr.896 setting
*1 For monitoring via communication, the increments are 1 in no units. For example, a value "10.00 kWh" is converted into "10" for communication
data.

NOTE
• The operation panel have a 4-digit display. This means, for example, that a monitored value up to "99.99" is displayed in 0.01
increments and a monitor value of 1000 or more is displayed in 0.1 increments as "100.0". The maximum monitored value
displayed is "9999".
• The maximum monitored value via communication is 65535 when Pr.898 Power saving cumulative monitor clear = "9999".
The maximum monitored value on monitoring in 0.01 increments is "655.35", and that on monitoring in 0.1 increments is
"6553.5".

 Power saving real-time monitoring ([1 Power saving], [2 Power saving

rate])
• During [1 Power saving] monitoring, an energy saving effect (power difference) of using the inverter as compared to the
commercial power supply operation is calculated and displayed on the main monitor.
• In the following cases, the monitored value of [1 Power saving] is "0".
The result of calculating the saved power is negative value.
DC injection brake works.
The motor is not connected with the inverter (monitored value of output
current is 0 A).

• On [2 Power saving rate] monitoring, the rate of the saved power considering the consumed power (estimate) during the
power supply operation as 100% is displayed when Pr.895 Power saving rate reference value is set to "0". When Pr.895
is set to "1", the rate of the saved power with respect to the setting of Pr.893 Energy saving monitor reference (motor
capacity) that is referenced as 100% is displayed.

 Average power saving monitoring ([3 Average power saving], [4 Average

power saving rate], [5 Average power cost savings])
• The average power saving monitors are displayed by setting a value other than 9999 in Pr.897 Power saving monitor
average time.
• On [3 Average power saving] monitoring, the average hourly energy saving every preset time period is displayed.

246 11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.5 Energy saving monitoring
 • When the setting of Pr.897 is changed, when the inverter is powered ON, or when the inverter is reset, the averaging is
restarted. The Energy saving average value updated timing (Y92) signal is inverted every time the averaging is restarted.
11
When Pr.897=4 [Hr] Power
is off
Pr.897
Power saving During stop
instantaneous
value [kW] 12
Time
0 4 8 12 16 20
Operation start Average Average Last value
Average
Average power
saving [kW]
0 in the first
measurement
Average
Time
13
Stores Hi/Low when the
power is off and starts.
Y92
0 4 8 12 16 0 4 14
• On [4 Average power saving rate] monitoring, the average hourly monitored value of [2 Power saving rate]) is displayed
when Pr.895 Power saving rate reference value is set to "0 or 1".
• On [5 Average power cost savings] monitoring, a monetary value of the average hourly energy saving ([3 Average 15
power saving] × Pr.896 setting) is displayed when the unit price, power cost per kilowatt (hour), is set in Pr.896 Power
unit cost.

 Cumulative energy saving monitoring ([6 Power saving amount], [7 16

Power cost saving], [8 Annual power saving amount], [9 Annual power
cost savings]) 17
• The digit of the cumulative energy monitored value can be moved to the right by the number set in Pr.891 Cumulative
power monitor digit shifted times. For example, when Pr.891 = "2", the cumulative power value 1278.56 kWh is
displayed as 12.78 (in 100 kWh increments) on the operation panel, or displayed as 13 on a display used for monitoring
18
via communication. When Pr.891 = "0 to 4" and the cumulative energy reaches more than the upper limit of readout, the
readout peaks out at the upper limit, which indicates that moving digit is necessary. When Pr.891 = "9999" and the
cumulative energy reaches more than the upper limit of readout, cumulative value is reset to 0 and the metering restarts.
19
The readout of other items in the cumulative energy saving monitoring peaks out at the upper limit of readout.
• With the monitored value of [6 Power saving amount], a cumulative energy saving during a desired time period can be
measured. Follow this procedure.
20
1. Set "10" or "9999" in Pr.898 Power saving cumulative monitor clear.

2. Change the setting of Pr.898 to "0" when you want to start measuring the energy saving. The cumulative value is
cleared and the cumulative energy saving meter restarts.

3. Change the setting of Pr.898 to "1" when you want to stop measuring the energy saving. The meter stops and the
cumulative value is fixed.

Power saving Running During stop Running

instantaneous Power is off
value [kW]
Time
0
Accumulation
Power saving
amount [kWh]
Time
0 Accumulation start Pause
Clear (Pr.898=0)
(Pr.898=0) (Pr.898=1)
Resume accumulation
(Pr.898=10 or 9999)

NOTE
• The cumulative value of energy saving is refreshed every hour. This means that the last cumulative value is displayed at a
restart of the inverter and the cumulative meter restarts if the time elapsed between turning OFF and re-turning ON of the
inverter is shorter than an hour. (In some cases, the cumulative energy value may decrease.)

11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.5 Energy saving monitoring
247
  Estimated input power for the commercial power supply operation
(Pr.892, Pr.893, Pr.894)
• Select the pattern of the commercial power supply operation from among four patterns (discharge damper control (fan),
suction damper control (fan), valve control (pump) and commercial power drive), and set it in Pr.894 Control selection
during commercial power-supply operation.
• Set the motor capacity (pump capacity) in Pr.893 Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity).
• Refer to the following graph to find the rate of power consumption (%) during commercial power supply operation based
on the selected pattern and the rate of motor rotations per minute with respect to the rated speed (the result of dividing the
present output frequency by Pr.3 Base frequency setting).
Commercial power-supply drive
110
100
Discharge side
90 damper control
(fan)
Power consumption [%]

80
Valve control
70 (pump)

60
50
40 Inlet damper control
(fan)
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100110
Ratio of speed to rating [%]

• The estimated input power (kW) for the commercial power supply operation is calculated from the motor capacity set in
Pr.893, the setting of Pr.892 Load factor, and the rate of power consumption using the following formula.

Estimated consumed power during Consumed power (%) Pr.892 (%)

commercial power supply operation (kW) ＝ Pr.893 (kW) × 100
×
100

NOTE
• If the output frequency rises to the setting of Pr.3 Base frequency or higher, it stays at a constant value because the rotations
per minute cannot rise higher than the power supply frequency during commercial power supply operation.

 Annual energy saving and its monetary value (Pr.899)

• When the operation time rate (ratio of the time period in year when the inverter drives the motor) [%] is set in Pr.899, the
annual energy saving effect can be estimated.
• When the inverter is operated in specific patterns, the estimate annual energy saving can be calculated by measuring the
energy saving in a certain period.
• Refer to the following procedure to set the operation time rate.

1. Estimate the average operation time per day (h/day).

2. Calculate the operation days per year (days/year) using the following formula: Average operation days per month ×
12 (months).

3. Calculate the annual operation time (h/year) from values determined in Step 1 and Step 2, using the following
formula.
Annual operation time (h/year) = average time (h/day) × number of operation days (days/year)

4. Calculate the operation time rate using the following formula, and set it in Pr.899.
Annual operation time (h/year)
Operation time rate (%) = × 100(%)
24 (h/day) × 365 (days/year)

248 11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.5 Energy saving monitoring
 NOTE
• Setting example for operation time rate: In the case where the average operation time per day is about 21 hours and the 11
average operation days per month is 16 days.
Annual operation time = 21 (h/day) × 16 (days/month) × 12 (months) = 4032 (h/year)

Operation time rate (%) =

4032 (h/year)
× 100(%) ＝ 46.03% 12
24 (h/day) × 365 (days/year)

Therefore, set 46.03% in Pr.899.

13
• Calculate the annual energy saving from the value of [3 Average power saving] cumulated according to the setting of
Pr.899 Operation time rate (estimated value).

With Pr.898 = 10 or 9999, average power Pr.899

14
Annual power saving amount (kWh/year) = × 24h × 365 days ×
saving (kW) during cumulative period 100

• When the power cost per hour is set in Pr.896 Power unit cost, the annual energy cost savings can be monitored.
15
The annual energy cost savings is determined by calculation using the following formula.
Annual power cost saving = annual power saving amount (kWh/year) × Pr.896

NOTE 16
• During regenerative driving, substitute the output power during the commercial power supply operation for the saved power
(therefore, input power = 0).
17
Parameters referred to
Pr.3 Base frequencypage 376
Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selectionpage 228
Pr.54 FM terminal function selectionpage 237 18
Pr.158 AM terminal function selectionpage 237

19

20

11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.5 Energy saving monitoring
249
 11.6 Output terminal function selection
Use the following parameters to change the functions of the open collector output terminals and relay output terminals.

Initial
Pr. Name Signal name Setting range
value
190 RUN terminal 0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16, 20, 25, 26, 34, 35, 39 to
0 RUN (Inverter running)
M400 function selection 41, 44 to 48, 57, 64, 70, 80, 81, 90 to 93, 95, 96,
For open 98, 99, 100, 101, 103, 104, 107, 108, 111 to 116,
collector output 120, 125, 126, 134, 135, 139 to 141, 144 to 148,
191 NET Y2 output FU (Output frequency 157, 164, 170, 180, 181, 190 to 193, 195, 196,
terminal 4
M404 selection detection) 198, 199, 206, 211 to 213, 242, 306, 311 to 313,
342, 9999*1
0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16, 20, 25, 26, 34, 35, 39 to
41, 44 to 48, 57, 64, 70, 80 to 82, 90, 91, 95, 96,
98, 99, 100, 101, 103, 104, 107, 108, 111 to 116,
192 A,B,C terminal For relay output 120, 125, 126, 134, 135, 139 to 141, 144 to 148,
99 ALM (Fault)
M405 function selection terminal 157, 164, 170, 180 to 182, 190, 191, 195, 196,
198, 199, 206, 211 to 213, 242, 306, 311 to 313,
342, 9999*1
193 NET Y1 output 0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16, 20, 25, 26, 34, 35, 39 to
M451 selection 41, 44 to 48, 57, 64, 70, 80, 81, 90 to 93, 95, 98,
194 NET Y2 output Virtual output 99, 100, 101, 103, 104, 107, 108, 111 to 116,
M452 selection terminal for 120, 125, 126, 134, 135, 139 to 141, 144 to 148,
9999 No function 157, 164, 170, 180, 181, 190 to 193, 195, 198,
195 NET Y3 output communication
operation 199, 206, 211 to 213, 242, 306, 311 to 313, 342,
M453 selection
196 NET Y4 output 9999*1
M454 selection
313 DO0 output
9999 No function
M410*2 selection
314 DO1 output
9999 No function
M411*2 selection
315 DO2 output 0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16, 20, 25, 26, 34, 35, 39,
9999 No function 40, 41, 44 to 48, 57, 64, 70, 80, 81, 90 to 93, 95,
M412*2 selection
96, 98, 99, 100, 101, 103, 104, 107, 108, 111 to
316 DO3 output
9999 No function 116, 120, 125, 126, 134, 135, 139, 140, 141, 144
M413*2 selection to 148, 157, 164, 170, 180, 181, 190 to 193, 195,
317 DO4 output 196, 198, 199, 206, 211 to 213, 242, 306, 311 to
9999 No function
M414*2 selection For terminal on 313, 342, 9999*1
318 DO5 output the option
9999 No function
M415*2 selection
319 DO6 output
9999 No function
M416*2 selection
320
RA1 output selection 0 RUN (Inverter running)
M420*2
0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16, 20, 25, 26, 34, 35, 39,
321
*2 RA2 output selection 1 SU (Up to frequency) 40, 41, 44 to 48, 57, 64, 70, 80, 81, 90, 91, 95,
M421
96, 98, 99, 206, 211 to 213, 242, 9999*1
322 FU (Output frequency
RA3 output selection 4
M422*2 detection)

Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
289 Inverter output terminal 5 to 50 ms Set the time delay for the output terminal response.
9999
M431 filter 9999 No filtering of the output terminal.
*1 The setting range differs depending on the model. For the details, refer to Output signal list.
*2 The setting is available when the PLC function is enabled. (Pr.313 to Pr.315 are always available for settings in the Ethernet model.)

 Assignment of output signals

• The signals can be assigned to the open collector output terminals (2 terminals) and relay output terminal (1 terminal),
which are provided as the output terminals of the inverter. (The open collector output terminals are provided only with the
standard model.)

250 11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.6 Output terminal function selection
 • The signals can be output via communication, or assigned to the extension terminals of the plug-in option (FR-A8AY or
FR-A8AR).
11
External output terminal Option output terminal (physical
Terminal Output via
Pr. (physical terminal) terminal)*2
name communication*1
FR-E800 FR-E800-E FR-A8AY FR-A8AR
190 RUN ○ — ○ — — 12
191 FU ○ — ○ — —
192 A,B,C ○ ○ ○ — —
193 NET Y1 — — ○ — — 13
194 NET Y2 — — ○ — —
195 NET Y3 — — ○ — —
196 NET Y4 — — ○ — —
313 DO0 — — ○ ○ — 14
314 DO1 — — ○ ○ —
315 DO2 — — ○ ○ —
316
317
DO3
DO4
—
—
—
—
—
—
○
○
—
—
15
318 DO5 — — — ○ —
319 DO6 — — — ○ —
320 RA1 — — — — ○ 16
321 RA2 — — — — ○
322 RA3 — — — — ○

○: Assignment/output available, ─: Assignment/output unavailable (no function) 17

*1 The communication protocol affects which terminal can be used. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual (Communication) or the Instruction
Manual of the communication option.
*2 Refer to the Instruction Manual of the option for details on the option output terminals.
18
 Output signal list
• A function listed below can be set to each output terminal.
• Refer to the following table and set the parameters. (0 to 99, 200 to 299: Positive logic, 100 to 199, 300 to 399: Negative 19
logic)

Setting
Positive Negative
Signal
Function Operation
Related
Refer to page
20
name parameter
logic logic
Output during operation when the inverter
0 100 RUN Inverter running output frequency reaches Pr.13 Starting — 254
frequency or higher.
Output when the output frequency reaches
1 101 SU Up to frequency *1 the set frequency.
Pr.41 257

Output while the stall prevention function Pr.22, Pr.23,

3 103 OL Overload warning 214
works. Pr.66, Pr.154
Output when the output frequency reaches
Output frequency
4 104 FU the frequency set in Pr.42 (Pr.43 during Pr.42, Pr.43 257
detection
reverse rotation) or higher.
Regenerative brake Output when the regenerative brake duty
7 107 RBP Pr.70 386
prealarm reaches 85% of the setting of Pr.70.
Output when the cumulative electronic
thermal O/L relay value reaches 85% of the
Electronic thermal O/L
8 108 THP trip level. (The electronic thermal O/L relay Pr.9 198
relay pre-alarm
function (E.THT/E.THM) is activated when
the value reaches 100%.)
Output when the reset process is completed
after powering ON the inverter or when the
11 111 RY Inverter operation ready — 254
inverter is ready to start operation with the
start signal ON or during operation.
Output when the output current is higher
12 112 Y12 Output current detection than the Pr.150 setting for the time set in Pr.150, Pr.151 260
Pr.151 or longer.
Output when the output current is lower than
13 113 Y13 Zero current detection the Pr.152 setting for the time set in Pr.153 Pr.152, Pr.153 260
or longer.

11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.6 Output terminal function selection
251
 Setting
Signal Related
Positive Negative Function Operation Refer to page
name parameter
logic logic
Output when the input value is lower than
14 114 FDN PID lower limit the lower limit set for the PID control
operation.
Pr.127 to
Output when the input value is higher than
Pr.134, Pr.575 329
15 115 FUP PID upper limit the upper limit set for the PID control
to Pr.577
operation.
PID forward/reverse Output during forward rotation operation in
16 116 RL
rotation output the PID control operation.
Output to release the brake while the brake Pr.278 to
20 120 BOF Brake opening request 320
sequence function is enabled. Pr.283, Pr.292
25 125 FAN Fan fault output Output when a fan fault occurs. Pr.244 203
Output when the heat sink temperature rises
Instruction
Heat sink overheat pre- to 85% of temperature at which the
26 126 FIN — Manual
alarm protective function of the Heat sink overheat
(Maintenance)
is activated.
Output when the output frequency drops to
34 134 LS Low speed detection Pr.865 257
the Pr.865 setting or lower.
Output when the motor torque is higher than
35 135 TU Torque detection Pr.864 262
the Pr.864 setting.
Start time tuning
39 139 Y39 Output when the start-time tuning complete. Pr.95, Pr.574 315
completion
Pr.1020 to
40 140 Y40 Trace status Output during trace operation. 366
Pr.1047
Output when the actual motor rotations per
41 141 FB Speed detection minute (estimate) reaches the setting of Pr.42 257
Pr.42.
Output while the Forward rotation command
signal or Reverse rotation command signal
44 144 RUN2 Inverter running 2 is ON. Output during deceleration even — 254
while the Forward rotation command signal
or Reverse rotation command signal is OFF
Inverter running and start Output while the inverter is running or while
45 145 RUN3 — 254
command ON the start command signal is ON.
Output when the power-failure deceleration
During deceleration at
function is activated.
46 146 Y46 occurrence of power Pr.261 362
(The signal output is retained until the
failure
function stops.)
Pr.127 to
During PID control
47 147 PID Output during the PID control operation. Pr.134, Pr.575 329
activated
to Pr.577
Pr.127 to
Output when the absolute deviation value
48 148 Y48 PID deviation limit Pr.134, 329
exceeds the limit value.
Pr.553, Pr.554
During PM sensorless Output while the operation is performed Pr.71 to Pr.80,
57 157 IPM 92
vector control under PM sensorless vector control. Pr.998
64 164 Y64 During retry Output during retry operation. Pr.65 to Pr.69 208
Pr.127 to
Output while PID output suspension function
70 170 SLEEP PID output interruption Pr.134, Pr.575 329
is activated.
to Pr.577
Output while the safety stop function is Instruction
80 180 SAFE Safety monitor output
activated. Manual
—
Output when no internal safety circuit failure (Functional
81 181 SAFE2 Safety monitor output 2 Safety)
exists.
Enables output from the Binary Output
object for BACnet communication. This Instruction
82 182 Y82 BACnet binary output signal can be assigned to Pr.192 only. (The Pr.549 Manual
setting is available only for the FR-E800- (Communication)
EPA.)
Pr.198, Pr.255
Output when the life check function detects to Pr.259,
90 190 Y90 Life alarm 148
the part approaching the end of its life. Pr.506,
Pr.507, Pr.509
Fault output 3 (Power- Output when the Fault occurs due to an
91 191 Y91 — 256
OFF signal) inverter circuit fault or connection fault.

252 11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.6 Output terminal function selection
 Setting
Signal Related
Positive Negative
logic logic
name
Function Operation
parameter
Refer to page
11
Switches between ON and OFF every time
the average energy saving is updated during Pr.52, Pr.54,
Energy saving average
92 192 Y92
value updated timing
the energy saving monitoring. This signal
cannot be assigned to any of the relay
Pr.158, Pr.891 244
to Pr.899 12
output terminal (Pr.192, Pr.320 to Pr.322).
Output in pulses for transmission of the

93 193 Y93 Current average monitor

average current value and the maintenance
timer value. This signal cannot be assigned
Pr.555 to
153 13
Pr.557
to any of the relay output terminal (Pr.192,
Pr.320 to Pr.322).
Output when the value of Pr.503 reaches
95 195 Y95 Maintenance timer
the Pr.504 setting or higher.
Pr.503, Pr.504 152 14
Output via a terminal by setting a proper Pr.495 to
96 196 REM Remote output 263
number in a relative parameter. Pr.497

98 198 LF Alarm
Output when an Alarm fault (fan fault or a
communication error) occurs.
Pr.121, Pr.244 203 15
Output when the inverter's protective
function is activated to stop the power output
99 199 ALM Fault — 255
(when the Fault occurs). The signal output
stops when the inverter reset starts. 16
Cooling fan operation Output when the cooling fan operation is
206 306 Y206 Pr.244 203
command commanded.

211 311 LUP

Upper limit warning
detection
Output when the load fault upper limit
warning is detected.
17
Lower limit warning Output when the load fault lower limit
212 312 LDN Pr.1480 to
detection warning is detected. 219
Pr.1492

213 313 Y213

During load
characteristics
Output during measurement of the load 18
characteristics.
measurement
Output when the inverter receives a

242 342 LNK Inverter-to-inverter linkup

response from all the slave inverters during
initial communication, or when the inverter
Pr.1124,
Instruction
Manual
19
Pr.1125
returns a response to the master. (Available (Communication)
for the Ethernet model only.)
9999 — No function — — —
20
*1 Note that changing the frequency setting with an analog signal or the setting dial on the operation panel may cause the turning ON and OFF of
Up to frequency (SU) signal depending on its changing speed and the timing of the speed change determined by the acceleration/deceleration
time setting. (The signal state changing does not occur when the acceleration/deceleration time is set to 0 second.)

NOTE
• One function can be assigned to more than one terminal.
• The function works during the terminal conducts when the parameter setting is any of "0 to 99, 200 to 299", and the function
works during the terminal does not conduct when the setting is "100 to 199, 300 to 399".
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• Do not assign the signal to terminals A, B, and C which frequently changes its state between ON and OFF. Otherwise, the life
of the relay contact may be shortened.

 Adjusting the output terminal response level (Pr.289)

• The responsivity of the output terminals can be delayed in a range between 5 to 50 ms. (The following is the operation
example of the RUN signal.)
Output frequency

Time
RUN ON OFF
Pr.289 = 9999
ON OFF
RUN
Pr.289 ≠ 9999
Pr.289 Pr.289

11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.6 Output terminal function selection
253
 NOTE
• When Pr.157 OL signal output timer is set for the Overload warning (OL) signal output, the OL signal is output after the time
period calculated by adding the Pr.289 setting to the Pr.157 setting elapsed.
• The signal output for the PLC function (see page 364) and the remote output signal via BACnet communication are not affected
by the Pr.289 setting (not filtered for responsivity).

 Inverter operation ready signals (RY signal) and inverter running signals
(RUN, RUN2, RUN3 signals)
• When the inverter is ready for operation, the Inverter operation ready (RY) signal turns ON (and stays ON during
operation).
• When the inverter output frequency reaches the setting of Pr.13 Starting frequency or higher, the inverter running signals
(RUN, RUN2 signals) turn ON. The signals are OFF while the inverter is stopped or during the DC injection brake operation.
• The Inverter running and start command ON (RUN3) signal is ON while the inverter is running or while the start command
signal is ON (When the start command signal is ON, the RUN3 signal is ON even while the inverter's protective function
is activated or while the MRS signal is ON.) The RUN3 signal is ON even during the DC injection brake operation, and the
signal is OFF when the inverter stops.

Power ON OFF
supply
ON OFF
STF
ON
RH
Output frequency

DC injection brake
operation point

DC injection
brake
Pr. 13 operation

Reset Time
processing

ON OFF
RY
RUN ON OFF
(RUN2)
ON OFF
RUN3
• The ON/OFF state of each signal according to the inverter operating status is shown in the matrix below.
Automatic restart after
Inverter output
Start signal During DC instantaneous power failure
Start signal Start signal shutoff*2
Output ON injection During coasting Inverter
OFF (inverter ON (inverter
signal (inverter brake running
stopped) stopped) Start Start Start Start
running) operation after
signal ON signal OFF signal ON signal OFF
restart
RY*3 ON ON ON ON OFF ON*1 ON
RUN OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON
RUN2 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON
RUN3 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON

*1 The signal is OFF during power failure or undervoltage.

*2 This means the state during a fault occurrence or while the MRS signal is ON, etc.
*3 The signal is OFF while power is not supplied to the main circuit.

 Operation under Real sensorless vector control and PM sensorless vector control
• When the inverter is ready for operation, the Inverter operation ready (RY) signal turns ON (and stays ON during
operation).
• When the inverter output frequency reaches the setting of Pr.13 Starting frequency or higher, the Inverter running (RUN)
turns ON. The signal is OFF during an inverter stop, during the DC injection brake operation, during tuning at start-up, or
during zero speed control.
• The Inverter running 2 (RUN2) signal is ON while the inverter is running or while the start command signal is ON. (When
the inverter's protective function is activated or the MRS signal is ON, the RUN2 signal turns OFF.)

254 11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.6 Output terminal function selection
 • The Inverter running and start command ON (RUN3) signal is ON while the inverter is running or while the start command
signal is ON.
• The RUN2 and RUN3 signals are also ON when the start command signal is ON or during zero speed control with the
11
speed command value 0.

Power
supply ON OFF
12
STF ON OFF

RH ON 13
MRS ON

14
Output frequency

Zero speed control 15

Pr. 13
Reset
Time
processing

ON OFF
16
RY
ON OFF
RUN

RUN2
ON OFF
17
ON OFF
RUN3

• The ON/OFF state of each signal according to the inverter operating status is shown in the matrix below.
18
During DC Automatic restart after
Start signal Start signal Start Inverter output
injection brake instantaneous power failure
Output OFF ON*1 (zero signal ON shutoff*3
operation During coasting Inverter
signal (inverter
stopped)
speed
control)
(inverter
running)
(zero speed Start Start Start Start running 19
control) signal ON signal OFF signal ON signal OFF after restart
RY*4 ON ON ON ON OFF ON*2 ON
RUN OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 20
RUN2 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON
RUN3 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
*1 When the start signal is ON and the frequency command is 0 Hz, such state is designated as "during zero speed control".
*2 The signal is OFF during power failure or undervoltage.
*3 This means the state during a fault occurrence or while the MRS signal is ON, etc.
*4 The signal is OFF while power is not supplied to the main circuit.
• To use the RY, RUN, RUN2, or RUN3 signal, set the corresponding number selected from the following table in any
parameter from Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to an output terminal.
Pr.190 to Pr.196 settings
Output signal
Positive logic Negative logic
RY 11 111
RUN 0 100
RUN2 44 144
RUN3 45 145

NOTE
• The RUN signal (positive logic) is initially assigned to the terminal RUN (standard models only).

 Fault output (ALM) signal

• The fault signal (ALM signal) is output when an inverter protective function is activated.

11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.6 Output terminal function selection
255
 • The ALM signal is assigned to the terminals A, B, and C in the initial status.
Output frequency

Inverter fault occurrence

(trip)

Time
ALM ON OFF

RES ON OFF
Reset processing
(about 1s)
Reset ON

NOTE
• For details of the inverter faults, refer to the Instruction Manual (Maintenance).

 Input power shutoff like magnetic contactor (Y91 signal)

• The Fault output 3 (Y91) signal is output when a fault originating in the inverter circuit or a connection fault occurs.
• To use the Y91 signal, set "91" (positive logic) or "191" (negative logic) in any parameter from Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection) to assign the function to an output terminal.
• The following is the list of faults that output the Y91 signal. (For the details of faults, refer to the Instruction Manual
(Maintenance).)
Fault type
Inrush current limit circuit fault (E.IOH)
CPU fault (E.CPU)
CPU fault (E.6)
CPU fault (E.7)
Parameter storage device fault (control circuit board) (E.PE)
Parameter storage device fault (main circuit board) (E.PE2)
Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent (E.GF)
Output phase loss (E.LF)
Brake transistor alarm detection (E.BE)
Internal circuit fault (E.13)

 Changing the special relay function for the PLC function

• For the PLC function, the function of special relays (SM1225 to SM1234) can be changed by setting Pr.313 to Pr.322. (For
the details of the PLC function, refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual.)

Parameters referred to
Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 169, page 170

256 11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.6 Output terminal function selection
11.7 Output frequency detection 11

If the inverter output frequency which reaches a specific value is detected, the relative signal is output.
12
*1
Initial value Setting
Pr. Name Description
Gr.1 Gr.2 range
41
M441
Up-to-frequency
sensitivity
10% 0% to 100% Set the level where the SU signal turns ON. 13
42 Output frequency
6 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at which the FU (or FB) signal turns ON.
M442 detection

43
Output frequency
detection for reverse 9999
0 to 590 Hz
Set the frequency at which the FU (or FB) signal turns ON only
while the motor rotates in reverse direction.
14
M443
rotation 9999 The frequency same as the Pr.42 setting is set.
865
M446
Low speed detection 1.5 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at which the LS signal turns ON.
15
870 Speed detection
0 Hz 0 to 15 Hz Set the hysteresis width for the detected frequency.
M400 hysteresis
*1 Gr.1 and Gr.2 are the parameter initial value groups. (Refer to page 82).
16
 Setting the notification zone of the output frequency reaching the set
point (SU signal, Pr.41)
• The Up to frequency (SU) signal is output when the output frequency reaches the set frequency. 17
• Set the value in the range of 1% to 100% in Pr.41 to determine tolerance for the set frequency (considered as 100% point).
• It may be useful to use this signal to start operating related equipment after checking that the set frequency has been
reached. 18
• To use the SU signal, set "1" (positive logic) or "101" (negative logic) in one of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection) to assign function to an output terminal.
Set frequency Adjustment 19
Output frequency

range Pr.41

20
(Hz)

Time

OFF ON OFF
SU

 Output frequency detection (FU (FB) signal, Pr.42, Pr.43)

• The Output frequency detection (FU) signal and the Speed detection (FB) signal are output when the output frequency
reaches or exceeds the Pr.42 setting.
• The FU signal is useful for applying or releasing electromagnetic brake, etc.
• The FU signal is output when the output frequency (frequency command) reaches the set frequency. The FB signal is
output when the detected actual speed (estimated speed under Real sensorless vector control) of the motor reaches the
set frequency. Under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector control, the FU signal and the FB signal are output
at the same time.
• The frequency detection dedicated to motor rotation in reverse direction is enabled by setting the frequency in Pr.43. This
setting is useful when the timing of the electromagnetic braking during forward rotation operation (for example, during lifting
up in the lifts operation) is different from that during reverse rotation operation (lifting down).

11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.7 Output frequency detection
257
 • When Pr.43 ≠ "9999", the Pr.42 setting is for the forward rotation operation and the Pr.43 setting is for the reverse rotation
operation.

Forward
rotation
Output frequency

Pr.42

Pr.43 Time

(Hz)

Output Reverse
signal rotation
FU/FB OFF ON OFF ON OFF

• To use each signal, set the corresponding number selected from the following table in any parameter from Pr.190 to
Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to an output terminal.
Pr.190 to Pr.196 settings
Output signal Related Parameter
Positive logic Negative logic
FU 4 104
42, 43
FB 41 141

 Low speed detection (LS signal, Pr.865)

• When the output frequency drops to the setting of Pr.865 Low speed detection or lower, the Low speed detection (LS)
signal is output.
• The fault "E.OLT" displays and the inverter output shuts off if the torque limit operation causes the frequency to drop to the
frequency set in Pr.865 and the output torque to surpass the value set in Pr.874 OLT level setting for three seconds or
longer in the speed control mode under Real sensorless vector control or PM sensorless vector control.
• To use the LS signal, set "34" (positive logic) or "134" (negative logic) in any parameter from Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
Output frequency

Pr.865
(Hz)

Time
LS ON OFF ON

 Speed detection hysteresis (Pr.870)

Setting the hysteresis width for the detected frequency prevents chattering of the Speed detection (FB) signal. When an output
frequency fluctuates, the following signals may chatter (turns ON and OFF repeatedly).
• Up to frequency (SU) signal
• Speed detection (FB) signal
• Low speed detection (LS) signal
Setting hysteresis to the detected frequency prevents chattering of these signals.

Output frequency
(Hz)
Pr.870
SU output level
Pr.870
Output
frequency Pr.41
(Hz) Set frequency

Pr.42 Pr.870
Pr.870 SU output level
Pr.870

Time

ON SU signal ON ON
FB
ON ON ON
Example of the speed detection (FB) signal Example of the up to frequency (SU) signal

258 11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.7 Output frequency detection
 NOTE
• All signals are OFF during the DC injection brake operation and during tuning at start-up. 11
• The reference frequency in comparison with the set frequency differs depending on the control method.

Reference frequency
Control method or function
FU FB, SU, LS 12
V/F control Output frequency Output frequency
Advanced magnetic flux vector Output frequency before the slip Output frequency before the slip
control compensation compensation

Real sensorless vector control Frequency command value

Estimated frequency (actual motor 13
speed)
Estimated frequency (actual motor
PM sensorless vector control Frequency command value
speed)
• Setting a higher value in Pr.870 causes a lower responsivity of the signals for frequency detection (SU, FB, and LS signals).
14
• The logic (ON/OFF switching) of the LS signal is the reverse of that of the FB signal.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. 15

Parameters referred to
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 250
Pr.874 OLT level settingpage 100
16

17

18

19

20

11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.7 Output frequency detection
259
 11.8 Output current detection function
If the inverter output current which reaches a specific value is detected, the relative signal is output via an output terminal.

Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
150 Output current detection Set the level to detect the output current. Consider the value of
150% 0% to 400%
M460 level the rated inverter current as 100%.
Set the timing to detect the output current. Enter the delay time
151 Output current detection between the time when the output current reaches the set
0s 0 to 10 s
M461 signal delay time current or higher and the time when the Output current
detection (Y12) signal is output.
152 Set the level to detect the zero current. Consider the value of
Zero current detection level 5% 0% to 400%
M462 the inverter rated current as 100%.
Set the time from the time when the output current drops to the
153
Zero current detection time 0.5 s 0 to 10 s Pr.152 setting or lower to the time when the Zero current
M463
detection (Y13) signal is output.
0 to 10 s Set the retention time period during which the Y12 signal is ON.
166 Output current detection
0.1 s The Y12 signal is retained ON. The signal turns OFF at the next
M433 signal retention time 9999
start-up of the inverter.
167 Output current detection Select the inverter operation at the time when the Y12 signal
0 0, 1, 10, 11
M464 operation selection and the Y13 signal turn ON.

 Output current detection (Y12 signal, Pr.150, Pr.151, Pr.166, Pr.167)

• The output current detection function is useful for overtorque detection.
• If the inverter output during inverter running remains higher than the Pr.150 setting for the time set in Pr.151 or longer, the
Output current detection (Y12) signal is output from the inverter's open collector or the relay output terminal.
• When the Y12 signal turns ON, the ON state is retained for the time set in Pr.166.
• When Pr.166 = "9999", the ON state is retained until the next start-up of the inverter.
• Setting Pr.167 = "1" while the Y12 signal is ON does not cause the fault E.CDO. The Pr.167 setting becomes valid after
the Y12 signal is turned OFF.
• To use the Y12 signal, set "12" (positive logic) or "112" (negative logic) in any parameter from Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
• Use Pr.167 to select the inverter operation at the time when Y12 signal turns ON, whether the inverter output stops or the
inverter operation continues.
Pr.167 setting When the Y12 signal turns ON When the Y13 signal turns ON
0 (initial value) Operation continues. Operation continues.
1 Operation stops by fault (E.CDO). Operation continues.
10 Operation continues. Operation stops by fault (E.CDO).
11 Operation stops by fault (E.CDO). Operation stops by fault (E.CDO).

Pr.166 "9999", Pr.167 = "0"

Pr.150

Output current
Pr.151
Time

Pr.166
Output current
detection signal OFF ON OFF
(Y12)

 Zero current detection (Y13 signal, Pr.152, Pr.153)

• If the inverter output during inverter running remains higher than the Pr.152 setting for the time set in Pr.153 or longer, the
Zero current detection (Y13) signal is output from the inverter's open collector or the relay output terminal.
• Once the Zero current detection (Y13) signal turns ON, the signal is retained ON for at least 0.1 seconds.

260 11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.8 Output current detection function
 • If the inverter output current drops to zero, slippage due to gravity may occur, especially in a lift application, because the
motor torque is not generated. To prevent this, the Y13 signal can be output from the inverter to apply the mechanical brake
at zero current output.
11
• To use the Y13 signal, set "13" (positive logic) or "113" (negative logic) in any parameter from Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
• Use Pr.167 to select the inverter operation at the time when Y13 signal turns ON, whether the inverter output stops or the
12
inverter operation continues.
Pr.167 = "0"
13
Output
current
Pr.152
0[A]
Pr.152
0.1s ∗ Time 14
OFF ON
Start signal

Zero current
detection time
OFF
Pr.153
ON OFF
Pr.153
ON
15
(Y13)
Detection time Detection time

∗ When the output is restored to the Pr.152 level, the Y13

signal is turned OFF after 0.1 s.
16
NOTE
• This function is enabled during online or offline auto tuning.
• The response time of the Y12 and Y13 signals is approximately 0.1 seconds. However, the response time varies according to 17
the load condition.
• When Pr.152 = "0", the zero current detection function is disabled.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. 18

19
CAUTION
• The setting of the zero current detection level should not be too low, and the setting of the zero current detection time
should not be too long. Doing so may cause the signal for the zero current detection not to be output when the output
20
current is very low and the motor torque is not generated.
• A safety backup such as an emergency brake must be provided to prevent machines or equipment in hazardous
conditions even if the Zero current detection is used.

Parameters referred to
Online auto tuningpage 315
Offline auto tuningpage 299, page 308
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 250

11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.8 Output current detection function
261
 11.9 Output torque detection function
Magnetic flux Sensorless PM
If the motor torque which reaches a specific value is detected, the relative signal is output.
The signal is useful for applying or releasing electromagnetic brake, etc.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

864 Set a value of the torque at which the TU
Torque detection 150% 0% to 400%
M470 signal turns ON.
• The Torque detection (TU) signal turns ON when the motor output torque reaches the value of torque set in Pr.864 or
higher. The TU signal turns OFF when the motor output torque drops lower than the set value.
• Pr.864 is not available under V/F control.
• To use the TU signal, set "35" (positive logic) or "135" (negative logic) in one of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal
function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
Output torque (%)

Pr.864

Time
TU ON OFF

NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 250

262 11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.9 Output torque detection function
11.10 Remote output function 11

The signal can be turned ON or OFF via the output terminal on the inverter as if the terminal is the remote output terminal for
a programmable controller. 12
Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
Remote output data is cleared when
13
0
the inverter power is turned OFF. Remote output data is cleared
Remote output data is retained even during an inverter reset.
1
495
M500
Remote output selection 0
after the inverter power is turned OFF. 14
Remote output data is cleared when
10
the inverter power is turned OFF. Remote output data is retained
Remote output data is retained even during an inverter reset.
11
after the inverter power is turned OFF. 15
Set a decimal number to enter a binary number in every bit
496
Remote output data 1 0 0 to 4095 corresponding to each of the output terminals of the inverter or
M501
communication.

497
Set a decimal number to enter a binary number in every bit 16
Remote output data 2 0 0 to 4095 corresponding to each of the output terminals of the option FR-A8AY or
M502
FR-A8AR, or communication.

 Remote output setting (REM signal, Pr.496, Pr.497) 17

• The signal assigned to each of the output terminal can be turned ON or OFF according to the settings of Pr.496 and Pr.497.
The signal assigned to each of the remote output terminal can be turned ON or OFF through communication.
• To use the Remote output (REM) signal, set "96" (positive logic) or "196" (negative logic) in any parameter from Pr.190 to 18
Pr.192 (Output terminal function selection) to assign the function to the terminal.
• Refer to the following figures to check correspondences between the bit and the actual terminal. When "1" is set in the bit
corresponding to the terminal to which the REM signal assigned by setting a number in Pr.496 and Pr.497 each, the signal 19
turns ON (or OFF in negative logic setting). Also, setting "0" allows the signal to turn OFF (or ON in negative logic setting).
• For example, when Pr.190 RUN terminal function selection = "96" (positive logic) and "1" (H01) is set in Pr.496, the REM
signal assigned to terminal RUN turns ON. 20
Pr.496

b11 b0
RUN
ABC

FU
*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

Pr.497
b11 b0
RA3 ∗3

RA2 ∗3

RA1 ∗3

Y6 ∗2

Y5 ∗2

Y4 ∗2

Y3 ∗2

Y2 ∗2

Y1 ∗2

Y0 ∗2
∗1

∗1

*1 Any value
*2 Y0 to Y6 are available by installing the output-extending option (FR-A8AY) or via communication.
*3 RA1 to RA3 are available by installing the relay output option (FR-A8AR) or via communication.

 Remote output data retention (REM signal, Pr.495)

• When the inverter power is reset (or a power failure occurs) while Pr.495 = "0 (initial value) or 10", the REM signal setting
is cleared. (The ON/OFF state of the signal assigned to each terminal is determined by the settings in Pr.190 to Pr.192.)
The settings in Pr.496 and Pr.497 are reset to "0".
• When Pr.495 = "1 or 11", the remote output data is stored in EEPROM before the inverter power is turned OFF. This means
that the signal output setting after power restoration is the same as that before the power was turned OFF. However, when
Pr.495 = "1", the data during an inverter reset (terminal reset or reset request via communication) is not saved.

11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.10 Remote output function
263
 • When Pr.495 = "10 or 11", the remote output data in the signal before the reset is stored even during an inverter reset.
ON/OFF example for positive logic Inverter
reset time
Pr.495 = 0, 10 Pr.495 = 1, 11 (about 1s)
Power OFF Power OFF
supply supply

REM OFF REM ON

REM signal clear REM signal held

REM signal is saved
Signal condition during a reset
Pr.495 = 0, 1 Pr.495 = 10, 11

Reset ON Reset ON

REM ON OFF REM ON

∗
∗ When Pr.495 = "1", the signal condition saved in EEPROM
(condition of the last power OFF) is applied.

NOTE
• The output terminal to which the REM signal is not assigned by using Pr.190 to Pr.192 does not turn ON or OFF when "1 or
0" is set in bit corresponding to each of the terminals by using Pr.496 and Pr.497. (ON/OFF command affects only the terminal
to which the REM signal is assigned.)
• If the power supply is turned OFF during an inverter reset, the remote output data is not stored even when Pr.495 = "1 or 11".

Parameters referred to
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 250

264 11. (M) Item and Output Signal for Monitoring

11.10 Remote output function
 CHAPTER 12
CHAPTER 12 (T) Multi-Function Input
Terminal Parameters 4

12.1 Analog input selection...........................................................................................................................................266

12.2 Analog input terminal (terminal 4) function assignment........................................................................................270
6
12.3 Response level of analog input and noise elimination..........................................................................................271
12.4 Frequency setting voltage (current) bias and gain................................................................................................273
12.5 Torque (magnetic flux) setting current (voltage) bias and gain.............................................................................278
7
12.6 Input terminal function selection ...........................................................................................................................283
12.7 Inverter output shutoff...........................................................................................................................................287
12.8 Selecting the condition to activate the Second function selection (RT) signal......................................................289
8
12.9 Start signal operation selection.............................................................................................................................291

10

265
 12 (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters
Refer to
Purpose Parameter to set
page
To inverse the rotation direction with the
voltage/current analog input selection Analog input selection P.T000, P.T001 Pr.73, Pr.267 266
(terminals 2 and 4)
To assign functions to analog input
Terminal 4 function assignment P.T040 Pr.858 270
terminals
Pr.74, Pr.822, Pr.826,
To eliminate noise on analog inputs Analog input filter P.T002 to P.T007 Pr.832, Pr.836, 271
Pr.849
P.T200 to P.T203,
To adjust analog input frequency/voltage Frequency setting voltage Pr.125, Pr.126,
P.T400 to P.T403, 273
(current) (calibration) (current) bias and gain Pr.241, C2 to C7
P.M043
To adjust analog input torque/voltage Torque setting voltage (current) P.T410 to P.T413,
Pr.241, C38 to C41 278
(current) (calibration) bias and gain P.M043
Input terminal function P.T700 to P.T711, Pr.178 to Pr.189,
To assign functions to input terminals 283
selection P.T740 Pr.699
Output stop signal (MRS) /
To change the input specification (NO/NC
Inverter run enable signal (X10) P.T720 Pr.17 287
contact) of input signals
input selection
To assign start and forward/reverse Start signal (STF/STR) operation
P.G106 Pr.250 291
commands to different signals selection

12.1 Analog input selection

The functions to switch the analog input terminal specifications and forward/reverse rotation by the input signal polarity are
selectable.
Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
Switch 2: V (initial The terminal 2 input specification (0 to 5 V, 0 to 10
73 0, 1, 10, 11
Analog input selection 1 status) V, 0 to 20 mA) is selectable. Also the reversible
T000
6, 16 Switch 2: I operation setting is selectable.
Switch 4: I (initial
0 Terminal 4 input, 4 to 20 mA
267 Terminal 4 input status)
0
T001 selection 1 Terminal 4 input, 0 to 5 V
Switch 4 - V
2 Terminal 4 input, 0 to 10 V

266 12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.1 Analog input selection
 Analog input specification selection
• For terminals 2 and 4 used for analog input, the voltage input (0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V) and current input (0 to 20 mA) are 11
selectable. To change the input specification, change the setting of Pr.73 (Pr.267) and the voltage/current input selection
switch (switch 2 or switch 4).

Voltage/current Voltage/current
12
input switch input switch
Standard model Ethernet model
Switch 2 2 Switch 2 2
V I V I 13
Switch 4 4 Switch 4 4

14

15

Switch state Input specification

Input
terminal
Rated specification 16
I Current input For voltage input, the input resistance is 10±1 kΩ and the
Switch 2 Terminal 2
V Voltage input (initial status) maximum permissible voltage is 20 VDC.

Switch 4
I Current input (initial status)
Terminal 4
For current input, the input resistance is 245±5 Ω and the
maximum permissible current is 30 mA.
17
V Voltage input

• Change the setting of the voltage/current input selection switch to change the rated specification of terminal 2 or 4.
• Set Pr.73 (Pr.267) and the voltage/current input selection switch according to the analog signal input. The incorrect 18
settings shown in the following table cause a failure. The inverter does not operate properly with other incorrect settings.
Setting causing a failure
Switch setting Terminal input
Operation 19
Causes an analog signal output circuit failure in an external device (due to increased loads on the
I (current input) Voltage input
signal output circuit of the external device).

V (voltage input) Current input

Causes an input circuit failure in the inverter (due to an increased output power in the analog signal
output circuit of an external device).
20
Set Pr.73 and the voltage/current input selection switch according to the following table.
Pr.73 setting Terminal 2 input Switch 2 Reversible operation
0 0 to 10 V V
1 (initial value) 0 to 5 V V Disabled
6 0 to 20 mA I
10 0 to 10 V V
11 0 to 5 V V Enabled
16 0 to 20 mA I

• When the Terminal 4 input selection (AU) signal is turned ON, terminal 4 is used to set the main speed. In this case,
terminal 2 is not used to set the main speed.
• Set Pr.267 and the voltage/current input selection switch according to the following table.
Pr.267 setting Terminal 4 input Switch 4 Reversible operation
0 (initial value) 4 to 20 mA I
Determined by Pr.73
1 0 to 5 V V
setting
2 0 to 10 V V

12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.1 Analog input selection
267
 NOTE
• To enable terminal 4, turn ON the AU signal.
• Set the parameters and the switch settings so that they agree. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure, or malfunction.
• Use Pr.125 (Pr.126) (frequency setting gain) to change the maximum output frequency at the input of the maximum output
frequency command voltage (current). At this time, the command voltage (current) need not be input. Also, the acceleration/
deceleration time, which is a slope up/down to the acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, is not affected by the change
in Pr.73 setting.
• To input frequency through terminal 4, set "0" (initial value) in Pr.858.
• Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage/current input signal with Pr.73 (Pr.267) and the voltage/current input
selection switch.

 Running with analog input voltage

• For the frequency setting signal, input 0 to 5 VDC (or 0 to 10 VDC) between terminals 2 and 5. The 5 V (10 V) input is the
maximum output frequency.
• The power supply 5 V (10 V) can be input by either using the internal power supply or preparing an external power supply.
The internal power supply is 5 VDC output via terminal 10.
Inverter internal power source
Terminal Frequency setting resolution Pr.73 (terminal 2 input voltage)
voltage
10 5 VDC 0.030/60 Hz 0 to 5 VDC input
• To supply the 10 VDC input to terminal 2, set "0 or 10" in Pr.73. (The initial value is 0 to 5 V.)
• Set "1 (0 to 5 VDC)" or "2 (0 to 10 VDC)" in Pr.267 and set the voltage/current input selection switch to "V" in order to input
voltage through terminal 4. Turning ON the AU signal activates the terminal 4 input.

Forward Inverter
Inverter Inverter rotation STF
Forward STF Forward STF Terminal 4 AU Voltage/current
Voltage/current
rotation SD
Voltage/current rotation SD input switch input selection input switch
input switch SD
0 to 5 VDC 2 0 to 5 VDC 2
10 2 0 to 10 VDC 10
Frequency V I Frequency V I
2 V I Voltage 2 4
setting Frequency input setting
5 setting 5 4 4
4 equipment 5

Connection diagram using Connection diagram Connection diagram

terminal 2 (0 to 5 VDC) using terminal 2 (0 to 10 VDC) using terminal 4 (0 to 5 VDC)

NOTE
• The wiring length of terminal 10, 2, and 5 should be 30 m at maximum.

 Running with analog input current

• For constant pressure or temperature control with fans, pumps, or other devices, automatic operation is available by setting
the regulator output signal 4 to 20 mADC to between terminals 4 and 5.
• To use terminal 4, the AU signal needs to be turned ON.

Inverter
Forward STF
rotation AU Voltage/current
input switch
SD
4 to 20mADC
2
4 V I
Frequency Current
input
setting equipment 5 4

Connection diagram using

terminal 4 (4 to 20mADC)

268 12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.1 Analog input selection
 • Set "6 or 16" in Pr.73 and set the voltage/current input selection switch to I in order to input current through terminal 2. In
this case, the AU signal does not need to be turned ON.
11
Inverter
Forward STF
Voltage/current
rotation SD input switch
12
4 to 20mADC 2
2 V I
Frequency Current
setting
input
equipment 5 4 13
Connection diagram using
terminal 2 (4 to 20mADC)
14
 Performing forward/reverse rotation with the analog input (reversible
operation)
• The reversible operation by terminal 2 (terminal 4) is enabled by setting "10, 11, or 16" in Pr.73 and adjusting Pr.125 15
(Pr.126) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency (Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency), C2 Terminal
2 frequency setting bias frequency to C7 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain.
• The following shows the reversible operation by terminal 2 (0 to 5 V) input. 16
1) Set "11" in Pr.73 to enable the reversible operation. Set the frequency at maximum analog input in Pr.125.
2) Set 1/2 of the C4 setting value in C3.
3) Reverse operation is performed when 0 to 2.5 VDC is input, and forward rotation when 2.5 to 5 VDC. 17

18
Set frequency (Hz)

Reverse Forward
rotation rotation
Pr.125
Reversible

19
Not reversible

C2 Terminal 2 input (V) 20

0 2.5V 5V
C3 C4
Frequency setting signal

Example of reversible operation

NOTE
• Note that the reverse rotation operation is performed when analog input stops (only the start signal is input) while the reversible
operation is set.
• When the reversible operation is enabled, the reversible operation by terminal 4 is performed in the initial setting (reverse
operation is performed when 0 to 4 mA is input, and forward operation when 4 to 20 mA).

Parameters referred to
Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency, Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequencypage 273
Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignmentpage 270

12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.1 Analog input selection
269
 12.2 Analog input terminal (terminal 4) function
assignment
The analog input terminal 4 function can be set and changed with parameters.
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
858 Terminal 4 function
0 0, 4, 9999 Select the terminal 4 function.
T040 assignment
• For terminal 4 used for analog input, the frequency (speed) command, torque command, and other similar commands are
usable. The functions available are different depending on the control method and control mode as shown in the following
table. (For the details of the control methods, refer to page 86.)
• Functions of terminal 4 under different control modes
V/F control, Real sensorless vector control and PM sensorless vector control
Pr.858
Advanced magnetic flux vector
setting Speed control Torque control
control
Frequency command (AU signal-
0 (initial value) Speed command (AU signal-ON) Speed limit (AU signal-ON)
ON)
4 — Torque limit (Pr.810 = "1") Torque command (Pr.804 = "0")
9999 — — —
—: No function

Parameters referred to
Advanced magnetic flux vector controlpage 90
Real sensorless vector controlpage 86
Pr.804 Torque command source selectionpage 117
Pr.810 Torque limit input method selectionpage 100

270 12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.2 Analog input terminal (terminal 4) function assignment
12.3 Response level of analog input and noise 11
elimination
12
The response level and stability of frequency command / torque command using the analog input signal (terminal 2 or 4) can
be adjusted.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 13
Set the primary delay filter time constant to the analog input
74
Input filter time constant 1 0 to 8 command. If the setting is too large, response becomes
T002
slow.

822 0 to 5 s
Set the primary delay filter time constant to the external 14
Speed setting filter 1 9999 speed command (analog input command).
T003
9999 As set in Pr.74.

826
Torque setting filter 1 9999
0 to 5 s
Set the primary delay filter time constant to the external
torque command (analog input command). 15
T004
9999 As set in Pr.74.
832 Second function of Pr.822 (enabled when the RT signal is
Speed setting filter 2 9999 0 to 5 s, 9999
T005
836
ON)
Second function of Pr.826 (enabled when the RT signal is
16
Torque setting filter 2 9999 0 to 5 s, 9999
T006 ON)
Set offset for the analog speed input (terminal 2). The motor
849 Analog input offset
T007 adjustment
100% 0% to 200% is prevented from rotating due to noise in the analog input
or other factors when a zero speed command is given.
17
 Block diagram
Pr.822 = 9999
Pr.74 18
Speed command
RT-OFF

Terminal 2 (4) input

Pr.822
19
RT-ON Pr.822 ≠ 9999
Pr.74
Pr.826 = 9999
Torque command
20
Pr.826

Pr.826 ≠ 9999

Pr.832 = 9999

Pr.832

Pr.832 ≠ 9999

Pr.836 = 9999
Pr.836

Pr.836 ≠ 9999

 Analog input time constant (Pr.74)

• Use this parameter to eliminate noise on the frequency setting circuit.
• Increase the filter time constant if the operation is unstable due to noise or other factors.
If the setting is too large, response becomes slow. (The time constant can be between 0 and 8, which are about 5 ms to 1
s.)

12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.3 Response level of analog input and noise elimination
271
  Analog speed command input time constant (Pr.822, Pr.832)
• Use Pr.822 Speed setting filter 1 to set the primary delay filter time constant to the external speed command (analog
input command). Increase the setting of the time constant to allow delays in follow-up of the speed command or when the
analog input voltage is unstable.
• Use Pr.832 Speed setting filter 2 to change the time constant to use one inverter to switch operation between two or more
motors.
• Pr.832 Speed setting filter 2 is enabled when the RT signal is ON.

 Analog torque command input time constant (Pr.826, Pr.836)

• Use Pr.826 Torque setting filter 1 to set the primary delay filter time constant to the external torque command (analog
input command). Increase the setting of the time constant to allow delays in follow-up of the torque command or when the
analog input voltage is unstable.
• Use Pr.836 Torque setting filter 2 to change the time constant to use one inverter to switch operation between two or
more motors.
• Pr.836 Torque setting filter 2 is enabled when the RT signal is ON.

 Analog speed command input offset adjustment (Pr.849)

• Use this parameter to set a range in which the motor is stopped for prevention of incorrect motor operation in a very low
speed rotation when the speed command is an analog input (voltage/current) via terminal 2.
• Example) Voltage command given
The voltage range is offset according to the setting in Pr.849 Analog input offset adjustment, assuming that 100%
corresponds to zero.
100% < Pr.849 ...... Positive side
100% > Pr.849 ...... Negative side
The detailed calculation of the offset voltage is as follows:
Offset voltage [V] = Voltage at the time of 100% (5 V or 10 V*1) × (Pr.849 - 100) / 100
*1 It depends on the Pr.73 setting.

Frequency
command Slope determined
according to Pr.125
and C2 to C4
Slope does not
change.

0% 100% Speed setting

(10V or 5V) signal
0% 100% 200% Pr.849 setting

NOTE
• The analog input filter is invalid (no filter) during PID control operation.

Parameters referred to
Pr.73 Analog input selectionpage 266
Pr.125, C2 to C4 (bias and gain of the terminal 2 frequency setting)page 273

272 12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.3 Response level of analog input and noise elimination
12.4 Frequency setting voltage (current) bias and gain 11

The magnitude (slope) of the output frequency can be set as desired in relation to the frequency setting signal (0 to 5 VDC, 0
to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA). Use Pr.73 Analog input selection (Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection) and the voltage/current 12
input selection switch to switch among input of 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 V, and 0 to 20 mA. (Refer to page 266.)
Initial value*1
Pr. Name
Gr.1 Gr.2
Setting
range
Description 13
C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting
0 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the bias frequency for the terminal 2 input.
T200 bias frequency
C3
T201
Terminal 2 frequency setting
bias
0%
0% to
300%
Set the converted % of the bias voltage (current) for the terminal
2 input.
14
125
Terminal 2 frequency setting
T202 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the gain (maximum) frequency for the terminal 2 input.
gain frequency
T022
C4 Terminal 2 frequency setting 0% to Set the converted % of the gain voltage (current) for the terminal
15
100%
T203 gain 300% 2 input.
C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting
0 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the bias frequency for the terminal 4 input.
T400 bias frequency 16
C6 Terminal 4 frequency setting 0% to Set the converted % of the bias current (voltage) for the terminal
20%
T401 bias 300% 4 input.
126
T402
Terminal 4 frequency setting
gain frequency
60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the gain (maximum) frequency for the terminal 4 input. 17
T042
C7 Terminal 4 frequency setting 0% to Set the converted % of the gain current (voltage) for the terminal
100%
T403 gain 300% 4 input.
241 Analog input display unit
0
0 % display
Select the unit for analog input display.
18
M043 switchover 1 V/mA display

*1 Gr.1 and Gr.2 are the parameter initial value groups. (Refer to page 82).

 Relationship between the analog input terminal function and the

19
calibration parameter
• Calibration parameter according to the terminal 4 function 20
Pr.858 Calibration parameter
Terminal function
setting Bias setting Gain setting
Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
0 (initial C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency
Frequency command frequency
value) C6 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
C7 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
C38 Terminal 4 bias command (torque/ C40 Terminal 4 gain command (torque/
4 Torque limit magnetic flux) magnetic flux)
C39 Terminal 4 bias (torque/magnetic flux) C41 Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic flux)
9999 No function — —

 Changing the frequency for the maximum analog input (Pr.125, Pr.126)
• Use Pr.125 (Pr.126) to change the frequency setting (gain) for the maximum analog input voltage (current).
(The C2 to C7 settings need not be changed.)

 Analog input bias/gain calibration (C2 to C7)

• The "bias" and "gain" functions serve to adjust the relationship between a setting input signal and the output frequency. A
setting input signal is such as a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mADC signal externally input to set the output
frequency.
• Set the bias frequency of the terminal 2 input using C2. (It is initially set to the frequency at 0 V.)
• Use Pr.125 to set the output frequency to the frequency command voltage (current) set by Pr.73 Analog input selection.
• Set the bias frequency of the terminal 4 input using C5. (It is initially set to the frequency at 4 mA.)

12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.4 Frequency setting voltage (current) bias and gain
273
 • Use Pr.126 to set the output frequency to the 20 mA input of the frequency command current (4 to 20 mA).

Initial value Initial value

60Hz 60Hz

Output frequency
Output frequency

(50Hz) (50Hz)

(Hz)
(Hz)

Gain Gain Pr.126

Pr.125 Bias
Bias
C2 C5

0 100% 0 20 100%
0 5V 0 4 Frequency setting signal 20mA
Frequency setting signal 0 1 5V
0 10V
0 20mA 0 2 10V
C3 C4 C6 C7

• There are three methods to adjust the bias/gain frequency setting voltage (current).
Adjustment by applying voltage (current) between terminals 2 and 5 (4 and 5) to set the voltage (current) at the bias/gain
frequency. page 275
Adjustment by selecting the voltage (current) at the bias/gain frequency without applying voltage (current) between
terminals 2 and 5 (4 and 5). page 276
Adjustment by changing the frequency without adjusting the voltage (current). page 277

NOTE
• Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage/current input signal with Pr.73 (Pr.267) and the voltage/current input
selection switch.

 Display unit changing for analog input (Pr.241)

• The analog input display unit (%/V/mA) can be changed for analog input bias/gain calibration.
• Depending on the terminal input specification setting of Pr.73 (Pr.267) and the voltage/current input switch, the unit of the
displayed value of C3, C4, C6, and C7 changes as shown below:
Analog command (via terminal 2 or 4)
(depending on the settings of Pr.73 (Pr.267) and the Pr.241 = "0 (initial value)" Pr.241 = "1"
voltage/current input selection switch)
0 to 5 V input 0% to 100% (0.1%) 0 to 5 V (0.01 V)
0 to 10 V input 0% to 100% (0.1%) 0 to 10 V (0.01 V)
0 to 20 mA input 0% to 100% (0.1%) 0 to 20 mA (0.01 mA)

274 12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.4 Frequency setting voltage (current) bias and gain
 Frequency setting voltage (current) bias/gain adjustment method
11
 Adjustment by applying voltage (current) between terminals 2 and 5 (4 and 5) to set the voltage
(current) at the bias/gain frequency (Example of adjustment at the gain frequency)
Operating procedure 12
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.
13
2. Changing the operation mode
Press the PU/EXT key to choose the PU operation mode. The PU LED turns ON.

3. Selecting the parameter setting mode 14

Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)

4. Calibration parameter selection

15
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until "C..." appears. Press the SET key to display "C---".

5. Selecting a parameter
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until "C4" (C4 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain) appears for 16
terminal 2, or "C7" (C7 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain) for terminal 4.

6. Analog voltage (current) display

Press the SET key to display the analog voltage (current) value (%) currently applied to terminal 2 (terminal 4). 17
Do not touch the setting dial and UP/DOWN key until calibration is completed.

7. Voltage (current) application

18
Apply a 5 V (20 mA). (Turn the external potentiometer connected between terminals 2 and 5 (terminals 4 and 5) to
a desired position.)

8. Setting completed 19
Press the SET key to confirm the setting. The analog voltage (current) value (%) blinks when it is applied.
• Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key to read another parameter.
• Press the SET key to return to the "C---" display. 20
• Press the SET key twice to show the next parameter.

12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.4 Frequency setting voltage (current) bias and gain
275
  Adjustment by selecting the voltage (current) at the bias/gain frequency without applying
voltage (current) between terminals 2 and 5 (4 and 5) (Example of adjustment at the gain
frequency)
Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode

Press the PU/EXT key to choose the PU operation mode. The PU LED turns ON.

3. Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)

4. Calibration parameter selection

Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until "C..." appears. Press the SET key to display "C---".

5. Selecting a parameter
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until "C4" (C4 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain) appears for
terminal 2, or "C7" (C7 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain) for terminal 4.

6. Analog voltage (current) display

Press the SET key to display the analog voltage (current) value (%) currently applied to terminal 2 (terminal 4).

7. Analog voltage (current) adjustment

After the setting dial is turned or the UP/DOWN key is pressed, the gain voltage (current) value (%) currently set to
the parameter appears.
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until the gain voltage (current) to be adjusted appears.

8. Setting completed
Press the SET key to confirm the setting. The analog voltage (current) value (%) blinks when it is applied.
• Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key to read another parameter.
• Press the SET key to return to the "C---" display.
• Press the SET key twice to show the next parameter.

NOTE
• The present frequency setting bias/gain setting can be checked by pressing the setting dial or pressing the UP/DOWN key one
time after step 6. The setting cannot be checked after step 7.

276 12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.4 Frequency setting voltage (current) bias and gain
 Adjustment by changing the frequency without adjusting the voltage (current) (Example of
changing the gain frequency from 60 Hz to 50 Hz) 11
Operating procedure
1. Selecting the parameter 12
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until "P.125" (Pr.125) appears for terminal 2, or "P.126" (Pr.126)
for terminal 4.
Press the SET key to show the present set value. (60.00 Hz) 13
2. Changing the maximum frequency
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key to change the value to "50.00". (50.00 Hz)
Press the SET key to confirm the setting. "50.00" blinks. 14
3. Selecting the mode and the monitor item
Press the MODE key three times to select the monitor mode and to monitor a frequency.
15
4. Start
Turn ON the start switch (STF/STR signal), and turn the frequency setting potentiometer clockwise slowly to full.
(Refer to steps 2 and 3 in page 35.) 16
The motor is operated at 50 Hz.

NOTE
• If the frequency meter (display meter) connected to terminal FM or terminal AM of the standard model does not indicate exactly 17
60 Hz, set the calibration parameter C0 or C1. (Refer to page 241.)
• If the voltage (current) values at the gain and bias frequencies are too close to each other, an error "Er3" may be indicated.
• Changing C4 or C7 (gain adjustment) will not change the Pr.20. 18
• To set the value to 120 Hz or higher, the Pr.18 High speed maximum frequency needs to be 120 Hz or higher. (Refer to
page 211.)
• Use the calibration parameter C2 or C5 to set the bias frequency. (Refer to page 273.)
19

CAUTION 20
• Be cautious when setting any value other than "0" as the bias frequency at 0 V (0 mA). Even if a speed command is not
given, simply turning ON the start signal will start the motor at the preset frequency.

Parameters referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequency, Pr.18 High speed maximum frequencypage 211
Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequencypage 158
Pr.73 Analog input selection, Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selectionpage 266
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 174
Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignmentpage 270

12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.4 Frequency setting voltage (current) bias and gain
277
 12.5 Torque (magnetic flux) setting current (voltage)
bias and gain
Sensorless PM

The magnitude (slope) of the torque can be set as desired in relation to the torque setting signal (0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or
4 to 20 mA).
Use Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection to switch among input 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 V, and 4 to 20 mA. (Refer to page 266.)
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
C38 Terminal 4 bias command (torque/ Set the bias torque (magnetic flux) for the terminal 4
0% 0% to 400%
T410 magnetic flux) input.
C39 Terminal 4 bias (torque/magnetic Set the converted % of the bias current (voltage) for the
20% 0% to 300%
T411 flux) terminal 4 input.
C40 Terminal 4 gain command (torque/ Set the gain (maximum) torque (magnetic flux) for the
150% 0% to 400%
T412 magnetic flux) terminal 4 input.
C41 Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic Set the converted % of the gain current (voltage) for the
100% 0% to 300%
T413 flux) terminal 4 input.
241 Analog input display unit 0 % display Select the unit for analog input
0
M043 switchover 1 V/mA display display.

 Changing the function of analog input terminal

• In the initial setting, terminal 4 is used for analog input of the speed command (speed limit). To use the analog input
terminal to input the torque command, torque limit, or magnetic flux command, set Pr.858 Terminal 4 function
assignment to change the function. (Refer to page 270.)

 Relationship between the analog input terminal function and the

calibration parameter
• Calibration parameter according to the terminal 4 function

Pr.858 Calibration parameter

Terminal function
setting Bias setting Gain setting
C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
0 (initial Frequency (speed) command /
frequency frequency
value) speed limit
C6 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias C7 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
C38 Terminal 4 bias command (torque/ C40 Terminal 4 gain command (torque/
4 Torque limit magnetic flux) magnetic flux)
C39 Terminal 4 bias (torque/magnetic flux) C41 Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic flux)
9999 No function — —

 Changing the torque for the maximum analog input (C40)

• Use C40 to change the torque setting (gain) for the maximum analog input current (voltage).

 Analog input bias/gain calibration (C38 to C41)

• The "bias" and "gain" functions serve to adjust the relationship between a setting input signal and the torque. A setting
input signal is such as a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mADC signal externally input to set the torque command or
the torque limit.
• Set the bias torque of the terminal 4 input using C38. (The initial value is the torque for 4 mA.)

278 12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.5 Torque (magnetic flux) setting current (voltage) bias and gain
 • Use C40 to set the torque to the 20 mA input of the torque command current (4 to 20 mA).

11
400
Torque(%)

150 Gain 12
C40

Bias
C38
Initial value
13
0 20 100%
0 4 20mA
C39
Torque setting signal
C41 14
Calibration example of terminal 4

• There are three methods to adjust the bias/gain for torque setting current (voltage).
15
Adjustment by applying current (voltage) between terminals 4 and 5 to set the current (voltage) at the bias/gain torque.
page 279
Adjustment by selecting the current (voltage) at the bias/gain torque without applying current (voltage) between terminals
16
4 and 5. page 281
Adjustment by changing the torque without adjusting the current (voltage). page 282

NOTE 17
• Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage/current input signal with Pr.267 and the voltage/current input selection
switch.

18
 Display unit changing for analog input (Pr.241)
• The analog input display unit (%/V/mA) can be changed for analog input bias/gain calibration.
• Depending on the terminal input specification setting of Pr.73 (Pr.267), the units of the displayed values of C39 and C41 19
change as shown below:
Analog command (via terminal 4)
(depending on the Pr.267 setting)
Pr.241 = "0" (initial value) Pr.241 = "1" 20
0 to 5 V input 0% to 100% (0.1%) 0 to 5 V (0.01 V)
0 to 10 V input 0% to 100% (0.1%) 0 to 10 V (0.01 V)
0 to 20 mA input 0% to 100% (0.1%) 0 to 20 mA (0.01 mA)

 Torque setting current (voltage) bias/gain adjustment method

 Adjustment by applying current (voltage) between terminals 4 and 5 to set the current (voltage)
at the bias/gain torque
Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode

Press the PU/EXT key to choose the PU operation mode. The PU LED turns ON.

3. Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)

4. Calibration parameter selection

Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until "C..." appears. Press the SET key to display "C---".

5. Selecting a parameter
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until "C41" (C41 Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic flux)) appears.

12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.5 Torque (magnetic flux) setting current (voltage) bias and gain
279
 6. Displaying analog current (voltage) value
Press the SET key to display the analog current (voltage) value (%) currently applied to terminal 4.
Do not touch the setting dial and UP/DOWN key until calibration is completed.

7. Applying current (voltage)

Apply a 20 mA (5 V). (Turn the external potentiometer connected between terminals 4 and 5 to a desired position.)

8. Setting completed
Press the SET key to confirm the setting. The analog current (voltage) value (%) blinks when it is applied.
• Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key to read another parameter.
• Press the SET key to return to the "C---" display.
• Press the SET key twice to show the next parameter.

280 12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.5 Torque (magnetic flux) setting current (voltage) bias and gain
 Adjustment by selecting the current (voltage) at the bias/gain torque without applying current
(voltage) between terminals 4 and 5 11
Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter 12
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode

Press the PU/EXT key to choose the PU operation mode. The PU LED turns ON. 13
3. Selecting the parameter setting mode
Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)
14
4. Calibration parameter selection
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until "C..." appears. Press the SET key to display "C---".

5. Selecting a parameter
15
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until "C41" (C41 Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic flux)) appears.

6. Displaying analog current (voltage) value 16

Press the SET key to display the analog current (voltage) value (%) currently applied to terminal 4.

7. Analog current (voltage) adjustment

After the setting dial is turned or the UP/DOWN key is pressed, the gain current (voltage) value (%) currently set to 17
the parameter appears.
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until the gain current (voltage) to be adjusted appears.
18
8. Setting completed
Press the SET key to confirm the setting. The analog current (voltage) value (%) blinks when it is applied.
• Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key to read another parameter. 19
• Press the SET key to return to the "C---" display.
• Press the SET key twice to show the next parameter.

NOTE 20
• The present torque setting bias/gain setting can be checked by pressing the setting dial or pressing the UP/DOWN key one
time after step 6. The setting cannot be checked after step 7.

12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.5 Torque (magnetic flux) setting current (voltage) bias and gain
281
  Adjustment by changing the torque without adjusting the current (voltage) (Example of
changing the gain torque from 150% to 130%)
Operating procedure
1. Selecting the parameter
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until "C40" appears.
Press the SET key to show the present set value. (150.0%)

2. Torque setting change

Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key to change the value to "130.0". (130.0%)
Press the SET key to confirm the setting. "130.0" blinks.

3. Selecting the mode and the monitor item

Press the MODE key three times to select the monitor mode and to monitor a frequency.

4. Start
Turn ON the start switch (STF or STR) to apply a voltage across terminals 4 and 5.
Operation is performed with 130% torque.

NOTE
• If the current (voltage) values at the gain and bias torques are too close to each other, an error ("Er3") may be indicated.
• Use the calibration parameter C38 to set the bias torque. (Refer to page 278.)

CAUTION
• When setting a value other than "0" as the bias torque, note that simply turning ON the start signal will supply torque to
the motor even if a torque command is not given.

Parameters referred to
Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequencypage 158
Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selectionpage 266
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 174
Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignmentpage 270

282 12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.5 Torque (magnetic flux) setting current (voltage) bias and gain
12.6 Input terminal function selection 11

Use the following parameters to select or change the input terminal functions.
Initial
12
Pr. Name Initial signal Setting range
value
178 STF/DI0 terminal 0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14 to 16, 18, 24 to 27, 30, 37,
60 STF (Forward rotation command)
T700 function selection 46, 47, 50, 51, 60, 62, 65 to 67, 72, 92, 9999 13
179 STR/DI1 terminal 0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14 to 16, 18, 24 to 27, 30, 37,
61 STR (Reverse rotation command)
T701 function selection 46, 47, 50, 51, 61, 62, 65 to 67, 72, 92, 9999
180 RL terminal function
T702 selection
0 RL (Low-speed operation command)
14
181 RM terminal function
1 RM (Middle-speed operation command)
T703 selection
182 RH terminal function 0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14 to 16, 18, 24 to 27, 30, 37,
T704 selection
2 RH (High-speed operation command)
46, 47, 50, 51, 62, 65 to 67, 72, 92, 9999*3 15
183 MRS terminal
24 MRS (Output stop)
T709 function selection
62*1 RES (Inverter reset)
184
T711
RES terminal
function selection 9999 *2 No function
16
185 NET X1 input
9999 No function
T751 selection
186 NET X2 input
9999 No function 17
T752 selection
187 NET X3 input 0 to 4, 8, 14, 15, 18, 24, 26, 27, 30, 37, 46, 47,
9999 No function
T753 selection 50, 51, 72, 92, 9999
188 NET X4 input
9999 No function
18
T754 selection
189 NET X5 input
9999 No function
T755 selection

Initial
19
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
699 5 to 50 ms Set the time delay for the input terminal response.
T740
Input terminal filter 9999
9999 No filter for the input terminal 20
*1 The initial value is for standard models.
*2 The initial value is for Ethernet models.
*3 The setting range differs depending on the model. For more information, refer to the parameters available for each signal.

 Input terminal function assignment

• Signals can be input to the inverter by using physical terminals or via communication.
• Use the following parameters to assign functions to input terminals. Check the terminal available for each parameter.
External input terminal (physical terminal)
Pr. Terminal name Input via communication*1
FR-E800 FR-E800-E
178 STF/DI0 ○ (STF) ○ (DI0) Forward rotation command only
179 STR/DI1 ○ (STR) ○ (DI1) Reverse rotation command only
180 RL ○ — ○
181 RM ○ — ○
182 RH ○ — ○
183 MRS ○ — ○
184 RES ○ — ○
185 NET X1 — — ○
186 NET X2 — — ○
187 NET X3 — — ○
188 NET X4 — — ○
189 NET X5 — — ○
○: Assignment/input available, ─: Assignment/input unavailable (no function)
*1 The communication protocol affects which terminals can be used. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual (Communication) or the Instruction
Manual of each communication option.

12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.6 Input terminal function selection
283
  Input signal list
• Refer to the following table and set the parameters.
Signal Refer to
Setting Function Related parameter
name page
Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27,
Pr.59 = "0" (initial value) Low-speed operation command 195
Pr.232 to Pr.239
0 RL
Pr.59 ≠ "0"*1 Remote setting (setting clear) Pr.59 165
*2 Stop-on-contact selection 0 Pr.270, Pr.275, Pr.276 324
Pr.270 = "1"
Middle-speed operation Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27,
Pr.59 = "0" (initial value) 195
1 RM command Pr.232 to Pr.239
Pr.59 ≠ "0"*1 Remote setting (deceleration) Pr.59 165
Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27,
Pr.59 = "0" (initial value) High-speed operation command 195
2 RH Pr.232 to Pr.239
Pr.59 ≠ "0"*1 Remote setting (acceleration) Pr.59 165
Pr.44 to Pr.48, Pr.51, Pr.450
Second function selection to Pr.463, Pr.569, Pr.832, 289
3 RT Pr.836, etc.
Pr.270 = "1, 11"*2 Stop-on-contact selection 1 Pr.270, Pr.275, Pr.276 324
4 AU Terminal 4 input selection Pr.267 266
5 JOG Jog operation selection (Available for the standard model only) Pr.15, Pr.16 194
7 OH External thermal relay input*3 Pr.9 198
15-speed selection (Combination with multi-speeds of RL, RM, and Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27,
8 REX 195
RH) Pr.232 to Pr.239
10 X10 Inverter run enable (FR-XC/FR-HC2/FR-CV connection) Pr.17, Pr.30, Pr.70 386
12 X12 PU operation external interlock Pr.79 174
Pr.127 to Pr.134, Pr.575 to
14 X14 PID control valid 329
Pr.577
15 BRI Brake opening completion Pr.278 to Pr.283 320
16 X16 PU/External operation switchover (External operation with X16-ON) Pr.79, Pr.340 174
18 X18 V/F switchover (V/F control with X18-ON) Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.800 86
24 MRS Output stop Pr.17 287
STP
25 Start self-holding selection Pr.250 291
(STOP)
26 MC Control mode switchover Pr.800 86
27 TL Torque limit selection Pr.815 100
30 JOG2 Pr.15, Pr.16 194
37 X37 Traverse function selection Pr.592 to Pr.597 327
46 TRG Trace trigger input Pr.1020 to Pr.1047 366
47 TRC Trace sampling start/end Pr.1020 to Pr.1047 366
50 SQ Sequence start Pr.414 362
51 X51 Fault clear Pr.414 362
Forward rotation command (assignable to the STF terminal
60 STF Pr.250 291
(Pr.178) only)
Reverse rotation command (assignable to the STR terminal
61 STR Pr.250 291
(Pr.179) only)
62 RES Inverter reset Pr.75 128
65 X65 PU/NET operation switchover (PU operation with X65-ON) Pr.79, Pr.340 174
66 X66 External/NET operation switchover (NET operation with X66-ON) Pr.79, Pr.340 174
Command source switchover (command by Pr.338 or Pr.339
67 X67 Pr.338, Pr.339 185
enabled with X67-ON)
Pr.127 to Pr.134, Pr.575 to
72 X72 PID P control switchover 329
Pr.577
92 X92 Emergency stop Pr.1103 158
9999 - No function — —
*1 When Pr.59 Remote function selection ≠ "0", functions of the RL, RM, and RH signals are changed as shown in the table.
*2 When Pr.270 Stop-on-contact control selection = "1", functions of the RL and RT signals are changed as shown in the table.
*3 The OH signal is activated when the relay contact is open.

284 12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.6 Input terminal function selection
 NOTE
• The same function can be assigned to two or more terminals. In this case, the logic of terminal input is OR. 11
• The priorities of the speed commands are defined as follows: JOG > multi-speed setting (RH, RM, RL, REX) > PID (X14).
• When the Inverter run enable (X10) signal is not assigned, or when the PU operation external interlock (X12) signal is not
assigned while Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "7", the MRS signal performs the same function.
• The same terminals are used to assign the multi-speed (7-speed) setting and the remote setting. The multi-speed setting and
12
the remote setting cannot be assigned separately.
• When the terminal assignment is changed using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection), wiring may be
mistaken due to different terminal name and signal contents, or may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming 13
the function of each terminal.

 Parameters available for each signal 14

• The following table shows the parameters to which the signals are assigned.

Setting Signal FR-E800 FR-E800-E

value name Pr.178 Pr.179 Pr.180 to Pr.184 Pr.185 to Pr.189 Pr.178 Pr.179 Pr.180 to Pr.189 15
0 RL ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1 RM ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 RH ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 16
3 RT ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 AU ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 JOG ○ ○ ○ — ○ ○ —
7 OH ○ ○ ○ — ○ ○ — 17
8 REX ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
10 X10 ○ ○ ○ — ○ ○ —
12 X12 ○ ○ ○ — ○ ○ — 18
14 X14 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
15 BRI ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
16 X16 ○ ○ ○ — ○ ○ —
18 X18 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 19
24 MRS ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
STP
25 ○ ○ ○ — ○ ○ —

26
(STOP)
MC ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
20
27 TL ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
30 JOG ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
37 X37 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
46 TRG ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
47 TRC ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
50 SQ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
51 X51 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
60 STF ○ — — — ○ — —
61 STR — ○ — — — ○ —
62 RES ○ ○ ○ — ○ ○ —
65 X65 ○ ○ ○ — ○ ○ —
66 X66 ○ ○ ○ — ○ ○ —
67 X67 ○ ○ ○ — ○ ○ —
72 X72 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
92 X92 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9999 No function ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○: Assignment available, ─: Assignment unavailable (no function)

12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.6 Input terminal function selection
285
  Adjusting the response of input terminals (Pr.699)
• Response of the input terminals (physical terminals) can be delayed in a range between 5 to 50 ms. (The following is the
operation example of the STF signal.)
Output frequency

Time
ON OFF
STF
Pr.699 9999

Pr.699 Pr.699

NOTE
• The Pr.699 setting is invalid (no filter) for the following signals.
— Input signals which are already in the ON state when the power is turned ON
— Input signals used for the PLC function
— Output stop (MRS) signal

286 12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.6 Input terminal function selection
12.7 Inverter output shutoff 11

The inverter output can be shut off with the MRS signal. The logic of the MRS signal can also be selected.
Description
12
Initial
Pr. Name Setting range
value MRS signal input X10 signal input*1
0 Normally open input
1 Normally open input Normally closed input (NC 13
contact input specification)
2 Normally open input
Normally closed input (NC
3 Normally closed input (NC
17
T720
MRS/X10 terminal input
selection
0 contact input specification)
contact input specification) 14
4 External terminal: Normally Normally open input
closed input (NC contact input
specification) Normally closed input (NC
5
Communication: Normally open contact input specification) 15
input
*1 Refer to page 386 for the details of the X10 signal.

 Output shutoff signal (MRS signal) 16

Setting value "0" (Initial Setting value "2"
Motor coasts
Output frequency
to stop
Inverter
value)
Inverter 17
MRS MRS
SD (PC) SD (PC)
18
Time

MRS signal ON 19
STF (STR)
signal ON

• When the Output stop (MRS) signal is turned ON while operating the inverter, the inverter output is instantaneously shut 20
off.
• To input the MRS signal, set "24" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign
the function.
• The response time of the MRS signal is within 2 ms.
• The MRS signal is used in the following cases.
Application Description
To stop the motor using a mechanical brake (e.g.
The inverter output is shut off when the mechanical brake operates.
electromagnetic brake)
To provide interlock to disable the motor operation by the With the MRS signal ON, the motor cannot be driven by the inverter even if
inverter the start signal is input to the inverter.
When the start signal is turned OFF, the inverter decelerates the motor to
To coast the motor to a stop a stop in the preset deceleration time, but when the MRS signal is turned
ON, the motor coasts to a stop.

 MRS signal logic inversion (Pr.17 = "2")

• When Pr.17 = "2 or 3", the input specification of the MRS signal is changed to normally closed (NC contact). The inverter
will shut off the output when the MRS signal is turned OFF (when the contact is opened).

12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.7 Inverter output shutoff
287
  Assigning a different action for each MRS signal input via
communication and external terminal (Pr.17 = "4 or 5")
• When Pr.17 = "4 or 5", the MRS signal input from an external terminal is normally closed (NC contact), and the MRS signal
input from communication is normally open (NO contact). This function is useful to perform operation via communication
while keeping the ON state of the MRS signal input from the external terminal.
Pr.17 setting
External MRS Communication MRS
0, 1 2, 3 4, 5
OFF OFF Operation enabled Output shutoff Output shutoff
OFF ON Output shutoff Output shutoff Output shutoff
ON OFF Output shutoff Output shutoff Operation enabled
ON ON Output shutoff Operation enabled Output shutoff

 Operation when PU operation interlock enabled (Pr.79 = "7")

• When the X12 signal is not assigned to any input terminal while the PU operation interlock is enabled (Pr.79 = "7"), the
MRS signal is used as the X12 signal. The logic for the MRS signal used as the X12 signal is changed by the Pr.17 setting.
• The operation when the PU operation interlock is enabled (Pr.79 = "7") is as follows.
Pr.17 setting MRS signal X12 signal MRS function X12 function
Assigned Not assigned PU operation interlock (NO contact) —
0, 1 Not assigned Assigned —
PU operation interlock (NO contact)
Assigned Assigned Output shutoff (NO contact)
Assigned Not assigned PU operation interlock (NC contact) —
2 to 5 Not assigned Assigned —
PU operation interlock (NO contact)
Assigned Assigned Output shutoff (NC contact)

NOTE
• When using an external terminal to input the MRS signal, the MRS signal shuts off the output in any of the operation modes.
• The MRS signal is valid regardless of whether it is input through the external terminal or via network, but when the MRS signal
is used as the Inverter run enable (X10) signal, input the signal through the external terminal.
• When the terminal assignment is changed using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection), wiring may be
mistaken due to different terminal name and signal contents, or may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming
the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 174
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283

288 12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.7 Inverter output shutoff
12.8 Selecting the condition to activate the Second 11
function selection (RT) signal
12
The second function can be selected using the RT signal.
• Turning ON the Second function selection (RT) signal enables the second functions. For the RT signal, set "3" in any
parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function. 13
• The following are the examples of the applications of the second functions.
Switching between regular use and emergency use
Switching between heavy load and light load 14
Changing the acceleration/deceleration time by break point acceleration/deceleration
Switching characteristics of main motor and sub motor
Connection diagram example for the second
function
Example of the second acceleration/deceleration time
15
Output frequency
Inverter

16
Start STF/STR Acceleration
Second function selection RT time is applied
High speed RH
Time 17
Middle speed RM RT
SD
RH
RM
18
• When the RT signal is ON, second functions are selected. The following table shows the functions which can be changed
to the second function. 19
First function parameter Second function parameter
Function Refer to page
number number
Torque boost
Base frequency
Pr.0
Pr.3
Pr.46
Pr.47
374
376
20
Acceleration time Pr.7 Pr.44 158
Deceleration time Pr.8 Pr.44, Pr.45 158
Electronic thermal
Pr.9 Pr.51 198
O/L relay
Stall prevention Pr.22 Pr.48 214
Applied motor *1 Pr.71 Pr.450 294
Pr.80 to Pr.84, Pr.90 to
Pr.94, Pr.298, Pr.702,
Pr.453 to Pr.462, Pr.560,
Pr.706, Pr.707, Pr.711,
Motor constant*1 Pr.712, Pr.717, Pr.721,
Pr.738 to Pr.746, Pr.860, 299, 308
Pr.1413
Pr.724, Pr.725, Pr.859,
Pr.1412
Speed control gain (Advanced
Pr.89 Pr.569 90
magnetic flux vector)*1
Offline auto tuning*1 Pr.96 Pr.463 299, 308
*1 Pr.95 Pr.574 315
Online auto tuning
*1 Pr.800 Pr.451 86
Motor control method
Speed control gain Pr.820, Pr.821 Pr.830, Pr.831 107
Analog input filter Pr.822, Pr.826 Pr.832, Pr.836 271
Torque control gain Pr.824, Pr.825 Pr.834, Pr.835 122

*1 The function can be changed by switching the RT signal ON/OFF while the inverter is stopped. If a signal is switched during operation, the
operation method changes after the inverter stops. (Pr.450 ≠ 9999)

12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.8 Selecting the condition to activate the Second function selection (RT) signal
289
 NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283

290 12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.8 Selecting the condition to activate the Second function selection (RT) signal
12.9 Start signal operation selection 11

Operation of the start signal (STF/STR) can be selected.

Select the stopping method (deceleration stop or coasting) at turn-OFF of the start signal. 12
Use this function to stop a motor with a mechanical brake at turn-OFF of the start signal.
Description
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Stop operation
13
Start signal (STF/STR)
(Refer to page 384.)
STF signal: Forward rotation start The motor coasts to a stop after a lapse
0 to 100 s
STR signal: Reverse rotation start of the setting time when the start signal
is turned OFF. 14
STF signal: Start signal When set to 1000 to 1100 s, the motor
1000 to 1100 s STR signal: Forward/reverse will coast to stop after the time period
rotation signal calculated by subtracting 1000 s from
250
G106
Stop selection 9999 the time set in Pr.250. 15
STF signal: Forward rotation start
9999
STR signal: Reverse rotation start
The motor is decelerated to a stop

8888
STF signal: Start signal
STR signal: Forward/reverse
when the start signal is turned OFF. 16
rotation signal

 2-wire type (STF signal, STR signal)

• The following figure shows the 2-wire type connection.
17
• As an initial setting, the forward/reverse rotation signals (STF/STR) acts as both start and stop signals. Either one turned
ON will be enabled, and the operation will follow that signal. The motor will decelerate to a stop when both are turned OFF
(or both are turned ON) during the operation.
18
• The frequency can be set by inputting 0 to 10 VDC between the speed setting input terminals 2 and 5, or with Pr.4 to Pr.6
Multi-speed setting (high speed, middle speed, and low speed). (For the multi-speed operation, refer to page 195.)
• By setting Pr.250 = "1000 to 1100, 8888", the STF signal input becomes the start command and the STR signal input
19
becomes the forward/reverse command.

20
Forward
rotation start STF Start signal STF

Reverse STR Inverter Forward/ STR Inverter

rotation start SD reverse SD
signal
10 10
2 2
5 5
Reverse Forward

Reverse Forward
rotation rotation

rotation rotation
Output frequency

Output frequency

Time Time

ON ON
STF STF
ON ON
STR STR
2-wire type connection example (Pr.250 = "9999") 2-wire type connection example (Pr.250 = "8888")

NOTE
• By setting Pr.250 = "0 to 100, 1000 to 1100", the motor will coast to a stop when the start command is turned OFF. (Refer to
page 384.)
• The STF and STR signals are assigned to Pr.178 STF/DI0 terminal function selection and Pr.179 STR/DI1 terminal
function selection in the initial status. The STF signal can be assigned to only Pr.178 STF/DI0 terminal function selection,
and the STR signal can be assigned to only Pr.179 STR/DI1 terminal function selection.

12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.9 Start signal operation selection
291
  3-wire type (STF signal, STR signal, STP (STOP) signal)
• The following figure shows the 3-wire type connection.
• The self-holding function is enabled when the STP (STOP) signal is turned ON. In such case, the forward/reverse signal
is simply used as a start signal. (The STP (STOP) signal can be input via an external terminal only.)
• For the STP (STOP) signal, set "25" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.184 (Input terminal function selection) to assign
the function.
• Even if a start signal (STF or STR) is turned ON and then OFF, the start command remains valid and the motor operation
continues. To change the rotation direction, turn the STR (STF) signal ON once and then OFF.
• In order to decelerate the motor to a stop, turn OFF the STP (STOP) signal once.

Stop Forward Stop Start

rotation start
STF STF
Inverter Inverter
Reverse
rotation start
STR STP (STOP)

STP (STOP) STR

Forward rotation
/reverse rotation
SD SD

Reverse Forward
Reverse Forward

rotation rotation
rotation rotation

Output frequency
Output frequency

Time Time

ON ON ON
STF STF
ON
STR STR ON

STP (STOP) ON STP (STOP) ON

OFF OFF OFF OFF
3-wire type connection example (Pr.250 = "9999") 3-wire type connection example (Pr.250 = "8888")

NOTE
• When the JOG operation is enabled by turning ON the JOG signal, the STP (STOP) signal will be disabled.
• Even when the output is stopped by turning ON the MRS signal, the self-holding function is not canceled.

 Start signal selection

Pr.250 setting and inverter condition
STF STR
0 to 100 s, 9999 1000 to 1100 s, 8888
OFF OFF Stop
Stop
OFF ON Reverse rotation
ON OFF Forward rotation Forward rotation
ON ON Stop Reverse rotation

Parameters referred to
Pr.4 to Pr.6 (multi-speed setting)page 195
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283

292 12. (T) Multi-Function Input Terminal Parameters

12.9 Start signal operation selection
 CHAPTER 13
CHAPTER 13 (C) Motor Constant
Parameters 4

13.1 Applied motor........................................................................................................................................................294

13.2 Offline auto tuning.................................................................................................................................................299
6
13.3 Offline auto tuning for a PM motor (motor constant tuning)..................................................................................308
13.4 Online auto tuning.................................................................................................................................................315
7

10

293
 13 (C) Motor Constant Parameters
Purpose Parameter to set Refer to page
To select the motor to be used Applied motor P.C100, P.C200 Pr.71, Pr.450 294
P.C100 to P.C105,
P.C107, P.C108, Pr.9, Pr.51, Pr.71,
P.C110, P.C120 to Pr.80 to Pr.84, Pr.90 to
P.C126, P.C182, Pr.94, Pr.96, Pr.453 to
To maximize the performance of the
Offline auto tuning PC188, P.C200 to Pr.463, Pr.707, Pr.717, 299
induction motor
P.C205, P.C207, Pr.720, Pr.724, Pr.737,
P.C208, P.C210, Pr.741, Pr.744, Pr.745,
P.C220 to P.C226, Pr.859, Pr.860
P.C282, P.C288
P.C100 to P.C108, Pr.9, Pr.51, Pr.71,
P.C110, P.C120, Pr.80, Pr.81, Pr.83,
P.C122, P.C123, Pr.84, Pr.90, Pr.92,
P.C126, P.C130 to Pr.93, Pr.96, Pr.450,
P.C133, P.C135, Pr.453, Pr.454, Pr.456
P.C150, P.C182, to Pr.458, Pr.460,
To maximize the performance of the PM motor offline auto
P.C185, P.C200 to Pr.461, Pr.463, Pr.702, 308
PM motor tuning
P.C208, P.C210, Pr.706, Pr.707, Pr.711,
P.C220, P.C222, Pr.712, Pr.717, Pr.721,
P.C223, P.C226, Pr.724, Pr.725, Pr.738
P.C230 to P.C233, to Pr.746, Pr.859,
P.C235, P.C282, Pr.860, Pr.1002,
P.C285 Pr.1412, Pr.1413
To perform high accuracy operation
without being affected by temperature Online auto tuning P.C111, P.C211 Pr.95, Pr.574 315
and high-torque/ultra-low speed

13.1 Applied motor

By setting the applied motor type, the thermal characteristic appropriate for the motor can be selected.
When using a constant-torque or PM motor, the electronic thermal O/L relay function is set according to the motor.
When the Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, or PM sensorless vector control is selected,
the motor constant necessary for control (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA) is also selected at the same time.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
0, 3, 5, 6, 10, 13, 15, 16, 20, 23,
71 40, 43, 50, 53, 70, 73, 8090, By selecting a motor, the thermal characteristic
Applied motor 0
C100 *1 and motor constant of each motor are set.
8093, 9090, 9093
0, 3, 5, 6, 10, 13, 15, 16, 20, 23,
40, 43, 50, 53, 70, 73, 8090, Set this parameter when using the second motor
450
Second applied motor 9999 (the same specifications as Pr.71).
C200 8093, 9090, 9093*1
9999 The function is disabled.
*1 The setting range for the 575 V class is "0, 3, 5, 6, 10, 13, 15, 16, 8090, 8093, 9090, and 9093".

294 13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.1 Applied motor
 Motor settings (200/400 V class)
• Refer to the following list and set the parameters according to the applied motor. 11
Electronic thermal O/L
Motor constant value range when performing relay function
Pr.71 Pr.450 Motor
offline auto tuning (increment)
Standard
Constant-
torque
12
0 (Pr.71 initial value) Standard motor (such as SF-JR) ○
Constant-torque motor (such as SF- Pr.82 (Pr.455) and Pr.859 (Pr.860)
10 ○
JRCA) • 0 to 500 A, 9999 (0.01 A)
Pr.90 (Pr.458), Pr.91 (Pr.459)
13
Mitsubishi Electric standard efficiency
20 • 0 to 50 Ω, 9999 (0.001 Ω) ○
motor (SF-JR 4P 1.5 kW or lower)
Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency Pr.92 (Pr.460), Pr.93 (Pr.461) (Induction motor)
40
motor SF-HR
• 0 to 6000 mH, 9999 (0.1 mH)
Pr.92 (Pr.460), Pr.93 (Pr.461) (PM motor)
○
14
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque
50 • 0 to 650 mH, 9999 (0.01 mH) ○
motor SF-HRCA Pr.94 (Pr.462)
Mitsubishi Electric high-performance • 0% to 100%, 9999 (0.1%)
70
energy-saving motor SF-PR Pr.706 (Pr.738)
○
15
8090 IPM motor • 0 to 5000 mV (rad/s), 9999 (0.1 mV/(rad/s)) ○
9090 SPM motor ○
3 Standard motor (such as SF-JR)
Constant-torque motor (such as SF-
○
16
13 ○
JRCA)
Mitsubishi Electric standard efficiency
23 ○
motor (SF-JR 4P 1.5 kW or lower)
Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency
Pr.82 (Pr.455), Pr.859 (Pr.860), Pr.90 (Pr.458), 17
43 Pr.91 (Pr.459), Pr.92 (Pr.460), Pr.93 (Pr.461), ○
motor SF-HR
Pr.94 (Pr.462), Pr.706 (Pr.738)
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque
53 • Internal data value 0 to 65534, 9999 (1) ○
motor SF-HRCA 18
Mitsubishi Electric high-performance
73 ○
energy-saving motor SF-PR
8093 IPM motor ○
9093 SPM motor ○ 19
5 Standard motor Pr.82 (Pr.455) and Pr.859 (Pr.860) ○
Wye
• 0 to 500 A, 9999 (0.01 A)
connection
15 Constant-torque motor Pr.90 (Pr.458), Pr.91 (Pr.459),
Pr.92 (Pr.460) and Pr.93 (Pr.461)
○
20
6 Standard motor • 0 to 50 Ω, 9999 (0.001 Ω) ○
Delta
Pr.94 (Pr.462)
connection
16 Constant-torque motor • 0 to 500 Ω, 9999 (0.01 Ω) ○
— 9999
(initial No second applied motor
value)

NOTE
• Regardless of the Pr.71 (Pr.450) setting, offline auto tuning can be performed according to Pr.96 (Pr.463) Auto tuning
setting/status. (Refer to page 299 for offline auto tuning.)

13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.1 Applied motor
295
  Motor settings (575 V class)
• Refer to the following list and set the parameters according to the applied motor.
Electronic thermal O/L
Motor constant value range when performing relay function
Pr.71 Pr.450 Motor
offline auto tuning (increment) Constant-
Standard
torque
Pr.82 (Pr.455), Pr.859 (Pr.860)
0 (Pr.71 initial value) Standard motor • 0 to 500 A, 9999 (0.01 A) ○
Pr.90 (Pr.458), Pr.91 (Pr.459)
10 Constant-torque motor • 0 to 50 Ω, 9999 (0.001 Ω) ○
Pr.92 (Pr.460), Pr.93 (Pr.461) (Induction motor)
• 0 to 6000 mH, 9999 (0.1 mH)
8090 IPM motor Pr.92 (Pr.460), Pr.93 (Pr.461) (PM motor) ○
• 0 to 650 mH, 9999 (0.01 mH)
Pr.94 (Pr.462)
9090 SPM motor • 0% to 100%, 9999 (0.1%) ○
Pr.706 (Pr.738)
• 0 to 5000 mV (rad/s), 9999 (0.1 mV/(rad/s))
3 Standard motor Pr.82 (Pr.455), Pr.859 (Pr.860), Pr.90 (Pr.458), ○
13 Constant-torque motor Pr.91 (Pr.459), Pr.92 (Pr.460), Pr.93 (Pr.461), ○
8093 IPM motor Pr.94 (Pr.462), Pr.706 (Pr.738) ○
9093 SPM motor • Internal data value 0 to 65534, 9999 (1) ○
Pr.82 (Pr.455) and Pr.859 (Pr.860)
5 Standard motor ○
Wye • 0 to 500 A, 9999 (0.01 A)
connection Pr.90 (Pr.458), Pr.91 (Pr.459),
15 Constant-torque motor Pr.92 (Pr.460) and Pr.93 (Pr.461) ○
• 0 to 50 Ω, 9999 (0.001 Ω)
6 Standard motor Pr.92 (Pr.460), Pr.93 (Pr.461) ○
Delta • 0 to 50 Ω, 9999 (0.001 Ω)
connection Pr.94 (Pr.462)
16 Constant-torque motor ○
• 0 to 500 Ω, 9999 (0.01 Ω)
9999
— (initial No second applied motor
value)

NOTE
• Regardless of the Pr.71 (Pr.450) setting, offline auto tuning can be performed according to Pr.96 (Pr.463) Auto tuning
setting/status. (Refer to page 299 for offline auto tuning.)

 Using two types of motors (RT signal, Pr.450)

• When using two types of motors with one inverter, set Pr.450 Second applied motor.
• The setting value "9999" (initial value) disables the second motor.
• If Pr.450 ≠ 9999, the following parameters will be enabled by turning ON the Second function selection (RT) signal.

296 13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.1 Applied motor
 Function RT signal ON (second motor) RT signal OFF (first motor)
Electronic thermal O/L relay Pr.51 Pr.9 11
Applied motor Pr.450 Pr.71
Control method selection Pr.451 Pr.800
Motor capacity
Number of motor poles
Pr.453
Pr.454
Pr.80
Pr.81
12
Motor excitation current Pr.455 Pr.82
Rated motor voltage Pr.456 Pr.83
Rated motor frequency Pr.457 Pr.84 13
Motor constant (R1) Pr.458 Pr.90
Motor constant (R2) Pr.459 Pr.91
Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld)
Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq)
Pr.460
Pr.461
Pr.92
Pr.93
14
Motor constant (X) Pr.462 Pr.94
Auto tuning setting/status Pr.463 Pr.96
Frequency search gain Pr.560 Pr.298 15
Online auto tuning selection Pr.574 Pr.95
Induced voltage constant (phi f) Pr.738 Pr.706
Motor Ld decay ratio
Motor Lq decay ratio
Pr.739
Pr.740
Pr.711
Pr.712
16
Starting resistance tuning compensation
Pr.741 Pr.717
coefficient 1
Starting resistance tuning compensation
coefficient
Pr.737 Pr.720 17
Starting magnetic pole position detection pulse
Pr.742 Pr.721
width
Maximum motor frequency Pr.743 Pr.702 18
Motor inertia (integer) Pr.744 Pr.707
Motor inertia (exponent) Pr.745 Pr.724
Motor protection current level Pr.746 Pr.725
Torque current/Rated PM motor current Pr.860 Pr.859 19
NOTE
• The RT signal is the Second function selection signal. The RT signal also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 289.) 20
• For the RT signal, set "3" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 Automatic change of torque boost for the SF-PR motor (200/400 V class)
• When the SF-PR motor is selected (Pr.71 = "70 or 73"), the Pr.0 Torque boost setting is automatically changed to enable
output of the 6 Hz 150% torque under V/F control by setting Pr.81 Number of motor poles according to the number of
the SF-PR motor poles.

NOTE
• When selecting the automatic change of torque boost for the SF-PR motor, set Pr.14 Load pattern selection = "0 (initial
value)".
• When the Pr.0 setting is changed from its initial value, the automatic change is not performed.

 Automatic change of Pr.0 Torque boost and Pr.12 DC injection brake

operation voltage (200/400 V class)
• When initial values are set in Pr.0 and Pr.12, the Pr.0 and Pr.12 settings are automatically changed to the values in the
following table by changing the Pr.71 setting.

13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.1 Applied motor
297
 Pr.12 value (%) after automatic
Inverter Pr.0 value (%) after automatic change
change
Constant SF-PR*3 Constant-
Standard Standard
-torque Pr.81 ≠ "2, 4, Pr.81 = Pr.81 = Pr.81 = torque SF-PR*3
FR-E820-[] FR-E840-[] motor*1 motor*1
motor*2 6" "2" "4" "6" motor*2
ND LD ND LD ND LD ND LD ND LD ND LD ND LD ND LD ND LD
0008(0.1K) — 6 6 6 6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 6 6 6 6 4 4
0015(0.2K) — 6 6 6 6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 6 4 6 4 4 4
0030(0.4K) 0016(0.4K) 6 6 6 6 4 4 4 7.4 4 6 4 6.4 4 4 4 4 4 4
0050(0.75K) 0026(0.75K) 6 4 6 4 4 3 7.4 5.8 6 5 6.4 3.7 4 4 4 4 4 2.5
0080(1.5K) 0040(1.5K) 4 4 4 4 3 2.5 5.8 6 5 4.5 3.7 3.3 4 4 4 4 2.5 2.5
0110(2.2K) 0060(2.2K) 4 4 4 4 2.5 2.5 6 6.4 4.5 4.5 3.3 4.2 4 4 4 4 2.5 2.5
0175(3.7K) 0095(3.7K) 4 3 4 2 2.5 2 6.4 4.5 4.5 3.7 4.2 3.3 4 4 4 2 2.5 2
0240(5.5K) 0120(5.5K) 3 3 2 2 2 2 4.5 4.4 3.7 4.5 3.3 3.8 4 4 2 2 2 2
0330(7.5K) 0170(7.5K) 3 2 2 2 2 1.5 4.4 3.5 4.5 3.3 3.8 3.5 4 2 2 2 2 1.5
*1 Pr.71 = "0, 3, 5, 6, 20, 23, 40, or 43" (standard motor)
*2 Pr.71 = "10, 13, 15, 16, 50, or 53" (constant-torque motor)
*3 Pr.71 = "70 or 73" (SF-PR)

NOTE
• When the Pr.0 and Pr.12 settings are changed from their initial values, the automatic change is not performed.
• When the SF-PR motor is selected (Pr.71 = "70 or 73"), the output current may become large due to a small load by setting
Pr.81 Number of motor poles according to the number of the SF-PR motor poles.
• When the SF-PR motor is used, the output current tends to increase compared with the case where the SF-JR or SF-HR motor
is used. Depending on the load conditions, the output current may increase even though the torque boost value has been
automatically changed. When the protective function such as the electronic thermal O/L relay (E.THT, E.THM) or stall
prevention (OL, E.OLT) is activated, adjust the Pr.0 Torque boost according to the load.

CAUTION
• Make sure to set this parameter correctly according to the motor used. Incorrect setting may cause the motor and the
inverter to overheat and burn.

Parameters referred to
Pr.0 Torque boostpage 374
Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltagepage 382
Pr.14 Load pattern selectionpage 378
Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/statuspage 299
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283

298 13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.1 Applied motor
13.2 Offline auto tuning 11

Magnetic flux Sensorless

The offline auto tuning enables the optimal operation of a motor.

12
• Under Advanced magnetic flux vector control or Real sensorless vector control, automatic measurement of motor
constants (offline auto tuning) enables optimal operation of motors even when motor constants vary, when a motor of
another company is used, or when the wiring distance is long.
13
For the offline auto tuning for a PM motor, refer to page 308.

Pr. Name
Initial
value
Setting range Description 14
0, 3, 5, 6, 10, 13, 15, 16, 20,
71 23, 40, 43, 50, 53, 70, 73, By selecting a motor, the thermal characteristic and motor
Applied motor 0
C100 constant of each motor are set.
8090, 8093, 9090, 9093*1 15
80 0.1 to 30 kW Set the applied motor capacity.
Motor capacity 9999
C101 9999 V/F control
81 Number of motor 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Set the number of motor poles.
C102 poles
9999
9999 V/F control 16
Inverter
9 Electronic thermal rated 0 to 500 A Set the rated motor current.
C103 O/L relay
current*2
83 200/400/
17
Rated motor voltage 0 to 1000 V Set the rated motor voltage (V).
C104 575 V*3
84 Rated motor 10 to 400 Hz Set the rated motor frequency (Hz).
C105 frequency
9999
9999 The setting value of Pr.3 Base frequency is used. 18
707 Motor inertia
9999 10 to 999, 9999 Set the motor inertia.
C107 (integer)
9999: The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR,
724 Motor inertia
C108 (exponent)
9999 0 to 7, 9999 SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so on) is used.
19
0 No offline auto tuning
96 Auto tuning setting/ 1 Offline auto tuning is performed without the motor rotating.
0
C110 status
11
Offline auto tuning is performed without the motor rotating
(under V/F control). (Refer to page 358.) 20
90
C120
Motor constant (R1) 9999 0 to 50 Ω, 9999*4

91
C121
Motor constant (R2) 9999 0 to 50 Ω, 9999*4

Motor constant (L1)/

92
C122
d-axis inductance 9999 0 to 6000 mH, 9999*4
(Ld)
Motor constant (L2)/
93
C123
q-axis inductance 9999 0 to 6000 mH, 9999*4
(Lq)
94
C124
Motor constant (X) 9999 0% to 100%, 9999*4 Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is
automatically set.)
82 Motor excitation 9999: The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR,
C125 current
9999 0 to 500 A, 9999*4
SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so on) is used.
Torque current/
859
C126
Rated PM motor 9999 0 to 500 A, 9999*4
current
Starting resistance
717 tuning
9999 0% to 200%, 9999
C182 compensation
coefficient 1
Starting resistance
720 tuning
9999 0% to 200%, 9999
C188 compensation
coefficient
The offline auto tuning automatically sets the gain required for
0 to 32767
298 Frequency search the frequency search.
9999
A711 gain The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR, SF-JR,
9999
SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so on) is used.

13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.2 Offline auto tuning
299
 Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
0, 3, 5, 6, 10, 13, 15, 16, 20,
23, 40, 43, 50, 53, 70, 73, Set this parameter when using the second motor
450 Second applied (the same specifications as Pr.71).
9999
C200 motor 8090, 8093, 9090, 9093*1
9999 The function is disabled.
453 Second motor 0.1 to 30 kW Set the capacity of the second motor.
9999
C201 capacity 9999 V/F control
454 Number of second 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Set the number of poles of the second motor.
9999
C202 motor poles 9999 V/F control
This function is enabled when the RT signal is ON.
51 Second electronic 0 to 500 A
9999 Set the rated motor current.
C203 thermal O/L relay
9999 Second electronic thermal O/L relay disabled.
456 Rated second motor 200/400/
0 to 1000 V Set the rated voltage (V) of the second motor.
C204 voltage 575 V*3
457 Rated second motor 10 to 400 Hz Set the rated frequency (Hz) of the second motor.
9999
C205 frequency 9999 The Pr.84 Rated motor frequency setting is used.
744 Second motor
9999 10 to 999, 9999 Set the inertia of the second motor.
C207 inertia (integer)
9999: The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR,
745 Second motor
9999 0 to 7, 9999 SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so on) is used.
C208 inertia (exponent)
0 No auto tuning for the second motor.
Second motor auto Offline auto tuning is performed without the second motor
463 1
tuning setting/ 0 rotating.
C210
status Offline auto tuning is performed without the second motor
11
rotating (under V/F control). (Refer to page 358.)
458 Second motor
C220 constant (R1)
9999 0 to 50 Ω, 9999*4

459 Second motor

C221 constant (R2)
9999 0 to 50 Ω, 9999*4
Second motor
460
C222
constant (L1) / d- 9999 0 to 6000 mH, 9999*4
axis inductance (Ld)
Second motor
461
C223
constant (L2) / q- 9999 0 to 6000 mH, 9999*4
axis inductance (Lq)
462 Second motor
C224 constant (X)
9999 0% to 100%, 9999*4 Tuning data of the second motor.
455 Second motor (The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically
C225 excitation current
9999 0 to 500 A, 9999*4 set.)
9999: The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR,
Second motor
860 torque current/ SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so on) is used.
C226 Rated PM motor
9999 0 to 500 A, 9999*4
current
Second motor
starting resistance
741
tuning 9999 0% to 200%, 9999
C282
compensation
coefficient 1
Starting resistance
737 tuning
9999 0% to 200%, 9999
C288 compensation
coefficient 2
The offline auto tuning automatically sets the gain required for
0 to 32767
the frequency search of the second motor.
560 Second frequency
9999 The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR, SF-JR,
A712 search gain
9999 SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so on) is used for the second
motor.
*1 The setting range for the 575 V class is "0, 3, 5, 6, 10, 13, 15, 16, 8090, 8093, 9090, and 9093".
*2 For the FR-E820-0050(0.75K) or lower, FR-E840-0026(0.75K) or lower, and FR-E860-0017(0.75K), it is set to 85% of the inverter rated current.
*3 The initial value differs according to the voltage class (200/400/575 V).
*4 The setting range and unit change according to the Pr.71 (Pr.450) setting.

300 13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.2 Offline auto tuning
 • The setting is valid under Advanced magnetic flux vector control or Real sensorless vector control. 11
• By using the offline auto tuning function, the optimum operation characteristics are obtained for a motor other than Mitsubishi
Electric standard efficiency motors (SF-JR 0.2 kW or higher), high-efficiency motors (SF-HR 0.2 kW or higher), Mitsubishi
Electric constant-torque motors (SF-JRCA 4P, SF-HRCA 0.2 kW to 7.5 kW), or Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-
serving motor (SF-PR), such as an induction motor of other manufacturers or SF-JRC, or with a long wiring length (30 m or
12
longer).
• Tuning is enabled even when a load is connected to the motor.
• Reading/writing of the motor constants tuned by offline auto tuning are enabled. 13
• The offline auto tuning status can be monitored on the operation panel.

 Before performing offline auto tuning 14

Check the following points before performing offline auto tuning:
• Check that a value other than "9999" is set in Pr.80 and Pr.81, and Advanced magnetic flux vector control or Real
sensorless vector control is selected (with Pr.800). (Refer to page 86.) 15
• Check that a motor is connected. (Check that the motor is not rotated by an external force during tuning.)
• Select a motor with the rated current equal to or less than the inverter rated current. (Note that the motor rated current
should be 0.4 kW or higher (0.1 kW or higher for the 200 V class).) If a motor with substantially low rated current compared 16
with the inverter rated current is used, speed and torque accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the
rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.
• Tuning is not available for a high-slip motor, high-speed motor, or special motor. 17
• The maximum frequency is 400 Hz.
• Tuning is enabled even when a load is connected to the motor. The motor may run slightly. Fix the motor securely with a
mechanical brake, or before tuning, make sure that it is safe even if the motor rotates. (Caution is required especially in 18
vertical lift applications.) Note that even if the motor runs slightly, tuning performance is unaffected.
• Offline auto tuning is not performed correctly when the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) is inserted
between the inverter and motor. Be sure to remove it before performing tuning. 19
 Settings
• To perform tuning, set the following parameters about the motor.
20
First Second
motor motor Name Initial value Description
Pr. Pr.
80 453 Motor capacity 9999 (V/F control) Set the motor capacity (kW).
81 454 Number of motor poles 9999 (V/F control) Set the number of motor poles (2 to 12).
Control method 40 (in Pr.800) / 9999 Set this parameter under Advanced magnetic flux vector control or
800 451
selection (in Pr.451) Real sensorless vector control.
Electronic thermal O/L
9 51 Inverter rated current Set the rated motor current (A).
relay
83 456 Rated motor voltage 200/400/575 V*1 Set the rated motor voltage (V) printed on the motor's rating plate.
Rated motor Set the rated motor frequency (Hz). When the setting is "9999", the Pr.3
84 457 9999
frequency Base frequency setting is used.
Set this parameter according to the motor.*2 Three types of motor
71 450 Applied motor 0 (standard motor) constant setting ranges, units and tuning data can be stored according
to settings.
Set "1".
Auto tuning setting/
96 463 0 1: Tuning is performed without the motor rotating. (Excitation noise
status
occurs at this point.)
*1 The initial value differs according to the voltage class (200/400/575 V).

13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.2 Offline auto tuning
301
 *2 Set Pr.71 Applied motor according to the motor to be used and the motor constant setting range. According to the Pr.71 setting, the range of
the motor constant parameter setting values and units can be changed. (For other setting values of Pr.71, refer to page 294.)

Pr.71 setting
Motor constant Motor constant
Motor Motor constant parameter
parameter mH, %, parameter internal
Ω, mΩ, and A unit setting
and A unit setting data setting
Mitsubishi Electric standard SF-JR 0 (initial value) 3 —
efficiency motor SF-JR 4P 1.5 kW or lower 20 23 —
Mitsubishi Electric high- SF-HR 40 43 —
efficiency motor Others 0 (initial value) 3 —
SF-JRCA 4P 10 13 —
Mitsubishi Electric constant-
SF-HRCA 50 53 —
torque motor
Others (SF-JRC, etc.) 10 13 —
Mitsubishi Electric high-
performance energy-saving SF-PR 70 73 —
motor
Other manufacturer's 5 (wye connection motor)
— 0 (initial value) 3
standard motor 6 (delta connection motor)
Other manufacturer's 15 (wye connection motor)
— 10 13
constant-torque motor 16 (delta connection motor)

NOTE
• When Pr.11 DC injection brake operation time = "0" or Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltage = "0", offline auto
tuning is performed at the initial setting of Pr.11 or Pr.12.
• If "wye connection" or "delta connection" is incorrectly selected in Pr.71, Advanced magnetic flux vector control and Real
sensorless vector control are not performed properly.

• For tuning accuracy improvement, set the following parameters when the motor constants are known in advance.
Mitsubishi Electric motor
First motor Second
Name (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF- Other motors
Pr. motor Pr.
JRCA, SF-HRCA)
707 744 Motor inertia (integer) Motor inertia*3 Jm = Pr.707 × 10^(-Pr.724)
9999 (initial value)
724 745 Motor inertia (exponent) (kg·m2)

*3 The setting is valid only when a value other than "9999" is set in both Pr.707 (Pr.744) and Pr.724 (Pr.745).

 Performing tuning

• Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel if the inverter is in the state ready for tuning. The
motor starts by turning ON the start command while tuning is unavailable.

• In the PU operation mode, press the RUN key on the operation panel.
In the External operation, turn ON the start command (STF signal or STR signal). Tuning starts.

302 13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.2 Offline auto tuning
 NOTE
• Satisfy the required inverter start conditions to start offline auto tuning. For example, stop the input of the MRS signal. 11
• To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or the STOP/RESET key on the operation panel.
(Turning OFF the start signal (STF signal or STR signal) also ends tuning.)
• During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid (initial value).
Input terminals <effective signals>: MRS, RES, STF, STR, S1, and S2
12
Output terminals: RUN, FU, FM, AM, ABC, and SO
• When the rotation speed and the output frequency are selected for terminals FM and AM, the progress status of offline auto
tuning is output in 15 steps from FM and AM (in the standard model). 13
• Do not perform ON/OFF switching of the Second function selection (RT) signal during offline auto tuning. Auto tuning will not
be performed properly.
• Since the Inverter running (RUN) signal turns ON when tuning is started, pay close attention especially when a sequence which
releases a mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed. 14
• When executing offline auto tuning, input the operation command after switching ON the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
of the inverter.
• While Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "7", turn ON the PU operation external interlock (X12) signal for tuning in the PU 15
operation mode.

• During tuning, the monitor is displayed on the operation panel as follows. 16

Tuning status Operation panel indication

(1) Setting 17

(2) During tuning 18

(3) Normal completion Blinking

19

• Note: Offline auto tuning time (with the initial setting)

20
Offline auto tuning setting Time
Pr.96 = "1" About 25 to 100 s. (The time depends on the inverter capacity and motor type.)
• When offline auto tuning ends, press the STOP/RESET key on the operation panel during PU operation. In the External
operation mode, turn OFF the start signal (STF signal or STR signal).
This operation resets the offline auto tuning, and the monitor display of the operation panel returns to normal.
(Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)

NOTE
• The motor constants measured once during offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until offline
auto tuning is performed again. However, the tuning data is cleared when performing All parameter clear.
• Changing Pr.71 (Pr.450) after tuning completion will change the motor constant. For example, if "3" is set in Pr.71 after tuning
is performed with Pr.71 = "0", the tuning data becomes invalid. To use the tuned data, set "0" again in Pr.71.

• If offline auto tuning has ended in error (see the following table), motor constants are not set. Perform an inverter reset and
restart tuning.

13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.2 Offline auto tuning
303
 Error display Error cause Countermeasures
8 Forced end Set "1" in Pr.96 and retry.
9 Inverter protective function operation Make the setting again.
Set the acceleration/deceleration time longer.
91 The current limit (stall prevention) function is activated.
Set Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection = "1".
Check for the power supply voltage fluctuation.
92 The converter output voltage fell to 75% of the rated voltage.
Check the Pr.83 Rated motor voltage setting.
Calculation error. Check the Pr.83 and Pr.84 settings.
93
The motor is not connected. Check the motor wiring and make the setting again.
• When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing the STOP/RESET key or turning OFF the start signal (STF or STR) during
tuning, offline tuning does not end properly. (The motor constants have not been set.)
Perform an inverter reset and perform tuning again.
• When the rated power supply of the motor is 200/220 V (400/440 V) 60 Hz, set the rated motor current multiplied by 1.1 in
Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay after tuning is complete.
• For a motor with a thermal protector or other thermal detection, set "0" (motor overheat protection by inverter invalid) in
Pr.9 to protect the motor from overheating.

NOTE
• An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error. After power is restored, the inverter starts
normal operation. Therefore, when the STF (STR) signal is ON, the motor starts forward (reverse) rotation.
• Any fault occurring during tuning is handled as in the normal operation. However, if the retry function is set, no retry is
performed.
• The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0 Hz.

CAUTION
• Note that the motor may start running suddenly.
• For performing offline auto tuning with the motor rotating in vertical lift applications, etc., caution is required to avoid falling
due to insufficient torque.

 Changing the motor constants

• The motor constants can be set directly when the motor constants are known in advance, or by using the data measured
during offline auto tuning.
• According to the Pr.71 (Pr.450) setting, the range of the motor constant parameter setting values and units can be
changed. The changed settings are stored in the EEPROM as the motor constant parameters.

 Changing the motor constants (when setting the Pr.92 and Pr.93 motor
constants in units of mH)
• Set Pr.71 as follows.
Motor Pr.71 setting
SF-JR 0 (initial value)
Mitsubishi Electric standard efficiency motor
SF-JR 4P 1.5 kW or lower 20
Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor
SF-HR 40
SF-JRCA 4P 10
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor
SF-HRCA 50
Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-
SF-PR 70
saving motor

304 13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.2 Offline auto tuning
 • Use the following formula to find the Pr.94 setting value and set a desired value as the motor constant parameter.

The setting value of Pr.94 =（1 -

M2
）×100(％) 11
L1×L2

R1 I1 I2
R1: Primary resistance
12
R2: Secondary resistance
I1: Primary leakage inductance
I2: Secondary leakage inductance
V M R2/S M: Excitation inductance 13
S: Slip

L1= I1+ M: Primary inductance

L2= I2+ M: Secondary inductance
14
Equivalent circuit diagram of the motor

First motor Second Setting

Name Setting range Initial value
Pr. motor Pr. increments 15
Motor excitation current (no load
82 455 0 to 500 A, 9999 0.01 A
current)
90 458 Motor constant (R1) 0 to 50 Ω, 9999 0.001 Ω
91 459 Motor constant (R2) 0 to 50 Ω, 9999 0.001 Ω 16
Motor constant (L1)/d-axis
92 460 0 to 6000 mH, 9999 0.1 mH
inductance (Ld)
Motor constant (L2)/q-axis
93 461
inductance (Lq)
0 to 6000 mH, 9999 0.1 mH 17
9999
94 462 Motor constant (X) 0% to 100%, 9999 0.1%
Torque current/Rated PM motor
859 860 0 to 500 A, 9999 0.01 A

298 560
current
Frequency search gain 0 to 32767, 9999 1
18
Starting resistance tuning
717 741 0% to 200% 0.1%
compensation coefficient 1

720 737
Starting resistance tuning
compensation coefficient 2
0% to 200% 0.1% 19

NOTE
• If "9999" is set in the motor constant parameters, tuning data will be invalid and the constant values for Mitsubishi Electric
20
motors (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so on) are used.

 Changing the motor constants (when setting motor constants in the

internal data of the inverter)
• Set Pr.71 as follows.
Motor Pr.71 setting
SF-JR 3
Mitsubishi Electric standard efficiency motor SF-JR 4P 1.5 kW or lower 23
Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor SF-HR 43
Others 3
SF-JRCA 4P 13
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor SF-HRCA 53
Other (SF-JRC, etc.) 13
Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-saving motor SF-PR 73
Other manufacturer's standard motor — 3
Other manufacturer's constant-torque motor — 13

13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.2 Offline auto tuning
305
 • Set desired values as the motor constant parameters.
First Second Setting Initial
Name Setting range
motor Pr. motor Pr. increments value
82 455 Motor excitation current
90 458 Motor constant (R1)
91 459 Motor constant (R2)
92 460 Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld) 0 to ***, 9999 1
93 461 Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq)
9999
94 462 Motor constant (X)
859 860 Torque current/Rated PM motor current
298 560 Frequency search gain 0 to 32767, 9999 1
717 741 Starting resistance tuning compensation coefficient 1 0% to 200% 0.1%
720 737 Starting resistance tuning compensation coefficient 2 0% to 200% 0.1%

NOTE
• As the motor constants measured in the offline auto tuning have been converted into internal data (****), refer to the following
setting example when making setting. (The value displayed has been converted into a value for internal use. Therefore, simple
addition of a value to the displayed value does not bring the desired effect.)
Setting example: To slightly increase the Pr.90 value (5%)
When "2516" is displayed for Pr.90, set 2642 (2516 × 1.05 = 2641.8) in Pr.90.
• If "9999" is set in the motor constant parameters, tuning data will be invalid and the constant values for Mitsubishi Electric
motors (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so on) are used.

 Changing the motor constants (when setting the Pr.92, Pr.93, and Pr.94
motor constants in units of Ω)
• Set Pr.71 as follows.
Pr.71 setting
Applied motor
Wye connection motor Delta connection motor
Standard motor 5 6
Constant-torque motor 15 16

• Set desired values as the motor constant parameters.

Iq = torque current, I100 = rated current, I0 = no load current
Iq = I1002 - I02

First motor Second

Name Setting range Setting increments Initial value
Pr. motor Pr.
82 455 Motor excitation current (no load current) 0 to 500 A, 9999 0.01 A
90 458 Motor constant (r1) 0 to 50 Ω, 9999 0.001 Ω
91 459 Motor constant (r2) 0 to 50 Ω, 9999 0.001 Ω
92 460 Motor constant (x1) 0 to 50 Ω, 9999 0.001 Ω
93 461 Motor constant (x2) 0 to 50 Ω, 9999 0.001 Ω
94 462 Motor constant (xm) 0 to 500 Ω, 9999 0.01 Ω
9999
859 860 Torque current/Rated PM motor current 0 to 500 A, 9999 0.01 A
298 560 Frequency search gain 0 to 32767, 9999 1
Starting resistance tuning compensation
717 741 0% to 200% 0.1%
coefficient 1
Starting resistance tuning compensation
720 737 0% to 200% 0.1%
coefficient 2

NOTE
• If "wye connection" or "delta connection" is incorrectly selected in Pr.71, Advanced magnetic flux vector control and Real
sensorless vector control are not performed properly.
• If "9999" is set in the motor constant parameters, tuning data will be invalid and the constant values for Mitsubishi Electric
motors (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so on) are used.

306 13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.2 Offline auto tuning
 Tuning the second motor
• When one inverter switches the operation between two different motors, set the second motor in Pr.450 Second applied 11
motor. (Refer to page 294.) In the initial setting, no second motor is applied.
• Turning ON the RT signal enables the parameter settings for the second motor as follows. For the RT signal, set "3" in any
parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function. 12
Function RT signal ON (second motor) RT signal OFF (first motor)
Motor capacity Pr.453 Pr.80
Number of motor poles Pr.454 Pr.81 13
Motor excitation current Pr.455 Pr.82
Rated motor voltage Pr.456 Pr.83
Rated motor frequency Pr.457 Pr.84
Motor constant (R1) Pr.458 Pr.90 14
Motor constant (R2) Pr.459 Pr.91
Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld) Pr.460 Pr.92
Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq) Pr.461 Pr.93 15
Motor constant (X) Pr.462 Pr.94
Auto tuning setting/status Pr.463 Pr.96
Frequency search gain Pr.560 Pr.298
Starting resistance tuning compensation
Pr.741 Pr.717
16
coefficient 1
Starting resistance tuning compensation
Pr.737 Pr.720
coefficient 2
17
NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
18
Parameters referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequencypage 211
Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relaypage 198
19
Pr.71 Applied motorpage 294
Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selectionpage 214
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 250
Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 86 20

13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.2 Offline auto tuning
307
 13.3 Offline auto tuning for a PM motor (motor constant
tuning)
PM

The offline auto tuning enables the optimal operation of a PM motor.

• Automatic measurement of motor constants (offline auto tuning) enables optimal operation of motors for PM sensorless
vector control even when motor constants vary or when the wiring distance is long.
For the offline auto tuning under Advanced magnetic flux vector control and Real sensorless vector control, refer to page 299.

Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
0, 3, 5, 6, 10, 13, 15, 16,
71 20, 23, 40, 43, 50, 53, 70, By selecting a motor, the thermal characteristic and motor
Applied motor 0 73, 8090, 8093, 9090,
C100 constant of each motor are set.
9093*1
80 0.1 to 30 kW Set the applied motor capacity.
Motor capacity 9999
C101 9999 V/F control
81 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Set the number of motor poles.
Number of motor poles 9999
C102 9999 V/F control
Inverter
9 Electronic thermal O/L rated 0 to 500 A Set the rated motor current.
C103 relay
current*2
83 200/400/
Rated motor voltage 0 to 1000 V Set the rated motor voltage (V).
C104 575 V*3
84 10 to 400 Hz Set the rated motor frequency (Hz).
Rated motor frequency 9999
C105 9999 Inverter internal data is used.
702 0 to 400 Hz Set the permissible speed (frequency) of the motor.
Maximum motor frequency 9999
C106 9999 The Pr.84 setting is used.
707
Motor inertia (integer) 9999 10 to 999, 9999
C107 Set the motor inertia.
724 9999: Inverter internal data is used.
Motor inertia (exponent) 9999 0 to 7, 9999
C108
0 No offline auto tuning
96 1 Offline auto tuning is performed without the motor rotating.
Auto tuning setting/status 0
C110 Offline auto tuning is performed without the motor rotating
11
(under V/F control).
90
C120
Motor constant (R1) 9999 0 to 50 Ω, 9999*4

92 Motor constant (L1)/d-axis

C122 inductance (Ld)
9999 0 to 500 mH, 9999*4 Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is
automatically set.)
93 Motor constant (L2)/q-axis
9999 0 to 500 mH, 9999*4 9999: Inverter internal data is used.
C123 inductance (Lq)
859 Torque current/Rated PM
C126 motor current
9999 0 to 500 A, 9999*4

Set this parameter according to the PM motor

0 to 5000 mV (rad/s)*4 specifications.
706 Induced voltage constant
9999
C130 (phi f) The value calculated from the parameter setting for motor
9999
constant is used.
Set the exponent n when the induced voltage constant phi
1412 Motor induced voltage 0 to 2
9999 f (Pr.706) is multiplied by 10n.
C135 constant (phi f) exponent
9999 No exponent setting

308 13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.3 Offline auto tuning for a PM motor (motor constant tuning)
 Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
711
11
Motor Ld decay ratio 9999 0% to 100%, 9999
C131
712
Motor Lq decay ratio 9999 0% to 100%, 9999
C132
717 Starting resistance tuning
Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is
automatically set.)
12
9999 0% to 200%, 9999
C182 compensation coefficient 1 9999: Inverter internal data is used.
Starting magnetic pole
721 0 to 6000 μs, 10000 to
C185
position detection pulse
width
9999
16000 μs, 9999 13
725 Motor protection current 100% to 500% Set the maximum current (OCT) level of the motor.
9999
C133 level 9999 200%
1002 Lq tuning target current
9999
50% to 150% Adjust the target current during tuning. 14
C150 adjustment coefficient 9999 100%
0, 3, 5, 6, 10, 13, 15, 16,
20, 23, 40, 43, 50, 53, 70, Set this parameter when using the second motor
450
C200
Second applied motor 9999 73, 8090, 8093, 9090, (the same specifications as Pr.71). 15
9093*1
9999 The function is disabled.
453
C201
Second motor capacity 9999
0.1 to 30 kW
9999
Set the capacity of the second motor.
V/F control
16
454 Number of second motor 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Set the number of poles of the second motor.
9999
C202 poles 9999 V/F control
51 Second electronic thermal
9999
0 to 500 A Set the rated current of the second motor. 17
C203 O/L relay 9999 The second electronic thermal O/L relay is disabled.
456 Rated second motor 200/400/
0 to 1000 V Set the rated voltage (V) of the second motor.
C204 voltage 575 V*3
457 Rated second motor 10 to 400 Hz Set the rated frequency (Hz) of the second motor.
18
9999
C205 frequency 9999 Inverter internal data is used.
743 Second motor maximum 0 to 400 Hz Set the permissible speed (frequency) of the second motor.
9999
C206 frequency 9999 The Pr.457 setting is used. 19
744 Second motor inertia
9999 10 to 999, 9999
C207 (integer) Set the motor inertia of the second motor.
745 Second motor inertia 9999: Inverter internal data is used.
C208 (exponent)
9999 0 to 7, 9999
20
0 No auto tuning for the second motor.
Offline auto tuning is performed without the second motor
463 Second motor auto tuning 1
0 rotating.
C210 setting/status
Offline auto tuning is performed without the second motor
11
rotating (under V/F control).
458 Second motor constant
C220 (R1)
9999 0 to 50 Ω, 9999*4
460 Second motor constant
C222 (L1) / d-axis inductance (Ld)
9999 0 to 500 mH, 9999*4 Tuning data of the second motor.
(The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically
461 Second motor constant
9999 0 to 500 mH, 9999*4 set.)
C223 (L2) / q-axis inductance (Lq) 9999: Inverter internal data is used.
Second motor torque
860
C226
current/Rated PM motor 9999 0 to 500 A, 9999*4
current
Set this parameter according to the PM motor
738 Second motor induced 0 to 5000 mV (rad/s)*4 specifications.
9999
C230 voltage constant (phi f)
9999 Value calculated based on the tuning data.
Second motor induced Set the exponent n when the induced voltage constant phi
1413 0 to 2
voltage constant (phi f) 9999 f (Pr.738) is multiplied by 10n.
C235
exponent 9999 No exponent setting

13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.3 Offline auto tuning for a PM motor (motor constant tuning)
309
 Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
739 Second motor Ld decay
9999 0% to 100%, 9999
C231 ratio
740 Second motor Lq decay
9999 0% to 100%, 9999 Tuning data of the second motor.
C232 ratio
(The value measured by offline auto tuning is automatically
Second motor starting set.)
741
resistance tuning 9999 0% to 200%, 9999 9999: Inverter internal data is used.
C282
compensation coefficient 1
742 Second motor magnetic 0 to 6000 μs, 10000 to
9999
C285 pole detection pulse width 16000 μs, 9999
746 Second motor protection 100% to 500% Set the maximum current (OCT) level of the second motor.
9999
C233 current level 9999 200%
*1 The setting range for the 575 V class is "0, 3, 5, 6, 10, 13, 15, 16, 8090, 8093, 9090, and 9093".
*2 For the FR-E820-0050(0.75K) or lower, FR-E840-0026(0.75K) or lower, and FR-E860-0017(0.75K), it is set to 85% of the inverter rated current.
*3 The initial value differs according to the voltage class (200/400/575 V).
*4 The setting range and unit change according to the Pr.71 (Pr.450) setting.

• The settings are valid under PM sensorless vector control.

• The offline auto tuning enables the operation with IPM motors and SPM motors. (When a PM motor is used, always perform
offline auto tuning.)
• Tuning is enabled even when a load is connected to the motor.
• Reading/writing of the motor constants tuned by offline auto tuning are enabled.
• The offline auto tuning status can be monitored on the operation panel.

 Before performing offline auto tuning

Check the following points before performing offline auto tuning:
• Check that PM sensorless vector control is selected. (Refer to page 86.)
• Check that a motor is connected. (Check that the motor is not rotated by an external force during tuning.)
• The rated motor current should be equal to or less than the inverter rated current. (Note that the motor rated current should
be 0.4 kW or higher (0.1 kW or higher for the 200 V class).)
If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current, however, is used, speed and torque
accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter
rated current.
• The maximum frequency under PM sensorless vector control is 400 Hz.
• Tuning is enabled even when a load is connected to the motor. The motor may run slightly. Fix the motor securely with a
mechanical brake, or before tuning, make sure that it is safe even if the motor rotates. (Caution is required especially in
vertical lift applications.) Note that even if the motor runs slightly, tuning performance is unaffected.
• Tuning may be disabled depending on the motor characteristics.

 Settings
• To perform tuning, set the following parameters about the motor.
First motor Pr. Second motor Pr. Name Setting
80 453 Motor capacity Motor capacity (kW)
81 454 Number of motor poles Number of motor poles (2 to 12)
9 51 Electronic thermal O/L relay Rated motor current (A)
84 457 Rated motor frequency Rated motor frequency (Hz)
83 456 Rated motor voltage Rated motor voltage (V)
8090, 8093 (IPM motor),
71 450 Applied motor
9090, 9093 (SPM motor)*1
96 463 Auto tuning setting/status 1
*1 Set Pr.71 Applied motor according to the motor to be used. According to the Pr.71 setting, the range of the motor constant parameter setting
values and units can be changed. (For other setting values of Pr.71, refer to page 294.)

Pr.71 setting
Motor
Motor constant parameter Ω, mH, and A unit setting Motor constant parameter internal data setting
IPM motor 8090 8093
SPM motor 9090 9093

310 13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.3 Offline auto tuning for a PM motor (motor constant tuning)
 • For tuning accuracy improvement, set the following parameters when the motor constants are known in advance.
First motor
Pr.
Second
motor Pr.
Name Setting 11
702 743 Maximum motor frequency Maximum motor frequency (Hz)
707 744 Motor inertia (integer) Motor inertia*1
724 745 Motor inertia (exponent) Jm = Pr.707 × 10^(-Pr.724) (kg·m2) 12
725 746 Motor protection current level Maximum current level of the motor (%)

*1 The setting is valid only when a value other than "9999" is set in both Pr.707 (Pr.744) and Pr.724 (Pr.745).
13
 Performing tuning

• Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel if the inverter is in the state ready for tuning. The 14
motor starts by turning ON the start command while tuning is unavailable.

15
• In the PU operation mode, press the RUN key on the operation panel.
In the External operation, turn ON the start command (STF signal or STR signal). Tuning starts.
16
NOTE
• Satisfy the required inverter start conditions to start offline auto tuning. For example, stop the input of the MRS signal.
• To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or the STOP/RESET key on the operation panel. (Turning OFF the start
signal (STF signal or STR signal) also ends tuning.) 17
• During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid (initial value).
Input terminals <effective signals>: MRS, RES, STF, STR, S1, and S2
Output terminals: RUN, FM, AM, ABC, and SO 18
• When the rotation speed and the output frequency are selected for terminals FM and AM, the progress status of offline auto
tuning is output in 15 steps from FM and AM (in the standard model).
• Do not perform ON/OFF switching of the Second function selection (RT) signal during offline auto tuning. Auto tuning will not
be performed properly. 19
• A motor with 14 or more poles cannot be tuned.
• Since the Inverter running (RUN) signal turns ON when tuning is started, pay close attention especially when a sequence which
releases a mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed.
• When executing offline auto tuning, input the operation command after switching ON the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
20
of the inverter.
• While Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "7", turn ON the PU operation external interlock (X12) signal for tuning in the PU
operation mode.

• During tuning, the monitor is displayed on the operation panel as follows.

Pr.96 (Pr.463) setting Operation panel indication

(1) Setting

(2) During tuning

Blinking
(3) Normal completion

• When offline auto tuning ends, press the STOP/RESET key on the operation panel during PU operation. In the External
operation, turn OFF the start signal (STF signal or STR signal). This operation resets the offline auto tuning, and the
monitor display of the operation panel returns to normal. (Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)

13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.3 Offline auto tuning for a PM motor (motor constant tuning)
311
 NOTE
• The motor constants measured once during offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until offline
auto tuning is performed again. However, the tuning data is cleared when performing All parameter clear.
• Changing Pr.71 after tuning completion will change the motor constant. For example, if the Pr.71 setting is changed to "8093"
after tuned with Pr.71 = "8090", the tuning data become invalid. To use the tuned data, set "8090" again in Pr.71.

• If offline auto tuning has ended in error (see the following table), motor constants are not set.
Perform an inverter reset and perform tuning again.
Error display Error cause Countermeasures
8 Forced end Set "1" in Pr.96 (Pr.463) and retry.
9 Inverter protective function operation Make the setting again.
Check for the power supply voltage fluctuation.
92 The converter output voltage fell to 75% of the rated voltage.
Check the Pr.83 Rated motor voltage setting.
Calculation error.
93 Check the motor wiring and make the setting again.
The motor is not connected.
• When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing the STOP/RESET key or turning OFF the start signal (STF or STR) during
tuning, offline tuning does not end properly. (The motor constants have not been set.)
Perform an inverter reset and perform tuning again.

NOTE
• An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error.
After power is restored, the inverter starts normal operation. Therefore, when the STF (STR) signal is ON, the motor starts
forward (reverse) rotation.
• Any fault occurring during tuning is handled as in the normal operation. However, if the retry function is set, no retry is
performed even when a protective function that performs a retry is activated.
• The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0 Hz.

CAUTION
• Note that the motor may start running suddenly.

 Parameters updated by tuning results after tuning

First Second
Name Description
motor Pr. motor Pr.
90 458 Motor constant (R1) Resistance per phase
92 460 Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld) d-axis inductance
93 461 Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq) q-axis inductance
711 739 Motor Ld decay ratio d-axis inductance decay ratio
712 740 Motor Lq decay ratio q-axis inductance decay ratio
717 741 Starting resistance tuning compensation coefficient 1
When the setting value is 10000 or more: With polarity
721 742 Starting magnetic pole position detection pulse width inversion for compensation, voltage pulse (Pr. setting
minus 10000) μs
859 860 Torque current/Rated PM motor current
96 463 Auto tuning setting/status

 Tuning adjustment (Pr.1002)

• The overcurrent protective function may be activated during Lq tuning for an easily magnetically saturated motor (motor
with a large Lq decay ratio). In such case, adjust the target flowing current used for tuning with Pr.1002 Lq tuning target
current adjustment coefficient.

 Changing the motor constants

• The motor constants can be set directly when the motor constants are known in advance, or by using the data measured
during offline auto tuning.
• According to the Pr.71 (Pr.450) setting, the range of the motor constant parameter setting values and units can be
changed. The changed settings are stored in the EEPROM as the motor constant parameters.

312 13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.3 Offline auto tuning for a PM motor (motor constant tuning)
 Changing the motor constants (when setting motor constants in units of
Ω, mH, or A) 11
• Set Pr.71 as follows.
Motor Pr.71 setting
IPM motor 8090 12
SPM motor 9090

• Set desired values as the motor constant parameters.

13
First Second Setting
Name Setting range Initial value
motor Pr. motor Pr. increments
90 458 Motor constant (R1) 0 to 50 Ω, 9999 0.001 Ω
92 460 Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld) 0 to 500 mH, 9999 0.01 mH 14
93 461 Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq) 0 to 500 mH, 9999 0.01 mH
9999
706 738 Induced voltage constant (phi f) 0 to 5000 mV (rad/s), 9999 0.1 mV (rad/s)
859
1412
860
1413
Torque current/Rated PM motor current
Motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent
0 to 500 A, 9999
0 to 2, 9999
0.01 A
1
15

NOTE
• If "9999" is set in the motor constant parameters, tuning data will be invalid and the inverter internal constant is used.
16
• To change a motor induced voltage constant of PM motors, the setting in Pr.706 Induced voltage constant (phi f) or Pr.738
Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) must be changed. If the constant after the change exceeds the setting range
of Pr.706 or Pr.738 (0 to 5000 mV (rad/s)), set Pr.1412 Motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent or Pr.1413 17
Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent. Set a value in the exponent n in the formula, Pr.706 (Pr.738) ×
10n [mV (rad/s)], to set the induced voltage constant (phi f).
• When Pr.71 (Pr.450) = "8093 or 9093", or Pr.1412 (Pr.1413) = "9999", the motor induced voltage constant is as set in Pr.706
(Pr.738). (No exponent setting)
18

 Changing the motor constants (when setting a motor constants in the 19

internal data of the inverter)
• Set Pr.71 as follows.
Motor Pr.71 setting
20
IPM motor 8093
SPM motor 9093

• Set desired values as the motor constant parameters.

First motor Second Setting Initial
Name Setting range
Pr. motor Pr. increments value
90 458 Motor constant (R1)
92 460 Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld)
93 461 Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq)
0 to ***, 9999 1 9999
706 738 Induced voltage constant (phi f)
859 860 Torque current/Rated PM motor current
1412 1413 Motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent

13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.3 Offline auto tuning for a PM motor (motor constant tuning)
313
 NOTE
• As the motor constants measured in the offline auto tuning have been converted into internal data (****), refer to the following
setting example when making setting. (The value displayed has been converted into a value for internal use. Therefore, simple
addition of a value to the displayed value does not bring the desired effect.)
Setting example: to slightly increase the Pr.90 value (5%)
When "2516" is displayed for Pr.90, set 2642 (2516 × 1.05 = 2641.8) in Pr.90.
• If "9999" is set in the motor constant parameters, tuning data will be invalid and the inverter internal constant is used.
• To change a motor induced voltage constant of PM motors, the setting in Pr.706 Induced voltage constant (phi f) or Pr.738
Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) must be changed. If the constant after the change exceeds the setting range
of Pr.706 or Pr.738 (0 to 5000 mV (rad/s)), set Pr.1412 Motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent or Pr.1413
Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent. Set a value in the exponent n in the formula, Pr.706 (Pr.738) ×
10n [mV (rad/s)], to set the induced voltage constant (phi f).
• When Pr.71 (Pr.450) = "8093 or 9093", or Pr.1412 (Pr.1413) = "9999", the motor induced voltage constant is as set in Pr.706
(Pr.738). (No exponent setting)

Parameters referred to
Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relaypage 198
Pr.71 Applied motorpage 294
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283

314 13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.3 Offline auto tuning for a PM motor (motor constant tuning)
13.4 Online auto tuning 11

Magnetic flux Sensorless

If online auto tuning is selected under Advanced magnetic flux vector control or Real sensorless vector control, favorable torque
12
accuracy is retained by adjusting temperature even when the resistance value varies due to increase in the motor temperature.
Pr. Name Initial value
0
Setting range Description
No online auto tuning
13
95
Online auto tuning selection 0
C111 1 Online auto tuning is performed at startup.
574 Select online auto tuning for the second motor.
C211
Second motor online auto tuning 0 0, 1
(The settings are the same as those in Pr.95.) 14
9999 100%
717 Starting resistance tuning
9999 R1 compensation coefficient for start-time
C182 compensation coefficient 1 0% to 200%
tuning

720 Starting resistance tuning

9999 100% 15
9999 R2 compensation coefficient for start-time
C188 compensation coefficient 0% to 200%
tuning

741 Second motor starting resistance

9999
9999 100%
R1 compensation coefficient for start-time
16
C282 tuning compensation coefficient 1 0% to 200%
tuning (for the second motor)
9999 100%
737 Starting resistance tuning
C288 compensation coefficient 2
9999
0% to 200%
R2 compensation coefficient for start-time
tuning (for the second motor)
17
 Online auto tuning at startup (Pr.95/Pr.574 = "1")
• By promptly tuning the motor status at startup, accurate operation without being affected by motor temperature is achieved. 18
Also high torque can be provided at very low speed and stable operation is possible.
• Make sure to perform offline auto tuning before performing online auto tuning.

Operating procedure
19
1. Perform offline auto tuning. (Refer to page 299.)

2. Check that Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/status = "3" (offline auto tuning completion) and values other than "9999" 20
are set in Pr.717 (Pr.741) and Pr.720 (Pr.737).

3. Set Pr.95 Online auto tuning selection = "1" (online auto tuning at start).
Online auto tuning is enabled at the next start.

4. Check that the following parameters are set before starting operation.
Pr. Description
9 Rated motor current or electronic thermal O/L relay
71 Applied motor
80 Motor capacity (with the rated motor current equal to or less than the inverter rated current)*1
81 Number of motor poles

*1 If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current is used, speed and torque accuracies may deteriorate due
to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.

5. In the PU operation mode, press the RUN key on the operation panel.
In the External operation, turn ON the start command (STF signal or STR signal).

13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.4 Online auto tuning
315
 NOTE
• To perform the online auto tuning at startup for a lift, consider using a brake sequence function for the brake opening timing
at a start. The tuning takes about 500 ms at the most after starting. However, during this time, it is possible that not enough
torque is provided and caution is required to prevent the object from dropping. (Refer to page 320).
• Perform online auto tuning at startup when the motor is stopped.
• The online auto tuning is disabled when the MRS signal is being input, the setting speed is Pr.13 Starting frequency or lower
(V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control), an inverter fault is occurring, or the inverter's startup condition is not
satisfied.
• Online auto tuning does not operate during deceleration and restart from DC injection brake operation.
• It is disabled during JOG operation.
• If automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected, automatic restart is prioritized. (Online auto tuning at startup
is not performed during frequency search.)
• Zero current detection and output current detection are enabled during online auto tuning.
• The RUN signal is not output during online auto tuning. The RUN signal is turned ON at operation startup.
• If the time between the inverter stop and restart is within 4 seconds, tuning is performed at startup but its result will not be
applied.

 Start-time tuning completion (Y39) signal

• The start-time tuning completion (Y39) signal can be output when the start-time tuning completes.
• To use the Y39 signal, set "39" (positive logic) or "139" (negative logic) in any parameter from Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection) to assign the function to an output terminal.

Output frequency (Hz)

Time
Start signal
Tuning status Completed
Tune
Y39 signal

NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 Tuning the second motor (Pr.574)

• When one inverter switches the operation between two different motors, set the second motor in Pr.450 Second applied
motor. (In the initial setting, no second motor is applied. (Refer to page 294.))
• Perform tuning using Pr.574 Second motor online auto tuning.
• Pr.574 is enabled when the Second function selection (RT) signal is turned ON.
Pr. Description
450 Applied motor
453 Motor capacity (with the rated motor current equal to or less than the inverter rated current)*1
454 Number of motor poles

*1 If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current is used, speed and torque accuracies may deteriorate due
to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.

NOTE
• The RT signal is the Second function selection signal. The RT signal also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 283.)
To use the RT signal, set "3" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the
function to an input terminal.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relaypage 198

316 13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.4 Online auto tuning
Pr.71 Applied motorpage 294
Pr.80 Motor capacitypage 86, page 299, page 308
Pr.81 Number of motor polespage 86, page 299, page 308
Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/statuspage 299, page 308 11
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 250
Pr.800 Control method selectionpage 86

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.4 Online auto tuning
317
 MEMO

318 13. (C) Motor Constant Parameters

13.4 Online auto tuning
 CHAPTER 14
CHAPTER 14 (A) Application Parameters
4

14.1 Brake sequence function ......................................................................................................................................320

14.2 Stop-on-contact control.........................................................................................................................................324
6
14.3 Traverse function ..................................................................................................................................................327
14.4 PID control ............................................................................................................................................................329
14.5 Calibration of PID display .....................................................................................................................................342
7
14.6 Dancer control ......................................................................................................................................................344
14.7 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start with an induction motor ....................................351
14.8 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start with a PM motor ...............................................356
8
14.9 Offline auto tuning for a frequency search............................................................................................................358
14.10 Power failure time deceleration-to-stop function...................................................................................................362
14.11 PLC function .........................................................................................................................................................364
9
14.12 Trace function .......................................................................................................................................................366

10

319
 14 (A) Application Parameters
Refer to
Purpose Parameter to set
page
To stop the motor with a mechanical P.A100 to P.A105,
Pr.278 to Pr.283, Pr.292,
brake (operation timing of mechanical Brake sequence function P.F500, P.A108, 320
Pr.639, Pr.640
brake) P.A109
To stop the motor with a mechanical
P.A200, P.A205,
brake (vibration control at stop-on- Stop-on-contact control Pr.270, Pr.275, Pr.276 324
P.A206
contact)
To strengthen or weaken the frequency
Traverse operation P.A300 to P.A305 Pr.592 to Pr.597 327
at a constant cycle
P.A601 to P.A604,
Pr.127 to Pr.134, Pr.553,
P.A607, P.A610 to
To perform process control, such as for PID control Pr.554, Pr.575 to Pr.577, 329
P.A615, P.A621 to
the pump flow volume and air volume Pr.609, Pr.610, Pr.1015
P.A625
PID display adjustment P.A630 to P.A633 C42 to C45 342
P.A601, P.A602,
P.A610, P.A611,
To control the dance roll for winding/ Pr.44, Pr.45, Pr.128 to
Dancer control P.A613 to P.A615, 344
unwinding Pr.134, Pr.609, Pr.610
P.A624, P.A625,
P.F020 to P.F021
Automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure P.A700 to P.A703, Pr.57, Pr.58, Pr.162,
351
/ flying start function for P.A710, P.F003 Pr.165, Pr.299, Pr.611
induction motors
Frequency search accuracy P.A700, P.A711,
To restart without stopping the motor at Pr.96, Pr.162, Pr.298,
improvement (V/F control, P.A712, P.C110, 358
instantaneous power failure Pr.463, Pr.560
offline auto tuning) P.C210
Automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure P.A700, P.A702,
Pr.57, Pr.162, Pr.611 356
/ flying start function for PM P.F003
motors
Power failure time
To decelerate the motor to a stop at
deceleration-to-stop P.A730 Pr.261 362
power failure
function
P.A800, P.A801, Pr.414, Pr.415, Pr.498,
To operate with sequence program PLC function P.A804, P.A805, Pr.675, Pr.1150 to 364
P.A810 to P.A859 Pr.1199
P.A900, P.A902 to
To store the operating status of the P.A906, P.A910 to Pr.1020, Pr.1022 to
Trace function 366
inverter in the RAM in the inverter P.A920, P.A930 to Pr.1047
P.A939

14.1 Brake sequence function

Magnetic flux Sensorless

This function outputs operation timing signals of the mechanical brake from the inverter, such as for lift applications.
This function is useful in preventing load slippage at a start due to poor mechanical brake timing and overcurrent alarm in stop
status and enable secure operation.

Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
278 Set the frequency value calculated by adding approx. 1.0 Hz to the
Brake opening frequency 3 Hz 0 to 30 Hz
A100 rated slip frequency. This can be set only when Pr.278 ≤ Pr.282.
Set between 50% and 90% because load slippage is more likely to
279 occur when a start setting is too low.
Brake opening current 130% 0% to 400%
A101 The inverter rated current is regarded as 100%, or the rated motor
torque is regarded as 100%. (According to Pr.639 setting)
280 Brake opening current
0.3 s 0 to 2 s Generally set between 0.1 and 0.3 s.
A102 detection time

320 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.1 Brake sequence function
 Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
Set the mechanical delay time until braking eases. When Pr.292 = "8",
11
281
Brake operation time at start 0.3 s 0 to 5 s set the value calculated by adding approx. 0.1 to 0.2 s to the
A103
mechanical delay time until braking eases.

282
Turn OFF the Brake opening request (BOF) signal and set the
frequency for operating the electromagnetic brake. Generally, set the 12
Brake operation frequency 6 Hz 0 to 30 Hz
A104 value calculated by adding 3 to 4 Hz to the Pr.278 setting value. This
can be set only when Pr.282 ≥ Pr.278.

283
When Pr.292 = "7", set the value calculated by adding 0.1 s to the
mechanical delay time until the brake closes. When Pr.292 = "8", set 13
Brake operation time at stop 0.3 s 0 to 5 s
A105 the value calculated by adding to approx. 0.2 to 0.3 s to the
mechanical delay time until the brake closes.
0 Normal operation
Operation with the shortest acceleration/deceleration time. (Refer to
14
292 Automatic acceleration/ 1, 11
0 page 171.)
F500 deceleration
7 Brake sequence mode 1
8 Brake sequence mode 2 15
639 Brake opening current 0 Brake opening by output current
0
A108 selection 1 Brake opening by motor torque
0 Brake closing operation by frequency command
640
A109
Brake operation frequency
selection
0
1
Brake closing operation by the actual motor rotation speed (estimated 16
value)

 Connection diagram
MC
17
Sink logic
Mechanical
Pr.184 = 15 brake

Pr.190 = 20 18
MCCB
R/L1 U
Power
supply
S/L2
T/L3 W
V Motor
19
Start signal STF 24VDC
Multi-speed signal RH *3 MC
20
*2
RUN(BOF) Brake opening request
Brake opening completion signal RL(BRI)*1 signal (BOF)
(BRI) SD SE

*1 The input signal terminals differ by the settings of Pr.178 to Pr.189.

*2 The output signal terminals differ by the settings of Pr.190 to Pr.196.
*3 Be careful of the permissible current of the built-in transistors on the inverter. (24 VDC 0.1 A)

NOTE
• The automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function does not operate when brake sequence is selected.
• To use this function, set the acceleration/deceleration time to 1 second or higher.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) or Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output
terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 Setting the brake sequence operation

• Set Pr.292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration = "7 or 8 (braking sequence operation)".
To ensure sequence operation, it is recommended to use with Pr.292 = "7" (with brake opening completion signal input).
• Set "15" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection), and assign the Brake opening
completion (BRI) signal to the input terminal.
• Set "20" (positive logic) or "120" (negative logic) in any parameter from Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection), and assign the brake opening request signal (BOF) to the output terminal.
• Use Pr.639 Brake opening current selection to select whether the output current or the motor torque is used as a
reference for the brake opening operation.

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.1 Brake sequence function
321
 • Under Real sensorless vector control, use Pr.640 Brake operation frequency selection to select whether the frequency
command or the actual motor speed (estimated value) is used as a reference for brake closing operation. If the brake
operation timing is different from the motor speed because of the load, set Pr.640 = "1 (brake operation with the actual
motor speed (estimated value))".
• Under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, the frequency command is used as a reference for brake operation
regardless of the Pr.640 setting.

NOTE
• Under torque control, the brake sequence function is disabled.

 Operation with brake opening completion signal input (Pr.292 = "7")

• When the start signal is input to the inverter, the inverter starts running, and when the output frequency reaches the
frequency set in Pr.278 Brake opening frequency and the output current or the motor torque is equal to or greater than
the Pr.279 Brake opening current setting, the brake opening request signal (BOF) is output after the time set in Pr.280
Brake opening current detection time. The Brake opening completion (BRI) signal is input, and the output frequency is
increased to the set speed after the set time in Pr.281 Brake operation time at start.
• When the inverter decelerates to the frequency set in Pr.282 Brake operation frequency during deceleration, the inverter
turns OFF the brake opening request signal (BOF) and decelerates further to the frequency set in Pr.278. After
electromagnetic brake operation completes and the inverter recognizes the turn OFF of the BRI signal, the inverter holds
the frequency set in Pr.278 for the time set in Pr.283 Brake operation time at stop. And after the time set in Pr.283
passes, the inverter decelerates again. The inverter outputs is shut off when the frequency reaches Pr.13 Starting
frequency setting or 0.5 Hz, whichever is lower.
Output frequency(Hz)

Target frequency
Pr.13 setting
Pr.280 or 0.5Hz,
Pr.282 Pr.281 whichever is lower
Pr.278
Pr.13
Time
ON Pr.283
STF
Output current or motor torque Pr.279
(select by Pr.639)
Brake opening request ON
(BOF signal)
Brake opening completion ON
(BRI signal)
Electromagnetic brake Closed Opened Closed
operation

 Operation without Brake opening completion (Pr.292 = "8") signal input

• When the start signal is input to the inverter, the inverter starts running, and when the output frequency reaches the
frequency set in Pr.278 Brake opening frequency and the output current or the motor torque is equal to or greater than
the Pr.279 Brake opening current setting, the brake opening request signal (BOF) is output after the time set in Pr.280
Brake opening current detection time.
After the BOF signal is output, the output frequency is increased to the set speed after the set time in Pr.281 Brake
operation time at start.

322 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.1 Brake sequence function
 • When the inverter decelerates to the frequency set to Pr.282 Brake operation frequency during deceleration, the inverter
turns OFF the brake opening request signal (BOF) and decelerates further to the frequency set in Pr.278. And after the
time set in Pr.283 Brake operation time at stop passes, the inverter decelerates again. The inverter output is shut off
11
when the frequency reaches Pr.13 Starting frequency setting or 0.5 Hz, whichever is lower.
Output frequency(Hz)
12
Target frequency
Pr.280 Pr.13 setting
Pr.282 or 0.5Hz,
Pr.281
Pr.278
Pr.13
whichever is lower
13
Time
ON Pr.283
STF
Output current or motor torque
Pr.279
14
(select by Pr.639)
Brake opening request ON
(BOF signal)
Electromagnetic brake Closed Opened Closed 15
operation

NOTE
• Even if the brake sequence operation has been selected, inputting the JOG signal (JOG operation) during an inverter stop
16
changes the operation method to normal operation and give a priority to the JOG operation. Note that the JOG signal input by
the brake sequence function is invalid during operation.
17
 Protective function
• If one of the following faults occurs while the brake sequence function is enabled, the inverter enters a fault status, shuts
off output, and turns OFF the brake opening request signal (BOF).
18
Fault
Description
indication
When 2 seconds or more have elapsed after the start command (forward or reverse rotation) is input, but the BOF signal
19
E.MB4
does not turn ON.
E.MB5 When 2 seconds or more have elapsed after the BOF signal turned ON, but the BRI signal does not turn ON.
E.MB6
E.MB7
When the inverter had turned ON the brake opening request signal (BOF), but the BRI signal turned OFF.
When 2 seconds or more have elapsed after the BOF signal turned OFF at a stop, but the BRI signal does not turn OFF.
20
NOTE
• During deceleration, inverter output is shut OFF when the frequency reaches Pr.13 Starting frequency or 0.5 Hz, whichever
is lower. For Pr.278 Brake opening frequency, set a frequency equal to or higher than the Pr.13 setting or 0.5 Hz.
• Setting Pr.278 too high activates the stall prevention and may cause E.MB4.
• E.MB4 occurs when the time period calculated by adding Pr.280 to the acceleration time from Pr.13 to Pr.278 reaches or
exceeds 2 seconds.
Output frequency (Hz)

Less than 2s
Output
frequency
Pr.278 (Hz)

Pr.13
Pr.280
Time

ON
Brake opening request
(BOF signal)

Parameters referred to
Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 169
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 250

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.1 Brake sequence function
323
 14.2 Stop-on-contact control
Magnetic flux Sensorless

To ensure accurate positioning at the upper limit, etc. of a lift, stop-on-contact control causes the mechanical brake to close
while the motor creates a holding torque to keep the load in contact with a mechanical stopper, etc.
This function suppresses vibration that is likely to occur when the load is stopped upon contact in lift applications, thereby
ensuring reliable and highly accurate positioning stop.
<Without stop-on-contact control> <With stop-on-contact control>

Vibration Complete stop

Lift Lift

Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
6 Multi-speed setting (low
10 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the output frequency for stop-on-contact control.
D303 speed)
22
Stall prevention operation level 150% 0% to 400%
H500 Set the stall prevention operation level for stop-on-contact control.
48 Second stall prevention 0% to 400%, The smaller value set in either Pr.22 or Pr.48 has priority.
9999
H600 operation level 9999
0 Normal operation
270 Stop-on-contact control
0 1 Stop-on-contact control
A200 selection
11 Stop-on-contact control (E.OLT is invalid)
Stop-on contact excitation Set the force (holding torque) for stop-on-contact control.
275 0% to 300%
current low-speed scaling 9999 Normally, set the scaling factor between 130% to 180%.
A205
factor 9999 Not compensated.
Set a PWM carrier frequency for stop-on-contact control.
For Real sensorless vector control, the carrier frequency is always
276 PWM carrier frequency at stop- 0 to 9 2 kHz when the setting value is "0 to 5" and always 6 kHz when
9999
A206 on contact the setting value is "6 to 9". (Valid at the output frequency of 3 Hz
or less.)
9999 As set in Pr.72 PWM frequency selection.

 Connection and operation example

Stop-on contact
Output frequency

Normal mode control mode

Pr.4
MC
•Sink logic
Mechanical Pr.5
brake
Pr.6
MCCB 0 Time
R/L1 U
Power (a) (b) (c)
S/L2 V Motor
supply RH ON
T/L3 W
RM OFF ON
Forward rotation command STF
High-speed operation command RH∗ RL OFF ON
Middle-speed operation command RM∗ ∗
RT OFF ON
Stop-on contact selection 0 RL∗
Stop-on contact selection 1 RT∗ ∗ Goes into stop-on-contact control mode when
SD both RL and RT switch on.
RL and RT may be switched on in any order
with any time difference
∗ The input terminal used differs according to the Pr.180 to Pr.189 settings. (a): Acceleration time(Pr.7)
(b): Deceleration time(Pr.8)
(c): Second deceleration time(Pr.44/Pr.45)

324 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.2 Stop-on-contact control
 Setting the stop-on-contact control
• Make sure that the inverter is in External or Network operation mode. (Refer to page 174.) 11
• Select either Real sensorless vector control (speed control) or Advanced magnetic flux vector control.
• Set "1 or 11" in Pr.270 Stop-on-contact control selection.
• Set the output frequency for stop-on-contact control in Pr.6 Multi-speed setting (low speed). 12
Set the frequency as low as possible (about 2 Hz). If a frequency higher than 30 Hz is set, it operates with 30 Hz.
• When both the RT and RL signals are switched ON, the inverter enters the stop-on-contact control, and operation is
performed at the frequency set in Pr.6 independently of the preceding speed. 13
• Setting Pr.270 = "11" disables stall prevention stop (E.OLT) during stop-on-contact control (with both RL and RT signals
ON).

NOTE 14
• By increasing the Pr.275 setting, the low-speed (stop-on-contact) torque increases, but overcurrent fault (E.OC[]) may occur
or the machine may oscillate in stop-on-contact status.
• The stop-on-contact function is different from the servo-lock function, and if used to stop or hold a load for an extended period, 15
this function can cause the motor to overheat. After a stop, immediately switch to a mechanical brake to hold the load.
• Under the following operating conditions, the stop-on-contact function is invalid:
PU operation (Pr.79), JOG operation (JOG signal), PU + External operation (Pr.79), PID control function operation (Pr.128),
Remote setting function operation (Pr.59), Automatic acceleration/deceleration operation (Pr.292), Start time tuning 16

 Function switching of stop-on-contact control selection 17

Normal operation (Either RL or RT is OFF or both
Stop-on-contact control (Both RL and RT are ON.)
are OFF.)
Main functions
Real sensorless vector
control
Advanced magnetic flux
vector control
Real sensorless vector
control
Advanced magnetic flux
vector control 18
Output frequency Multi-speed, 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA, etc. Pr.6 setting
Stall prevention operation The smaller value set in
— Pr.22 setting —
level
Torque limit level Pr.22 setting — Pr.22 setting
either Pr.22 or Pr.48
—
19
Excitation current low-speed The current is compensated by Pr.275 (0% to 300%)
—
scaling factor setting from normal operation.

Carrier frequency Pr.72 setting

When output frequency is 3 Hz or lower, 20
Pr.276 setting (Pr.72 when Pr.276 = "9999")
Fast-response current limit — Enabled — Disabled

 Set frequency and validity of the stop-on-contact control (Pr.270 = "1 or

11")
• The following table lists the frequencies set when the input terminals (RH, RM, RL, RT, JOG) are selected together.
• Stop-on-contact control is disabled when remote setting function is selected (Pr.59 = 1 to 3).

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.2 Stop-on-contact control
325
 Input signal Set Stop-on-contact Input signal Set Stop-on-contact
RH RM RL RT JOG frequency control RH RM RL RT JOG frequency control
ON Pr.4 ON ON ON Pr.15
ON Pr.5 ON ON ON Pr.15
ON Pr.6 ON ON ON Pr.6 Enabled
ON *1 ON ON ON Pr.15
ON Pr.15 ON ON ON Pr.15
ON ON Pr.26 ON ON ON Pr.6 Enabled
ON ON Pr.25 ON ON ON Pr.15
ON ON Pr.4 ON ON ON Pr.26
ON ON Pr.15 ON ON ON Pr.27
ON ON Pr.24 ON ON ON ON Pr.15
ON ON Pr.5 ON ON ON ON Pr.15
ON ON Pr.15 ON ON ON ON Pr.15
ON ON Pr.6 Enabled ON ON ON ON Pr.15
ON ON Pr.15 ON ON ON ON Pr.6 Enabled
ON ON Pr.15 ON ON ON ON ON Pr.15
ON ON ON Pr.15 *1

*1 By 0 to 5 V (0 to 10 V), 4 to 20 mA input

NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.4 to Pr.6, Pr.24 to Pr.27 (multi-speed setting)page 195
Pr.15 Jog frequencypage 194
Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level, Pr.48 Second stall prevention operation level levelpage 214
Pr.22 Torque limit levelpage 100
Pr.59 Remote function selectionpage 165
Pr.72 PWM frequency selectionpage 146
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 174
Pr.95 Online auto tuning selectionpage 315
Pr.128 PID action selectionpage 329
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283
Pr.292 Automatic acceleration/decelerationpage 171

326 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.2 Stop-on-contact control
14.3 Traverse function 11

The traverse operation, which oscillates the frequency at a constant cycle, is available.
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
12
0 Traverse function invalid
Traverse function valid only in External operation
592
A300
Traverse function
selection
0
1
mode 13
Traverse function valid regardless of the operation
2
mode
593 Maximum amplitude
A301 amount
10% 0% to 25% Level of amplitude during traverse operation
14
Amplitude
594 Compensation amount during amplitude inversion
compensation amount 10% 0% to 50%
A302 (from acceleration to deceleration)
during deceleration

595
Amplitude
Compensation amount during amplitude inversion
15
compensation amount 10% 0% to 50%
A303 (from deceleration to acceleration)
during acceleration
596 Amplitude acceleration Time period of acceleration during traverse
A304 time
5s 0.1 to 3600 s
operation 16
597 Amplitude deceleration Time period of deceleration during traverse
5s 0.1 to 3600 s
A305 time operation
• Setting Pr.592 Traverse function selection = "1 or 2" enables the traverse function. 17
• Assigning the Traverse function selection (X37) signal to the input terminal enables the traverse function only when the
X37 signal is ON. (When the X37 signal is not assigned, the traverse function is always available.) To input the X37 signal,
set "37" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function to a terminal.
18
Output frequency(Hz) Traverse operation
f0: set frequency
f2 f1: amplitude amount from the set frequency
f1 Pr.7 (f0 × Pr.593/100)
f2: compensation amount at transition from
19
f0
acceleration to deceleration
f1 (f1 × Pr.594/100)
f3
20
f3: compensation amount at transition from
Pr.8
deceleration to acceleration
(f1 × Pr.595/100)
Pr.7 t2 t1 t1: time from acceleration during traverse
(Pr.597) (Pr.596) operation (Time from (f0 − f1) to (f0 + f1))
Time(s) (Pr.596)
STF(STR) t2: time from deceleration during traverse
ON
signal operation (Time from (f0 + f1) to (f0 − f1))
X37 signal ON (Pr.597)

• The motor accelerates to the set frequency f0 according to the normal Pr.7 Acceleration time at turn ON of the start
command (STF or STR).
• When the output frequency reaches f0 and the X37 signal turns ON, the inverter begins traverse operation and accelerates
to f0 + f1. The acceleration time at this time is according to the Pr.596 setting. (If the X37 signal turns ON before the output
frequency reaches f0, traverse operation begins after the output frequency reaches f0.)
• After the inverter accelerates the motor to f0 + f1, this is compensated with f2 (f1 × Pr.594), and the motor decelerates to
f0 - f1. The deceleration time at this time is according to the Pr.597 setting.
• After the inverter decelerates the motor to f0 - f1, this is compensated with f3 (f1 × Pr.595), and the motor accelerates again
to f0 + f1.
• When the X37 signal turns OFF during traverse operation, the inverter accelerates/decelerates the motor to f0 according
to the normal acceleration/deceleration time (Pr.7, Pr.8). If the start command (STF or STR) is turned OFF during traverse
operation, the inverter decelerates the motor to a stop according to the normal deceleration time (Pr.8).

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.3 Traverse function
327
 NOTE
• If the set frequency (f0) and traverse operation parameters (Pr.593 to Pr.597) are changed during traverse operation, this is
applied in operations after the output frequency reaches f0 before the change was made.
• If the output frequency exceeds Pr.1 Maximum frequency or Pr.2 Minimum frequency during traverse operation, the output
frequency is clamped at the maximum/minimum frequency when the set pattern exceeds the maximum/minimum frequency.
(The output frequency is not clamped at minimum frequency during JOG operation.)
• When the traverse function and S-pattern acceleration/deceleration (Pr.29 ≠ "0") are selected, S-pattern acceleration/
deceleration operation occurs only in the range operated at the normal acceleration/deceleration time (Pr.7, Pr.8).
Acceleration/deceleration during traverse operation is performed linearly.
• If stall prevention activates during traverse operation, traverse operation stops and normal operation begins. When stall
prevention operation is completed, the inverter accelerates/decelerates to f0 at the normal acceleration/deceleration time
(Pr.7, Pr.8). After the output frequency reaches f0, the traverse operation begins again.
• If the value of the amplitude inversion compensation amount (Pr.594, Pr.595) is too large, an overvoltage trip or stall
prevention occurs, and pattern operation cannot be performed as set.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selectionpage 163
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 250

328 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.3 Traverse function
14.4 PID control 11

Process control such as flow rate, air volume or pressure are possible on the inverter.
A feedback system can be configured and PID control can be performed with the set point and feed back values set by analog 12
input signals (terminals 2 and 4) or using parameter values given via communication or by the PLC function.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description 13

Set the value at which control is automatically switched to PID
127 PID control automatic 0 to 590 Hz
9999 control.
A612 switchover frequency
9999 No PID control automatic switchover function
0, 20, 21, 50, 51, 14
60, 61, 1000,
Select how to input the deviation value, measured value and set
128 1001, 1010,
PID action selection 0 point, and forward and reverse action.
A610 1011, 2000,
2001, 2010, 2011 15
40 to 43 Refer to page 344.
If a narrow proportional band is set (small parameter setting value),
the manipulated amount changes considerably by slight changes in
129
PID proportional band 100%
0.1% to 1000% the measured value. As a result, response improves as the 16
A613 proportional band becomes narrower, though stability worsens as
shown by the occurrence of hunting. Gain Kp=1/proportional band
9999 No proportional control
With deviation step input, this is the time (Ti) used for obtaining the 17
same manipulated amount as proportional band (P) by only integral
130 0.1 to 3600 s
PID integral time 1s (I) action. Arrival to the set point becomes quicker the shorter an
A614
integral time is set, though hunting is more likely to occur.
9999 No integral control 18
Set the upper limit. The FUP signal is output when the feedback
131 0% to 100% value exceeds this setting. The maximum input (20 mA/5 V/10 V) of
PID upper limit 9999
the measured value is equivalent to 100%.
A601
9999 No function
19
Set the lower limit. The FDN signal is output when the measured
132 0% to 100% value falls below the setting range. The maximum input (20 mA/5 V/
PID lower limit 9999
A602
9999
10 V) of the measured value is equivalent to 100%.
No function
20
133 0% to 100% Set the set point during PID control.
PID action set point 9999
A611 9999 Set point set by Pr.128.
With deviation ramp input, this is the time (Td) used for obtaining the
manipulated amount only by proportional action (P). Response to
134 0.01 to 10 s
PID differential time 9999 changes in deviation increase greatly as the differential time
A615 increases.
9999 No differential control
The Y48 signal is output when the absolute value of the deviation
553 0% to 100%
PID deviation limit 9999 exceeds the deviation limit value.
A603
9999 No function
The action when the upper or lower limit for a measured value input
554 PID signal operation is detected or when a limit for the deviation is detected can be
0 0 to 3, 10 to 13
A604 selection selected. The operation for PID output suspension function can be
selected.
When the output frequency after PID calculation stays less than the
575 Output interruption 0 to 3600 s Pr.576 setting for the time set in Pr.575 or more, the inverter
1s operation is suspended.
A621 detection time
9999 No output interruption function
576 Output interruption
0 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at which output interruption is performed.
A622 detection level
577 Output interruption Level at which the PID output suspension function is released. Set
1000% 900% to 1100%
A623 cancel level "Pr.577 - 1000%".
2 The set point or deviation value is input through terminal 2.
609 PID set point/deviation 3 The set point or deviation value is input through terminal 4.
2
A624 input selection 4 The set point or deviation value is input via communication.
5 The set point or deviation value is input by the PLC function.

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.4 PID control
329
 Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
2 The measured value is input through terminal 2.
610 PID measured value 3 The measured value is input through terminal 4.
3
A625 input selection 4 The measured value is input via communication.
5 The measured value is input by the PLC function.
The integral stops when the manipulated amount is limited. The
0
range is ±100% for the manipulated amount.
1015 Integral stop selection at The integral does not stop when the manipulated amount is limited.
0 1
A607 limited frequency The range is ±100% for the manipulated amount.
The integral stops when the manipulated amount is limited. The
2
range is ±100% for the manipulated amount.

 Basic configuration of PID control

 Pr.128 = "20, 21" (measured value input)
Inverter circuit
Pr.133 or PID operation Manipulated Motor
terminal 2 variable
+- 1 M
Set point Kp 1+ +Td×S
Ti × S
0 to 5 VDC
(0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA) Terminal 4 *1
Feedback signal (measured value) 4 to 20 mADC (0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V)
Kp: Proportionality constant Ti: Integral time S: Operator Td: Differential time
*1 Set "0" to Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment. When Pr.858 ≠ "0", PID control is invalid.

 PID action outline

 PI action
PI action is a combination of proportional action (P) and integral action (I), and applies a manipulated amount according to the
size of the deviation and transition or changes over time.
[Example of action when the measured value changes in a stepped manner]
Deviation Set point

Measured value

P action
Time

I action
Time

PI action
Time

(Note) PI action is the result of P and I actions being added together.

 PD action
PD action is a combination of proportional action (P) and differential action (D), and applies a manipulated amount according
to the speed of the deviation to improve excessive characteristics.
[Example of action when the measured value changes proportionately]
Set point

Deviation

Measured value
P action
Time

D action
Time

PD
action
Time

330 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.4 PID control
(Note) PD action is the result of P and D actions being added together.

 PID action 11
PID action is a combination of PI and PD action, which enables control that incorporates the respective strengths of these
actions.
Set point 12
Deviation
Measured value
P action
Time 13
I action

14
Time
D action
Time

y = at2 + bt + c
15
PID action
Time
(Note) PID action is the result of all P, I and D actions being added together.
16
 Reverse action
When deviation X = (set point - measured value) is a plus value, the manipulated amount (output frequency) is increased, and
when the deviation is a minus value, the manipulated amount is decreased. 17
Deviation Set point
[Heating]

Set
+ X>0
Cold Increase 18
point X<0 Hot Decrease
- Measured value
Feedback signal
(measured value)
19
 Forward action
When deviation X = (set point - measured value) is a minus value, the manipulated amount (output frequency) is increased,
and when the deviation is a plus value, the manipulated amount is decreased.
20
Measured value
[Cooling]
+ X>0 Set point
Set Too cold Decrease
point - X<0 Hot Increase

Feedback signal
(measured value) Deviation

Relationship between deviation and manipulated amount (output frequency)

Deviation
PID action setting
Plus Minus
Reverse action
Forward action

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.4 PID control
331
  Connection diagram
• Sink logic Inverter
MCCB Motor Pump
• Pr.128 = "20" R/L1 U
• Pr.182 = "14" Power supply S/L2 V M P
T/L3 W
• Pr.190 = "15"
Forward
• Pr.191 = "14" rotation STF
• Pr.192 = "16" Reverse
STR
rotation
PID control RH(X14)*3 2-wire type 3-wire
selection SD Detector type
*2(FUP)RUN Upper limit
10 *2(FDN)FU Lower limit
Setting - + + - +
Potentiometer Forward rotation
2 *2(RL)ABC
output
(Set point setting) Reverse rotation
5
output (OUT) (24V
4 *4 SE Output signal common (COM)

(Measured value) 4 to 20mA

0 24V
Power *1
supply

AC1φ
200/220V 50/60Hz

*1 Prepare a power supply matched to the power supply specifications of the detector.
*2 The applied output terminals differ by the settings of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
*3 The applied input terminals differ by the settings of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) Assigning the PID control valid (X14)
signal to an input terminal enables PID control to be performed only when the X14 signal is turned ON.
*4 The AU signal need not be input.

 Selection of deviation value, measured value and set point input method,
and PID action method (Pr.128, Pr.609, Pr.610)
• Using Pr.128, select the input method for the PID set point, measured value detected by the meter, and externally
calculated deviation. Also, select forward or reverse action.

332 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.4 PID control
 • Switch the power voltage/current specifications of terminals 2 and 4 by Pr.73 Analog input selection or Pr.267 Terminal
4 input selection to match the specification of the input device. After changing the Pr.73 or Pr.267 settings, check the
voltage/current input selection switch. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure, or malfunction. (Refer to page 266 for
11
the setting.)
Pr.128
setting
Pr.609
Pr.610
PID action Set point input Measured value input Deviation input 12
0 PID invalid — — —
20 Invalid Reverse action
21 Forward action
Terminal 2 or Pr.133*1 Terminal 4 —
13
40 to 43 Enabled Dancer control For details on dancer control, refer to page 344.
50 Reverse action
— — Communication*2
51
60
Invalid
Forward action
Reverse action
14
Communication*2 Communication*2 —
61 Forward action
1000 Reverse action
According to Pr.609*1
1001 Forward action
According to Pr.610 —
15
1010 Reverse action
— — According to Pr.609
1011 Forward action
Reverse action (without
2000
Enabled
frequency reflected) 16
According to Pr.609*1 According to Pr.610 —
Forward action (without
2001
frequency reflected)

2010
Reverse action (without
frequency reflected)
17
— — According to Pr.609
Forward action (without
2011
frequency reflected)
*1
*2
When Pr.133 ≠ "9999", the Pr.133 setting is valid.
CC-Link, CC-Link IE TSN, CC-Link IE Field Network Basic, and BACnet/IP is available. For the details of each communication, refer to the FR-
18
A8NC Instruction Manual or the Instruction Manual (Communication).

• The set point/deviation input method can also be flexibly selected by Pr.609 PID set point/deviation input selection and 19
the measured value input method can be selected by Pr.610 PID measured value input selection. Selection by Pr.609
and Pr.610 is valid when Pr.128 = "1000 to 2011".
Pr.609 to Pr.610 settings Input method 20
2 Terminal 2*3
3 Terminal 4*3
4 Communication*4
5 PLC function

*3 When the same input method has been selected for the set point and measured value at Pr.609 and Pr.610, set point input is invalid. (Inverter
runs at set point 0%)
*4 CC-Link, CC-Link IE TSN, CC-Link IE Field Network Basic, and BACnet/IP is available. For details on communication, refer to the Instruction
Manual of each option.

NOTE
• When terminals 2 and 4 are selected for deviation input, perform bias calibration using C3 and C6 to prevent a minus voltage
from being entered as the deviation input signal. Input of a minus voltage might damage devices and the inverter.

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.4 PID control
333
 • The following shows the relationship between the input values of the analog input terminals and set point, measured value
and deviation. (Calibration parameter initial values)

Input Relationship with analog input

Input terminal Calibration parameter
specification*5 Set point Result Deviation
0 V = 0% 0 V = 0% 0 V = 0%
0 to 5 V
5 V = 100% 5 V = 100% 5 V = 100%
0 V = 0% 0 V = 0% 0 V = 0%
Terminal 2 0 to 10 V Pr.125, C2 to C4
10 V = 100% 10 V = 100% 10 V = 100%
0 mA = 0% 0 mA = 0% 0 mA = 0%
0 to 20 mA
20 mA = 100% 20 mA = 100% 20 mA = 100%
0 V = -20%
0 to 1 V = 0% 0 to 1 V = 0%
0 to 5 V 1 V = 0%
5 V = 100% 5 V = 100%
5 V = 100%
0 V = -20%
0 to 2 V = 0% 0 to 2 V = 0%
Terminal 4 0 to 10 V 2 V = 0% Pr.126, C5 to C7
10 V = 100% 10 V = 100%
10 V = 100%
0 mA = -20%
0 to 4 mA = 0% 0 to 4 mA = 0%
0 to 20 mA 4 mA = 0%
20 mA = 100% 20 mA = 100%
20 mA = 100%
*5 Can be changed by Pr.73 Analog input selection, Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection and the voltage/current input switch. (Refer to page 266.)

NOTE
• Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage/current input specification with Pr.73 and Pr.267, and the voltage/current
input selection switch.

 PID input method according to the operation mode

• The input methods of the set point, measured value, and deviation differ depending on the operation mode as follows.
• Set point input
PID action selection Network operation
Command PU operation
Other PLC function
Pr.128 Pr.609 source External operation BACnet/IP
communication*1
Communication (PID set
60, 61 — ANALOG VALUE 310
point)*4
Communication PID control disabled Pr.133 setting / —
1000, Pr.133 setting /
4 *3
Communication (PID set
1001 ANALOG VALUE 310
point)*3*4
1000, Pr.133 setting /
5 PLC function — — —
1001 SD1248*2*3
20, 21 —
Pr.133 setting / Pr.133 setting / External Pr.133 setting / External
1000, External —
2, 3 External terminal*3 terminal*3 terminal*3
1001

*1 CC-Link, CC-Link IE TSN, and CC-Link IE Field Network Basic are available.
*2 Input value is "0" when the PLC function is disabled. PID control is disabled when bit 0 of SD1255 is "0".
*3 When Pr.133 ≠ "9999", the Pr.133 setting is used for the set point.
*4 When communication is not specified for the command source in the Network operation mode or when the speed command source is other than
communication, the set point cannot be input via communication. Instead, it can be input via an external terminal (PID control is enabled).

• Measured value input

PID action selection Network operation
Command PU operation
Other PLC function
Pr.128 Pr.610 source External operation BACnet/IP
communication*5
60, 61 —
PID control disabled Communication (PID
1000, Communication ANALOG VALUE 311 —
4 (terminal 4)*6 measured value)*6
1001
1000,
1001
5 PLC function — — — SD1249*7
20, 21 —
1000, External External terminal*8 External terminal*8 External terminal*8 —
2, 3
1001

*5 CC-Link, CC-Link IE TSN, and CC-Link IE Field Network Basic are available.

334 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.4 PID control
 *6 The item in the parentheses can be always monitored by the measured value monitor.
*7 Input value is "0" when the PLC function is disabled. PID control is disabled when bit 0 of SD1255 is "0".
*8 The measured value is input via the external terminal set in Pr.610. 11
• Deviation input
PID action selection
Command PU operation
Network operation 12
Other PLC function
Pr.128 Pr.609 source External operation BACnet/IP
communication*9
60, 61 —
1010,
4
Communication PID control disabled ANALOG VALUE 312
Communication (PID
deviation)
— 13
1011
70, 71 —
PLC function — — — SD1248*10
1010,
1011
5 14
1010,
1011
2, 3 External External terminal*11 External terminal*11 External terminal*11 —

*9 CC-Link, CC-Link IE TSN, and CC-Link IE Field Network Basic are available. 15
*10 Input value is "0" when the PLC function is disabled. PID control is disabled when bit 0 of SD1255 is "0".
*11 The deviation is input via the external terminal set in Pr.609.

 Input/output signals 16
• Assigning the PID control valid signal (X14) to the input terminal by Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)
enables PID control to be performed only when the X14 signal is turned ON. When the X14 signal is OFF, regular inverter
running is performed without PID action. (When the X14 signal is not assigned, PID control is enabled only by setting 17
Pr.128 ≠ "0".)
• Input signal

Signal Function
Pr.178 to Pr.189
Description
18
setting
When this signal is assigned to the input terminal, PID control is enabled
X14 PID control valid 14
when this signal is ON.
Only the proportional term is valid when this signal is turned ON. (Integral and 19
X72 PID P control switchover 72
differential values are reset.)
• Output signal
Pr.190 to Pr.196
20
setting
Signal Function Description
Positive Negative
logic logic
FUP PID upper limit 15 115 Output when the measured value signal exceeds Pr.131 PID upper limit.
FDN PID lower limit 14 114 Output when the measured value signal falls below Pr.132 PID lower limit.
"Hi" is output when the output display of the operation panel is forward
PID forward/reverse
RL 16 116 rotation (the RUN LED is ON) and "Low" is output when the display is reverse
rotation output
rotation (the RUN LED blinks) and stop (the RUN LED is OFF).
Turns ON during PID control.
When the PID calculation result is reflected to the output frequency (Pr.128 <
During PID control "2000"), the PID signal turns OFF at turn OFF of the start signal.
PID 47 147
activated When the PID calculation result is not reflected to the output frequency
(Pr.128 ≥ "2000"), the PID signal turns ON during PID calculation regardless
of the start signal status.
Y48 48 148 Output when the absolute deviation value exceeds the limit value set in
PID deviation limit
Pr.553 PID deviation limit.
Set Pr.575 Output interruption detection time ≠ "9999". This signal turns
SLEEP PID output interruption 70 170
ON when the PID output suspension function is activated.

NOTE
• Changing the terminal functions with Pr.178 to Pr.189 and Pr.190 to Pr.196 may affect other functions. Set parameters after
confirming the function of each terminal.

 PID automatic switchover control (Pr.127)

• The system can be started up more quickly by starting up without PID control activated.

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.4 PID control
335
 • When Pr.127 PID control automatic switchover frequency is set, the startup is made without PID control until the output
frequency reaches the Pr.127 setting. Once the PID control starts, the PID control is continued even if the output frequency
drops to Pr.127 setting or lower.

Output frequency
Without PID
control PID control

Pr.127

Time
STF

PID

 Operation selection and sleep function stop selection when a value error
is detected (FUP signal, FDN signal, Y48 signal, Pr.554)
• Using Pr.554 PID signal operation selection, set the action when the measured value input exceeds the upper limit
(Pr.131 PID upper limit) or lower limit (Pr.132 PID lower limit), or when the deviation input exceeds the permissible value
(Pr.553 PID deviation limit).
• Choose whether to output the signals (FUP, FDN, Y48) only or to activate the protective function to output the inverter
shutoff.
• The stop action when the inverter output is shut off by the sleep function can be selected.
Inverter operation
Pr.554 setting
At FUP/FDN signal output*1 At Y48 signal output*1 At sleep operation start
0 (initial value) Signal output only
Signal output only
1 Signal output + output shutoff (E.PID)
Coasts to stop
2 Signal output only
Signal output + output shutoff (E.PID)
3 Signal output + output shutoff (E.PID)
10 Signal output only
Signal output only
11 Signal output + output shutoff (E.PID)
Deceleration stop
12 Signal output only
Signal output + output shutoff (E.PID)
13 Signal output + output shutoff (E.PID)

*1 When each of Pr.131, Pr.132 and Pr.553 settings corresponding to each of the FUP, FDN and Y48 signals is "9999" (no function), signal output
and protective function are not available.

 PID output suspension function (sleep function) (SLEEP signal, Pr.575 to

Pr.577)
• When a status where the output frequency after PID calculation is less than Pr.576 Output interruption detection level
has continued for the time set in Pr.575 Output interruption detection time or longer, inverter running is suspended. This
allows the amount of energy consumed in the inefficient low-speed range to be reduced.
• When the deviation (set point - measured value) reaches the PID output shutoff release level (Pr.577 setting value -1000%)
while the PID output suspension function is activated, the PID output suspension function is released, and PID control
operation is automatically restarted.
• Whether to allow motor to coast to a stop or perform a deceleration stop when sleep operation is started can be selected
using Pr.554.
• While the PID output suspension function is activated, the PID output interruption (SLEEP) signal is output. During this
time, the Inverter running (RUN) signal turns OFF and the During PID control activated (PID) signal turns ON.

336 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.4 PID control
 • For the terminal used for the SLEEP signal, set "70" (positive logic) or "170" (negative logic) in any parameter from Pr.190
to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
11
When Pr.554="0 to 7", reverse operation (Pr.128="10")
Deviation

Pr.577 - 1000% Cancel 12

level

13
Output frequency

Pr.576 14
Less than Pr.575
Pr.575 or more SLEEP period
Time

RUN OFF
15
PID
SLEEP ON
16
When Pr.554="10 to 17", reverse operation (Pr.128="10")

Deviation
17
Pr.577 - 1000% Cancel
level
18

Output frequency
19
Deceleration stop ∗1
Pr.576
20
Less than Pr.575
Pr.575 or more SLEEP period
Time

RUN OFF

PID
SLEEP ON

*1 When the PID output shutoff release level is reached during a deceleration stop, output shutoff is released, operation is re-accelerated and PID
control is continued. During deceleration, Pr.576 Output interruption detection level is invalid.

 Integral stop selection when the frequency is limited (Pr.1015)

• The operation for the integral term can be selected when the frequency or the manipulated amount is limited during PID
control.
• The manipulation range can be selected.
Pr.1015 setting Operation at limited frequency Range of manipulation
0 (initial value) Integral stop
-100% to +100%
1 Integral does not stop.*1
2 Integral stop 0% to 100%
*1 When the frequency reaches the upper limit, or when the PID manipulated amount reaches 100%, the integral stops and the integral term is
retained. When the frequency decreases, the integral does not stop until the manipulated amount reaches -100%, regardless of the output
frequency.

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.4 PID control
337
 NOTE
• While the integral stop is selected, the integral stop is enabled when any of the following conditions is met.

Integral stop conditions

• The frequency reaches the upper or lower limit.
• The manipulated amount reaches plus or minus 100% (Pr.1015 = "0").
• The manipulated amount reaches 0% or 100% (Pr.1015 = "2").

 PID monitor function

• This function displays the PID control set point, measured value and deviation on the operation panel, and can output these
from the terminals FM and AM.
• An integral value indicating a negative % can be displayed on the deviation monitor. 0% is displayed as 1000. (These
values cannot be output on the deviation monitor from terminals FM.)
• Set the following values to Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection, Pr.774 to Pr.776 (Operation panel monitor
selection), Pr.992 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection, Pr.54 FM terminal function selection and
Pr.158 AM terminal function selection for each monitor.
Monitor range
Parameter Monitor Minimum
Terminal Operation Remarks
Setting description increment Terminal FM
AM panel
52 PID set point
"0" is displayed at all times when PID control
PID measured 0.1% 0% to 100%*1 is based in deviation input.
53
value
Displays PID measured value even if the PID
control operating conditions are not satisfied
PID measured
67
value 2
0.1% 0% to 100%*1 while the PID control is enabled.
"0" is displayed at all times when PID control
is based in deviation input.
Setting not -100% to 900% to Using Pr.290 Monitor negative output
54 PID deviation 0.1% selection, negative values can be output to
available 100%*1*2 1100%
the terminal AM.
PID manipulated Setting not -100% to 900% to The indicated values are from "900%" to
91 0.1% "1100%" on the operation panel. (0% is offset
amount available 100%*2 1100%
and displayed as "1000%".)
*1 When C42 and C44 are set, the minimum increment changes from unit % to no unit, and the monitor range can be changed. (Refer to page 342.)
*2 When the minus value display is set disabled using Pr.290, the terminal AM output becomes "0".

 Adjustment procedure
1. Enable PID control
When Pr.128 ≠ "0", PID control is enabled.
Set the set point, measured value and deviation input methods at Pr.128, Pr.609 and Pr.610.

2. Setting the parameter

Adjust the PID control parameters of Pr.127, Pr.129 to Pr.134, Pr.553, Pr.554, Pr.575 to Pr.577.

3. Terminal setting
Set the I/O terminals for PID control. (Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection), Pr.190 to Pr.196
(Output terminal function selection))

4. Turing ON the X14 signal assigned to the input terminal

When the X14 signal is assigned to the input terminal, PID control is enabled by the X14 signal turning ON.

5. Operation

338 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.4 PID control
 Calibration example
(Adjust room temperature to 25°C by PID control using a detector that outputs 4 mA at 0°C and 20 mA at 50°C.) 11
Start

Determination of set point Set the room temperature to 25°C. 12

Determine the set point of what is
desired to be adjusted.

Conversion of set point into % Detector specifications

13
When 0°C 4mA and 50°C 20mA are used, the set point 25°C is 50%
Calculate the ratio of the set point to
on the assumption that 4mA is 0% and 20mA is 100%.
the detector output.

14
Make calibration. Make the following calibration∗1 when the target setting input (0 to 5 V)
and detector output (4 to 20mA) must be calibrated.

Setting of set point

Input a voltage across terminals 2-5

• To set the set point to 50% using voltage input
The terminal 2 specification is 0 V for 0%, and 5 V for 100%. Thus, to set to 50%, input 2.5 V to the terminal 2. 15
• To set the set point to 50% using parameters
according to the set value %.
Set Pr.133 = "50". (If C42 and C44 ≠ "9999", set "25 (no % conversion)" directly in Pr.133.)

Operation When performing operation, first set the proportional band (Pr. 129) to a slightly larger value, the integral time 16
(Pr. 130) to a slightly longer time, and the differential time (Pr. 134) to "9999" (no function), and while looking
Set the proportional band (Pr. 129) at the system operation, decrease the proportional band (Pr. 129) and increase the integral time (Pr. 130).
to a slightly larger value, the integral
time (Pr. 130) to a slightly longer For slow response system where a deadband exists, differential control (Pr. 134) should be turned ON and
time, and the differential time (Pr.
134) to "9999" (no function), and turn
increased slowly.
17
ON the start signal.

Is the set point stable?

Yes 18
No

Parameter adjustment
To stabilize the measured value, change
Parameter optimization
While the measured value is stable
19
the proportional band (Pr. 129) to a larger throughout the operation status, the
value, the integral time (Pr. 130) to a proportional band (Pr. 129) may be
slightly longer time, and the differential decreased, the integral time (Pr. 130)
time (Pr. 134) to a slightly shorter time. decreased, and the differential time (Pr. 134)
may be increased. 20
Adjustment end

*1 When calibration is required

Calibrate detector output and set point input by Pr.125, C2 to C4 (terminal 2) or Pr.126, C5 to C7 (terminal 4). (Refer to page 273.)
When both C42 and C44 ≠ "9999", calibrate the detector output and set point input by C42 to C45. (Refer to page 342.)
Make calibration in the PU operation mode during an inverter stop.

• Calibrating set point input

(Example: To enter the set point on terminal 2)

1. 1. Apply the input (for example, 0 V) of set point setting 0% across terminals 2 and 5.

2. Using C2, enter the frequency (for example, 0 Hz) to be output by the inverter when the deviation is 0%.

3. Using C3, set the voltage value at 0%.

4. Apply the input (for example, 5 V) of set point setting 100% across terminals 2 and 5.

5. Using Pr.125, enter the frequency (for example, 60 Hz) to be output by the inverter when the deviation is 100%.

6. Using C4, set the voltage value at 100%.

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.4 PID control
339
 NOTE
• When the set point is set at Pr.133, the setting frequency of C2 is equivalent to 0% and the setting frequency of Pr.125 is
equivalent to 100%.

• Measured value input calibration

1. Apply the input (for example, 4 mA) of measured value 0% across terminals 4 and 5.

2. Perform calibration by C6.

3. Apply the input (for example, 20 mA) of measured value 100% across terminals 4 and 5.

4. Perform calibration by C7.

NOTE
• Set the frequencies set at C5 and Pr.126 to each of the same values set at C2 and Pr.125.
• The display unit for analog input can be changed from "%" to "V" or "mA". (Refer to page 273.)

• The following figure shows the results of having performed the calibration above.

[Set point setting] [Measured value] [Manipulated variable]

Manipulated variable (Hz)
(%) (%)
100 100 60 ∗1

0 0 0
0 5 (V) 0 4 20 (mA) 0 100 Deviation (%)

*1 The upper limit of the manipulated amount is the Pr.125 setting value.

NOTE
• Even if the X14 signal is ON, PID control is stopped and multi-speed or JOG operation is performed when the multi-speed
operation (RH, RM, RL, or REX) signal or JOG signal (JOG operation) is input.
• PID control is invalid under the following settings.
Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "6" (Switchover mode)
• To use terminal 4 input in PID control, set "0" (initial value) to Pr.858 Terminal 4 function assignment. When a value other
than "0", PID control is invalid.
• Changing the terminal functions with Pr.178 to Pr.189 and Pr.190 to Pr.196 may affect other functions. Set parameters after
confirming the function of each terminal.
• When PID control is selected, the minimum frequency becomes the frequency of C2 and the maximum frequency becomes
the frequency of Pr.125.
(The Pr.1 Maximum frequency and Pr.2 Minimum frequency settings also are valid.)
• During PID operation, the remote operation function is invalid.
• When control is switched to PID control during normal operation, the frequency during that operation is not carried over, and
the value resulting from PID calculation referenced to 0 Hz becomes the command frequency.

PID set point

Frequency
command
Frequency command
during normal operation

PID action ON
Normal operation PID operation Normal operation

Operation when control is switched to PID control during normal operation

Parameters referred to
Pr.59 Remote function selectionpage 165

340 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.4 PID control
Pr.73 Analog input selectionpage 266
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 174
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 250 11
Pr.290 Monitor negative output selectionpage 237
C2 to C7 Frequency setting voltage (current) bias/gainpage 273

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.4 PID control
341
 14.5 Calibration of PID display
When the operation panel is used, the display unit of parameters and monitor items related to PID control can be changed to
various units.

Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
Set the coefficient of the bias side (minimum) of measured value
C42 0 to 500
PID display bias coefficient 9999 input.
A630
9999 Displayed in %.
C43 Set the converted % of the bias side (minimum) current/voltage
PID display bias analog value 20% 0% to 300%
A631 of measured value input.
Set the coefficient of the gain side (maximum) of measured value
C44 0 to 500
PID display gain coefficient 9999 input.
A632
9999 Displayed in %.
C45 Set the converted % of the gain side (maximum) current/voltage
PID display gain analog value 100% 0% to 300%
A633 of measured value input.

 Calibration of PID display bias and gain (C42 to C45)

• When both C42 and C44 ≠ "9999", the bias and gain values for the set point, measured value and deviation in PID control
can be calibrated.
• "Bias"/"gain" function can adjust the relation between PID displayed coefficient and measured value input signal that is
externally input. Examples of these measured value input signals are 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mADC. (The
terminals used for measured value input can be selected at Pr.128, Pr.609, Pr.610.)
• Set the value that is displayed when the PID measured value (control amount) is 0% in C42 and the value that is displayed
when the PID measured value (control amount) is 100% in C44.
• When both C42 and C44 ≠"9999" and Pr.133 is set as the set point, the setting of C42 is treated as 0%, and C44 as 100%.
Initial value
100
Coefficient

Gain
Bias C44
C42

0 20 100%
0 4 20mA
Frequency setting signal
0 1 5V
0 2 10V
C43 C45

• There are three methods to adjust the PID display bias/gain.

Method to adjust any point by application of a current (voltage) to the measured value input terminal
Method to adjust any point without application of a current (voltage) to the measured value input terminal
Method to adjust only the display coefficient without adjustment of current (voltage)
(Refer to page 273 for details, and make the necessary adjustments by considering C7 as C45 and Pr.126 as C44.)

NOTE
• Always calibrate the input after changing the voltage/current input specification with Pr.73 and Pr.267, and the voltage/current
input selection switch.

342 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.5 Calibration of PID display
 • Take caution when the following condition is satisfied because the inverter recognizes the deviation value as a negative
(positive) value even though a positive (negative) deviation is given: C42 (PID bias coefficient) > C44 (PID gain coefficient).
To perform a reverse action, set Pr.128 PID action selection to forward action. Alternatively, to perform a forward action,
11
set Pr.128 to reverse action. In this case, the PID output shutoff release level is (1000 - Pr.577).
Pr.934 < Pr.935 (normal setting) Pr.934 ≥ Pr.935 12
Reverse action Reverse action setting to Pr.128 Reverse action Forward action setting to Pr.128
Forward action Forward action setting to Pr.128 Forward action Reverse action setting to Pr.128
PID output shutoff release level Pr.577 - 1000 PID output shutoff release level 1000 - Pr.577
(Example) Set the following: C42 = "500", C43 = 20% (4 mA is applied), C44 = "100", and C45 = 100% (20 mA is applied).
13
When the set point = 400 and the measured value = 360, the deviation is +40 (>0), but the inverter recognizes the deviation
as -10% (<0). Because of this, operation amount does not increase in the reverse operation setting.
The operation amount increases when the forward operation is set.
14
To perform PID output shutoff release at deviation of +40 or higher, set Pr.577 = "960".

15
500

16
Set point 400
Deviation +40
Measured value 360

17
100

18
0
20% 100%
* ( ) indicates the deviation value (0%) (25%) (35%) (100%)
which the inverter can recognize
Deviation -10%

• The display of the following parameters is changed according to the C42 and C44 settings. 19
Pr. Name
131 PID upper limit
132
133
PID lower limit
PID action set point
20
553 PID deviation limit
577 Output interruption cancel level

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.5 Calibration of PID display
343
 14.6 Dancer control
PID control is performed using detected dancer roll position as feedback data. The dancer roll is controlled to be at a designated
position.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

5s *1 Set the acceleration/deceleration time during dancer control.
44 Second acceleration/ In dancer control, this parameter becomes the acceleration/deceleration
0 to 3600 s
F020 deceleration time 10 s*2 time of the main speed.
This setting does not operate as the second acceleration/deceleration time.
Set the deceleration time during dancer control.
In dancer control, this parameter becomes the deceleration time of the
45 Second deceleration 0 to 3600 s
9999 main speed.
F021 time This setting does not operate as the second deceleration time.
9999 Pr.44 is the deceleration time.
0 No PID action
40 PID reverse action Additive method: Fixed
128 41 PID forward action Additive method: Fixed
PID action selection 0 For dancer control
A610 42 PID reverse action Additive method: Ratio
43 PID forward action Additive method: Ratio
Others Refer to page 329.
If a narrow proportional band is set (small parameter setting value), the
manipulated amount changes considerably by slight changes in the
0.1% to measured value.
129 1000% As a result, response improves as the proportional band becomes
PID proportional band 100%
A613
narrower, though stability worsens as shown by the occurrence of hunting.
Gain Kp=1/proportional band
9999 No proportional control
With deviation step input, this is the time (Ti) used for obtaining the same
manipulated amount as proportional band (P) by only integral (I) action.
130 0.1 to 3600 s
PID integral time 1s Arrival to the set point becomes quicker the shorter an integral time is set,
A614
though hunting is more likely to occur.
9999 No integral control
Set the upper limit.
The FUP signal is output when the feedback value exceeds this setting.
131 0% to 100%
PID upper limit 9999 The maximum input (20 mA/5 V/10 V) of the measured value (terminal 4)
A601
is equivalent to 100%.
9999 No function
Set the lower limit.
The FDN signal is output when the measured value (terminal 4) falls below
132 0% to 100% the setting range.
PID lower limit 9999
A602 The maximum input (20 mA/5 V/10 V) of the measured value is equivalent
to 100%.
9999 No function
133 0% to 100% Set the set point during PID control.
PID action set point 9999
A611 9999 Input of set point by terminal selected by Pr.609
With deviation ramp input, this is the time (Td) used for obtaining the
manipulated amount only by proportional action (P).
134 0.01 to 10 s
PID differential time 9999 Response to changes in deviation increase greatly as the differential time
A615 increases.
9999 No differential control
2 The set point is input through terminal 2.
609 PID set point/deviation 3 The set point is input through terminal 4.
2
A624 input selection 4 The set point is input via communication
5 The set point is input by the PLC function.
2 The measured value is input through terminal 2.
610 PID measured value 3 The measured value is input through terminal 4.
3
A625 input selection 4 The measured value is input via communication.
5 The measured value is input by the PLC function.
*1 The initial values for the FR-E820-0175(3.7K) or lower, FR-E840-0095(3.7K) or lower, and FR-E860-0061(3.7K) or lower.
*2 The initial values for the FR-E820-0240(5.5K), FR-E840-0170(7.5K), FR-E840-0120(5.5K), FR-E840-0170(7.5K), FR-E860-0090(5.5K), and FR-
E860-0120(7.5K).

344 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.6 Dancer control
 Block diagram of dancer control
Acceleration/deceleration
of main speed
11
Main speed command Target frequency
*1

Ratio
12
PID deviation
Acceleration/
Limit deceleration
Pr.128 = 42, 43 +

Dancer roll +
PID control

1
X14 + 13
setting point Kp(1+ +Td S)
- Ti S Pr.128 = 40, 41
Pr.133

PID set point PID feedback M 14

Convert to 0 to 100%
Potentiometer
15
Terminal 4

16
Dancer roll position detection

*1 The main speed can be selected in all operation modes, External (analog voltage input, multi-speed), PU (digital frequency setting) and
Communication.
17
 Outline of dancer control
• Dancer control is performed by setting "40 to 43" in Pr.128 PID action selection. The main speed command is the speed
command for each operation mode (External, PU, and communication). PID control is performed by the dancer roll position 18
detection signal, and the control result is added to the main speed command. For the main speed acceleration/deceleration
time, set the acceleration time to Pr.44 Second acceleration/deceleration time and the deceleration time to Pr.45
Second deceleration time. 19
Output frequency PID adding value
20
Output frequency
Main speed

Time

STF ON

NOTE
• Normally, set Pr.7 Acceleration time and Pr.8 Deceleration time to 0 s. When the Pr.7 and Pr.8 settings are large, dancer
control response becomes slow during acceleration/deceleration.
• If an automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is activated during dancer control, E.OC[] or E.OV[] is likely to occur.
In such case, disable the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function (Pr.57 = "9999").

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.6 Dancer control
345
  Connection diagram
• Sink logic Inverter
MCCB
• Pr.128 = "41" Motor
R/L1 U
• Pr.182 = "14" Power supply S/L2 V M
T/L3 W
• Pr.193 = "14"
• Pr.194 = "15"
Forward rotation STF
• Pr.133 = Set point
Reverse rotation STR

PID control selection RH(X14)*3

SD
*2(FUP)FU Upper limit

*2(FDN)RUN Lower limit

10
Main speed command
2
setting potentiometer *1
5 SE Output signal common
Feedback value of
dancer roll position 4*4

*1 The main speed command differs according to each operation mode (External, PU, communication).
*2 The applied output terminals differ by the settings of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
*3 The applied input terminals differ by the settings of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection).
*4 The AU signal need not be input.

 Dancer control operation selection (Pr.128)

Pr.128 setting PID action Additive method Set point input Measured value input
0 PID disabled — — —
40 Reverse action
Fixed
41 Forward action Set by Pr.133 or input by Input by terminal selected by
42 Reverse action terminal selected by Pr.609*1 Pr.610
Ratio
43 Forward action
Others Refer to page 329.
*1 When Pr.133 ≠ "9999", the Pr.133 setting is valid.

• To enable dancer control, set "40 to 43" in Pr.128 PID action selection.
• Dancer control is enabled only when the PID control valid (X14) signal turns ON when "14" is set in one of Pr.178 to Pr.182
(Input terminal function selection) and X14 signal is assigned. When the X14 signal is not assigned, dancer control is
enabled only by the Pr.128 setting.
• Input the main speed command (External, PU, Communication). Dancer control is also supported by the main speed
command in all operation modes.
• Input the set point between the terminals 2 and 5 (the setting can be selected using Pr.133 or Pr.609) and input the
measured value signal (dancer roll position detection signal) between the inverter terminals 4 and 5 (the setting can be
selected using Pr.610).
• The action of Pr.129 PID proportional band, Pr.130 PID integral time, Pr.131 PID upper limit, Pr.132 PID lower limit
and Pr.134 PID differential time is the same as PID control action. In the relationship between the control amount (%)
and frequency in PID control, 0% is equivalent to the frequencies set in C2 and 100% is equivalent to the frequencies set
in Pr.125.

NOTE
• When Pr.128 is set to "0" or the X14 signal is OFF, regular inverter running not dancer control is performed.
• Dancer control is enabled by turning ON/OFF the bits of terminals assigned the X14 signal by RS-485 communication or over
the network.
• When dancer control is selected, set the PID output suspension function (Pr.575 Output interruption detection time =
"9999").

346 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.6 Dancer control
 Selection of set point/measured value input method (Pr.609, Pr.610)
• Select the set point input method by Pr.609 PID set point/deviation input selection and the measured value input 11
method by Pr.610 PID measured value input selection. Switch the power voltage/current specifications of terminals 2
and 4 by Pr.73 Analog input selection or Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection to match the specification of the input
device. 12
• When Pr.133 PID action set point ≠ "9999", Pr.133 is the set point. When the set point is set at Pr.133, the setting
frequency of C2 is equivalent to 0% and the setting frequency of Pr.125 is equivalent to 100%.
Pr.609, Pr.610 settings Input method 13
2 *1
Terminal 2
3 Terminal 4*1
4 Communication*2 14
5 PLC function

*1 When the same input method has been selected for the set point and measured value at Pr.609 and Pr.610, set point input is invalid. (Inverter
runs at set point 0%) 15
*2 CC-Link, CC-Link IE TSN, CC-Link IE Field Network Basic, and BACnet/IP is available. For the details of each communication, refer to the FR-
A8NC Instruction Manual or the Instruction Manual (Communication).

NOTE
• After changing the Pr.73 or Pr.267 settings, check the voltage/current input selection switch. Incorrect setting may cause a
16
fault, failure or malfunction. (Refer to page 266 for the setting.)
• When terminals 2 and 4 are selected for deviation input, perform bias calibration using C3 and C6 to prevent a minus voltage
from being entered as the deviation input signal. Input of a minus voltage might damage devices and the inverter. 17
• The following shows the relationship between the input values of the analog input terminals, and the set point and
measured value. 18
Input Relationship with analog input
Input terminal Calibration parameter
specification*3 Set point Result

0 to 5 V
0 V = 0% 0 V = 0% 19
5 V = 100% 5 V = 100%
0 V = 0% 0 V = 0%
Terminal 2 0 to 10 V Pr.125, C2 to C4
10 V = 100% 10 V = 100%
0 mA = 0% 0 mA = 0% 20
0 to 20 mA
20 mA = 100% 20 mA = 100%
0 to 1 V = 0% 0 to 1 V = 0%
0 to 5 V
5 V = 100% 5 V = 100%
0 to 2 V = 0% 0 to 2 V = 0%
Terminal 4 0 to 10 V Pr.126, C5 to C7
10 V = 100% 10 V = 100%
0 to 4 mA = 0% 0 to 4 mA = 0%
0 to 20 mA
20 mA = 100% 20 mA = 100%

*3 Can be changed by Pr.73 and Pr.267 and the voltage/current input switch. (Refer to page 266.)

 Selection of additive method for PID calculation result

• When ratio is selected as the additive method (Pr.128 = "42, 43"), PID calculation result × (ratio of main speed) is added
to the main speed. The ratio is determined by the Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency and C2 Terminal
2 frequency setting bias frequency settings. In the initial status, 0 to 60 Hz is set for 0% to 100%. Thus, 60 Hz main
speed is regarded as 100%, and the 30 Hz main speed is regarded as 50%.

Output frequency Initial value

60Hz

Gain
Bias Pr.125
C2

0 Frequency setting signal 100%

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.6 Dancer control
347
 NOTE
• Even if C4 is set to other than 100%, the frequency setting signal is treated as 100%.
• Even if C3 is set to other than 0%, the frequency setting signal is treated as 0%.
• If C2 is set to other than 0 Hz, the frequency setting signal is 0% at the C2 frequency setting or below.

 Input/output signals
• The following signals can be used by assigning functions to Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) and
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
• Input signal
Pr.178 to Pr.189
Signal Function Description
setting
When this signal is assigned to the input terminal, PID control is enabled when this
X14 PID control valid 14
signal is ON.
PID forward/reverse PID control is switched between forward and reverse action without changing
X64 64
action switchover parameters by turning ON this signal.
PID P control Only proportional term is valid when this signal is turned ON. (Integral and
X72 72
switchover differential values are reset.)
• Output signal
Pr.190 to Pr.196
setting
Signal Function Description
Positive Negative
logic logic
FUP PID upper limit 15 115 Output when the measured value signal exceeds Pr.131 PID upper limit.
FDN Lower limit output 14 114 Output when the measured value signal falls below Pr.132 PID lower limit.
"Hi" is output when the output display of the operation panel is forward rotation (the
PID forward/reverse
RL 16 116 RUN LED is ON) and "Low" is output when the display is reverse rotation (the RUN
rotation output
LED blinks) and stop (the RUN LED is OFF).
During PID control
PID 47 147 Turns ON during PID control.
activated

NOTE
• Changing the terminal functions with Pr.178 to Pr.189 and Pr.190 to Pr.196 may affect other functions. Set parameters after
confirming the function of each terminal.

 PID monitor function

• This function displays the PID control set point and measured value on the operation panel, and can output these from the
terminals FM and AM.
• Set the following values to Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selection, Pr.774 to Pr.776 (Operation panel monitor
selection), Pr.992 Operation panel setting dial push monitor selection, Pr.54 FM terminal function selection and
Pr.158 AM terminal function selection for each monitor.
Monitor range
Parameter Monitor Minimum
Terminal Terminal Operation Remarks
Setting description increment
FM AM panel
When outputting through terminals FM and AM, the
Dancer main set
97 0.01 Hz 0 to 590 Hz full scale value can be adjusted by Pr.55
speed
Frequency monitoring reference.

NOTE
• Refer to page 338 for details on other PID control monitors.

 Priority of main speed commands

• The priority of main speed command sources when the speed command source is External is as follows:
JOG signal > multi-speed setting signal (RL/RM/RH/REX) > 16-bit digital input (option FR-A8AX) > analog input (terminals
2)

348 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.6 Dancer control
 • The priority of main speed command sources when "3" is set to Pr.79 Operation mode selection is as follows:
Multi-speed setting signal (RL/RM/RH/REX) > frequency setting (digital setting by PU or operation panel)
• Even if the remote operation function is selected by Pr.59 Remote function selection ≠ "0", compensation of the remote
11
setting frequency against the main speed is ignored. (The value is "0".)
• If the same terminal as an external input terminal having a speed command source (external terminal where a main speed
is input) is specified as the measured value input or set point input, the main speed is treated as "0".
12
• Setting Pr.73 ≥ 10 enables the polarity reversible operation when the PID manipulated amount is added to the main speed
command. (Polarity reversible operation of the main speed command without addition is not possible.)
13
 Adjustment procedure for dancer roll position detection signal
• When the input of terminal 4 is voltage input, 0 V is the lower limit position and 5 V (10 V) is the upper limit position (initial
values). When it is current input, 4 mA is the lower limit position and 20 mA is the upper limit position (initial values). When 14
the potentiometer has an output of 0 to 7 V, C7 must be calibrated at 7 V.

15
20mA 5V(10V) Upper limit
position
16

4mA 0V
0% 100% Lower limit Potentiometer, etc.
17
Feedback value position

(Example) To execute control at the dancer center position using a 0 to 7 V potentiometer

1. Switch the voltage/current input selection switch (switch 4) to "V", set "2" in Pr.267, and set terminal 4 input to
18
voltage input.

2. Input 0 V across terminals 4 and 5, and calibrate C6. (The % display that is indicated at analog calibration is not 19
related to the % of the feedback value.)

3. Input 7 V across terminals 4 and 5, and calibrate C7. (The % display that is indicated at analog calibration is not
related to the % of the feedback value.) 20
4. Set Pr.133 to "50%".

NOTE
• After changing the Pr.267 setting, check the voltage/current selection switch. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure or
malfunction. (Refer to page 266 for the setting.)
• If the Multi-speed operation (RH, RM, RL, or REX) signal, or JOG signal is input during regular PID control, PID control is
interrupted. However, at dancer control, these signals are treated as main speed commands, so PID control is continued.
• During dancer control, Pr.44 and Pr.45 (Second acceleration/deceleration time) is the parameter for setting the acceleration/
deceleration time for the main speed command. This function does not work as a second function.
• When the switchover mode is set by setting "6" to Pr.79, dancer control (PID control) is invalid.
• The acceleration/deceleration action of the main speed command is the same as that when the frequency is increased or
decrease by analog input. The SU signal sometimes stays ON even if operation is turned ON/OFF by the start signal. The set
frequency monitor is the value "main speed command + PID control" which is constantly changing.
• With the main speed setting frequency setting, acceleration/deceleration is performed for the acceleration/deceleration time
set in Pr.44 and Pr.45, and with the output frequency setting, acceleration/deceleration is performed for the acceleration/
deceleration time set in Pr.7 and Pr.8. For this reason, with the output frequency, when the time set in Pr.7 and Pr.8 is longer
than the time set in Pr.44 and Pr.45, acceleration/deceleration is performed for the acceleration/deceleration time set in Pr.7
and Pr.8.
• The limit of the integral term is the smaller of 100% and the value after conversion of the straight line after interpolation of Pr.1
Maximum frequency by C2 and Pr.125 to the PID manipulated amount.
However, note that the lower limit frequency limits the output frequency, but does not restrict the action of the integral item.

Parameters referred to
Pr.57 Restart coasting timepage 351
Pr.59 Remote function selectionpage 165

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.6 Dancer control
349
 Pr.73 Analog input selectionpage 266
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 174
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 250
C2 to C7 Frequency setting voltage (current) bias/gainpage 273

350 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.6 Dancer control
14.7 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure 11
/ flying start with an induction motor
12
V/F Magnetic flux Sensorless
The inverter can be restarted without stopping the motor operation in the following situations:
• When an instantaneous power failure occurs during inverter running 13
• When the motor is coasting at start

Pr. Name
Initial
value
Setting
range
Description 14
0 Frequency search only performed at the first start
Automatic restart after
162 1 Reduced voltage start only at the first start (no frequency search)
A700
instantaneous power
failure selection
0
10 Frequency search at every start 15
11 Reduced voltage start at every start (no frequency search)
0 Rotation direction detection disabled
1 Rotation direction detection enabled
299
Rotation direction
detection selection at 0 When Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selection = "0", with rotation
16
A701 direction detection
restarting 9999
When Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selection = "1 or 2", without
rotation direction detection
0 Coasting time differs according to the inverter capacity.*1
17
57 Set the time delay for the inverter to perform a restart after restoring power
Restart coasting time 9999 0.1 to 30 s
A702 due to an instantaneous power failure.
9999 No restart 18
58
Restart cushion time 1s 0 to 60 s Set the voltage cushion time for restart.
A703
165 Stall prevention operation Set the stall prevention level at restart operation on the assumption that the
A710 level for restart
150% 0% to 400%
inverter rated current is 100%. 19
Set the acceleration time to reach Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration
0 to 3600 s
611 Acceleration time at a reference frequency at restart.
9999
F003 restart Standard acceleration time (for example, Pr.7) is applied as the acceleration
9999
time at restart. 20
*1 The coasting time when Pr.57 = "0" is as shown below. (When Pr.162 and Pr.570 are set to the initial value.)
0.5 s for the FR-E860-0027(1.5K) or lower.
1 s for the FR-E820-0080(1.5K) or lower, FR-E840-0040(1.5K) or lower, and FR-E860-0040(2.2K) to FR-E860-0120(7.5K)
2 s for the FR-E820-0110(2.2K) to FR-E820-0330(7.5K) and FR-E840-0060(2.2K) to FR-E840-0170(7.5K)

• To operate the inverter with the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function enabled, check the following
points.
• Set Pr.57 Restart coasting time = "0".

 Setting for the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure

operation (Pr.162)
• The Pr.162 settings and the instantaneous power failure automatic restart operation under each operation mode are as
shown in the following table.
V/F control,
Pr.162 setting Restart operation Real sensorless vector control
Advanced magnetic flux vector control
0 (initial value) At first start Frequency search Frequency search
1 At first start Reduced voltage start Reduced voltage start
Frequency search
10 At every start Frequency search Frequency search
11 At every start Reduced voltage start Reduced voltage start

 Restart operation with frequency search (Pr.162 ="0 or 10", Pr.299)

• When Pr.162 = "0 (initial value) or 10", the motor speed is detected at a power restoration so that the motor can re-start
smoothly.

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.7 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start with an induction motor
351
 • The encoder also detects the rotation direction so that the inverter can re-start smoothly even during the reverse rotation.
• Whether or not to detect the rotation direction can be selected by Pr.299 Rotation direction detection selection at
restarting. If the motor capacity is different from the inverter capacity, set Pr.299 = "0" (no rotation direction detection).
• When the rotation direction is detected, the following operation is performed according to Pr.78 Reverse rotation
prevention selection setting.
Pr.78 setting
Pr.299 setting
0 1 2
9999 ○ × ×
0 (initial value) × × ×
1 ○ ○ ○

○: With rotation direction detection ×: Without rotation direction detection

V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control Real sensorless vector control
Instantaneous (power failure) time Instantaneous (power failure) time
Power supply
Power supply
(R/L1, S/L2,
(R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3)
T/L3)
Motor speed N Motor speed N
(r/min)
(r/min)
Inverter output * Inverter output
frequency f(Hz) frequency f(Hz)
output voltage *
Inverter output
voltage E(V) E(V)
Speed
Restart cushion Coasting + detection Acceleration time
Speed time (Pr.57) time
Coasting time (Pr.58 setting) at a restart
+ detection (Pr.611 setting)
time (Pr.57) time
* The output shut off timing differs
* The output shut off timing differs Acceleration time according to the load condition.
according to the load condition. at a restart
(Pr.611 setting)

NOTE
• The rotation speed detection time (frequency search) changes according to the rotation speed of the motor (maximum 1
second).
• When the inverter capacity is two ranks or greater than the motor capacity, the overcurrent protective function (E.OC[]) is
sometimes activated and prevents the inverter from restarting.
• If two or more motors are connected to one inverter, this function operates abnormally. (The inverter does not restart
successfully.)
• Because a DC injection brake is applied instantaneously at speed detection during a restart, the speed might drop if the
moment of inertia (J) of the load is small.
• If reverse operation is detected when "1" (reverse rotation disabled) is set to Pr.78, operation decelerates by reverse rotation
and then changes to forward rotation when the start command is forward rotation. The inverter does not restart when the start
command is reverse rotation.

352 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.7 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start with an induction motor
 Restart operation without frequency search (Pr.162 = "1 or 11")
• When Pr.162 = "1 or 11", reduced voltage start is used for the restart operation. In this method, the voltage is raised 11
gradually while keeping the output frequency level at the level before an instantaneous power failure, regardless of the
motor's coasting speed.
V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control 12
Instantaneous (power failure) time
Power supply
(R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3) 13
Motor speed N
(r/min)
Inverter output
frequency f(Hz)
*
14
Inverter output
voltage E(V)

15
Coasting time
Pr.57 setting Restart cushion time
(Pr.58 setting)
* The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition. 16
NOTE
• This restart method uses the output frequency that was active before the instantaneous power failure stored in memory. If the
instantaneous power failure time is 0.2 second or more, the output frequency can no longer be stored and held in memory, so 17
the restart is performed from Pr.13 Starting frequency (initial value: 0.5 Hz).
• During Real sensorless vector control, the operation is the same as one when Pr.162 = "0 or 10".

18
 Restart at every start (Pr.162 = "10 or 11")
• When "10 or 11" is set in Pr.162, a restart operation is performed at each start and automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure (after the time period set in Pr.57 elapsed). When "0 (initial value) or 1" is set in Pr.162, a restart operation 19
is performed at the first start after a power-ON, and from the second power-ON onwards, a start from the starting frequency
is performed.
20
 Automatic restart operation of the MRS (X10) signal
• The restart operation after restoration from output shutoff by the MRS (X10) signal is as shown in the following table
according to the Pr.30 setting.
Pr.30 setting Operation after restoration from output shutoff by the MRS (X10) signal
2 Restart operation (starting from the coasting speed)
Other than the above Starting from Pr.13 Starting frequency.

NOTE
• When output is shut off using safety stop function (terminals S1 and S2), the inverter restarts in the same way as when output
is shut off by the MRS (X10) signal.
• Operation is selectable as shown in the table above when Pr.162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
selection = "0 or 1". When Pr.162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection = "10 or 11" (automatic
restart operation at each start), a restart operation is performed regardless of the setting of Pr.30 Regenerative function
selection.
• Set "24" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the output stop (MRS) signal
to the input terminal, and "10" to assign the Inverter operation enable (X10) signal.

 Adjustment of restart coasting time (Pr.57)

• Restart coasting time is the time period from the occurrence of instantaneous power failure until the operation is restarted
after power is restored.
With frequency search, the motor speed is detected and operation is restarted after the coasting time.

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.7 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start with an induction motor
353
 • To enable restart operation, set "0" to Pr.57 Restart coasting time. If "0" is set to Pr.57, the coasting time is automatically
set to the following number of seconds. Generally, this setting does not interfere with inverter operation.

Voltage Inverter
Coasting time (s)
class ND LD
FR-E820-0080(1.5K) or lower FR-E820-0050(0.75K) or lower 1
200 V
FR-E820-0110(2.2K) or higher FR-E820-0080(1.5K) or higher 2
FR-E840-0040(1.5K) or lower FR-E840-0026(0.75K) or lower 1
400 V
FR-E840-0060(2.2K) or higher FR-E840-0040(1.5K) or higher 2
FR-E860-0027(1.5K) or lower FR-E860-0017(0.75K) 0.5
575 V
FR-E860-0040(2.2K) or higher FR-E860-0027(1.5K) or higher 1

Interruption > Pr.57 setting Interruption ≤ Pr.57 setting

Instantaneous power failure Instantaneous power failure
(interruption) time (interruption) time
Power supply Power supply
(R/L1、S/L2、T/L3) (R/L1、S/L2、T/L3)

Inverter output Inverter output

frequency f (Hz) frequency f (Hz)

Coasting time Coasting time

Pr.57 setting Pr.57 setting

• Inverter operation is sometimes hindered by the size of the moment of inertia (J) of the load, output frequency, or the
residual magnetic flux in the motor. Adjust this coasting time within the range 0.1 to 30 seconds to match the load
specification.

 Restart cushion time (Pr.58)

• The cushion time is the time taken to raise the voltage to the level required for the specified speed after the motor speed
detection (output frequency before the instantaneous power failure when Pr.162 = "1 or 11").
• Normally, the motor runs at the initial value as it is. However, adjust to suit the moment of inertia (J) of the load or the size
of the torque.

NOTE
• Pr.58 is invalid under Real sensorless vector control.

 Adjustment of restart operation (Pr.165, Pr.611)

• The stall prevention operation level at a restart operation can be set in Pr.165.
• Using Pr.611, the acceleration time to reach Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency after a restart
operation can be set. This can be set individually from the normal acceleration time.

NOTE
• Pr.165 is invalid under Real sensorless vector control.
• Changing the Pr.21 setting does not affect the Pr.611 setting increment.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
• The SU and FU signals are not output during the restart. These signals are output after the restart cushion time passes.
• Restart operation is also performed after the inverter reset is released or after the retry by the retry function occurs.

CAUTION
• When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected, the motor suddenly starts
(after reset time passes) when an instantaneous power failure occurs. Stay away from the motor and machinery.
When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function has been selected, apply the CAUTION
sticker(s), which are found in the Inverter Safety Guideline enclosed with the inverter, to easily visible places.

Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time incrementspage 158
Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 169, page 170
Pr.65, Pr.67 to Pr.69 Retry functionpage 208

354 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.7 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start with an induction motor
Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selectionpage 193
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283
11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.7 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start with an induction motor
355
 14.8 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
/ flying start with a PM motor
PM

The inverter can be restarted without stopping the motor operation.

When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected, the motor driving is resumed in the following
situations:
• When power comes back ON during inverter driving after an instantaneous power failure
• When the motor is coasting at start

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

0 No delay
57 Set the delay time for the inverter to perform a restart after restoring
Restart coasting time 9999 0.1 to 30 s
A702 power due to an instantaneous power failure.
9999 No restart
Automatic restart after 0, 1 Frequency search only performed at the first start
162
instantaneous power 0
A700 10, 11 Frequency search at every start
failure selection
Set the acceleration time to reach Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration
0 to 3600 s
611 Acceleration time at a reference frequency at restart.
9999
F003 restart Standard acceleration time (for example, Pr.7) is applied as the
9999
acceleration time at restart.

 Selection of restart operation (Pr.162)

• At a power restoration, the encoder detects the motor speed by a frequency search so that the inverter can re-start
smoothly.
• The encoder also detects the rotation direction so that the inverter can re-start smoothly even during the reverse rotation.
• When "10 (or 11)" is set in Pr.162, a restart operation is performed at each start and automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure. When "0 (or 1)" is set in Pr.162, a restart operation is performed at the first start after a power-ON, and from
the second power-ON onwards, a start from the starting frequency is performed.
Instantaneous (power failure) time

Power supply
(R/L1,S/L2,T/L3)
Motor
speed N (r/min)
Inverter output *
frequency f (Hz)

Inverter output
voltage E (V)

Speed
Coasting + detection
time (Pr.57) time
Acceleration time
at a restart
* The output shut off timing differs (Pr.611 setting)
according to the load condition

NOTE
• Because a DC injection brake is applied instantaneously at speed detection during a restart, the speed might drop if the
moment of inertia (J) of the load is small.
• Restart operation with reduced voltage is not available for PM sensorless vector control.
• A protective function may be activated for some motor models or at certain running speeds, disabling restarting.

 Restart coasting time (Pr.57)

• Coasting time is the time from the motor speed detection to the restart operation start.
• To enable restart operation, set "0" (no coasting time) in Pr.57 Restart coasting time. Generally, this setting does not
interfere with inverter operation.

356 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.8 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start with a PM motor
 • Inverter operation is sometimes hindered by the size of the moment of inertia (J) of the load or the output frequency. Adjust
this coasting time within the range 0.1 to 30 seconds to match the load specification.
11
 Adjustment of restart operation (Pr.611)
• Using Pr.611, the acceleration time to reach Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency after a restart
operation can be set. This can be set individually from the normal acceleration time. 12
NOTE
• Changing the Pr.21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments setting does not affect the Pr.611 setting increment.
• A PM motor is a motor with interior permanent magnets. Regression voltage is generated when the motor coasts at an
13
instantaneous power failure or at a flying start. The inverter's DC bus voltage rises if the motor coasts fast or makes a flying
start in this condition.
When using the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function (Pr.57 ≠ "9999"), it is recommended to also use 14
the regenerative avoidance function (Pr.882 Regeneration avoidance operation selection = "1") to make startups stable. If
the overvoltage protective function (E.OV[]) still occurs with the regeneration avoidance function, also use the retry function
(Pr.67).
• When a built-in brake or a regeneration unit is used, the frequency search may not be available at 2200 r/min or higher. The 15
restart operation cannot be performed until the motor speed drops to a frequency where the frequency search is available.

16
CAUTION
• A PM motor is a motor with interior permanent magnets. High voltage is generated at motor terminals while the motor is
running.
17
Do not touch motor terminals and other parts until the motor stops to prevent an electric shock.
• When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is selected, the motor suddenly starts (after reset
time passes) when an instantaneous power failure occurs.
18
Stay away from the motor and machinery.
When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function has been selected, apply the CAUTION sticker(s),
which are found in the Inverter Safety Guideline enclosed with the inverter, to easily visible places.
19
Parameters referred to
Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 169, page 170
Pr.65, Pr.67 to Pr.69 Retry functionpage 208
Pr.78 Reverse rotation prevention selectionpage 193
20
Pr.882 Regeneration avoidance operation selectionpage 390

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.8 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start with a PM motor
357
 14.9 Offline auto tuning for a frequency search
V/F

Under V/F control, the accuracy of the "frequency search", which is used to detect the motor speed for the automatic restart
after instantaneous power failure and flying start, can be improved.

Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
0 Frequency search only performed at the first start
Automatic restart after 1 Reduced voltage start only at the first start (no frequency search)
162
instantaneous power 0
A700 10 Frequency search at every start
failure selection
11 Reduced voltage start at every start (no frequency search)
The offline auto tuning automatically sets the gain required for the
0 to 32767
298 frequency search.
Frequency search gain 9999
A711 The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-
9999
HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so on) is used.
The offline auto tuning automatically sets the gain required for the
0 to 32767
560 Second frequency frequency search of the second motor.
9999
A712 search gain The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR, SF-JR, SF-
9999
HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so on) is used for the second motor.
0 No offline auto tuning
Offline auto tuning is performed under Advanced magnetic flux vector
96 Auto tuning setting/ 1 control, Real sensorless vector control, or PM sensorless vector
0
C110 status control. (Refer to page 299 and page 308.)
Offline auto tuning is performed without the motor rotating (under V/
11
F control).
Tuning data (The value measured by offline auto tuning is
90 automatically set.)
Motor constant (R1) 9999 0 to 50 Ω, 9999
C120 9999: The constant value of Mitsubishi Electric motor (SF-PR, SF-JR,
SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA and so on) is used.
0 No auto tuning for the second motor.
Offline auto tuning is performed for the second motor. (Refer to page
463 Second motor auto 1
0 299 and page 308.)
C210 tuning setting/status
Offline auto tuning is performed without the second motor rotating
11
(under V/F control).
458 Second motor
9999 0 to 50 Ω, 9999 Tuning data of the second motor (same as Pr.90)
C220 constant (R1)

 Offline auto tuning for a frequency search

• When the frequency search is selected by setting Pr.162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection
= "0 or 10", perform offline auto tuning.

 Before performing offline auto tuning

Check the following points before performing offline auto tuning:
• V/F control is selected.
• Check that a motor is connected. (Check that the motor is not rotated by an external force during tuning.)
• Select a motor with the rated current equal to or less than the inverter rated current. (Note that the motor rated current
should be 0.4 kW or higher (0.1 kW or higher for the 200 V class).)
If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current is used, speed and torque
accuracies may deteriorate due to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter
rated current.
• The target motor is other than a high-slip motor, a high-speed motor, or a special motor.
• The motor may rotate slightly even if the offline auto tuning without the motor rotating (Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/status
= "11") is selected. Fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake, or before tuning, make sure that it is safe even if the
motor rotates. (Caution is required especially in vertical lift applications.) Note that even if the motor runs slightly, tuning
performance is unaffected.

358 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.9 Offline auto tuning for a frequency search
 • Offline auto tuning is not performed correctly when the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) is inserted
between the inverter and motor. Be sure to remove them before performing tuning.
11
 Setting
1. Set "11" in Pr.96 Auto tuning setting/status.
12
2. Set the rated motor current (initial value is inverted rated current) in Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. (Refer to
page 198.)

3. Set Pr.71 Applied motor according to the motor to be used. 13

Motor Pr.71 setting
SF-JR 0 (3)
Mitsubishi Electric standard efficiency motor SF-JR 4P 1.5 kW or lower 20 (23) 14
Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency motor SF-HR 40 (43)
Others 0 (3)
SF-JRCA 4P 10 (13) 15
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor SF-HRCA 50 (53)
Others (SF-JRC, etc.) 10 (13)
Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-
saving motor
SF-PR 70 (73)
16
Other manufacturer's standard motor — 0 (3)
Other manufacturer’s constant-torque motor — 10 (13)

 Performing tuning 17

• Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel if the inverter is in the state ready for tuning. The 18
motor starts by turning ON the start command while tuning is unavailable.

• In the PU operation mode, press the RUN key on the operation panel. 19
In the External operation, turn ON the start command (STF signal or STR signal). Tuning starts. (At this time, excitation
noise occurs.)

NOTE 20
• It takes about 10 seconds for tuning to complete. (The time depends on the inverter capacity and motor type.)
• Satisfy the required inverter start conditions to start offline auto tuning. For example, stop the input of the MRS signal.
• To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or the STOP/RESET key on the operation panel.
(Turning OFF the start signal (STF signal or STR signal) also ends tuning.)
• During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid (initial value).
Input terminals <effective signals>: MRS, RES, STF, STR, S1, and S2
Output terminals: RUN, FM, AM, ABC, and SO
• When the rotation speed and the output frequency are selected for terminals FM and AM, the progress status of offline auto
tuning is output in 15 steps from FM and AM.
• Do not perform ON/OFF switching of the Second function selection (RT) signal during offline auto tuning. Auto tuning will not
be performed properly.
• Since the RUN signal turns ON when tuning is started, pay close attention especially when a sequence which releases a
mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed.
• When executing offline auto tuning, input the operation command after switching ON the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
of the inverter.
• While Pr.79 Operation mode selection = "7", turn the PU operation external interlock (X12) signal ON to tune in the PU
operation mode.

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.9 Offline auto tuning for a frequency search
359
 • During tuning, the monitor is displayed on the operation panel as follows.
Status Operation panel indication

Setting

Tuning in progress

Blinking
Normal end

• When offline auto tuning ends, press the STOP/RESET key on the operation panel during PU operation. For External
operation, turn OFF the start signal (STF signal or STR signal). This operation resets the offline auto tuning, and the
monitor display of the operation panel returns to normal. (Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)
• At tuning completion, the tuning results are set in the following parameters:
Parameter Name
90 Motor constant (R1)
298 Frequency search gain
96 Auto tuning setting/status

NOTE
• The motor constants measured once during offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held until offline
auto tuning is performed again. However, the tuning data is cleared when performing All parameter clear.

• If offline auto tuning has ended in error, motor constants are not set.
Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
Error display Error cause Countermeasures
8 Forced end Set "11" in Pr.96 and retry.
9 Inverter protective function operation Make the setting again.
Set the acceleration/deceleration time longer.
91 The current limit (stall prevention) function is activated.
Set Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection = "1".
92 The converter output voltage fell to 75% of the rated voltage. Check for the power supply voltage fluctuation.
Calculation error.
93 Check the motor wiring and make the setting again.
The motor is not connected.
• When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing the STOP/RESET key or turning OFF the start signal (STF or STR) during
tuning, offline tuning does not end properly. (The motor constants have not been set.)
Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
• If the rated power supply of the motor is 200/220 V (400/440 V) 60 Hz, set the rated motor current multiplied by 1.1 in Pr.9
Electronic thermal O/L relay after tuning is complete.
• For a motor with a thermal protector or other thermal detection, set "0" (motor overheat protection by inverter invalid) in
Pr.9 to protect the motor from overheating.

NOTE
• An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error. After power is restored, the inverter starts
normal operation. Therefore, when the STF (STR) signal is ON, the motor starts forward (reverse) rotation.
• Any fault occurring during tuning is handled as in the normal operation. However, if the retry function is set, no retry is
performed.
• The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0 Hz.

 Tuning the second motor (Pr.463)

• When one inverter switches the operation between two different motors, set the second motor in Pr.450 Second applied
motor, set Pr.463 Second motor auto tuning setting/status = "11", and perform tuning of the second motor.

360 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.9 Offline auto tuning for a frequency search
 • Turning ON the RT signal enables the parameter settings for the second motor as shown in the following table.
Function RT signal ON (second motor) RT signal OFF (first motor) 11
Motor constant (R1) Pr.458 Pr.90
Frequency search gain Pr.560 Pr.298
Auto tuning setting/status Pr.463 Pr.96
12
NOTE
• To use the RT signal, set "3" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the
function to an input terminal.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
13
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

14
Parameters referred to
Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relaypage 198
Pr.65, Pr.67 to Pr.69 Retry functionpage 208
Pr.71 Applied motor, Pr.450 Second applied motorpage 294
Pr.79 Operation mode selectionpage 174 15
Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selectionpage 214
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283

16

17

18

19

20

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.9 Offline auto tuning for a frequency search
361
 14.10 Power failure time deceleration-to-stop function
V/F Magnetic flux Sensorless
This is a function to decelerate the motor to a stop when an instantaneous power failure or undervoltage occurs.
Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
The inverter output is shut off at an undervoltage or when a power
0
failure occurs.
1 The inverter decelerates the motor to a stop at an undervoltage or
261 Power failure stop when a power failure occurs.
0
A730 selection The inverter decelerates the motor to a stop at an undervoltage or
when a power failure occurs.
2
The inverter re-accelerates the motor if the power restores during
the deceleration.

 Power failure stop function (Pr.261 = "1")

• Even if power is restored during deceleration triggered by a power failure, deceleration stop is continued after which the
inverter stays stopped. To restart operation, turn the start signal OFF then ON again.

Pr.261=1
Power
supply
During deceleration at
Output frequency

occurrence of power failure

During stop at
occurrence of
power failure

Time
STF

Turn OFF STF once to make acceleration again

Y46

NOTE
• If the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected (Pr.57 Restart coasting time ≠ "9999") while the power
failure time deceleration stop function is set enabled (Pr.261 = "1"), the power failure time deceleration stop function is
disabled.
• When the power failure time deceleration stop function is enabled (Pr.261 = "1"), the inverter does not start even if the power
is turned ON or inverter reset is performed with the start signal (STF/STR) ON. Turn OFF the start signal once and then ON
again to make a start.

Power supply ON
Not started as inverter Output
is stopped due to power frequency
failure

Time
STF OFF ON
Y46 ON

362 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.10 Power failure time deceleration-to-stop function
 Continuous operation function at instantaneous power failure (Pr.261 =
"2") 11
• The motor re-accelerates to the set frequency when the power restores during the deceleration triggered by a power
failure.
If the power is restored after stoppage by a power failure, a restart operation is performed when automatic restart after 12
instantaneous power failure (Pr.57 ≠ "9999") is selected.
When power is restored during
Pr.261 = 2
deceleration at occurrence of
power failure
When used with automatic restart
Pr.261 = 2, Pr.57 ≠ 9999 after instantaneous power failure 13
IPF During power failure
Power Power
supply supply
Output Output 14
frequency During deceleration frequency During deceleration Automatic restart
at occurrence of at occurrence of after instantaneous
Reacceleration*1 power failure
power failure power failure
Time Time
Y46 Reset time + Pr.57
15
Y46
*1 Acceleration time depends on Pr.7 (Pr.44)

 During deceleration at occurrence of power failure (Y46) signal 16

• After deceleration by a power failure, the inverter is not restarted even though the start command is input. Check the During
deceleration at occurrence of power failure (Y46) signal at a power failure. (For example, when input phase loss protection
(E.ILF) occurs.) 17
• The Y46 signal is turned ON during deceleration at occurrence of power failure and in a stop status after deceleration at
occurrence of power failure.
• For the Y46 signal, set "46" (positive logic) or "146" (negative logic) in any parameter from Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output 18
terminal function selection) to assign the function.

NOTE
• The power failure time deceleration stop function is disabled during a stop or when the breaker is tripped.
19
• When the load is high during PM sensorless vector control, an undervoltage sometimes causes the coasting stop.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. 20

CAUTION
• Even if the power failure time deceleration-to-stop function is set, some loads might cause the inverter to trip and the
motor to coast.
The motor coasts if sufficient regenerative power is not obtained from the motor.

Parameters referred to
Pr.57 Restart coasting timepage 351, page 356
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 250

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.10 Power failure time deceleration-to-stop function
363
 14.11 PLC function
The inverter can be run in accordance with a sequence program.
In accordance with the machine specifications, a user can set various operation patterns: inverter movements at signal inputs,
signal outputs at particular inverter statuses, and monitor outputs, etc.

Initial Setting
Pr. Name Description
value range
0 PLC function disabled
The conditions to enable the SQ signal
414 PLC function operation 1, 11
0 depends on the Pr.338 setting.
A800 selection PLC function enabled
The SQ signal is enabled by input from an
2, 12
external input terminal.
The inverter start command is enabled regardless of the operating status of
0
415 Inverter operation lock the sequence program.
0
A801 mode setting The inverter start command is enabled only while the sequence program is
1
running.
0: Clears the flash memory fault display (no operation after
writing while the flash memory is in normal operation).
9696: Clears the flash memory (no operation after writing Write
while the flash memory is at a fault).
498 PLC function flash 0, 9696 (0 to Other than 0 and 9696: Outside the setting range
0
A804 memory clear 9999) 0: Normal display
1: The flash memory is not cleared because the PLC
function is enabled. Read
9696: During flash memory clearing operation or flash
memory fault
User parameter auto 1 Auto storage function enabled
675
storage function 9999
A805 9999 Auto storage function disabled
selection
Desired values can be set.
1150 to
Because devices D206 to D255 used by the PLC function can be mutually
1199 User parameters 1 to
0 0 to 65535 accessed, the values set to Pr.1150 to Pr.1199 can be used by the
A810 to User parameters 50
sequence program. The result of performing calculation by a sequence
A859
program can also be monitored by Pr.1150 to Pr.1199.

 Outline of PLC function

• To enable the PLC function, set a value other than "0" in Pr.414 PLC function operation selection. (The Pr.414 setting
change becomes valid after inverter reset.)
• Switch the execution key (RUN/STOP) of the sequence program by turning the SQ signal ON/OFF. The sequence program
can be executed by turning the SQ signal ON. To input the SQ signal, set "50" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal
function selection) to assign the function to a terminal.
• When "1" is set in Pr.415 Inverter operation lock mode setting, the inverter can be operated only when the sequence
program is running. By changing the PLC program status from RUN to STOP during inverter operation, the motor
decelerates to stop. To stop the inverter operation at the STOP status of the PLC program while performing auto operation
using SD1148 (or SM1200 to 1211) of the PLC program, set Pr.415 = "1".
• For reading or writing sequence programs, use FR Configurator2 on the personal computer connected to the inverter via
RS-485 communication or USB. (When Pr.414 ≠ "0", sequence programs can be read from or written to FR Configurator2.)

 Sequence start (SQ) signal

• Switch the execution key (RUN/STOP) of the sequence program by turning the SQ signal ON/OFF. The sequence program
can be executed by turning the SQ signal ON. To input the SQ signal, set "50" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.189
(Input terminal function selection) to assign the function. When the SQ signal is assigned to any parameter from Pr.185
to Pr.189 (Terminal NET X function selection), the sequence program can be executed just by inputing the SQ signal
via terminal NET X. (The SQ signal needs not be input via an external terminal.)
• When Pr.414 = "1 or 11", the SQ signal must be input according to the command source (except when the SQ signal is
assigned to terminal NET X).

364 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.11 PLC function
 • When Pr.414 = "2 or 12", the SQ signal can be input only via an external input terminal regardless of the Pr.338 setting.
• The following shows the required conditions to enable the SQ signal.
11
SQ signal
Pr.414 setting Pr.338 setting
Input via an external (physical) terminal Input via a communication virtual terminal
ON ON
1, 11
0
— ON (terminal NET X)
12
1 ON —
2, 12 — ON —
—: Not required to enable the SQ signal 13
 User parameter (data register (D)) auto storage function selection
• Setting Pr.675 = "1" enables the auto storage function for user parameters. 14
• The user parameter auto storage function is used to store the setting of Pr.1195 PLC function user parameters 46 (D251)
to Pr.1199 PLC function user parameters 50 (D255) automatically in EEPROM at power OFF or inverter reset.
• The auto storage function is disabled while the inverter performs any of the following. 15
Measurement of the main circuit capacitor's life, offline auto tuning, or measurement of load characteristics

NOTE
• The auto storage function may fail if the EEPROM is accessed by other functions at the same time at power OFF. To ensure 16
the auto storage, provide a power source for the control circuit separately from that of the main circuit.

 User parameter reading from EEPROM 17

• User parameters (Pr.1150 to Pr.1199) are read from RAM or EEPROM according to the settings in Pr.342
Communication EEPROM write selection and Pr.414 PLC function operation selection. When Pr.414 = "11 or 12",
RAM data is read regardless of the Pr.342 setting.
18
Device Pr.342 Pr.414 Read from Written to

0
0, 1, 2 EEPROM
EEPROM 19
Inverter (via communication), 11, 12 RAM
FR Configurator2 0, 1, 2 RAM
1 RAM
11, 12
0, 1, 2
RAM
(Differs according to the option type.)
20
0 EEPROM
11, 12 RAM
Communication option
0, 1, 2 RAM
1 RAM
11, 12 RAM
0, 1, 2 EEPROM
0 EEPROM
11, 12 RAM
Operation panel
0, 1, 2 EEPROM
1 RAM
11, 12 RAM

NOTE
• For the details of the PLC function, refer to the PLC Function Programming Manual and the Instruction Manual of FR
Configurator2.

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.11 PLC function
365
 14.12 Trace function
• The operating status of the inverter can be traced and temporarily stored in the RAM in the inverter. The data stored in the
RAM is deleted when the power supply is turned OFF. (The data is retained at inverter reset.)
• Stored data can be monitored by FR Configurator2, and the status of the inverter can be analyzed.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

0 Without trace operation
1020 1 Sampling start
Trace operation selection 0
A900 2 Forced trigger
3 Sampling stop
Set the sampling cycle.
1022 1, 2, 5, 10, 50,
Sampling cycle 1 1: 1 ms, 2: 2 ms, 5: 5 ms, 10: 10 ms, 50: 50 ms, 100: 100 ms,
A902 100, 500, 1000
500: 500 ms, 1000: 1 s
1023
Number of analog channels 4 1 to 8 Select the number of analog channels for sampling.
A903
0 Manual sampling start
1024
Sampling auto start 0 Sampling starts automatically when the power supply is turned
A904 1
ON or at a reset
0 Fault trigger
1 Analog trigger
1025
Trigger mode selection 0 2 Digital trigger
A905
3 Analog or digital trigger (OR logic)
4 Both analog and digital triggers (AND logic)
1026 Number of sampling before Set the percentage of the pre-trigger sampling time with
90% 0% to 100%
A906 trigger respect to the overall sampling time.
1027
Analog source selection (1ch) 201
A910
1028
Analog source selection (2ch) 202
A911
1029 1 to 3, 5 to 12, 14,
Analog source selection (3ch) 203
A912 17, 18, 20, 23,
1030 24, 32, 33, 40 to
Analog source selection (4ch) 204
A913 42, 52 to 54, 61, Select the analog data (monitor item) for sampling on each
1031 62, 67, 83, 91, channel.
Analog source selection (5ch) 205 97, 201 to 210,
A914
212, 213, 230 to
1032
Analog source selection (6ch) 206 232, 235 to 238*1
A915
1033
Analog source selection (7ch) 207
A916
1034
Analog source selection (8ch) 208
A917
1035
Analog trigger channel 1 1 to 8 Select the analog channel to be the trigger.
A918
Sampling starts when the value of the analog monitor exceeds
0
1036 Analog trigger operation the value set at the trigger level (Pr.1037)
0
A919 selection Sampling starts when the value of the analog monitor falls
1
below the value set at the trigger level (Pr.1037)
Set the level at which the analog trigger turns ON.
1037
Analog trigger level 1000 600 to 1400 The trigger level is the value obtained by subtracting 1000 from
A920
the set value.

366 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.12 Trace function
 Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
1038
A930
Digital source selection (1ch) 0 11
1039
Digital source selection (2ch) 0
A931
1040
A932
Digital source selection (3ch) 0 12
1041
Digital source selection (4ch) 0
A933 Select the digital data (I/O signal) for sampling on each
0 to 255
1042
A934
Digital source selection (5ch) 0
channel. 13
1043
Digital source selection (6ch) 0
A935
1044
Digital source selection (7ch) 0 14
A936
1045
Digital source selection (8ch) 0
A937
1046
Digital trigger channel 1 1 to 8 Select the digital channel to be the trigger.
15
A938
1047 Digital trigger operation 0 Tracing starts when the signal turns ON
0
A939 selection 1 Tracing starts when the signal turns OFF
*1 The setting range differs depending on the model. For more information, refer to the monitor item list.
16
 Operation outline
• This function is used to sample the status data (analog monitor and digital monitor) of the inverter, trace the sampling data 17
when a trigger (trace start condition) occurs, and stores the resulting trace data.
• When the trace function is set enabled, samplings are collected and the inverter goes into the pre-trigger status.
• In the pre-trigger status, samples are collected, and the trigger standby status is entered when sufficient samples for the 18
number of pre-trigger samples have been collected.
• When a trigger occurs in the trigger standby status, tracing is started and the trace data is stored.

If the data is short for the pre-trigger sampling,

19
the inverter goes into the pre-trigger state.

Sampling start Pre-trigger sampling number

20
Sampling data
0% 90%

Once the enough data is collected for trigger sampling,

Data in the period the inverter goes into the trigger-ready state.
is discarded.
Sampling start Pre-trigger sampling number

Sampling data
0% 90% 100%

At trigger generation, samples equivalent to the 100%

Data in the period pre-trigger sampling number are collected and saved.
is discarded.
Sampling start Trace start A trigger occurs Trace completed

Sampling data
0% 90% 100%

 Tracing procedure
1. Prior setting for tracing
Set Pr.1022 Sampling cycle and Pr.1023 Number of analog channels according to the necessary sampling time.
Use Pr.1027 to Pr.1034 to set analog sources, and Pr.1038 to Pr.1045 to set digital sources.
Set a trigger type in Pr.1025.

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.12 Trace function
367
 2. Tracing
Sampling starts according to the Pr.1020 and Pr.1024 settings.
The trace status can be monitored. (Refer to page 371.)

3. Waveform check
By using FR Configurator2, trace data stored in the internal RAM can be displayed on a computer screen. For
details, refer to the Instruction Manual of FR Configurator2.

 Selection of sampling time (Pr.1022, Pr.1023)

• The sampling time is determined by the sampling cycle and the number of data acquisition points. The the number of data
acquisition points varies depending on the setting in Pr.1023 Number of analog channels.

Pr.1023 Memory mode sampling time Number of data

Number of analog channels Minimum (Pr.1022 = "1") Maximum (Pr.1022 = "1000") acquisition points
1 1704 ms 1704 s 1704
2 1280 ms 1280 s 1280
3 1024 ms 1024 s 1024
4 852 ms 852 s 852
5 728 ms 728 s 728
6 640 ms 640 s 640
7 568 ms 568 s 568
8 512 ms 512 s 512

 Analog source (monitor item) selection

• Select the analog sources (monitor items) to be set to Pr.1027 to Pr.1034 from the following table.
Trigger Trigger
Setting Minus (-) Setting Minus (-)
Monitor item*1 level Monitor item*1 level
value display*2 value display*2
criterion*3 criterion*3
1 Output frequency/speed *4 61 Motor thermal load factor *4

2 Output current *4 62 Inverter thermal load factor *4

3 Output voltage *4 67 PID measured value 2 *4

Frequency setting value/motor *4 BACnet valid APDU counter (for

5 83 65535
speed setting the FR-E800-EPA only)
6 Running speed *4 91 PID manipulated amount ○ *4

7 Motor torque *4 97 Dancer main set speed *4

8 Converter output voltage *4 201 *Output frequency Pr.84

*4 ND rated
9 Regenerative brake duty 202 *U-phase output current ○
current
Electronic thermal O/L relay load *4 ND rated
10 203 *V-phase output current ○
factor current
*4 ND rated
11 Output current peak value 204 *W-phase output current ○
current
Converter output voltage peak *4 400/800/
12 205 Converter output voltage
value 1000 V
*4 ND rated
14 Output power 206 *Output current (all three phases)
current
*4 ND rated
17 Load meter 207 *Excitation current (A)
current
*4 ND rated
18 Motor excitation current 208 *Torque current (A)
current
20 Cumulative energization time 65535 209 Terminal 2 100%
23 Actual operation time 65535 210 Terminal 4 100%
24 Motor load factor *4 212 *Excitation current (%) ○ 100%
32 Torque command *4 213 *Torque current (%) ○ 100%
33 Torque current command *4 230 *Output frequency (signed) ○ Pr.84
40 PLC function user monitor 1 ○ *4 231 *Motor speed (with sign) ○ *5

41 PLC function user monitor 2 ○ *4 232 *Speed command (with sign) ○ *5

42 PLC function user monitor 3 ○ *4 235 *Torque command ○ 100%

52 PID set point *4 236 *Motor torque ○ 100%

368 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.12 Trace function
 Trigger Trigger
Setting Minus (-) Setting Minus (-)
Monitor item*1 level Monitor item*1 level
value display*2
criterion*3
value display*2
criterion*3 11
53 PID measured value *4 237 *Excitation current command ○ 100%
54 PID deviation ○ *4 238 *Torque current command ○ 100%
*1 "*" shows a monitor item with a high-speed sampling cycle. 12
*2 The monitor items with a circle (○) represents that its monitor value can be indicated with minus sign.
*3 Indicates a criterion at 100% when the analog trigger is set.
*4 Refer to the full-scale value of terminal FM or AM (on page 237).
*5 Rated motor frequency × 120 / number of motor poles 13
 Digital source (monitor item) selection
• Select the digital sources (input/output signals) to be set to Pr.1038 to Pr.1045 from the following table. When a value
other than the ones in the following table is set, "0" (OFF) is applied for indication.
14
Setting Signal Setting Signal
Pr. Remarks Pr. Remarks
value name value name 15
0 — — 101 RUN*1 190
For the details of the signals,
1 STF*1 178 105 FU*1 191 refer to page 250.
2 STR 179
Input status of an external
106 A,B,C 192
16
5 RL*1 180 input terminal 121 DO0 313
6 RM*1 181 For the details of the signals, 122 DO1 314
refer to page 283.
7 RH*1 182 123 DO2 315
Output status of a terminal of 17
9 MRS*1 183 124 DO3 316 the FR-A8AY (option)
11 RES*1 184 125 DO4 317
21 X0 — 126 DO5 318
22 X1 — 127 DO6 319
18
23 X2 — 128 RA1 320
Output status of a terminal of
24 X3 — 129 RA2 321
the FR-A8AR (option)
25 X4 — 130 RA3 322 19
Forward
26 X5 — 152 —
running
Reverse Output status of the signal
27 X6 — 153
running
—
(via communication) 20
28 X7 — Input status of a terminal of 156 NET Y1 193 For the details of the signals,
the FR-A8AX (option) refer to page 250.
29 X8 — 159 NET Y2 194
30 X9 — 160 NET Y3 195
31 X10 — 161 NET Y4 196
32 X11 — 202 NET STF —
33 X12 — 203 NET STR —
34 X13 — 204 NET RL 180
35 X14 — 205 NET RM 181
36 X15 — 206 NET RH 182
37 DY — 208 NET MRS 183 Input status of the signal (via
NET communication)
209 —
JOG2 For the details of the signals,
210 NET X1 185 refer to page 283.
211 NET X2 186
212 NET RES 184
213 NET X3 187
214 NET X4 188
215 NET X5 189
*1 Fixed to OFF state in the Ethernet model.

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.12 Trace function
369
  Trigger setting (Pr.1025, Pr.1035 to Pr.1037, Pr.1046, Pr.1047)
• Set the trigger generating conditions and the trigger target channels.
Pr.1025 Selection of trigger
Trigger generating conditions
setting target channel
0 Tracing starts when inverter enters a fault status (protective function activated) —
1 Tracing starts when analog monitor satisfies trigger conditions Pr.1035
2 Tracing starts when digital monitor satisfies trigger conditions Pr.1046
3 Tracing starts when either of analog or digital monitor satisfies trigger conditions (OR) Pr.1035, Pr.1046
4 Tracing starts when both of analog or digital monitor satisfies trigger conditions (AND) Pr.1035, Pr.1046
• Set the trigger generation conditions for the analog monitor.
Pr.1036
Trigger generation conditions Trigger level setting
setting
Sampling starts when the analog data targeted for the trigger exceeds the value specified
0 Set the trigger level from 600 to
at the trigger level
1400 (-400% to 400%*1) in
Sampling starts when the analog data targeted for the trigger falls below the value specified
1 Pr.1037.
at the trigger level

*1 In Pr.1037, set the number obtained by adding 1,000 to the trigger level.

• Set the trigger generation conditions for the digital monitor.

Pr.1047
Trigger generation conditions
setting
0 Tracing starts when the digital data targeted for the trigger turns ON
1 Tracing starts when the digital data targeted for the trigger turns OFF

 Start of sampling (Pr.1020, Pr.1024)

• Set the trace operation. The trace operation is set in Pr.1020 Trace operation selection.
• When "1" is set in Pr.1020, sampling starts.
• When "2" is set in Pr.1020, it is regarded that a trigger occurs (forced trigger), and the sampling stops and the tracing starts.
• When "3" is set in Pr.1020, sampling stops.
• To start sampling automatically when the power supply at power-ON or at a recovery after an inverter reset, set "1" in
Pr.1024 Sampling auto start.
Pr.1020 setting Operation
0 Sampling standby
1 Sampling start
2 Forced trigger (sampling stop)
3 Sampling stop

 Selection of trace operation by input terminal (TRG signal, TRC signal)

• Trace operation can be selected by signal inputs.
• A forced trigger can be applied when the Trace trigger input (TRG) signal is ON.
• Sampling is started and stopped by the Trace sampling start/end (TRC) signal turning ON and OFF, respectively.
• To input the TRG signal, set "46" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection), and to input the TRC
signal, set "47" to assign the function to a terminal.

NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 Sampling retry
• If any error is found in the trace data, the sampling stops and then restarts (sampling retry).
• If another error is found within a minute from when an error is found, the sampling stops (sampling retry count excess).
• The sampling retry status can be checked by monitoring the trace status.

370 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.12 Trace function
 Monitoring the trace status
• The trace status can be monitored on the operation panel by setting "38" in Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor 11
selection, Pr.774 to Pr.776 (Operation panel monitor selection), or Pr.992 Operation panel setting dial push
monitor selection.
The content depends on the digits on the operation panel. 12

1000s place
Indicates internal RAM state.
1s place
Indicates trace operation.
13
100s place 10s place
Indicates sampling retry state. Indicates trigger state.

Monitor value
Trace status 14
Fourth digit Third digit Second digit First digit
Sampling retry not
0 or no display*1 No trace data in internal RAM
performed
Trigger not detected Tracing stopped

1 Trace data in internal RAM Sampling retry performed Trigger detected Trace operation
15
2 — Sampling retry count excess — —
*1 The value(s) "0" to the left of the leftmost non-zero value is(are) not shown in the monitor display. For example, if no trace data is in internal RAM,
sampling retry is not performed, no trigger is detected, and trace operation is performed, "1" appears. (not "0001") 16
• During trace operation, the Trace status (Y40) signal can be output.
To use the Y40 signal, set "40" (positive logic) or "140" (negative logic) in one of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal 17
function selection) to assign function to an output terminal.

NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
18
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

19
Parameters referred to
Pr.52 Operation panel main monitor selectionpage 228
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 266
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 250
20

14. (A) Application Parameters

14.12 Trace function
371
 MEMO

372 14. (A) Application Parameters

14.12 Trace function
 CHAPTER 15
CHAPTER 15 (G) Control Parameters
4

15.1 Manual torque boost .............................................................................................................................................374

15.2 Base frequency voltage ........................................................................................................................................376
6
15.3 Load pattern selection ..........................................................................................................................................378
15.4 Energy saving control ...........................................................................................................................................380
15.5 SF-PR slip amount adjustment mode ...................................................................................................................381
7
15.6 DC injection brake and zero speed control...........................................................................................................382
15.7 Stop selection .......................................................................................................................................................384
15.8 Regenerative brake selection ...............................................................................................................................386
8
15.9 Regeneration avoidance function .........................................................................................................................390
15.10 Slip compensation ................................................................................................................................................393
15.11 Droop control ........................................................................................................................................................394
9
15.12 Speed smoothing control ......................................................................................................................................395

10

373
 15 (G) Control Parameters
Refer to
Purpose Parameter to set
page
To set the starting torque manually Manual torque boost P.G000, P.G010 Pr.0, Pr.46 374
Base frequency, base frequency P.G001, P.G002,
To set the motor constant Pr.3, Pr.19, Pr.47 376
voltage P.G011
To select the V/F pattern matching the
Load pattern selection P.G003 Pr.14 378
application
To perform energy saving operation Energy saving operation P.G030 Pr.60 380
To compensate the motor slip amount when
SF-PR slip amount adjustment
replacing an SF-JR motor with an SF-PR P.G060, P.G061 Pr.673, Pr.674 381
mode
motor
DC injection brake, zero speed P.G100, P.G101, Pr.10 to Pr.12,
To adjust the motor braking torque 382
control P.G103, P.G110 Pr.850
To coast the motor to a stop Selection of motor stop method P.G106 Pr.250 384
To use the regeneration unit to increase the P.E300, P.G107,
Regenerative brake selection Pr.17, Pr.30, Pr.70 386
motor braking torque P.T720
To avoid overvoltage fault due to Pr.882, Pr.883,
P.G120, P.G121,
regenerative driving by automatic Regeneration avoidance function Pr.885, Pr.886, 390
P.G123 to P.G125
adjustment of output frequency Pr.665
To select the control method Control method selection P.G200, P.G300 Pr.800, Pr.451 86
To secure the low-speed torque by
Slip compensation P.G203 to P.G205 Pr.245 to Pr.247 393
compensating the slip of the motor
Constant output range torque
To select the torque characteristic P.G210 Pr.803 100, 117
characteristic selection
P.G211, P.G212, Pr.820, Pr.821,
To adjust the speed control gain Speed control gain 107
P.G311, P.G312 Pr.830, Pr.831
P.G213, P.G214, Pr.824, P.825,
To adjust the torque control gain Torque control gain 122
P.G313, P.G314 Pr.834, P.835
To perform frequency control appropriate for
Droop control P.G400, P.G401 Pr.286, Pr.287 394
load torque
To suppress the machine resonance Speed smoothing control P.G410, P.G411 Pr.653, Pr.654 395
To adjust the speed gain for Advanced
Speed control gain P.G932, P.G942 Pr.89, Pr.569 90
magnetic flux vector control

15.1 Manual torque boost

V/F

Voltage drop in the low-frequency range can be compensated, improving reduction of the motor torque in the low-speed range.
• Motor torque in the low-frequency range can be adjusted according to the load, increasing the motor torque at the start up.
• By using the RT signal, it is possible to switch between 2 types of torque boost.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

0
G000
Torque boost 2% to 6%*1 0% to 30% Set the output voltage at 0 Hz in %.

46 0% to 30% Set the torque boost value at when the RT signal is ON.
Second torque boost 9999
G010 9999 Without the second torque boost

374 15. (G) Control Parameters

15.1 Manual torque boost
 *1 The initial value differs depending on the inverter capacity as follows. For the LD rating (Pr.570 = "1"), the initial value is changed. (Refer to page
134).

Inverter Initial value

11
FR-E820-0050(0.75K) or lower
6%
FR-E840-0026(0.75K) or lower
FR-E860-0017(0.75K)
FR-E820-0080(1.5K) to FR-E820-0175(3.7K)
5%
12
4%
FR-E840-0040(1.5K) to FR-E840-0095(3.7K)
FR-E820-0240(5.5K) or higher
FR-E840-0120(5.5K) or higher
FR-E860-0027(1.5K) and FR-E860-0040(2.2K)
3% 13
FR-E860-0061(3.7K) or higher 2%

 Starting torque adjustment 14

• Assuming Pr.19 Base frequency voltage is 100%, set the output voltage at 0 Hz to Pr.0 (Pr.46) in percentage.
• Perform the adjustment of the parameter little by little (approximately 0.5%), and confirm the status of the motor each time.
The motor may overheat when the value is set too high. Do not use more than 10% as a guideline. 15
100%

Output
16
voltage

Pr.0
Pr.46
Setting
range
17
0 Output Base
frequency frequency
(Hz)
18
 Setting multiple torque boosts (RT signal, Pr.46)
• When changing the torque boost depending on the application or when using single inverter switching between multiple
motors, use the second torque boost. 19
• Pr.46 Second torque boost is enabled when the RT signal is ON. To input the RT signal, set "3" in any parameter from
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function.

NOTE
20
• The RT signal is the Second function selection signal which also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 289.)
• Set a larger value when the distance between the inverter and the motor is long or when there is not enough motor torque in
the low-speed range. It may cause overcurrent trip when it is set too large.
• Setting for Pr.0 and Pr.46 becomes enabled only when the V/F control is selected.
• When the initial value is set in Pr.0, the Pr.0 setting is automatically changed by changing the Pr.71 Applied motor or Pr.81
Number of motor poles setting. (Refer to page 294.)
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Parameters referred to
Pr.3 Base frequency, Pr.19 Base frequency voltagepage 376
Pr.71 Applied motorpage 294
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283

15. (G) Control Parameters

15.1 Manual torque boost
375
 15.2 Base frequency voltage
V/F

Use this function to adjust the inverter outputs (voltage, frequency) to match with the motor rating.

Initial value*1
Pr. Name Setting range Description
Gr.1 Gr.2
3
Base frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz 0 to 590 Hz Set the frequency at the rated motor torque. (50/60 Hz)
G001
0 to 1000 V Set the base voltage.
19
Base frequency voltage 9999 8888 8888 95% of the power supply voltage
G002
9999 Same as the power supply voltage
47 0 to 590 Hz Set the base frequency when the RT signal is ON.
Second V/F (base frequency) 9999
G011 9999 Second V/F disabled
*1 Gr.1 and Gr.2 are the parameter initial value groups. (Refer to page 82).

 Base frequency setting (Pr.3)

• When operating a standard motor, generally set the rated frequency of the motor in Pr.3 Base frequency. When the motor
operation require switching to the commercial power supply, set the power supply frequency in Pr.3.
• When the frequency described on the motor rating plate is "50 Hz" only, make sure to set to 50 Hz. When it is set to 60 Hz,
the voltage will drop too much, causing insufficient torque. As a result, the inverter output may be shut off due to overload.
A caution is required especially in case of Pr.14 Load pattern selection = "1" (variable torque load).
• When using the Mitsubishi Electric constant torque motor, set Pr.3 to 60 Hz.
Output voltage (V)

Pr.19
Output frequency
(Hz)
Pr.3
Pr.47

 Setting multiple base frequencies (Pr.47)

• To change the base frequency when using a single inverter switching between multiple motors, use Pr.47 Second V/F
(base frequency).
• Pr.47 is enabled when the RT signal is ON. To input the RT signal, set "3" in any parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input
terminal function selection) to assign the function.

NOTE
• The RT signal is the Second function selection signal which also enables other second functions. (Refer to page 289.)

 Setting of base frequency voltage (Pr.19)

• Use Pr.19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage (for example, rated motor voltage).
• When it is set lower than the power supply voltage, maximum output voltage of the inverter will be the voltage set in Pr.19.
• Pr.19 can be used in the following cases.
(a) When regenerative driving (continuous regeneration, etc.) is performed frequently
Output voltage will get higher than the specification during the regenerative driving, which may cause overcurrent trip
(E.OC[]) by the increase in motor current.
(b) When the fluctuation of power supply voltage is high
When the power supply voltage exceeds the rated voltage of the motor, fluctuation of rotation speed or overheating
of motor may occur due to excessive torque or increase in motor current.

376 15. (G) Control Parameters

15.2 Base frequency voltage
 NOTE
• When the Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, or PM sensorless vector control is selected, 11
Pr.3, Pr.47, and Pr.19 are disabled, and Pr.83 and Pr.84 are enabled.
However, S-pattern curve with Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection = "1" (S-pattern acceleration/deceleration
A) enables Pr.3 or Pr.47. (S-pattern curve under PM sensorless vector control is the rated frequency of the motor.)
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
12
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

13
Parameters referred to
Pr.14 Load pattern selectionpage 378
Pr.29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selectionpage 163
Pr.83 Rated motor voltage, Pr.84 Rated motor frequencypage 378
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283 14

15

16

17

18

19

20

15. (G) Control Parameters

15.2 Base frequency voltage
377
 15.3 Load pattern selection
V/F

Optimal output characteristics (V/F characteristics) for application or load characteristics can be selected.

Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
0 For constant-torque load
14 1 For variable-torque load
Load pattern selection 0
G003 2 For constant-torque lift (boost at reverse rotation: 0%)
3 For constant-torque lift (boost at forward rotation: 0%)

 Application for constant-torque load (Pr.14 ="0", initial value)

• The output voltage will change linearly against the output frequency at the base frequency or lower.
• Set this parameter when driving a load that has constant load torque even when the rotation speed is changed, such as
conveyor, dolly, or roll drive.

Pr.14 = 0

100%
Output voltage

Pr. 3 Base frequency

Output frequency (Hz)

Select for constant-torque load (setting value "0") even for fan and pump in the following cases.
• When accelerating a blower with large moment of inertia (J) in a short period of time.
• When it is a constant-torque load such as rotary pump or gear pump.
• When the load torque increases in low speed such as screw pump.

 Application for variable-torque load (Pr.14 ="1")

• The output voltage will change in square curve against the output frequency at the base frequency or lower.
• Set this parameter when driving a load with load torque change proportionally against the square of the rotation speed,
such as a fan or pump.

Pr.14 = 1

100%
Output voltage

Pr. 3 Base frequency

Output frequency (Hz)

 Vertical lift load applications (Pr.14 = "2, 3")

• Set "2" when a vertical lift load is fixed as power driving load at forward rotation and regenerative load at reverse rotation.
• Pr.0 Torque boost is valid during forward rotation, and torque boost is automatically changed to "0%" during reverse
rotation.
• Set "3" for an elevated load that is in the driving mode during reverse rotation and in the regenerative load mode during
forward rotation according to the load weight, e.g. counterweight system.

378 15. (G) Control Parameters

15.3 Load pattern selection
 • Pr.46 Second torque boost is enabled when the RT signal is ON. To input the RT signal, set "3" in any parameter from
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
11
Pr.14 = 2 Pr.14 = 3
For vertical lift loads For vertical lift loads
At forward rotation boost...Pr.0 setting
At reverse rotation boost...0%
At forward rotation boost...0%
At reverse rotation boost...Pr.0 setting
12
100% 100%
Forward Reverse 13
voltage

voltage
Output

Output
rotation rotation

Reverse Forward
Pr.0 rotation Pr.0 rotation 14
Base frequency Base frequency
Output frequency (Hz) Output frequency (Hz)

NOTE 15
• When torque is continuously regenerated as vertical lift load, it is effective to set the rated voltage in Pr.19 Base frequency
voltage to prevent trip due to current at regeneration.

16
Parameters referred to
Pr.0 Torque boostpage 374
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283
17

18

19

20

15. (G) Control Parameters

15.3 Load pattern selection
379
 15.4 Energy saving control
V/F

The inverter will automatically perform energy saving operation without setting detailed parameters.
This control method is suitable for applications such as fans and pumps.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

60 Energy saving 0 Normal operation
0
G030 control selection 9 Optimum excitation control

 Optimum excitation control (Pr.60 = "9")

• Setting Pr.60 = "9" will select the Optimum excitation control.
• The Optimum excitation control is a control method to decide the output voltage by controlling the excitation current so the
efficiency of the motor is maximized.
• Energy saving operation will be enabled under V/F control.

NOTE
• In the Optimum excitation control mode, an energy saving effect is not expected when the motor capacity is extremely small
compared with the inverter capacity or when multiple motors are connected to a single inverter.
• When the Optimum excitation control mode is selected, the deceleration time may become longer than the setting value. Also,
it may cause overvoltage more often compared to constant-torque load characteristics, so set the deceleration time longer.
• When the motor becomes unstable during the acceleration, set the acceleration time longer.
• Output current may increase slightly with the energy saving operation mode or the Optimum excitation control mode since the
output voltage is controlled.

380 15. (G) Control Parameters

15.4 Energy saving control
15.5 SF-PR slip amount adjustment mode 11

V/F

• As compared to our conventional SF-JR motor, the slip amount is small for the high-performance energy-saving SF-PR
12
motor. When replacing the SF-JR to the SF-PR, the slip amount is reduced and the rotations per minute increases.
Therefore, when the SF-PR is used with the same frequency setting as that of the SF-JR, power consumption may
increase as compared to the SF-JR.
13
• By setting the slip amount adjustment mode, the frequency command can be adjusted to keep the rotations per minute of
the SF-PR equivalent to those of the SF-JR for power consumption reduction.
14
Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description
673 SF-PR slip amount adjustment 2, 4, 6 Set the number of SF-PR motor poles.
9999
G060*1 operation selection 9999 The slip amount adjustment is disabled. 15
674 SF-PR slip amount adjustment
100% 0% to 500% Setting is available for fine adjustment of the slip amount.
G061*1 gain
*1 The setting is available only for the 200/400 V class.
• By setting the number of SF-PR motor poles in Pr.673 SF-PR slip amount adjustment operation selection, the SF-PR 16
slip amount adjustment mode is activated.
• The SF-PR slip amount adjustment mode is available only under V/F control.
• Use Pr.674 SF-PR slip amount adjustment gain to fine-tune the rotations per minute. To reduce the rotations per minute 17
(to increase the compensation frequency), set a larger value in Pr.674. To increase the rotations per minute (to reduce the
compensation frequency), set a smaller value in Pr.674. (Lower rotations per minute reduce the power consumption, and
higher rotations per minute increase the power consumption.) 18
NOTE
• The slip amount adjustment is not available in the following conditions.
During acceleration/deceleration, during DC injection brake operation, during PID control, during stall prevention operation,
19
during regeneration avoidance operation, during traverse operation, and while the slip compensation is valid (Pr.245).
• The slip amount adjustment is not available when the applicable motor capacity of the inverter is not compatible with the SF-
PR. (For the details of the applicable motor capacity, refer to the Instruction Manual (Connection).) 20

15. (G) Control Parameters

15.5 SF-PR slip amount adjustment mode
381
 15.6 DC injection brake and zero speed control
• Adjust the braking torque and timing to stop the motor using the DC injection brake.
The zero speed control is available under Real sensorless vector control.
When the DC injection brake operation is used, DC voltage is applied to the motor to prevent rotation of the motor shaft,
and when the zero speed control is used, Vector control is performed to keep 0 r/min. Either way, when a motor shaft is
rotated by external force, it does not go back to the original position.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

10 DC injection brake Set the operation frequency for the DC injection brake (zero speed
3 Hz 0 to 120 Hz
G100 operation frequency control).
0 DC injection brake operation (zero speed control) is not applied.
11 DC injection brake
0.5 s Set the operation time for the DC injection brake (zero speed
G101 operation time 0.1 to 10 s
control).
12 DC injection brake 6% / 4% / Set the DC injection brake voltage (torque). When set to "0", the DC
0% to 30%
G110 operation voltage 1%*1 injection brake is not applied.
850 Brake operation 0 DC injection brake operation is applied.
0
G103 selection 1 Zero speed control (Real sensorless vector control)
*1 The initial value differs depending on the inverter capacity.

Inverter Initial value

FR-E820-0015(0.2K) or lower 6%
FR-E820-0030(0.4K) or higher
4%
FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to FR-E840-0170(7.5K)
FR-E860-0017(0.75K) to FR-E860-0120(7.5K) 1%

 Setting of operating frequency (Pr.10)

• By setting the frequency for DC injection brake operation (zero speed control) to Pr.10 DC injection brake operation
frequency, DC injection brake operation (zero speed control) starts when the frequency reaches the Pr.10 setting during
deceleration.
• The DC injection brake operation frequency depends on the stopping method.
DC injection brake operation
Motor Stopping method Parameter setting
frequency
0.5 Hz or higher in Pr.10 Pr.10 setting
Press the STOP/RESET key on
Lower than 0.5 Hz in Pr.10, and 0.5 Hz or
the operation panel. 0.5 Hz
Induction higher in Pr.13
Turn OFF the STF/STR signal.
motor Lower than 0.5 Hz in both Pr.10 and Pr.13 Pr.10 or Pr.13 setting, whichever larger
Pr.13 setting or 0.5 Hz, whichever
Set frequency to 0 Hz —
smaller
Press the STOP/RESET key on Pr.11 ≠ "0" 0 Hz
the operation panel. Motor coasts at the frequency set in
PM motor Turn OFF the STF/STR signal. Pr.11 = "0"
Pr.10 or lower.
Set frequency to 0 Hz — 0 Hz
• The DC injection brake operation frequency will be fixed to 0 Hz under PM sensorless vector control.
(Hz)
Output
frequency

Pr. 10 Operation
frequency
Time
DC injection Pr.12
brake Operation
voltage voltage
Time

Pr. 11 Operation time

382 15. (G) Control Parameters

15.6 DC injection brake and zero speed control
 Operation time setting (Pr.11)
• Set the operation time for the DC injection brake (zero speed control) in Pr.11 DC injection brake operation time. 11
• When the motor does not stop due to large load moment (J), increase the setting to ensure the effect.
• When Pr.11 = "0", the DC injection brake (zero speed control) does not operate. (The motor starts to coast when the output
frequency drops to the Pr.10 setting or lower at a stop.) 12
 Setting of operation voltage (torque) (Pr.12)
• Set the percentage against the power supply voltage in Pr.12 DC injection brake operation voltage. (The setting is not
used for zero speed control.)
13
• The DC injection brake operation is not available when the setting of Pr.12 is 0%. (The motor starts to coast when the
output frequency drops to the Pr.10 setting or lower at a stop.)
• The Pr.12 setting is disabled under PM sensorless vector control.
14
NOTE
• When the setting of Pr.12 is the initial value, the setting corresponding to the motor is set according to the Pr.71 Applied motor 15
setting. (Refer to page 297.) However, when an energy saving motor (SF-HR or SF-HRCA) is used, change the Pr.12 setting
as shown below.

3.7 kW or lower
Motor capacity
4%
Pr.12 setting
16
5.5 kW or higher 3%

• Even if the setting value of Pr.12 is made larger, braking torque will be limited so the output current will be within the rated
current of the inverter.
17

 Braking operation selection under Real sensorless vector control 18

(Pr.850)
• The braking operation under Real sensorless vector control can be selected between the DC injection brake operation
(initial setting) and zero speed control. 19
By setting Pr.850 Brake operation selection = "1", zero speed control will be performed at the frequency set in Pr.10 DC
injection brake operation frequency or lower.
Control
20
Control method Pr.850 Deceleration stop
mode
V/F control — — DC injection brake
Advanced magnetic flux vector control — — DC injection brake
0 DC injection braking
Speed
1 Zero speed
Real sensorless vector control
0 DC injection braking
Torque
1 Zero speed
PM sensorless vector control Speed — DC injection brake

NOTE
• When restarting the operation after a brake operation under Real sensorless vector control, set Pr.850 = "1" (zero speed
control). Setting "0" (DC injection brake) may cause a delay of about 2 seconds from the time the start up command is input
until it actually is output.

CAUTION
• Install a mechanical brake to make an emergency stop or to stay stopped for a long time.

Parameters referred to
Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 169, page 170
Pr.71 Applied motorpage 294
Pr.80 Motor capacitypage 299
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283

15. (G) Control Parameters

15.6 DC injection brake and zero speed control
383
 15.7 Stop selection
Select the stopping method (deceleration stop or coasting) at turn-OFF of the start signal.
Coasting can be selected for the cases such that the motor is stopped with a mechanical brake at turn-OFF of the start signal.
The operation of the start signal (STF/STR) can be selected. (For the start signal selection, refer to page 291.)

Initial Description
Pr. Name Setting range
value Start signal (STF/STR)*1 Stop operation
The motor coasts to a stop after a
STF signal: Forward rotation start
0 to 100 s lapse of the setting time when the
STR signal: Reverse rotation start
start signal is turned OFF.
The motor coasts to a stop after a
STF signal: Start signal lapse of the (Pr.250 - 1000)
250 1000 to 1100 s
Stop selection 9999 STR signal: Forward/reverse rotation signal seconds when the start signal is
G106
turned OFF.
STF signal: Forward rotation start
9999
STR signal: Reverse rotation start The motor is decelerated to a stop
STF signal: Start signal when the start signal is turned OFF.
8888
STR signal: Forward/reverse rotation signal
*1 For the start signal selection, refer to page 291.

 To decelerate the motor to a stop

• Set Pr.250 = "9999 (initial value) or 8888".
• The motor is decelerated to a stop when the start signal (STF/STR) is turned OFF.

Deceleration starts
Output frequency

when start signal turns OFF

Deceleration time
(Time set in Pr. 8, etc.)
(Hz)

DC brake
Time
Start
ON OFF
signal
RUN
signal ON OFF

 To coast the motor to a stop

• Set the time required to shut off the output after the start signal is turned OFF in Pr.250. When "1000 to 1100" is set, output
is shut off after a lapse of the (Pr.250 - 1000) seconds.
• The output is shut off after a lapse of the setting time of Pr.250 when the start signal is turned OFF. Motor coasts to a stop.
• The RUN signal is turned OFF when the output is shut off.
Output is shut off when
Output frequency

set time elapses after

start signal turns OFF
Pr.250

Motor coasts to stop

(Hz)

Time

Start signal ON OFF

RUN signal ON OFF

384 15. (G) Control Parameters

15.7 Stop selection
 NOTE
• The stop selection setting is disabled when the following functions are operating. 11
Power failure stop function (Pr.261)
PU stop (Pr.75)
Deceleration stop due to communication error (Pr.502)
12
• When Pr.250 ≠ "9999 or 8888", acceleration/deceleration is performed in accordance to the frequency command until the
output is shut off by turning OFF the start signal.
• When the restart signal is turned ON during the motor coasting, the operation is resumed from Pr.13 Starting frequency.
13
Parameters referred to
Pr.7 Acceleration time, Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 158
Pr.13 Starting frequencypage 169, page 170
Pr.75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selectionpage 128
14
Pr.261 Power failure stop selectionpage 362
Pr.502 Stop mode selection at communication error Instruction Manual (Communication)

15

16

17

18

19

20

15. (G) Control Parameters

15.7 Stop selection
385
 15.8 Regenerative brake selection
• When performing frequent start and stop operation, usage rate of the regenerative brake can be increased by using the
optional high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR) or the brake unit (FR-BU2, BU, or FR-BU).
• The multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC in power regeneration mode) or power regeneration common converter
(FR-CV) is used for the continuous operation in the regenerative status. The multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC
in common bus regeneration mode) and high power factor converter (FR-HC2) can also be used to reduce harmonics,
improve power factor, and operate continuously during regenerative driving.

Initial
Pr. Name Setting range Description
value
No regenerative function
Brake resistor (MRS, MYS type)
Brake unit (FR-BU2)
0
Multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC)
Power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)
30 Regenerative function High power factor converter (FR-HC2)
0
E300 selection
Brake resistor (MYS type) used at 100% torque, 6%ED
1
High-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)
When the automatic restart operation after instantaneous
2 power failure function is enabled while a brake resistor and a
regeneration unit is used
70
Special regenerative brake duty 0% 0% to 100% Set the %ED of the built-in brake transistor operation.
G107
0 X10: Normally open input
X10: Normally closed input
MRS: Normally open input
1 (NC contact input
specification)
2 X10: Normally open input
MRS: Normally closed input
17 MRS/X10 terminal input X10: Normally closed input (NC contact input
0 3 (NC contact input
T720 selection specification)
specification)
4 X10: Normally open input External terminal: Normally
closed input (NC contact input
X10: Normally closed input specification)
5 (NC contact input
Communication: Normally
specification)
open input

 When using the brake resistor (MRS, MYS type), brake unit (FR-BU2),
multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC), power regeneration
common converter (FR-CV), and high power factor converter (FR-HC2)
• Set Pr.30 = "0" (initial setting). The Pr.70 setting is invalid. At this time, the regenerative brake duty is as follows.
Inverter Regenerative brake duty
FR-E820-0008(0.1K), FR-E820-0015(0.2K) 0%
FR-E820-0030(0.4K) to FR-E820-0175(3.7K) 3%
FR-E820-0240(5.5K), FR-E820-0330(7.5K)
2%
FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to FR-E840-0170(7.5K)

• When connecting the converter unit (FR-XC, FR-HC2, or FR-CV), assign the Inverter run enable (X10) signal to a contact
input terminal. To ensure coordinated protection of the converter unit, use the Inverter operation enable (X10) signal to
shut off the inverter output. Input the Inverter operation enable (RYB/RDY/RDYB) signal of the converter unit. The X10
signal can be input only via an external input terminal. For the terminal used for the X10 signal input, set "10" (X10) in any
parameter from Pr.178 to Pr.184 to assign the function.

 When using the brake resistor (MYS type) used at 100% torque, 6%ED
(FR-E820-0175(3.7K) only)
• Set Pr.30 = "1".
• Set Pr.70 = "6%".

386 15. (G) Control Parameters

15.8 Regenerative brake selection
 When using the high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR) (FR-E820-0030(0.4K)
or higher, FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to FR-E840-0170(7.5K)) 11
• Set Pr.30 = "1".
• Set Pr.70 = "10%".
12
 When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function is
enabled
• Set Pr.30 = "2" to enable the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function when using the high-duty brake 13
resistor (FR-ABR), brake resistor (MRS, MYS type), brake unit (FR-BU2), multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC),
power regeneration common converter (FR-CV), and high power factor converter (FR-HC2).
• Set Pr.70 as follows. 14
Option used Pr.70 setting Remarks
FR-E820-0030(0.4K) or higher
FR-ABR 10%
FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to FR-E840-0170(7.5K)
FR-E820-0030(0.4K) to FR-E820-0175(3.7K)
15
MRS type, MYS type 3%
FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to FR-E840-0170(7.5K)
MYS type (used at 100% torque / 6%ED) 6% FR-E820-0175(3.7K)
FR-XC, FR-CV, FR-HC2, FR-BU2 0% — 16
• When using the FR-XC or FR-HC2, enable the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function in both the FR-
XC/FR-HC2 and the inverter (Pr.57 Restart coasting time ≠ "9999").
• If the FR-XC or FR-HC2 detects the power failure during inverter running, the motor starts to coast since the Inverter
17
operation enable (RYB or RDY) signal turns ON. After the power is restored and the Inverter operation enable (RYB or
RDY) signal turns OFF, the inverter detects the motor speed (Pr.162 Automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure selection) and restarts operation. 18
 Logic reversing of the Inverter run enable signal (X10 signal, Pr.17)
• Use Pr.17 MRS/X10 terminal input selection to select the X10 signal input specification between normally open (NO 19
contact) and normally closed (NC contact). With the normally closed (NC contact) input specification, the inverter output is
shut off by turning OFF (opening) the X10 signal.
• Change the Pr.17 setting to change the inverter logic (NO/NC contact) according to the logic of the inverter operation 20
enable signal sent from the converter unit.
• The logic of the MRS signal can also be selected by setting Pr.17. Refer to page 287 to select the logic of the MRS signal.
• The response time of the X10 signal is within 2 ms.

Output frequency Motor coasts to stop

Time

X10 signal (Pr.17=0, 2, 4) ON

X10 signal (Pr.17=1, 3, 5) OFF

• Relationship between Pr.17 and the Inverter run enable signal of each option unit
Corresponding signals of the option unit
Pr.17 setting Operation according to the X10 signal status
FR-HC2 FR-CV FR-XC
RDY (negative logic)
0/2/4 (initial values) RDYB RYB X10-ON: Inverter output shutoff (NO contact)
(initial setting)
1, 3, 5 RDY (positive logic) RDYA RYA X10-OFF: Inverter output shutoff (NC contact)

15. (G) Control Parameters

15.8 Regenerative brake selection
387
 NOTE
• When Pr.30 = "0 or 2" and the X10 signal is not assigned to an input terminal, the MRS signal can be used as the X10 signal.
The logic of the signal depends on that of the MRS signal (normally open input when Pr.17 = "0 or 1", and normally closed
input when Pr.17 = "2 to 5").
• The MRS signal is valid from either of communication or external, but when the MRS signal is to be used as the Inverter run
enable (X10) signal, it must be input from external.
• When the terminal assignment is changed with Pr.178 to Pr.184 (Input terminal function selection), wiring may be mistaken
due to different terminal name and signal contents, or may affect other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function
of each terminal.

 Regenerative brake duty warning output and the warning signal (RBP
signal)
• When the regenerative brake duty reaches 85% of the Pr.70 setting, "RB" is indicated on the operation panel and the
Regenerative brake prealarm signal (RBP) signal is output. When it reaches 100% of the Pr.70 setting, it will become
regenerative overvoltage (E.OV[]).
• The inverter output is not shut off with the warning signal.
• For the terminal to be used for the RBP signal output, set "7" (positive logic) or "107" (negative logic) to one of Pr.190 to
Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection), and assign the function.

100%: Regeneration overvoltage protection operation value

Ratio of brake duty 100%
to the Pr. 70 setting 85%

Regenerative Time
brake pre-alarm OFF ON ON
(RBP)

NOTE
• When Pr.30 = "0" (initial value), "RB" is not indicated.
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 Connection of a brake resistor other than the FR-ABR, MRS type, and
MYS type
A brake resistor can be used with the FR-E820-0030(0.4K) to FR-E820-0330(7.5K), FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to FR-E840-
0170(7.5K), and FR-E860-0017(0.75K) to FR-E860-0120(7.5K).

388 15. (G) Control Parameters

15.8 Regenerative brake selection
Use a brake resistor that has resistance and power consumption values higher than the following. Also, the brake resistor must
have a sufficient capacity to consume the regenerative power.
11
Voltage Minimum resistance Power consumption
Inverter
class (Ω) (kW)
FR-E820-0030(0.4K) 100 1.5
FR-E820-0050(0.75K) 80 1.9 12
FR-E820-0080(1.5K) 60 2.5
200 V class FR-E820-0110(2.2K) 60 2.5
FR-E820-0175(3.7K) 40 3.8 13
FR-E820-0240(5.5K) 25 6.1
FR-E820-0330(7.5K) 20 7.6
FR-E840-0016(0.4K) 371 1.6
FR-E840-0026(0.75K) 236 2.4 14
FR-E840-0040(1.5K) 205 2.8
400 V class FR-E840-0060(2.2K) 180 3.2
FR-E840-0095(3.7K)
FR-E840-0120(5.5K)
130
94
4.4
6.1
15
FR-E840-0170(7.5K) 67 8.6
FR-E860-0017(0.75K) 350 2.4
FR-E860-0027(1.5K) 300 2.8 16
FR-E860-0040(2.2K) 260 3.3
575 V class
FR-E860-0061(3.7K) 190 4.5
FR-E860-0090(5.5K)
FR-E860-0120(7.5K)
140
100
6.1
8.5
17
*1 The resistance should be 200 Ω or more at 100% ED. The following shows the brake duty when the resistance is less than 200 Ω.

Brake duty (% ED) 120 18

100% ED (at 200 Ω or more)
100
80
60
FR-E820-0050(0.75K)
(80 Ω at minimum) 19
40 30%ED
30 FR-E820-0030(0.4K)
20
20
(100 Ω at minimum)
0
60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220
Minimum brake resistance (Ω)

Set parameters as follows:

• Pr.30 Regenerative function selection = "1"
• Set Pr.70 Special regenerative brake duty according to the amount and frequency of the regenerative driving, and make
sure that the resistor can consume the regenerative power properly.
• When the regenerative brake transistor is damaged, install a thermal relay to prevent overheat and burnout of the brake
resistor. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Connection) to install a thermal relay.) Properly select a thermal relay according
to the regenerative driving frequency or the rated power or resistance of the brake resistor.

CAUTION
• If the resistor selection is incorrect, overcurrent may damage the inverter built-in brake transistor. Besides, the resistor
may be burned due to overheat.
• If the selection of the thermal relay is incorrect, the resistor may be burned due to overheat.

Parameters referred to
Pr.57 Restart coasting timepage 351, page 356
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)page 283
Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection)page 250

15. (G) Control Parameters

15.8 Regenerative brake selection
389
 15.9 Regeneration avoidance function
The regenerative status can be detected and avoided by raising the frequency.
• The operation frequency is automatically increased to prevent the regenerative operations. This function is useful when a
load is forcibly rotated by another fan in the duct.

Setting
Pr. Name Initial value Description
range
0 The regeneration avoidance function is disabled.
Regeneration
882 1 The regeneration avoidance function is always enabled.
avoidance operation 0
G120 The regeneration avoidance function is enabled only during
selection 2
constant-speed operation.
200 V Set the bus voltage level to operate the regeneration avoidance
400 VDC
class operation. When the bus voltage level is set low, it will be harder
Regeneration 400 V to generate overvoltage error, but actual deceleration time will
883 780 VDC 300 to 1200 V be longer.
avoidance operation class
G121
level Set the setting value higher than the (power supply voltage ×
575 V
944 VDC
class √2 ) value.
Regeneration Set the limit value for frequency to rise when the regeneration
0 to 45 Hz
885 avoidance avoidance function is activated.
6 Hz
G123 compensation
9999 The frequency limit is disabled.
frequency limit value
886 Regeneration Adjust the response during the regeneration avoidance
100% 0% to 200%
G124 avoidance voltage gain operation. Increasing the setting improves the response to
Regeneration change in the bus voltage. However, the output frequency may
665 become unstable. If setting a smaller value in Pr.886 does not
avoidance frequency 100% 0% to 200%
G125
gain suppress the vibration, set a smaller value in Pr.665.

 Regeneration avoidance operation (Pr.882, Pr.883)

• When the regenerative voltage increases, the DC bus voltage will rise, which may cause an overvoltage fault (E.OV[]). The
regenerative status can be avoided by detecting this rise of bus voltage, and raising the frequency when the bus voltage
level exceeds Pr.883 Regeneration avoidance operation level.
• The regeneration avoidance operation can be selected to operate constantly or operate only during constant speed.
• The regeneration avoidance function is enabled by setting "1 or 2" in Pr.882 Regeneration avoidance operation
selection.

Regeneration avoidance operation Regeneration avoidance operation Regeneration avoidance operation

example for constant speed example for deceleration
example for acceleration
Bus voltage
Bus voltage

Pr. 883
(VDC)

Pr. 883
(VDC)
Bus voltage

Pr. 883
(VDC)

Time
frequency(Hz)

Time
frequency(Hz)

Output

Time
Output
frequency(Hz)
Output

During regeneration
avoidance function operation During regeneration
avoidance function operation Time
Time
During regeneration Time
avoidance function operation

390 15. (G) Control Parameters

15.9 Regeneration avoidance function
 NOTE
• The slope of frequency rising or lowering by the regeneration avoidance operation will change depending on the regenerative 11
status.

• The DC bus voltage of the inverter will be approximately √2 times of the normal input voltage.
The bus voltage is approx. 311 VDC at an input voltage of 220 VAC (622 VDC at 440 VAC and 813 VDC at 575 VAC). 12
However, it may vary depending on the input power supply waveform.
• Make sure that the setting value of Pr.883 will not get under DC bus voltage level. The frequency will rise with operation of the
regeneration avoidance function even during operation other than the regenerative operation.
• The stall prevention (overvoltage) (OLV) will be activated only during deceleration, stopping the lowering of output frequency.
13
On the other hand, the regeneration avoidance function will be activated constantly (Pr.882 = "1") or only at constant speed
(Pr.882 = "2"), and raise the frequency depending on the amount of regeneration.
• When the motor becomes unstable due to the stall prevention (overcurrent) (OLC) during the regeneration avoidance 14
operation, increase the deceleration time or set a lower value in Pr.883.

 Limiting the regeneration avoidance operation frequency (Pr.885) 15

• It is possible to assign a limit to the output frequency corrected (rise) by the regeneration avoidance operation.
• Limit of the frequency is output frequency (frequency before regeneration avoidance operation) + Pr.885 Regeneration
avoidance compensation frequency limit value for during acceleration and constant speed. During deceleration, when 16
the frequency increases due to the regeneration avoidance operation and exceeds the limit value, the limit value will be
retained until the output frequency is reduced to be the half the Pr.885 setting.
• When the frequency that have increased by the regeneration avoidance operation exceeds Pr.1 Maximum frequency, it 17
will be limited to the maximum frequency.
• When Pr.885 = "9999", the regeneration avoidance compensation frequency limit is disabled.
• Set the frequency around the motor rated slip frequency. Increase the setting value if the overvoltage protection function 18
(E.OV[]) is activated at the start of deceleration.

Rated motor slip frequency =

Synchronized speed at the time of base frequency – rated rotation speed
Synchronized speed at the time of base frequency
× Rated motor frequency 19
Limit level
frequency(Hz)

Output frequency (Hz) 20

Output

Pr.885

Pr.885/2
Time

 Adjusting the regeneration avoidance operation (Pr.665, Pr.886)

• If the frequency becomes unstable during regeneration avoidance operation, decrease the setting of Pr.886 Regeneration
avoidance voltage gain. On the other hand, if an overvoltage fault occurs due to a sudden regeneration, increase the
setting.
• If setting a smaller value in Pr.886 does not suppress the vibration, set a smaller value in Pr.665 Regeneration avoidance
frequency gain.

NOTE
• During the regeneration avoidance operation, the stall prevention (overvoltage) "OLV" is displayed and the Overload warning
(OL) signal is output. Set the operation pattern at an OL signal output using Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection.
Use Pr.157 OL signal output timer to set the OL signal output timing.
• The stall prevention is enabled even during regeneration avoidance operation.
• The regeneration avoidance function cannot decrease the actual deceleration time for the motor to stop. Since the actual
deceleration time is determined by the regenerative power consumption performance, consider using a regeneration unit (FR-
BU2, BU, FR-BU, FR-XC, FR-CV, FR-HC2) or brake resistor (FR-ABR, etc.) to decrease the deceleration time.
• When using a regeneration unit (FR-BU2, BU, FR-BU, FR-XC, FR-CV, FR-HC2) or brake resistor (FR-ABR, etc.) to consume
the regenerative power at constant speed, set Pr.882 = "0 (initial value)" (the regeneration avoidance function is disabled).
When consuming the regenerative power at the time of deceleration with the regeneration unit, etc., set Pr.882 = "2" (enables
regeneration avoidance function only at the constant speed).

15. (G) Control Parameters

15.9 Regeneration avoidance function
391
 Parameters referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequencypage 211
Pr.8 Deceleration timepage 211
Pr.22 Stall prevention operation levelpage 214

392 15. (G) Control Parameters

15.9 Regeneration avoidance function
15.10 Slip compensation 11

V/F

Under V/F control, the slip of the motor is estimated from the inverter output current to maintain the rotation of the motor
12
constant.

Pr. Name Initial value

Setting
Description
13
range
0.01% to
245 Set the rated motor slip.
Rated slip 9999 50%
G203
0, 9999 No slip compensation 14
Set the response time of the slip compensation. Reducing the
246 Slip compensation time
0.5 s 0.01 to 10 s value improves the response, but the regenerative overvoltage
G204 constant
(E.OV[]) error is more likely to occur with a larger load inertia.
No slip compensation in the constant power range (frequency
15
247 Constant output range slip 0
9999 range higher than the frequency set in Pr.3).
G205 compensation selection
9999 Slip compensation is performed in the constant power range.
• Calculate the rated motor slip and set the value in Pr.245 to enable slip compensation. 16
Slip compensation is not performed when Pr.245 = "0 or 9999".
Synchronized speed at the time of base frequency - rated rotation speed
Rated slip =
Synchronized speed at the time of base frequency
× 100 [%]
17
NOTE
• When the slip compensation is performed, the output frequency may become larger than the set frequency. Set Pr.1 Maximum
frequency higher than the set frequency. 18
• Slip compensation will be disabled in the following conditions:
Stall prevention (OLC, OLV) operation, regeneration avoidance operation, auto tuning, stop-on-contact control, acceleration/
deceleration 19
Parameters referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequencypage 211
Pr.3 Base frequencypage 376
20

15. (G) Control Parameters

15.10 Slip compensation
393
 15.11 Droop control
Magnetic flux Sensorless PM
This is a function to give droop characteristics to the speed by balancing the load in proportion with the load torque during the
Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, and PM sensorless vector control.
This is effective in balancing the load when multiple inverters are connected.

Pr. Name Initial value Setting range Description

0 Normal operation
286 Droop control enabled.
Droop gain 0%
G400 0.1% to 100% Set the droop amount at the time of rated torque as % value of
the rated motor frequency.
287
Droop filter time constant 0.3 s 0 to 1 s Set the time constant of the filter relative to the torque current.
G401

 Droop control
• Droop control is enabled under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, and PM sensorless
vector control.
• In the droop control, the speed command changes depending on the amount of the current for torque.

Frequency
Droop compensation
frequency
Rated frequency
Droop
gain

-100% 0 100% Torque

• The droop compensation frequency is calculated as follows.

Current for torque after filtering Pr.84 Rated motor frequency × Pr.286 Droop gain
Droop compensation frequency = ×K×
Rated torque current 100

When the output frequency is equal to or lower than the rated frequency set in Pr.84: K = 1
Rated frequency (Pr.84)
When the output frequency is higher than the rated frequency set in Pr.84: K = Output frequency

• The droop compensation frequency is limited as follows.

Control Upper limit Lower limit
Advanced magnetic flux vector control 0.5 Hz
400 Hz or Pr.1 Maximum frequency, whichever is smaller
Real sensorless vector control 0 Hz
Maximum motor frequency or Pr.1 Maximum frequency,
(PM sensorless vector control) 10% of rated motor frequency
whichever is smaller

NOTE
• Set the droop gain equivalent to the rated slip of the motor.
Synchronized speed at the time of base frequency - rated rotation speed
Rated slip = × 100[%]
Synchronized speed at the time of base frequency
• Droop control is disabled in the following conditions:
During DC injection brake operation, during PID control, during stall prevention operation, during traverse operation

Parameters referred to
Pr.1 Maximum frequencypage 211
Pr.178 to Pr.189 Input terminal function selection page 283

394 15. (G) Control Parameters

15.11 Droop control
15.12 Speed smoothing control 11

12
V/F Magnetic flux
The output current (torque) of the inverter sometimes becomes unstable due to vibration caused by mechanical resonance.
Such vibration can be suppressed by reducing fluctuation of the output current (torque) by changing the output frequency.

Pr. Name Initial value

Setting
Description
13
range
653 Speed smoothing Check the effect by increasing and decreasing the value at around
0% 0% to 200%
G410 control 100%.
654 Speed smoothing 14
20 Hz 0 to 120 Hz Set the minimum frequency for the torque variation cycle.
G411 cutoff frequency

 Control block diagram

15
Acceleration/deceleration
processing

+ Output frequency
16
Speed Frequency output
V/F control
command Voltage output
-
Speed smoothing control
Cutoff frequency
Pr.654
17
Proportional gain
Current for torque
Pr.653

18
 Setting method
• When vibration caused by mechanical resonance occurs, set 100% in Pr.653 Speed smoothing control, perform
operation at the frequency with the largest vibration, and check if the vibration is suppressed after few seconds. 19
• If the setting is not effective, gradually increase the value set in Pr.653 and repeat the operation to check the effect to
determine the most effective value (Pr.653).
• If the vibration increases by increasing the value in Pr.653, decrease the value in Pr.653 from 100% to check the effect. 20
• When the vibrational frequency at which mechanical resonance occurs (during fluctuation of torque, speed, or converter
output voltage) is measured using an instrument such as a tester, set 1/2 to 1 times of the vibrational frequency in Pr.654
Speed smoothing cutoff frequency. (Setting the resonance frequency range mitigates vibration more effectively.)
Cutoff frequency
Current for
torque

Torque fluctuation
detection range

0 Pr.654 159Hz (fixed) Vibrational frequency

NOTE
• Depending on the equipment, the vibration may not be suppressed sufficiently or the setting is not effective.

15. (G) Control Parameters

15.12 Speed smoothing control
395
 MEMO

396 15. (G) Control Parameters

15.12 Speed smoothing control
 CHAPTER 16
CHAPTER 16 Checking and Clearing of
Settings 4

16.1 Parameter clear / All parameter clear ...................................................................................................................398

16.2 List of parameters changed from the initial values ...............................................................................................399
6
16.3 Fault history clear .................................................................................................................................................400

10

397
 16 Checking and Clearing of Settings
16.1 Parameter clear / All parameter clear

• Set "1" to Pr.CL Parameter clear or ALLC All parameter clear to initialize the parameter. (The parameter cannot be cleared
when Pr.77 Parameter write selection = "1".)
• Pr.CL does not clear calibration parameters or the terminal function selection parameters.
• Refer to the parameter list on page 50 for parameters cleared with this operation.

Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Changing the operation mode

Press the PU/EXT key to choose the PU operation mode. The PU LED turns ON.

3. Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)

4. Selecting the parameter

Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until "Pr.CL" appears for Parameter clear or "ALLC" for All
parameter clear, and press the SET key. "0" (initial value) appears.

5. Parameter clear
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key to change the value to "1". Press the SET key to confirm the setting.
"1" and "Pr.CL" ("ALLC") are displayed alternately after parameters are cleared.
• Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key to read another parameter.
• Press the SET key to show the setting again.
• Press the SET key twice to show the next parameter.

Description
Setting
Pr.CL Parameter clear ALLC All parameter clear
0 Initial display (Parameters are not cleared.)
The settings of all the parameters, including calibration
The settings of parameters except for calibration parameters
1 parameters and terminal function selection parameters, are
and terminal function selection parameters are initialized.
initialized.

NOTE
• "1" and "Er4" are displayed alternately when the operation mode is other than the PU operation mode.
1) Press the PU/EXT key.
The PU LED turns ON, and "1" appears on the monitor. (When Pr.79 ="0" (initial value))
2) Press the SET key to clear the parameter.

• Stop the inverter first. Writing error occurs if parameter clear is attempted while the inverter is running.
• To clear the parameter, the inverter must be in the PU operation mode even if "2" is set to Pr.77.
• For availability of the Parameter clear or All parameter clear operation for each parameter, refer to the parameter list on page
406.

398 16. Checking and Clearing of Settings

16.1 Parameter clear / All parameter clear
16.2 List of parameters changed from the initial values 11
Parameters changed from their initial values can be displayed.
12
Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode. 13
2. Selecting the parameter setting mode
Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)
14
3. Selecting the parameter
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until "Pr.CH" (Initial value change list) appears, and set the SET key.
"P.---" blinks and then remains displayed. 15
4. Checking the Initial value change list
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key after blinking stops to display the parameter numbers that have
been changed from their initial values in order. 16
● When the SET key is pressed with a changed parameter displayed, the parameter settings can be changed as
they are. (Parameter numbers are no longer displayed in the list when they are returned to their initial values.)
Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key to display another changed parameter. 17
● The indication returns to "P.---" when the last changed parameter is displayed.

NOTE
• Calibration parameters (C0 to C7, C38 to C45) are not displayed even when these are changed from the initial settings.
18
• Only the simple mode parameters are displayed when the simple mode is set (Pr.160 ="9999").
• Only user groups are displayed when user groups are set (Pr.160 = "1").
• Pr.160 is displayed independently of whether the setting value is changed or not. 19

20

16. Checking and Clearing of Settings

16.2 List of parameters changed from the initial values
399
 16.3 Fault history clear

 Fault history clearing procedure

• Set Er.CL Fault history clear = "1" to clear the fault history.

Operating procedure
1. Turning ON the power of the inverter
The operation panel is in the monitor mode.

2. Selecting the parameter setting mode

Press the MODE key to choose the parameter setting mode. (The parameter number read previously appears.)

3. Selecting the parameter

Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key until "ER.CL" (Fault history clear) appears. Press the SET key to
read the present set value. "0" (initial value) appears.

4. Fault history clear

Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key to change the value to "1". Press the SET key to start clearing.
"1" and "ER.CL" are displayed alternately after the fault history is cleared.
• Turn the setting dial or press the UP/DOWN key to read another parameter.
• Press the SET key to show the setting again.
• Press the SET key twice to show the next parameter.

400 16. Checking and Clearing of Settings

16.3 Fault history clear
 CHAPTER 17
CHAPTER 17 Appendix
4

17.1 For customers replacing the conventional model with this inverter ......................................................................402
17.2 Specification comparison between PM sensorless vector control and induction motor control............................405
6
17.3 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods....................................................406

10

401
 17 Appendix
APPENDIX provides the reference information for use of this product.
Refer to APPENDIX as required.

17.1 For customers replacing the conventional model

with this inverter

17.1.1 Replacement of the FR-E700 series

 Differences and compatibility with the FR-E700 series
Item FR-E800 FR-E700
Applicable rating Two ratings (LD/ND) Not available (ND only)
ND rating 150% 60 s, 200% 3 s at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
Overload
120% 60 s, 150% 3 s at surrounding air temperature
current rating LD rating Not available
of 50°C
Provided in FR-E820-0030(0.4K) to 0330(7.5K),
Provided in FR-E720-030(0.4K) to 330(7.5K),
Built-in brake transistor FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to 0170(7.5K),
FR-E740-016(0.4K) to 170(7.5K)
FR-E860-0017(0.75K) to 0120(7.5K)
— Soft-PWM control / High carrier frequency PWM control
V/F control Available
Advanced
magnetic flux Available
vector control

Control method General-purpose

magnetic flux Not available Available
vector control
Real sensorless
Available Not available
vector control
PM sensorless
Available Not available
vector control
Speed control Available
Control mode
Torque control Available Not available
0.2 to 590 Hz (under V/F control)
Output frequency 0.2 to 400 Hz
0.2 to 400 Hz (under other than V/F control)
0.015 Hz / 0 to 60 Hz (0 to 10 V / 12 bits)
0.06 Hz / 0 to 60 Hz (0 to 10 V / 10 bits)
Terminal 2 0.03 Hz / 0 to 60 Hz (0 to 5 V / 11 bits)
Frequency 0.12 Hz / 0 to 60 Hz (0 to 5 V / 9 bits)
0.03 Hz / 0 to 60 Hz (0 to 20 mA / 11 bits)
setting
0.015 Hz / 0 to 60 Hz (0 to 10 V / 12 bits) 0.06 Hz / 60 Hz (0 to 10 V / 10 bits)
resolution
Terminal 4 0.03 Hz / 0 to 60 Hz (0 to 5 V / 11 bits) 0.12 Hz / 60 Hz (0 to 5 V / 9 bits)
0.03 Hz / 0 to 60 Hz (0 to 20 mA / 11 bits) 0.06 Hz / 60 Hz (0 to 20 mA / 10 bits)
Via terminal FM
1440 pulses/s at full scale (FM type only) 1440 pulses/s at full scale (FR-E700)
(pulse output)
Output signal
Via terminal AM
-10 to +10 V / 12 bits (AM type only) 0 to +10 V (FR-E700-NA/EC/CHT)
(analog output)
Standard Operation panel installed as standard (not removable).
equipment 7-segment LED 4-digit display.
Operation panel
Enclosure surface operation panel (FR-PA07)
Option Enclosure surface operation panel (FR-PA07)
Parameter unit (FR-PU07(BB))
Main circuit terminals R, S, T, U, V, W, P, PR, N, P1, earth (ground) (screw terminal)

402 17. Appendix

17.1 For customers replacing the conventional model with this inverter
 Item FR-E800 FR-E700

Shape of
Spring clamp type
Standard control circuit terminal model: screw
type
11
terminal block
Safety stop function model: Spring clamp type
Standard model: 7 Standard control circuit terminal model: 7
Contact input

Analog input
Ethernet model: 2
2
Safety stop function model: 6
2
12
Control circuit
Relay output 1 1
terminal
Open collector Standard model: 2
2
output Ethernet model: 0 13
Pulse output 1 (FM type only) 1 (FR-E700)
Analog output 1 (AM type only) 1 (FR-E700-NA/EC/CHT)
Safety input/
output
S1, S2, SIC, SO, SOC S1, S2, PC (safety stop function model only)
14
2 ports (Ethernet model)
1 port (FR-E700-NE only)
CC-Link IE TSN, CC-Link IE Field Network Basic,
Ethernet CC-Link IE Field Network Basic and MODBUS/
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, MODBUS/TCP, and

Communication
BACnet/IP
TCP
15
1 port (standard model) 1 port
RS-485
Mitsubishi inverter protocol, MODBUS RTU Mitsubishi inverter protocol, MODBUS RTU
Mini B connector: USB bus power available
USB
(Maximum SCCR: 500 mA)
Mini B connector: USB bus power unavailable 16
200/400 V class: -20°C to +60°C (Derate the rated
current when using the inverter in a temperature of
50°C or higher.)
Surrounding air temperature
575 V class: -10°C to +60°C (Derate the rated
-10°C to +50°C 17
current when using the inverter in a temperature of
50°C or higher.)
Storage temperature -40°C to +70°C -20°C to +65°C
Plug-in option Dedicated plug-in options (not interchangeable) 18
Compatible (Use the installation interchange attachment for replacement of the FR-E720-175(3.7K)
Installation size
and FR-E740-016(0.4K) to 040(1.5K).)
Panel through attachment Not compatible
The rotation speed is displayed when Pr.53 = "1".
19
The machine speed is displayed when Pr.53 = "4". The machine speed is displayed when Pr.37 ≠
Machine speed display
Use Pr.37 and Pr.505 to set the reference for "0".

Built-in potentiometer switching

machine speed.
Pr.146 unavailable (PA02 not supported) Pr.146 available
20
Control mode selection V/F control when "40" is set in Pr.800. V/F control when "9999" is set in Pr.80 or Pr.81.
Use Pr.17 to change the input specifications of the Use Pr.17 to change the input specification of
MRS input selection
MRS and X10 signals. the MRS signal.
Set Pr.96 = "11" to enable offline auto tuning for V/ Set Pr.96 = "21" to enable offline auto tuning for
Offline auto tuning F control (frequency search for the automatic restart V/F control (frequency search for the automatic
after instantaneous power failure). restart after instantaneous power failure).
Offline auto tuning is enabled regardless of the Set Pr.71 to a value whose last digit is 3 to
Pr.71 setting. enable offline auto tuning.
Applicable motor Set Pr.71 to a value whose last digit is 3 to change Set Pr.71 to a value whose last digit is 4 to read
the setting range of the motor constant. offline auto tuning data and change the setting.
Set "10" for the constant-torque motor. Set "1" for the constant-torque motor.
The setting range cannot be changed from "0 to
Increment/range of acceleration/ The setting range can be changed to "0 to 360
3600 s" even when the increment is 0.01 s (Pr.21 =
deceleration time s" when the increment is 0.01 s (Pr.21 = "1").
"1").

 Installation precautions
• Removal procedure of the front cover is different. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Connection).)
• Plug-in options of the FR-E700 series are not compatible.

 Wiring instructions
• When the FR-E700 standard control circuit terminal model is replaced, the terminal block type is changed from the screw
type to the spring clamp type. Use of blade terminals is recommended.
• To use the PU connector, note that wiring methods are different. (Refer to the Instruction Manual (Connection).)

17. Appendix
17.1 For customers replacing the conventional model with this inverter
403
 17.1.2 Replacement of the FR-E500 series
 Installation precautions
• Installation size is compatible. (Use the installation interchange attachment for replacement of the FR-E520-3.7K and
E540-0.4K to 1.5K.)
• Operation panel (PA02) cannot be used.

404 17. Appendix

17.1 For customers replacing the conventional model with this inverter
17.2 Specification comparison between PM sensorless 11
vector control and induction motor control
12
Item PM sensorless vector control Induction motor control
Applicable motor IPM motor or SPM motor*1 Induction motor*1
200% (FR-E820-0175(3.7K) or lower, FR-E840-
13
0095(3.7K) or lower, FR-E860-0061(3.7K) or lower)
Starting torque 50% and 150% (FR-E820-0240(5.5K) or higher, FR-E840-
0120(5.5K) or higher, FR-E860-0090(5.5K) or higher)
under Real sensorless vector control 14
Startup delay of about 0.1 s for magnetic pole position No startup delay (when online auto tuning is not performed
Startup delay
detection. at startup).
Driving by the
commercial Cannot be driven by the commercial power supply.
Can be driven by the commercial power supply. (Other 15
than vector control dedicated motor.)
power supply
Operation during While the motor is coasting, potential is generated across While the motor is coasting, potential is not generated
coasting
Torque control
motor terminals.
Not available
across motor terminals.
Real sensorless vector control
16
*1 For the motor capacity, the rated motor current should be equal to or less than the rated inverter current. (Note that the motor rated current should
be 0.4 kW or higher (0.1 kW or higher for the 200 V class).)
If a motor with substantially low rated current compared with the inverter rated current is used, speed and torque accuracies may deteriorate due
to torque ripples, etc. Set the rated motor current to about 40% or higher of the inverter rated current.
17
NOTE
• Before wiring, make sure that the motor is stopped. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
• Never connect a PM motor to a commercial power supply.
18
• No slippage occurs with a PM motor because of its characteristic. If an IPM motor, which took over an induction motor, is driven
at the same speed as for the general-purpose motor, the running speed of the IPM motor becomes faster by the amount of
the general-purpose motor's slippage. Adjust the speed command to run the IPM motor at the same speed as the induction 19
motor, as required.

20

17. Appendix
17.2 Specification comparison between PM sensorless vector control and induction motor control
405
 17.3 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes
under different control methods
*1 Instruction codes are used to read and write parameters in accordance with communication (such as the Mitsubishi inverter protocol). (For details
of communication, refer to the Instruction Manual (Communication).)
*2 Function availability under each control method is shown as follows:
○: Available
×: Not available
Δ: Available with some restrictions
*3 For Parameter copy, Parameter clear, and All parameter clear, ○ indicates the function is available, and × indicates the function is not available.
*4 Communication parameters that are not cleared by parameter clear or all parameter clear (H5A5A or H55AA) via communication. (For details of
communication, refer to the Instruction Manual (Communication).)
*5 When a communication option is installed, parameter clear (lock release) during password lock (Pr.297 Password lock/unlock ≠ ”9999”) can be
performed only from the communication option.
Notation
Mark Description Mark Description
Available for the FM type inverter (standard model). Available for the 200 V class inverters.
Available for the AM (50 Hz) type inverter (standard model). Available for the 400 V class inverters.
Available for the AM (60 Hz) type inverter (standard model). Available when the FR-A8AX is installed.
Available for the Ethernet model. Available when the FR-A8AY is installed.
Available when the FR-A8AR is installed.
Available for the Protocol group A (Ethernet model).
Available when the FR-A8NC is installed.

Instruction
Control method*2 Parameter
code*1
Sensorless PM

All clear*3
Extended

Pr. Name
Magnetic flux

Clear*3
Write

V/F
Read

Torque
Speed

Speed
0 Torque boost 00 80 0 ○ × × × × ○ ○
1 Maximum frequency 01 81 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 Minimum frequency 02 82 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
3 Base frequency 03 83 0 ○ × × × × ○ ○
4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 04 84 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) 05 85 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) 06 86 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
7 Acceleration time 07 87 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
8 Deceleration time 08 88 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
9 Electronic thermal O/L relay 09 89 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
10 DC injection brake operation frequency 0A 8A 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
11 DC injection brake operation time 0B 8B 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
12 DC injection brake operation voltage 0C 8C 0 ○ ○ × × × ○ ○
13 Starting frequency 0D 8D 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
14 Load pattern selection 0E 8E 0 ○ × × × × ○ ○
15 Jog frequency 0F 8F 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time 10 90 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
17 MRS/X10 terminal input selection 11 91 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
18 High speed maximum frequency 12 92 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
19 Base frequency voltage 13 93 0 ○ × × × × ○ ○
20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency 14 94 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments 15 95 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
22 Stall prevention operation level (Torque limit level) 16 96 0 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
Stall prevention operation level compensation
23 17 97 0 ○ ○ × × × ○ ○
factor at double speed
24 Multi-speed setting (speed 4) 18 98 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
25 Multi-speed setting (speed 5) 19 99 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
26 Multi-speed setting (speed 6) 1A 9A 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
27 Multi-speed setting (speed 7) 1B 9B 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

406 17. Appendix

17.3 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
 Instruction
Control method*2 Parameter
code*1
Sensorless PM 11

All clear*3
Extended
Pr. Name

Magnetic flux

Clear*3
Write

V/F
Read

Torque
Speed

Speed
12
29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection 1D 9D 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
30 Regenerative function selection 1E 9E 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
31 Frequency jump 1A 1F 9F 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 13
32 Frequency jump 1B 20 A0 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
33 Frequency jump 2A 21 A1 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
34 Frequency jump 2B 22 A2 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
35 Frequency jump 3A 23 A3 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 14
36 Frequency jump 3B 24 A4 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
37 Speed display 25 A5 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
40 RUN key rotation direction selection 28 A8 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 15
41 Up-to-frequency sensitivity 29 A9 0 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
42 Output frequency detection 2A AA 0 ○ ○ ○ Δ ○ ○ ○
43 Output frequency detection for reverse rotation 2B AB 0 ○ ○ ○ Δ ○ ○ ○
44 Second acceleration/deceleration time 2C AC 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 16
45 Second deceleration time 2D AD 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
46 Second torque boost 2E AE 0 ○ × × × × ○ ○
47
48
Second V/F (base frequency)
Second stall prevention operation level
2F
30
AF
B0
0
0
○
○
×
○
×
×
×
×
×
×
○
○
○
○
17
51 Second electronic thermal O/L relay 33 B3 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
52 Operation panel main monitor selection 34 B4 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
53 Frequency / rotation speed unit switchover 35 B5 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 18
54 FM terminal function selection 36 B6 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
55 Frequency monitoring reference 37 B7 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
56 Current monitoring reference 38 B8 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 19
57 Restart coasting time 39 B9 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
58 Restart cushion time 3A BA 0 ○ ○ × × × ○ ○
59 Remote function selection 3B BB 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
60 Energy saving control selection 3C BC 0 ○ ○ × × × ○ ○ 20
61 Reference current 3D BD 0 ○ ○ ○ × × ○ ○
62 Reference value at acceleration 3E BE 0 ○ ○ ○ × × ○ ○
63 Reference value at deceleration 3F BF 0 ○ ○ ○ × × ○ ○
65 Retry selection 41 C1 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Stall prevention operation reduction starting
66 42 C2 0 ○ ○ × × × ○ ○
frequency
67 Number of retries at fault occurrence 43 C3 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
68 Retry waiting time 44 C4 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
69 Retry count display erase 45 C5 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
70 Special regenerative brake duty 46 C6 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
71 Applied motor 47 C7 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
72 PWM frequency selection 48 C8 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
73 Analog input selection 49 C9 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
74 Input filter time constant 4A CA 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU
75 4B CB 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
stop selection
77 Parameter write selection 4D CD 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
78 Reverse rotation prevention selection 4E CE 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
79 Operation mode selection 4F CF 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
80 Motor capacity 50 D0 0 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
81 Number of motor poles 51 D1 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
82 Motor excitation current 52 D2 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ × × ○
83 Rated motor voltage 53 D3 0 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
84 Rated motor frequency 54 D4 0 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Speed control gain (Advanced magnetic flux
89 59 D9 0 × ○ × × × × ○
vector)

17. Appendix
17.3 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
407
 Instruction
Control method*2 Parameter
code*1
Sensorless PM

All clear*3
Extended
Pr. Name

Magnetic flux

Clear*3
Write

V/F
Read

Torque
Speed

Speed
90 Motor constant (R1) 5A DA 0 × ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
91 Motor constant (R2) 5B DB 0 × ○ ○ ○ × × ○
92 Motor constant (L1)/d-axis inductance (Ld) 5C DC 0 × ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
93 Motor constant (L2)/q-axis inductance (Lq) 5D DD 0 × ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
94 Motor constant (X) 5E DE 0 × ○ ○ ○ × × ○
95 Online auto tuning selection 5F DF 0 × ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○
96 Auto tuning setting/status 60 E0 0 × ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
*4
117 PU communication station number 11 91 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4
118 PU communication speed 12 92 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
119 PU communication stop bit length / data length 13 93 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
120 PU communication parity check 14 94 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
*4
121 PU communication retry count 15 95 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4
122 PU communication check time interval 16 96 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
*4
123 PU communication waiting time setting 17 97 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4
124 PU communication CR/LF selection 18 98 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 19 99 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 1A 9A 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
127 PID control automatic switchover frequency 1B 9B 1 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
128 PID action selection 1C 9C 1 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
129 PID proportional band 1D 9D 1 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
130 PID integral time 1E 9E 1 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
131 PID upper limit 1F 9F 1 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
132 PID lower limit 20 A0 1 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
133 PID action set point 21 A1 1 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
134 PID differential time 22 A2 1 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
145 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
Acceleration/deceleration time switching
147 2F AF 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
frequency
150 Output current detection level 32 B2 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
151 Output current detection signal delay time 33 B3 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
152 Zero current detection level 34 B4 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
153 Zero current detection time 35 B5 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Voltage reduction selection during stall prevention
154 36 B6 1 ○ ○ × × × ○ ○
operation
156 Stall prevention operation selection 38 B8 1 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
157 OL signal output timer 39 B9 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
158 AM terminal function selection 3A BA 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
160 User group read selection 00 80 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection 01 81 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
162 02 82 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
selection
165 Stall prevention operation level for restart 05 85 2 ○ ○ × × × ○ ○
166 Output current detection signal retention time 06 86 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
167 Output current detection operation selection 07 87 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
168
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
169
170 Watt-hour meter clear 0A 8A 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
171 Operation hour meter clear 0B 8B 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
172 User group registered display/batch clear 0C 8C 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
173 User group registration 0D 8D 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
174 User group clear 0E 8E 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
178 STF/DI0 terminal function selection 12 92 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
179 STR/DI1 terminal function selection 13 93 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○

408 17. Appendix

17.3 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
 Instruction
Control method*2 Parameter
code*1
Sensorless PM 11

All clear*3
Extended
Pr. Name

Magnetic flux

Clear*3
Write

V/F
Read

Torque
Speed

Speed
12
180 RL terminal function selection 14 94 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
181 RM terminal function selection 15 95 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
182 RH terminal function selection 16 96 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ 13
183 MRS terminal function selection 17 97 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
184 RES terminal function selection 18 98 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
185 NET X1 input selection 19 99 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
186 NET X2 input selection 1A 9A 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ 14
187 NET X3 input selection 1B 9B 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
188 NET X4 input selection 1C 9C 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
189 NET X5 input selection 1D 9D 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ 15
190 RUN terminal function selection 1E 9E 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
191 FU terminal function selection 1F 9F 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
192 ABC terminal function selection 20 A0 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
193 NET Y1 output selection 21 A1 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ 16
194 NET Y2 output selection 22 A2 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
195 NET Y3 output selection 23 A3 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
196
198
NET Y4 output selection
Display corrosion level
24
26
A4
A6
2
2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
×
×
○
×
17
232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8) 28 A8 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
233 Multi-speed setting (speed 9) 29 A9 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
234 Multi-speed setting (speed 10) 2A AA 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 18
235 Multi-speed setting (speed 11) 2B AB 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
236 Multi-speed setting (speed 12) 2C AC 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
237
238
Multi-speed setting (speed 13)
Multi-speed setting (speed 14)
2D
2E
AD
AE
2
2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
19
239 Multi-speed setting (speed 15) 2F AF 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
240 Soft-PWM operation selection 30 B0 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
241 Analog input display unit switchover 31 B1 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 20
244 Cooling fan operation selection 34 B4 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
245 Rated slip 35 B5 2 ○ × × × × ○ ○
246 Slip compensation time constant 36 B6 2 ○ × × × × ○ ○
Constant output range slip compensation
247 37 B7 2 ○ × × × × ○ ○
selection
249 Earth (ground) fault detection at start 39 B9 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
250 Stop selection 3A BA 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
251 Output phase loss protection selection 3B BB 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
255 Life alarm status display 3F BF 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
256 Inrush current limit circuit life display 40 C0 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
257 Control circuit capacitor life display 41 C1 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
258 Main circuit capacitor life display 42 C2 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
259 Main circuit capacitor life measuring 43 C3 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
260 PWM frequency automatic switchover 44 C4 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
261 Power failure stop selection 45 C5 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
267 Terminal 4 input selection 4B CB 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
268 Monitor decimal digits selection 4C CC 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
269 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
270 Stop-on-contact control selection 4E CE 2 ○ ○ ○ × × ○ ○
Stop-on contact excitation current low-speed
275 53 D3 2 × ○ ○ × × ○ ○
scaling factor
276 PWM carrier frequency at stop-on contact 54 D4 2 × ○ ○ × × ○ ○
277 Stall prevention operation current switchover 55 D5 2 ○ ○ × × × ○ ○
278 Brake opening frequency 56 D6 2 × ○ ○ × × ○ ○
279 Brake opening current 57 D7 2 × ○ ○ × × ○ ○
280 Brake opening current detection time 58 D8 2 × ○ ○ × × ○ ○

17. Appendix
17.3 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
409
 Instruction
Control method*2 Parameter
code*1
Sensorless PM

All clear*3
Extended
Pr. Name

Magnetic flux

Clear*3
Write

V/F
Read

Torque
Speed

Speed
281 Brake operation time at start 59 D9 2 × ○ ○ × × ○ ○
282 Brake operation frequency 5A DA 2 × ○ ○ × × ○ ○
283 Brake operation time at stop 5B DB 2 × Δ × × × ○ ○
285 Speed deviation excess detection frequency 5D DD 2 × × × × Δ ○ ○
286 Droop gain 5E DE 2 × ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
287 Droop filter time constant 5F DF 2 × × ○ × ○ ○ ○
289 Inverter output terminal filter 61 E1 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
290 Monitor negative output selection 62 E2 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration 64 E4 2 Δ Δ Δ × × ○ ○
293 Acceleration/deceleration separate selection 65 E5 2 ○ ○ ○ × × ○ ○
295 Frequency change increment amount setting 67 E7 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
296 Password lock level 68 E8 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
297 Password lock/unlock 69 E9 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ *5 ○
○
298 Frequency search gain 6A EA 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ × × ○
299 Rotation direction detection selection at restarting 6B EB 2 ○ ○ ○ × × ○ ○
300 BCD input bias 00 80 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
301 BCD input gain 01 81 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
302 BIN input bias 02 82 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
303 BIN input gain 03 83 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Digital input and analog input compensation
304 04 84 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
enable/disable selection
305 Read timing operation selection 05 85 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
306 Analog output signal selection 06 86 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
307 Setting for zero analog output 07 87 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
308 Setting for maximum analog output 08 88 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Analog output signal voltage/current
309 09 89 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
switchover
310 Analog meter voltage output selection 0A 8A 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
311 Setting for zero analog meter voltage output 0B 8B 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Setting for maximum analog meter voltage
312 0C 8C 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
output
313 DO0 output selection 0D 8D 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
314 DO1 output selection 0E 8E 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
315 DO2 output selection 0F 8F 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
316 DO3 output selection 10 90 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
317 DO4 output selection 11 91 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
318 DO5 output selection 12 92 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
319 DO6 output selection 13 93 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
320 RA1 output selection 14 94 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
321 RA2 output selection 15 95 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
322 RA3 output selection 16 96 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
323 AM0 0V adjustment 17 97 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
324 AM1 0mA adjustment 18 98 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
329 Digital input unit selection 1D 9D 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
338 Communication operation command source 26 A6 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
339 Communication speed command source 27 A7 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
340 Communication startup mode selection 28 A8 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
342 Communication EEPROM write selection 2A AA 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
343 Communication error count 2B AB 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
349 Communication reset selection 31 B1 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
374 Overspeed detection level 4A CA 3 × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

410 17. Appendix

17.3 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
 Instruction
Control method*2 Parameter
code*1
Sensorless PM 11

All clear*3
Extended
Pr. Name

Magnetic flux

Clear*3
Write

V/F
Read

Torque
Speed

Speed
12
390 % setting reference frequency 5A DA 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
414 PLC function operation selection 0E 8E 4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
415 Inverter operation lock mode setting 0F 8F 4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 13
416 Pre-scale function selection 10 90 4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
417 Pre-scale setting value 11 91 4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
418
442
Extension output terminal filter
Default gateway address 1
12
2A
92
AA
4
4
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
×
○ *4
○
○*4
14
443 Default gateway address 2 2B AB 4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
444 2C AC 4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
445
Default gateway address 3
Default gateway address 4 2D AD 4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
15
447 Digital torque command bias 2F AF 4 × × × ○ × ○ ○
448 Digital torque command gain 30 B0 4 × × × ○ × ○ ○
450 Second applied motor 32 B2 4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 16
451 Second motor control method selection 33 B3 4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
453 Second motor capacity 35 B5 4 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
454 Number of second motor poles 36 B6 4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 17
455 Second motor excitation current 37 B7 4 ○ ○ ○ ○ × × ○
456 Rated second motor voltage 38 B8 4 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
457 Rated second motor frequency 39 B9 4 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
458 Second motor constant (R1) 3A BA 4 × ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ 18
459 Second motor constant (R2) 3B BB 4 × ○ ○ ○ × × ○
Second motor constant (L1) / d-axis inductance
460 3C BC 4 × ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
(Ld)
Second motor constant (L2) / q-axis inductance
19
461 3D BD 4 × ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
(Lq)
462 Second motor constant (X) 3E BE 4 × ○ ○ ○ × × ○
463 Second motor auto tuning setting/status 3F BF 4 × ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ 20
495 Remote output selection 5F DF 4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
496 Remote output data 1 60 E0 4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
497 Remote output data 2 61 E1 4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
498 PLC function flash memory clear 62 E2 4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
500 Communication error execution waiting time 00 80 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Communication error occurrence count
501 01 81 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
display
502 Stop mode selection at communication error 02 82 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
503 Maintenance timer 03 83 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
504 Maintenance timer warning output set time 04 84 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
505 Speed setting reference 05 85 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Display estimated main circuit capacitor residual
506 06 86 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
life
507 Display ABC relay contact life 07 87 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
509 Display power cycle life 09 89 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
541 Frequency command sign selection 29 A9 5 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○*4 ○*4
542 Communication station number (CC-Link) 2A AA 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
543 Baud rate selection (CC-Link) 2B AB 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
544 CC-Link extended setting 2C AC 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
547 USB communication station number 2F AF 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
548 USB communication check time interval 30 B0 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
549 Protocol selection 31 B1 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
550 NET mode operation command source selection 32 B2 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
*4
551 PU mode operation command source selection 33 B3 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4
553 PID deviation limit 35 B5 5 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○

17. Appendix
17.3 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
411
 Instruction
Control method*2 Parameter
code*1
Sensorless PM

All clear*3
Extended
Pr. Name

Magnetic flux

Clear*3
Write

V/F
Read

Torque
Speed

Speed
554 PID signal operation selection 36 B6 5 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
555 Current average time 37 B7 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
556 Data output mask time 38 B8 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Current average value monitor signal output
557 39 B9 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
reference current
560 Second frequency search gain 3C BC 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ × × ○
563 Energization time carrying-over times 3F BF 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
564 Operating time carrying-over times 40 C0 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
569 Second motor speed control gain 45 C5 5 × ○ × × × × ○
570 Multiple rating setting 46 C6 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
571 Holding time at a start 47 C7 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○
574 Second motor online auto tuning 4A CA 5 × ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○
575 Output interruption detection time 4B CB 5 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
576 Output interruption detection level 4C CC 5 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
577 Output interruption cancel level 4D CD 5 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
592 Traverse function selection 5C DC 5 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
593 Maximum amplitude amount 5D DD 5 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
Amplitude compensation amount during
594 5E DE 5 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
deceleration
Amplitude compensation amount during
595 5F DF 5 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
acceleration
596 Amplitude acceleration time 60 E0 5 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
597 Amplitude deceleration time 61 E1 5 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
609 PID set point/deviation input selection 09 89 6 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
610 PID measured value input selection 0A 8A 6 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
611 Acceleration time at a restart 0B 8B 6 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
Inverter output fault detection enable/disable
631 1F 9F 6 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
selection
639 Brake opening current selection 27 A7 6 × ○ ○ × × ○ ○
640 Brake operation frequency selection 28 A8 6 × × ○ × × ○ ○
653 Speed smoothing control 35 B5 6 ○ ○ × × × ○ ○
654 Speed smoothing cutoff frequency 36 B6 6 ○ ○ × × × ○ ○
665 Regeneration avoidance frequency gain 41 C1 6 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
SF-PR slip amount adjustment operation
673 49 C9 6 ○ × × × × ○ ○
selection
674 SF-PR slip amount adjustment gain 4A CA 6 ○ × × × × ○ ○
675 User parameter auto storage function selection 4B CB 6 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
699 Input terminal filter 63 E3 6 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
702 Maximum motor frequency 02 82 7 × × × × ○ ○ ○
706 Induced voltage constant (phi f) 06 86 7 × × × × ○ × ○
707 Motor inertia (integer) 07 87 7 × × ○ × ○ ○ ○
711 Motor Ld decay ratio 0B 8B 7 × × × × ○ × ○
712 Motor Lq decay ratio 0C 8C 7 × × × × ○ × ○
Starting resistance tuning compensation
717 11 91 7 × ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
coefficient 1
Starting resistance tuning compensation
720 14 94 7 × ○ ○ ○ × × ○
coefficient
Starting magnetic pole position detection pulse
721 15 95 7 × × × × ○ × ○
width
724 Motor inertia (exponent) 18 98 7 × × ○ × ○ ○ ○
725 Motor protection current level 19 99 7 × × × × ○ ○ ○
*4
728 Device instance number (Upper 3 digits) 1C 9C 7 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4
*4
729 Device instance number (Lower 4 digits) 1D 9D 7 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4
Starting resistance tuning compensation
737 25 A5 7 × ○ ○ ○ × × ○
coefficient 2

412 17. Appendix

17.3 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
 Instruction
Control method*2 Parameter
code*1
Sensorless PM 11

All clear*3
Extended
Pr. Name

Magnetic flux

Clear*3
Write

V/F
Read

Torque
Speed

Speed
12
738 Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f) 26 A6 7 × × × × ○ × ○
739 Second motor Ld decay ratio 27 A7 7 × × × × ○ × ○
740 Second motor Lq decay ratio 28 A8 7 × × × × ○ × ○ 13
Second motor starting resistance tuning
741 29 A9 7 × ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
compensation coefficient 1
742 Second motor magnetic pole detection pulse width 2A AA 7 × × × × ○ × ○
743 Second motor maximum frequency 2B AB 7 × × × × ○ ○ ○ 14
744 Second motor inertia (integer) 2C AC 7 × × ○ × ○ ○ ○
745 Second motor inertia (exponent) 2D AD 7 × × ○ × ○ ○ ○
746
759
Second motor protection current level
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
2E AE 7 × × × × ○ ○ ○
15
774 Operation panel monitor selection 1 4A CA 7 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
775 Operation panel monitor selection 2 4B CB 7 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
776 Operation panel monitor selection 3 4C CC 7 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 16
779 Operation frequency during communication error 4F CF 7 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
791 Acceleration time in low-speed range 5B DB 7 × × × × ○ ○ ○
792
800
Deceleration time in low-speed range
Control method selection
5C
00
DC
80
7
8
×
○
×
○
×
○
×
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
17
801 Output limit level 01 81 8 × × ○ ○ × ○ ○
Constant output range torque characteristic
803 03 83 8 × × ○ ○ × ○ ○
selection 18
804 Torque command source selection 04 84 8 × × × ○ × ○ ○
805 Torque command value (RAM) 05 85 8 × × × ○ × ○ ○
806 Torque command value (RAM, EEPROM) 06 86 8 × × × ○ × ○ ○
807 Speed limit selection 07 87 8 × × × ○ × ○ ○ 19
808 Speed limit 08 88 8 × × × ○ × ○ ○
809 Reverse-side speed limit 09 89 8 × × × ○ × ○ ○
810 Torque limit input method selection 0A 8A 8 × × ○ × ○ ○ ○ 20
811 Set resolution switchover 0B 8B 8 × × ○ × ○ ○ ○
812 Torque limit level (regeneration) 0C 8C 8 × × ○ × ○ ○ ○
813 Torque limit level (3rd quadrant) 0D 8D 8 × × ○ × ○ ○ ○
814 Torque limit level (4th quadrant) 0E 8E 8 × × ○ × ○ ○ ○
815 Torque limit level 2 0F 8F 8 × × ○ × ○ ○ ○
816 Torque limit level during acceleration 10 90 8 × × ○ × ○ ○ ○
817 Torque limit level during deceleration 11 91 8 × × ○ × ○ ○ ○
820 Speed control P gain 1 14 94 8 × × ○ × ○ ○ ○
821 Speed control integral time 1 15 95 8 × × ○ × ○ ○ ○
822 Speed setting filter 1 16 96 8 × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Torque control P gain 1 (current loop proportional
824 18 98 8 × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
gain)
Torque control integral time 1 (current loop integral
825 19 99 8 × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
time)
826 Torque setting filter 1 1A 9A 8 × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
830 Speed control P gain 2 1E 9E 8 × × ○ × ○ ○ ○
831 Speed control integral time 2 1F 9F 8 × × ○ × ○ ○ ○
832 Speed setting filter 2 20 A0 8 × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Torque control P gain 2 (current loop proportional
834 22 A2 8 × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
gain)
Torque control integral time 2 (current loop integral
835 23 A3 8 × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
time)
836 Torque setting filter 2 24 A4 8 × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
849 Analog input offset adjustment 31 B1 8 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
850 Brake operation selection 32 B2 8 × × ○ ○ × ○ ○
853 Speed deviation time 35 B5 8 × × × × Δ ○ ○
858 Terminal 4 function assignment 3A BA 8 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○

17. Appendix
17.3 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
413
 Instruction
Control method*2 Parameter
code*1
Sensorless PM

All clear*3
Extended
Pr. Name

Magnetic flux

Clear*3
Write

V/F
Read

Torque
Speed

Speed
859 Torque current/Rated PM motor current 3B BB 8 × ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
Second motor torque current/Rated PM motor
860 3C BC 8 × ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
current
864 Torque detection 40 C0 8 × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
865 Low speed detection 41 C1 8 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
866 Torque monitoring reference 42 C2 8 × ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
867 AM output filter 43 C3 8 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
870 Speed detection hysteresis 46 C6 8 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
872 Input phase loss protection selection 48 C8 8 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
874 OLT level setting 4A CA 8 × × ○ × ○ ○ ○
882 Regeneration avoidance operation selection 52 D2 8 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
883 Regeneration avoidance operation level 53 D3 8 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
Regeneration avoidance compensation frequency
885 55 D5 8 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
limit value
886 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain 56 D6 8 ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
888 Free parameter 1 58 D8 8 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
889 Free parameter 2 59 D9 8 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times 5B DB 8 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
892 Load factor 5C DC 8 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
893 Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity) 5D DD 8 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Control selection during commercial power-supply
894 5E DE 8 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
operation
895 Power saving rate reference value 5F DF 8 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
896 Power unit cost 60 E0 8 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
897 Power saving monitor average time 61 E1 8 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
898 Power saving cumulative monitor clear 62 E2 8 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
899 Operation time rate (estimated value) 63 E3 8 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
C0 FM terminal calibration 5C DC 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
C1 AM terminal calibration 5D DD 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency 5E DE 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
C3 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 5E DE 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency 5F DF 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
C4 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 5F DF 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency 60 E0 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
C6 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 60 E0 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency 61 E1 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
C7 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 61 E1 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
C38 Terminal 4 bias command (torque/magnetic flux) 20 A0 9 × × ○ ○ ○ × ○
C39 Terminal 4 bias (torque/magnetic flux) 20 A0 9 × × ○ ○ ○ × ○
C40 Terminal 4 gain command (torque/magnetic flux) 21 A1 9 × × ○ ○ ○ × ○
C41 Terminal 4 gain (torque/magnetic flux) 21 A1 9 × × ○ ○ ○ × ○
C42 PID display bias coefficient 22 A2 9 ○ ○ ○ × ○ × ○
C43 PID display bias analog value 22 A2 9 ○ ○ ○ × ○ × ○
C44 PID display gain coefficient 23 A3 9 ○ ○ ○ × ○ × ○
C45 PID display gain analog value 23 A3 9 ○ ○ ○ × ○ × ○
990 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
991 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
Operation panel setting dial push monitor
992 5C DC 9 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
selection
997 Fault initiation 61 E1 9 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
998 PM parameter initialization 62 E2 9 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
999 Automatic parameter setting 63 E3 9 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
1000 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
1002 Lq tuning target current adjustment coefficient 02 82 A × × × × ○ ○ ○

414 17. Appendix

17.3 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
 Instruction
Control method*2 Parameter
code*1
Sensorless PM 11

All clear*3
Extended
Pr. Name

Magnetic flux

Clear*3
Write

V/F
Read

Torque
Speed

Speed
12
1006 Clock (year) 06 86 A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
1007 Clock (month, day) 07 87 A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
1008 Clock (hour, minute) 08 88 A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × × 13
1015 Integral stop selection at limited frequency 0F 8F A ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
1020 Trace operation selection 14 94 A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1022 Sampling cycle 16 96 A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1023 Number of analog channels 17 97 A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 14
1024 Sampling auto start 18 98 A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1025 Trigger mode selection 19 99 A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1026 Number of sampling before trigger 1A 9A A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 15
1027 Analog source selection (1ch) 1B 9B A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1028 Analog source selection (2ch) 1C 9C A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1029 Analog source selection (3ch) 1D 9D A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1030 Analog source selection (4ch) 1E 9E A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 16
1031 Analog source selection (5ch) 1F 9F A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1032 Analog source selection (6ch) 20 A0 A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1033
1034
Analog source selection (7ch)
Analog source selection (8ch)
21
22
A1
A2
A
A
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
17
1035 Analog trigger channel 23 A3 A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1036 Analog trigger operation selection 24 A4 A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1037 Analog trigger level 25 A5 A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 18
1038 Digital source selection (1ch) 26 A6 A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1039 Digital source selection (2ch) 27 A7 A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1040
1041
Digital source selection (3ch)
Digital source selection (4ch)
28
29
A8
A9
A
A
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
19
1042 Digital source selection (5ch) 2A AA A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1043 Digital source selection (6ch) 2B AB A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1044 Digital source selection (7ch) 2C AC A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 20
1045 Digital source selection (8ch) 2D AD A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1046 Digital trigger channel 2E AE A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1047 Digital trigger operation selection 2F AF A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1103 Deceleration time at emergency stop 03 83 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1106 Torque monitor filter 06 86 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1107 Running speed monitor filter 07 87 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1108 Excitation current monitor filter 08 88 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
*4
1124 Station number in inverter-to-inverter link 18 98 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4
Number of inverters in inverter-to-inverter link
1125 19 99 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
system
1150 PLC function user parameters 1 32 B2 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1151 PLC function user parameters 2 33 B3 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1152 PLC function user parameters 3 34 B4 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1153 PLC function user parameters 4 35 B5 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1154 PLC function user parameters 5 36 B6 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1155 PLC function user parameters 6 37 B7 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1156 PLC function user parameters 7 38 B8 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1157 PLC function user parameters 8 39 B9 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1158 PLC function user parameters 9 3A BA B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1159 PLC function user parameters 10 3B BB B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1160 PLC function user parameters 11 3C BC B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1161 PLC function user parameters 12 3D BD B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1162 PLC function user parameters 13 3E BE B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1163 PLC function user parameters 14 3F BF B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1164 PLC function user parameters 15 40 C0 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1165 PLC function user parameters 16 41 C1 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

17. Appendix
17.3 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
415
 Instruction
Control method*2 Parameter
code*1
Sensorless PM

All clear*3
Extended
Pr. Name

Magnetic flux

Clear*3
Write

V/F
Read

Torque
Speed

Speed
1166 PLC function user parameters 17 42 C2 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1167 PLC function user parameters 18 43 C3 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1168 PLC function user parameters 19 44 C4 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1169 PLC function user parameters 20 45 C5 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1170 PLC function user parameters 21 46 C6 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1171 PLC function user parameters 22 47 C7 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1172 PLC function user parameters 23 48 C8 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1173 PLC function user parameters 24 49 C9 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1174 PLC function user parameters 25 4A CA B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1175 PLC function user parameters 26 4B CB B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1176 PLC function user parameters 27 4C CC B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1177 PLC function user parameters 28 4D CD B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1178 PLC function user parameters 29 4E CE B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1179 PLC function user parameters 30 4F CF B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1180 PLC function user parameters 31 50 D0 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1181 PLC function user parameters 32 51 D1 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1182 PLC function user parameters 33 52 D2 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1183 PLC function user parameters 34 53 D3 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1184 PLC function user parameters 35 54 D4 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1185 PLC function user parameters 36 55 D5 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1186 PLC function user parameters 37 56 D6 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1187 PLC function user parameters 38 57 D7 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1188 PLC function user parameters 39 58 D8 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1189 PLC function user parameters 40 59 D9 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1190 PLC function user parameters 41 5A DA B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1191 PLC function user parameters 42 5B DB B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1192 PLC function user parameters 43 5C DC B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1193 PLC function user parameters 44 5D DD B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1194 PLC function user parameters 45 5E DE B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1195 PLC function user parameters 46 5F DF B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1196 PLC function user parameters 47 60 E0 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1197 PLC function user parameters 48 61 E1 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1198 PLC function user parameters 49 62 E2 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1199 PLC function user parameters 50 63 E3 B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1200 AM output offset calibration 00 80 C ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ○
Inverter identification enable/disable
1399 63 E3 D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
selection
1412 Motor induced voltage constant (phi f) exponent 0C 8C E × × × × ○ × ○
Second motor induced voltage constant (phi f)
1413 0D 8D E × × × × ○ × ○
exponent
1424 Ethernet communication network number 18 98 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
*4
1425 Ethernet communication station number 19 99 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4
1426 Link speed and duplex mode selection 1A 9A E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
*4
1427 Ethernet function selection 1 1B 9B E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4
1428 Ethernet function selection 2 1C 9C E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
1429 Ethernet function selection 3 1D 9D E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
1430 Ethernet function selection 4 1E 9E E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
Ethernet signal loss detection function
1431 1F 9F E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
selection
1432 Ethernet communication check time interval 20 A0 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
1434 Ethernet IP address 1 22 A2 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
1435 Ethernet IP address 2 23 A3 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4

416 17. Appendix

17.3 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
 Instruction
Control method*2 Parameter
code*1
Sensorless PM 11

All clear*3
Extended
Pr. Name

Magnetic flux

Clear*3
Write

V/F
Read

Torque
Speed

Speed
12
1436 Ethernet IP address 3 24 A4 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
1437 Ethernet IP address 4 25 A5 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
1438 Subnet mask 1 26 A6 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
13
1439 Subnet mask 2 27 A7 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
1440 Subnet mask 3 28 A8 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
1441 Subnet mask 4 29 A9 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4 14
1442 Ethernet IP filter address 1 2A AA E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ *4 *4
○ ○
1443 Ethernet IP filter address 2 2B AB E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
1444 Ethernet IP filter address 3 2C AC E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ *4
○*4 15
1445 Ethernet IP filter address 4 2D AD E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
Ethernet IP filter address 2 range
○*4 ○*4
1446
specification
2E AE E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
16
Ethernet IP filter address 3 range *4 *4
1447 2F AF E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
specification
Ethernet IP filter address 4 range
1448
specification
30 B0 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4 17
Ethernet command source selection IP address
1449 31 B1 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
1

1450
Ethernet command source selection IP address
2
32 B2 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4 18
Ethernet command source selection IP address
1451 33 B3 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
3

1452
Ethernet command source selection IP address
34 B4 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
19
4
Ethernet command source selection IP address 3
1453 35 B5 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
range specification
Ethernet command source selection IP address 4 20
1454 36 B6 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
range specification
1455 Keepalive time 37 B7 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
*4
1456 Network diagnosis selection 38 B8 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4
Extended setting for Ethernet signal loss detection
1457 39 B9 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*4 ○*4
function selection
1480 Load characteristics measurement mode 50 D0 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1481 Load characteristics load reference 1 51 D1 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1482 Load characteristics load reference 2 52 D2 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1483 Load characteristics load reference 3 53 D3 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1484 Load characteristics load reference 4 54 D4 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1485 Load characteristics load reference 5 55 D5 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1486 Load characteristics maximum frequency 56 D6 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1487 Load characteristics minimum frequency 57 D7 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1488 Upper limit warning detection width 58 D8 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1489 Lower limit warning detection width 59 D9 E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1490 Upper limit fault detection width 5A DA E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1491 Lower limit fault detection width 5B DB E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Load status detection signal delay time / load
1492 5C DC E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
reference measurement waiting time

17. Appendix
17.3 Parameters (functions) and instruction codes under different control methods
417
 Revisions
*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
*
Print date Manual number Revision
Dec. 2019 IB(NA)-0600868ENG-A First edition

418 IB-0600868ENG-A
 INVERTER
INVERTER
FR-E800

FR-E800
Instruction Manual (Function)
Compact, high functionality inverters

FR-E820-0008(0.1K) to 0330(7.5K)
FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to 0170(7.5K)
FR-E860-0017(0.75K) to 0120(7.5K)
FR-E820-0008(0.1K) to 0330(7.5K)-E
FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to 0170(7.5K)-E
FR-E860-0017(0.75K) to 0120(7.5K)-E

Instruction Manual (Function)

HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN

IB(NA)-0600868ENG-A(1912)MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.

A